101905 Catalog

101905-Catalog 101905-Catalog 101905-Catalog 786209 Batch6 unilog cesco-content

101905-Catalog 101905-Catalog 101905-Catalog 785991 Batch6 unilog cesco-content

2014-07-30

: Pdf 101905-Catalog 101905-Catalog 786358 Batch6 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1060

Download101905-Catalog
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
A Global Leader in Innovative...
Wire & Cable Management • Cable Protection Systems
Power Connection & Control • Safety Technology

Wire & Cable Management

Healthcare

Choose Thomas & Betts and connect
to the power you need.
For over 100 years, Thomas & Betts has successfully applied innovative
design and manufacturing techniques to meet the changing needs of the
marketplace. Today, we offer more than 100,000 electrical components
and systems to terminate, connect, fasten, protect and identify wires,
components and raceway. Our vast offering makes us one of the largest
and best sources of electrical components in North America.
Wastewater Treatment

At T&B, we’re committed to:
•	 Products which provide solutions to your electrical needs
•	 Convenience of single-order, single-shipment
to your site for thousands of stocking items
•	 Expert local point of contact for clear, consistent
information regarding training, codes and standards
•	 Quality brands that have proven themselves over time
•	 Inventive design and manufacture of problem-solving products
•	 Offering a best-of-class warranty and returns policy
•	 Uniform carton labeling with additional bar-coding
for convenient inventory management

Food and Beverage

•	 Nationwide network of stocking electrical distributors
•	 Outstanding customer service capability
•	 Supplying you with the right products, convenient
packaging, on-time delivery and competitive pricing
We deliver the solutions that make your job easier and offer the power to bring
it all together in one package. Call us today and let us help you profit from
sourcing your electrical products from the leader, Thomas & Betts.

Oil and Gas

Wire & Cable Management
Access the Full Range of
Thomas & Betts Electrical Solutions.
Other Thomas & Betts Catalogs...

Contents
Vertical Market Solutions.................................................... ii–vii
T&B Services, Online Support & Online Tools................... viii–xii
New Products............................................................NP-1–NP-8

Boxes & Covers

Cable Protection Systems — CAT2
•	 Industrial Conduit & Fittings
•	 Flexible Conduit & Fittings
•	 PVC-Coated Conduit & Fittings
•	 Commercial Conduit & Fittings

Steel City® Metallic Boxes & Covers............................ A-1–A-66
Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes.................................... A-67–A-120
Steel City® Floor Boxes.......................................... A-121–A-196
Carlon® Floor Boxes............................................... A-197–A-210
Red•Dot® Weatherproof Boxes & Covers.............. A-211–A-264
Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes................... A-265–A-326
Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic
Tubing (ENT) System............................................. A-327–A-354

Metal Framing & Cable Tray
Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System.................. B-1–B-104
Superstrut® Metal Framing System....................... B-105–B-220
Steel City® Hangers, Clamps & Fasteners............. B-221–B-258
T&B® Cable Tray.................................................... B-259–B-446

Power Connection & Control — CAT3
•	 Connectors & Grounding
•	 Wire Termination
•	 Power & High Voltage
•	 Power Quality

Fastening Systems
Ty-Rap® High-Performance Cable Ties,
Tools & Accessories.................................................... C-1–C-60
Catamount® General-Purpose
Ties & Accessories.................................................... C-61–C-66
Wiring Duct & Wiring Trough..................................... C-67–C-92

Identification & Supplies
EZCODE® Identification Products.................................D-1–D-40
Catamount® Electrician’s Supplies............................D-41–D-52
Index......................................................................IDX-1–IDX-92

Safety Technology — CAT4
•	 Hazardous Location Lighting
•	 Emergency Lighting
•	 Surge Protection

Vertical Market Solutions
Single- and Multi-Family Housing

Commercial and Institutional Facilities

At Thomas & Betts, residential
construction goes beyond the simple
house on the corner. From a single-family
home to a multi-story apartment complex
or high-rise condominium, we understand
the dynamic challenges faced in the
residential market and are committed to
providing innovative electrical solutions
that promote sustainability, reduce overall
project costs and provide a safe working
and living environment.

Thomas & Betts understands the
challenges faced in commercial and
institutional projects and is committed
to providing innovative electrical solutions
that not only reduce overall project
costs, but also increase safety, promote
sustainability and even improve cash
flow. Whether it’s labor-saving rough-in
components, custom-designed electrical
prefabrication systems, online cloud-based
design tools or even our world-class
logistics, Thomas & Betts can help bring
commercial and institutional projects in
on time, within budget and profitably.

Technology and regulatory evolution is
driving change throughout our living
areas, and Thomas & Betts is focused
on providing solutions that not only solve
current real-world problems, but offer
the flexibility to accommodate future
demands.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Single- and Multi-Family
Housing brochure, GM-8330.

ii

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Commercial and Institutional
Facilities brochure, GM-8333.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Vertical Market Solutions
Food and Beverage Processing Industry

Metals and Mining Industry

At Thomas & Betts, we understand the
challenges you face in the food and
beverage processing industry today.
We’re focused on providing electrical
solutions that address the critical issues
in every area of your operation, so you
can focus on plant sustainability, cost,
quality, flexibility, food and personnel
safety and regulatory challenges across
the production cycle. Our family of
electrical solutions matches specific
application criteria from start to finish
inside food processing areas, assuring
the quality and reliability of your electrical
system throughout your facility, from
incoming raw materials through shipping
of finished goods. And with the industry’s
most efficient distribution system, we’re
prepared to meet your ongoing MRO, OEM
and construction needs down the road.

Thomas & Betts’ long-term presence
in the utility and industrial markets
continues to drive the development of
innovative electrical products that meet
the stringent application requirements
of metals and mining operations and
perform over extended lifecycles.
Our solutions are tailored to help you
optimize operating costs and improve
return on capital investments while
protecting the environment and ensuring
safety to workers and production assets.
Our global network and fast logistics are
in place to support your MRO, OEM and
construction activities around the world.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Food and Beverage Processing
Facilities brochure, GM-8306.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for the Metals and Mining
Industry brochure, GM-8332.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

iii

Vertical Market Solutions

iv

Pulp and Paper Processing Industry

Chemical Industry

At Thomas & Betts, we understand the
challenges you face in the pulp and
paper processing industry today. We’re
focused on providing electrical solutions
that address the critical issues in every
area of your operation, so you can focus
on plant sustainability, personnel safety,
cost, quality, flexibility and regulatory
challenges across the production cycle.
Our family of electrical solutions matches
specific application criteria from start to
finish inside processing areas, assuring
the quality and reliability of your electrical
system throughout your facility, from
incoming raw materials through shipping
of finished goods. And with the industry’s
most efficient distribution system, we’re
prepared to meet your ongoing MRO,
OEM and construction needs today.

Thomas & Betts designs, manufactures
and supplies solutions for electrical
systems. In order to be profitable running
special batches or continuous commodity
compounds, you need reliable, robust
and cost-effective equipment. Your
systems need to operate at peak
performance. That’s why we invest
considerable resources towards R&D,
training and channel management.
Our products solve real-world problems.
Thomas & Betts offers the industry’s
most advanced materials distribution
system, and our commitment shows
in our unmatched products, unequaled
service and loyalty from end-users,
OEMs and contractors.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Pulp and Paper Processing
Facilities brochure, GM-8335.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for the Chemical
Industry brochure, GM-8336.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Vertical Market Solutions
Oil and Gas Industry

Water/Wastewater Treatment

Thomas & Betts designs, manufactures
and supplies technically advanced products
for electrical systems. Profitable drilling,
extracting, processing, transporting and
dispensing operations require reliable,
robust and cost-effective equipment.
That’s why we invest extensive amounts
on R&D, training and channel management.
Our solutions solve real-world problems.
Thomas & Betts offers the industry’s most
advanced materials distribution system,
and our commitment shows in our
unmatched products, unequaled service
and loyalty from end-users and OEMs.

At Thomas & Betts, we’re focused on
providing products that address the issues
in every area of your wastewater treatment
facility, so you can focus on cost, quality,
flexibility and regulatory challenges.
Our family of products matches specific
application criteria from start to finish,
assuring the quality and reliability of your
electrical system throughout your facility,
from power substation to administration
buildings. With the industry’s most
efficient distribution system, we’re also
prepared to meet your ongoing MRO
needs down the road.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for the Oil and Gas
Industry brochure, GM-8329.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Wastewater Treatment
Facilities brochure, GM-8291.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

v

Vertical Market Solutions

vi

Civil Infrastructure

Renewable Energy

At Thomas & Betts, we understand the
challenges faced in civil infrastructure.
We’re focused on providing electrical
solutions that address the critical
issues in every transportation sector,
so you can focus on sustainability,
cost, quality, flexibility, safety and
regulatory compliance. Our family of
quality electrical solutions matches
specific application criteria, ensuring
the continued reliability of infrastructure.
And with the industry’s most efficient
distribution system, we’re prepared
to meet your ongoing operation and
maintenance needs as well as serve
new OEM and construction investments.

The demand for natural, clean and
sustainable energy resources has
brought solar and wind power generation
into the spotlight. Investments and
incentives by public and private entities
are speeding green development and
proliferation, yet the promise is not fully
realized. Thomas & Betts is committed
to seeing the industry succeed —
and thrive. We design integrated
solutions with higher quality materials,
fewer parts and ease of installation
coupled with maintenance in mind
in order to reduce product lifecycle
costs. We provide the information and
training necessary to correctly install
and maintain critical structural systems
for safe and reliable operation. With
solutions from Thomas & Betts, you will
meet your cost, quality, performance
and regulatory challenges.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Civil Infrastructure
brochure, GM-8331.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Renewable Energy
brochure, GM-8334.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Vertical Market Solutions
Power Generation

Power Transmission and Distribution

The power generation industry, which
has performed solidly for decades, is
undergoing a transformation brought on
by government regulations, consumer
demand and evolving industry standards.
New and emerging technological
developments support cleaner and more
efficient energy generation and higher
availability for plants young and old.
Thomas & Betts is leading the way with
high-quality, innovative electrical systems
and devices that perform optimally with
minimal product lifecycle costs. Integrated
engineering design solution sets simplify
product selection. Fewer, snap-together
parts ease installation and maintenance.
Training and support services ensure
ongoing safe and reliable operation,
while warranties instill confidence that our
products will perform as required and meet
your performance and output demands.

From transmission lines and local
distribution networks that crisscross
the landscape to the customer premises,
you’ll find Thomas & Betts products to
help you manage and control the constant
flow of power. We understand that your
customers depend on you to deliver a
continuous, uninterrupted power flow,
and that you rely on us to provide
solutions that enable optimal reliability
and efficiency. We also recognize your
need to reduce the maintenance, repair
and operations costs in your electric power
transmission and distribution systems.
Whether your systems are overhead
or underground, we are your partner
in power delivery. Our broad family of
electrical solutions enables us to support
your design, construction, operations and
maintenance requirements economically,
with fewer and shorter outages.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Power Generation
brochure, GM-8337.

For more information, request the Thomas & Betts
Electrical Solutions for Power Transmission
and Distribution brochure, GM-8338.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

vii

T&B Services
Customer Service
1-800-816-7809
Immediate, Knowledgeable Assistance
Every Thomas & Betts Customer Service Representative is right where the action
is — surrounded by all the support and information they need to answer your
questions and fill your orders faster than ever. Your calls and faxes are automatically
routed to Customer Service Specialists who personally serve your account and can
answer questions about products, order status, price and availability, and other
service-related inquiries.
Phone: 1-800-816-7809
Fax: 1-800-816-7810
Email: generalcustomerserviceteam@tnb.com

Technical Services
1-888-862-3289
Over 170 Years of Industry Experience
Meeting and exceeding our customers’ expectations is a fundamental goal of Thomas
& Betts. Call our Technical Services Department and talk LIVE to an expert who’ll
answer questions and concerns regarding all aspects of our products and services.
Our experienced and knowledgeable staff is second to none in the industry!

Tool Services
1-800-284-TOOL
Quality You Can Trust
Trust T&B’s dedicated Tool Services Department to answer all questions
regarding tool applications, repair, warranties, sales/lease/rental and technical
information. Ask about our specialized services, including customer/sales training,
demos and calibration/certification of tools.

viii

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

T&B Online Support
T&B Access
®

www.tnb.com
T&B Access® is a global sales tool for our distributor partners, offering:
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	
•	

Quote Requests
Stock Checks
Pricing Inquiries
Cross Reference
Order Entry
Order Resolution
Shipping Status
Document Look-Up
Automatic Order Receiving
Item History Search

•	 Multiple-Location User Search
•	 Context-Sensitive Help
•	 Shipping Confirmations
•	 Tracking Data
•	Expediting
•	 Returns Processing
•	 Quality Issues
•	 Customer Report Cards
•	 Web Catalog Look-Up

All of these tools and more are available online 24 hours a day – 7 days a week,
without having to make a single phone call. Multi-lingual options are available in English,
French and Spanish. T&B Access® now serves over 10,000 satisfied customer users
at over 3,500 locations every month.

Web Catalog
www.tnb.com/webcatalog
Thousands of Products at Your Fingertips
U.S. contractors and specifiers have made our web catalog their number
one stop. Users can search for technical information by catalog number,
UPC code, competitor number, keyword search, product category and/or
brand. Having found the item(s) they are searching for, they can then use
our Where To Buy function to locate a T&B local distributor and/or other
support services.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

ix

T&B Online Tools
Web CAD Library
www.tnb.com/CADLibrary
Over 4,000 2D and 3D CAD Models Available FREE!
The T&B CAD Library is an on-line source of 2D and 3D CAD models,
available FREE to customers who register. Users can download these files
to their desktops for import into their working drawings. Drawings are
offered in 90 of the most popular native file formats. This is a valuable tool
for CAD designers, OEMs and engineering firms, as it will allow them to
quickly locate and download T&B drawings into their projects. Over 4,000
drawings of T&B® Fittings, PMA® Cable Protection, Kindorf®, Red•Dot®
and Superstrut® products and Steel City® and Carlon® Floor Boxes are
currently available.

x

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

T&B Online Tools
BIM Library
Now available to you through Autodesk® Seek (seek.autodesk.com),
our BIM (Building Information Modeling) objects can easily be imported
to your Revit® models. These BIM objects are fully standards compliant,
Revit® Certified and completely configurable.
Autodesk and Revit are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

Floor Box Selector Guide
www.tnb.com/floorboxselect
In-Floor Solutions at Your Fingertips
The Floor Box Selector makes it easy to identify the appropriate in-floor
solution for power and communications services in any floor application.
To begin the selection process, the user selects the basic floor type
from four options. Then, with just a few clicks to identify the preferred
configuration, the Selector will provide a complete bill of materials that
includes all the necessary components for the installation. From the bill
of materials, links are available to the T&B Web Catalog to download detailed
product information such as cut sheets, product brochures, sales drawings,
CAD files and product specifications.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

xi

T&B Online Tools
PreFabricator
http://productconfigurator.tnb.com
Build Your Own Pre-Fab Products
The Steel City® Prefabricator provides an electrical contractor an easy,
intuitive and fast way to create made-to-order electrical rough-in assemblies.
Several distinct advantages help assure a construction job will be completed
accurately, on-time, within your budgeted cost with a minimum effort.
•	Our design module allows the user to fully configure a pre-fab assembly
using genuine Steel City® components complete with Bill of Materials,
Customer Drawings, 3D Viewer/Images and AutoCAD® DXF file
•	 O
 ur Shopping Cart allows you to select a distributor partner and obtain a
quotation for your job electronically without having to make any phone calls
•	Our Collaboration Module allows you to share your configuration with others
for feedback, for quotation purposes, etc.
•	The ORDER button creates the final T&B catalog number, the Bill of
Materials, the drawings and the quotation from the distributor partner
you selected and T&B
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

xii

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

New Products Spotlight
Our New Products Save
You Time and Money!
Thomas & Betts has been on the leading edge of engineering
and design for more than a century, and new product development
continues to keep us at the forefront of the electrical industry today.
T&B engineers and product managers continually study the latest
code and technology changes and talk to customers to identify
specific needs and opportunities for new product ideas.
But simply being new isn’t enough to qualify for development under
one of the high-quality Thomas & Betts family of brand names.
A T&B new product must achieve one or more of the following
benefits for our customers:
•	 Lower installed costs
•	 Improved labor efficiencies
•	 Compliance with code requirements
•	 Solves specific application challenges
The following pages highlight new products that meet these
criteria within our Wire & Cable Management products.

Contents
Steel City® Pre-Fab Assemblies and Boxes
Pre-Fab Adjustable Floor Bracket........................................NP-2
Pre-Fab Dual Box-Mounting Bracket...................................NP-2
Pre-Fab T Bracket................................................................NP-2
Cable Support Bracket.........................................................NP-3
Adjustable Mud Rings..........................................................NP-3
Adjust-A-Box®.....................................................................NP-3

Red•Dot ® Weatherproof Boxes and Covers
Code Keeper® Universal While-In-Use Covers.....................NP-4
Universal Flip-Lid Weatherproof Covers..............................NP-4
Code Keeper® Universal Recessed Box and Cover..............NP-4

Steel City ® Floor Boxes
Metallic Floor Box Covers....................................................NP-5
665-AV2 Floor Box...............................................................NP-5
68-HP Floor Box...................................................................NP-5
FPT4 Series Poke Through System......................................NP-6

Carlon® Floor Boxes
Retractable Work Surface Receptacle.................................NP-6
Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle..............................................NP-6

Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System
Trap-Eze™ Connector...........................................................NP-7
Trapnut® Strut Fastener......................................................NP-7
Fast Set Beam Clamp..........................................................NP-7
Loc-King™ Cobra® Cable and Pipe Clamp............................NP-8
Solar-Panel Hold-Down Clamps and Washer......................NP-8

T&B® Cable Tray
Cable Tray Closure End Plate...............................................NP-8

NEW Products
Steel City Pre-Fab
®

Steel City ® Pre-Fab Adjustable
Floor Bracket

Steel City ® Pre-Fab Dual
Box-Mounting Bracket

NEW!
Built-in Far-Side
Support for Both
4" and 6" Studs
Stabilizes box and bracket
assembly, providing
versatility on the job
and ease of installation.
UL® Listed
Flexible Design
Accommodates both
4" and 4 11⁄16" boxes.

Built-in Slots for
Horizontal Support Bar
Provides the option to
reinforce stud-to-stud
strength (horizontal
support bar not included).
Built-in Cable Support
Reduces labor and
material costs by
eliminating the need
to purchase and install
a separate cable support.
Standard 12" and 18"
Box Mounting Locations

Single-Screw Vertical
Height Adjustment
Up to 6 additional inches.

Accommodates
both 4" and
411⁄16" boxes

6" Height Adjustment
Markings

Built-in Far-Side Support
Stabilizes box and bracket
assembly to ease installation
and eliminate the need
to purchase and install
extra components.

UL® Listed

For more information, see page A-15.

Steel City ® Pre-Fab T Bracket

NEW!

Locator Hole
In mounting bracket
enables installer
to position box on
marked stud for fast,
precise installation.

For more information, see page A-15.
Stability Ridges
For added support.

NEW!

Floor Track Tabs
Provide stability when
positioning the
bracket.

Locator Tab
Helps locate installed
boxes hidden by wall
coverings.

3 Fixed Box Locations
Each accommodates both
4" & 411⁄16" boxes.

Integral Mounting Screws
Reduce installation time.

18" Fixed Height

16" Fixed Width

Key Hole Slots
Maintain box position
if mud ring is removed.

Mud Ring Mounting Screw Holes
For low-voltage applications
where no box is required.

For more information, see page A-13.

NP-2

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

NEW Products
Steel City Metallic Boxes and Covers
®

Steel City ® Cable Support Bracket

Steel City ® Adjustable Mud Rings

•	 Provides a simple means of complying with NEC® 330.30
requirements for securing and supporting MC cable

•	 Inner ring adjusts from
1
⁄2" to 11⁄2" depth

•	 Quick and easy locking tab snaps through slot
to secure cable

•	 Marked with a measured
rule and equipped with two
adjustment screws

•	 Ribs maintain separation of cables

NEW!

•	 Inner ring can be easily
adjusted after drywall
installation

•	 Durable steel construction retains integrity
•	 Versatile design — use with Romex or MC cable
•	UL® Listed
NEC and National Electrical Code are
registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

NEW!

For more information, see page A-16.

Steel City ® Adjust-A-Box ®
•	 Unique design allows for
adjustment of depth after the wall
covering has been installed

For more information, see page A-45.

NEW!

Adjustable Screw
Allows adjustment to any
wall-covering thickness.
Pre-Installed
Ground Screw

•	 Mounts square and secure every time

1
⁄2"
Knockouts
for MC Cable
and EMT

•	 Removes easily to enable inner-wall access
•	 Accommodates high- and low-voltage applications

Clamps
for NonMetallic
Cable

•	 Pre-installed ground screw

Installation:
Screw bracket to stud

	

Single-Gang		

Adjust box in or out to any wall thickness

Two-Gang

	

Single-Gang		

Two-Gang

For more information, see page A-18.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

NP-3

NEW Products
Red•Dot Weatherproof Boxes and Covers
®

Red•Dot ® Code Keeper ® Non-Metallic
Universal While-In-Use Covers

Red•Dot ® Code Keeper ®
Metallic Universal
While-In-Use Covers

“Extra-Duty”
per NEC ® Section
406.9(B)(1)

NEW!

NEW!

•	 Complies with NEC® Section
406.9(B)(1) and 590.4(D)(4)
for “Extra-Duty” outlet box
hoods — now required for any
installation other than one- or
two-family dwellings
•	 Wide range of cover depths
and receptacle configurations
accommodates almost every
common plug and cord size

•	 Robust new hinge provides a sturdy cover
attachment that is great for high-traffic areas

•	 Key-hole mounts on back make
installation fast and efficient

•	 Available in single- or two-gang configurations
and standard or deep styles

•	 Durable latching covers prevent accidental equipment
disconnects, reduce tampering and deter theft

•	 Keyhole mounts make it fast and easy to install — just
loosen the existing device screws and slide the cover over
For more information, see page A-227.

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

For more information, see pages A-213–A-216.

Red•Dot ® Code Keeper ® Non-Metallic
Universal Recessed Box and Cover

Red•Dot ® Universal Flip-Lid
Weatherproof Covers

NEW!

NEW!
•	 Included adapter plates
offer 12 installation options
with single-gang cover and
25 installation options with
2-gang cover
•	 Keyhole openings on back
enable easy installation on
an existing outlet

•	 Universal design mounts either horizontally or vertically

•	 Durable, die-cast
zinc-alloy construction
•	 Suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed

•	 Included adapter plates allow one box and cover
to fit 12 different installation configurations
•	 Installs on virtually any exterior surface in both
new and old work applications including siding,
brick or stucco

For more information, see page A-217.

NP-4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

For more information, see page A-221.
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

NEW Products
Steel City Floor Boxes
®

Steel City ® 665-AV2
Floor Box

Steel City ® Metallic
Floor Box Covers

NEW!

NEW!
•	 Solid brass and aluminum covers with a brushed finish —
no plating or paint that can easily be scratched or chipped
away by normal floor traffic and cleaning

•	 2" KOs allow pre-terminated AV cables and connectors
to be pulled directly through the conduit

•	 Hingeless cover design with no flip-up lids —
nothing sticks up above floor level while in use

•	 Accepts standard 665 Series covers and device plates
for power, voice, data and audio-visual connections

•	 Simple slide latch provides tool-less access to power
and communications outlets

•	 Rectangular adapters allow voice, data and AV connectors
to be mounted in a standard GFCI device plate

For more information, see pages A-131.

Steel City ® 68-HP
Floor Box

For more information, see page A-134.

Lid Lies Flat Against
the Floor While In Use

• 	6" diameter round non-metallic floor
box — the largest in the industry

NEW!

• 	Large inline hubs for power and data
wiring: 1" for power, 11⁄2" for data
• 	Accepts standard devices from any
manufacturer, including duplex, GFCI,
locking, hospital-grade or isolated
ground receptacles
• 	Accommodates a wide variety
of multimedia devices through
the use of rectangular adapters

Slide Latch for
Tool-less Access

Stainless Steel Barbs

For more information, see pages A-143–A-146.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

NP-5

NEW Products
Steel City and Carlon Floor Boxes
®

®

Steel City ® FPT4 Series
Poke Through System

Carlon® Retractable Work
Surface Receptacle

NEW!

•	 Concealed receptacle provides safe
and convenient desktop power

NEW!

•	 Provides easy access to a power
outlet — simply pull up the
receptacle to plug in a device

•	 Convenient slide latch
provides tool-less access
to devices

•	 6-ft. cord plugs into an existing
floor or wall outlet
•	 Receptacle remains hidden below
work surface when not in use

•	 New hinge design allows
lid to lie flat while in use
to minimize obstructions
above floor level

•	 Hole saw included for fast, easy
installation in most surfaces

•	 Solid brass and aluminum
for superior durability

•	 Compact design occupies minimal
space both when recessed and
while in use
•	 Rotated receptacle orientation
accommodates oversized power
adapters

For more information, see pages A-174–A-177.

Carlon® Recessed Pop-Up
Receptacle
•	 Provides a duplex GFCI outlet in a kitchen
island or peninsula counter for easy access to
power for small appliances

For more information, see page A-210.

NEW!

•	 Eliminates the potential safety hazard of
power cords hanging over the edge of
counters to reach side-mounted outlets
•	 Meets new UL® and NEC® requirements for
receptacles mounted in kitchen counters
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the
National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

For more information, see page A-209.

NP-6

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

NEW Products
Kindorf Modular Framing System
®

Kindorf ® Trap-Eze™ Connector

Kindorf® Trapnut ® Strut Fastener

NEW!

NEW!

•	 Easily installs
above or to the
side of an assembly,
eliminating the need
to disassemble and
reassemble the
existing trapeze

•	 No need to thread Trapnut® fastener from either end
of the rod — saving valuable time

•	 Connectors can be
reused upon disassembly of a trapeze
•	 Designed for use with the innovative Trapnut® Strut
Fastener, which can take up to 43% less time than standard
nuts and washers on retro-fit trapeze applications

•	 Perfect for retrofit applications where the rod ends
are not accessible
•	 Precision threads trap the threaded rod for a sturdy
hold that can be adjusted up or down for fine-tune
positioning
•	 Functions as a hex nut, square washer and flat
washer combined

For more information, see page B-75.

For more information, see page B-75.

Kindorf ® Fast Set Beam Clamp
•	 Toolless attachment to the I-beam
•	 Eliminates the need to tighten a set
screw while holding a traditional
beam clamp in place
•	 Threaded rod secures the clamp,
eliminating an entire step in the
process

NEW!

Standard Beam Clamp
•	 The clamp must be held
in place while tightening
the set screw
•	 The set screw is difficult
to access within the
I-beam web

For more information, see page B-44.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

NP-7

NEW Products
Kindorf Modular Framing System and T&B Cable Tray
®

®

Kindorf ® Loc-King™ Cobra®
One-Piece Cable and Pipe Clamp
•	 Power-tool compatible for
fast and efficient installation

NEW!

•	 Pre-set torque mechanism
takes the guesswork out
of installation, delivering
optimum torque even when
using power tools, and
prevents over-tightening and
excess pressure on delicate
cables

Kindorf ® Solar Panel
Hold-Down Clamps

NEW!

Rugged, CorrosionResistant Materials
•	 Body and channel nut
made from high-strength
extruded aluminum
alloy 6061-T6 with
clear anodized finish
•	 1⁄4–20 x 3" bolt, lock
washer and flat washer
made from Type 304
stainless steel

•	 Anti-vibration nut ensures
permanent installation,
even in high-vibration
environments

Labor-Saving Features
•	 Hardware is pre-assembled to clamp to save time
and labor for the installer

•	 Superior design load capabilities for heavy-duty
applications: 350 lbs. for 1⁄2"–21⁄2" trade sizes;
450 lbs. for 3"–4" trade sizes

•	 Self-oriented channel nut is staked to bolt to ensure
fast, easy installation
Versatile Design
•	 Can be used with both 11⁄2" Kindorf® channel
and 15⁄8" strut systems
For more information, see page B-24.

For more information, see page B-32.

Kindorf ® Solar Panel Washer

T&B® Cable Tray
Closure End Plate

NEW!

NEW!

•	 Slotted for quicker
installation — no need
to disassemble clamp
assembly
•	 Bent tab ensures washer
stays in place during
installation
•	 Can be used with both 11⁄2" Kindorf® channel
and 15⁄8" strut systems
•	 Made from tin-plated, case-hardened steel

•	 Provides closure for any tray end

•	 Can be used on carbon steel or aluminum strut channel

•	 Hardware included

•	 Complies with UL® 467

•	 Available in aluminum, hot-dip galvanized,
pre-galvanized and 316 stainless steel

•	 Designed for use with 1⁄4" bolt installed with
minimum torque value of 100 lbs.-in.
For more information, see page B-24.

NP-8

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

For more information, see pages B-305, B-330 and B-354.
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Steel City
Metallic Boxes
& Covers
®

Steel City® Metallic Boxes & Covers
Overview.............................................................................A-2–A-5
Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies................................A-6–A-16
Switch Boxes and Accessories.........................................A-17–A-28
Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories...........................A-29–A-33
Ceiling Fan Boxes and Accessories..................................A-34–A-35
Square Boxes and Accessories........................................A-36–A-49
Utility Boxes and Accessories...........................................A-50–A-51
Handy Boxes and Accessories..........................................A-51–A-52
Gang Boxes and Accessories...........................................A-52–A-55
Concrete/Masonry Boxes and Accessories.......................A-56–A-58
Box Hangers and Supports ..............................................A-59–A-61
Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories..................................A-62–A-66

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Overview
Steel City Metallic Boxes and Covers
®

Steel City® is the industry-leading product line of metallic switch and
outlet boxes used in electrical construction. Since 1904, Steel City®
products have symbolized the highest quality standards in manufacturing
and innovative design, with one of the most complete offerings available.
Steel City® products are known for their simple improve­ments, such as
being the first box offering to standardize combination slotted/phillips
screws on all boxes. Thomas & Betts is also recognized as a leader
in design innovation, as in our new metal stud bracket.
Thomas & Betts continues to listen to contractors and responds
to their ever-changing needs. Contact a T&B distributor nearest
you to select the right Steel City® product for your requirements.

Advantages of Steel City Boxes and Covers
®

Notched Ears on
Switch Boxes

Raised Ground Screw
Bump in 4" Square,
411⁄16" and Utility Boxes

•	 Steel City® Switch Boxes feature
a longer ear and a special notch.
This provides clearance for the
screws that are used to attach
wall plates to GFCI or rocker-type
light switches

•	 Quicker surface mounting by
eliminating the need to remove
the portion of the screw that
threads through the back of
the box

MS Bracket Boxes
•	 Mounts without the use of screws
•	 Mounts to the open or closed side
of the stud

•	 Allows for improved repositioning
of grounding conductor
•	 Ground bump standard in 21⁄8" boxes
•	 Ground bump optional in 11⁄2" boxes

Pre-Installed Screws
are Packaged in
Raised Position

•	 Works on stud depths up to 4"

Eccentric Knockouts
on Square Boxes

•	 Eliminates extra step of having
to back out the screw during
cover installation

•	 Provide better contact with
conduit fitting and locknut to
the box, improve grounding path,
stronger than 3⁄4" knockout
•	 Available in all four standard-size
square boxes
•	Improved 3⁄4" knockout position on square boxes

Steel City® switch and outlet boxes are protected from rust and
corrosion by zinc-galvanizing. All clamps and other component parts
are electrogalvanized separately, before assembly in the box, to ensure
corrosion protection of every surface. Steel City® galvanized finish meets the
requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Federal Specifications.

•	 Less labor required to install 3⁄4" conduit to box

A-2

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
®

Knockouts and Pryouts

Knockouts

Steel City conduit KOs have standard trade size dimensions. KOs are uniform and true
for attachment of cable or conduit connectors. Pryouts for cable entrance are slotted
— a twist with a screwdriver removes them. KOs and Pryouts are precision stamped
to permit easy removal, but remain sufficiently strong and sturdy when not removed.
®

Outlet Box Ears

⁄2" Conduit KO

1

Mounting ears support the box independent of the electrical system
attachments. Switch boxes have a fixed ear for old work installations.

13⁄8"

13⁄32"

⁄8"

7

⁄4" Conduit KO

3

Eccentric Knockouts

1" Conduit KO
Pryouts

Ears for plaster are set 1⁄16" forward of the box face in position for old
work (modernization), except where specifically noted.

Tapped Holes for Grounding

⁄32"

21

All Steel City boxes have a 10-32 tapped hole in the bottom
of the box for attaching separate ground wire.
®

Cable Pryouts Always in Pairs

Combination 1⁄2"
& 3⁄4" Knockout

Brackets

S or B Type
Mounts to face of stud. Used on
switch, handy or square boxes. 2"
long x 21⁄8" wide

T Type
Positions handy box against
the face and side of stud.
51⁄2" long x 7⁄8" wide

DV Type
Mounts box offset from stud 11⁄2".
13
6 ⁄16" long x 1" wide x 11⁄2" offset

MS Type (For Metal Studs)
Mounts to any depth of metal stud,
open or closed side.
21⁄2" long x 111⁄16" wide x 3⁄8" offset;
Far side support to 4" only

Clamps

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Guide to Steel City Knockouts, Pryouts, Ears, Brackets and Clamps

CV Type
(Outlet Boxes)
Mounts to flat
side of metal studs
or wood studs.
73⁄8" long x 1" wide
x 3⁄8" offset

SV Type
Mounts box to side of stud with
positioning spikes.
73⁄8" long x 1" wide x 3⁄8" offset

L Type
Used to mount octagon boxes.
5
2 ⁄8" long x 3 ⁄8" wide x 1⁄4" offset
5

V Type
Mounts to flat side of stud.
7 ⁄8" long x 1" wide x 3⁄8" offset
3

For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable and Non-Metallic Tubing (Loom)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. and CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION file numbers for individual items
available upon request.

C-1

C-5

C-8

For Armored
Cable

C-10

C-3

(Loom only)

Listing Information for Armored Cable Clamp — Type C-3
Armored Cable (BX) — Steel
Armored Cable (BX) — Aluminum
MC Interlocked (MCI) — Steel
MC Interlocked (MCI) — Aluminum
MC Corrugated (MCC) — Aluminum

Sizes 14-2 through 10-3
Sizes 14-2 through 10-3
.449–.570 Diameter
.476–.606 Diameter
.375–.515 Diameter

MCAP™— Aluminum*
.370–.580
1
⁄8" Trade Size
Flex Metal Conduit — Steel
3
⁄8" Trade Size
Flex Metal Conduit — Aluminum
C-3 Clamp Acceptable for Grounding
* MCAP ™ is a trademark of Southwire Company

“Products listed in this catalog are subject to alteration or discontinuation without prior notice.”

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-3

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Overview
NEC Reference
®

Article 314 of the National Electrical Code® covers the installation and use of
boxes. The article includes table references that guide the electrician in the
selection of the proper box size necessary to safely accommodate electrical
service requirements. The box capacity table shown (page A-5) is reproduced
in part from the NEC® as a quick reference and guide. The NEC® should be
consulted for complete details.

Article 314 — Boxes and Fittings
314.16 Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and Junction
Boxes, and Conduit Bodies.
Boxes and conduit bodies shall be of sufficient size to provide free space
for all enclosed conductors. In no case shall the volume of the box, as
calculated in 314.16(A), be less than the fill calculation as calculated in
314.16(B). The minimum volume for conduit bodies shall be as calculated
in 314.16(C).
The provisions of this section shall not apply to terminal housings supplied
with motors or generators. Informational Note: For volume requirements
of motor or generator terminal housings, see Article 430.12. Boxes and
conduit bodies enclosing conductors #4 AWG or larger shall also comply
with the provisions of 314.28.

(3) S
 upport Fittings Fill. Where one or more luminaire studs or hickeys
are present in the box, a single volume allowance in accordance with
Table 314.16(B) shall be made for each type of fitting based on the
largest conductor present in the box.
(4) D
 evice or Equipment Fill. For each yoke or strap containing one or
more devices or equipment, a double volume allowance in accordance
with Table 314.16(B) shall be made for each yoke or strap based on the
largest conductor connected to a device(s) or equipment supported by
that yoke or strap. A device or utilization equipment wider than a single
50mm (2 in.) device box as described in Table 314.16(A) shall have
double volume allowances provided for each gang required for mounting.
(5) E quipment Grounding Conductor Fill. Where one or more equipment
grounding conductors or equipment bonding jumpers enter a box,
a single volume allowance in accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall
be made based on the largest equipment grounding conductor or
equipment bonding jumper present in the box. Where an additional set
of equipment grounding conductors, as permitted by 250.146(D), is
present in the box, an additional volume allowance shall be made based
on the largest equipment grounding conductor in the additional set.

(A) Box Volume Calculations.
The volume of a wiring enclosure (box) shall be the total volume of
the assembled sections and, where used, the space provided by plaster
rings, domed covers, extension rings and so forth, that are marked with
their volume or are made from boxes the dimensions of which are listed
in Table 314.16(A).
(1) Standard Boxes. The volumes of standard boxes that are not marked
with their volume shall be as given in Table 314.16(A).
(2) Other Boxes. Boxes 1650 cm3 (100 in.3) or less, other than those
described in Table 314.16(A), and nonmetallic boxes shall be durably
and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their volume. Boxes
described in Table 314.16(A) that have a volume larger than is
designated in the table shall be permitted to have their volume
marked as required by this section.

(B) Box Fill Calculations.
The volumes in paragraphs 314.16(B)(I) through (B)(5), as applicable, shall
be added together. No allowance shall be required for small fittings such
as locknuts and bushings.
(1) Conductor Fill. Each conductor that originates outside the box
and terminates or is spliced within the box shall be counted once,
and each conductor that passes through the box without splice or
termination shall be counted once. Each loop or coil of unbroken
conductor not less than twice the minimum length required for free
conductors in 300.14 shall be counted twice. The conductor fill shall be
calculated using Table 314.16(B). A conductor, no part of which leaves
the box, shall not be counted.
Exception: An equipment grounding conductor or conductors not over
four fixture wires smaller than #14 AWG, or both, shall be permitted to
be omitted from the calculations where they enter a box from a domed
luminaire or similar canopy and terminate within that box.
(2) Clamp Fill. Where one or more internal cable clamps, whether factory
or field supplied, are present in the box, a single volume allowance in
accordance with Table 314.16(B) shall be made based on the largest
conductor present in the box. No allowance shall be required for a cable
connector with its clamping mechanism outside the box.

A-4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

(C) Conduit Bodies.
(1) G
 eneral. Conduit bodies enclosing #6 AWG conductors or smaller,
other than short-radius conduit bodies as described in 314.16(C)(2),
shall have a cross-sectional area not less than twice the cross-sectional
area ofthe largest conduit or tubing to which they can be attached.
The maximum number of conductors permitted shall be the maximum
number permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9 for the conduit or tubing to
which it is attached.
(2) W
 ith Splices, Taps or Devices. Only those conduit bodies that are
durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their volume shall
be permitted to contain splices, taps or devices. The maximum number
of conductors shall be calculated in accordance with 314.16(B). Conduit
bodies shall be supported in a rigid and secure manner.
(3) S
 hort-Radius Conduit Bodies. Conduit bodies such as capped elbows
and service-entrance elbows that enclose conductors #6 AWG or
smaller, and are only intended to enable the installation of the raceway
and the contained conductors, shall not contain splices, taps or devices
and shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors
enclosed in the conduit body.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
Table 314.16(A)
Metal Boxes

mm

Table 314.16(B)
Volume Allowance Required per Conductor
Minimum
Volume

Size of
Conductor
(AWG)

Maximum Number
of Conductors*
cm3 in.3 18 16 14 12 10 8 6

Box Trade
Size
(in.)

100 x 32
(4 x 11⁄4)
Round/Octagonal
Round/Octagonal
100 x 38
(4 x 11⁄2)
Round/Octagonal
100 x 54
(4 x 21⁄8)
Square
100 x 32
(4 x 11⁄4)
Square
100 x 38
(4 x 11⁄2)
Square
100 x 54
(4 x 21⁄8)
Square
120 x 32
(4L x 11⁄4)
Square
120 x 38
(4L x 11⁄2)
Square
120 x 54
(4L x 21⁄8)
Device
75 x 50 x 38
(3 x 2 x 11⁄2)
75 x 50 x 50
(3 x 2 x 2)
Device
Device
75 x 50 x 57
(3 x 2 x 21⁄4)
Device
75 x 50 x 65
(3 x 2 x 21⁄2)
Device
75 x 50 x 70
(3 x 2 x 23⁄4)
Device
75 x 50 x 90
(3 x 2 x 31⁄2)
Device
100 x 54 x 38 (4 x 21⁄8 x 11⁄2)
Device
100 x 54 x 48 (4 x 21⁄8 x 17⁄8)
Device
100 x 54 x 54 (4 x 21⁄8 x 21⁄8)
95 x 50 x 65 (33⁄4 x 2 x 21⁄2) Masonry Box/Gang
95 x 50 x 90 (33⁄4 x 2 x 31⁄2) Masonry Box/Gang
Min. 44.5 depth FS – Single-Cover/Gang (13⁄4)
Min. 60.3 depth FD – Single-Cover/Gang (23⁄8)
Min. 44.5 depth FS – Multiple-Cover/Gang (13⁄4)
Min. 60.3 depth FD – Multiple-Cover/Gang (23⁄8)

205
254
353
295
344
497
418
484
689
123
164
172
205
230
295
169
213
238
230
344
221
295
295
395

12.5
15.5
21.5
18.0
21.0
30.3
25.5
29.5
42.0
7.5
10.0
10.5
12.5
14.0
18.0
10.3
13.0
14.5
14.0
21.0
13.5
18.0
18.0
24.0

8
10
14
12
14
20
17
19
28
5
6
7
8
9
12
6
8
9
9
14
9
12
12
16

7
8
12
10
12
17
14
16
24
4
5
6
7
8
10
5
7
8
8
12
7
10
10
13

6
7
10
9
10
15
12
14
21
3
5
5
6
7
9
5
6
7
7
10
6
9
9
12

5
6
9
8
9
13
11
13
18
3
4
4
5
6
8
4
5
6
6
9
6
8
8
10

5
6
8
7
8
12
10
11
16
3
4
4
5
5
7
4
5
5
5
8
5
7
7
9

5
5
7
6
7
10
8
9
14
2
3
3
4
4
6
3
4
4
4
7
4
6
6
8

2
3
4
3
4
6
5
5
8
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
4
2
3
3
4

*Where no volume allowances are required by 314.16(B)(2) through 314.16(B)(5).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. File Number: E2969 (U.L. 514A)
Canadian Standards Association File Number: LR 12798
Federal Manufacture Number: 56501 (Cage Code)
Products designed to meet Federal Specification Number: W-J-800
Verification of file numbers and compliance with federal specifications for individual items
available upon request.
Box and cover material and plating specification; .062" minimum thickness, hot rolled,
pre-galvanized steel, minimum spangle.
ASTM G-60-U, AISI C-1008
Bracket material: All brackets except MS style; 16 gauge (.060") hot rolled, pregalvanized steel AISI C-1008, G-90-U. MS style bracket; 20 gauge (.036") cold rolled
spring steel AISI C-1055, heat treated to R. 35 zinc plated .0005 thick.

Free Space Within Box For Each Conductor

No. 18
No. 16
No. 14
No. 12
No. 10
No. 8
No. 6

cm3

in.3

24.6
28.7
32.8
36.9
41.0
49.2
81.9

1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
3.00
5.00

Reprinted with permission from National Fire Protection Association NFPA70-2011.
National Electrical Code, Copyright© 2010, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy,
MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA
on the referenced subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety.
NEC® is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.,
Quincy, MA 02269.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. File Number: E2969 (U.L. 514A)
Canadian Standards Association File Number: LR 12798
Federal Manufacture Number: 56501
Products designed to meet Federal Specification Number: A-A5924 (formerly W-J-800).
Verification of file numbers and compliance with federal specifications for individual items
available upon request.
Box and cover material and plating specification; .062" minimum thickness,
hot-rolled, pre-galvanized steel, minimum spangle.
ASTM G-60-U, AISI C-1008
Bracket material: All brackets except MS style; 16 gauge (.060") hot rolled, pregalvanized steel AISI C-1008, G-60-U. MS Style bracket; 20 gauge (.036") cold rolled
spring steel AISI C-1055, heat treated to R. 35 zinc plated .0005 thick.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Article 314 — Boxes and Fittings (continued)

Metallic Boxes — Fire Resistance Rating
Wall Penetrations
Listed single- and double-gang metallic outlet and switch boxes and
octagon ceiling boxes with metallic or non-metallic cover plates may be
used in bearing and non-bearing wood stud and steel stud walls with ratings
not exceeding 2 hours. These walls shall have gypsum wallboard facings
similar to those shown in Design Nos. U301, U411, and U425. 4 in. square
boxes may be used in 2 hr. fire rated ceilings.
The surface area of individual metallic outlet or switch boxes shall not
exceed 16 sq. in. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed
100 sq. inches per 100 sq. ft. of wall. Boxes located on opposite sides of
walls or partitions shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 inches.
The metallic outlet or switch boxes shall be securely fastened to the studs
and the opening in the wallboard facing shall be cut so that the clearance
between the box and the wallboard does not exceed 1⁄8 in.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-5

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Faster Installation for Increased
Profit Margin!
Pre-Assemblies
Paying to assemble outlet boxes, grounding pigtails, device covers and
mounting brackets on the job site can quickly become an expensive
proposition. Instead, choose Steel City® Pre-Assemblies and realize
significant labor savings. This UL Listed product line includes over 75
combinations of popular boxes, brackets and covers that speed installation
because the time-consuming assembly work is already done for you.

Steel City® Pre-Assemblies include:
•	 Outlet box with pre-installed grounding pigtail
•	 Your choice of cover options, including singleand double-device covers, raised 1⁄2", 5⁄8" or 3⁄4"
•	 Your choice of bracket options to allow mounting
to steel and wood stud or floor track, including Steel City®
Box Support Covers, which combine a bracket and cover
in one component
•	 All UL Listed components

Box with Pre-Installed 101⁄2" Pigtail
• Popular 4" square boxes and switch boxes
• Pre-installed 101⁄2" insulated grounding pigtails
• Save on labor costs by eliminating multiple installation steps

Pre-Assembled Installation
1. Install box
in desired location —
DONE!

vs.

Standard Installation

1. Purchase pre-stripped pigtail
2. Install pigtail and ground screw in box
3. Install box in desired location

A-6

Cat. No.

Box Type Included

521511234EWP
521511234P
521711234EP
52151XP
52151CVNP
LXWOWP
LXVP
CXWOWP
CXWVP
CXP

52151234EW — 4"-sq. x 11⁄2" D Welded Box
521511234 — 4"-sq. x 11⁄2" D Drawn Box
521711234E — 4"-sq. x 21⁄8" D Welded Box
52151X — 4"-sq. x 11⁄2" D Welded Box
52151CVN — 4"-sq. x 11⁄2" D Welded Box
LXWOW-25 — 3"H x 2"W x 21⁄2" D Gangable Switch Box
LXV-25 — 3"H x 2"W x 21⁄2" D Gangable Switch Box
CXWOW — 3"H x 2"W x 31⁄2" D Gangable Switch Box
CXWV — 3"H x 2"W x 31⁄2" D Gangable Switch Box
CX — 3"H x 2"W x 31⁄2" D Gangable Switch Box

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Knockouts

Pre-Installed Pigtail

Std. CTN.

Eccentric
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4"
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" Eccentric
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" Eccentric
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" Eccentric
1
⁄2"
1
⁄2"
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4"
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4"
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4"

101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"
101⁄2"

50
50
50
50
25
25
25
25
25
25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies

•	 52CM and 52CMD box support covers
•	101/2" insulated pigtail
•	 One- and two-device covers
•	Raised 1⁄2", 5⁄8" and 3⁄4"
•	11⁄2" and 21⁄8" box depths

Cat. No.
52151-CM13
52151-CM14-5/8
52151-CM14
52151-CMD17
52151-CMD18-5/8
52151-CMD18
52171-CM13
52171-CM14-5/8
52171-CM14
52171-CMD17
52171-CMD18-5/8
52171-CMD18

52171-CM14-5/8

Box
Type
Included

Box
Depth
(In.)

Pigtail
Type
Included

Box Support
Cover
Included

521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12

52CM13
52CM14-5/8
52CM14
52CMD17
52CMD18-5/8
52CMD18
52CM13
52CM14-5/8
52CM14
52CMD17
52CMD18-5/8
52CMD18

Raised
(In.)

No. of
Devices

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

1

5

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Box with Pre-Installed 101⁄2" Pigtail
and Box Support Cover

Box with Pre-Installed 101⁄2" Pigtail,
Raised Cover and Box-to-Stud Bracket
•	 SSF-SH2346 bracket

•	Raised 1⁄2", 5⁄8" and 3⁄4"

•	101⁄2" insulated pigtail

•	11⁄2" and 21⁄8" box depths

•	 One- and two-device covers


Cat. No.
151-SH2346-13
151-SH2346-1458
151-SH2346-14
151-SH2346-17
151-SH2346-1858
151-SH2346-18
171-SH2346-13
171-SH2346-1458
171-SH2346-14
171-SH2346-17
171-SH2346-1858
171-SH2346-18

151-SH2346-13
Box
Type
Included

521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E

Box
Depth Pigtail Type Bracket Type
Cover
Raised
(IN.)
Included
Included
Type Included
(In.)

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12

www.tnb.com

SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346
SSF-SH2346

52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18
52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1

5

No. of
Devices

Std.
Ctn.

1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-7

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
MS Series Pre-Assemblies
•	 4" square and 411⁄16" square boxes
•	11⁄2" deep or 21⁄8" deep
•	 Pre-installed 101⁄2" insulated grounding pigtail
•	 Available with conduit KOs or clamps for flexible/
armored/MC cable
•	 Save on labor costs by eliminating multiple
installation steps

Pre-Assembled Installation
1.	
Snap box — DONE!

vs.

Standard Installation

1.	Purchase pre-stripped pigtail
2.	 Install pigtail and ground screw in box
3.	 Mount box support cover to box
4.	 Mount assembly to stud

Cat. No.
151-MS-13
151-MS-14
151-MS-1458
171MS13
171-MS-14
171-MS-1458
171MS18
171-MS-18 5/8
171MSX13
171-MSX-14
171-MSX-1458
171MSX18
171-MSX-18 5/8
72171MS14
72171-MS-1458
72171MS18
72171-MS-18 5/8
72171MSX14
72171-MSX-1458
72171MSX18
72171-MSX-1858

A-8

Box Type
Included

Box
Depth (IN.)

Pigtail
Included (IN.)

Box Cover
Included

52151-MS-1/2 3/4
52151-MS-1/2 3/4
52151-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MS-1/2 3/4
52171-MSX
52171-MSX
52171-MSX
52171-MSX
52171-MSX
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MSX
72171-MS-1/2 3/4
72171-MS-1/2 3/4

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2

52-C-13
52-C-14
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-13
52-C-14
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-18
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-13
52-C-14
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-18
52-C-18-5/8-25
72-C-14
72-C-14-5/8
72-C-18
72-C-18-5/8
72-C-14
72-C-14-5/8
72-C-18
72-C-18-5/8

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Raised
(IN.)

No. of
Devices

Std.
CTN.

⁄2
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

1

3

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Box with Pre-Installed
101⁄2" Pigtail, Raised Cover
and Vertical Mounting Bracket
•	 12" (SSF-SV12) or 18" (SSF-SV18) vertical mounting bracket
•	101⁄2" insulated pigtail
•	 One- and two-device covers
•	Raised 1⁄2", 5⁄8" and 3⁄4"
•	11⁄2" and 21⁄8" box depths

vs.

Pre-Assembled Installation
1.	Mount assembly to
floor stud — DONE!

Standard Installation

1.	Purchase pre-stripped pigtail
2.	 Install pigtail and ground screw in box
3.	 Insert box into vertical bracket
4.	 Insert device cover to vertical bracket
5.	 Mount assembly to floor stud

Cat. No.
151-SV12-13
151-SV12-1458
151-SV12-14
151-SV12-17
151-SV12-1858
151-SV12-18
171-SV12-13
171-SV12-1458
171-SV12-14
171-SV12-17
171-SV12-1858
171-SV12-18
151-SV18-13
151-SV18-1458
151-SV18-14
151-SV18-17
151-SV18-1858
151-SV18-18
171-SV18-13
171-SV18-1458
171-SV18-14
171-SV18-17
171-SV18-1858
171-SV18-18

151-SV18-13

Box
Type
Included

Box
Depth
(IN.)

Pigtail
Type
Included

Bracket
Type
Included

Cover
Type
Included

521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521511234EW
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E
521711234E

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12
GSC12

SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV12
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18
SSF-SV18

52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18
52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18
52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18
52-C-13
52-C-14-5/8
52-C-14
52-C-17-25
52-C-18-5/8-25
52-C-18

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

151-SV12-13

Raised
(IN.)

No. of
Devices

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

1

5

A-9

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
UL Listed Adjustable Mud Ring
now available in both singleand two-gang.
®

NEW!

Adjustable Mud Rings
Mud Rings feature an inner ring that adjusts from 1⁄2" to 11⁄2" in depth to
accommodate various drywall thicknesses. Marked with a measured rule
and equipped with two adjustment screws, the inner ring can be set to the
anticipated depth prior to installation and then easily adjusted after drywall
installation to accommodate any variation in depth (1⁄2" to 11⁄2").

Wedge Locking Blocks
Designed to ensure grounding continuity

Adjustable Mud Ring Installation/Adjustment Steps:
1

Loosen…

The two adjustment screws located on opposing corners
of the mud ring.

A-10

3

2

Adjust…

Inner ring to be flush with wall surface.

Cat. N0.

Description

52-C-ADJ
52-C-ADJ2

Single-Gang Adjustable Mud Ring, 1⁄2" to 11⁄2"
Two-Gang Adjustable Mud Ring, 1⁄2" to 11⁄2"

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Re-tighten…

Adjustment screws.

Std. CTN.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

25
20

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Three Products in One!
Pre-Fab Box Bracket with
Far-Side and Cable Support
The savings can add up, particularly on a large job, when a box bracket,
far-side support and cable support are combined in one product to reduce your
labor and inventory costs. It is designed for maximum flexibility with flanges for
either left or right stud mount, and compatibility with either 4" and 411⁄16" boxes.

•	 Box bracket, far-side support •	 Key-hole box mounting slots
maintain box position if mud
and cable support combined
ring needs to be removed
in one product to reduce your
labor and inventory costs
•	 Provides clear access to
knock-outs once the box
•	 Built-in cable support
is installed for installation
secures cable 6" above
of fittings
the box, satisfying NEC®
code requirements
•	 Mounts to either side
•	 Flexible design accommodates of the stud
both 4" and 411⁄16" boxes

Cable
Support
and Far-Side
Support
Combined
in one
product

Can be mounted either left or right of the stud

Clear Access to
Knock-Outs
and/or Fittings
Once box is installed

Built-in Cable
Support
Secures cable
6" above the
box, satisfying
NEC code
requirements

Key-Hole Box
Mounting Slots
Maintain box
position if mud
ring needs to
be removed

Bottom view of bracket
with box installed

Cat. No.

Std. Pkg.
Qty.

Description

SSF-SH2346-CS Pre-Fab Box Bracket with Far-Side and Cable Support
Side Supports
For added security

Back view of bracket with box,
fitting and cable installed

50

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

Mounting Bracket
•	Attaches 4" and 411⁄16" electrical boxes to metal stud
•	 Support leg can be attached to stud to eliminate movement
of box in wall
•	 Attaches to metal or wood stud using self-tapping screws
and screw gun or nails
•	 One part mounts boxes for 11⁄2", 21⁄2", 31⁄2", 4" and 6"
stud which means less inventory
6.625"

Cat. No.

std.
CTN.

Description

SSF-SH2346 4"  & 4 ⁄16" outlet boxes to 2 ⁄2", 3 ⁄2", 4"  & 6" metal studs
11

1

1

4.5"

100

.725"
1.875"

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

3.5"

A

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1"
5.25"

A-11

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Box Mounting Brackets for Between Studs
•	 Supports electrical boxes, plaster rings or low-voltage
devices from one bracket
•	Accommodates 4" or 411⁄16" boxes
•	 Bendable leg serves as a bracket stabilizer

Fig. 1

•	 SB brackets allow box mounting in all four 90° orientations

Fig. 2

Cat. No.
SSF-SB16
SSF-SB24

fig.
No. Description

1 B ox mounting bracket for between studs, 16" stud spacing
2 Box mounting bracket for between studs, 24" stud spacing

Screw-Gun Box Bracket

Extension-Plate Bracket

•	 Self-tapping screws are aligned
with the dimples so that the box
is straight

•	Improved bracket with bendable
stabilizer leg for use on 21⁄2"
and 31⁄2" metal studs

•	 Enables mounting of multiple boxes

•	Mounts outlet boxes 12" or 18"
offset from either a metal stud
track or a stud

•	 Depth set for 1 ⁄2"- or 2 ⁄8"-deep
electrical box
1

1

•	 SGA brackets have adjustable tabs
for 11⁄2"- or 21⁄8"-deep boxes

•	 Mounts 4" or 411⁄16" outlet boxes,
11⁄2" or 21⁄8" deep

•	 SGA brackets adjustable for
non-standard stud spacing

•	 SV18 provides compliance with Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements

Fig. 1

SSF-SG16A
SSF-SG24A

A-12

fig. No. Description

1
1

25
25

•	 When mounted, drywall ring is brought
to within 1⁄6" of drywall every time and
will not bulge or break out drywall

•	 Installs easily with a screw gun

Cat. No.

std.
CTN.

Adjustable box bracket
Adjustable box bracket

Fig. 1

stud
Spacing

box
Depth

11"–18" 11⁄2" or 21⁄8"
17"–26" 11⁄2" or 21⁄8"

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

fig.
No.

50
50

SSF-SV12
SSF-SV18

1
1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Description

Extension plate bracket, 12" height
Extension plate bracket, 18" height

www.tnb.com

std.
CTN.

50
50

NEW!

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Consistent Box Locations
and Box Height…Every Time!
Pre-Fab T Bracket
Consistency results in efficiency and labor savings on the job. With three
fixed-box locations and a fixed height of 18", the new Steel City® Pre-Fab
T Bracket provides a consistent installation every time. For added efficiency,
the bracket includes integral mounting screws that help reduce installation
time. A handy locator tab at the base of the bracket saves you the time of
looking for installed boxes that have been hidden by wall coverings. The
base also features unique floor track tabs. The inner tab slides in front of
the floor track and the two outer tabs slide behind the floor track to provide
stability when positioning the bracket.

Stability Ridges
For added support.

Floor Track Tabs
Provide stability when
positioning the
bracket.

Locator Tab
Helps locate installed
boxes hidden by wall
coverings.

3 Fixed-Box Locations
Each accommodate both
4" & 4 11⁄16" boxes.

Integral Mounting Screws
Reduce installation time.

18" Fixed Height

16" Fixed Width

Key Hole Slots
Maintain box position
if mud ring is removed.

Pre-Fab Box Bracket with Far-Side and Cable Support
Cat. N0.

Description

H16V18S

Pre-Fab T Bracket

www.tnb.com

Mud Ring Mounting Screw Holes
For low-voltage applications
where no box is required.

Std. CTN.

10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-13

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
SBO16 and SBO24
Stud-to-Stud Horizontal Mounting Brackets
Easily
•	Constructed of 24-gauge steel
Pre-Assembled
•	 Pre-measured on center for 16" (SBO16) or 24" (SBO24) stud spacing
Off Site
•	 SBO16 accepts three 4" square or two 4 ⁄ " boxes (deep or shallow)
for Faster
•	SBO24 accepts five 4" square or four 4 ⁄ " boxes (deep or shallow)
Installation
•	 Can be mounted at any height to meet individual project requirements
On Site!
11

11

Pre-Fabricated
Components
Rather than assembling
box mounting brackets
and device covers on
site, keep an eye on
profit and use Steel City®
Pre-Fab Components
to set up jobs off site
for a quick and easy
installation on site.
They accommodate
a wide variety of Steel
City covers and they’re
readily available for
fast-track projects.

•	 Device cover (mud ring) mounts to front of bracket to set box in desired location
•	 Stamped rule on bracket with 1⁄4", 1⁄2" and 1" markings enables fast box setting

SBO16

SBO24

•	 Items readily available
for fast-track projects
— no special lead
time required

A-14

16

•	 Versatile, open design enables mounting of box in any location across horizontal
plane between studs

•	 Ideal for use in
hotels, casinos,
hospitals, large office
buildings and any
other commercial
or institutional
application where
rough-in products
can be pre-fabricated
to match floor plans
for quicker on-site
installation

•	 All products are UL
approved and meet
applicable building
codes

16

SBO16 mounted to 16" studs
with one 4" square box installed.

SBO24 mounted to 24" studs
with one 4" square box installed.

SBO16 mounted to 16" studs with three
4" square boxes (full capacity) installed.

SBO24 mounted to 24" studs with five
4" square boxes (full capacity) installed.

Cat. No.

Description

SBO16
SBO24

16" stud-to-stud horizontal mounting bracket
24" stud-to-stud horizontal mounting bracket

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std. CTN.

25
25

www.tnb.com

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies

Built-in Far-Side
Support for Both
4" and 6" Studs
Stabilizes box and bracket
assembly, providing
versatility on the job
and ease of installation.
UL Listed
Flexible Design
Accommodates both
4" and 4 11⁄16" boxes.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

VAFB Vertically Adjustable
Floor Brackets
Built-in Slots for
Horizontal Support Bar
Provides the option to
reinforce stud-to-stud
strength (horizontal
support bar not included).
Built-in Cable Support
Reduces labor and
material costs by
eliminating the need
to purchase and install
a separate cable support.
Standard 12" and 18"
Box Mounting Locations
Single-Screw Vertical
Height Adjustment
Up to 6 additional inches.

6" Height Adjustment
Markings

Cat. No.

Description

vafb

Pre-Fab Vertically Adjustable Floor Bracket

Std. ctn.

10

DBB1 Dual-Box Mounting Bracket
Locator Hole
In mounting bracket
enables installer
to position box on
marked stud for fast,
precise installation.

Accommodates
both 4" and
411⁄16" boxes

UL Listed

Built-in Far-Side Support
Stabilizes box and bracket
assembly to ease installation
and eliminate the need
to purchase and install
extra components.

www.tnb.com

Power on Both Sides of the Stud

Power Left of Stud and Low
Voltage Right of the Stud

Low Voltage on Both Sides
of the Stud

Power and Low Voltage on the
Same Side of the Stud

Cat. No.

Description

DBbI

Pre-Fab Dual-Box Bracket

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std. ctn.

50

A-15

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Pre-Fab Components and Assemblies
Meet Code Requirements
for Supporting and Securing
Installed MC Cable.
Cable Support Bracket
•	 Provides a simple means of complying with NEC®
330.30 requirements for securing and supporting
MC cable
•	 Quick and easy locking tab snaps through slot
to secure cable
•	 Ribs maintain separation of cables
•	 Durable steel construction retains integrity
•	 Versatile design — use with Romex or MC cable
•	 UL Listed

Cat. N0.

Description

CSB1

Cable Support Bracket

Std. CTN.

100

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire
Protection Association, Inc.

A-16

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Switch Boxes and Accessories
Steel City Super Deep 4"
Square Wall Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

®

• Increased capacity accommodates large devices in commercial
and industrial applications, such as fire alarm systems
• Red-painted version available for quick
and easy identification
of life safety electrical systems
• Available with or without integrally
mounted support bracket

521911234RD
521911234CVRD

521911234
521911234CV

CAT. NO.

DESCRIPTION

521911234RD
31⁄2"-Deep, 4"-Square Red Box
521911234CVRD 31⁄2"-Deep, 4"-Square Red Box
with Side Mounting Bracket
521911234
31⁄2"-Deep, 4"-Square Box
521911234CV
31⁄2"-Deep, 4"-Square Box
with Side Mounting Bracket

www.tnb.com

Ears

Brackets

each side ko

each end ko

bottom ko

—
—

—
CV

(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

(2) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(2) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

46
46

24
10

—
—

—
CV

(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

(2) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(2) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
(4) 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

46
46

24
10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

cu. in. capacity std. ctn.

A-17

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
Easy Depth Adjustment After Wall Covering Installation.
Adjust-A-Box

®

The Adjust-A-Box System adapts to a variety of wall coverings.
Its unique design enables the installer to adjust the box to
various depths with the turn of a screw.

Features:
•	 Unique design allows for adjustment of depth 	
after the wall covering has been installed

Adjustable Screw
Allows adjustment to any
wall-covering thickness.
Pre-Installed
Ground Screw

•	 Adjusts to any wall covering
•	 Mounts square and secure every time
•	 Removes easily to enable inner-wall access

1
⁄2"
Knockouts
for MC Cable
and EMT

MB120ADJ

•	 Accommodates high- and low-voltage applications
•	 Pre-installed ground screw
•	 Accommodates non-metallic cable, flexible metal
cable and EMT

Clamps
for NonMetallic
Cable

MB238ADJ

Installation:
Screw bracket to stud

	

Single-Gang		

Two-Gang

Volume
(cu. in.)

Cat. No.
MB120ADJ
MB238ADJ

Adjust box in or out to any wall thickness

20
38

	

Description

One-Gang Adjustable Wall Box
Two-Gang Adjustable Wall Box

Single-Gang		

Knockouts

Size (In.)

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2" (5)
⁄2" (8)

2.20W x 3.28H x 3.52D
4.01W x 3.28H x 3.52D

18
12

19.25
17.60

1
1

33⁄4" x 2" Switch Boxes

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity Clamps Ears Brkts.

Non-Gangable
SSV
1
SSQV
1

6.5
6.5

—
Yes

—
—

Flat
Flat

Two-Gang

SSQV with non-metallic
sheathed cable clamps

Knockouts

2 pry-outs one end
2 pry-outs one end
with non-metallic
cable clamps

Std.
Ctn.

25
25

Not UL Listed.
SSV

A-18

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Switch Boxes and Accessories

LCOWC
Adapts to any wall
thickness up to 3⁄4"

LCOW-25
Ears flush
old work

SWB-25
Ears flush
for old work

811-SW-25
S bracket recessed 5⁄8"

LXMWOW-25
Ears flush
for old work

LCV-25
CV bracket
recessed 3⁄4"

LCNOW-25
Ears flush
for old work

802-S
S bracket recessed 5⁄8"

A12-25

LXWOW-25
Ears flush
for old work

LXWOWP

LXWLE-25

LXWOWC-25
Adapts to any wall
thickness up to 3⁄4"

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

3" x 2" Switch Boxes

LCLE-25

A12E-25
Ears flush

A16-25
With nails

LXWSV
SV bracket
recessed 7⁄16"

LXWV-25
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.
SWB-25
811 SW-25
LXMWOW-25
LCOW-25*
LCOWC*
LCLE-25*
LCV-25*
LCNOW-25*
802 S*
A12-25
A12E-25
A16-25
LXWOW-25
LXWOWP
LXWLE-25
LXWOWC-25
LXWSV
LXWV-25

* Beveled corners.

Depth
(In.)

11⁄2
11⁄2
2
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2

Gangable

Cu. In.
Capacity

Clamps

Ears

—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

7.5
7.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5

C-5
C-5
C-5
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5

Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
—
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
—
—

www.tnb.com

Brkts.

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Cable

Bottom
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

—
S
—
—
—
—
CV
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SV
CV

—
—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–11⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1–1⁄2
—
1–1⁄2
1–11⁄2

—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

25
50
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-19

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
3" x 2" Switch Boxes (continued)

806 SW
S bracket recessed 5⁄8"

LXWV 2G
2-gang with CV
bracket recessed 7⁄8"

806 SW 1/4
S bracket recessed 1⁄4"

A254-25

A257-25
With nails slanted
for easy drive-in

CXWLE

A-258
Without nails

CWN-25
Ears flush

CWNLE

CWNV-25
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

CXWOW
Ears flush
for old work

CXWOWP

CXWV
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

CXWVP

With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps (continued)
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.
LXWV 2G
806 SW
806 SW 1⁄4
A254-25
A257-25
A-258
CWN-25
CWNLE
CWNV-25
CXWLE
CXWOW
CXWOWP
CXWV
CXWVP

A-20

Depth
(In.)

21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

Gangable

Cu. In.
Capacity

Clamps

Ears

Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
14.0
14.0
14.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0

C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5
C-5

—
—
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
—

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Brkts.

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Cable

Bottom
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

CV
S
S
—
—
—
—
—
CV
—
—
—
CV
CV

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
—
—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–11⁄2
2–1⁄2

2–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–11⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
—
—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–11⁄2

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Switch Boxes and Accessories

CDOW
Ears flush

CDOWTG-25
Ears flush

CDLE-25

CDV-25
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

CW 1/2
Ears flush

CW3/4-25
Ears flush

CWLE1/2-25

CWLE 3/4

CY 1/2
Ears flush

CY 3/4
Ears flush

CYLE 1/2

CYLE 3/4

804 S
S bracket recessed 5⁄8"

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

3" x 2" Switch Boxes (continued)

CWV 1/2
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

With Conduit KOs
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.
CDOW
CDOWTG-25
CDLE-25
CDV-25
804 S
CW 1/2
CW3/4-25
CWLE1/2-25
CWLE 3/4
CWV 1/2
CY 1/2
CY 3/4
CYLE 1/2
CYLE 3/4

Depth
(In.)

21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

Gangable

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ears

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0

Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Yes
Yes
—
—

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Brkts.

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

—
—
—
CV
S
—
—
—
—
CV
—
—
—
—

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4

21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

50
25
25
25
25
50
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-21

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
3" x 2" Switch Boxes (continued)

LXMOW-25
Ears flush
for old work

LXOW-25
Ears flush
for old work

LXOWC-25
Adapts to 3⁄4"
wall thickness

LXLE

LXV-25
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

LXVP

806 S
S bracket recessed 5⁄8"

A-256
With nails slanted
for easy drive-in

CWX-25
Ears flush

CWXV-25
CV bracket
recessed 1⁄2"

CX
Ears flush

CXLE-SSX
For metal stud

CXP

CXV
CV bracket
recessed 7⁄8"

CXLESSX

With Armored Cable/Metal Clad Clamps
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.
LXMOW-25
LXOW-25
LXOWC-25
LXLE
LXV-25
LXVP
806 S
A-256
CWX-25
CWXV-25
CX
CXLE-SSX
CXP
CXV

A-22

Depth
(In.)

2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
23⁄4
23⁄4
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

Gangable

Cu. In.
Capacity

Clamps

Ears

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

10.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
14.0
14.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0

C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3
C-3

Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
Yes
No
Yes
—

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Brkts.

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

—
—
—
—
CV
CV
S
—
—
CV
—
SSX
—
CV

—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2

2
—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
—
—
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Switch Boxes and Accessories

51

51-LC

51-NE

51-FB

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

Cat. No.
51

10.0

51-NE

10.0

51-LC

10.0

51-FB

10.0

Std.
CTN.

2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Two nail holes in sides. Furnished with plaster ears*
2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Two nail holes in sides*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, two Loom KOs in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears.
One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Two nail holes in sides*
2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*

50
50
50

50

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Gangable Switch Boxes — 2" Deep

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

Gangable Switch Boxes — 21⁄2" Deep

52

Cat. No.

52-3/4-BW

52-NE

52-NE-3/4

52-LCNE

52-FB-3/4

52-FBC

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

52

12.5

52-3/4-BW

12.5

52-NE

12.5

52-NE-3/4

12.5

52-LCNE

12.5

52-FB-3/4

12.5

52-FBC

12.5

Std.
CTN.

21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.Furnished with plaster ears. Four nail holes in sides*
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears. Four nail holes in sides*
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Four nail holes in sides*
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each of two sides, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Four nail holes in sides*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end. One 1⁄2" KO in bottom. One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed
cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Four nail holes in sides*
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, one KO in each end and two 3⁄4" KOs in bottom. Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. One Loom clamp for
use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*

50
50
50
50
50

50
50

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-23

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
Gangable Switch Boxes — 23⁄4" Deep

53

53-3/4-BW

53-FBC

Cat. No.

53-NE

53-FB-MXN

53-NE-3/4

53-OWEC

53-LCNE

53-OWE

53-FB

53-OWE-MXN

Cu. In.
Capacity Description

53

14.0

53-3/4-BW

14.0

53-NE

14.0

53-NE-3/4

14.0

53-LCNE

14.0

53-FB

14.0

53-FBC

14.0

53-FB-MXN

14.0

53-OWEC

14.0

53-OWE

14.0

53-OWE-MXN

14.0

Std.
CTN.

23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears. Four nail holes in sides*
23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears. Four nail holes in sides*
23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Four nail holes in sides*
23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Four nail holes in sides*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Four nail holes in sides*
23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
Flat offset 9⁄16" from face. One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled*
For Metal Clad Cable, 23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end, and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
One MXN clamp for MC, AC/BX, and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screw.
Clamp is UL Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground*
For Non-Metallic Cable, 23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears.
One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. With old-work swing brackets*
23⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and two 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Furnished with plaster ears. With old-work swing brackets*
For Metal-Clad Cable, 2 3⁄4" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side. Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. One MXN clamp for MC,
AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screw. Clamp is UL Listed for use with cable sizes
14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Furnished with plaster ears. With old-work swing brackets*

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

A-24

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

50
50
50

Switch Boxes and Accessories

54-FBC

54-LC

Cat. No.
54-LC

54-FBC

54-FB-MXN

18.0

18.0

72-C

72-OC

72-OWE

72-ONS-MXN

72-FB-MXN

54-FB-MXN

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

18.0

72

Std.
CTN.

For Non-metallic Cable
31⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in each side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2"
KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two Loom
clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with
10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled. Furnished
with plaster ears. Four nails holes in sides*
For Non-metallic Cable
31⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket and two 1⁄2" KOs
in other side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each
end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed
cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled.
Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
For Metal Cable, 31⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket and two 1⁄2" KOs
in other side, two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each
end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.

50

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

Cat. No.
72

12.5

72-C

12.5

72-OC

12.5

72-OWE

12.5

72-ONS-MXN

12.5

72-FB-MXN

12.5

50

50

Two MXN clamps for MC, AC/BX, and non-metallic
sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deepslotted screws. Clamps are UL Listed for use with
cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Flat
bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one
1
⁄2" KO in bottom. Four nail holes included*
For Non-Metallic Cable
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one
1
⁄2" KO in bottom. Four nail holes included. One Loom
clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with
10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled*
For Non-metallic Cable
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and
one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. One Loom clamp for use on
non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted
screw assembled. Four nail holes included. Provisions
for external nails included*
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one
1
⁄2" KO in bottom. With old-work swing brackets*
For Metal-Clad Cable
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one
1
⁄2" KO in bottom. One MXN clamp for MC, AC/BX and
nonmetallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32
deep-slotted screw. Clamp is UL Listed for use with
cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Four nail
holes included. Two 16-penny nails swaged at an
angle in box*
For Metal-Clad Cable
21⁄2" deep x 3" long x 2" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end, one 1⁄2"
KO in bottom and flat bracket on one side offset 9⁄16"
from face. Two MXN clamps for MC, AC/BX and nonmetallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32
deep-slotted screws. Clamps are UL Listed for use
with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Four
nail holes included*

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Welded Non-Gangable Switch Boxes
— 21⁄2" Deep

Gangable Switch Boxes
— 3 1⁄2" Deep

Std.
CTN.

50

50

50

50
50

50

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-25

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
Welded Non-Gangable Switch Boxes — 213⁄16" Deep

Cat. No.
73-ONCS

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

15.8

73-FBC

15.8

73-FB-MXN

15.8

Std.
CTN.

For Non-metallic Cable, 213/16" deep x 3" long x 29/64" wide
50
Two Loom KOs and one 1/2" KO in each end and one 1/2" KO in bottom. One Loom
clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled.
Two 16-penny nails swaged at an angle in box*
50
For Non-metallic Cable, 213/16" deep x 3" long x 29/64" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end, one 1⁄2" KO in bottom and flat bracket on one
side offset 9/16" from face. One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with
10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Four nail holes included*
50
For Metal-Clad Cable, 213/16" deep x 3" long x 29/64" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1/2" KO in each end, one 1/2" KO in bottom and flat bracket on one
side offset 9⁄16" from face. One MXN clamp for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable
(NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screw. Clamp is UL Listed for use with cable sizes
14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Four nail holes included*

73-ONCS

73-FBC

73-FB-MXN

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

Welded Non-Gangable Switch Boxes — 3" Deep

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

74-ce

18

74-oncs

18

74-FBc

18

Std.
CTN.

For Non-metallic Cable, 31⁄8" deep x 3" long x 21⁄4" wide
50
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2” KO in bottom. One Loom clamp
for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled.
Furnished with ears. Four nail holes included*
50
For Non-metallic Cable, 31⁄8" deep x 3" long x 21⁄4" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. One Loom
clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled.
Two 16-penny nails swaged at an angle in box*
50
For Non-metallic Cable, 31⁄8" deep x 3" long x 21⁄4" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end, one 1⁄2" KO in bottom and flat bracket on one
side offset 9⁄16" from face. One Loom clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with
10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled. Four nail holes included*

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

74-CE

74-ONCS

74-FBC

Welded Non-Gangable Switch Box — 313⁄32" Deep

Cat. No.
75-oncs

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

20.0

Std.
CTN.

For Non-metallic Cable, 313⁄32" deep x 3" long x 21⁄4" wide
Two Loom KOs and one 1⁄2" KO in each end and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two Loom
clamp for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screw assembled.
Four nail holes included. Two 16-penny nails swaged at angle in box*.

50
75-ONCS

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

A-26

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Switch Boxes and Accessories

Cat. No.

std.
CTN.

Capacity DESCRIPTION

271-FBC

25.0

271-FB-MXN

25.0

A Two-Gang Box — For Non-Metallic Cable, 21/2" deep x 3" long x 4" wide
Two Loom KOs and two 1/2" KOs in each end, flat bracket on one side and one 1/2"
KO in bottom. Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32
deep-slotted screws assembled. Flat bracket offset 9/16" from face*
A Two-Gang Box — For Metal-Clad Cable, 21/2" deep x 3" long x 4" wide
Two Loom KOs and two 1/2" KOs in each end, flat bracket on one side and one 1/2"
KO in bottom.Two MXN clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM)
included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are UL Listed for use with cable
sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Flat bracket offset 9/16" from face*

25

271-FBC

25

*Uses Steel City ® SB-2 covers.
271-FB-MXN

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Welded Multi-Gangable Switch Boxes — 21⁄2" Deep

4" x 21⁄16" Thru-Wall Box

Cat. No.

cu. in.
Capacity

DESCRIPTION

With Conduit KOs for Plaster or Dry Wall
CTDW
32.0
Drywall, partition type; one 1/2" and one 3/4" KO both
ends; one 1/2" KO on one side, V bracket other side

box depth
(in.)

std.
Ctn.

45/16

25

CTDW

Switch Box Extension

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

SBEX

Cubic content 3.5 inches; fits snugly inside of all
single-gang switch boxes; maximum adjustable depth 7⁄8";
furnished with 11⁄4"-long screws for mounting

50

UL Listing not applicable — subject to approval by local inspector.
SBEX

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-27

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Switch Boxes and Accessories
Old-Work Box Support
•	 Quickly attaches box through
finished drywall

•	 New 820D shipped in onepiece break-apart design

•	 For up to 11⁄2" thick drywall

•	 Easy to install

— 2 3⁄4 —
Fig.
No.

Cat. No.
820D

1

Fig. 1

STD.
CTN.

Description

Old-work switch box steel-mounting holder

500 sets

Steel Low-Voltage Bracket
•	 Fixes to the switch box easily
with the screws provided
•	 Works with any Steel City® switch box,
regardless of depth
•	 Single-screw fixing as well as two-screw fixing
•	 Low-voltage cable support is provided
by fitting location tabs
•	 UL Listed for low-voltage support

LVB

Cat. No.

Description

LVB

Bracketed to T&B boxes; provides
means of installing a low-voltage device
alongside a regular switch or outlet

Box Depth
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

11⁄8

25

Old-Work Box Support Clips
•	 Adapts to any wall thickness up to 3⁄4"

OWC

Description

OWC

Clips lock old-work steel switch boxes tightly to wall
plaster, drywall, concrete block, brick or concrete.
2 required per box, (1 set)
Swing ears only (for field installations)
with self-threading screws

OW SWING EAR

A-28

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

250
sets
50
(25 pair)

OW Swing Ear

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

With Conduit KOs
56111
56111-CFB*

⁄2
⁄2

1
1

Cu. In.
Capacity Description

6.0
6.0

Conduit
Bottom

Std.
Ctn.

4–1⁄2
2–1⁄2

50
10

Steel outlet box
Ceiling fan box with plastic Romex
connector included. NC501-SC

56111-CFB

56111

*Meets NEC ® 314.27(c) up to 35 lb. fan.
56111-CFB is shipped with plastic cover and all hardware.
50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

­4" Pancake Boxes
Cat. No.
410-LC

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

Std.
CTN.

For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable, 4" diameter — 1⁄2" deep
Three 1⁄2" KOs in a line and four Loom KOs at opposite ends in bottom.
Furnished with two Loom clamps for non-metallic cable with 10/32
deep-slotted screws and two 8/32 x 1⁄2" screws in ears*

5.8

50

*Uses Steel City ® 500 series covers.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Round Boxes

410-LC

50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

31⁄2" Round Boxes
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Clamps

With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps
1
⁄2
4.0
C-8
36115 C30
3
36125 D
⁄4
4.0
C-10

Bottom
Conduit

Cable

Std.
Ctn.

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

4
4

30
25

36115 C30
Cover screws supplied

36125 D
Cover screws supplied

50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

31⁄4" Pancake Boxes
Cat. No.
210-L

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

4.0

Std.
CTN.

For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable, 31⁄4" diameter — 1⁄2" deep. Three
1
⁄2" KOs in a line with four Loom KOs at opposite ends in bottom.
Furnished with two 8/32 x 1⁄2" screws*

100
210-L

*Uses Steel City ® 300 series covers.
50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

Covers for 31⁄2" Round and Octagon Boxes
CAT. No.

Description

Std.
Ctn.

24C1-25
24-C-6

Flat, blank
Flat with 1⁄2" KO

100
25

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

24C1-25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

24-C-6

A-29

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories
31⁄2" Octagon Boxes
Knockouts (In.)
Depth
(In.)

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

Clamps

Ea. Side
Clamps

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

—
—

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
—

1–1⁄2
—

50
50

—
—

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
—

2
2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

50
50

With Conduit KOs
11.8
—
241511/2-25
11⁄2
11.8
—
25151 1/2
11⁄2
With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps
11.8
C-5
24151N-25
11⁄2
11.8
C-5
24151-NV
11⁄2

241511/2-25

25151 1/2

24151N-25

24151-NV
V bracket
recessed 1⁄2"

50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

31⁄2" Octagon Boxes

3-O-SPL

3-O-LCE

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

3-O-SPL
3-O-LCE

11⁄2
11⁄2

11.8
11.8

3-O-B-1/2

11⁄2

11.8

3-O-B-MXN

11⁄2

11.8

3-O-LCH

11⁄2

11.8

3-O-B-1/2

3-O-B-MXN

3-0-LCH

Cu. In.
Capacity Description

One 1⁄2" KO in each of two opposite sides, one 3⁄4" KO in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, two 1⁄2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two ears,
one on each of two opposite sides. Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deepslotted screws assembled*
One 1⁄2" KO in each of three sides, flat bracket on fourth side, with one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Flat bracket offset 1⁄2"
from face*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in side opposite bracket and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
Two MXN clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws.
Clamps are UL Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Flat bracket offset 1⁄2" from face*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two Loom
champs for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled. Hanger bracket for
overhead work*

*Uses Steel City ® 31⁄2" octagonal extension rings and 300 series rings and covers.
50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

A-30

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Construction
Type

Std.
CTN.

Drawn
Drawn

50
50

—

50

Drawn

50

Drawn

50

54151 N

54151 NE
Adjustable ears
recessed 5⁄8"

54151 NL
L bracket flush mounted

54171NV-25
V bracket recessed 1⁄2"

54151 1/2

54151 3/4

54151 NV
V bracket recessed 1⁄2"

54171N-25

54171 NL
L bracket mounted flush

54151 1/2 & 3/4

54151 V 1/2
V bracket
recessed 1⁄2"

54151 L 1/2
L bracket flush mounted

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories
4" Octagon Boxes

Knockouts (In.)
Depth
(In.)

Cat. No.
54151 J 1/2 — Mounted on 6010-DW bar adjustable
10 1⁄2" to 18 1⁄2". Offset for 1⁄2", 3⁄4" or 7⁄8" plaster. Maximum
horizontal positioning. 3⁄8" fixture stud.

541711/2-25

54171 1/2 3/4

54151 A

54171 3/4

54171 1

54151AV-25
V bracket recessed 1⁄2"

Cu. In.
Capacity Clamps

With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps
15.8
C-5
54151 N
11⁄2
15.8
C-5
54151 NE
11⁄2
15.8
C-5
54151 NL
11⁄2
15.8
C-5
54151 NV
11⁄2
22.5
C-5
54171N-25
21⁄8
22.5
C-5
54171 NL
21⁄8
22.5
C-5
54171NV-25
21⁄8
With Conduit KOs
15.8
—
54151 1/2
11⁄2
15.8
—
54151 3/4
11⁄2

Brkts.

Ea. Side Ea. End
Conduit Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

—
—
L
V
—
L
V

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2
2
2
2
2
2
2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

50
50
50
50
50
50
25

—
—

1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4

1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4

—
—

5–1⁄2
3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
5–1⁄2
5–1⁄2
4–1⁄2

50
50

50
25
2–3⁄4
25
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4

—
—
—
—
—
25

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

25
50
25

54151 1/2 & 3/4

11⁄2

15.8

—

—

1–1⁄2

1–3⁄4

—

54151 V 1/2
54151 L 1/2
54151 J 1/2

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2

15.8
15.8
15.8

—
—
—

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
—
—

541711/2-25
54171 3/4

21⁄8
21⁄8

22.5
22.5

—
—

V
L
With bar
hanger
1–1⁄2"
1–3⁄4"

1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4

—
—

5–1⁄2
3–1⁄2

54171 1/2 3/4

21⁄8

22.5

—

1–1⁄2"

1–3⁄4

—

3–1⁄2

54171 1

21⁄8

22.5

—

—

1–1

1–1

—

With Armored Cable/Metal-Clad Clamps
15.8
C-3
54151 A
11⁄2
15.8
C-3
54151AV-25
11⁄2
15.8
C-3
54151 AL
11⁄2

—
V
L

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

—
—
—

2
2
2

50
25
25
25

50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.
54151 AL
L bracket mounted flush

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-31

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories
4" Octagon Boxes (continued)
Depth
(IN.)

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

Bar Hanger
Number

Bar Lgth.
(in.)

Offset
For

Stud
(In.)

Std.
Ctn.

15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8

6010-DW
6010-ADW
6011-DW
6011-ADW

10 1⁄2–18 1⁄2
14 1⁄2–26 1⁄2
10 1⁄2–18 1⁄2
14 1⁄2–26 1⁄2

—
—
—
—

⁄8
⁄8
Fastener
Fastener

25
25
25
25

15.8

6010-DW

10 ⁄2–18 ⁄2

Drywall

⁄8

25

54151 NF
Octagon box mounted
on adjustable bar hanger.
50 lb. load max rating.

For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable

54151 NF
54151 NO
54151 NG
54151 NP

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2

3
3

54151 AF
Octagon box mounted
on adjustable bar hanger.
50 lb. load max rating.

For Armored Cable/Metal Clad

54151 AF

1 ⁄2
1

1

1

3

50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

4" Octagon Boxes

4-OW-MXN

4-OW-LC-BHC

4-O-ULC

4-OD-LCB

4-OD-FB-MXN

Depth Cu. In.
(in.) Capacity Description

Cat. No.
4-OW-MXN

11⁄2

15.5

4-OW-LC-BHC

11⁄2

15.5

4-O-ULC

11⁄2

15.5

4-OD-LCB

21⁄8

21.5

4-OD-FB-MXN

21⁄8

21.5

4-OD-U-MXN

21⁄8

21.5

4-OD-U-MXN
Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two MXN clamps
for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are UL Listed for
use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in other two sides. Box mounted with clip to adjustable hanger.
Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, 1⁄2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two Loom clamps for
use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled. U bracket for overhead work*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in side opposite bracket and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two Loom
clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled. Flat bracket offset 1⁄2" from face*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in side opposite bracket and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two MXN
clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are UL
Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. Flat bracket offset 1⁄2" from face*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, one 1⁄2" KO in other two sides and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom. Two MXN clamps
for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are UL Listed for
use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground. U bracket for overhead work*

Welded

50

Welded

25

Drawn

50

Drawn

25

Drawn

25

Drawn

25

*Uses Steel City ® 4" octagonal extension rings and 500 series rings and covers. 50 lb. maximum loading for fixtures.

3" Octagon Box Covers
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

300-DR

Flat — 31⁄2" diameter
For duplex receptacle in center. Screw-hole countersunk*
Flat — 31⁄2" diameter
For single receptacle in center. Opening 1.4" in diameter. Screw-holes countersunk*

300-SR

25
25

300-DR

*Fits any Steel City ® 3" octagonal outlet box or extension ring.

A-32

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

300-SR

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Round/Octagon Boxes and Accessories

Cat. No.

Raised
(In.) Description

54 C 1
54 C 6
54 C 7
54 C 3 1/2

—
—
5
⁄8
1
⁄2

54 C 3

5

1
11⁄4

54 C 14
5401-LR

5
⁄8
—

5402 LR

—

Std.
Ctn.

—
—
3.5
3.0

50
50
25
25

3.5

25

5.8
7.3

25
25

3.5
—

25
25

—

25

Flat, blank
Flat, with 1⁄2" KO
With 1⁄2" KO
Center blanked with tapped ears
on 23⁄4" centers
Center blanked with tapped ears
on 23⁄4" centers
Center blanked with tapped ears 223⁄32" centers
Center blanked with tapped ears
on 223⁄32" centers
For single device
Flat, center blanked for single receptacle —
113⁄32" dia. hole
Flat, center blanked for duplex receptacle

⁄8

54 C 3 1
54 C 3 1 1/4

Cu. In.
Cap.

54 C 1

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Round and Octagon Box Covers

54 C 6

54 C 7

54 C 3 1/2

54 C 3 1

54 C 3

54 C 3 1 1/4

For swivel covers, see accessories section on page A-46.

54 C 14

4" Octagon Box
Extension Rings

5401-LR

5402 LR

4" Octagon Box Rings and Covers

551511/2-25

55151 1/2 3/4

500-K-3/4

500-TL

Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

11⁄2
11⁄2

15.8
15.8

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4

50
25

With Conduit KOs

551511/2-25
55151 1/2 3/4

501-CA

4" Octagon Box
Extension Rings

4-OD-EXT-1/2

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity Description

4-OD-EXT-1/2

21⁄8

21.5

4-OD-EXT-SPL

21⁄8

21.5

Extension Ring
One 1⁄2" KO in each of
four sides*
Extension Ring
One 1⁄2" KO in each of two
opposite sides and one
3
⁄4" KO in other two sides*

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

500-K-3/4

—

500-TL

—

501-CA

4.5

501-CS

1.5

4-OD-EXT-SPL
Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

Drawn

25

Drawn

25

DESCRIPTION

Flat — 4" octagonal
One 3⁄4" KO in center*
Flat — 4" octagonal
Four-wire twistlock in center.
Screw holes countersunk.
Opening 1.594" diameter*
3
⁄4" raised — 4" diameter
Open plaster ring with ears.
Ears tapped 8⁄32–223⁄32" on centers.
Special screw-lock feature in slots*
1
⁄4" raised — 4" diameter
Open plaster ring with ears.
Ears tapped 8⁄32–223⁄32" on centers.
Special screw-lock feature in slots*

501-CS
Std.
CTN.

50
25

25

25

*Fits any Steel City ® 4" octagonal outlet box or extension ring.

*Uses Steel City ® 4" octagonal outlet boxes and 500 series rings and covers.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-33

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Ceiling Fan Boxes and Accessories
Fan and Fixture Support
Steel and Non-Metallic Boxes
and Bar Hangers for F­ an and
Fixture Installation
Exhaustive research and development has resulted in an innovative line
of Ceiling Fan Support Boxes that give Thomas & Betts the competitive
advantage. Ceiling fan and fixture installation is faster, easier and safer
with Steel City® Ceiling Fan Support Boxes.

•	Gold finish on ears/screws easily identifies boxes as meeting
UL and NEC® requirements for fan support
•	UL Listed up to 50 lbs. for fixture and 35 lbs. for fan
•	Each box comes complete with instructions and installation hardware

Ceiling Fan and Light Fixture Bar Hanger
•	 Square end plates keep the bar parallel with sheetrock
•	 Square section tube is easy to grip, allowing high torque for safe installation
•	 UL Listed up to 50 lbs. for fixture and 35 lbs. for fan
•	Expandable for joists spaced from 16 to 24 inches
Cat. No.
54151CFB-BHL-OW

Capacity
Cu. In.

15.8

New/Old Std.
Work Ctn.

Description

Old-Work Bar Hanger with 11⁄2" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs and
clamps for non-metallic sheathed cable

Old

10

Intended for retrofit installations,
the unique design of the Old-Work
Bar Hanger ensures a trouble-free
installation that surpasses the
competition.
NEC and National Electrical Code are
registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

Max. rec. loads 35 lbs. fan and 50 lbs. fixture.

Ceiling Fan Support Boxes
Cat. No.

Dimensions (In.)

Capacity
Cu. In. Description

56111-CFB

6.0

54151-CFB

15.8

54151-1/2-CFB-BP
54171-CFB

15.8
22.0

54171-F-CFB*
54171-1/2-F-CFB-BP

22.0
22.0

Dia.

Pan type ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs and non-metallic
sheathed cable connector
11⁄2" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs and clamps for
non-metallic sheathed cable
11⁄2" deep ceiling fan box with 5 x 1⁄2" KOs. Bulk pack
21⁄8" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs and clamps for
non-metallic sheathed cable
As 54171-CFB, but with “F” style mounting bracket
21⁄8" deep ceiling fan box with 5 x 1⁄2" KOs and “F” style
mounting bracket

Depth

4

New/Old Std.
Work
Ctn.

⁄2

Both

10

4

11⁄2

New

10

4
4

11⁄2
21⁄8

New
New

50
10

4
4

21⁄8
21⁄8

New
New

10
50

1

56111-CFB

54151-CFB

54171-CFB

54171-F-CFB

54551-CFB

54541-CFB

Knockouts (In.)
Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Ea. End
Cable

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2– 3⁄4

—

—

—

50

⁄2– ⁄4

—

—

—

50

Cat. No.

Clamps

Ears

Brkts.

54541-CFB

2 1⁄2" DP

—

Concrete ring

1

54551-CFB

3" DP

—

Concrete ring

1

3

Max. loads 35 lbs. fan and 50 lbs. fixture.
Cover — CBP or CBP-3/8. 35# fan rating, 50# fixture rated.
* Maximum load for 54171-F-CFB is 70 lbs. fan and 200 lbs. fixture.

A-34

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Ceiling Fan Boxes and Accessories
Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Extra Heavy-Duty New-Work Bar Hangers
Ceiling Fan and Light
Fixture Bar Hangers­­
This innovative extruded-aluminum bar hanger was designed for strength.
It is UL Listed for up to 70 lbs. for fan support and an industryleading 200 lbs. for fixture support

•	 Gold end plates easily identify the hanger as meeting UL
and NEC® requirements for fan support
•	 Screwed-on end plates are consis­tently strong and avoid
unsightly welds
•	 End plates feature temporary fixing spikes for hands-free installation
•	 Expandable for joists spaced from 16 to 24 inches

Cat. No.

Capacity
Cu. In.

56111CFB-BHL

6.0

54151CFB-BHL

15.8

4070CFB-BHL

21.5

CFB-BHL

*

56111CFB-BHL

54151CFB-BHL

4070CFB-BHL

CFB-BHL

Max.
Rec. Load
Description

New-work bar hanger with 1⁄2" pan-type ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs
and non-metallic sheathed cable connector
New-work bar hanger with 11⁄2" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x 1⁄2" KOs
and clamps for non-metallic sheathed cable
New-work bar hanger with non-metallic ceiling fan box with clamps
for non-metallic sheathed cable
New-work bar hanger without outlet box. Mounting bracket for outlet
box included

Fan

Fixture

New/Old
Work

Std. Ctn.

70 lbs.

200 lbs.

New

10

70 lbs.

200 lbs.

New

10

35 lbs.

50 lbs.

New

10

—

*

New

10

* Dependent on box used.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-35

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
Easy to identify and install!

Bright Red
Finish

Fire Alarm Boxes and Fittings
Steel City® Fire Alarm Boxes and Fittings can meet all of your visual identification requirements for fire alarm systems —
and make installation and upgrades faster and easier than ever before! Available in a variety of sizes to accommodate
new or old work configurations, these boxes are simple to install with high-quality Thomas & Betts fittings. Plus, the
bright red finish eliminates time-consuming painting of existing fixtures and provides long-lasting identification in even
the harshest environments.

52171-1234RD

52171-EXTRD

72171-1234RD

52151-1234RD

52171-CV-1234RD

52-C-1RD

52171-EXTOWRD

53171-1234RD

Fire Alarm Boxes
Cat. No.

Description

52171-1234RD
52151-1234RD
72171-1234RD
52171-CV-1234RD
52171-EXTRD
52171-EXTOWRD
52 C 1RD
53171-1234RD
521911234RD
521911234CVRD

21⁄8"-deep 4"-square red box
11⁄2"-deep 4"-square drawn red box
21⁄8"-deep 411⁄16" red box
21⁄8"-deep 4"-square red box with CV bracket
21⁄8"-deep 4"-square red box with ext. ring
21⁄8"-deep 4"-square red box with ext. ring and old work ears
Flat 4"-square red cover
21⁄8"-deep 4"-square red extension ring
31⁄2"-deep 4"-square red box
31⁄2"-deep 4"-square red box w/side mounting bracket

Ears Brackets

—
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
CV
—
—
—
—
—
CV

Each Side
Conduit

Each End
Conduit

Bottom
Conduit

21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
31⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
1
3
1
3
2 ⁄2", 1 ⁄4"
2 ⁄2", 1 ⁄4"
31⁄2", 23⁄4"
31⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
31⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
31⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
31⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
41⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
41⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
31⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
1
1
3
1
1
3
4 ⁄2", 2 ⁄2" & ⁄4"E
4 ⁄2", 2 ⁄2" & ⁄4"E
31⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
—
—
—
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
—
4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 2 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 2 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

Cu. In. Std.
Capacity CTN.

30.3
21.0
42.0
30.3
60.6
60.6
—
30.3
46
46

50
50
20
50
25
25
100
25
24
10

Fire Alarm Fittings

A-36

Cat. N0.

Description

TC121A-FA
TC122A-FA
TC123A-FA
TC721A-FA
TC722A-FA
TC723A-FA
TK121A-FA
TK122A-FA
TK123A-FA

⁄2" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
3
⁄4" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
1" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
1
⁄2" Red Insulated Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
3
⁄4" Red Insulated Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
1" Red Insulated Steel EMT Set Screw Connector
1
⁄2" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Coupling
3
⁄4" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Coupling
1" Red Steel EMT Set Screw Coupling

Std. CTN.

1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25

TK122A-FA

TK121A-FA

TC122A-FA

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

TC121A-FA

Square Boxes and Accessories

std.
CTn.

Cat. No.

description

52171-ow

Metallic 4"-Sq. x 21⁄8"D
Old-Work Box with factory-mounted swing ears
Swing Ears only (for field installation) with self-threading screws

ow swing ear

25

52171-OW

OW Swing Ears

50
(25 pair)

4" Square Boxes
Knockouts (IN.)

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std.
(In.) Capacity Clamps Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

With Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Clamps
52151 N
11⁄2
21.0
C-5

—

52151 MS N*

11⁄2

21.0

C-5

MS

52151 BN*

11⁄2

21.0

C-5

B

52151 VN*

11⁄2

21.0

C-5

SV

52151 CVN*

11⁄2

21.0

C-5

CV

52151CVNP*

11⁄2

21.0

C-5

CV

52171 N

21⁄8

30.3

C-5

—

52171-VN*

21⁄8

30.3

C-5

SV

With Conduit KOs
52141-1/2
52151 1/2
52151-3/4

11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2

18.0
21.0
21.0

—
—
—

52151 1/2 3/4

11⁄2

21.0

521511234P

11⁄2

52151-3/4-W
52151B1234*

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E

2

1–1⁄2

50

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

—
—
—

2– 1⁄2
3– 1⁄2
2– 3⁄4

3– 1⁄2
3– 1⁄2
2– 3⁄4

50
50
50

—

—

21.0

—

—

11⁄2

21.0

—

—

2– 1⁄2,
1– 3⁄4
2– 1⁄2,
1– 3⁄4
2– 3⁄4

2– 1⁄2,
1– 3⁄4
2– 1⁄2,
1– 3⁄4
2– 3⁄4

11⁄2

21.0

—

B

11⁄2

21.0

—

—

11⁄2

21.0

—

—

11⁄2

21.0

—

—

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

5– 1⁄2
5– 1⁄2
3– 1⁄2,
2– 3⁄4
3– 1⁄2,
2– 3⁄4
3– 1⁄2,
2– 3⁄4
3– 1⁄2,
2– 3⁄4
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

52151-1/2 & 3/4-EW
521511234EWGB
(Ground bump)
521511234EWGBP
(Ground bump with
10 1⁄2" ground wire)

52151 N

52151 MS N*
MS bracket for
1 ⁄8", 2 1⁄2", 3 5⁄8", 4"

52151 BN*
B bracket
mounted flush

52151 VN*
SV bracket
mounted flush

52151 CVN*
CV bracket
mounted flush

52151 CVNP

52171 N

52171-VN*
SV bracket
mounted flush

52141-1/2

52151 1/2

52151-3/4

52151 1/2 3/4

521511234P

52151-3/4-W

52151B1234
B Bracket mounted flush

52151-1/2 & 3/4-EW

52151-1/2 &
521511234EWGB

521511234EWGBP

5

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Square Old-Work Box
with Swing Ears

50
50
50
25
50
50
50

* All Bracketed boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts.
Per UL 514A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits
above or below 250 volts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10 1⁄2" long.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

3/4-EWGB

A-37

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
4" Square Boxes (continued)
Knockouts (IN.)
Depth Cu. In.
Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std.
(In.) Capacity Clamps Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

Cat. No.

With Conduit KOs (continued)
521511234EWP*
21.0
11⁄2
11⁄2

21.0

—

MS

11⁄2

21.0

—

SV

11⁄2

21.0

—

CV

11⁄2

21.0

—

CV

52151DV12*

11⁄2

21.0

—

DV

521711234E

21⁄8

30.3

—

—

521711234EP
(With 10 1⁄2" ground wire)

21⁄8

30.3

—

—

21⁄8

30.3

—

MS

52171MSP*
(With 10 1⁄2" ground wire)

21⁄8

30.3

—

MS

52171 3/4

21⁄8

30.03

—

—

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–3⁄4
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–3⁄4

52171 1

21⁄8

30.03

—

—

2–1

2–1

21⁄8

30.03

—

SV

21⁄8

30.03

—

CV

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2,
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

21⁄8
21⁄8

30.03
30.03

—
—

SSX
v

21⁄8

30.03

—

—

—
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

—
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

—
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
2–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E

—

—

52151 MS 1/2 & 3/4*
52151-V-1/2 & 3/4*
52151 CV 3/4*
52151 CV 1/2 3/4*

52171 MS 1/2 3/4*

52171 V 1/2 & 3/4*
52171-CV-1/2 & 3/4*

52171-EW-SSX*
521711234EP*
52171-B-1/2 & 3/4

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4,
3
⁄4E
2–3/4
2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4,
3
⁄4E
3–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–3⁄4

* All bracketed boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts.
Per UL514A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits
above or below 250 volts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10 1⁄2" long.

A-38

Cat. No.

Description

521911234
521911234CV

31⁄2"-deep 4"-square red box
31⁄2"-deep 4"-square red box w/side mounting bracket

Ears Brackets

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

—
—

—
CV

50

—
25

521511234EWP

52151 MS 1/2 & 3/4
For use on 15⁄8",
21⁄2", 3 5⁄8", 4" studs

52151-V-1/2 & 3/4
SV Bracket
mounted flush

52151 CV 3/4
CV Bracket
mounted flush

52151 CV 1/2 3/4
CV Bracket
mounted flush

52151DV1/2
DV Bracket
provides offset

521711234E

521711234EP

52171 MS 1/2 3/4*
MS bracket for 115⁄8", 2 1⁄2",
3 5⁄8", 4", 6" metal studs

52171MSP­­­­­­­­

52171 3/4

52171 1

52171 V 1/2 & 3/4
SV bracket
mounted flush

52171-CV-1/2 & 3/4
CV bracket
mounted flush

521711234EP

25
25
25
25
25
50
50
25
25
50
50
25
25

25

Each Side
KO

4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Each End
KO

Bottom
KO

2 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo
2 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo 4 x 1⁄2" & 3⁄4" Combo

www.tnb.com

Cu. In. Std.
Capacity CTN.

46
46

24
10

Square Boxes and Accessories
Knockouts (IN.)

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std.
(In.) Capacity Clamps Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

With Armored Cable/Metal-Clad Clamps
52151 X
11⁄4
21.0
C-3

—

52151XP

1

1 ⁄4

21.0

C-3

—

52151 BX*

11⁄4

21.0

C-3

B

52151 VX*

11⁄4

21.0

C-3

SV

52151 CVX*

11⁄4

21.0

C-3

CV

52151 MS X*

11⁄4

21.0

C-3

MS

For Armored Cable and Metal-Clad Cable Clamps
52171 X*
21⁄8
30.3
C-3
—
52171 MSX*

21⁄8

30.3

C-3

MS

52171MSXP
(With 101⁄2" ground wire)

21⁄8

30.3

C-3

MS

52171-CVX*

21⁄8

30.3

C-3

CV-2

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E

2

1–1⁄2

50

2

1– ⁄2

50

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
2–1⁄2,
1–1⁄2,
3
⁄4E
1
⁄2 –3⁄4

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

2

1–1⁄2

25

—

—

25

1

52151 X

52151XP

52151 BX*
B bracket
mounted flush

52151 VX*
SV bracket
mounted flush

52151 CVX*
CV bracket
mounted flush

52151 MS X*
MS bracket for 15⁄8",
2 ⁄2", 3 5⁄8", 4" metal studs

52171 X

52171 MSX*
MS bracket for 15⁄8",
2 1⁄2", 3 5⁄8", 4" metal studs

52171MSXP*

* All bracketed boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts.
Per UL514A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits
above or below 250 volts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10 1⁄2" long.
All 52171 series boxes have a raised ground bump.

Cat. No.

Description

52171-EW-SSX
52151-EF-SSX
52171-X-SSX
52151-X-SSX
CXLESSX

21⁄8"-deep with conduit KOs
11⁄2"-deep with conduit KOs
21⁄8"-deep with armored cable clamps
11⁄2"-deep with armored cable clamps
31⁄2"-deep with armored cable clamps

Vapor Tite Boxes
•	 All K.O.’s pressed flush but still easy to remove
•	 No holes anywhere
•	 Top edge of boxes are flush at ears so gasket
seals out all air

www.tnb.com

Clamps

Each Side
Conduit

Each End
Conduit

Bottom
Conduit

—
—
C3
C3
C3

11⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
11⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
11⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
11⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2"

21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 11⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
2 Cable
2 Cable
11⁄2" & 2 Cable

21⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
21⁄2", 21⁄2" & 3⁄4"E
11⁄2"
11⁄2"
11⁄2"

Cat. N0.

Description

52151-svt
52c1-vt
52171-svt
72c1-vt
72171-svt
54151-VT
54C1-VT

4" Sq. Box, 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" K.O. Side and Bottom
4" Sq. Blank Cover with Gasket
4" Sq. Box, 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" K.O. Side and Bottom
411⁄16" Sq. Blank Cover with Gasket
411⁄16" Sq. Box, 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" K.O. Side and Bottom
4" Sq. Box, 1⁄2" K.O. Side and Bottom
4" Oct. and Round Box Blank Cover

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Square Boxes (continued)

1

Cu. In.
Std.
Capacity PACK.

30
21
30
21
15

20
20
20
20
20

Depth

Std.
Pkg.

11⁄2"
Flat
21⁄8"
Flat
21⁄8"
11⁄2"
Flat

50
50
25
50
25
50
50

A-39

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
4" Square Boxes

4-SW-MXN

4-SW-LC

4-SW-AB-1/2

4-SDW-LC

Cat. No.

4-SDW-MXN

4-SW-1/2-2BC

4-SDW-FB-MXN

Depth
Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity Description

4-SW-LC

11⁄2

21.0

4-SW-MXN

11⁄2

21.0

4-SW-AB-1/2

11⁄2

21.0

4-SW-1/2-2BC

11⁄2

21.0

4-SDW-LC

21⁄8

30.3

4-SDW-MXN

21⁄8

30.3

4-SDW-FB-MXN

21⁄8

30.3

Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, three 1⁄ 2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄ 2" KO in bottom.
Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, three 1⁄ 2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄ 2" KO in bottom. Two MXN
clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are
UL Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground*
Three KOs in each of three sides, angle bracket on other side, and five 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Angle bracket offset 9⁄16" from top of box*
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each side and four 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Mounted with clip on 2-BC bar hanger.
Hanger is offset correct depth to set box flush with ceiling joist*
For Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, three 1⁄ 2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄ 2" KO in bottom.
Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, three 1⁄ 2" KOs in other two sides and one 1⁄ 2" KO in bottom. Two MXN
clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws. Clamps are
UL Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground*
For Metal-Clad Cable
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, three 1⁄ 2" KOs in side opposite flat bracket and one 1⁄ 2" KO in bottom.
Two MXN clamps for MC, AC/BX and non-metallic sheathed cable (NM) included with 10/32 deep-slotted screws.
Clamps are UL Listed for use with cable sizes 14/2 through 10/3 with ground*

Welded

50

Welded

50

Welded

50

Welded

25

Welded

25

Welded

25

Welded

25

*Uses Steel City ® 4" square extension rings and 400 series rings and covers.

4" Square Thru-Wall Box

4" Square
Two-Device
Boxes­­­
2G4D 1/2 & 3/4

2G4DV 1/2 & 3/4
CV bracket recessed 7⁄8"

X1-1/2 & 3/4

Knockouts (In.)

Knockout (In.)

Cat. No.
With Conduit KOs
X1-1/2 & 3/4

A-40

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

11⁄8

21.0

2–1⁄2, 1–3⁄4

2–1⁄2, 1–3⁄4

25

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std.
(In.) Capacity brackets Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

With Conduit KOs
2G4D 1/2 & 3/4 21⁄8

30.3

—

2G4DV 1/2 & 3/4 21⁄8

30.3

CV

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4
2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4

www.tnb.com

2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4
2–1⁄2,
1–3⁄4

3–1⁄2,
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2,
2–3⁄4

25
25

Square Boxes and Accessories

4-S-WR-1/2
52 PS 1

52 PS 2

52 PD 1

52 PD 2

Depth Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity Description

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

4-S-WR-1/2

11⁄2

21.0

4-SS-WR-1/2

11⁄2

18.0

Std.
Ctn.

Description

For 11⁄2" Deep Box with Square-Cut Tile Wall Two-Device Covers
52 PS 1
For 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" raised covers
52 PS 2
For 11⁄4", 11⁄2" and 2" raised covers
For 21⁄8" Deep Box with Square-Cut Tile Wall Two-Device Covers
52 PD 1
For 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" raised covers
52 PD 2
For 11⁄4", 11⁄2" and 2" raised covers

25
25

4-SS-WR-1/2

25
25

Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

Wall Ring
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each side.
Four 8/32 screws furnished
(two in top and two in bottom)*
Wall Ring
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each of two
opposite sides, two 1⁄2" KOs
in other two sides. Four 8/32
screws furnished (two in top
and two in bottom)**

Drawn

50

Drawn

50

*For use with two Steel City ® 403-O rings for back to back devices in 2" partitions.
**For use with two Steel City ® 403-O rings for back to back devices in 13⁄4" partitions

4" Square Rings and Covers
Cat. No.

405-B

401-CS

403-T

Cu. In.
Capacity Description

401-CS

1.0

403-T

3.5

405-B

5.0

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Square
Wall Rings

4" Square Box Partitions

Std.
Ctn.

1
⁄4" raised — 4" square
25
Open plaster ring with ears. Ears tapped 8/32–2 23⁄32"
on centers. Special screw lock feature in slots*
50
Tile Ring, 1⁄2" raised — 4" square
For single switch or receptacle. Ears tapped 8/32–
2 23⁄32" on centers*
7
⁄8" raised — 4" square
25
For single switch or receptacle*

*Fits any Steel City ® 4" square outlet box or extension ring.

4" Square Industrial Device Covers

449-BW

469

470-BW

471-NEC

472-NEC

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

449-BW

⁄2" raised — 4" square
Surface blank. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
Surface blank. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one toggle switch and one single receptacle. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one toggle switch and one duplex receptacle. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For two duplex receptacles. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*

469
470-BW
471-NEC
472-NEC

1

25
25
25
25
25

*Fits any Steel City ® 4" square outlet box or extension ring.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-41

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
4" Square Industrial Device Covers (continued)

473-NEC

474-BW

478

479-GFI

475

476

477-NEC

480-BW

481-BW

482-NEC

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

473-NEC

⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one duplex receptacle in center. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one single receptacle in center. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For two single receptacles. Openings 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For two toggle switches. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one duplex and one single receptacle. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one four-wire twist lock receptacle in center. Opening 1.594" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one GFI receptacle in center. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one toggle switch in center. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one GFI receptacle and one toggle switch. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*
1
⁄8" raised — 4" square
For one GFI and one duplex receptacle. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary mounting screws*

474-BW
475
476
477-NEC
478
479-GFI
480-BW
481-BW
482-NEC

Std. CTN.

1

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

*Fits any Steel City ® 4" square outlet box or extension ring.

4" Square Extension Rings
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

53151 1/2 3/4

531511234UB**

53151 1/2

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

11⁄2" Deep — with Conduit KOs — 21.0 Cubic Inch Capacity
53151 1/2
3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2
3
2–3⁄4
53151 3/4
2– ⁄4
2–1⁄2, 1–3⁄4
53151 1/2 3/4
2–1⁄2, 1–3⁄4
2–1⁄2
531511234UB**
2–1⁄2, 1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2 1⁄8" Deep — with Conduit KOs — 30.3 Cubic Inch Capacity
531711234*
2–1⁄2, 1–1⁄2, 3⁄4E
2–1⁄2, 1–3⁄4
53171 1
2–1
2–1

Std.
Ctn.

50
25
50
50
25
25

* Per UL 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts.
53151 3/4

A-42

531711234**

53171 1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

** ECC, KOs on sides.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Square Boxes and Accessories

52 C 49 1/2

52C5011/2-25

Raised
(In.)

­Cat. No.

For Single Device — Steel
1
52 C 49 1/2*
⁄2
3
⁄4
52-C-49-3/4*
52-C-49-1*
1
52-C-49-1-1/4
11⁄4
52C5011/2-25
11⁄2
52C512-25
2
For Two Devices — Steel
1
52 C 52 1/2
⁄2
1
⁄4
52-C-52-3/4
52-C-52-1
1
52-C-52-1-1/4
13⁄4
52 C 53 1 1/2
11⁄2
52 C 54 2
235⁄64

4" Square Covers

Cu. In.
Cap.

Std.
Ctn.

—
—
—
—
—
—

3.5
5.3
7.0
9.3
11.0
14.8

50
50
10
10
25
25

Square corners
facilitate tile installation

6.0
9.0
12.5
15.5
19.0
25.5

10
10
10
10
10
10

Description

52 C 1

52 C 52 1/2

52 C 3 1

Raised
(In.)

Cat. No.
52 C 1
52-C-3-25
52-C-3-1/2-25
52-C-3-3/4
52 C 3 1
52-C-3-1-1/4
52 C 6

—
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄8
—

Description

Flat, blank
Center blanked with tapped
ears on 23⁄4" centers
Center blanked with
tapped ears on
223⁄32" centers
Flat, with 1⁄2" KO

52 C 6

Cu. In.
Cap.

Std.
Ctn.

—
4.3
3.5
4.3
5.8
7.3
—

100
25
25
25
25
25
100

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

4" Square-Cut Tile Wall Covers

* Drawn style.

4" Square Device Covers
CAT. NO.

52 C 16

52 C 19

52 C 21

52 C 0

52 C 10

52 C 14

52-C-36

52 C 00

52-C-17-25

www.tnb.com

52 C 21

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Raised
(In.) Description

For Single Device — Steel
52 C 0
— Flat
1
⁄4 Keyed for plaster
52 C 62
1
⁄4 Offset, keyed for plaster
52 C 10
1
⁄2 —
52 C 13
3
⁄4 —
52 C 14
5
⁄8 —
52 C 14 5/8
52 C 15
1 —
52 C 16
11⁄4 —
1
⁄4 For drywall construction
52-C-36
For Two Devices
52 C 00
— Flat
1
⁄4 —
52C20-25
1
⁄2 —
52-C-17-25
3
⁄4 —
52 C 18
5
⁄8 For drywall construction
52-C-18-5/8-25
52 C 19
1 —
52 C 21
11⁄4 —
1
⁄8 —
52 C 37
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Cu. In.
Cap.

Std.
Ctn.

—
1.5
1.0
3.0
5.0
4.0
7.0
8.3
1.0

25
25
25
50
50
50
25
25
25

—
2.3
6.3
9.0
7.3
12.0
15.0
2.3

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

A-43

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
Box Support Covers
Steel City® Box Support Covers combine a box-to-stud mounting bracket
with a device cover in one, easy-to-use product. Designed for use with
4" square boxes, Steel City® Box Support Covers can be used with both
steel and wood studs.

•	 Combines cover and
bracket in one component
•	Available in one- and
two-device versions

•	 Can be used with both steel
and wood stud

•	 1⁄2", 5⁄8" and 3⁄4"
raised covers

•	 Can be used without a
box as a low voltage
device support

•	 Speeds installation time

•	UL and CSA Listed (UL File
#E2969, CSA File #LR5043)

Cat. No.
52CM13
52CM14-5/8
52CM14
52CMD17
52CMD18-5/8
52CMD18

52CMD17

Raised
(In.)

# of Devices

Cu. In.
Capacity

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

1
1
1
2
2
2

3.0
4.0
5.0
6.3
7.3
9.0

25
25
25
25
25
25

1

5

4" Square Surface Covers

RS 4

Cat. No.

Depth Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity

RS 1

1

RS 2*

1

RS 3*

1

RS 4
RS 5
RS 8*
RS 9
RS 10
RS 11
RS 12*
RS 13

1

RS 14
RS 15

1

RS-16-CC
RS-17-CC
RS-18-CC

1

RS-19-CC*

1

⁄2

5.0

⁄2

5.0

⁄2

5.0

1

⁄2

5.0

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0

⁄2
⁄2

5.0
5.0

⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

5.0
5.0
5.0

⁄2

5.0

1

1

RS 1

Dia.
Hole
(in.) Description

113⁄32 For one toggle switch and
one single flush receptacle
— For one toggle switch and
one duplex flush receptacle
113⁄32 For one single and one duplex
flush receptacle
119⁄35 For one 4-wire twist-lock single
receptacle
— For two toggle switches
— For two duplex, flush receptacles
— For one toggle switch
113⁄32 For two single, flush receptacles
113⁄32 For one single, flush receptacle
— For one duplex, flush receptacle
25
⁄32 For one 30 or 50 amp. dryer
or range receptacle
215⁄32 —
13⁄4 For #3330–30A 250 V twist-lock
receptacle
— For one ground fault receptacle
— For two ground fault receptacles
— For one ground fault receptacle
and one toggle switch
— For one ground fault receptacle
and one duplex receptacle

Remove portion of G.F.I. receptacle ear to mount receptacle to cover. Screws captivated.

A-44

52CM13

•	 Needs no far side support

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

RS 2

RS 3

RS 5

RS 8

RS 9

RS 10

RS 11

RS 12

RS 13

RS 14

RS 15

RS-16-CC

RS-17-CC

RS-18-CC

RS-19-CC

Std.
Ctn.

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
25
25
25
25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

NEW!

Adjustable Mud Rings
Mud Rings feature an inner ring that adjusts from 1⁄2" to 11⁄2" in depth to
accommodate various drywall thicknesses. Marked with a measured rule and
equipped with two adjustment screws, the inner ring can be set to the anticipated
depth prior to installation and then easily adjusted after drywall installation to
accommodate any variation in depth (1⁄2" to 11⁄2").

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
UL Listed Adjustable Mud Ring
now available in both singleand two-gang.

Wedge Locking Blocks
Designed to ensure grounding continuity

Adjustable Mud Ring Installation/Adjustment Steps:
1

3

2

Loosen…

The two adjustment screws located on opposing corners
of the mud ring.

Cat. N0.

Description

52-C-ADJ
52-C-ADJ2

Single-Gang Adjustable Mud Ring, 1⁄2" to 11⁄2"
Two-Gang Adjustable Mud Ring, 1⁄2" to 11⁄2"

www.tnb.com

Adjust…

Inner ring to be flush with wall surface.

Re-tighten…

Adjustment screws.

Std. CTN.

25
20

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-45

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
Steel City Hands-Free Swivel Hanger
®

The new Steel City® Hands-Free Swivel Hanger allows you to quickly
install high- and low-bay lighting fixtures without the need for an extra
set of hands. The hanger design enables the fixture to be set in place,
giving users access to the conductors while wiring is being completed.
The Hands-Free Swivel Hanger can support a fixture up to 50 pounds
and is ideal for gyms or other commercial sites.

•	 Fits standard 31⁄2" or 4" octagon (SHHFR1234)
•	 Fits 4" square (SHHF1234) boxes
•	A single installer can complete the installation —
saving time, labor and cost
•	Fixtures can be set in place before wiring is completed
•	 Design enables users to access the conductors
after the fixture has been mounted onto the box
•	Accommodates 1⁄2" or 3⁄4" threaded fixture pipes
•	Permits 20° swing from vertical
•	Ideal for gyms or other commercial sites
Material:	 Zinc-plated sheet-metal hanger and malleable iron swivel connector.
Listing: 	 UL and CSA Listed.

STD.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

SHHF 1/2 3/4
SHHFR 1/2 3/4

Hands-free Swivel Hanger
Hands-free Swivel Hanger (round)

25
25

Swivel Hangers

SH 1/2 & 3/4

SHR 1/2 & 3/4

Std.
Ctn.

CAT. No.

Description

SHR 1/2 & 3/4

Swivel hanger for 4" octagonal boxes

UL Listed for 50 lb. fixture support.

A-46

25

CAT. No.

Description

SH 1/2 & 3/4

Swivel hanger for 4" square boxes

UL Listed for 50 lb. fixture support.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

25

Square Boxes and Accessories
Depth Cu. In.
(In.) Capcaity

Cat. No.
With Conduit KOs
72151-1⁄2 & 3⁄4-E*

11⁄2

Ea. Side
Conduit

29.5

Ea. End
Conduit

Bottom
Conduit

3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64"

Std.
Ctn.

2–1⁄2",
2–1⁄2", 3⁄4"-E, 4–1⁄2"
⁄4–33⁄64"
3–1⁄2" & 3⁄4"-E 3–1⁄2" & 3⁄4"-E 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4"-E, 3–1⁄2"
*2–1"
2–1"
3–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4"
1–3⁄4",
1–3⁄4",
3–1⁄2", 3–3⁄4", 2–1"
1–1"
1–1"
2–11⁄4"
1–11⁄4"
3–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4"
2–1⁄2", 1–3⁄4" 2–1⁄2", 1–3⁄4"
3–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64", 3–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4– 33⁄64",
4–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64", 3–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4–33⁄64",
4–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 2–1⁄2", 2–3⁄4–33⁄64",
4–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64"
3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64" 3–1⁄2", 2–1⁄2", 3⁄4–33⁄64"

20

72171 MS 1⁄2 & 3⁄4
MS bracket for 15⁄8", 2 1⁄2", 3 5⁄8", 4" metal studs

3

72171-1/2 & 3/4-E*
72171 1
72171 3/4 1*

21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

42.0
42.0
42.0

72171 1 1/4*
72171CV 1/2 3/4*
72151 MS 1/2 3/4*
72151 MS 1/2 3/4

21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

42.0
42.0
42.0
42.0

72171 MS 1/2 3/4*
72151MSX

21⁄8
21⁄8

42.0
42.0

72151MSXP

21⁄8

42.0

72151MSP
72171MSX
72171MSXP

21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

42.0
42.0
42.0

20
20
20
20
25
20
25

72151-1/2 & 3/4-E

72171-1/2 & 3/4-E

72171 1

72171 3/4 1

72171 1 1/4

72171CV 1/2 & 3/4

25
25
25
25
25
25

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

411⁄16" Square Boxes

* P er UL 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above
or below 250 volts.

411⁄16" Square Boxes
Depth
(In.)

Cat. No.
5-SDW-FB-1

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

21⁄8

42.0

Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

Two 1" KOs in each of three sides, flat bracket on other side and three 1⁄2" KOs in
a line in bottom with two 3⁄4" KOs at opposite ends in bottom. Four tapped ears*

Welded

25

5-SDW-FB-1

411⁄16" Square Box Extension Rings
Knockout (In.)
Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

With Conduit KOs
73151 1/2 3/4*

11⁄2

29.5

21⁄8

42.0

73171 1

21⁄8

42.0

2–1⁄2
11⁄4
2–1⁄2
11⁄4
2–1

20

73171 1/2 3/4*

2–1⁄2
11⁄4
2–1⁄2
13⁄4
2–1

Cat. No.

20
73151 1/2 & 3/4

73171 1/2 & 3/4

73171 1

72 C 6

72 C 3

20

411⁄16" Square Covers
Cat. No.
72 C 1
72 C 6
72 C 3
72-C-3-1/2
72-C-3-3/4
72-C-3-1

Cu. In.
Capacity

—
—
3.5
3.0
4.3
5.8

Raised
(in.)
Description

—
—
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

Flat blank
Flat with 1⁄2" KO
Center blanked
with tapped ears
on 223⁄32” centers

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

50
25
10
25
10
25
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

72 C 1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-47

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Square Boxes and Accessories
411⁄16" Square Rings and Covers

411⁄16" Square Surface Covers­

604-B

601-CD

RSL 2

RSL 4

RSL 5

RSL 8

RSL 9

RSL 11

RSL 12

RSL 13

RSL 14

RSL 15

604-F

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

601-CD

8.8

604-F

—

604-B

2.8

Std.
CTN.

DESCRIPTION

11⁄4" raised — 411⁄16" square
Open plaster ring with ears. Ears tapped 8/32–223⁄32"
on centers. Special screw lock feature in slots*
Flat — 411⁄16" square
For two switches or receptacles*
1
⁄4" raised — 411⁄16" square
For two switches or receptacles*

25

25
25

*Fits any Steel City ® 411⁄16" square outlet box or extension ring.

RSL 16

411⁄16" Square Tile Rings

RSL 17

Dia.
Cu. In. Hole
Cat. No. Depth (In.) Capacity (in.) Description

RSL 2

1

RSL 4

1

*Fits any Steel City ® 411⁄16" square outlet box or extension ring.

RSL 5
RSL 8
RSL 9
RSL 11
RSL 12
RSL 13

411⁄16" Square Box Partitions

RSL 14
RSL 15

1

RSL 16
RSL 17
RSL 18

1

RSL 19

1

608-C

Cat. No.
608-C

72 PS 1

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

12.5

Std.
CTN.

DESCRIPTION

1" raised — 411⁄16" square
For two switches or receptacles*

72 PS 2

RSL 18

72 PD 1

10

72 PD 2

⁄2

7.5

—

1

⁄2

7.5

111⁄32

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5

—
—
15
⁄32
155⁄64
—
25⁄32

⁄2
⁄2

7.5
7.5

215⁄32
13⁄4

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2

7.5
7.5
7.5

—
—
—

⁄2

7.5

—

1

1

1

For one toggle switch and
one duplex flush receptacle
For one 4-wire twist-lock
single receptacle
For two toggle switches
For two duplex, flush receptacles
For one toggle switch
For one single, flush receptacle
For one duplex, flush receptacle
For one 30A to 50A
dryer or range receptacle
—
For #3330–30A 250 V
twist-lock receptacle
For one ground fault receptacle
For two ground fault receptacles
For one ground fault receptacle
and one toggle switch
For one ground fault receptacle
and one duplex receptacle

Std.
Ctn.

Description

For 11⁄2" Deep Box with Square-Cut Tile Wall — Two-Device Covers
72 PS 1
72 PS 2

For 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" raised covers
For 11⁄4", 11⁄2" and 2" raised covers

25
25

For 2 1⁄8" Deep Box with Square-Cut Tile Wall — Two-Device Covers
72 PD 1
72 PD 2

A-48

For 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" raised covers
For 11⁄4", 11⁄2" and 2" raised covers

25
25

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

RSL 19

Std.
Ctn.

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

Square Boxes and Accessories

72 C 13

411⁄16" Square-Cut Tile Wall Covers

72 C 14

72 C 15

72 C 52 3/4

72 C 49 3/4

72 C 17

Cat. No.

72 C 53 1 1/2

72 C 50 1 1/2

72 C 21
Raised
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
11⁄4

1.0
3.0
5.0
4.0
7.0
8.3

25
25
25
25
10
10

⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
11⁄4

6.3
9.0
7.5
12.0
15.0

25
25
25
25
25

For Single Device

Cat. No.

Raised
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

3.5
5.3
7.0
7.0
9.0
14.5

10
10
10
10
10
20

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

6.0
9.0
12.5
15.5
19.0
25.5

10
10
25
25
10
10

For Single Device — Steel

72 C 62
72 C 13
72 C 14
72 C 14 5/8
72 C 15
72 C 16

1

72-C-49-1/2
72 C 49 3/4
72-C-49-1
72-C-49-1-1/4
72 C 50 1 1/2
72 C 51 2

1

3

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

411⁄16" Square Device Covers

For Two Devices — Steel

For Two Devices
72 C 17
72 C 18
72 C 18 5/8
72 C 19
72 C 21

1

72-C-52-1/2
72 C 52 3/4
72-C-52-1
72-C-52-1-1/4
72 C 53 1 1/2
72 C 54 2

1

3

411⁄16" Square Industrial Device Covers

649

Cat. No.

650-BW
Cu. In.
Capacity

649

7.5

650-BW

7.5

655

7.5

657-NEC

7.5

663-BW

7.5

665-BW

7.5

655

657-NEC

663-BW

665-BW
Std.
CTN.

DESCRIPTION

⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
Surface blank. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
For one toggle switch and one single receptacle. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
For two single receptacles. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
For one duplex and one single receptacle. Opening 1.4" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
For two three-wire twist lock receptacles. 11⁄16" spacing between 1.4" diameter openings.
Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1
⁄2" raised — 411⁄16" square
Opening to accommodate Hubbell 3330 receptacle in center.
Opening 1.75" diameter. Each cover individually packaged with the necessary screws for mounting*
1

10
10
10
10
10

10

*Fits any Steel City ® 411⁄16" square outlet box or extension ring.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-49

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Utility Boxes and Accessories
41⁄8" x 21⁄2" Utility Boxes

4" x 21⁄8" Utility Boxes

68361 1/2

58351 1/2*

68371 1/2

Knockouts (In.)

58361 1/2*

58351 B 1/4
B bracket recessed 1⁄4"

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Bottom
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

17.0
18.8

3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2

1–1⁄2
1–11⁄2

2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2

25
50

With Conduit KOs
68361 1/2* 115⁄16
68371 1/2* 23⁄16

* Factory-provided raised ground-screw location.

4" x 21⁄8" Utility Box Covers
58361 3/4

58371 3/4

58371 1/2*

58361 V 1/2*
CV bracket recessed 1⁄2"

58371 T 1/2
T bracket recessed 5⁄8"

58 C 5

58 C 6

58 C 7

58 C 11

58 C 16

58 C 30

Depth Cu. In.
Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std
(IN.) Capacity Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

With Conduit KOs
58351 1/2*
11⁄2
58351 B 1/4
11⁄2
58361 1/2*
17⁄8
58361 3/4
17⁄8
58361 V 1/2*
17⁄8
58371 1/2*
21⁄8
58371 3/4
21⁄8
58371 T 1/2*
21⁄8
58371V1/2-25* 21⁄8

Cat. No.
10.3
10.3
13.0
13.0
13.0
14.5
14.5
14.5
14.5

—
B
—
—
CV
—
—
T
CV

3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
3–1⁄2
3–1⁄2

1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4
1–1⁄2
1–1⁄2

2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2
2–3⁄4
2–1⁄2
2–1⁄2

* Factory-provided raised ground-screw location.

A-50

58 C 4

58371V1/2-25*
CV bracket recessed 1⁄2"

Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

58 C 1

50
25
50
50
50
50
50
25
25

Raised 1⁄4"
58 C 1
58 C 4
58 C 5
58 C 6
58 C 7
58 C 11
58 C 16
58 C 30

Dia. Hole
(in.) Description

—
119⁄32
113⁄32
—
—
—
—
—

Blank
For 4-wire twist-lock single flush receptacle
For single receptacle
With 1⁄2" KO
For duplex flush receptacle
With 15⁄32" bushed hole
For single GFCI receptacle
For one toggle switch

Includes captivated Phillips head screws.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

100
25
25
25
100
25
25
100

Utility/Handy Boxes and Accessories
Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

41⁄8" x 21⁄2" Utility
Box Covers Raised 3⁄16"
68-C-1

Cat. No.

Dia. Hole
(in.)
Description

68 C 1
68 C 5
68 C 6
68 C 7
68 C 30

—
113⁄32
—
—
—

Std.
Ctn.

Blank
For single receptacle
With 1⁄2" KO
For duplex flush receptacle
For one toggle switch

25
25
25
25
25

68 C 5

68 C 6

68 C 30

68 C 7

Includes captivated Phillips head screws.

4" x 21⁄8" Utility Box Extension Rings
Knockouts(In.)

Cat. No.

Depth
(In.)

With Conduit KOs
59361 1/2
17⁄8
59361 3/4
17⁄8

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

Std.
Ctn.

13.0
13.0

3–1⁄2
2–3⁄4

1–1⁄2
1–3⁄4

50
25

59361 3⁄4

59361 1⁄2

Handy Boxes

102-W-LB-1/4

Cat. No.

103-W-AB
Depth
(In.)

104-W-FB-3/4

106-3/4

106-FB-1/2

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

102-W-LB-1/4

11⁄2

10.3

103-W-AB

17⁄8

13.0

104-W-FB-3/4

21⁄8

14.5

106-3/4

23⁄16

18.0

106-FB-1/2

23⁄16

18.0

106-FB-3/4

23⁄16

18.0

106-FB-3/4
Construction Std.
Type
CTN.

11⁄2" deep x 4" long x 21⁄8" wide
Three 1⁄2" KOs in one side, lateral bracket on other side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and three 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Furnished with four mounting holes in bottom. Bracket offset 1⁄4" from face*
17⁄8" deep x 4" long x 21⁄8" wide
Three 1⁄2" KOs in one side, angle bracket on other side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and three 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
21⁄8" deep x 4" long x 21⁄8" wide
Two 3⁄4" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and two 3⁄4" KOs in bottom.
Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
23⁄16" deep x 41⁄8" long x 23⁄8" wide
Two 3⁄4" KOs in each side, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and three 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Two mounting holes in bottom
23⁄16" deep x 41⁄8" long x 23⁄8" wide
Three 1⁄2" KOs in one side, flat bracket on other side, one 1⁄2" KO in each end and three 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face
23⁄16" deep x 41⁄8" long x 23⁄8" wide
Two 3⁄4" KOs in each side, flat bracket on other side, one 3⁄4" KO in each end and three 1⁄2" KOs in bottom.
Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face

Welded

50

Welded

50

Welded

50

Drawn

50

Drawn

50

Drawn

50

*Uses Steel City ® 100 series covers.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-51

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Handy/Gang Boxes and Accessories
Multi-Gang Handy Boxes

132-W-1/2

132-W-AB-1/2

132-W-FB-3/4

132-W-FB-1/2

134-BW

132-W-FBC

Depth
Cu. In.
(In.) Capacity DESCRIPTION

Cat. No.
132-W-1/2

21⁄8

30.3

132-W-FB-1/2

21⁄8

30.3

132-W-FB-3/4

21⁄8

30.3

132-W-AB-1/2

21⁄8

30.3

132-W-FBC

21⁄8

30.3

134-BW

21⁄8

58.0

Std.
CTN.

A Two-Gang Box, 21⁄8" deep — 4" square
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each of four sides and three 1⁄2" KOs in a line in bottom with two 3⁄4" KOs at opposite ends in bottom*
A Two-Gang Box, 21⁄8" deep — 4" square
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each of three sides, flat bracket on fourth side and five 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
A Two-Gang Box, 21⁄8" deep — 4" square
Two 3⁄4" KOs in each of three sides, flat bracket on fourth side and three 1⁄2" KOs in a line with two 3⁄4" KOs at opposite ends in bottom.
Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
A Two-Gang Box, 21⁄8" deep — 4" square
Three 1⁄2" KOs in each of three sides, angle bracket on fourth side and five 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
For Non-Metallic Cable — A Two-Gang Box, 21⁄8" deep — 4" square
Two Loom KOs in each of two opposite sides, two 1⁄2" KOs in side opposite flat bracket and one 1⁄2" KO in bottom.
Two Loom clamps for use on non-metallic sheathed cable with 10/32 deep-slotted screws assembled. Flat bracket offset 9⁄16" from face*
A Four-Gang Box
Four 1⁄2" KOs in each side, two 1⁄2" KOs in each end and ten 1⁄2" KOs in bottom. Uses Steel City SB-4 cover

*Uses Steel City ® SB-2 covers.

Drawn-Style Gang Boxes
Knockouts (In.)

Cat. No.

A-52

Depth Cu. In. Height Lgth. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std.
(In.) Capacity (In.) (In.) Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn.

With Conduit KOs
2G 1/2 3/4
15/8

45.0

41/2

613/16

3G 1/2 3/4

15/8

58.0

41/2

85/8

4G 1/2 3/4

15/8

70.0

41/2

107/16

5G 1/2 3/4

15/8

85.0

41/2

121/4

6G 1/2 3/4

15/8

95.0

41/2

141/16

H2BD 3/4 1

21/2

71.0

41/2

613/16

H3BD 3/4 1

21/2

90.0

41/2

85/8

H4BD 3/4 1

21/2

110.0

41/2

107/16

H5BD 3/4 1

21/2

132.0

41/2

121/4

H6BD 3/4 1

21/2

150.0

41/2

141/16

2–1/2
2–3/4
3–1/2
2–3/4
3–1/2
3–3/4
4–1/2
3–3/4
4–1/2
4–3/4
2–3/4
1–1
4–3/4
1–1
2–3/4
2–1
3–3/4
2–1
3–3/4
3–1

1–1/2
1–3/4
1–1/2
1–3/4
1–1/2
1–3/4
1–1/2
1–3/4
1–1/2
1–3/4
1–3/4
1–1
1–3/4
1–1
1–3/4
1–1
1–3/4
1–1
1–3/4
1–1

3–1/2
2–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
3–1/2
2–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4
6–1/2
4–3/4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

5

2G 1/2 & 3/4

3G 1/2 & 3/4

5
5
5G 1/2 & 3/4

1
1
10
10

H3BD 3/4 1

5
5
5
H5BD 3/4 1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

25
25
25

25
25

20

Gang Boxes and Accessories

707-SPL

708-SPL

709-SPL

710-SPL

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

Cat. No.
707-SPL

126.5

708-SPL

141.3

709-SPL

155.8

710-SPL

170.5

Std.
CTN.

Seven-Gang Box, 113⁄16" deep x 49⁄16" long x 1515⁄16" wide
Five 1⁄2" KOs and four 3⁄4" KOs in each side, two 1⁄2" KOs in each end and nine 1⁄2" KOs with six 3⁄4" KOs in bottom.
Furnished with four 8/32 screws. For use with either Steel City® 807 and SB-7, 808 and SB-8, or just GB-7 rings and covers
Eight-Gang Box, 113⁄16" deep x 49⁄16" long x 173⁄4" wide
Six 1⁄2" KOs and four 3⁄4" KOs in each side, two 1⁄2" KOs in each end and nine 1⁄2" KOs with six 3⁄4" KOs in bottom.
Furnished with four 8/32 screws. For use with either Steel City® 808 and SB-8, 809 and SB-9, or just GB-8 rings and covers
Nine-Gang Box, 113⁄16" deep x 49⁄16" long x 199⁄16" wide
Six 1⁄2" and five 3⁄4" KOs in each side and two 1⁄2" KOs in each end and nine 1⁄2" KOs with six 3⁄4" KOs in bottom.
Furnished with four 8/32 screws. For use with either Steel City® 809 and SB-9, 810 and SB-10, or just GB-9 rings and covers
Ten-Gang Box, 113⁄16" deep x 49⁄16" long x 213⁄8" wide
Six 1⁄2" KOs and six 3⁄4" KOs in each side, two 1⁄2" KOs in each end and nine 1⁄2" KOs with six 3⁄4" KOs in bottom.
Furnished with four 8/32 screws. For use with either Steel City® 810 and SB-10, or just GB-10 rings and covers

1

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Multi-Gang Boxes

1

1

1

Gang Box Partitions
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

SGP
DGP

Hi/low-voltage partition for 15⁄8"-deep box
Hi/low-voltage partition for 21⁄2"-deep box

25
50
SGP

DGP

2-, 3- and 4-Gang Drawn-Style
Device Boxes
Cat. No.

Depth Cu. in.
Ea. Side Ea. End Std.
Gang (In.) Capacity Brackets Conduit Conduit Ctn.

2g4dv 1/2 3/4

2

21⁄8

30.3

CV

3G4D 1/2
3G4D B 1/2
3G4D V 1/2
4G4D 1/2
4G4D B 1/2
4G4D V 1/2

3
3
3
4
4
4

21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8

44.3
44.3
44.3
58.0
58.0
58.0

—
B
CV
—
B
CV

www.tnb.com

2 –­­1⁄2",
1–3⁄4"
3–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2"
3–1⁄2"
4–1⁄2"
4–1⁄2"
4–1⁄2"

2–1⁄2",
1–3⁄4"
2–1⁄2"
2–1⁄2"
2–1⁄2"
2–1⁄2"
2–1⁄2"
2–1⁄2"

25
20
20
20
20
20
20

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

3G4D 1/2

3G4D B 1/2

3G4D V 1/ 2

4G4D 1/2

4G4D B 1/2

4G4D V 1/2

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-53

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Gang Boxes and Accessories
Gang Box Covers
When covers are required to
accommodate various combinations
of devices, use the following catalog
numbers plus the suffix “SPECIAL,”
and then indicate the combinations
desired. When necessary, also
indicate the sequence of devices.

EXAMPLE: 4-GCS Special

4-GC

3-GC

•	As illustrated (above), this is a 4-GCS Special for
two toggle switches on left side and two duplex
receptacles on right side
Cat. No.

Lgth.
(in.)

Cu. In.
Capacity Description

Std.
Ctn.

4 11⁄16" Wide–Raised 13⁄16" for Plaster
2-GC
7
8.5
Holes between gangs are spaced on
13
⁄16" centers; tapped holes in ears;
13.5
3-GC
813⁄16
5
spaced
on 39⁄32" centers to accommodate
18.3
4-GC
10 ⁄8
7
all
standard
receptacles and switches;
23.0
5 GC
12 ⁄16
furnished with extra plugged screw holes;
28.3
6 GC
141⁄4
if these screw holes are used, the cover
will fit the next smaller size box
4 11⁄16" Wide — Flat, Blank
2-GCB
7
—
—
—
—
3-GCB
813⁄16
—
—
4-GCB
10 5⁄8
—
—
5 GCB
12 7⁄16
—
—
6 GCB
14 1⁄4
4 11⁄16" Wide — Flat for Toggle Switches
2-GCS
7
—
For 2 toggle switches
—
For 3 toggle switches
3-GCS
813⁄16
—
For 4 toggle switches
4-GCS
10 5⁄8
—
For 5 toggle switches
5 GCS
12 7⁄16
—
For 6 toggle switches
6 GCS
141⁄4

6 GC

5
5
5
5
5

25
25
25
25
25

3-GCB

5 GCB

4-GCS

25
25
25
25
25

6 GCS

411⁄16" wide — special covers — flat to accommodate combinations of devices.

Multi-Gang Rings

807

Cat. No.

A-54

809

808
Cu. In.
Capacity

807

36.3

808

41.0

809

46.5

810

51.5

Std.
CTN.

DESCRIPTION

A seven-gang switch ring, 3⁄4" raised x 49⁄16" long x 1515⁄16" wide
Fits Steel City® 706 or 707 outlet boxes and uses GB-7 covers
An eight-gang switch ring, 3⁄4" raised x 49⁄16" long x 173⁄4" wide
Fits Steel City® 707 or 708 outlet boxes and uses GB-8 covers
A nine-gang switch ring, 3⁄4" raised x 49⁄16" long x 199⁄16" wide
Fits Steel City® 708 or 709 outlet boxes and uses GB-9 covers
A ten-gang switch ring, 3⁄4" raised x 49⁄16" long x 213⁄8" wide
Fits Steel City® 709 or 710 outlet boxes and uses GB-10 covers

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

810

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

1
1
1
1

Gang Boxes and Accessories

Cat. No.

Description

Std.
Ctn.

SB-2
SB-3
SB-4
SB-5
SB-6
SB-7
SB-8
SB-9
SB-10

2-gang cover
3-gang cover
4-gang cover
5-gang cover
6-gang cover
7-gang cover
8-gang cover
9-gang cover
10-gang cover

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Multi-Gang Covers — SB Series

Fits Steel City ® 132, 133 and 134 series handy boxes (both welded and drawn) and 800
series multi-gang rings.

Multi-Gang Covers — GB Series
Cat. No.

Description

Std.
Ctn.

GB-2
GB-3
GB-4
GB-5
GB-6
GB-7
GB-8
GB-9
GB-10

2-gang cover
3-gang cover
4-gang cover
5-gang cover
6-gang cover
7-gang cover
8-gang cover
9-gang cover
10-gang cover

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Typical Mounting Arrangement

Fits Steel City ® 700 series multi-gang boxes.

How To Order.

Symbols

Example:

1. Indicate style of cover “GB” or “SB”

DR	Duplex Receptacle

2. Use symbols for each opening

TS	Toggle Switch

3. Separate each symbol with a dash (–)

SR	Single Receptacle — Opening 1.4"

4. Allow 4 to 6 weeks for shipment

B	Blank
TL	Twist Lock (4-Wire) — Opening 1.594"

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

	

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

SB-5:DR	

TS	

SR	

B

	

TL	

A-55

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Concrete/Masonry Boxes and Accessories
Bars for Hanging Ceiling Boxes
Cat. No.

Length
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

HBB 18
HBB-24
HBB-30

18
24
30

40
40
40

Two bars required for each box.

Concrete Box Covers
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

911

Flat — 4" octagon
Two 1⁄2" KOs and two 3⁄4" KOs with 3⁄8" fixture stud*

25

Fits any Steel City ® concrete box.

911

Concrete Box Cover Plate

Concrete Box Adapter

•	 Thread size: ⁄8–18 NPS
3

CBA
CBP

CBP 3/8
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

CBP
CBP 3/8

No Stud; 31⁄2" and 2 3⁄4" KOs
With 3⁄8" fixture stud; 21⁄2" and 3⁄4" KOs

25
25

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

CBA

For quick mounting and alignment of 4" octagon
extension ring on concrete box or hung ceiling box

4" Octagon Concrete Boxes
Cat. No.
With Conduit KOs
54531 1/2 3/4
54541 1/2 3/4
54551 1/2 & 3/4
54551-3/4 & 1
54561 1/2
54561-1/2 & 3/4
54561-3/4 & 1
54571 1/2 3/4
54571-3/4 & 1
54581 1/2 & 3/4
54591 1/2 & 3/4

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

Knockouts

Std.
Ctn.

2
21⁄2
3
3
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
4
4
5
6

23.0
29.0
35.0
35.0
41.0
41.0
41.0
47.0
47.0
58.0
70.0

⁄2" & 3⁄4" single row
⁄2" & 3⁄4" single row
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" single row
3
⁄4" & 1" single row
1
⁄2" double row
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" double row
3
⁄4" & 1" double row
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" double row
3
⁄4" & 1" double row
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" double row
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4" three rows

25
25
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10

1
1

54531 1/2 3/4
54541 1/2 3/4
54551 1/2 & 3/4
54551-3/4 & 1

54561 1/2
54561-1/2 & 3/4
54561-3/4 & 1
54571 1/2 3/4
54571-3/4 & 1

54591 1/2 & 3/4

54581 1/2 & 3/4

4" Octagon Hanging Ceiling Boxes
Cat. No.
With Conduit KOs
H-54561-1/2 & 3/4
H-54561-3/4

A-56

Depth
(In.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

31⁄2
31⁄2

41.0
41.0

Knockouts

Std.
Ctn.

⁄2" & 3⁄4" double row
3
⁄4" double row

20
20

1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

H-54561-1/2 & 3/4

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

25

Concrete/Masonry Boxes and Accessories
Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Gangable Masonry Boxes
Eccentric Knockouts
1
⁄2" & 3⁄4"
Depth Height Length Cu. In.
(IN.)
(IN.)
(IN.) Capacity

Cat. No.

With Eccentric Conduit KOs
GW 125 G*
21⁄2
33⁄4
115⁄16
1
3
3 ⁄4
33⁄4
GW 225 G*
2 ⁄2
33⁄4
59⁄16
GW 325 G*
21⁄2
33⁄4
73⁄8
GW 425 G
21⁄2
33⁄4
93⁄16
GW 525 G
21⁄2
33⁄4
11
GW-625-G* 21⁄2
33⁄4
115⁄16
GW 135 G*
31⁄2
33⁄4
33⁄4
GW 235 G*
31⁄2
1
3
3 ⁄4
59⁄16
GW 335 G
3 ⁄2
† 3
33⁄4
7 ⁄8
GW 435 G*
31⁄2
† 3
33⁄4
9 ⁄16
GW-535-G
31⁄2
33⁄4
*†11
GW-635-G
31⁄2

Ea.
Side

Ea.
End

2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4

2
4
6
8
10
12
2
4
6
8
10
12

15.0
31.6
47.4
64.0
79.0
94.8
22.0
46.9
71.0
93.5
111.7
134.0

Std.
Bottom Ctn.

2
4
6
8
10
12
2
4
6
8
10
12

20
10
5
5
5
1
20
10
10
5
5
1

GW 135 G

* Per NEC ®, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts.
†

GW 235 G

4-, 5- and 6-gang supplied with partitions.

Masonry Box Partitions
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

PGW-25-G
PGW-35-G

Non-metallic partition for 21⁄2"-deep steel tile wall boxes
Non-metallic partition for 31⁄2"-deep steel tile wall boxes

25
25

PGW-25-G

PGW-35-G

Shallow Masonry Boxes

1-MBS

Cat. No.

2-MBS

Depth
(In.)

3-MBS

4-MBS

MBPS

Cu. In.
Capacity DESCRIPTION

1-MBS

21⁄2

16.5

2-MBS

21⁄2

33.0

3-MBS

21⁄2

49.0

4-MBS

21⁄2

67.0

MBPS

21⁄2

—

Std
CTN.

A one-gang masonry box, 21⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 17⁄8" wide
Six 1⁄2" and two 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Two in each side and one in each end. Uses Steel City® 100 cover
A two-gang masonry box, 21⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 33⁄4" wide
Eight 1⁄2" and two 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Two in each side and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-2 cover
A three-gang masonry box, 21⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 51⁄2" wide
Ten 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Three in each side and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-3 cover
A four-gang masonry box, 21⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 73⁄8" wide
Twelve 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs Four in each side and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-4 cover
Masonry Box Partition, 21⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" wide
A low-voltage partition drilled and tapped for mounting. Furnished with two 8/32 screws. For use with 2-MBS, 3-MBS or 4-MBS boxes

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

10
10
5
5
50

A-57

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Concrete/Masonry Boxes and Accessories
Deep Masonry Boxes

1-MB

2-MB

depth
(in.)

Cu. In.
Capacity

1-MB

31⁄2

23.3

2-MB

31⁄2

46.8

3-MB

31⁄2

69.5

4-MB

31⁄2

92.0

MBP

31⁄2

—

Cat. No.

3-MB

4-MB

MBP

Std.
CTN.

DESCRIPTION

One-Gang Masonry Box, 31⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 17⁄8" wide
Eight 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Two in each side and two in each end. Uses Steel City® 100 series covers
Two-Gang Masonry Box, 31⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 33⁄4" wide
Twelve 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Four in each of two sides and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-2 cover
Three-Gang Box, 31⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 51⁄2" wide
Sixteen 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Six in each of two sides and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-3 cover
Four-Gang Masonry Box, 31⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" long x 73⁄8" wide
Twenty 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" concentric KOs. Eight in each of two sides and two in each end. Uses Steel City® SB-4 cover
Masonry Box Partition, 31⁄2" deep x 33⁄4" wide
A low-voltage partition drilled and tapped for mounting. Furnished with two 8/32 screws. For use with 2-MB, 3-MB or 4-MB boxes

1" KO Masonry Box
1" Knockouts
Length
(In.)

Cat. No.

Cu. In.
Capacity

Ea.
Side

Ea.
End

Bottom

Std.
Ctn.

2

1

2

10

Non-Gangable Single Sang
GW 135 NG-1
17⁄8
22

GW 135 NG-1

Thru-Wall Boxes for Concrete Block
knockouts (in.)

Cat. No.

width height depth cu. in.
(in.)
(in.)
(in.) capacity

With Concentric Conduit KOs
CBTW 4
21⁄8
311⁄16
31⁄2
311⁄16
51⁄2
CBTW 6
21⁄8
1
11
3 ⁄16
71⁄2
CBTW 8
2 ⁄8

24.0
38.0
52.3

Ea. Side
Conduit

Ea. End
Conduit

std.
ctn.

(2) 1⁄2–3⁄4
(4) 1⁄2–3⁄4
(6) 1⁄2–3⁄4

(1) 1⁄2–3⁄4
(2) 1⁄2–3⁄4
(3) 1⁄2–3⁄4

10
10
10

CBTW 4

CBTW 6

CBTW 8

Welded Thru Boxes
Cu. In.

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No. Capacity DESCRIPTION
4-dws

25.5

3 5⁄16" deep x 4" long x 2 1⁄8" wide
One 1⁄2" KO and one 3⁄4" KO both on top, one 1⁄2" KO bottom
side and one 1⁄2" KO on side opposite two flat brackets*

25

4-DWS

*Uses Steel City ® and 100 series covers.

A-58

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

10
10
5
5
50

Box Hangers and Supports
Packaged complete with either...
⁄2", 3⁄4", 7⁄8" Lath and Plaster

1

11⁄2" deep box without cover.

Accurate and automatic
positioning on joist.

Fastener

or

Stud

Endplate locator tab is scored
and marked ­­for lath and
plaster drywall applications
with standard and deep boxes.

Ease of Installation:
Claws provide temporary support for proper positioning until
permanently installed.

Two adjustable lengths:

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Adjustable Bar Hangers for Plaster and Drywall

⁄8", 1⁄2" , 5⁄8" Drywall Board

3

11⁄2" deep box without cover.
10 1⁄2" to 18 1⁄2"

Foot straightened gauges for 11⁄2"-deep box with
cover or 21⁄8"-deep box without cover. With foot
broken off gauges for shallow pan box.

14 1⁄2" to 26 1⁄2"

DEPTH OF END PLATE
(in.)

Cat. No.

For 3⁄8", 1⁄2" and 5⁄8" Wall Board and Plaster — 50 lb. Max. Load Rating
13
6010DW-25
⁄16
13
⁄16
6010ADW-25
13
⁄16
6011DW-25
13
⁄16
6011ADW-25

Br length
(in.)

stud
or Fastener

std.
Ctn.

101⁄2–181⁄2
141⁄2–261⁄2
101⁄2–181⁄2
141⁄2–261⁄2

Stud
Stud
Fastener
Fastener

25
25
25
25

*Score marks for drywall and plaster depths.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-59

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Box Hangers and Supports
Bar Hangers

2-BC

12-BC

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

2-BC

21" Long

20-BC

44-B

44-BD

44-BL

440-B

14-B

14-BL

std.CTN.

50

Deep offset bar hanger. Offset 11⁄2" for mounting boxes with plaster ring. Furnished with clip
12-BC

20" Long

50

Straight bar hanger for mounting pancake boxes. Furnished with clip
20-BC

22" Long

50

Shallow offset bar hanger. Offset 1" for mounting 11⁄2"-deep boxes without rings. Furnished with clips
44-B

22" Long

50

Deep offset bar hanger. Offset 11⁄2" for mounting 11⁄2"-deep boxes with plaster ring to bring cover flush with plaster. Furnished with stovebolt
44-BD

22" Long

50

Extra deep offset bar hanger. Offset 21⁄8" for mounting 21⁄8"-deep box. Furnished with stovebolt
44-BL

26" Long

50

Deep offset bar hanger. Offset 11⁄2" for mounting 11⁄2"-deep boxes with plaster ring to bring cover flush with plaster. Furnished with stovebolt
440-B

21" Long

50

Shallow offset bar hanger. Offset 1" for mounting 11⁄2"-deep boxes without rings. Furnished with stovebolt
14-B

20" Long

50

Straight bar hanger for mounting ceiling boxes. Furnished with stovebolt
14-BL

24" Long

50

Straight bar hanger for mounting ceiling boxes. Furnished with stovebolt

Far-Side Box Support
•	Provides side support for electrical boxes
•	Works with most electrical boxes for 21⁄2",
31⁄2" and 4" metal stud depths

A-60

Cat. No.

fig.
No.

SS1-TB
50-SC

1
2

Fig. 1

Description

std.
CTN.

Far-side box support
Box brace for 4" square or octagonal box

100
100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Fig. 2

www.tnb.com

Box Hangers and Supports
•	 Mounts on metal or
wood studding

•	 Ideal for schools, hospitals,
industrial and commercial jobs

•	 Used as conduit rack or spacer
for rigid conduit, IMC or EMT

•	 Galvanized steel

Cat. No.
7502
7503-SC

fig.
No. Description

1
1

std.
CTN.

Footed box supports, 20" height
Footed box supports, 30" height

25
50

Cat. No.

Description

std.
CTN.

pn-3-1

1"

1,000

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Floor-Mounted Box Supports

Fig. 1

Pipe Nailers

Snap-On Box Clip
•	 Fits most electrical boxes
requiring plaster rings

•	 No screws required

•	 Fits most metal stud sizes

•	 S upport leg braces box
against stud

•	 Will not move on stud

•	 Installs easily with a hammer

•	 Wider part for more
secure fastening

•	 Adjustable offset enables box to
protrude through drywall sizes:
1
⁄4", 3⁄8", 1⁄2", 5⁄8" or 3⁄4"

Cat. No.

fig.
No. Description

SSF-SMX
SSF-SK
SF-SFA
SSF-SF0

1
2
3
4

SSF-SF1/4

4

SSF-SF3/8

4

SSF-SF1/2

4

SSF-SF5/8

4

SSF-SF3/4

4

SSF-SFT

5

std.
CTN.

Snap-on box support for mounting to stud
Screw to stud, box support
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud, adjustable
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for flush to stud face
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for 1⁄4" drywall
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for 3⁄8" drywall
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for 1⁄2" drywall
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for 5⁄8" drywall
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud,
riveted for 3⁄4" drywall
Snap-on box support for mounting to stud
with 1⁄4"–20 thread impression

www.tnb.com

Fig. 1

100
100
25
25

Fig. 2

25
25
Fig. 4

Fig. 3

25
25
25
25

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Fig. 5

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-61

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories
Grounding Devices
Grounding Pigtail

Grounding Clip
•	 For grounding switch and
outlet boxes using nonmetallic sheathed cables
with ground wire
GEE

GSC-12-S
GSC-14-S

•	 Grounds #12 and
#14 copper and #12
aluminum conductors

Grounding Screw

Grounding Screw and Wire
•	 A prelooped 6"-long bare or
insulated copper ground wire
attached to a 10-32 x 3⁄8"
hexagon-head washer-face
screw, colored green
GSB 12
GSB 14

Cat. No.

GS 1-SC

GSC 12
GSC 14

Std.
Ctn.

Unit
Pkg.

Zinc-plated, spring-steel, colored green accommodates #12 and #14 copper and #12
aluminum solid conductors in non-metallic sheathed cable. Also approved for connecting
bonding jumper from receptacle to grounded metal device box. 50 per unit package

1,000

—

10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face ground screw with green dye finish
and a six-inch solid copper #12 AWG insulated wire
#12 AWG insulated eight-inch stranded pigtail with a captive 10-32 x 3⁄8" round head
screw on one end and a fork-tongue terminal on the other end
10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face ground screw with green dye finish
and a 101⁄2 inch solid-copper #12 AWG insulated wire
10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face ground screw with green dye finish
and a six-inch solid-copper #14 AWG insulated wire
#14 AWG insulated eight-inch stranded pigtail with a captive 10-32 x 3⁄8" round head
screw on one end and a fork-tongue terminal on the other end
10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face ground screw with green dye finish
and a six-inch solid-copper #12 AWG bare wire
10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face ground screw with green dye finish
and a six-inch solid-copper #14 AWG bare wire
10-32 x 3⁄8" slotted hexagon-head washer-face screw with green dye finish. Provides positive
ground continuity in boxes with a #10-32 tapped hole

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

1,000

100

Description

Grounding Clip
GEE

Grounding Screws and Pigtails
GSC 12
GSC-12-S*
GSC-12-10 1/2
GSC 14
GSC 14 S*
GSB 12
GSB 14
GS 1-SC

* Eight-inch stranded pigtail is also available with a captive 10-32 x 3⁄8" round-head screw on one end and a fork-tongue terminal on the other end.

A-62

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories

.750"
6014*
6013*
.576"
.281"

Cat. No.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Channel Bar

.500"

6014*
.388"

.451"

.281"

6029*

.263"

6029 H*

.281"

Description

Min. Order
(ft.)

Std.
Ctn.

100
100
100
100

100
100
100
100

Mounts Fixtures, Boxes and Conduits in Suspended Ceilings
6013*
6014*
6029*
6029 H*

20 ga. single channel bar
18 ga. single channel bar
16 ga. (.060") ribbed
16 ga. (.060") ribbed — with holes for #12 sheet-metal screw and 1⁄4" threaded rod

*10-ft. lengths.

Box and Channel Fasteners

6015*

6026*
Joiner for ribbed channel

6016*

www.tnb.com

Cat. No.

Description

6015*
6016*
6026*

Stud and carrier 3⁄8–18 NPS treading
Fastener and carrier
Joiner for 6029 channel

Min. Order (ft.) Std. Ctn.

100
100
100

100
100
100

* Minimum order 100 pieces.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-63

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories
Conduit-to-Metal Stud
•	 Attaches securely to most metal stud sizes
•	 Riveted to accommodate your drywall requirements

Cat. No.

fig.
No. Description

SSF-SF-S1/2
SSF-SF-S3/4
SSF-SF-S1
SSF-SF-C3/8

1
1
1
2

SSF-SF-C1/2 3/4
SSF-SF-C1
SSF-SK-C1/2 3/4
SSF-SK-C1
SSF-SK-S1/2
SSF-SK-S3/4
SSF-SK-S1

2
2
3
3
4
4
4

std.
CTN.

Snap on stud, push-in conduit clip, 1⁄2" conduit
Snap on stud, push-in conduit clip, 3⁄4" conduit
Snap on stud, push-in conduit clip, 1" conduit
Snap on stud, conduit support clip, 3⁄8" conduit
or MC/AC cable
Snap on stud, conduit support clip, 1⁄2"– 3⁄4" conduit
Snap on stud, conduit support clip, 1" conduit
1
⁄2"–3⁄4" finger close conduit clip
1" finger close conduit clip
1
⁄2" snap-in conduit clip
3
⁄4" snap-in conduit clip
1"  snap-in conduit clip

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Easy-Snap Grommet
•	 Fits any size or shape metal stud hole
•	 Provides complete 360° protection for cable

Fig. 1

Cat. No.
1300
1216-EN

A-64

fig.
No. Description

std.
CTN.

1 Plastic bushing for metal stud
1" trade size opening (111⁄32")
2 Twisted universal bushing for metal stud

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Fig. 2

100
50

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories
•	 A quick means of support for horizontal runs 	
of conduits or MC/AC through metal stud
•	 Installs easily with a screw gun
•	 SSF-SPI enables ENT conduit and MC/AC cable 	
to be easily pulled through metal stud
Fig. 1
fig.
No. Description

Cat. No.
SSF-SAB-C1/2 3/4
SSF-SAB-C3/8
SSF-SAB-S1/2
SSF-SAB-S3/4
SSF-SP1

1 1⁄2" or 3⁄4" finger close conduit clip
1 Finger-close conduit clip 14-2 thru
12-3 MC/AC cable and 3⁄8" conduit
2 Snap-in conduit clip — 1⁄2" conduit
2 Snap-in conduit clip — 3⁄4" conduit
3 Supports up to 1" conduit

Fig. 2

std.
CTN.

25
25
25
25
100

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Through-Stud Cable Conduit Support

Fig. 3

Low-Voltage Mounting Brackets —
Screw-On Support
•	 Eliminates the need for an electrical box when installing
low-voltage Class 2 wiring
•	 For old work or new work

Cat. No.

fig.
No. Description

std.
CTN.

SSF-SLV
VN1
VN2
VW1
VW2
WBF-1

1
2
—
3
—
4

100
50
50
50
50
100

Old-work or new work low-voltage bracket
Non-metallic single-gang new-work low-voltage bracket
Non-metallic two-gang new-work low-voltage bracket
Non-metallic single-gang old-work low-voltage bracket
Non-metallic two-gang old-work low-voltage bracket
Low-voltage mounting bracket with screws

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-65

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Metallic Boxes

Stud Wall and Drywall Accessories
Cable Support

Screw-On Conduit Support
Fig. 1

•	 Supports up to four runs
of MC and AC cable
and up to six runs
of non-metallic
sheathed cable

•	Supports 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" EMT conduit and MC/AC cable
•	Works with wood or metal stud
•	Preset bend provides alignment
with knockouts for 11⁄2"-deep
boxes or 21⁄8"-deep boxes

•	 Installs with nails or staples or sheet-metal screws
•	 Complies with NEC® 300-4d for all wood and metal studs
•	 Made with high-strength plastic
Cable
Type

Cable
Size

Max. Qty./
Fastener

Non-Metallic
Sheathed Cable

#14-2, #12-2, #10-2,
#14-3, #12-3 and #10-3
with Ground
Non-Metallic
#8-2 and #6-2
with Ground
Metallic Clad
#14-2, #12-2, #10-2,
(MC) Cable and
#14-3, #12-3, #10-3,
#10-4 with Ground #14-4, #12-4
Armored Cable (AC) #14-4, #12-2, #10-2,
#8-2, #14-3, #12-3,
#10-3, #14-4, #12-4
and #10-4 with Ground
Flexible Conduit (BX) 5⁄16, 3⁄8

CAT. No.

Fig.
No.

SSF-SC6

1

6

4
4
Fig. 1

4

4

Fig.
No. Description

CAT. No.

Description

std.
CTN.

Non-Metallic Sheathed MC/AC Cable to Stud Clip

100

SSF-SS1/2 3/4

1

SSF-SS1/2 3/4D

1

⁄2" and 3⁄4" EMT Conduit and MC/AC to
Metal or Wood Stud. For 11⁄2"-Deep Box
1
⁄2" and 3⁄4" EMT Conduit Metal or Wood Stud.
For 21⁄8"-Deep Box
1

Device Leveler and Retainer

Protector Plates

•	 Use for oversized drywall openings

•	 Protects cable(s) from damage
when installing drywall or paneling

•	 Prevents broken cover plates

std.
CTN.

100
100

•	 No nails or screws required

•	 Stops device from being pushed
back in wall

•	 Fits all stud sizes

•	 Makes floating device rigid

•	 Both products meet requirements
for NEC® 300-4
•	 ST66 legs are crimped with pliers
to stud to provide secure fit

Fig. 1

Fig. 1

CAT. No.

Fig.
No.

SSF-SR

1

Description

std.
CTN.

Single-Gang Device Leveler and Retainer

100

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-66

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

CAT. No.

Fig.
No.

SSF-ST66
66EP

1
2

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Fig. 2

Description

std.
CTN.

Protector Plate for Metal Stud
Protector Plate for Wood Stud

100
100

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Carlon
Non-Metallic
Boxes
®

Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes
Overview........................................................................ A-68–A-69
Carlon® Blue™ PVC Boxes............................................... A-70–A-76
Carlon® SuperBlue® Boxes.............................................. A-77–A-79
Polycarbonate Boxes....................................................... A-80–A-91
Phenolic Boxes............................................................. A-92–A-104
Non-Metallic Covers and Accessories......................... A-105–A-106
Low-Voltage Structured Cable
Management System.................................................. A-107–A-120

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Overview
Recognized as the Industry Standard
in Non-Metallic Boxes.
Carlon® Blue™ PVC Boxes
Carlon® non-metallic boxes feature PVC construction for easier installation,
greater performance and lower installation cost. Designed and listed for
use with non-metallic sheathed cable in accordance with Article 314 of the
National Electrical Code®, they make fast work of any residential or light
commercial application. Look for the trademarked color blue to be sure
it is a quality Thomas & Betts PVC Box.

Carlon® SuperBlue® Boxes
Carlon® Super Blue® provides all of the desired features of a PVC box with
the strength and durability of the heavy wall boxes. Rigid enough not to flex
when nailed to a stud and strong enough to withstand a hammer blow in
cold temperatures.

Carlon® Black Polycarbonate Boxes
Carlon® non-metallic boxes feature a rugged polycarbonate construction
to withstand extreme temperatures. The boxes will not distort or soften
in heat and they won’t become brittle in the cold.

Carlon® Brown Phenolic Boxes
New Fire Rating! Carlon® phenolic boxes can be installed in the same stud
cavity of a shared two-hour wall. They may also face opposite directions with
only a 3" horizontal separation — ideal for multi-family construction!

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-68

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
Reverse Angled
Side Nails

Recessed
Angle Nails

Angled Side
Nails

For easy installation and
positioning in limited space

For use when installed
from backside of drywall

For quick positioning
on narrow stud spacing

For quick positioning
on narrow stud spacing

SB, #5, #7 Offset
Brackets

Ears, #8 Bracket

Ears, #4 Bracket

#738 Offset
Bracket

Ears

For face mount on
wood or steel studs

Snap-in bracket secures
box to wall

Swing bracket swings into
place, secures box to wall

With 3⁄8" offset for face mount
on wood or steel studs

For screw mounting
direct to paneling

“N” Bracket

#2 Bracket

“R” Bracket

Side Bracket
Stabilizer Bar

#1 Raised
Face Bracket

Easily positioned for
maximum use of box depth

Sturdy side-mounting
bracket, support wire
adds rigidity

Reverse angled nails for use
with narrow stud spacing

Bar extends for rigid
installation between studs

For wood or steel studs,
allows for 1⁄2" mud ring,
1
⁄2" drywall

Nails or Screws

Screw Mount

Compound
Angled Side
Nails

Screws, #9
Snap-in Bracket

#94, #95
Bar Hangers
(16" and 24")

Through bottom

Flange with flash ring

For easy installation and
positioning in limited space

Snap-in bracket secures
box to wall

For easy installation, exact
centering of ceiling boxes

#3 Bracket

High Clamp
Feature

Fast Set Feature

Angled Screws

Non-Metallic
Clamp

For easy cable entry

For fast device mounting

For fast mounting
on steel stud

Most widely accepted
for universal use

Easily positioned for
maximum use of box depth

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Compound
Angled Nails

Bottom Nailed

For easy cable entry

A-69

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
®

™

®

™

•	 All PVC boxes are UL Classified for two-hour fire wall
and/or fire ceiling

Carlon® non-metallic boxes feature PVC construction for easier
installation, greater performance and lower installation cost.
Designed and listed for use with non-metallic sheathed cable
in accordance with Article 314 of the National Electrical Code®,
they make fast work of any residential or light commercial application.

•	 All PVC boxes meet NEMA OS-2

•	 All PVC boxes are listed to UL514C

•	 All PVC boxes are permissible for use with
90° C conductors

•	 All PVC boxes are listed for masonry walls

•	 UL File E11461 and R9140

One-Gang Adjustable — For New Work
•	 Design enables adjustment from 0" to 13⁄4" after installation
•	 Ideal for new work or retrofit upgrade applications
•	 Backless low-voltage bracket and floor box designs available
•	 Ideal for various drywall thicknesses and wall finishes
One-Gang Adjustable 21.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

B121ADJ

21.0

Adjustable
Bracket

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Adjusts 0"–13⁄4"

3.65 L x 2.25 W
x 3.32 D

Std.
Ctn.

24
B121ADJ

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

One-Gang Nail-On — For New Work

One-Gang Nail-On 18.0–20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

B118A
N1-710-M

18.0
18.0

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Captive Nails
—
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 27⁄8 D
7
⁄32" Offset
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 211⁄16 D
Reverse Angled
Wallboard Tabs
Side Nails
RN-18-FS 18.0 Recessed Angled
Fast-Set
321⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W x 3 D
Nails
SNO-18
18.0 Angled Side Nails Hinge Closure 41⁄16 L x 25⁄16 opening
39⁄16 overall W x 13⁄4 D
41⁄16 L x 25⁄16 opening
SNO-18-M 18.0 Angled Side Nails Locating Tab
Hinge Closure 39⁄16 overall W x 13⁄4 D
3
⁄16" Offset Wall
Board Tabs
B120A-UPC 20.0
Captive Nails
—
37⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 31⁄4 D
RN-21-FS 20.5 Recessed Angled
Fast-Set
321⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W x 33⁄8 D
Nails

A-70

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

B118A

N1-710-M

RN-18-FS

SNO-18

B120A-UPC

RN-21-FS

Std.
Ctn.

100
100
100
100
100

100
100

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
®

™

B122A-UPC

One-Gang Nail-On 22.0–22.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

B122A-UPC 22.0
RN-23
22.5
RN-23-FS

22.5

Mounting
Means

Description

Captive Nails
Recessed
Angled Nails
Recessed
Angled Nails

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

—
—

33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 31⁄2 D 100
321⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W x 33⁄8 D 100

Fast-Set

321⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W x 33⁄8 D 100

RN-23

RN-23-FS

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

One-Gang Nail-On — For New Work

One-Gang Nail-On 30.0 Cu. In.
Size

Mounting
Means

Description

30.0

Recessed
Angled Nails

Large KO for #6 311⁄16 L x 25⁄16 opening 37⁄8 50
or #8 Cable
overall W x 35⁄8 D

Cat. No. cu. in.
RD-30

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

RD-30

One-Gang Brackets — For New Work

One-Gang Brackets 8.0–18.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B108B-UPC

Size
Std.
cu. in. Mounting Means Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

8.0

Bracket

—

B118B-UPC

—
18.0 Bracket for 3⁄8" to 5⁄8"
Wallboard –
Steel and Wood
Stud Mounting
MB-18 •
18.0 Molded Side Bracket 1⁄2" Depth Gage
for Wood/Steel Studs Lever Clamps
MB-18-FS • 18.0 Molded Side Bracket
Fast-Set
for Wood/Steel Studs

35⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W
x 11⁄4 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W
x 215⁄16 D

25

321⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W
x 215⁄16 D
21
3 ⁄32 L x 25⁄16 W
x 215⁄16 D

100

B108B-UPC

B118B-UPC

MB-18

MB-18-FS

5

100

• Manufactured housing — MB-18 and MB-18-FS.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-71

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

®

™

Two-Gang Adjustable — For New Work
•	 Design enables adjustment from 0" to 13⁄4" after installation
•	 Ideal for new work or retrofit upgrade applications
•	 Backless low-voltage bracket and floor box designs available
•	 Ideal for various drywall thicknesses and wall finishes

Two-Gang Adjustable 34.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size Mounting
cu. in. Means

B234ADJ

34.0

B234ADJC

34.0

Adjustable
Bracket
Adjustable
Bracket

Description

Std.
Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

Adjusts 0"–13⁄4"

4 W x 35⁄8 H x 3 D

Large 220V Knockout 55⁄8 W x 35⁄8 H x 3 D

16
16
B234ADJ

Two-Gang Nail-On — For New Work

B232A-UPC

N2-1614-RNC

SN-236-V

N2-1614-MNC

SN-241

SN-236

SN-236-FS

SN-241-FS

Two-Gang Nail-On 32.0–41.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B232A-UPC
N2-1614-MNC
N2-1614-RNC
SN-236
SN-236-FS
SN-236-V
SN-241
SN-241-FS

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std. Ctn.

32.0
32.0
32.0
36.0
36.0
36.0
41.0
41.0

Captive Nails
Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails

—
7
⁄32" Offset Wallboard Tabs Cable-Lok™ Clamps Bulk Packed
No Wallboard Tabs Cable-Lok™ Clamps Bulk Packed
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs Molded Fast Clamp
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs Molded Fast Clamp/Fast Set
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs Molded V-Clamp
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs Molded Fast Clamp
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs Molded Fast Clamp/Fast Set

33⁄4 L x 4 W x 3 D
1
4 ⁄16 L x 35⁄8 W x 23⁄4 D
41⁄16 L x 35⁄8 W x 23⁄4 D
4 L x 35⁄8 W x 31⁄8 D
4 L x 35⁄8 W x 31⁄8 D
4 L x 35⁄8 W x 31⁄8 D
4 L x 35⁄8 W x 35⁄8 D
4 L x 35⁄8 W x 35⁄8 D

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

Two-Gang Bracket — For New Work
Two-Gang Bracket 32.0–36.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B232B-UPC

SB2-236-FS

A-72

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Bracket for 3⁄8" to 5⁄8"
Wallboard — Steel or
Wood Stud Mounting
36.0
Two 3⁄8" Offset
Wallboard Tabs; Molded
Fast Clamps/Fast Set

Description

32.0

Dimensions Std.
(in.)
Ctn.

—

33⁄4 L x 4 W
x3D

50

⁄8" Offset

39⁄16 L x 4 W
x 39⁄16 D

20

3

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

SB2-236-FS

B232B-UPC

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
®

™

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Three-Gang Adjustable — For New Work
•	 Design enables adjustment from 0" to 13⁄4" after installation
•	 Ideal for new work or retrofit upgrade applications
•	 Backless low-voltage bracket and floor box designs available
•	 Ideal for various drywall thicknesses and wall finishes

Three-Gang Adjustable 49.0 Cu. In.
Size

Mounting
Means

49.0

Adjustable
Bracket

Cat. No. cu. in.
B349ADJ

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

Adjusts 0"–13⁄4"

513/16 L x 35/8 W x 3 D

16
B349ADJ

Three-Gang Nail-On — For New Work

B344AB

Three-Gang Nail-On 44.0–56.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B344AB
SN-357
SN-357-FS

Size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions Std.
(in.)
Ctn.

44.0 Captive Nails and
—
55⁄8 L x 33⁄4 W 30
Bracket Support
x 211⁄16 D
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard 513⁄16 L x 35⁄8 W 20
56.5
Compound
x 37⁄16 D
Angled Nails Tabs Molded Fast Clamp
3
⁄8" Offset Wallboard 513⁄16 L x 35⁄8 W 20
56.5
Compound
Tabs Molded Fast
x 37⁄16 D
Angled Nails
Clamps/Fast Set
SN-357-FS

SS-357

SB-357

SB2-357-FS

Three-Gang Bracket — For New Work
Three-Gang Bracket 56.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

SB-357

56.5

SB2-357-FS

56.5

One 3⁄8" Offset
Bracket for
Wood/Steel Studs
Two 3⁄8" Offset
Brackets for
Wood/Steel Studs

Description

Dimensions Std.
(in.)
Ctn.

⁄8" Wallboard Tabs 35⁄8 L x 513⁄16 W 30
Molded Fast
x 37⁄16 D
Clamps/Fast Set
3
⁄8" Wallboard Tabs 35⁄8 L x 513⁄16 W 20
Molded Fast
x 37⁄16 D
Clamps/Fast Set
3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-73

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

®

™

Four-Gang Nail-On — For New Work

B455A-UPC

B455AH

Four-Gang Nail-On 55 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B455AH
B455A-UPC

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std. Ctn.

55.0
55.0

Captive Nails, Bracket Support and Hanger Bar
Captive Nails and Bracket Support

—
—

73⁄5 L x 37⁄10 W x 21⁄2 D
73⁄5 L x 37⁄10 W x 21⁄2 D

25
25

4" Square — For New Work

B418A-UPC

4S-812C

B432A-UPC

4" Square 18.0–32.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
4S-812C
B418A-UPC
B432A-UPC

A-74

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std. Ctn.

18.0
18.0
32.0

Angled Side Nails
Captive Nails
Captive Nails

—
—
—

17⁄16 D x 4 W x 4 L
15⁄8 D x 4 W x 4 L
25⁄8 D x 4 W x 4 L

100
75
50

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
One-Gang — For Old Work
®

™

B108R-UPC

B117RSW

One-Gang 8.0–17.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B108R-UPC •
B114R-UPC •
B117RSW •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std. Ctn.

8.0
14.0
17.0

Mounting Ears
Mounting Ears and Swing Clamps
Mounting Ears and Swing Clamps

—
—
Access Panel

35⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 11⁄4 D
41⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 23⁄4 D
3.64 L x 4.07 W x 2.00 D (2.20 opening)

25
50
30

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

B114R-UPC

• ­Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

B120R

E18-4

E-16-8

One-Gang 16.0–20.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

STD.Ctn.

E-16-8
E-18-4
B120R •

16.0
18.0
20.0

Thermoplastic Molded Ears #4 Snap-In
Thermoplastic Molded Ears #4 Swing Brackets
Mounting Ears and Swing Bracket

Molded Fast Clamps
Integral Molded V-Clamp
—

31⁄2 L x 21⁄4 W x 211⁄16 D
325⁄32 L x 27⁄32 W x 21⁄4 D
41⁄8 L x 25⁄16 W x 35⁄8 D

50
100
50

• ­Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-75

Carlon Blue PVC Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

®

™

Two-Gang — For Old Work

Two-Gang 25.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

B225R-UPC • 25.0

Mounting Means

Std.
Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

Mounting Ears and Two
Swing Clamps

—

315⁄16 L x 31⁄8 W
x 23⁄4 D

30
B225R-UPC

• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

Three-Gang — For Old Work

Three-Gang 55.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

B355R •

55.0

Mounting Means

Mounting Ears and Two
Swing Clamps

Std.
Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

—

5.72 L x 2.79 W
x 3.69 D

6

B355R

• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

Four-Gang — For Old Work

Four-Gang 68.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

SIZE
cu. in.

B468R •

68.0

Mounting Means

Mounting Ears and Two
Swing Clamps

Std.
Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

—

7.57 L x 2.89 W
x 3.56 D

6

B468R

• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

A-76

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

®

®

®

•	 All PVC boxes are listed to UL514C

Combine the features of the hard-shell thermoset box and the
thermoplastic PVC-style box to create a “new” rigid non-metallic wiring
box. Molded out of specially formulated thermoplastic material, Carlon®
SuperBlue® boxes are so strong they won’t crack or break in extreme
environments. So rigid that they resist flexing and hold their shape even
in the most challenging applications. The boxes are designed to nest
inside each other to take up less space on the shelf or in the truck, while
still providing the largest wirefill capacity in their class.

•	 All PVC boxes are listed for masonry walls
•	 All PVC boxes are UL® Classified for two-hour fire wall 	
and/or fire ceiling
•	 All PVC boxes meet NEMA OS-2
•	 All PVC boxes are permissible for use with 	
90° C conductors
•	 UL File E11461 and R9140

One-Gang — For New Work

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Carlon SuperBlue Boxes
Carlon SuperBlue Boxes

One-Gang 22.0 Cu. In.
Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

BH122A-upc

22.0

Nails

One-Gang

BH122S

22.0

Screws

One-Gang

Cat. No.

Std.
Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

3.55 L x 2.11 W
x 3.63 D
3.55 L x 2.11 W
x 3.63 D

100
BH122A-upc

100

Two-Gang — For New Work

Two-Gang 35.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Std.
Description Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

BH235A

35.0

Nails

Two-Gang

BH235S

35.0

Screws

Two-Gang

www.tnb.com

3.55 L x 2.11 W
x 3.50 D
3.55 L x 2.11 W
x 3.50 D

48
48

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

BH235A

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-77

Carlon SuperBlue Boxes
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

®

Three-Gang — For New Work

Three-Gang 53 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

BH353A

53.0

Nails

Three-Gang

BH353S

53.0

Screws

Three-Gang

Std.
Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

3.53 L x 5.66 W
x 3.50 D
3.53 L x 5.66 W
x 3.50 D

24
24

BH353A

Four-Gang — For New Work

Four-Gang 64 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

BH464A

64.0

Nails

Four-Gang

BH464S

64.0

Screws

Four-Gang

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

3.53 L x 7.46 W
x 3.18 D
3.53 L x 7.46 W
x 3.18 D

36
36

BH464A

One-Gang — For Old Work

One-Gang 18.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

BH118R •

18.0

Mounting Means

Description

Mounting Ears &
Swing Clamps

One-Gang

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

4.30 L x 2.56 W
x 3.64 D

36

• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.
BH118R

Two-Gang — For Old Work

Two-Gang 34.0 Cu. In..
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

BH234R •

34.0

Mounting Means

Description

Mounting Ears &
Swing Clamps

Two-Gang

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

4.30 L x 4.36 W
x 3.59 D

18
BH234R

• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance.

A-78

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon SuperBlue Boxes
Ceiling Boxes
®

®

Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

Nails
Nails and
Grounding Lug

Ceiling Box
Ceiling Box

4 Dia. x 3.00 D
4 Dia. x 3.00 D

48
24

BH525A-upc • 25.0
BH525P •
25.0

BH525A-UPC

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

BH525P

Fan Box 25.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
BH525L •
BH525LP •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

Nails
Grounding Lug
with Nails

Ceiling Fan Box
Ceiling Fan Box

4 Dia. x 3.06 D
4 Dia. x 3.00 D

24
24

25.0
25.0

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

3/0–4/0 Combination 25.0 Cu. In.

BH525L

• Listed for fan support up to 35 lbs. and fixture support up to 50 lbs.

Ceiling Box with Hanger Bar 25.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

BH525H •

25.0

BH525HP •

25.0

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

Hanger Bar
111⁄2"–181⁄2"
Hanger Bar 111⁄2"–
181⁄2", Grounding Lug

Ceiling Box

4 Dia. x 2.95 D

20

Ceiling Box

4 Dia. x 2.95 D

20

BH525H

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

31⁄2" 14.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

BH614R • †

14.5

BH614RP • †

14.5

Mounting Means

Description

Base, Ears &
Snap-In Bracket
Base, Ears &
Snap-In Bracket

Round Old/
New Work Box
Round Old/New Work
Box w/ Ground Lug

Dimensions Std.
(in.)
Ctn.

31⁄2 Dia.

24

31⁄2 Dia.

24
BH614R

• Listed for wall fixture support up to 10 lbs.
†

Tighten screws to 10 in.-lbs.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-79

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
Carlon Black Polycarbonate Boxes
®

Carlon® non-metallic boxes feature a rugged polycarbonate construction
to withstand extreme temperatures. The boxes will not distort or soften
in heat and they won’t become brittle in the cold.

•	 All Polycarbonate boxes are listed to UL514C
•	 All Polycarbonate boxes are listed for masonry walls

•	 All Polycarbonate boxes are UL® Classified for 2-hr.
fire wall and/or fire ceiling
•	 All Polycarbonate boxes meet NEMA OS-2
•	 All Polycarbonate boxes are permissible for use with
90˚ C conductors
•	UL® File E11461 and R9140

Grip-On GO Box ® Single-Gang Outlet Box

NEW!

•	 Instead of nails or other fasteners,
unique clamps are used to hold the box
securely in place. Simply push onto the
stud and go

•	 The GO Box ® design is UL® Listed

•	 The GO Box ® outlet box is removable
for easy repositioning

It’s a whole new ball game for high-volume residential
products. That’s because the Carlon® GO Box®
product line is one of the most revolutionary laborsaving products ever designed. The GO stands for
“Grip-On” and that’s exactly how it works. Just push
the box onto a stud and the specially designed clamps
hold it in place. No tools or fasteners are required,
reducing installation time, which means you can move
on to the next job. When it comes to lower installed
costs, this changes everything!

•	 “Fast-Set” mounting holes enable
quick installation of devices
•	 Perfectly aligned every time
•	 Perfect for drywall depth
•	 A locator hole in the mounting bracket
helps position the box on marked studs
for accurate installation

•	 23.0 cu. in. capacity accommodates large
devices and enables easy installation of wiring

One-Gang 23.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std. Ctn.

GO-23
GO-23-FS

23.0
23.0

Grip-On Bracket
Grip-On Bracket

—
Fast-Set

33⁄4 L x 23⁄8 W x 21⁄2 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 211⁄16 D

30
30

One-Gang Nail-On 18.0–22.5 Cu. In.

118-N

A-80

122-N

120-N-FS

120-N

122-N-FS

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

118-N
120-N
120-N-FS
122-N
122-N-FS

18.0
20.3
20.3
22.5
22.5

Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails

—
—
Fast-Set
—
Fast-Set

33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 27⁄8 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D
33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D

100
100
100
100
100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

118-LB

118-LBP

120-LB

120-LBP

122-LB

122-LBP

234-N

234-NP

One-Gang Brackets 18.0–22.5 Cu. In.
size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

118-LB

18.0

118-LBP

18.0

120-LB

20.3

120-LBP

20.3

122-LB

22.5

122-LBP

22.5

Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs
Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs
Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs
Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs
Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs
Molded Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs

Cat. No.

Description

Dimensions (in.)

—

33⁄4 L x
21⁄4 W x 27⁄8 D
33⁄4 L x
21⁄4 W x 27⁄8 D
33⁄4 L x
21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D
33⁄4 L x
21⁄4 W x 33⁄16 D
33⁄4 L x
1
2 ⁄4 W x 35⁄8 D
33⁄4 L x
21⁄4 W x 35⁄8 D

POSI-SET®
Fast-Set
—
POSI-SET®
Fast-Set
—
POSI-SET®
Fast-Set

std.
Ctn.

100
100
100
100

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
New Work Boxes

100
100

Two-Gang Nail-On 34.0 Cu. In.
size

Mounting
Means

234-N

34.0

Angled Side Rails

234-NP

34.0

Angled Side Rails

Cat. No. cu. in.

Description

Dimensions (in.)

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps
POSI-WEDGE®
POSI-SET®

33⁄4 L x
4 W x 33⁄32 D
33⁄4 L x
4 W x 33⁄32 D

std.
Ctn.

50
50

Two-Gang Bracket 34.0 Cu. In.
size

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

34.0

Steel Side Bracket
for Wood/Steel Studs

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

33⁄4 L x
4 W x 33⁄32 D

Cat. No. cu. in.
234-LB

std.
Ctn.

50
234-LB

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-81

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
New Work Boxes

Three-Gang Nail-On 45.0 Cu. In.
size

std.
Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

Cat. No. cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

345-N

Angled Side Nails &
Steel Side Brackets

POSI-WEDGE® Cable
Clamps

45.0

33⁄4 L x
513⁄16 W x 23⁄4 D

20
345-N

Three-Gang Bracket 45 Cu. In.
Cat.
No.
345-LB

size
cu. in.

45.0

std.
Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

Mounting Means

Description

Steel Side Bracket for
Wood/Steel Studs

POSI-WEDGE® Cable
Clamps

33⁄4 L x
513⁄16 W x 23⁄4 D

25
345-LB

Four-Gang Nail-On 60 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

460-SB

60.0

Angled Side Nails
& Back Bracket
Angled Side Nails
& Back Bracket

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps
POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

33⁄4 L x
7 ⁄16 W x 23⁄4 D
33⁄4 L x
79⁄16 W x 23⁄4 D

460-SB-24 •*

60.0

std.
Ctn.

10

9

460-SB

10

• 24" adjustable bracket.
* Not UL Classified for fire wall and/or fire ceiling
460-SB-24

Four-Gang Bracket 60 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
460-LB

size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

60.0

Steel Side
Brackets

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

33⁄4 L x
79⁄16 W x 23⁄4 D

std.
Ctn.

8

* Not UL Classified for fire wall and/or fire ceiling

A-82

460-LB

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

4" Square Boxes 32.0 Cu. In.
size

Mounting
Means

32.0

Angled Side Nails

Cat. No. cu. in.
4S-32-N

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

4 L x 4 W x 33⁄16 D

50
4S-32-N

Old Work Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
New Work Box

One-Gang 14.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
114-OW

size
cu. in. Mounting Means Description

14.0

Swing-Ear Brackets

—

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

33⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 3 D

50

114-OW

Two-Gang 32.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

232-OW

32.0

Swing-Ear
Brackets

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 33⁄16 D

50

232-OW

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-83

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
Energy-Efficient Vapor Barrier Boxes
Vapor-barrier boxes are designed to meet the energy-efficiency requirements of
modern homes. They feature a drywall flange covered with a foam gasket and
additional gaskets over the cable entry points. These gaskets provide a vapor-tight
seal, preventing the free flow of air through the box. This helps control heating
costs in the winter and cooling costs in the summer.

•	 High-strength polycarbonate
construction — will not
shatter when cold or distort
in heat
•	 V-clamps provide selfclamping cable entry (multigang and fan/fixture box)

•	 1⁄2" offset flange to ensure
a flush fit in 1⁄2" drywall
•	 Angled side nails for rapid
installation
•	 Pre-drilled flanges for
additional mounting options

FN-23

FN-236-V

FN-354-V

FN-460-V

One-, Two-, Three- and Four-Gang
Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

FN-23

22.5

Angled Side Nails

Vapor Barrier

FN-236-V

36.0

Angled Side Nails

Vapor Barrier

FN-354-V

54.0

Angled Side Nails

Vapor Barrier

FN-460-V*

60.0

Angled Side Nails

Vapor Barrier

35⁄8 L x
21⁄4 W x 35⁄8 D
31⁄2 x
4 x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 x
5
5 ⁄8 x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 x
71⁄2 x 23⁄4 D

Cat. No.

Std.
Ctn.

50
50
20
10

*Not UL Classified for fire wall and/or fire ceiling.

Ceiling Fixture Box 26.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
FN-426-C-V

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

26.0

Angled Side Nails

—

4 L x 4 W x 23⁄4 D

50

FN-426-C-V

Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

Ceiling Fan/Fixture 26.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

FN-CFB

26.0

#3 Bracket

—

4 L x 4 W x 23⁄4 D

50

Listed for fan support up to 35 lbs. and fixture support up to 50 lbs.
FN-CFB

Voltage Partition

A-84

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

FNP

Voltage Partition for NG & FN Series Multi-Gang Boxes
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

50

Polycarbonate Boxes

Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

CFB-16-F

16.0

Center Screw

Ceiling Fan/Fixture

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Saddle-Type Fan/Fixture 16.0 Cu. In.

Std.
Dimensions (in.) Ctn.

4 L x 4 W x 35⁄16 D

50

CFB-16-F

Listed for fan support up to 70 lbs. and fixture support up to 70 lbs.

Universal Flanged Nail-On Boxes

NG-236-V

NG-354-V

Two-, Three- and Four-Gang
Cat. No.
NG-236-V •
NG-354-V •
NG-460-V •*

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

36.0
54.0
60.0

Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails

2-Gang Wall
3-Gang Wall
4-Gang Wall

31⁄2 L x 4 W x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 L x 53⁄4 W x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 L x 71⁄2 W x 23⁄4 D

50
20
10

• NG Boxes have 1⁄2" offset wallboard flange and V-type cable entry.
* Not UL Classified for fire wall and/or fire ceiling.
NG-460-V

Voltage Partition
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

FNP

Voltage Partition for NG & FN Series Multi-Gang Boxes

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

50

A-85

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
Ceiling Boxes
All ceiling boxes are produced from a high heat-resistant material
developed specifically for fixture support applications.

•	 Meets NEMA OS-2
•	 UL Listed to UL 514C

N-321-GC

N-321-C

31⁄2" 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
N-321-C •
N-321-GC •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

20.5
20.5

Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails

Molded Fast Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps, Ground Strap Installed

31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D

50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

N-423-C-V

N-423-GC-V

4" 22.5 Cu. In.
cat. no.
N-423-C-V •
N-423-GC-V •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

22.5
22.5

Angled Side Nails
Angled Side Nails

Molded V-Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps

4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D

50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

A-86

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Polycarbonate Boxes

3/0 18 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B518A-UPC •
B518P-UPC •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

18.0
18.0

Captive Nails
Captive Nails

—
Ground Lug and Screw Attached

3 Dia. x 23⁄4 D
3 Dia. x 23⁄4 D

75
75

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

B520A-UPC

B620L-UPC

B520P-UPC

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

B518P-UPC

B720R-SHK
35 lbs. maximum fan weight

3/0–4/0 Combination 20 Cu. In.
Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

B520A-UPC •

20.0

Captive Nails

4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D

75

B520P-UPC •
B620L-UPC •
B720r-SHK •

20.0
20.0
20.0

Captive Nails
Metal L Bracket
Mounting Screws

Ground Lug and Screw Attached
Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 3"
Ground Lug and Screw Attached
Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"
—

4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D

75
100
18

Cat. No.

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-87

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
Ceiling Boxes with Bar Hanger
•	 Meets NEMA OS-2

N-321-C-94

N-321-GC-94

N-321-C-95

N-321-GC-95

31⁄2" 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
N-321-C-94 •
N-321-GC-94 •
N-321-C-95 •
N-321-GC-95 •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

20.5
20.5
20.5
20.5

16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.

Molded Fast Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps, Ground Strap Installed
Molded Fast Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps, Ground Strap Installed

31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄8 D

50
50
50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

N-423-C-94-V

N-423-GC-94-V

N-423-C-95-V

N-423-GC-95-V

4" 22.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
N-423-C-94-V •
N-423-GC-94-V •
N-423-C-95-V •
N-423-GC-95-V •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5

16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.

Molded Fast Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps, Ground Strap Installed
Molded Fast Clamps
Molded Fast Clamps, Ground Strap Installed

4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄2 D

50
50
50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

A-88

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Polycarbonate Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

B620DC

B620HG-UPC

B620K

B620H-UPC

B620KG-UPC

3/0–4/0 Combination 20.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
B620DC •
B620HG-UPC •
B620H-UPC •
B620K •
B620KG-UPC •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0

24" T-Grid Bar Hanger
11.50"–14.50" Adjustable Bar Hanger Ground Lug and Screw Attached
11.50"–14.50" Adjustable Bar Hanger
14.38"–22.50" Adjustable Bar Hanger
14.38"–22.50" Adjustable Bar Hanger Ground Lug and Screw Attached

Ceiling Box Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"
Ceiling Box Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"
Ceiling Box Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"
Ceiling Box Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"
Ceiling Box Fixture Spacing for 23⁄4" and 31⁄2"

4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D
4 Dia. x 21⁄4 D

18
75
75
75
75

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-89

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Polycarbonate Boxes
Ceiling Boxes

3R-16-N

3R-16-NGP

31⁄2" Nail-On 16.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

16.0
16.0

Angled Nails
Angled Nails

POSI-WEDGE® Cable Clamps
POSI-WEDGE® Cable Clamps

21⁄4
21⁄4

50
50

3R-16-N •
3R-16-NGP •

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

3R-16-BH

3R-16-BHGP

31⁄2" Ceiling Box with Bar Hanger 16.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

16.0
16.0

Adjustable 16"–24" Bar Hanger
Adjustable 16"–24" Bar Hanger

POSI-WEDGE® Cable Clamps
POSI-WEDGE® Cable Clamps

21⁄4
21⁄4

25
25

3R-16-BH •
3R-16-BHGP •

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

NEW!

31⁄2" Fire Alarm Nail-On 16.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
3R-16-N-RED •

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

16.0

Angled Nails

POSI-WEDGE®
Cable Clamps

Dimensions
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

21⁄4

50

• Red ceiling box for fire alarm applications.

3R-16-N-RED

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

A-90

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Polycarbonate Boxes

CFB-12

CFB-16

Easy press-fit onto the joist. Integrally
molded ribs grip the joist and stop the
box from falling.

Just one hand is required to mount
the box using the pre-located
mounting screw.


Integrally
molded cable V-clamps
provide easy and secure clamping
for non-metallic cables.

CFB-16 features 1⁄2" KOs in addition
to V-clamps.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Saddle-Type Ceiling Fan Boxes

Saddle-Type Fan 12.0–16.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

CFB-12 •

12.0

CFB-16 •

16.0

Mounting Means

Depth (in.)

Std.
CTN.

Non-Metallic Saddle-Type Ceiling Fan Box with V-Clamps
for Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable
Non-Metallic Saddle-Type Ceiling Fan Box with V-Clamps
for Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable and Two 1⁄2" KOs

21⁄4

50

21⁄4

50

• Listed for fan support up to 70 lbs. and fixture support up to 70 lbs.

Old Work

4" Round 18.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions
(in.)

B618R-UPC •
18.0
Swing Clamps
—
41⁄4 Dia.
B618RP-UPC •
18.0
Swing Clamps
Ground Lug
41⁄4 Dia.
• Not UL Classified for Fire Resistance or used for fixture support in the ceiling.

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

100
100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

B618R-UPC

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-91

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
Carlon Brown Phenolic Boxes
®

•	 All Phenolic boxes are listed to UL514C

New Fire Rating! Carlon® phenolic boxes can be installed in the
same stud cavity of a shared two-hour wall. They may also face
opposite directions with only a 3" horizontal separation — ideal
for multi-family construction!

•	 All Phenolic boxes are listed for masonry walls
•	 All Phenolic boxes are UL® Classified for 2-hr. fire wall
and/or fire ceiling
•	 All Phenolic boxes meet NEMA OS-2
•	 All Phenolic boxes are permissible for use with 	
90° C conductors
•	 UL® File E11461 and R9140

One-Gang Nail-On 9.0–18.0 Cu. In.

2050-UB

2070

2030

1040

1240

2000

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

2050-UB
2070
2030
1040
1240
2000

9.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
18.0
18.0

Bottom Nails
Bottom Nails
Bottom Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Recessed Angled Nails
Bottom Nails

—
—
—
—
—
“Classic”

39⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 113⁄16 D
39⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 25⁄8 D
39⁄16 L x 215⁄32 W x 213⁄16 D
39⁄16 L x 21⁄8 W x 31⁄8 D
311⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 35⁄16 D
311⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 31⁄8 D

100
100
100
100
100
100

One-Gang Nail-On 20.3–22.5 Cu. In.

1250-UB-S

1250-UB

Cat. No.
1250-UB
1250-UB-S
1050-UB
1260
1260-S

A-92

1050-UB

1260

1260-S

size cu.
in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

20.3
20.3
21.0
22.5
22.5

Recessed Angled Nails
Recessed Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Recessed Angled Nails
Recessed Angled Nails

—
—
—
—
—

37⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 33⁄8 D
37⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 33⁄8 D
35⁄8 L x 25⁄16 W x 31⁄2 D
37⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 321⁄32 D
37⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 321⁄32 D

100
100
50
50
50

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Phenolic Boxes

2030-502

2030-702

2000-738

1250-112

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

2030-502
2030-702
2000-738
1250-112

16.0
16.0
18.0
20.3

⁄2" Offset Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
⁄4" Offset Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
3
⁄8" Offset Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
1
⁄2" Offset Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs

—
—
—
—

35⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄8 L x 21⁄4 W x 23⁄4 D

100
100
100
50

1

1

Two-Gang Nail-On 27.5–40.5 Cu. In.

Cat. No.
1032-C
1032-UB
1052-C
1052-C-SQ
1052-PC
1052-UB
1072
1072-C
1072-C-SQ
1072-PC

1032-C

1032-UB

1052-C

1052-C-SQ

1052-PC

1052-UB

1072

1072-C

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std. Ctn.

27.5
27.5
32.5
32.5
32.5
32.5
40.5
40.5
40.5
40.5

Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Angled Screws
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Angled Screws
Compound Angled Nails

High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps
Non-Metallic Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps
Non-Metallic Clamps

35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 DD
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 41⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

One-Gang Brackets 16.0–20.3 Cu. In.

A-93

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
Two-Gang Brackets 24.0–34.0 Cu. In.

7072-2

7072-202

7072-N02

6062-402

6062-4-UB

7002-2

7002-202

2002-738

2002-738-C

2002-R-C

Cat. No.

A-94

size cu. in.

7072-2
7072-202
7072-N02
6062-402
6062-4-UB
6062-4-UB-SQ
7002-2
7002-202
2002-738

24.0
24.0
24.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
32.5
32.5
34.0

2002-738-C

34.0

2002-R-C

34.0

Mounting Means

Description

#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
High Clamps
#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
“N” Bracket
#36 Clamps
Ears, #4 Swing Bracket
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
Ears, #4 Swing Bracket
High Clamps
Angled Screws
High Clamps
#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
High Clamps
#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
3
/8" Offset Brackets for Wood/Steel Studs 3⁄8" Offset Wallboard Tabs
& #36 Clamps, Bulk Packet
3
3
/8" Offset Brackets for Wood/Steel Studs
⁄8" Offset Wallboard
Tabs & High Clamps
“R” Bracket
High Clamps

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

35⁄16 L x 4 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄16 L x 4 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄16 L x 4 W x 23⁄4 D
33⁄8 L x 43⁄16 W x 21⁄2 D
33⁄8 L x 43⁄16 W x 21⁄2 D
33⁄8 L x 43⁄16 W x 21⁄2 D
31⁄4 L x 4 W x 35⁄8 D
31⁄4 L x 4 W x 35⁄8 D
11
3 ⁄16 L x 43⁄16 W x 31⁄4 D

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

311⁄16 L x 43⁄16 W x 31⁄4 D

50

35⁄8 L x 43⁄32 W x 31⁄4 D

50

www.tnb.com

Phenolic Boxes

1043

Cat. No.
1043
1043-C
1043-C-SQ
1063
1063-C
1063-C-SQ

1043-C

1043-C-SQ

1063-C

1063

1063-C-SQ

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

42.9
42.9
42.9
58.5
58.5
58.5

Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Angled Screws
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Screws

#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps

35⁄8 L x 57⁄8 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄8 L x 57⁄8 W x 23⁄4 D
35⁄8 L x 57⁄8 W x 23⁄4 D
321⁄32 L x 515⁄16 W x 321⁄32 D
321⁄32 L x 515⁄16 W x 321⁄32 D
321⁄32 L x 515⁄16 W x 321⁄32 D

20
20
20
20
20
20

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Three-Gang Nail-On 42.9–58.5 Cu. In.

Three-Gang Brackets 35.5–37.0 Cu. In.

7073-2

Cat. No.
7073-2
7073-202
7073-238-02
6063-4
6063-402

7073-202

size cu. in.

35.5
35.5
35.5
37.0
37.0

7073-238-02

Mounting Means

6063-4

Description

#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
High Clamps
#2 Bottom Bracket and Wire Support
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
Two 3⁄8" Offset Brackets for Wood/Steel Studs #36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
Ears, #4 Swing Bracket
High Clamps
Ears, #4 Swing Bracket
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

6063-402

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

33⁄16 L x 513⁄16 W x 25⁄8 D
33⁄16 L x 513⁄16 W x 25⁄8 D
33⁄16 L x 513⁄16 W x 25⁄8 D
33⁄8 L x 513⁄16 W x 21⁄2 D
33⁄8 L x 513⁄16 W x 21⁄2 D

100
100
100
100
50

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-95

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
Four-Gang Brackets 48.0–60.0 Cu. In.

Cat. No.
7074-02 BH
7074 BH
2004-02-BH
2004-BH
2004-238
2004-238-02

A-96

7074-02-BH

7074-BH

2004-02-BH

2004-BH

2004-238

2004-238-02

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

48.0
48.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0

Side Bracket & Stabilizing Bar
Side Bracket & Stabilizing Bar
Side Bracket & Stabilizing Bar
Side Bracket & Stabilizing Bar
Two 3⁄8" Offset Brackets for Wood/Steel Studs
Two 3⁄8" Offset Brackets for Wood/Steel Studs

#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed

35⁄16 L x 75⁄8 W x 25⁄8 D
35⁄16 L x 75⁄8 W x 25⁄8 D
35⁄8 L x 723⁄32 W x 31⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 723⁄32 W x 31⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 723⁄32 W x 31⁄16 D
35⁄8 L x 723⁄32 W x 31⁄16 D

10
10
10
10
20
20

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Phenolic Boxes

4020-1

4020-1-02

4000-02

4000-1-UB

4000-N

4000-N02

Cat. No.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

⁄2" Raised Face Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
⁄2" Raised Face Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
Nails or Screws, Bulk Packed
1
⁄2" Raised Face Bracket for Wood/Steel Studs
“N” Bracket
“N” Bracket with Nails

High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed

45⁄16 L x 45⁄16 W x 11⁄4 D
45⁄16 L x 45⁄16 W x 11⁄4 D
41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 23⁄8 D
41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 23⁄8 D
41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 23⁄8 D
41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 23⁄8 D

50
50
50
50
50
50

size cu. in.

4020-1
4020-1-02
4000-02
4000-1-UB
4000-N
4000-N02

16.0
16.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

4" Square Boxes Nail-On Brackets 16.0–30.0 Cu. In.

1
1

Plaster Rings and Covers for 4" Square Boxes

4041

4042-12

4043

4022-12

Cat. No.

size
cu. in.

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std. Ctn.

4041
4042-12
4043
4022-12

—
4.0
4.5
7.0

4" Square Flat Back
4" Square Single-Gang Plaster Ring, 1⁄2" Offset
4" Square Plaster Ring for 31⁄4" Fixture, 1⁄2" Offset
4" Square Two-Gang Plaster Ring, 1⁄2" Offset

41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 41⁄4 D
41⁄4 L x 41⁄4 W x 41⁄4 D
43⁄16 L x 43⁄16 W x 43⁄16 D
43⁄16 L x 43⁄16 W x 43⁄16 D

100
100
100
50

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-97

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
One-Gang Brackets

6000-402

6010-402

6010-4-PC

6010-4-UB

6060-02

6060-402

6070-402

16.0–18.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
18.0
18.0

Ears, #8 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets

No Clamp Blocks
Bulk PK Clamps
Non-Metallic Clamps
High Clamps
—
No Clamp Blocks
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps

23⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 23⁄16 D
33⁄8 L x 27⁄32 opening; 411⁄16 overall x 27⁄8 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 27⁄8 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 27⁄8 D
31⁄4 L x 23⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 23⁄16 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 31⁄4 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 31⁄4 D

50
100
100
100
100
100
50
50

6000-402 •
6010-402
6010-4-PC
6010-4-UB
6060-02
6060-402
6070-402
6070-4-UB

• Not UL Listed, UL Recognized component.

7090

6050-4-UB

6020-402

7010

7060

7010-8

7020-8

6090-402

7.5–14.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
7090
6020-402
7060
7020-8
6050-4-UB
7010
7010-8
6090-402

A-98

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

7.5
8.0
9.0
10.0
10.5
12.5
12.5
14.0

Ears
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears
Ears, #8 Swing Brackets
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets
Ears Clamps
Ears, #8 Snap-In Bracket
Ears, #4 Swing Brackets

—
Ears
Ears
High Clamps
High Clamps
High
High Clamps
No Clamp Blocks

31⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W x 17⁄16 D
37⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 13⁄4 D
37⁄16 L x 21⁄4 W x 13⁄4 D
31⁄4 L x 23⁄16 W x 21⁄4 D
31⁄2 L x 21⁄4 W x 21⁄8 D
31⁄4 L x 23⁄16 W x 211⁄16 D
31⁄4 L x 23⁄16 W x 21⁄16 D
33⁄8 L x 23⁄8 W x 21⁄2 D

100
100
100
50
100
100
50
100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Phenolic Boxes

3060

3090-N

3090-N-40

3190

3090-N-S

3190-C

3190-PC

31⁄2" Nail-On 13.5–22.8 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
3060 †
3090-N •
3090-N-40 •
3090-N-S •
3190 •
3190-C •
3190-PC •

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

3.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
22.8
22.8
22.8

Nails or Screw Mount, 37⁄16" O.D.
“N" Bracket
“N" Bracket
“N" Bracket with Screws
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails
Compound Angled Nails

See NEC-725-2, 725-51, 725-52, Class 2
High Clamps
High Clamps & #40 Ground Strap
High Clamps & #36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
Non-Metallic Clamps

31⁄2 Dia. x 5⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 27⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄4 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 31⁄4 D

100
50
50
50
50
50
50

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Nail-On

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
†

Not UL Listed.

Flanged

3030-02-40

3030

3030-02

3030PC

3000

3000-02

3000-PC

31⁄2" Flanged for Manufactured Housing 11.5–20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

31⁄2 Dia. x 13⁄4 D

100

Screw Mount
(43⁄8" O.D. Flange or Flash Ring)
Box O.D. 31⁄2"

#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed & #40
Ground Strap
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
Non-Metallic Clamps
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
Non-Metallic Clamps

31⁄2 Dia. x 13⁄4 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 13⁄4 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 13⁄4 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 27⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 27⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 27⁄8 D

100
100
100
50
50
50

size cu. in.

3030-02-40 •

11.5

3030 •
3030-02 •
3030PC •
3000 •
3000-02 •
3000-PC •

14.0
14.0
14.0
20.5
20.5
20.5

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-99

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
4" Nail-On Brackets

4060-02

4070-N

4060-N02

4160-UB

4070-N02

4070-302

4070-N-SQ

4170

4170-C

13.5–21.5 Cu. In
Cat. No.
4060-02 •
4060-N02 •
4160-UB •
4070-302 •
4070-N •
4070-N02 •
4070-N-SQ •
4170 •
4170-C •

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

13.5
13.5
16.0
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8
21.5
21.5

Nail or Screws
“N" Bracket, Bulk Packed with Nails
Compound Angled Side Nails
#3 Bracket
“N" Bracket with Nails
“N" Bracket with Nails
“N" Bracket with screws
Compound Angled Side Nails
Compound Angled Side Nails

#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps

4 Dia. x 15⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 15⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 115⁄16 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 27⁄16 D
4 Dia. x 27⁄16 D

100
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

4" Round Outlet Box

4170-CFB

21.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
4170-CFB •
4170-CFB-S •
4170-3-CFB •

size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

21.5
21.5
21.5

—
Steel Stud Screws
3" Bracket

41⁄16 Dia.
41⁄16 Dia.
41⁄16 Dia.

10
10
10

• UL Listed for support of light fixtures of up to 50 lbs. or ceiling fans up to 35 lbs.
4170-CFB-S

A-100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

4170-3-CFB

Phenolic Boxes

13.5–22.8 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

3090-94

3090-94-40

3090-95

3090-95-40

3190-C-94

3190-C-95

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

13.5
13.5
13.5
3.5
22.8
22.8

16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
16" Bar Hanger
24" Bar Hanger

High Clamps
High Clamps & #40 Ground Strap
High Clamps
High Clamps & #40 Ground Strap
High Clamps
High Clamps

31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D

50
50
50
50
25
25

3090-94 •
3090-94-40 •
3090-95 •
3090-95-40 •
3190-C-94 •
3190-C-95 •

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

31⁄2" Ceiling Box with Bar Hanger

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

4" Outlet Boxes with Bar Hanger

4060-9402

4070-95

4070-94

4060-9502

4070-9502

4070-9402

4070-95-40

4070-95-PC

4070-CFB-BHL

13.5–20.8 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
4060-9402 •
4060-9502 •
4070-94 •
4070-9402 •
4070-95 •
4070-9502 •
4070-95-40 •
4070-95-PC •
4070-CFB-BHL †

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

13.5
13.5
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.8

16" Bar Hanger
24" Bar Hanger
16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
16" Bar Hanger, 121⁄4" Min.–19" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 161⁄2" Min.–27" Max.
24" Bar Hanger, 12" to 24" Maximum Center

#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
#36 Clamps, Bulk Packed
High Clamps
#36 Strap, Bulk Packed
Ground Strap
Non-Metallic Clamps
—

4 Dia. x 15⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 15⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
4 Dia. x 23⁄8 D
41⁄16 Dia. x 23⁄8 D

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
10

• Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
†

UL Listed for support of light fixtures of up to 50 lbs. or ceiling fans up to 35 lbs.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-101

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
Plaster Rings and Covers for 4" Outlet Boxes

3051

4051

4052 Brown

4052 White

Cat. No.
3051
4051
4052 Brown
4052 Ivory
4052 White
4061
4062 Brown
4062 Ivory
4062 White

4052 Ivory

4062 Ivory, 4062 Brown, 4062 White

4061

size cu. in.

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

—
—
—
—
—
4.5
—
—
—

Round Flat Blank, Fits #3000, #3020 & #3030 Boxes Only
Round Blank or Pendant, 25/64" Diameter Knockout
Round Flat Blank with 4" O.D.
Round Flat Blank with 4" O.D.
Round Flat Blank with 4" O.D.
Round Plaster Ring, 1⁄2" Offset for 31⁄4 Mounting
Round Flat Blank with 41⁄2" O.D.
Round Flat Blank with 41⁄2" O.D.
Round Flat Blank with 41⁄2" O.D.

31⁄4 Dia.
3 ⁄4–4 Dia.
31⁄4–4 Dia.
31⁄4–4 Dia.
31⁄4–4 Dia.
4 Dia.
4 Dia.
4 Dia.
4 Dia.

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

1

Ceiling Boxes — Old Work

3080-9

3080

3080-9-SQ

3080-902

3080-9-40

3080-9-PC

3080-SQ

3000-9-UB

3 ⁄2" Brackets 14.0–20.5 Cu. In.
1

Cat. No.
3080 †
3080-9 •
3080-902 •
3080-9-40 •
3080-9-PC •
3080-9-SQ
3080-SQ
3000-9-PC
3000-9-UB •

size cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
20.5
20.5

Ears
#9 Snap-In Bracket
#9 Snap-In Bracket
#9 Snap-In Bracket
#9 Snap-In Bracket
#9 Snap-In Bracket
Ears
#9 Snap-In Bracket
#9 Snap-In Bracket

High Clamps
High Clamps
#36 Clamps Bulk Packed
High Clamps & #40 Ground Strap
Non-Metallic Clamps
High Clamps
High Clamps
Non-Metallic Clamps
High Clamps

31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia . x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D
31⁄2 Dia. x 21⁄8 D

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

• Listed for fixture support up to 15 lb. in walls only.
†

A-102

Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Phenolic Boxes

9.8–14.0 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
5060 Brown •
5060 Ivory
5060 White
5070 Brown •
5070 Ivory
5070 White

size
cu. in. mounting means

9.8
9.8
9.8
14.0
14.0
14.0

Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D
41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D
41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D
41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D
41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D
41⁄2 L x 23⁄4 W x 11⁄8 D

100
100
100
100
100
100

5060 Brown

5060 Ivory

5060 White

5070 Brown

5070 Ivory

5070 White

• Note: Only the “Brown” is Phenolic — the White and Ivory are a urea material.

Two-Gang

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

One-Gang

5072 Brown

23.8 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
5072 Brown •
5072 Ivory
5072 White

size
cu. in.

mounting means

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

23.8
23.8
23.8

Screws
Screws
Screws

49⁄16 L x 41⁄2 W x 15⁄8 D
49⁄16 L x 41⁄2 W x 15⁄8 D
49⁄16 L x 41⁄2 W x 15⁄8 D

50
50
50

• Note: Only the “Brown” is Phenolic — the White and Ivory are a urea material.

5072 Ivory

5072 White

61⁄2" Outside Diameter

5080 Brown

3.8 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
5080 Brown •
5080 Ivory
5080 White

size
cu. in.

mounting means

Dimensions (in.)

std.
Ctn.

3.8
3.8
3.8

Screws, Box O.D.
Screws, Box O.D.
Screws, Box O.D.

61⁄4 L x 31⁄8 W x 3⁄4 D
61⁄4 L x 31⁄8 W x 3⁄4 D
61⁄4 L x 31⁄8 W x 3⁄4 D

50
50
50

• Note: Only the “Brown” is Phenolic — the White and Ivory are a urea material.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

5080 Ivory

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

5080 White

A-103

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Phenolic Boxes
AO Round Conduit Boxes and Covers

A04-12

Cat. No.

size
cu. in.

AO4-12 •
AO4-34 •
AO-51 •

12.0
12.0
—

Mounting Means

Description

Four 1⁄2" Threaded KOs Round Box
Four 3⁄4" Threaded KOs Round Box
Stainless Steel Screws Black Cover
with Gaskets

Dimensions
(in.)

std.
Ctn.

41⁄8 Dia. x 17⁄8 D
41⁄8 Dia. x 17⁄8 D
—

10
10
10

• Not UL Listed.

A04-34

A0-51

FSC-12

FSC-34

FSC-51

FSC-53

FSC-54

FSC-55

Weatherproof Device Boxes and Covers

size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

FSC-12

16.0

FSC-34

16.0

One 1⁄2" Threaded
KO in Each End
One 3⁄4" Threaded
KO in Each End
Stainless
Steel Screws
Stainless
Steel Screws

Cat. No.

FSC-51 •

—

FSC-53 •

—

FSC-54 •

—

Stainless
Steel Screws,
1.409" Dia.

FSC-55 •

—

Stainless
Steel Screws

std.
Ctn.

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Device Box

47⁄16 L x 125⁄32 W x
29⁄16 D
47⁄16 L x 125⁄32 W x
29⁄16 D
—

10

—

10

Device Box
Blank Cover
with Gaskets
Duplex
Receptacle
Cover with
Gasket
Single
Receptacle
Cover with
Gasket
Switch Cover
with Gasket

10
10

—

10

—

10

• Not UL Listed.

A-104

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Non-Metallic Covers and Accessories

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Description

std.
Ctn.

3.5
4.2
5.0
6.6
8.1

⁄2" Rise
⁄8" Rise
3
⁄4" Rise
1" Rise
11⁄4" Rise

100
50
50
40
30

size cu. in.

Description

std.
Ctn.

Blank
⁄2" Rise
5
⁄8" Rise
3
⁄4" Rise

100
75
50
50

Description

std.
Ctn.

⁄8" Rise
⁄2" Rise

100
100

A410 •
A411 •
A412 •
A413 •
A414 •

1

5

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

One-Gang

A410

• UL Listed E11461.

Two-Gang

Cat. No.
A400 •
A420 •
A421 •
A422 •

—
6.1
7.4
8.8

1

• UL Listed E11461.

A420

A400

Round Plaster Ring

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

A471 •
A472 •

3.2
4.0

5
1

• UL Listed E11461.
A471

Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

Round Blank Cover

A470D

Cat. No.

size cu. in.

Color

Description

std.
Ctn.

—
—
—

Blue
Blue
White

Blank with 1⁄2" KO
Blank
Ceiling Box Cover

100
35
12

A470D •
e460r-car •
cpc4wh •
• UL Listed E11461.

Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.

www.tnb.com

E460R-CAR

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

CPC4WH

A-105

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Non-Metallic Covers and Accessories
Box Extender

Handy Box and Covers

B112HB

HB1BL

HB1SW

B1EXTB

HB1DP

Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Mounting
Means

Description

Std.
Ctn.

B1EXTB

—

Screws

31⁄4 L x 21⁄4 W

25

UL Listed E11461.

HB1GF

Cat. No.

Size
cu. in.

Description

Std.
Ctn.qty.

B112HB
HB1BL
HB1DP
HB1GF
HB1SW

17⁄8 x 4 x 21⁄8
.25 x 4.30 x 2.38
.25 x 4.30 x 2.38
.25 x 4.30 x 2.38
.25 x 4.30 x 2.38

Handy Box – One-Gang
Blank Cover
Duplex Receptacle Cover
GFCI Cover
Toggle Switch Cover

50
25
25
25
25

Accessory Clamps and Ground Strap
Cat. No.

Description

Std.
Ctn.

36
36-PFC
NCC1-50

Metal Stamped Clamp and Screw, Unassembled
Non-Metallic Clamp
Non-Metallic Cable Lock Clamp for Strain Relief
of Non-Metallic Cable
Ground Strap for Phenolic Boxes

50
50
500
(10 bags of 50)
50

40-UB

36-PFC

36

NCC1-50

NEC® Box Requirements* Cubic Inches for 1–40 Conductors
Wire
Size
(AWG)

#18
#16
#14
#12
#10
#18
#16
#14
#12
#10

Cubic-Inch Capacity by Number of Conductors
1

2

3

4

5

1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
2.50
21
31.50
36.75
42.00
47.25
52.50

3.00
3.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
22
33.00
38.50
44.00
49.50
55.00

4.50
5.25
6.00
6.75
7.50
23
34.50
40.25
46.00
51.75
57.50

6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
24
36.00
42.00
48.00
54.00
60.00

7.50
8.75
10.00
11.25
12.50
25
37.50
43.75
50.00
56.25
62.50

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

* Make allowance of two additional conductors for each device, one for clamps if required
and one for one or more grounding conductors entering the box. See NEC ® 314.16(B).

A-106

17

18

19

20

9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 16.50 18.00 19.50 21.00 22.50 24.00 25.50 27.00 28.50 30.00
10.50 12.25 14.00 15.75 17.50 19.25 21.00 22.75 24.50 26.25 28.00 29.75 31.50 33.25 36.00
12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 26.00 28.00 30.00 32.00 34.00 36.00 38.00 40.00
13.50 15.75 18.00 20.25 22.50 24.75 27.00 29.25 31.50 33.75 36.00 38.25 40.50 42.75 45.00
15.00 17.50 20.00 22.50 25.00 27.50 30.00 32.50 35.00 37.50 40.00 42.50 45.00 47.50 50.00
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
39.00 40.50 42.00 43.50 45.00 46.50 48.00 49.50 51.00 52.50 54.00 55.50 57.00 58.50 60.00
45.50 47.25 49.00 50.75 52.50 54.25 56.00 57.75 59.50 61.25 63.00 64.75 66.50 68.25 70.00
52.00 54.00 56.00 58.00 60.00 62.00 64.00 66.00 68.00 70.00 72.00 74.00 76.00 78.00 80.00
58.50 60.75 63.00 65.25 67.50 69.75 72.00 74.25 76.50 78.75 81.00 83.25 85.50 87.75 90.00
65.00 67.50 70.00 72.50 75.00 77.50 80.00 82.50 85.00 87.50 90.00 92.50 95.00 97.50 100.00

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Carlon Orange Structured Cable Management System

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

®

Carlon® Structured Cable Management System (SCMS) is designed for general-purpose low-voltage residential wire and cable management.
This series of boxes and brackets are accompanied by a corrugated conduit system and accessories to future-proof your home.

5

1
3

7
4
6
10

2
8
9

Cable management
systems that make
installation faster
and better.

5

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-107

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
1

Dual-Voltage Box/Bracket
Here’s a smart alternative for
where you would normally use
separate high- and low-voltage
boxes. Designed to fit a standard
two-gang faceplate, this component
combines an electrical box and
low-voltage bracket into a single
unit for fast, easy installation. No alignment tools are
required and easy nail-on mounting provides precise
placement and a professionally finished appearance.
Resi-Rings accept 3⁄4" Resi-Gard® fittings only...SC200DV

2

Low-Voltage
Add-On Bracket
This low-voltage bracket provides
a low-voltage outlet next to a
previously installed high-voltage
outlet. Great for both new
construction and rework, it
attaches easily to most electrical
boxes and is designed to fit a standard two-gang
faceplate. Resi-Rings accept 3⁄4" Resi-Gard® fittings
only…SC100SC

3

2

3

Attaching the Add-On Bracket is a “snap.” You just remove the back of the double-sided tape (1), clip
the bracket in place (2) and press on the bracket to secure it against the box (3). Enables the installation
of most rectangular­­yoke plates.

1

2

3

Our Low-Voltage Adjustable Brackets simplify installation with tile, paneling or stucco to save you time and
effort. Just use the quick-mount bracket to clip it to the stud (1), add a screw for extra support if you want it
(2), then use the adjustment screw to accommodate wall thickness (3). Also available in a two-gang version.

Low-Voltage Brackets
Here’s the fast installation choice
when only low voltage is required.
Designed to fit a standard one-,
two- or three-gang faceplate,
these low-voltage brackets
feature an easy nail-on mounting
or screw-in bracket, while a hard
shell provides increased durability and no racking.
Resi-Rings accept 3⁄4", 1" and 11⁄4" Resi-Gard® fittings
(one- and two-gang versions only)… SC100A,
SC200A (shown) and SC300A

A-108

1

Low-Voltage
Adjustable Brackets
Our Low-Voltage Adjustable
Brackets are the perfect solution
for tile, paneling or stucco. A
bracket enables quick, easy stud
mounting and a turn of the screw
adjusts to any wall thickness. It’s
great for retrofit/installation upgrades. Replace the
single-gang bracket with a two-gang bracket or switch
services to a high-voltage Adjust-A-Box™ device…
SC100ADJC (shown) and SC200ADJC

4

Why waste time mounting, then trying to line up separate high-voltage and low-voltage boxes, and still end
up with something not quite right? Our Dual-Voltage Box/Bracket lets you do it all in one fast, easy step with
perfect alignment every time.

Our Low-Voltage Brackets are open-backed to easily accommodate the bend radiuses required for lowvoltage cabling and deep devices such as volume controls, while molded-in ports make it easy to connect
flexible raceway for future-proofing. Or, you can use them to tie off cable to the bracket. They can also be
attached to wood or steel studs.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Resi-Gard® Flexible Raceway
and Fittings
Available in five sizes from 3⁄4" to
2", with factory-installed pull tape
in sizes 1" to 2", our Resi-Gard®
Flexible Raceway provides a main
chase from the main distribution
Our complete line of quick-connect couplings, adapters, cable clips, conduit clamps and solvent cement make
panel to a secondary hub in the
for quick, easy professional installation of Resi-Gard ® Flexible Raceway.
attic or basement. Ideal for easy access to add cable
or service upgrades or leave empty for future expansion.

6

Dual-Voltage Box/Bracket
For applications where a combined
high- and low-voltage closed-back
box is needed, such as placement
in a fire-rated wall, we offer our
Carlon® SuperBlue® two-, threeand four-gang wiring boxes with
a slip-in-place divider to give
you the split box you need for the low-voltage
outlet… SCDIV

7

What could be easier than converting one of our Carlon ® SuperBlue ® boxes for both high- and low-voltage
use? Just slip the divider into place and you’re ready to go. Great for situations requiring a dual-voltage
fire-rated box.

Recessed Dual-Voltage
3-Gang Old Work Plate
The New Carlon® RDV 3-Gang
Old Work Plate has been
developed to simplify today’s
in-home entertainment/networking
needs. The box is designed to
accommodate the wires, cables
and cords used with flat-panel display installations.
It features a two-gang low-voltage opening and a onegang opening for an outlet/switch box (boxes, devices
and plates not included)… SC300PRB and SC300PRR

8

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

5

The high-gloss, recessed design eliminates unsightly wires, cables and cords and blends with any décor.
The RDV Old Work Plate makes installing flat panel displays faster and easier!

Drop-In Floor Box
The Carlon® Drop-In Floor Box
with Brass Cover combines
many of the same features of
our existing floor box line with
the strength, durability and style
necessary to accommodate
today’s residential electrical/
telecommunication needs. The Carlon® Drop-In Floor
Box is the fastest, easiest way for contractors to put
a floor socket anywhere they need it! It’s designed
to accommodate line voltage and low-voltage
applications… E971FBDI-2 and E971FBDIB-2

www.tnb.com

Turn off electricity before starting. Drill hole in floor using hole saw. Pull romex through floor. Connect
receptacle wires to romex. Brass cover snaps into place. Use a small screwdriver to pry open brass cover
to plug in appliance.
For more information about this floor box, refer to www.tnb.com or the Thomas & Betts Residential catalog.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-109

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System

A-110

9

Adjust-A-Box® Floor Box
Carlon® Adjust-A-Box® Floor Boxes
make installing floor outlets fast
and easy by providing maximum
installation flexibility. The box
features an adjustment screw
designed to adjust the box from
0" to 13⁄4" by simply turning
the screw clockwise or counterclockwise, providing
a flush mount every time… B234BFBB (brass cover)
and B234BFSS (stainless steel)

10

Install clip over subfloor. Screw in to adjust to height of flooring or carpet. Beautiful flush fit
every time!
For more information about this floor box, refer to www.tnb.com or the Thomas & Betts
Residential catalog.

Old Work Bracket
Carlon® Low-Voltage Old Work
Brackets are specifically designed
for the installation of low-voltage
devices such as cable television,
data communications or
telephone jacks in an existing
wall. The backless feature
provides the space needed for the bend radius
requirements of coaxial or data/communication
cables. It also eliminates the need for metal plates,
lags or screws… SC100RR (shown) and SC200RR

Back
View
1. Use the holes in the corners to mark the opening.
2. Cut out the drywall.
3. Place box in wall.
4. Secure box to wall.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
•	 Dual-voltage capability
•	 Accepts a two-gang faceplate
•	 3⁄4" Resi-Rings®
•	 Backless design accommodates large/deep
low-voltage devices
•	 Eliminates cutting the backs off electrical boxes

E-18-4-DV

SB-21-DV

SC200DV

SN-21-DV

•	 Accommodates bend-radius requirements for low-voltage cabling
•	Provides ample space for installation
Size cu.
in.

Cat. No.
E-18-4-DV•
SB-21-DV•

18.0
20.5

SC200DV•
SN-21-DV•

20.5
20.5

Mounting Means

Std. Ctn.
qty.

Dimensions (in.)

Dual Voltage
33⁄4 L x 4 W x 3 D
Molded Bracket for
35⁄8 L x 4 W x 37⁄16 D
Wood/Steel Studs
Angled Side Nails 3.69 L x 4.04 W x 3.67 D
Angled Side Nails
35/8 L x 4 W x 37⁄16 D

50
50
16
50

• UL Listed E11461.
Permissible for use with 90° C insulated conductors.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Dual-Voltage Box/Bracket

80° C heat-rated material.

Low-Voltage Brackets
•	 Backless design accommodates large/deep low-voltage devices
•	 Eliminates cutting the backs off electrical boxes
•	 Accommodates bend-radius requirements for low-voltage cabling
•	 Provides ample space for installation
•	 Mount Flange for steel stud application
One- and two-gang versions only:
•	Resi-Rings® with concentric knockouts
•	Accepts 3⁄4", 1" and 11⁄4" Resi-Gard®

SC100A

SC200A

•	 Horizontal mounting bracket (one-gang only)
•	 Breakaway drywall support flange provides easy alignment for 1⁄2" drywall
•	 Screw-mount option
•	 Breakaway vertical mounting flange

Cat. No.

▲

SC100A•
SC200A•
SC300A•

Size cu.
in.
Mounting Means

N/A
N/A
44

Description

Where noted
by

▲

•	 Breakaway feature enables the use
of the Low-Voltage Add-On Bracket

Dimensions (in.)

3
Captive Nails
⁄4", 1", 11⁄4" Resi-Rings® 3.73 L x 2.32 W x 3.15 D
3
Captive Angled Nails ⁄4", 1", 11⁄4" Resi-Rings® 3.77 L x 4.07 W x 3.15 D
Captive Angled Nails
—
3.69 L x 5.81 W x 1.50 D

Std.
Ctn.

24
24
5

SC300A

• UL Listed E216492.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-111

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Low-Voltage Add-On Bracket
•	 Dual-voltage capability accommodates high- 	
and low-voltage devices in the same box
•	 Attaches to virtually any non-metallic electrical
box as long as there’s a side for the tape to
stick to
•	 Accepts a two-gang faceplate
•	 3⁄4" Resi-Rings®
•	 Enables the installation of most rectangular
yoke plates

Cat. No.

Size Mounting
cu. in.
Means
Description

SC100SC•

N/A

Tape

1-Gang

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

3.68 L x 2.36 W x 3.10 D

24

SC100SC

• UL Listed E216492.

Low-Voltage Adjustable Brackets
•	 Accommodates varying finished-wall thicknesses — 	
ideal for wood paneling, tile or stucco walls
•	 With the turn of a screw, adjust to any wall thickness
•	 Steel mounting bracket provides a secure mount
•	 Backless design accommodates large/deep 	
low-voltage devices
•	 Eliminates cutting the backs off electrical boxes
•	 Accommodates bend-radius requirements for 	
low-voltage cabling
•	 Provides ample space for installation
•	 Removable bracket and interchangeable mounting bracket
— upgrade from a one-gang to a two-gang anytime

Cat. No.

Size Mounting
cu. in.
Means
Description

SC100ADJC•

21

SC200ADJC•

34

Adjustable
Bracket
Adjustable
Bracket

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

1-Gang

3.56 L x 3.88 W x 1.69 D 24

2-Gang

3.56 L x 5.63 W x 1.69 D 20

SC100ADJC

• UL Listed E216492.

A-112

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
•	 Rectangular flange for faster/easier installation
•	 Shallow bracket — less material, easier to work with
•	 Marking hole for wall opening
•	 Thinner flange for less protrusion on the wall
•	 SINGLE-GANG ONLY — clamps stop at center point 	
to prevent the bracket from twisting or bending out 	
of the wall

Cat. No.

Size Mounting
cu. in. Means Description

SC100RR•

N/A

SC200RR•

N/A

Adjustable
Bracket
Adjustable
Bracket

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

1-Gang

4.32 L x 2.52 W x 1.66 D

12

2-Gang

4.28 L x 4.28 W x 1.66 D

6

SC100RR

• UL Listed E216492.

SC200RR

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Old Work Brackets

Low-Voltage Divider Plate

Cat. No.

Std.
Ctn.

SCDIV•

50

• For use with Carlon ® SuperBlue™ boxes only.

Mud Ring (4" Square 1⁄2" Raised Cover)

Cat. No.

Description

Std.
Ctn.

SCA410•

1-Gang

20

• Note: Classified for two-hour fire-resistive wall assemblies when used with Two-Gang
Quick-Connect Outlet and Switch Boxes.
UL Listed E11461.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-113

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Low-Voltage Adjustable Floor Bracket with Cover
The Carlon® Low-Voltage Adjustable Floor Bracket is specifically designed for the low-voltage, structured
cabling market…the floor bracket is industry-standard orange to identify low-voltage applications,
the open design provides the space needed for low-voltage bend radius requirements and the Leviton
QuickPort® Quad 106® Insert provides up to four low-voltage outlet ports. The Carlon® Low-Voltage
Adjustable Floor Bracket is ideal for any residential or commercial low-voltage application.
The floor bracket also features a unique screw design, enabling it to be adjusted to most finished-floor
heights by simply turning the screw clockwise or counterclockwise and adjusting flush to the floor.
The floor bracket kit comes complete with a non-metallic (white or ivory) or brass cover, a Leviton
QuickPort® Quad 106® Insert, new work and old work metal mounting brackets and mounting screws.
Carlon® Structured Cable Management Systems…Your Total Systems Solution!

•	 White, ivory or brass cover
•	 Orange — identifies low-voltage installations
•	 Open-design floor bracket — accommodates low-voltage bend radius requirements
•	 Adjustable screw — bracket adjusts to most finished-floor depths
•	 Leviton® QuickPort® Quad 106® Insert — install up to four low-voltage inserts
•	 Two-door design
•	 cUL-US Listed
QuickPort ® and Quad 106 ® are registered trademarks of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

One-Gang Adjustable
Cat. No.

Size cu.
in.

Mounting Means

Description

N/A
N/A
N/A

Adjustable Bracket
Adjustable Bracket
Adjustable Bracket

Non-Metallic — White
Non-Metallic — Ivory
Brass

SC100FBWC•
SC100FBVC•
SC100FBBC•

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

2.80 L x 4.36 W x 1.72 D
2.80 L x 4.36 W x 1.72 D
2.80 L x 4.36 W x 1.72 D

8
8
8

• UL Listed E216492.

Installation:

Install clip over subfloor.

A-114

Screw in to adjust to height of flooring or carpet.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Beautiful flush fit every time!

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Recessed Dual-Voltage 3-Gang Old Work Plate

The New Carlon® RDV 3-Gang Old Work Plate has been developed to
simplify today’s in-home entertainment/networking needs. The box is
designed to accommodate the wires, cables and cords used with flatpanel display installations. It features a two-gang low-voltage opening
and a one-gang opening for an outlet/switch box (boxes, devices and
plates not included). The hi-gloss, recessed design eliminates unsightly
wires, cables and cords and blends with any décor. The RDV Old Work
Plate makes installing flat-panel displays faster and easier!

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-115

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Recessed Dual-Voltage 3-Gang Old Work Plate (continued)
Features:
•	 3-gang dual-service capability: accommodates one line
voltage and two low-voltage services using one plate
(boxes, devices and plates not included)

•	 Shallow design: provides ample room behind the drywall
and between the studs and accommodates cable bend
requirements

•	 Recessed low-profile design: eliminates unsightly wires
and plug heads

•	 Four swing-out clamps: locks the plate securely to the wall
— horizontal or vertical mount

•	 Universal 1-gang outlet/switch opening: select the size
box you need

•	 Superior hi-gloss, paintable finish: professional appearance
and blends with any décor

•	 Pre-assembled box and frame: reduces labor time
and saves money

•	 Non-metallic, ABS material: lightweight and easy to handle

Installation:
Please read these instructions completely before attempting installation.
IMPORTANT! Before attempting installation, be sure power is off by removing the fuse or switching the circuit breaker to “off.”
Make sure the Recessed Dual-Voltage Plate is installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code ® (NEC ®) and local codes.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Fig. 7

1.	Locate studs and determine if they are 16" or 24" apart. If 16"
apart, measure a maximum of 3" from edge of stud to determine
plate location. If 24" apart, center plate between studs.
	 Note: High-voltage side must be 3" from stud.
2.	Place SC300PRB or SC300PRR face down against the wall. Using
a hammer, tap around the edge of the plate to mark area to be cut
out (Fig. 1). Remove plate from wall, a line should be visible on the
drywall. Cutout should be approximately 6.25" x 9.25".
3.	Carefully cut out area of drywall with a utility knife or drywall saw.
4.	Place SC300PRB or SC300PRR in wall and secure by tightening
down all four Zip-Mount retainers (Fig. 2).

A-116

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Fig. 4

5.	Select device and outlet/switch box, cat. no. B114R (14 cu. in.)
or B120R (20 cu. in.), based on wire fill needs (Fig. 3).
6.	Insert wires through boxes (B114R or B120R and SC300PRB or
SC300PRR). Make sure high- and low-voltage wires do not come
in contact with one another.
7.	Install Carlon® Old Work Zip Box®, model B114R or B120R (Fig. 4).
8.	Install receptacle and faceplate per manufacturer’s instructions
(Fig. 5).
9.	Install low-voltage devices and faceplate per manufacturer’s
instructions (Fig. 6 and Fig. 7).
	 Note: When preparing for later installation of low-voltage devices,
use a 2-gang blank plate to cover wall opening for a clean
finished look.
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
10.5"
(266.7 mm)
9.29"
(236 mm)
Max. Cutout
Required

6.75"
(171.5 mm)

5.25"
(133.3 mm)

6.27"
(159.3 mm)
Max. Cutout
Required

Install Old Work Box
in this Area

8.49"
(215.6 mm)

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Installed:

Top view showing ample room between drywall and studs

1.76"
(44.7 mm)

2.72"
(69 mm)
.90"
(22.7 mm)
Max. Wall
Thickness

Cat. No.
SC300PRB
SC300PRR

Size
cu. in.

Mounting Means

Description

Dimensions (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

N/A
N/A

Zip-Mount Retainers
Zip-Mount Retainers

RDV 3-Gang Old Work Plate
RDV 3-Gang Old Work Plate with Outlet Box (B114R)

6.75 L x 10.5 W x 2.72 D
6.75 L x 10.5 W x 2.72 D

20
3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-117

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Resi-Gard Flexible Raceway
®

Ideal for providing a main chase from the main distribution panel to a
secondary hub in the attic or basement, Resi-Gard® non-metallic flexible
raceway is available in 3⁄4" to 2" diameter sizes with factory-installed pull
tape in sizes 1" to 2". The raceway is hand bendable, lightweight and
easily cut to length to reduce scrap. Bright orange color clearly signifies
a low-voltage installation.

Standard-Length Coils
Cat. No.
SCE4X1-100•
SCF4X1C-100•
SCG4X1C-100•
SCH4X1C-50•
SCJ4X1C-100•

Size (in.)

pull tape

Description

reel length (ft.)

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

Empty*
900 lbs.
900 lbs.
900 lbs.
900 lbs.

Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway

100
100
100
50
50

3

• UL Listed E151168.
FT-1 Rated
* If installing own tape, a lubricated polyester is recommended.

Standard-Length Reels*
Cat. No.
SCE4X1-1000•
SCF4X1C-1500•
SCJ4X1C-500•

Size (in.)

pull tape

Description

reel length (ft.)

⁄4
1
2

Empty
900 lbs.
900 lbs.

Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway
Flexible Raceway

1000
1500
500

3

* Made to order
• UL Listed E151168.
FT-1 Rated

A-118

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

Quick-Connect Coupling

Cat. No.
SCA240E•
SCA240F•

Male Terminal Adapter*

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
1

25
20

3

Cat. No.
SCE943G•
SCE943H•
SCE943J•

• UL Listed E86720

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

11⁄4
11⁄2
2

50
25
50

• UL Listed E23018.
*M
 ust be cemented to Resi-Gard ® Flexible Raceway using ONLY Resi-Gard ® Solvent Cement.

Quick-Connect Threaded Adapter

Cat. No.
SCA243E•
SCA243F•

Standard Couplings*

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
1

25
20

3

Cat. No.
SCE940G•
SCE940H•
SCE940J•

• UL Listed E86720

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

11⁄4
11⁄2
2

30
25
30

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Resi-Gard Fittings

• UL Listed E23018.
*M
 ust be cemented to Resi-Gard ® Flexible Raceway using ONLY Resi-Gard ® Solvent Cement.

PVC Lock Nut

Quick-Connect Snap-In-Adapter

Cat. No.
SCA253E•
SCA253F•

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
1

25
20

3

• UL Listed E86720

Cat. No.
LT9E•
LT9F•

Size (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
1

700
600

3

• UL Recognized.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-119

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Non-Metallic Boxes

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
Cable Clips

Conduit Clamps

Pre-installed nails provide fast and easy installation for either
a single cable, two to three cables or one bundled cable.

Designed to secure Resi-Gard® raceway or bundled cable.

SC34CC

SC12CC

SC14CC

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Standard Bag Quantity

Std. Ctn.

SC14CC
SC12CC
SC34CC

⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4

1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of 100 Clips)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of 25 Clips)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of 10 Clips)

10 Bags of 100
310 Bags of 25
20 Bags of 10

1

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Standard Bag Quantity

Std. Ctn.

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of Five Clamps)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of Five Clamps)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of Five Clamps)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of Five Clamps)
1 Ea. (Equals One Bag of Five Clamps)

20 Bags of 5
12 Bags of 5
8 Bags of 5
6 Bags of 5
6 Bags of 5

SCE977EC
SCE977FC
SCE977GC
SCE977HC
SCE977JC

3

Note: Each clamp requires two screws, two nuts and/or two bolts.

Resi-Gard® Solvent Cement
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

For use with Resi-Gard®, Riser-Gard®,
P&C Flex™ and Carlon PVC fittings.
Up through 6" diameter.

cat. No.

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Recommended
installation temp.

Lap Shear
@ 73˚ F

Viscosity at 75˚ F
as manufactured

10°–30° F Use extra caution
30°–50° F 5–6 minutes
50°–70° F 3–4 minutes
70°–90° F 1–2 minutes

40°–100° F

2 hrs. 350 psi
16 hrs. 800 psi
72 hrs. 1500 psi

500–900 cps

Size (in.)

Applicator

Description

STD.
Ctn.

Pint

Brush

Resi-Gard® Solvent Cement Clear

24

VC9963SC
Meets ASTM D-2564.

Cutters
Ideal for fast, smooth field cuts for up to 1" diameter Resi-Gard® non-metallic flexible raceway.
The large PVC Cutter is ideal for cuts up to 2" diameter non-metallic rigid and flexible raceway.

A-120

Small Cutter

Medium Cutter

Large Cutter

For fast, smooth field cuts of 1⁄2"
through 1" innerduct.

For fast square,
smooth, field cuts on
conduit 1⁄2" through 11⁄4".

For clean cuts of
conduit 1⁄2" through 2".

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

CC120B

8

10

Cat. No.
CC125

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

9

1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Cat. No.
CC122

www.tnb.com

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

171⁄2

1

In this section...

Low-Voltage Structured Cable Management System
®

Overview.....................................................................A-122–A-128
Recessed Service Floor Boxes.....................................A-129–A-142
Flush Service Floor Boxes............................................A-143–A-169
Above-Floor Service Fittings................................................... A-170
Replacement Parts and Accessories............................A-171–A-172
Poke Through Systems................................................A-173–A-185
Access Floor Modules..................................................A-186–A-196

Boxes & Covers — Carlon ® Non-Metallic Boxes

Steel City
Floor Boxes

Steel City® Floor Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes
A-122

Overview
Recessed Service Floor Boxes
The aesthetic and technical needs of today’s buildings are as diverse as the
equipment that fills them. Small wonder, then, that floor boxes can continue
to solve the needs of today and the future as they did in the early 1900s
when they were invented. They are still a contemporary, capable and
cost-effective wire-management system. Steel City®, a pioneer in both
the design and applications of floor boxes since 1904, invites you to
discover or rediscover the possibilities.
Visit www.tnb.com/floorboxselect to use our online floor box selection
tool to quickly and easily identify an appropriate in-floor solution
for your needs.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

663-SC
(2-Gang)

664-SC/664-S
(2-Gang)

664-CI
(2-Gang)

665-SC/665-CI/
665-AV2 (4-Gang)

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Material: Cast Iron

•	 Material: Stamped Steel/Cast Iron

•	 Covers: P 62 and P60 Series

•	 Covers: MopTite 664CST SW Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® 664-CSTSW Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® 665CST-SW Series

See page A-129.

®

See page A-130.

See page A-130.

See pages A-132–A-135.

668-S (4-Gang)

667-SC (8-Gang)

Access Floor Modules

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Covers: MopTite® 668-CST

•	 Covers: MopTite® 667-CST-SW Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® covers, assembled

See pages A-136–A-137.

See pages A-138–A-139.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Overview
Recessed Service Floor Boxes — Outlets Below Floor Level

See pages A-186–A-195.

Poke-Through
Systems
File No. E2969

Flush Service

Furniture Feed

Pedestal

See pages A-174–A-179.

See pages A-180–A-182.

See page A-183.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-123

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Overview
Flush-Service Floor Boxes — Outlets at Floor Level
68-HP Series

68 Series

600 Series

•	 Material: Non-Metallic

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Material: Cast Iron

•	 Covers: 6 8-HP Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® P60 Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® P60 Series

See pages A-143–A-146.

See pages A-147–A-149.

See pages A-147–A-149.

68P Series

78 Series

88 Series

•	 Material: Non-Metallic

•	 Material: Cast Iron

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Covers: MopTite® P60 & P68 Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® P90 Series

•	 Covers: MopTite® P90 Series

See pages A-150–A-153.

See pages A-154–A-155.

See pages A-154–A-155.

640 Series (1-, 2-, 3- & 4-Gang)
840 Series (1-, 2- & 3-Gang)
•	 Material: Cast Iron
•	 Covers: MopTite® P64 Series
See pages A-158–A-161.

See pages A-158–A-161.

640P Series (1-, 2- & 3-Gang)

740 Series (1-, 2- & 3-Gang)

•	 Material: Non-Metallic

•	 Material: Stamped Steel

•	 Covers: 6 40P Series Activations
with MopTite® P64
Series Covers

•	 Covers: 6 40P Series Activations
with MopTite® P64
Series Covers
File No. E2969
File No. L12798

See pages A-162–A-163.

A-124

See pages A-164–A-167.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
Floor box body
material

Service capabilities
Receptacles

Cat. No.
GAB-4, GAB-6
SFH-40 Series
SFH-50 Series
SFL-10 Series
600
601
602
603
604
61-W
62-W
641
641P
642
642P
643
643P
644
663-SC
664-CI
664-S
664-SC
665

Single Duplex

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

GFCI

•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

•

667-SC

•

•

668-S

•

•

•
•
•
•

68-S
71-W
78-S
78-SC
841-SC
842-SC
843-SC
88-D
88-S
GAB-8-s

•

•
•

•

•
•

•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

•

Cast Stamped NonIron
Steel Metallic

2"

2 ⁄2"
1

3"

3 ⁄2"
1

4"

•
Duplex
2 duplexes or low voltage
Com./data only

adjustability
Wood
4 ⁄2" Floor Fully- Semi- Non1

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

665-CI

671-SC
672
68-D
68-P

Multiple service
Capabilities

Minimum depth of pour

2 duplexes, 2 com./data or
1 duplex with com./data
1-gang; 1 service per gang
1-gang; 1 service per gang
2-gang; 1 service per gang
2-gang; 1 service per gang
3-gang; 1 service per gang
3-gang; 1 service per gang
4-gang; 1 service per gang
Two duplexes, two
communications/data or one
duplex with com./data
Up to 4 devices or any
combination of pwr. com./
data
Up to 4 devices or any
combination of power/data
Up to 8 devices or any
combination of pwr. com./
data
Up to 4 devices or any
combination of power/data
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

•
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•
•

•
•
1-gang; 1 service per gang
2-gang; 1 service per gang
3-gang; 1 service per gang

www.tnb.com

•
•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•
•

•

⁄16" adjustment
after installation

13

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

1 duplex, up to
8 data jacks

•
•
•

•
•
•

•
•

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Floor Box Selection Guide

•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

•
•

•
•
•

•
•
•
•

•

•
•

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

•
6"

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

•

A-125

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Overview
Floor Box Cover Selection Guide
Cat. No.
663-SC
664-SC
664-S
664-CI
68-S

Description

Cover Plates

Brass

Carpet
Activations
Aluminum

Concealed Service — Steel
Concealed Service — Steel
Shallow Concealed Service — Steel
Concealed Service — Cast Iron
Flush Service — Steel

P60 Series
664-CST-Series
664-CST-Series
664-CST-Series
P60 Series

68-D

Flush Service — Steel

P60 Series

68-P

Flush Service — Non-Metallic

P60 Series

P60-CP
N/A
N/A
N/A
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP

P60-CPL
N/A
N/A
N/A
P60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
P60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
P60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL

600-SC Series

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P60 Series

601-SC Series

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P60 Series

602-SC Series

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P60 Series

603-SC Series

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P60 Series

604-SC Series

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P60 Series

641

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series

P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P60-CP
P60-CACP
P64-CP

C60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
C60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
C60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
C60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
C60-CPAL
P60-CACPAL
P64-CPAL

641P

Flush Service — Non-Metallic

641P-CACB

641P-CACA

642

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series
P64P Series
P64 Series

P64-2GCP

P64-2GCPAL

642P

Flush Service — Non-Metallic

642P-CACB

642P-CACA

643

Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series
P64P Series
P64 Series

P64-3GCP

P64-3GCPAL

643P

Flush Service — Non-Metallic

643P-CACB

643P-CACA

644
841-SC

Flush Service — Cast Iron
Shallow Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series
P64P Series
P64 Series
P64 Series

P64-4GCP
P64-CP

P64-4GCPAL
P64CPAL

842-SC

Shallow Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series

P64-2GCP

P64-2GCPAL

843-SC

Shallow Flush Service — Cast Iron

P64 Series

P64-3GCP

P64-3GCPA

78-SC
78S
671
672
88D
88DA
88S
98
665-SC
667
61W
62W

Flush Service — Cast Iron
Flush Service — Cast Iron
Flush Service — Cast Iron
Flush Service — Cast Iron
Flush Service — Steel
Flush Service — Steel
Flush Service — Steel
Flush Service
Concealed Service
Concealed Service
Flush Service — Steel
Flush Service — Steel

P90 Series
P90 Series
P67 Series
P67 Series
P90 Series
P90 Series
P90 Series
P90 Series
665-CST Series
665-CST Series
P64 Series
P64 Series

P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
P90-CP
N/A
N/A
P64-CP
P64-2GCP

P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
P90-CPAL
N/A
N/A
P64-CPAL
P64-2GCPAL

Floor Box

Tile Activation
Aluminum
Non-metallic

Non-metallic

Brass

P62-CP
664-CST-Series
664-CST-Series
664-CST-Series
P60-LCP

P62-TAR
N/A
N/A
N/A
*

SP-P62-TAR-A
N/A
N/A
N/A
**

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
—

P60-LCP

*

**

—

P68-SRC Color
P68-DRC-Color
P68-ECC-Color
N/A

68-PAR-W/
600-4-FL

68-PAR-W/
600-4-FL-AL

—

*

**

—

N/A

*

**

—

N/A

*

**

—

N/A

*

**

—

N/A

*

**

—

P64-CP Series
P-64-LCP
641P-CAC Series

*

**

N/A

641P-TACB

641P-TACA

641P-TAC-Series

*

**

N/A

642P-TACB

642P-TACA

642P-TAC Series

*

**

N/A

633P-TACB

643P-TACA

643P-TAC Series

*
*

**
**

N/A
N/A

*

**

—

*

**

N/A

*
*
—
*
*
*
*
*
—
—
N/A
N/A

**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
—
—
N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
—
—
N/A
N/A

P64P-2GCP Series
P64-2LCP
642P-CAC Series
P64P-3GCP Series
P64-3LCP
643P-CAC Series
N/A
P64P-CP Series
P64-LCP
P64P-2GCP Series
P64-2LCP
P64-3GCP Series
P64-3LCP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
665-CST Series
665-CST Series
P64-CP Series
P64-2GCP Series

* Supplied standard with box.
** Supplied standard with -AL suffix box.
N/A Not Available.

A-126

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
Cover
Series

Cover

Cat. No.

P-60-1/2
P-60-1/2-AL
P-60-3/4
P-60-3/4-AL
P-60-1
P-60-1-AL
P-60-1 1/4
P-60-1 1/4-AL
P-60-2
P-60-2-AL
P-60-2 5/8
P60
P-60-2 5/8-AL
4" Dia.
P-60-1/2-2
P-60-1/2-2-AL
P-60-3/4-2
P-60-3/4-2-AL
P-60-DU
P-60-DU-AL
P-60-DS
P-60-DS-AL
P-60-DR
P-60-DR-AL
P-60-GFCI
P-60-CACP

Description

⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
2" Dia. Plug
2" Dia. Plug
2 5⁄ 8" Dia. Plug
2 5⁄ 8" Dia. Plug
1
⁄2" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
1
⁄2" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
3
⁄4" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
3
⁄4 " N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
Two 17⁄16" Dia. Plugs
Two 17⁄16" Dia. Plugs
Two Hinged Lift Lids
Two Hinged Lift Lids
Single Hinged Lift Lid
Single Hinged Lift Lid
GFCI Hinged Lift Lid
One-Piece Carpet Plate with Two
Hinged Lift Lids for Duplex
P-60-CACP-AL
One-Piece Carpet Plate with Two
Hinged Lift Lids for Duplex
P60One-Piece Carpet Plate with Two
CACP P-60-CACP-GFCI
GFCI Hinged Lift Lids
OnePiece P-60-3/4-2-CACP
One-Piece Carpet Plate with 39⁄32
3
53⁄4" Dia.
⁄4" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plug
P-60-3/4-2-CACP-AL One-Piece Carpet Plate with
3
⁄4" & 2" N.P.S. Plugs
1
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
P-67-1/2
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
P-67-3/4
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
P-67-3/4-AL
P-67-1
1" N.P.S. Plug
P-67-1AL
1" N.P.S. Plug
P67
P-67-1
1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
31⁄2" Dia.
P-67-2
2" Dia. Plug
P-67-2AL
2" Dia. Plug
1
⁄2" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
P-67-1/2-2
3
⁄4" N.P.S. & Dia. Plugs
P-67-3/4-2
1
1

Standard
Finish

Cover

Cover
Series

Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Brass
—
Brushed Brass
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Brushed Brass
Brushed Brass

Cat. No.
P-64-1/2
P-64-1/2AL
P-64-3/4
P-64-3/4AL
P-64-1
P-64-1AL
P-64-1 1/4
P-64-1 1/4AL
P64
2" N.P.S. Plug
3" x 4 1⁄2" 2" N.P.S. Plug
Rectangu­lar P-64-1/2-2
P-64-1/2-2AL
P-64-3/4-2
P-64-3/4-2AL
P-64-2-5/8
P-64-2-5/8AL
P-64-DU
P-64-DUAL
P-64-D8
P-64-GFCI
P64P
P-64P-BP
P-64P-URC
P-90-1/2
P-90-1/2AL
P-90-3/4
P-90-3/4AL
P-90-1
P-90-1AL
P90
P-90-1 1/4
2 3⁄4" Dia. P-90-1 1/4AL
P-90-2
P-90-2AL
P-90-1/2-2
P-90-1/2-2AL
P-90-3/4-2
P-90-3/4-2AL
P-68-SRC-GRY
P-68-SRC-BRN
P-68-SRC-BGE
P-68-FSC-GRY
P68
6" Dia.

P-68-FSC-BRN
P-68-FSC-BGE
P-68-DRC-GRY
P-68-DRC-BRN
P-68-DRC-BGE

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Description

⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
2" N.P.S. Plug
2" N.P.S. Plug
1
⁄2" & 2" N.P.S. Plug
1
⁄2" & 2" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" & 2" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" & 2" N.P.S. Plug
25⁄8" N.P.S. Plug
25⁄8" N.P.S. Plug
Two 17⁄16" Dia. Plugs
Two 17⁄16" Dia. Plugs
Two Hinged Lift Lids
GFCI Hinged Lift Lid
Blank Plate
Universal Cover
1
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
1
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
3
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
1" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug
2" Dia. Plug
2" Dia. Plug
1
⁄2" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
1
⁄2" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
3
⁄4" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
3
⁄4" N.P.S. & 2" Dia. Plugs
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Single Receptacle
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Single Receptacle
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Single Receptacle
Carpet & Cover Plate
with 1" N.P.S. Plug
Carpet & Cover Plate
with 1" N.P.S. Plug
Carpet & Cover Plate
with 1" N.P.S. Plug
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Duplex Receptacle
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Duplex Receptacle
Carpet & Cover Plate
for Duplex Receptacle
1
1

Standard
Finish

Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Polished Brass
Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum
Polished Brass
Brushed Aluminum

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Floor Box Cover Selection Guide

Non-Metallic Gray
Non-Metallic Brown
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Gray
Non-Metallic Brown
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Gray
Non-Metallic Brown
Non-Metallic Beige

A-127

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Overview
Standard Specification — Flush Floor Boxes

2.03 GENERAL DESIGN — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE.

Considerations when writing specifications:

B.	 Shall deliver telephone or data cable without interference from the electric power delivery.
C.	 Shall protect delivery of both services by a hinged cover with a retractable opening
and foam plastomer dust seal.
D.	 Hinged cover shall accept carpet or tile to match floor covering and be 180 degrees reversible.
E.	 Shall have 90 cubic inch total capacity with 24 cubic inch power chambers.
F.	 Shall accept conduit sizes up to 11⁄4 inches.
G.	 Shall afford 18 square inches of access with cover open.
H.	 Box shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
I.	 When hinged cover is closed and no services in place, device shall have no
obstructions above surface of floor.

A.	 Shall deliver electric power from one or two duplex receptacles installed below
the surface of the floor.

Cast Iron Formed Steel

Floor boxes are manufactured in various sizes, configurations and materials, The specifier should
determine the most suitable product for his application. Refer to the T&B floor box catalog and
select the appropriate paragraphs listed below. Plans should supply wiring capacity, conduit
sizes, adjustability and floor finish. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) references sections:
16132 Floor Boxes; 16141 Wiring Devices; Part 2-206 Floor Mounted Service Fittings; and 16741
Telephone Raceway Systems, Part 2-201 G Floor Boxes. Section 16132 Floor Boxes is preferable.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — FLOOR BOXES
A.	 Shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN

2.02 MATERIALS — FLOOR BOXES
2.02.1

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL

A.	 Shall be cast iron, painted inside and out with weatherproof paint intended
for use on metal as indicated on the plans.

A.	 Locate position for floor boxes and runs of conduit as shown on the plans.

3.02 INSTALLATION

2.02.1

A.	
B.	
C.	
D.	

B.	 Shall be formed steel with a zinc plating at least .0005 in. thick on the outside
and .00015 in. thick on the inside as indicated on the plans.

2.02.2

A.	 Construction shall be as required by UL 514A.

2.02.2	

Position floor boxes and conduit runs.
After concrete pour pull wires and install devices according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Activate in accordance with the National Electrical Code®.
Coordinate with floor covering contractor to complete installation.

B.	 Carpet or tile frame shall be (brass, aluminum, polycarbonate, nylon).

Standard Specification — Above-Floor Service

2.02.2

Service Floor Outlet Multiple Service, Power and Communications

C.	 Cover assembly shall protect against the ingress of water or foreign material
with a gasket and shall be UL Listed as moptight.

Considerations when writing specifications: The 664 Concealed Service Floor Box provides both
electric power and telephone (data) services from the same device for economy of space and
cost, as well as affording a flush delivery (no above floor service fitting). For these reasons,
your specification may reference this product in three sections: Floor Boxes, Wiring Devices and
Telephone Raceway Systems. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) references them in:
16132 Floor Boxes; 16141 Wiring Devices; Part 2 — 2.06 Floor Mounted Service Fittings; and
16741 Telephone Raceway Systems, Part 2 — 2.01 G Floor Boxes. Section 16132 Floor Boxes
is preferable. For clarification include a reference in 16141, Part 2, 2.06 Floor Mounted Service
Fittings as follows: Surface type service fittings are not acceptable.

2.03 GENERAL DESIGN — FLOOR BOXES

A.	 Shall deliver electric power from receptacles installed at the surface of the floor
or from service fittings (Reference 16141 as shown on the plans).
B.	 640/840 Series shall deliver power and telephone/data cable without interference
from electric power delivery (see Section 16741).
C.	 Cubic inch capacity shall be as shown on the plans.
D.	 Boxes shall accept conduit sizes as required on the plans.
E.	 Shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE
A.	 Shall be series 664 concealed service floor box as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL

2.02 MATERIALS — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE.

A.	 Locate position for floor boxes and runs of conduit as shown on the plans.

A.	 Shall be electrogalvanized, 14 gauge sheet steel. (Alternate A shall be cast iron).
B.	 Construction shall be as required by UL 514A.
C.	 Carpet frame shall be nylon UL Recognized Component QMFZ2.
D.	 Hinged outer cover shall be reinforced with a 5⁄32" steel plate.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A.	 Position floor boxes and conduit runs.
B.	 After concrete pour, pull wires and install devices according to
manufacturers recommendations.
C.	 Activate in accordance with the National Electrical Code®.
D.	 Coordinate with floor covering contractor to complete installation.

2.03 GENERAL DESIGN — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE.

Standard Specification — Concealed Service
Service Floor Outlet Multiple Service, Power and Communications
Considerations when writing specifications:
The 664 Concealed Service Floor Box provides both electric power and telephone (data) services
from the same device for economy of space and cost, as well as affording a flush delivery (no
above floor service fitting). For these reasons, your specification may reference this product
in three sections: Floor Boxes, Wiring Devices and Telephone Raceway Systems. Construction
Specifications Institute (CSI) references them in: 16132 Floor Boxes; 16141 Wiring Devices; Part
2 — 2.06 Floor Mounted Service Fittings; and 16741 Telephone Raceway Systems, Part 2 —
2.01 G Floor Boxes. Section 16132 Floor Boxes is preferable. For clarification include a reference
in 16141, Part 2, 2.06 Floor Mounted Service Fittings as follows: Surface type service fittings are
not acceptable.

A.	Shall deliver electric power from one or two duplex receptacles installed below
the surface of the floor.
B.	 Shall deliver telephone or data cable without interference from the electric power delivery.
C.	 Shall protect delivery of both services by a hinged cover with a retractable opening
and foam plastomer dust seal.
D.	 Hinged cover shall accept carpet or tile to match floor covering and be 180 degrees reversible.
E.	 Shall have 90 cubic inch total capacity with 24 cubic inch power chambers.
F.	 Shall accept conduit sizes up to 11⁄4 inches.
G.	 Shall afford 18 square inches of access with cover open.
H.	 Box shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
I.	 When hinged cover is closed and no services in place, device shall have no
obstructions above surface of floor.

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL

2.02 MATERIALS — FLOOR BOXES, MULTIPLE SERVICE.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A.	 Shall be series 664 concealed service floor box as manufactured by Thomas & Betts.
A.	 Shall be electrogalvanized, 14 gauge sheet steel. (Alternate A shall be cast iron).
B.	 Construction shall be as required by UL 514A.
C.	 Carpet frame shall be nylon UL Recognized Component QMFZ2.
D.	 Hinged outer cover shall be reinforced with a 5⁄32" steel plate.

A.	 Locate position for floor boxes and runs of conduit as shown on the plans.
A.	
B.	
C.	
D.	

Position floor boxes and conduit runs.
After concrete pour pull wires and install devices according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
Activate in accordance with the National Electrical Code®.
Coordinate with floor covering contractor to complete installation.

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-128

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
P-62-CP

•	Multiple service floor
box that delivers power,
communications and data
from standard conduit with
no exposed service fittings

•	Electro-galvanized body
and hardware

•	Result: Open office
planning flexibility

•	Blank- and duplex-face plates
can be mounted at either
end of the box

663 Duplex

•	Shipped complete with expendable
cap to prevent ingress of concrete
663-SC

•	Ideal for workstations that
require power, communications •	Does not include duplex faceplate;
faceplate is included with P-62-CP
and data service
and P-60-3B cover plates
•	Stamped steel, concrete-tight,
•	Uses P-62 and P-60 Series covers*
semi-adjustable

Communications Connector
C
B

A

Engineering Data for 663 Series Floor Box
Before After
Pour
Pour
Adj.
Adj.

Dimensions (In.)

Cat. No.

A

663-SC

35⁄8

B

C

411⁄16 813⁄16

None

⁄4"

3

Maximum
Capacity
(cu. in.)

Conduit KOs
Sides

Bottom

25 per gang (2) 1–11⁄4"
90 Total
(4) 3⁄4"

None

Cat. No.
663-SC

Covers and
Carpet Plates

Wiring
Device

Std.
Ctn.

P-62 Series
P-60* Series

Duplex and/or
Data/Voice

4

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

663-SC Floor Box

*P-62-TAR is required when using P-60 series covers.
Caution: To abandon 663 you must use a P-60 series brass cover plate.

Covers, Carpet Plates and Adjusting Rings for 663 Series
P-60-3B
•	Polished brass finish with
non-metallic bronze insert
•	Plastic insert has one 7⁄8"
cutout and two 1⁄2" cutouts

•	Split cover sections
have access notch for
screwdriver lift

•	Furnished complete with
sealing gasket, 8-32 x 7⁄16"
brass screws and one
P-60-Q device plate

P-60-3B

Cat. No.

P-62-CP

P-62-TAR
•	Gives 3⁄4" adjustment when mounted
on 663 Floor Box

www.tnb.com

P-60-CP

Description

P-60-3B*1
Brass Cover Plate — Includes 1 P60Q
P-62-CP-AS*2 Polycarbonate Cover and Carpet Plate (charcoal) — Includes 1 P60Q
P-62-CP-BRN*2 Polycarbonate Cover and Carpet Plate (brown) — Includes 1 P60Q
P-62-CP-G*2 Polycarbonate Cover and Carpet Plate (gold) — Includes 1 P60Q
P-60-CP
Carpet Plate (polished brass)
P-60-CP-AL Carpet Plate (aluminum)
P-62-TAR
Flange and Adjusting Ring for 663 Box (brass)
P-62-TAR-AL Flange and Adjusting Ring for 663 Box (aluminum)
P-60-Q
Duplex Receptacle Plate for 663 Floor Box
P-60-QB
Blank Plate for 663 Floor Box
P-60-Q-GFCI GFCI Plate for 663 Floor Box

•	Furnished with one 7⁄8" cutout
and two 1⁄2" cutouts and P-60-Q
device plate

•	Accepts P-60-3B,P-60-CP and all
P-60 Series cover plates

•	P-62-TAR is required when
used on 663 floor box
•	511⁄16" outside diameter

P-62-CP
•	High-strength polycarbonate

•	55⁄8" outside diameter

P-60-CP
•	 Polished-brass finish

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

* For use as cover only when box is in service.

P-62-TAR

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1

When not in use, replace P-60-3B Grommet with 697 Plug.

2

 hen not in use, the P-62-CP Series Cover should be replaced by P-60-CP, P-60
W
and P-62 TAR Series Covers.

Caution: These covers are not to be used in high traffic areas.
For communications accessories, see page A-140.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-129

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
Multiple-Service Floor Boxes
for Power, Communications
and Data: 664 Series
Multiple-service floor boxes deliver power, communications and data from
standard conduit with no exposed service fittings. Result: Open office
planning flexibility. Ideal for the modern office with workstations that have
power, communications and data equipment. Power receptacles and lowvoltage connections can be enclosed underfloor in either steel or cast-iron
bodies. Galvanized 14-gauge steel boxes are provided with knockouts from
3
⁄4" to 11⁄4" (see engineering data). Cast-iron bodies have threaded openings
for 3⁄4" and 1" conduit.

•	 Two-compartment box is available in three 	
configurations: stamped steel (664-SC), 	
shallow (664-S) and cast iron (664-CI)
•	 Durable non-metallic covers include a steel 	
reinforcement plate for added strength

C

•	 NEW! Metallic covers in solid brass and 	
aluminum provide aesthetics and durability

B

•	 Four leveling screws enable quick leveling 	
to desired concrete depth
•	 Cover flange self-levels with the finished 	
floor for easy installation

A

Description

664-SC

Stamped-Steel Box which Accepts
Two Plates, One Duplex Plate Provided
Cast-Iron Box which Accepts Two
Plates, One Duplex Plate Provided
Shallow Stamped-Steel Box which Accepts
Two Plates, One Duplex Plate Provided

664-CI
664-S
664-CI

664-S

664-SC

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

4
1
4

Note: When ordering a 664 Series box, the cover must be ordered separately.
See page A-131.
For communications accessories, see page A-140.

Engineering Data for 664 Series
Dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

A

B

C

Before Pour
Adj. (in.)

After Pour
Adj. (in.)

Maximum Capacity
(cu. in.)

664-SC

33⁄4

411⁄16

101⁄4

21⁄2

3

⁄4

24 per gang,
90 total
24 per gang,
90 total
16.5 per gang,
70 total

664-CI

3 3⁄4

53⁄32

915⁄16

21⁄2

3

664-S

27⁄8

411⁄16

101⁄4

11⁄2

3

⁄4
⁄4

Conduit KOs
CONDUIT HUBS

Sides

Bottom

Covers

—

(4) 1"–11⁄4"
(4) 3⁄4"
—

None

(6) 3⁄4"

None

664-CST
Series
664-CST
Series
664-CST
Series

(4) 3⁄4"
(4) 1"
—

CAUTION: When using the center side KOs, Cat. No. 664-RP must be assembled to the box prior to installing the conduit.

A-130

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

—

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
Metallic Covers for 664 Series Floor Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Non-Metallic Covers for 664 Series Floor Boxes
664-CST-SW
⁄32" Steel Top Plate on lid,
carpet or tile can be glued
to top plate.
5

A

.188"
Flange height

A
4.012"

5.125"

664-CST-SW-BRS
Solid Brass

664-CST-SW-ALM
Solid Aluminum
⁄4 "

1

.845"

8.125"

Cover lid

Cord Opening

1 1⁄8 "

Cover frame

Cord door locks
open or closed
8 3⁄8"

Lid Rotated 180˚ to Expose Cord Opening

Covers for all boxes
MopTite ® covers meet UL scrubwater exclusion requirements for carpet, tile and wood.

Cat. No.
664-CST-SW-GRY
664-CST-SW-BRN
664-CST-SW-BGE
664-CST-SW-BLK

Description

Gray Cover
Brown Cover
Beige Cover
Black Cover

Material: Polycarbonate with 5⁄32" steel plate.

Load rating

Std.
Ctn.

1,500 lbs.
1,500 lbs.
1,500 lbs.
1,500 lbs.

1
1
1
1

5 1⁄2 "

MopTite ® covers meet UL scrubwater exclusion requirements for carpet, tile and wood.
Load

Device Plates — 664-S

Std .

Cat. No.
Description
Rating
Ctn.
664-CST-SW-BRS Solid Brass Cover for 664 Series Floor Boxes
2,250 lbs.
1
664-CST-SW-ALM Solid Aluminum Cover for 664 Series Floor Boxes 2,250 lbs.
1

Device Plates — 664-SC & 664-CI
664-S-RP

Cat. No.
664-S-RP
664-S-BP

664-S-BP
Std.
Ctn.

Description

Blank Plate for Use with 664-S Floor Box
Blank Plate for Use with 664-S Floor Box

4
4

•	 Duplex receptacle face plate for 664 Series	
floor box for additional power service
•	 Does not include duplex receptacle.	
Can be placed at either end of floor box

Wire Tunnel for 664 Series
•	 Wire tunnel for protecting electrical connections between the two
duplex receptacles when the box is used for power/power application­
664-RP
664-WT

Cat. No.
664-WT
664-S-WT

664-S-WT

Description

For Use with 664 and 664-CI Floor Boxes
For Use with 664-S Floor Box

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
664-RP
664-BP
664-GP

664-GP

664-BP

Description

For Use with 664 and 664-CI Floor Boxes
Blank Plate for Use with 664 & 664-CI Floor Boxes
GFCI Receptacle Plate

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4

CAUTION: When using the center side KOs, all 664 plates must be assembled to the box
prior to installing the conduit.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-131

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
665 Series Floor Boxes: 665-SC

665

•	 Four (4) device compartments can accommodate any
combination of devices. For example: (3) duplex power
devices and (1) duplex telephone device, or (2) voice and
data connectors and (1) GFCI device and (1) blank, etc.
•	 Overall height of 3 1⁄2" allows for shallow pours	
when needed

3"

•	 High-strength polycarbonate cover with a ⁄32" steel plate
assures structural integrity

Device
Compartment

5

•	 Metallic Covers also available in solid brass and aluminum
•	 Four-side feed-through allows installer to feed through
power or data/comm service from any orientation

12 1⁄8"

5 7⁄8"

•	 Non-metallic wire tunnels aesthetically clean. Full-	
width tunnel provides maximum feed-through capacity;
non-metallic material prevents conductor damage
12 1⁄8"

•	 Total access area of 126 cu. in. allows for friendly
installation of workstation cables

Top View

•	 Contains 28 k­­­­nockouts (16–11⁄4" and 123⁄4" KOs)	
that provide increased flexibility when installed

11⁄4" KO

•	 The 665 line is an extension of the industry-leading 664
Series; our concealed service line now allows the customer
to install up to four device panels in one box

⁄4" KO

3

•	 Through the use of a unique non-metallic wire tunnel,	
the installer can easily partition the power, 	
voice/data requirements
•	 This UL Listed, stamped-steel floor box can be installed 	
with Thomas & Betts voice and data connector products
•	 Four 21⁄2" levelling screws provided with all boxes
•	 Device panels ordered separately

Bottom Plate

Device Compartments (IN.)

Cat. No. Description
665-SC

Stamped Steel Box

Length Width Height

53⁄4

23⁄4

21⁄2

Area

Device
Access Std.
Area Ctn.

40 cu. in. 126 cu. in. 1

665-SC floor box does not include device plates or covers. Order separately
(see page A-135).

3 1⁄2"

2 1⁄2"
⁄4" Knockout

3

Material: Pre-Galvanized Steel.

11⁄4"
11⁄4" Knockout

For communication accessories, see page A-140.

A-132

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
Cast Iron for Slab-On-Grade
Applications
665 Series Floor Boxes: 665-CI
The new Steel City® 665 Cast Iron Floor Box provides a high-capacity power
and data solution for ground-floor installations. This 4-gang recessedservice floor box is ideal for slab-on-grade applications. Removable voltage
dividers enable users to customize wiring configurations by feeding two or
more adjacent compartments with a single conduit. Aesthetic covers feature
a recess to accept floor covering to match the surrounding floor.

•	 4-gang, recessed service for a high-capacity aesthetic 	
floor-box solution
•	 Removable voltage dividers between compartments 	
enable a single conduit to feed two or more 	
adjacent compartments
14.81"

•	 Heavy-duty, non-metallic covers with steel-reinforcement
plates are available in a wide variety of colors to match any
decor (black, gray, brown and beige)

⁄4"
NPT
3

11⁄4"
NPT

11⁄4"
NPT

•	 Metallic Covers
•	 Separate cord door in the cover latches firmly in 	
the open position to prevent damage to cables

7.94"
Inside Square
⁄4"
NPT

14.81"

•	 MopTite® covers meet UL scrubwater exclusion
requirements for carpet, tile and wood

3

3
⁄4"
NPT

•	 Largest cubic-inch capacity of any cast iron 	
recessed 4-gang floor box

11⁄4"
NPT

•	 Inline 11⁄4" hubs allow high-capacity straight 	
runs for communicator wiring

Access
6 6⁄8" x 6 6⁄8"

•	 Custom device panels and hub sizes are available 	
— contact technical service about these offerings

11⁄4"
NPT
3
⁄4"
NPT

Top View

3 5⁄8"

.................................... Specifications....................................
•	 Material: Box — Cast Iron	
Cover — Polycarbonate with steel reinforcement plate
•	 Listing: UL and CSA Listed

2.50"

Side View

Device Compartments (IN.)

Cat. No.

Description

Length

Width

Height

Area

Device Access
Area

Std.
Ctn.

665-CI

Cast Iron Box

53⁄4

31⁄2

21⁄4

45 cu. in.

126 cu. in.

1

665-Cl floor box does not include device plates or cover. Order separately. (See page A-135)
Material: Pre-Galvanized Steel.
For communications accessories, see page A-140.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-133

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
2" KOs for Audio Visual
Applications
665 Series
Floor Boxes: 665-AV2
•	 2" KOs enable pre-terminated AV cables and connectors
to be pulled directly through the conduit
•	 Accepts standard 665 Series covers and device plates
for power, voice, data and audio visual connections
•	 NEW! Rectangular adapters allow voice, data and AV
connectors to be mounted in a standard GFCI device plate
•	 NEW! Keystone style voice, data and AV connectors meet
a wide range of low-voltage applications. All connectors
are recessed for flush mounting in floor box applications
•	 NEW! Device plates are available that accept Extron®
MAAP plates to accommodate any AV requirements
(Extron® MAAP plates purchased from an authorized
Extron distributor)

1-1/4" KO

12-1/8
•	 NEW! Metallic covers provide a durable, aesthetic
installation, including industry-exclusive solid brass
covers (not painted or plated), aluminum also available

3/4" KO

1-1/4" KO

Rectangular adapters and Keystone Inserts for GFCI Device Plates (see page A-140)
12-1/8
3/4" KO

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

665-AV2

4-Compartment Recessed Service Floor Box with 2" KOs for AV Applications

14

1

665-AV2 floor box does not include device plates or cover. Order
separately. (See page A-135)
14
Extron ® is a registered trademark of RGB Systems, Inc.
For communication accessories, see page A-140

4-1/2"

1-25/32

4-1/2"

Engineering Information

1-25/32

3-9/16

2" KO

3-9/16

2" KO

12-1/8

12-1/8
1-1/4" KO
12-1/8
12 1⁄8"

3/4" KO

3

14

14
4-1/2"
41⁄2"

1-25/32 125⁄32"

665-AV2

9
33-9/16
⁄16"

4-1/2"

1

⁄4"KOKO
3/4"

3/4" KO

14
14

1 ⁄4KO
" KO
1-1/4"

1-1/4" KO

2"2" KO
KO

1-25/32

665-AV2
Floor Box Engineering Data
4-1/2"

3-9/16

1-25/32

A-134

Cat. 3-9/16
No.

Before Pour
2" KO
Adj.
(In.)

665-AV2

21⁄2

2" KO

Compartment Size & Capacity (Qty = 4)

Conduit KOs (In.)

After Pour
Adj. (In.)

Length
(In.)

Width (In.)

Height (In.)

Volume

⁄4

(2) 53⁄4
(2) 53⁄4

33⁄4
23⁄4

33⁄8
33⁄8

72 cu. in.
52 cu. in.

3

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

665-AV2

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Sides

665-AV2
(4) 2
(8) 11⁄4
(8) 3⁄4

665-AV2
665-AV2

www.tnb.com

Bottom

(2) 2
(2) 11⁄4
(4) 3⁄4

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Metallic Covers for 665 Series Floor Boxes

9 5⁄16"
5 7⁄16"

Cord Opening

4 11⁄16" 9 5⁄16"

665-CST-SW-BRS
Solid Brass

665-CST-SWR-ALM
Solid Aluminum with Recess for Floor Covering
1
⁄4"

Optional 3⁄16" Recess for Floor Covering

Lid Rotated 180° to Expose
Cord Opening

11⁄16"

Cat. No.

Description

665-CST-SW-BRS
665-CST-SWR-BRS
665-CST-SW-ALM
665-CST-SWR-ALM

Solid Brass Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes
Solid Brass Cover with Recess for Floor Covering, 665 Series
Solid Aluminum Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes
Solid Aluminum Cover with Recess for Floor Covering, 665 Series

Load
Rating (LBS.)

Std.
Ctn.

1,500
1,500
1,500
1,500

1
1
1
1

Non-Metallic Covers for 665 Series Floor Boxes
⁄32" Steel Top Plate on Lid. Carpet or Tile can be Glued to Top Plate.

5

⁄16"

3

Polycarbonate Flange & Lid

9"

7 7⁄8"
Cover Lid

11⁄16"

7 7⁄8"
Cord Door
Locks Open
or Closed

Cat. No.

665-CST-SW-BLK
Black Non-Metallic Cover

Description

665-CST-SW-BLK Non-Metallic Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes, Black
665-CST-SW-GRY Non-Metallic Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes, Gray
665-CST-SW-BGE Non-Metallic Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes, Beige
665-CST-SW-BRN Non-Metallic Cover for 665 Series Floor Boxes, Brown

9"

Cover Frame

⁄16" Deep Recess for
Floor Covering

3

load std.
rating ctn.

750 lbs.
750 lbs.
750 lbs.
750 lbs.

1
1
1
1

Material: Polycarbonate with 5⁄32" steel plate.
Furnished with (4) #8-32 x 5⁄8" mounting screws.
Contact T&B Technical Service for Color Chip samples.

Device Plates and Accessories for 665 Series Floor Boxes

665-GP
GFCI Plate

665-RP
Duplex Plate

665-6RJ
Data Plate for 6
Keystone Jacks

665-BP
Blank Plate

665-WT
Wire Tunnel feeds multiple
compartments from a single
conduit (one included with
each 665-AV2 and 665-SC)

5 3⁄4"
1"
665-BP

⁄2"

1

6 1⁄2"

2 1⁄8"
665-RP

665-6RJ

6 1⁄2"

1 ⁄4" Dia. Hole
1

15⁄16"
2 5⁄8"
665-GP

665-STEL

www.tnb.com

665-WT

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
665-RP
665-GP
665-BP
665-6RJ
665-STEL
665-WT

Description

Duplex Plate for 665 Series Floor Boxes
GFCI Plate for 665 Series Floor Boxes
Blank Plate for 665 Series Floor Boxes
Data Plate for 665 Series Floor Boxes, Accepts 6 Keystone Jacks
Telephone Data Plate for 665 Series Floor Boxes
Replacement Wire Tunnel for 665-SC & 665-AV2 Floor Boxes

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4

Each box requires (4) device plates. Material: Pre-galvanized steel.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-135

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
668-S Ultra-Shallow Floor Box
The new 668-S Ultra-Shallow Floor Box from Thomas & Betts provides a
high-capacity power and data solution for shallow concrete floors. The lowprofile 4-gang box is constructed of galvanized stamped steel. Removable
voltage dividers enable users to customize wiring configurations by feeding
two or more adjacent compartments with a single conduit. Metallic
covers with durable powder-coat finish are designed to match any decor,
while optional trim rings enable covers to be mounted completely
flush with the floor in tile or wood floor applications.

•	 Low profile (2 1⁄2" height) for shallow concrete pours
•	 4-gang, recessed service for a high-capacity,
aesthetic floor box solution
•	 Stamped-steel box construction
•	 Removable voltage dividers between compartments enable
a single conduit to feed two or more adjacent compartments

13.25" 9.69"
inside
square

•	 Metallic covers feature durable powder-coat paint
to match any decor (black, gray, brown and beige)

11.82"
inside square

•	 Heavy-duty cord door in the cover latches firmly
in the open position to prevent damage to cables

15.25"

Top View

•	 Optional tile trim enables flush mounting
for tile and wood floor applications
•	 MopTite® covers meet UL scrubwater exclusion
requirements for carpet, tile and wood

55 cu. in. compartment
2-places

41 cu. in. compartment
2-places

•	 Largest cubic-inch capacity of any shallow,
recessed 4-gang floor box

Ground screw in
each compartment

•	 Additional KOs (up to 2") on the bottom
of the box enable installation flexibility

Removable voltage
divider 4-places

•	 Custom device panels are available — contact
technical service about these offerings
.................................... Specifications....................................
•	 Material: Box — Galvanized Steel; Cover — Die-Cast Zinc
•	 Listing: UL and CSA Listed

1" Knockout
2-places on bottom

⁄4" Knockout
4-places
on bottom

3

2 to 11⁄2"
Knockout
2-places
on bottom

Top View — Compartment Layout
Note: Shown with Top Plate Removed
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

668-S

Shallow, Concealed Service Floor Box

2.50"

⁄4" Knockout 1-place
each sided

3

1

For covers and device plates, see page A-137.
For communications accessories, see page A-140.

2.00"
1" Knockout 4-place
each side

A-136

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Side View

www.tnb.com

Recessed Service Floor Boxes

Standard mounting configuration: Flange on cover overlaps carpet, tile or wood floors.

Flush mounting configuration: Optional trim ring allows cover to be mounted flush
with tile or wood floors.

Cover
.125" Flange
.312"
A
A
11.04"
Square
9.50" Square

Section A-A

Cat. No.

Description

668-CST-ALM
668-CST-BRS
668-CST-BLK
668-CST-BRN
668- CST-BGE
668-TRIM-ALM
668-TRIM-BRS
668-TRIM-BLK
668-TRIM-BRN
668-TRIM-BGE

668-S Metal Cover — Aluminum Powder Coat
668-S Metal Cover — Brass Powder Coat
668-S Metal Cover — Black Powder Coat
668-S Metal Cover — Brown Powder Coat
668-S Metal Cover — Beige Powder Coat
668-S Trim Ring — Aluminum Powder Coat
668-S Trim Ring — Brass Powder Coat
668-S Trim Ring — Black Powder Coat
668-S Trim Ring — Brown Powder Coat
668-S Trim Ring — Beige Powder Coat

Std.
Ctn.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Covers and Tile Trims for 668-S Floor Box

1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4

Contact Technical Service for color samples.

11.63"
Square

Trim Rings

Device Plates for 668-S Floor Box
Cat. No.

Description

668-S-1RP
668-S-1G
668-S-BP

668-S Single-Gang Duplex Plate
668-S Single-Gang GFCI Plate
668-S Blank Plate

www.tnb.com

Std.
Ctn.

1
1
1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Description

668-S-6RJ
668-S-6PAN
668-S-6ORT
668-S-6AVA

668-S Data Plate — 6 Keystone Jacks
668-S Data Plate — 6 Panduit® Jacks
668-S Data Plate — 6 Ortonics® Jacks
668-S Data Plate — 6 Avaya® Jacks

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std.
Ctn.

1
1
4
4

A-137

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
667-SC Floor Box
•	 Largest capacity concealed-service floor box on the market
– Four “double-gangs” allow for two duplex receptacles
per gang, for a total of eight receptacles per box
– Each gang has 40 cu. in. of capacity
– Box interior has 128 cu. in. of capacity
•	 Standard box configuration is for up to eight power
and/or low-voltage devices
	– B
 ox design allows for feed-through cabling
for power and low-voltage conductors
•	 Shallow design
– 3" overall height is ideal for renovations and
upper level floor installations

667-2RP
Device Panel
(included)

•	 Full line of low-profile covers
– Utilizes same quality cover as AFM-8 Access Floor Module
– High-strength polycarbonate
– Steel reinforced for added durability
– Two retractable cable exit ports
– 64 sq. in. opening provides easy access to device panels
– 1⁄4" recess for carpet/tile insert
– Available in gray, black, brown and beige

667-BP
Device Plate
(included)

Leveling Screws and
Base Feet (included)

•	Box is manufactured with (1) 3⁄4", (3) 1" and (1) 11⁄4" KOs per gang

Floor Box Bottom

– T his includes a 1" and 11⁄4" KO located in the bottom
11⁄4" K.O.

•	 Full complement of device panels
– Device panels available with one or two duplex openings,
one or two GFI openings, six standard “keystone” with
Omni 110 bezels and blanks

1" K.O.

•	 Provided with leveling legs and base feet
– Base feet can be attached to form preventing box movement
during concrete pour
– Leveling legs provide up to 11⁄2" pre-pour adjustment

13"

•	 Manufactured from 14-gauge pre-galvanized steel

9 3⁄4"

– Quality construction provides added durability and rust protection
•	 MopTite ® covers meet UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements
for carpet, tile and wood

Cat. No.

Description

667-SC

Four-Gang Recessed Floor Box

Std.
Ctn.

1

Supplied with (1) 667-2RP for 2 duplex receptacles and (1) 667-BP Blank Plate. For covers and other
device plates, see page A-139.

Floor Box Top

3"

2"

For communications accessories, see page A-140.

A-138

⁄4" K.O.

3

1" K.O.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
⁄32" Steel Top Plate on Lid Carpet
or Tile Can Be Glued to Top Plate

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Covers and Device Plates for 667-SC
5

.188"
Flange Height

A

10.63" Square

9.54" Square

A

1.063"

667-CST-SW-XXX

Cover Lid

667-BP

667-RP

Cord Door Locks Open or Closed

Cover Frame

667-2RP

667-1G
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

667-BP*
667-RP
667-2RP*
667-1G
667-2G
667-6RJ**
667-CST-SW-GRY
667-CST-SW-BLK
667-CST-SW-BRN
667-CST-SW-BGE

Blank Device Panel
Single Duplex Receptacle Plate
Device Panel for 2 Duplex Receptacles with Duplex KOs
Device Panel for 1 GFCI Receptacle
Device Panel for 2 GFCI Receptacles
Device Panel for 6 Keystone Data Jacks
Cover and Flange — Gray
Cover and Flange — Black
Cover and Flange — Brown
Cover and Flange — Beige

667-2G

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

667-6RJ

**For data connectors and adapters, see page A-140.
New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-139

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
Communication Accessories
Rectangular/Duplex Adapters

Keystone Inserts

OPJDU5EL-WH

OPODEC1-WH

OPODEC6-WH

OPODEC2-WH

OPOD4-WH

OPODEC3-WH

OPODECXLRF-WH

OPODEC
XLRM-WH

OPJV6C-WH

OPODEC4-WH

OPODEC
VGA-WH

Rectangular/Duplex Adapters for Use
with Standard Floor Box Device Plates
Cat. No.

OPJU6L-WH

OPA35-WH*

OPARCAW*

OPARCAR*

OPARCAY*

OPAFR*

OPAS-WH*

OPAHDMI-WH

OPAB-WH

Keystone Inserts for Data, Voice
and Audio Visual Applications
Std.
CTN.

Description

OPODEC1-WH Rectangular Adapters for GFCI Device Plate, 1-Port, Keystone, White
OPODEC2-WH Rectangular Adapters for GFCI Device Plate, 2-Port, Keystone, White
OPODEC3-WH Rectangular Adapters for GFCI Device Plate, 3-Port, Keystone, White
OPODEC4-WH Rectangular Adapters for GFCI Device Plate, 4-Port, Keystone, White
OPODEC6-WH Rectangular Adapters for GFCI Device Plate, 6-Port, Keystone, White
OPOD4-WH Duplex Adapter, 4-Port, Keystone, White
OPODECRectangular Adapters, Female XLR Microphone Jack,
XLRF-WH
Solder Leads, White
OPODECRectangular Adapters, Male XLR Microphone Jack,
XLRM-WH
Solder Leads, White
OPODECRectangular Adapters, VGA Connector, Female-to-Female, White
VGA-WH

5
5
5
5
5
10
5
5
5

Cat. No.

Description

OPJDU5EL-WH
OPJDU6L-WH
OPJV6CL-WH
OPA35-WH*

CAT5e Data Jack, Keystone, White
CAT6 Data Jack, Keystone, White
Phone Jack, 6-Conductor, Keystone, White
3.5mm Stereo Connector, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female, White
OPARCAW*
RCA Connector — White, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female
OPARCAR*
RCA Connector — Red, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female
OPARCAY*
RCA Connector — Yellow, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female
OPAFR*
F-Connector, Recessed, Keystone, 1 GHz,
Female-to-Female, Red
OPAS-WH
S-Video Connector, 4-Pin, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female, White
OPAHDMI-WH HDMI Connector, Recessed, Keystone,
Female-to-Female, White
OPAB-WH
Blank Insert, Keystone, White

*Special Installation Note: When using these AV connectors with OPODEC4-WH & OPODEC6-WH Rectangular Adapters, only a Blank Insert (OPABL-WH) can be used in the same horizontal row.
Trim the ears off one side of the Blank Insert and install prior to installing the AV connector in the row.

A-140

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
CTN.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
25

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
68R Recessed Covers

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

NEW!

Plug in power and communication cords, and then close the lid
to hide unsightly plugs and receptacles below the floor!

•	Unique cover provides aesthetic recessed service with
cost-effective box options for concrete, wood sub-floor
and raised-floor applications
•	Lid can be rotated to expose a small opening for cords,
enabling the lid to close flush with the floor while in use
•	Cover accepts one duplex or GFCI receptacle —
no special device plates required (receptacle
purchased separately)
•	Cover accepts up to two communications jacks —
includes one 2-port keystone data plate and one
blank data plate for custom cut-outs or power-only
applications (communications jacks purchased
separately)

Concrete applications

•	Non-metallic covers are available in black, gray, beige
and brown. Black covers are available with an optional
brass or aluminum flange
•	Two set screws lock the cover in place —
no gluing required

Wood sub-floor/raised floor applications
Use a Steel City ®
Round PVC Floor Box,
catalog number 68-P
(purchased separately)
See page A-150

Use an appropriate Steel City ®
3" x 2" Metal Switch Box
with mounting ears
(purchased separately).
See pages A-19–22

6 3⁄4"

⁄32"

5

3 3⁄8"

4 3⁄4"
Lid closes flush with the floor, even with cords plugged in.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-141

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Recessed Service Floor Boxes
68R Recessed Covers (continued)
Cover kit includes:
•	 Cover assembly
•	 Receptacle mounting plate
•	 Duplex receptacle insert
•	 2-port keystone data plate
•	 Blank data plate
•	 Voltage divider

Technical Information

6" Minimum Concrete
­ epth at Box Location
D

Important Application Note:
When using the 68R Recessed Cover with the 68-P floor box for concrete applications,
the entire box depth (6") is required. Prior to concrete pour, level the top of the box with
the screed line of the concrete.

Description

68R-CST-BLK
68R-CST-GRY
68R-CST-BGE
68R-CST-BRN
68R-CST-BRS

Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Black
Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Gray
Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Beige
Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Brown
Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Black
with Brass Flange
Non-Metallic Recessed Floor Box Cover Kit, Black with Aluminum Flange
Round PVC Floor Box for Concrete Applications
3" x 2" Metal Switch Box, 31⁄2" Deep, for Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable,
Wood Subfloors
3" x 2" Metal Switch Box, 31⁄2" Deep, 1⁄2" KOs

68R-CST-ALM
68-P
CXWOW
CY 1/2

A-142

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

4
4
4
4
4
4
8
25

Power and Communications

25

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Innovative 3-Gang Round Floor Box for Power, Data and AV.
Round Floor Boxes for Power and Communications:
68-HP Series
Combines the Capacity
NEW!
of a 3-gang box with the
Affordability of a round
non-metallic floor box

Unmatched Flexibility to configure
any combination of power and
communications devices

•	 6" diameter round non-metallic floor
box — the largest in the industry

•	 Accepts standard devices from any manufacturer,
including duplex, GFCI, locking, hospital grade or isolated
ground receptacles

•	 Large inline hubs for power and data
wiring: 1" for power, 11⁄2" for data

•	 Accommodates a wide variety of multi-media devices
through the use of rectangular adapters

No leveling, gluing or aligning
for an Easy Installation

Easy-to-Use Covers Made
of Durable solid brass
Lid Lies Flat Against
and aluminum
the Floor While

•	 No wasted time leveling the box before the
concrete is poured — simply cut the box
at the appropriate height after the pour

•	 Stands up to heavy carts,
cleaning equipment,
and general floor traffic

•	 No gluing — stainless steel retention barbs
secure the mounting frame to the box

In Use

•	 Convenient slide latch
provides tool-less
access to devices

•	 Round design — no need to align the box
with walls during installation
Stainless Steel Barbs

Furniture-Feed and Cast Iron
options for a Comprehensive
floor box solution

•	 Lid lies flat while in
use to minimize
obstructions above
floor level

•	 Dual-voltage furniture-feed
covers transition power and
communications wiring from
the floor into modular furniture
Slide Latch for
Tool-less Access

•	 Cast iron box with a non-metallic
collar for slab-on-grade or
metallic conduit applications
1" Hub for Power,
11⁄2" Hub for Data

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-143

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
8"

68-HP Floor Boxes (continued)

10 31⁄32"
8 15⁄16 "
8 1⁄8"
68-HP
6" Round Non-Metallic
Floor Box
5 31⁄32"
Inside Dia.

5 31⁄32"
Inside Dia.

6 5⁄16"

6"

68-HP-CI
Cast Iron Floor Box with 6" Round
Non-Metallic Collar

1" Dia. Hub
2-PLCS

11⁄2"
Dia. Hub
2-PLCS

1" Threaded
Conduit Hub
2-PLCS

11⁄2" Threaded
Conduit Hub
2-PLCS

Minimum Concrete Depth

Cat. NO.

Description

68-HP
68-HP-CI

6" Round Non-Metallic Floor Box
Cast Iron Floor Box with 6" Round Non-Metallic Collar

Flush Covers for 68-HP Series

Flush

Furniture Feed

Standard Pack Qty.

4"
41⁄2"

31⁄2"
4"

4
1

8.00"
Flange Diameter

•	 Slide latch for tool-less access to devices
•	 Lid lies flat when box is in use
•	 Requires Flush Mounting Kit (Cat. No.
68-HP-FMK) to mount cover (see page A-145)

Lid Release
Latch

Lid

68-HP-FC-ALM
Solid brass cover
with brushed finish

Pull slide latch to release lid

⁄16" Flange
Thickness

7

A-144

Cat. NO.

Description

68-HP-FC-ALM
68-HP-FC-BRS
68-HP-FC-BLK

Flush Cover — Solid Aluminum with Brushed Finish, 1,000 lb. Load Rating
Flush Cover — Solid Brass with Brushed Finish, 1,500 lb. Load Rating
Flush Cover — Solid Aluminum with Black Powder-Coated Finish, 1,000 lb. Load Rating

StD. Pack Qty.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

4
4
4

www.tnb.com

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Flush Mounting Kit and Accessories
for 68-HP Series

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Power KOs

•	 Flush Mounting Kit required in order to mount devices and covers
to the 68-HP Series floor box
•	 Stainless steel barbs — no gluing required
•	 Includes (3) compartments for standard devices
•	 Voltage dividers allow any combination of power and communications devices
•	 Each compartment includes (1) knockout for power and (1) knockout for data
for access to either power or communications wiring

Stainless Steel
Barbs

Data KOs

Optional Accessories
Device Plates

Kit Includes:
•	 Mounting Frame
•	 Voltage Divider
•	 (3) Device Plates
–	 (1) Center Plate:
GFCI/Rectangular
–	 (2) Side Plates:
Rectangular
•	 (3) Duplex Inserts

68-HP-FMK
68-HP-DPC-GFCI

68-HP-DPS-DEC

68-HP-DPC-R

68-HP-DPC-2MAAP

68-HP-DPS-2MAAP

Extron® AV Plate

Regular Inserts

Divider

68-HP-FMK
Flush Mounting Kit

68-HP-BI

68-HP-DI

OPODEC6-WH**

Cat. NO.

Description

68-HP-FMK
68-HP-DPC-GFCI
68-HP-DPS-DEC
68-HP-DPC-R
68-HP-DPC-2MAAP
68-HP-DPS-2MAAP
68-HP-BI
68-HP-DI
OPODEC6-WH
68-HP-DPAV-EXT

Mounting Kit for Flush Covers
Center Device Plate — GFCI/Rectangular Receptacle
Side Device Plate — Rectangular Receptacle
Center Device Plate — Single Round Receptacle, 15⁄8" Opening
Center Device Plate — 2 Extron® MAAP Plates*
Side Device Plate — 2 Extron® MAAP Plates*
Rectangular Insert — Blank (for unused compartments)
Rectangular Insert — Duplex Receptacle
Rectangular Adapter for GFCI/Rectangular Device Plate — 6-Port Data, Keystone, White**
Extron® AV Plate — 3 AAP Plates, 2 MAAP Plates*

68-HP-DPAV-EXT
(Low Voltage Only)

StD. Pack Qty.

4
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
1

* Extron ® MAAP Plates purchased from an authorized Extron ® distributor. Extron ® is a registered trademark of RGB Systems, Incorporated.
** Additional rectangular adapters available for low voltage applications — see Communications Accessories on page A-140.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-145

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Furniture Feed Covers and Mounting Kit for 68-HP Series
•	 Dual-voltage covers for feeding power and communications wiring to modular furniture
•	 Furniture Feed Mounting Kit required to mount covers to 68-HP Series floor box

68-HP-FFC-ALM
Solid brass cover
with brushed finish

68-HP-FFC-BRS
Aluminum cover
with brushed finish

68-HP-FFC-BLK
Aluminum cover
with powder-coated black finish

8.00"

n 8.00"
Flange
FLANGE
DIAMETER
Diameter

11⁄2"
1-1/2"
Threaded
THREADED
PLUG
Plug

1" 1"
THREADED
Threaded
PLUG
Plug

3
⁄8
Flange3/8
FLANGE
Thickness
THICKNESS

Cat. NO.

Description

68-HP-FFC-ALM
68-HP-FFC-BRS
68-HP-FFC-BLK
68-HP-FFMK

Furniture Feed Cover — Solid Aluminum with Brushed Finish
Furniture Feed Cover — Solid Brass with Brushed Finish
Furniture Feed Cover — Solid Aluminum with Black Powder-Coated Finish
Mounting Kit for Furniture Feed Covers

GENERAL
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE
FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS [ ]
ARE IN METRIC UNITS.
REVISIONS
**

A-146

68-HP-FFMK
Furniture Feed Mounting Kit

SEE ERN ( **** )
FOR APPROVAL SIGNATURES
& RELEASE DATE.
PROJECT NO: ****

Standard Pack Qty.

4
4
4
4
www.tnb.com

DESCRIPTION:

68-HP-FFC-XXX FURNITURE FEED COVER
XXX - DENOTES COVER MATERIAL OR FINISH

ORIGINAL PROJECT NO / ( ERN NO )

SHEET NO:

REV. NO:

1 OF 1
United States
THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR DESCRIPTIVE PURPOSES ONLY. AND THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO DEVIATE FROM ANY OF THE DETAILS SHOWN HEREON.
Tel: 901.252.8000
C 2010 Thomas & Betts - Proprietary, All Rights Reserved
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354
UD55819 / ( 2011942)

DRAWING NO:

WSD-68HPFFC-ART
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

68 and 600 Series Floor Boxes provide flush service for power or
­­­ communications/data.
68 and 600 Series Floor Boxes can be used for carpet or tile applications.

Features — 68 Series
•	 Stamped steel, concretetight, fully adjustable
•	 Electro-galvanized body
and hardware
•	 Interior and exterior leveling screws
permit adjustment to meet finished floor

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

68-D
68-D-AL
68-S
68-S-AL

Stamped-Steel Floor Box, Deep
Stamped-Steel with Aluminum Trim Ring, Deep
Stamped-Steel Floor Box, Shallow
Stamped-Steel with Aluminum Trim Ring, Shallow

Cat. No.

Description

600-SC
600-AL-SC

Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4” Conduit Tapping
with Aluminum Trim Ring
Cast-Iron Floor Box 1" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 2" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 1⁄2" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
with Aluminum Trim Ring
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 1" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 11⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
with Aluminum Trim Ring
Cast-Iron Floor Box 1" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
with Aluminum Trim Ring
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Floor Box 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
with Aluminum Trim Ring

4
4
4
4

68-D

•	Shipped complete with expendable cap to prevent
ingress of concrete during pour 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1"
knockouts — all bottom knockouts are accessible
•	 Uses P60 Series MopTite® covers and carpet plate

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Round Floor Boxes for Power or Communications:
68 and 600 Series

•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number

Features — 600 Series
•	 Cast iron, watertight body,
fully adjustable
•	 Painted silver enamel inside and
out for additional corrosion resistance

600

•	 Interior and exterior leveling screws permit adjustment to
meet finished floor
•	 Shipped complete with expendable cap to prevent ingress
of concrete during pour
•	 3⁄4" threaded conduit openings are standard
•	 Uses P60 Series MopTite® covers and carpet plate
•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number

600-1-SC
600-2-SC
601-1/2-SC
601-AL-SC
601-SC
601-1
601-1-1/4
602-SC
602-AL-SC
602-1
603-SC
603-AL-SC
604-SC
604-AL-SC

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

P-60 Covers sold separately.

601

602

www.tnb.com

603

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

604

A-147

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Engineering Data — 68 and 600 Series
Dimensions
(in.)

Cat. No.

a

b

c

before after maximum
Conduit KOS
pour
pour capacity
(in.)
Conduit
adj.
adj.
kos
Hubs sides bottom
(in.)
(in.)
(cu. in.)

68-D

41⁄4 35⁄8 411⁄16

21⁄2

68-S
600-SC
600-1-SC
600-11/4
600-2-SC
601-SC
601-1
601-11/4
602-SC
602-1
603-SC
604-SC

41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4

11⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
11⁄2

23⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
31⁄32
31⁄32
21⁄2
2

411⁄16
51⁄8
51⁄8
51⁄8
51⁄8
51⁄8
51⁄8
51⁄8
4
4
4
4

⁄2

60

—

⁄2
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
11
⁄16
—

47
64
64
64
64
56
56
56
36
36
27
15

—
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4

1

1

(4) 3⁄4
(4) 1
(4) 3⁄4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

(2) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4
(2) 3⁄4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Use P60 Series covers and carpet plates.

C

A
600-SC
B

68-D

Wiring Device: Duplex, single or voice/data plates.

MopTite Carpet Plates
for 68 and 600 Series
®

P-60-CP

P-60-3/4-2-CACP
120°

5 3⁄4"
333/⁄88"
3

⁄16"

3

std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

P-60-CP
P-60-CPAL
P-60-LCP
P-60-CACP
P-60-CACP-AL
P-60-3/4-2-CACP
P60-3/4-2-CACP-AL
P60-CACP-GFCI
P60-CACP-GFCI-AL

Brass Carpet Plate, 511⁄16" Diameter
Aluminum Carpet Plate
Polycarbonate Carpet Plate, 53⁄8" Diameter
Brass One-Piece Carpet Cover Plate
Aluminum One-Piece Carpet
Brass One-Piece Carpet Plate with 3⁄4"–2" Plugs
Aluminum One-Piece Carpet Plate with 3⁄4"–2" Plugs
Brass One-Piece Carpet Plate for GFCI Devices
Aluminum One-Piece Carpet Plate for GFCI Devices

•	Polished brass
finish

•	 Polished brass
finish

•	Translucent
polycarbonate

•	Integrated carpet
plate and 3⁄4"–2"
floor plate
in one unit

•	Furnished complete
with 8-32 x 1"
brass screws

•	Textured finish

•	Furnished complete
with sealing gasket
and 8-32 x 1"
brass screws

P-60-CACP

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

A-148

•	For brushed
aluminum, add
AL after catalog
number

•	53⁄4" outside
diameter

P-60-CACP

P-60-CACP-GFCI

•	Polished-brass finish
•	Integrated carpet plate and
duplex floor plate in one unit

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

P-60-LCP

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

•	Furnished complete with
sealing gasket and
8-32 x 1" brass screws
•	53⁄4" outside diameter

www.tnb.com

®

•	 Polished finish
•	 Furnished complete with sealing gasket
and 8-32 x 7⁄16" brass screws
•	 4" outside diameter
P-60-3/4

P-60-1/2

•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number

⁄4" N.P.S. Plug Size

⁄2" N.P.S. Plug Size

3

1

4"

P-60-1

P-60-1-1/4

1" N.P.S. Plug Size

11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug Size

P-60-2*
2" dia. Plug Size

25⁄8" dia. Plug Size

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
MopTite Cover Plates for 68 and 600 Series

3 3⁄8"

30°

⁄16"

3

* Also includes steel seating
plate for receptacles.

Cat. No.

Description

P-60-1/2
P-60-1/2-AL
P-60-3/4
P-60-3/4-AL
P-60-1
P-60-1-AL
P-60-1-1/4
P-60-1-1/4-AL
P-60-2
P-60-2-AL
P-60-2-5/8
P-60-2-5/8-AL
P-60-1/2-2
P-60-1/2-2-AL
P-60-3/4-2
P-60-3/4-2-AL
P-60-DR
P-60-DR-AL
P-60-DS
P-60-DS-AL
P-60-DU
P-60-DU-AL
P-60-GFCI
P-60-GFCI-AL

Brass Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 2 5⁄8" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 2 5⁄8" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 1⁄2"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1⁄2"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 3⁄4"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 3⁄4"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover with Duplex Lift Lid
Aluminum Cover with Duplex Lift Lid
Brass Cover for Duplex with Individual Lift Lids
Aluminum Cover for Duplex with Individual Lift Lids
Brass Cover Plate with Two 17⁄16" Plugs for Duplex
Aluminum cover with Two 17⁄16" Plugs for Duplex
Brass Cover Plate for GFCI Devices
Aluminum Cover Plate for GFCI Devices

P-60-2-5/8*

std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

68P-FL or 68P-FL-AL required to attach cover plates to 68-P floor box.

P-60-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. Plug Size

1

P-60-DR*

P-60-3/4-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. Plug Size

1

P-60-DU*

Duplex Lift Lid

Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs

P-60-DS*

P-60-GFCI*

Hinged Lift Lids

New MopTite Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.
®

®

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-149

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
68-P Round Non-Metallic
Floor Box

⁄16" Wall Thickness

3

The 68-P floor box provides flush service for power or
communications and data. The non-metallic floor box is
used in concrete floors and is suitable for carpet, tile or
wood applications.

A

•	High-strength rigid PVC construction, non-corrosive
•	Easy installation with no leveling required
— just cut the box level with the concrete
after the pour
B

•	Compatible with standard-schedule PVC conduit
(1", 3⁄4" and 1⁄2", reducers included)
•	Pre-packaged with concrete cap and six hub plugs

Dimensions (IN.)

Cat. No.
68-P

A

B

C

After
Pour
Adj.

55⁄32

6

63⁄8

None

C

Maximum
Capacity
(cu. in.)

Standard
Conduit
Tapping

Covers and
Carpet
Plates

Wiring
Device

Std.
Ctn.

100

(4) 3⁄4"
(2) 1"

P60
P68
series

Single
duplex or
data/voice

8

Minimum pour 3 inches.
Cubic in. capacity is 17 cubic inches per inch of box height.
Note: Must use 68-PAR to attach cover plates to 68-P floor box.

68-P

Adjusting Ring for 68-P Floor Box
•	Non-metallic adjusting ring includes pigtail and clips
Cat. No.

Description

68-PAR

Non-Metallic Adjusting Ring

Std.
Ctn.

8

Required to mount P60 and P68 Series covers to 68P floor box (not needed for dual-voltage kits).

68-PAR

Metallic Tile Trims for 68-P Floor Box
•	 Tile trim rings are available in brass or aluminum for flush installation of metallic
plates in linoleum, wood or carpeted floors. Must be used to mount P60 series
plates. (Not required for P-68 covers, P60-CACP or P60-3/4-2-CACP)

Cat. No.

Description

68P-FL
68P-FL-AL

Tile Trim Ring, Brass
Tile Trim Ring, Aluminum

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
68P-FL/68P-FL-AL

Required to attach P60 Series cover plates to 68-P floor box.

A-150

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Flush Service Floor Boxes

Duplex Cover
(discard if using GFI)

Solid Brass Cover
with “Snap-Lock” Lid

Faceplate and 4 Keystone
data plates

Mounting Ring with
“Press-Fit” barbs

Dual-voltage divider

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Dual-Voltage Kits for 68-P Non-Metallic Series

68P Box sold
separately

•	Voltage divider has easy-cut score lines to accommodate
concrete depths of 3 to 6 inches
•	Faceplate has removable data plates and can
accommodate GFCI or standard duplex receptacles
•	Kit comes equipped with 4 standard keystone-size
openings in the data plates. Other styles available include
openings sized for Ortronics, Avaya, Panduit and Hubbell

6-Inch Extension for 68-P Floor Box

•	MopTite® cover uses a “snap-lock” to close the lid.
No screws to turn...just push down the lid and it snaps
in place. The cover uses a factory-installed gasket and
exceeds all UL scrubwater exclusion requirements
for carpet, wood and tile floors
•	MopTite® cover available in solid brass or aluminum
•	Includes everything required for a standard installation
(68P floor box, data jacks and receptacles not included)
68P-EXT 6" Extension

Cat. No.

Description

68P-DV-KIT-BRS
68P-DV-KIT-AL
68P-DV-DP-ORT
68P-DV-DP-AVA
68P-DV-DP-PAN
68P-DV-DP
68P-EXT
68P-EXT-DIV

Dual-Voltage Divider Kit with MopTite® Brass Cover
Dual-Voltage Divider Kit with MopTite Aluminum Cover
Ortronics Data Plate to Accommodate 2 Jacks
Avaya Data Plate to Accommodate 4 Jacks
PANDUIT Data Plate to Accommodate 2 Jacks
Standard Data Plate to Accommodate 4 Keystone Jacks
6" Extension for 68P Floor Box *
Voltage Dividers for 68P-EXT *

1
1
10
10
10
10
4
4

*Keystone data plates come standard with the kit. Other style data plates are available from
T&B and can be ordered separately.

www.tnb.com

68-P Floor Box with
(2) 68P-EXT Extensions

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

68P-EXT
68P-EXT-DIV
68-P

6" Extension for 68-P Floor Box *
Voltage Dividers for 68P-EXT *
Round PVC Floor Box for Concrete Applications

68P-EXT-DIV
Voltage Dividers

Std. Ctn.

4
4
8

* For use with Steel City ® round PVC floor box only, catalog number 68-P.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-151

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
MopTite Metallic Carpet Plates for 68-P Series
®

•	 Polished brass finish
•	 Furnished complete with 8-32 x 1" brass screws
•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number

P60-CACP

P60-CACP-GFCI

P60-3/4-2-CACP

One-piece solid-brass
duplex plate with screw-lock lids.
5 3⁄4" O.D. Mounting holes on a 3 3⁄8" dia.

P60-CP

One-piece solid-brass
communications carpet plate.
5 3⁄4" O.D. Mounting holes on a 3 3⁄8" dia.

Cat. No.

Description

P60-CACP
P60-CACP-AL
P60-3/4-2-CACP
P60-3/4-2-CACP-AL
P60-CACP-GFCI*
P60-CACP-GFCI-AL*
P60-CP*
P60-CP-AL*

One-Piece Duplex Cover and Carpet Flange Brass
One-Piece Duplex Cover and Carpet Flange Aluminum
One-Piece Cover & Carpet Flange with 3⁄4" and 2" Plugs
One-Piece Cover & Carpet Flange with 3⁄4" and 2" Plugs
One-Piece GFCI Cover and Carpet Flange
One-Piece GFCI Cover and Carpet Flange
Carpet Flange
Carpet Flange

Finish

std.
Ctn.

—
—
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

*Requires 68P-FL or 68P-FL-AL to attach covers to 68-P Floor Box.
New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.

MopTite Non-Metallic Carpet Plates for 68-P Series
®

Non-metallic floor service cover
(FSC) with 1" NPS screw plug
accommodates most above-floor
service fittings with matching
carpet plate. 6" O.D.

Non-metallic, single
receptacle plate (SRC)
with matching carpet
plate and cover. 6" O.D.

Non-metallic, duplex/voice
data receptacle plates (DRC)
with matching carpet plate
and cover. 6" O.D.

113⁄32" Dia.
Opening

Cat. No.

Color

P-68-SRC-GRY

Gray

P-68-SRC-BRN

Brown

P-68-SRC-BGE

Beige

P-68-SRC-BLK

Black

P-68-FSC-GRY

Gray

P-68-FSC-BRN

Brown

std.
Ctn.­

Description

Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Single Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Single Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Single Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Single Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
with 1" NPS Screw Plug
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
with 1" NPS Screw Plug

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.

A-152

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Color

4

P-68-FSC-BGE

Beige

4

P-68-FSC-BLK

Black

4

P-68-DRC-GRY

Gray

4

P-68-DRC-BRN

Brown

4

P-68-DRC-BGE

Beige

4

P-68-DRC-BLK

Black

Description

Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
with 1" NPS Screw Plug
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
with 1" NPS Screw Plug
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Duplex Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Duplex Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Duplex Receptacle
Non-Metallic Carpet Plate and Cover
for Duplex Receptacle

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

std.
Ctn.­

4
4
4
4
4
4

Flush Service Floor Boxes
®

•	 Polished finish
•	 Furnished complete with sealing gasket 	
and 8-32 x 7/16" brass screws
•	 4" outside diameter
•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number

P-60-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. Plug Size

P-60-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. Plug Size

1

3

4"

P-60-1-1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. Plug Size

P-60-1
1" N.P.S. Plug Size

3 3⁄8"

30°

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

MopTite Metallic Cover Plates for 68-P Series

⁄16"

3

* Also includes steel seating
plate for receptacles.

P-60-2-5/8*

P-60-2*
Cat. No.

Description

P-60-1/2
P-60-1/2-AL
P-60-3/4
P-60-3/4-AL
P-60-1
P-60-1-AL
P-60-1-1/4
P-60-1-1/4-AL
P-60-2
P-60-2-AL
P-60-2-5/8
P-60-2-5/8-AL
P-60-1/2-2
P-60-1/2-2-AL
P-60-3/4-2
P-60-3/4-2-AL
P-60-DR
P-60-DR-AL
P-60-DS
P-60-DS-AL
P-60-DU
P-60-DU-AL
P-60-GFCI
P-60-GFCI-AL

Brass Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 2 5⁄8" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 2 5⁄8" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 1⁄2"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 1⁄2"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover Plate 3⁄4"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Aluminum Cover Plate 3⁄4"–2" Diameter Plug Size
Brass Cover with Duplex Lift Lid
Aluminum Cover with Duplex Lift Lid
Brass Cover for Duplex with Individual Lift Lids
Aluminum Cover for Duplex with Individual Lift Lids
Brass Cover Plate with Two 17⁄16" Plugs for Duplex
Aluminum cover with Two 17⁄16" Plugs for Duplex
Brass Cover Plate for GFCI Devices
Aluminum Cover Plate for GFCI Devices

std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

68P-FL or 68P-FL-AL required to attach cover plates to 68-P floor box.

P-60-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. Plug Size

1

P-60-DR*

P-60-3/4-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. Plug Size

1

P-60-DS*

Duplex Lift Lid

Hinged Lift Lids

P-60-DU*

P-60-GFCI*

Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.

www.tnb.com

2 5⁄8" dia. Plug Size

2" dia. Plug Size

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-153

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Floor Boxes for Single Short-Strap Receptacles or Communications
Service Fitting Application
78 and 88 Series Floor Boxes provide flush service for power or communications and data. They can be used for either carpet or tile applications.

88 Series

78 Series

78SC

88-D

•	 Cast iron, watertight body, semi-adjustable

•	 Stamped steel, concrete-tight, semi-adjustable

•	Painted silver enamel inside and out
for additional corrosion resistance

•	Electro-galvanized body and hardware

•	Exterior leveling screws and threaded vertical
adjusting ring permit adjustment to meet finish floor

•	 Exterior leveling screws and threaded vertical
adjusting ring permit adjustment to
meet finish floor

•	Shipped complete with expandable cap to
prevent ingress of concrete during pour

•	 Shipped complete with expandable cap to
prevent ingress of concrete during pour

•	 3⁄4" threaded conduit openings

•	 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" knockouts — all bottom
knockouts accessible

•	 Uses P90 Series MopTite® covers

•	Uses P90 Series MopTite® covers

Cat. No.

Description

78SC
78-S
88-D
88-S

Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with ⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box (shallow)
Stamped-Steel Single-Gang Floor Box with 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" Conduit Tapping
Shallow Version Stamped Steel

Std. Ctn.

4
4
4
4

3

SFH, SFL Series
Service Fitting

Engineering Data

P-90-1 Cover Plate
78, 88, or 98
Series Floor Box

Dimensions (IN.)

A
B

A-154

Cat. No.

A

B

C

Before
Pour
Adj. (IN.)

78SC
78-S
88-D
88-S

3
3
3
3

213⁄16
25⁄8
31⁄4
23⁄4

37⁄8
37⁄8
53⁄4
53⁄4

21⁄2
11⁄2
21⁄2
11⁄2

C

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

After
Pour
Adj. (IN.)

⁄4
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
3

www.tnb.com

Maximum Standard
Capacity
Conduit
cu. in. Tapping (IN.)

24
20
29
23

⁄4
⁄4
—
—
3
3

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Maximum Conduit Tapping (In.)

Cat. No.

Conduit KOs (In.)

w/bushing

w/o bushing

SideS

Bottom

78SC
78-S
88-D

3

⁄4
⁄4
—

1
1
—

88-S

—

—

—
—
(2) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4
(2) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4

—
—
(3) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4
(3) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4

3

Covers and
Carpet Plates

Wiring
Device

P90 series
P90 series
P90 series

Sing. short, Strap rec.
Sing. short, Strap rec.
Sing. short­
Strap rec.
Sing. short
Strap rec.

P90 series

MopTite® Cover Plates for 78 and 88 Series
•	 Polished-brass finish
•	 Furnished complete with
sealing gasket and 6-32 x 1⁄2"
brass screws

P-90-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. plug

P-90-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. plug

1

•	213⁄16" outside diameter
•	 For brushed aluminum,
add AL after catalog number

P-90-2*
2" dia. plug

P-90-1-1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. plug

P-90-1
1" N.P.S. plug

3

P-90-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. plugs

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Engineering Data (continued)

P-90-3/4-2*
⁄4" & 2" dia. plugs

1

3

2 3⁄8"

Cat. No.

Description

P-90-1/2
P-90-3/4
P-90-3/4-AL
P-90-1
P-90-1-AL
P-90-1-1/4

Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Brass
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass

4
4
4
4
4
4

Cat. No.

Description

P-90-1-1/4-AL
P-90-2
P-90-2-AL
P-90-1/2-2
P-90-3/4-2
P-90-3/4-2-AL

Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" Plug

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Brass
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4

2 13⁄16"
⁄16" Dia.

3

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.
*Also includes steel seating plates for receptacles.
For above-floor service fittings for 78, 88 and 98 series floor boxes, see page A-170

Accessories for 78 and 88 Series Floor Boxes
•	 Extends vertical
adjusting ring 11⁄8"

•	 Mounted on steel
seating plate

•	 Seven cubic inch capacity

•	 For use with 2" diameteropening floor plate

•	 15-Amp, 125-Volt,
NEMA grounding type

Carpet Plate for 78 and 88 Series
Floor Boxes
•	 Polished-brass finish

•	33⁄8" O.D. with 5⁄8" flange

•	 Furnished complete with
6-32 x 1" brass flathead
screws and gasket

•	 For brushed aluminum, add
AL after catalog number

•	 Threaded 2-20UN-2B
to accept 694 plug

478-G-12

Description

8805-E
478-G-12

Extension Adjusting Ring
15-Amp 125-Volt NEMA Grounding Receptacle

2 3⁄8"

P-90-CP

8805-E

Cat. No.

3 3⁄8"

Std.
Ctn.

4
4

Cat. No.

Description

P-90-CP
P-90-CP-AL

Carpet Plate
Carpet Plate

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Brass
Aluminum

4
4

Will not accept P90 covers. Will accept 694 threaded plug.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-155

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Floor Boxes for Single
Short-Strap Receptacles
or Communications

671 and 672 Floor Boxes
•	 Cast iron, watertight, non-adjustable
•	 Painted silver enamel inside and out
for additional corrosion resistance

671 and 672 Series Floor Boxes provide flush service for power or
communications and data. They can be used in either wood or concrete floors
and are suitable for carpet, tile or wood applications.

•	 For use in wood or concrete floors
•	 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" threaded conduit openings;
uses P67 Series covers
•	 Cat. No. 672 is the 671 floor box with factorymounted 15-ampere, 125-volt, NEMA grounding
receptacle and P67-2 MopTite® cover plate

Cat. No.

671SC

671SC
672

672

31⁄2
31⁄2

3 231⁄32
33⁄16 231⁄32

13
13

Cat. No.

Sides

Bottom

671SC

(2) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4
(2) 1⁄2
(2) 3⁄4

(2) 1⁄2
—
(2) 1⁄2
—

P67
series
P67
series

672
C

(2)–3⁄4"
(4)–1⁄2"
Covers/
Carpet
Plates

Conduit KOs (In.)

B

A

Maximum Conduit
Dimensions (In.) Maximum Standard
Tapping (In.)
Capacity Conduit
A
B
C
(cu. in.)
Tapping w/bushing w/o bushing

⁄4
⁄4

⁄4
⁄4

3

3

3

3

Wiring
Device

Std.
Ctn.

Sing. short
Strap rec.
Sing. short
Strap rec.

4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL watertight requirements for 514A, 514C.

MopTite Plates for 671 and 672 Series
®

•	 Polished brass finish

P-67-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. plug

2 3⁄8"

• 	Furnished complete with
sealing gasket and 6-32 x 1⁄2"
brass screws
•	31⁄2" outside diameter

P-67-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. plug

1

3

P-67-2
2" dia. plug

P-67-1-1/4*
11⁄4" N.P.S. plug

3 1⁄2"

P-67-1
1" N.P.S. plug

⁄16" Dia.

3

P-67-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. plugs

1

P-67-3/4-2*
⁄4" & 2" dia. plugs

3

*Also includes seating plate for receptacle.

Cat. No.

Description

P-67-1/2
P-67-3/4
P-67-3/4-AL
P-67-1
P-67-1-AL
P-67-1-1/4
P-67-2
P-67-2-AL
P-67-1/2-2
P-67-3/4-2

Cover Plate with 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate with 2" UN Thread Plug
Cover Plate with 2" UN Thread Plug
Cover Plate with 1⁄2" & 2" Plug
Cover Plate with 3⁄4" & 2" Plug

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Brass
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Brass

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL scrubwater exclusion requirements.

A-156

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Accessories for 671
and 672 Floor Boxes

•	 Polished-brass finish

•	 Use brass edge ring for neat
appearance when non-adjustable
floor box is installed in concrete

• 	Furnished complete with
6-32 x 1"-long brass flathead
screws and gasket

P-67-F Edge Ring

•	 Edge ring has 33⁄4" OD and adds 3⁄8"
to floor box height

• 	For brushed aluminum, add
AL after catalog number

•	 15-amp, 125-volt, NEMA grounding type
P-90-CP

•	33⁄8" outside diameter	

478-G-12
Short Strap
Receptacle

•	 Mounted on steel seating plate
• 	For use with 2" diameter opening
floor plate

Cat. No.

Description

P-90-CP
P-90-CP-AL

Carpet Plate — Brass
Carpet Plate — Aluminum

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

4
4

P-67-F
478-G-12

Brass Edge Ring for Concrete
15-Amp, 125-Volt NEMA Grounding Receptacle

4
4

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Carpet Plates for 671
and 672 Floor Boxes	

Floor Plate Plug Inserts for 78,
88, 671 or 672 Series
Cat. No.

Size or Description

690-SC
691-SC
692-SC
693-SC
694
695
696-SC
697
698

⁄2"–14" NPS Thread
⁄4"–14" NPS Thread
1"–111⁄2" NPS Thread
11⁄4"–111⁄2" NPS Thread
2"–20" UN Thread
1
⁄2"–2"
3
⁄4"–2"
25⁄8"–20" UN 2A Thread
17⁄16" for Duplex P-60-DU

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

1
3

692

695
695

For standard plug inserts 1⁄2" through 2", see page A-155
Catalog numbers are for brass.
For aluminum, add AL after catalog number.

Floor Box Body Parts

8805

8803

8818

Cat. No.

Description

8805
8803
8818
9803

Brass Adjusting Ring
Threaded Steel Body Cover of 78 and 88 Series
Metal Protective Cap
Threaded Steel Body Cover for 98 Series

Metal Cap

8818

Plug Insert

694

Floor Plate

P90-2

Gasket

8811

Receptacle and Plate

478-G-12

Adjusting Ring

8805

Threaded Steel Cover

8803

9803
Galvanized Steel
or Cast Iron Body

Std.
Ctn.

2 5⁄8–20 UN 2A Thread.

⁄4-20 x 21⁄2

1

Rough-Level
Adjusting
Screws

4
4
4
4
Floor Box Assembly with Floor Plate

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-157

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Multiple-Gang Floor Boxes for Power and Communications
640 and 840 Series Floor Boxes provide flush service for
power, communications and data. Multiple-gang boxes enable
the user to place high- and low-voltage in a single floor box.
Floor boxes up to four-gangs are available. 640 and 840
Series boxes can be used for either carpet or tile applications.

640 Series
•	 Cast iron, watertight body,
fully adjustable

•	Shipped complete with
expendable cap to prevent
ingress of concrete during pour

•	 Painted silver enamel inside
and out for additional corrosion
resistance

•	 3⁄4" threaded conduit openings
are standard

•	 Interior and exterior leveling
screws permit adjustment to
finished floor

•	 Uses P64 Series MopTite® covers
(one cover per gang)
•	For brushed aluminum,
add AL after catalog number

•	 Removable partitions for large
capacity requirements on 2-,
3- and 4-gang
840SC Series (Shallow)
•	Cast iron, watertight body,
semi-adjustable

•	Shipped complete with
expendable cap to prevent
ingress of concrete during pour

•	Painted silver enamel inside
and out for additional
corrosion resistance
641

•	 3⁄4" threaded conduit openings
are standard

•	Exterior leveling screws for
adjustment to finished floor

•	 Uses P64 Series MopTite® covers
(one cover per gang)

•	 Removable partitions for
large capacity requirements
on 2- and 3-gang

•	 For brushed aluminum,
add AL after catalog number

Engineering Data
Dimensions (In.)

842-SC

Cat. NO.

A

B

C

Before
Pour
ADJ. (In.)

641
642
643
644
841-SC
842-SC
843-SC

35⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
2
2
2

4
7
10
1215⁄16
4
7
10

51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2

21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2

A

B

Cat. No.

Number
of
Gangs

Maximum
Capacity
(cu. in.)

641
642
643
644
841-SC
842-SC
843-SC

1
2
3
4
1
2
3

35
37 per gang
37 per gang
37 per gang
15
16.5 per gang
16.5 per gang

Use P64 Series covers and carpet plates.
Wiring Device: Duplex, single or voice/data plates.
C

A-158

*Additional hub sizes available — see next page.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

After
Pour
ADJ. (in.)

⁄8
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
—
—
—
5
5

Conduit Hubs (in.)

⁄4
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3

3

Flush Service Floor Boxes
640 and 840 Series Floor Boxes
•	Furnished complete
with sealing gasket
and 8-32 x 7⁄16"
brass screws

®

Floor Plate w/
Removable
Plug Insert

41⁄2"
31⁄2"

Gasket
3" 21⁄8"

Receptacle
Seating Plate

•	 3" x 4 ⁄2"
outside dimension

⁄16"

3

1

Plate Dimensions

Floor Box
Edge Ring

•	 For brushed aluminum,
add AL after catalog number

P-64-3/4-2*
⁄4" & 2" dia. plug

3

•	 All covers meet MopTite® requirements

P-64-DS*
Duplex Lift lids

P-64-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. plug

1

Cat. No.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

•	 Polished brass finish

Hold-Down
Screws

MopTite Cover Plates for
640 and 840 Series

P-64-2-5/8*
25⁄8" dia. plug

P-64-DU*
Duplex 17⁄16" plugs

P-64-GFCI

P-64-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. plug

P-64-1
1" N.P.S. plug

3

Std.
Ctn.

Description

641
641-AL

Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
641-1
Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
SP-641-1-AL Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
642
Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
642-AL
Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
642-1
Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
SP-642-1-AL Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
643
Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
643-AL
Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
SP-643-1
Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
SP-643-1-AL Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 1" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
644
Cast-Iron Four-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
SP-644-AL Cast-Iron Four-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
841-SC
Shallow Cast-Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
841-AL
Shallow Cast Iron Single-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
842-SC
Shallow Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
842-AL-SC Shallow Cast-Iron Two-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim
843-SC
Shallow Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
843-AL-SC Shallow Cast-Iron Three-Gang Floor Box with 3⁄4" Conduit Hubs
& Aluminum Trim

4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
2
1
1

Boxes supplied with brass tile trim unless otherwise specified.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

P-64-2*
2" dia. plug

P-64-1-1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. plug

P-64-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. plug

1

*Also includes seating plate for receptacle like others.
Description

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid

Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass)
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Cat. No.
P-64-1/2
P-64-1/2-AL
P-64-3/4
P-64-3/4-AL
P-64-1
P-64-1-AL
P-64-1-1/4
P-64-1-1/4-AL
P-64-2
P-64-2-AL
P-64-1/2-2
P-64-1/2-2-AL
P-64-3/4-2
P-64-3/4-2-AL
P-64-DS
P-64-DS-AL
P-64-2-5/8
P-64-2-5/8-AL
P-64-DU
P-64-DU-AL
P-64-GFCI
P-64-GFCI-AL

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements for 514A, 514C.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-159

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Metallic Carpet Plates for 640 and 840 Series

P-64-CP

Cat. No.

P-64-2G-CP

number
of Gangs

outside
Dimension (IN.)

Material

std.
Ctn.

1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4

45⁄8 x 61⁄8
45⁄8 x 61⁄8
75⁄8 x 61⁄8
75⁄8 x 61⁄8
105⁄8 x 61⁄8
105⁄8 x 61⁄8
135⁄8 x 61⁄8
135⁄8 x 61⁄8

Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

P64-CP
P64-CP-AL
P64-2G-CP
P64-2G-CP-AL
P64-3G-CP
P64-3G-CP-AL
P64-4G-CP
P64-4G-CP-AL

P-64-3G-CP

P-64-4G-CP

Non-Metallic Carpet Plates for 640 and 840 Series
• 	Polycarbonate material
• 	Textured finish

Cat. No.
P64P-CP-BLK
P64P-CP-GRY
P64P-CP-BGE
P64P-2G-CP-BLK
P64P-2G-CP-GRY
P64P-2G-CP-BGE
P64P-3G-CP-BLK
P64P-3G-CP-GRY
P64P-3G-CP-BGE

A-160

number
of Gangs description

1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3

Single-Gang Carpet Plate
Single-Gang Carpet Plate
Single-Gang Carpet Plate
Two-Gang Carpet Plate
Single-Gang Carpet Plate
Two-Gang Carpet Plate
Three-Gang Carpet Plate
Three-Gang Carpet Plate
Three-Gang Carpet Plate

finish

std.
Ctn.

Black
Gray
Beige
Black
Gray
Beige
Black
Gray
Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

P-64P-CP
Series

P-64P-2G-CP
Series

P-64P-3G-CP
Series

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

MopTite® Non-Metallic Covers
for 640 and 840 Series

P-64P-URC

Cat. No.

Description

Color

std.
Ctn.

P64P-URC-BLK
P64P-URC-GRY
P64P-URC-BGE
P64P-BP-BLK
P64P-BP-GRY
P64P-BP-BGE

Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover

Black
Gray
Beige
Black
Gray
Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

Floor Plate Plug Inserts
Cat. No.

size or Description

690-SC
691-SC
692-SC
693-SC
694
695
696-SC
697
698

⁄2"–14 NPS Thread
⁄4"–14 NPS Thread
1"–111⁄2" NPS Thread
11⁄4"–111⁄2" NPS Tthread
2"–20 UN Thread
1
⁄2"–2"
3
⁄4"–2"
25⁄8"–20 UN 2A Thread
17⁄16" for Duplex P-60-DU
1
3

std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

692

For standard plug inserts 1⁄2" through 2", see page A-155. Catalog numbers are for brass.
For aluminum, add AL after catalog number.

695

Gaskets for Floor Plate Assemblies
Cat. No.

For use With

SP650
SP651
SP-P64-DS-P2

P-64 Series Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-DU Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-DS Floor Plate Assembly

www.tnb.com

std.
Ctn

4
10
4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-161

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Multiple-Gang Floor Boxes for Power and Communications.
640P Series Non-Metallic Floor Boxes
•	 Significant savings over
metal boxes
•	 Die-cast adjusting ring with
unique “snap-on” feature
which eliminates gluing
•	 Reduced installation time;
no leveling required
•	 Compatibility with standardschedule PVC conduit;
1", 3⁄4" and 1⁄2"
•	 Removable adjusting ring
accepts wide variety of
service accessories
•	 One-piece housing unit with

•	 Molded from a high-grade
polymer material which is fully
compatible with standardschedule PVC conduit

Description

641P
642P
643P

One-Gang Box
Two-Gang Box
Three-Gang Box

640P Series Non-Metallic
Floor Box (641P)

•	 640P Series Floor Boxes utilize
both plastic and brass carpet
(P64 series) plates and covers
•	 Available in one-, two- and
three-gang versions. Two- and
three-gang boxes provided
with partitions in corresponding
activation kits

Reducers

•	 Min. concrete pour 21⁄2"
Dimensions (IN.)

Cat. No.

Concrete Cap

premolded conduit holes

Length

Width

Height

Max.
Volume

Std.
Ctn.

4
7
103⁄8

53⁄8
53⁄8
53⁄8

6
6
6

85.0 cu. in.
85.5 cu. in.*
85.5 cu. in.*

1
1
1

* Per gang.

Carpet Activations for 640P Series
Carpet Flange

Cat. No.

Description

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Carpet Activations for 640 Series
641P-CACA
641P-CACB
641P-CAC-BGE
641P-CAC-BLK
641P-CAC-GRY
642P-CACA
642P-CACB
642P-CAC-BGE

Cat. No.

Description

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Non-Metallic Black
Non-Metallic Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Black
Non-Metallic Gray

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Black
Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Beige
Black
Gray

4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Carpet Activations for 640 Series

One-Gang Carpet Trim
Aluminum
One-Gang Carpet Trim
Brass
One-Gang Carpet Trim Non-Metallic Beige
One-Gang Carpet Trim Non-Metallic Black
One-Gang Carpet Trim Non-Metallic Gray
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
Aluminum
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
Brass
Two-Gang Carpet Trim Non-Metallic Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

642P-CAC-BLK
642P-CAC-GRY
643P-CACA
643P-CACB
643P-CAC-BGE
643P-CAC-BLK
643P-CAC-GRY

Two-Gang Carpet Trim
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
Three-Gang Carpet Trim

Wedge Clip

Adjusting Frame

Carpet Activation Kit

Tile Activations for 640P Series
Tile Flange

Cat. No.

Description

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Tile Activations for 640 Series
641P-TACA
641P-TACB
641P-TAC-BGE
641P-TAC-BLK
641P-TAC-GRY
642P-TACA
642P-TACB
642P-TAC-BGE

A-162

One-Gang Tile Trim
One-Gang Tile Trim
Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic
Two-Gang Tile Trim
Two-Gang Tile Trim
Non-Metallic

Cat. No.

Description

Tile Activations for 640 Series
Aluminum
Brass
Beige
Black
Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

642P-TAC-BLK
642P-TAC-GRY
643P-TACA
643P-TACB
643P-TAC-BGE
643P-TAC-BLK
643P-TAC-GRY

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic
Three-Gang Tile Trim
Three-Gang Tile Trim
Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic
Non-Metallic

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Ground
Screw

Limit Clips

Tile Activation Kit

Flush Service Floor Boxes
®

Cat. No.

Description

P-64-1/2
P-64-1/2-AL
P-64-3/4
P-64-3/4-AL
P-64-1
P-64-1-AL
P-64-1-1/4
P-64-1-1/4-AL
P-64-2
P-64-2-AL
P-64-1/2-2
P-64-1/2-2-AL
P-64-3/4-2
P-64-3/4-2-AL
P-64-2-5/8
P-64-2-5/8-AL
P-64-DU
P-64-DU-AL
P-64-DS
P-64-DS-AL
P-64-GFCI
P-64-GFCI-AL

Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid

41⁄2"

Finish

Std.
Ctn.

Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® Scrubwater exclusion requirements.

31⁄2"

3"

21⁄8"
⁄16"

3

Plate Dimensions

P-64-3/4-2*
⁄4" & 2" dia. plug

3

P-64-DU*
Duplex 17⁄16" plugs

P-64-1
1" N.P.S. plug

P-64-2-5/8*
2 5⁄8" dia. plug

P-64-GFCI

P-64-DS*
Duplex Lift lids

P-64-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. plug

1

P-64-1-1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. plug

P-64-2*
2" dia. plug

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

MopTite Cover Plates
for 640 Series

P-64-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. plug

3

P-64-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. plug

1

*Also includes seating plate for receptacle like others.

MopTite Non-Metallic Covers for 640P Series
®

•	 Polished-brass finish
•	 Furnished complete with sealing gasket and 8-32 x 7⁄16" brass screws

Hold-Down Screws

Floor Plate with
Removable
Plug Insert

•	 3" x 41⁄2" outside dimension
•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL after catalog number
•	 All covers meet MopTite® requirements

Gasket

Receptacle Seating Plate
P-64P-URC

Cat. No.

Description

Color

Std.
Ctn.

P64P-URC-BLK
P64P-URC-GRY
P64P-URC-BGE
P64P-BP-BLK
P64P-BP-GRY
P64P-BP-BGE

Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover

Black
Gray
Beige
Black
Gray
Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4

Floor Box Edge Ring

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-163

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Multiple-Gang Floor Boxes
for Power and Communications:
740 Series
The new 740 Series line of stamped-steel floor boxes are an extension of
T&B’s industry-leading 640 and 840 series cast-iron floor boxes. The new
boxes provide flush service for power, communications and data. Multiplegang boxes allow the user to place high- and low-voltage in a single floor
box. The 740 series can be used for carpet or tile applications.

•	 Available in shallow (25⁄8") and deep (35⁄8") versions
•	 UL Listed and CSA certified
•	 Available in one-, two- and three-gang versions
•	 Two- and three-gang boxes are supplied
with customer-installed dividers
•	 16 ga. pre-galvanized steel construction
•	 Adjustable with four exterior leveling legs capable
of 2" pre-pour adjustment and an interior leveling ring
capable of 11⁄4" after-pour adjustment
•	 Made with a variety of KOs ranging from 1⁄2" to 11⁄4"
•	 Boxes utilize the 640P series metallic and non-metallic
floor box accessories with the unique one-step
installation method

B

A

•	 Shipped with expendable steel cap to prevent ingress
of concrete at installation

C

std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

741-S
742-S
743-S
741-D
742-D
743-D

Shallow One-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction
Shallow Two-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction
Shallow Three-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction
Deep One-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction
Deep Two-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction
Deep Three-Gang Steel Floor Box for Concrete Construction

4
1
1
4
1
1

Engineering Data for 740 Series
dimensions (in.)

cat. no.
741-S
742-S
743-S
741-D
742-D
743-D

A-164

adjustment (in.)

conduit kos (in.)

a

b

c

before pour

after pour

capacity per
gang

sides

ends

bottom

4
71⁄4
101⁄4
4
71⁄4
101⁄4

51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2
51⁄2

25⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8

2
2
2
2
2
2

11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2

29 cu. in.
26 cu. in.
26 cu. in.
48 cu. in.
41 cu. in.
41 cu. in.

(2) 3⁄4
(4) 3⁄4
(6) 3⁄4
(2) 3⁄4
(4) 3⁄4
(6) 3⁄4

(2) 1⁄2
(2) 1⁄2
(2) 1⁄2
(2) 11⁄4
(2) 11⁄4
(2) 11⁄4

(1) 1⁄2 & (1) 3⁄4
(2) 1⁄2 & (2) 3⁄4
(3) 1⁄2 & (3) 3⁄4
(1) 3⁄4 & (1) 3⁄4
(2) 1⁄2 & (2) 3⁄4
(3) 1⁄2 & (3) 3⁄4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Carpet and Tile Activations
for 740 Series

641P-CACB

Tile Activation Kit

Carpet Activation Kit
Carpet Flange

Tile Flange

Ground Screw
Wedge Clip

Adjusting Frame
Limit Clips

Cat. No.

Description

Carpet Activations for 740 Series
641P-CACA
One-Gang Carpet Trim
641P-CACB
One-Gang Carpet Trim
641P-CAC-BGE
One-Gang Carpet Trim
641P-CAC-BLK
One-Gang Carpet Trim
641P-CAC-GRY
One-Gang Carpet Trim
642P-CACA
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
642P-CACB
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
642P-CAC-BGE
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
642P-CAC-BLK
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
642P-CAC-GRY
Two-Gang Carpet Trim
643P-CACA
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
643P-CACB
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
643P-CAC-BGE
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
643P-CAC-BLK
Three-Gang Carpet Trim
643P-CAC-GRY
Three-Gang Carpet Trim

www.tnb.com

FINISH

std.
Ctn.

Aluminum
Brass
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Black
Non-Metallic Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Black
Non-Metallic Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Non-Metallic Beige
Non-Metallic Black
Non-Metallic Gray

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Description

Tile Activations for 740 Series
641P-TACA
One-Gang Tile Trim
641P-TACB
One-Gang Tile Trim
641P-TAC-BGE
Non-Metallic
641P-TAC-BLK
Non-Metallic
641P-TAC-GRY
Non-Metallic
642P-TACA
Two-Gang Tile Trim
642P-TACB
Two-Gang Tile Trim
642P-TAC-BGE
Non-Metallic
642P-TAC-BLK
Non-Metallic
642P-TAC-GRY
Non-Metallic
643P-TACA
Three-Gang Tile Trim
643P-TACB
Three-Gang Tile Trim
643P-TAC-BGE
Non-Metallic
643P-TAC-BLK
Non-Metallic
643P-TAC-GRY
Non-Metallic
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

FINISH

std.
Ctn.

Aluminum
Brass
Beige
Black
Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Beige
Black
Gray
Aluminum
Brass
Beige
Black
Gray

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

A-165

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
MopTite Cover Plates for 740 Series
®

4 1⁄2"
3 1⁄2"

3"

2 1⁄8"
⁄16"

3

P-64-3/4-2*
⁄4" & 2" dia. plug

P-64-2-5/8*
2 5⁄8" dia. plug

P-64-DU*
Duplex 17⁄16" plugs

P-64-GFCI

P-64-1
1" N.P.S. plug

P-64-1-1/4
11⁄4" N.P.S. plug

3

P-64-DS*
Duplex Lift lids

Plate Dimensions

P-64-1/2
⁄2" N.P.S. plug

P-64-3/4
⁄4" N.P.S. plug

1

P-64-2*
2" dia. plug

3

P-64-1/2-2*
⁄2" & 2" dia. plug

1

*Also includes seating plate for receptacle like others.

Cat. No.

Description

P-64-1/2
P-64-1/2-AL
P-64-3/4
P-64-3/4-AL
P-64-1
P-64-1-AL
P-64-1-1/4
P-64-1-1/4-AL
P-64-2
P-64-2-AL
P-64-1/2-2
P-64-1/2-2-AL
P-64-3/4-2
P-64-3/4-2-AL
P-64-2-5/8
P-64-2-5/8-AL
P-64-DU
P-64-DU-AL
P-64-DS
P-64-DS-AL
P-64-GFCI
P-64-GFCI-AL

Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 1" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 11⁄4" NPS Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 1⁄2" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 3⁄4" & 2" UN Plug
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate 25⁄8" UN Plug
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate Duplex 17⁄16" Plugs
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate Duplex Lift Lids
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid
Cover Plate GFCI Flip Lid

FINISH

Std.
Ctn.

Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

A-166

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

•	 Polished-brass finish
•	 Furnished complete with sealing gasket
and 8-32 x 7⁄16" brass screws

Hold-Down Screws

Floor Plate with Removable
Plug Insert

•	 3" x 41⁄2" outside dimension
•	 For brushed aluminum, add AL
after catalog number

Gasket

•	 All covers meet MopTite® requirements
Receptacle Seating Plate

Floor Box Edge Ring

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
MopTite Non-Metallic Cover Plates for 740 Series

P-64P-URC

Cat. No.

Description

FINISH

Std.
Ctn.

P64P-URC-BLK
P64P-URC-GRY
P64P-URC-BGE
P64P-BP-BLK
P64P-BP-GRY
P64P-BP-BGE

Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Universal Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover

Black
Gray
Beige
Black
Gray
Beige

4
4
4
4
4
4

New MopTite ® Covers exceed UL® scrubwater exclusion requirements.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-167

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
Single-Gang Residential
Floor Box Kit for Wood Floors.
Steel City Single-Gang
Residential Floor Box Kit

NEW!

®

Tired of tripping over extension cords? Look no further than the Steel City®
Single-Gang Residential Floor Box Kit from Thomas & Betts. This affordable
and conveniently packaged kit for the residential market provides power
right where you need it most.

•	 Kit includes switch
box, cover, flange
and receptacle
•	 Durable metallic covers
and flanges are available
in aesthetic brass or
nickel finishes
•	 Available with duplex
or GFCI receptacle
•	MopTite® covers meet UL®
scrubwater requirements
for wood, tile and carpet
•	 3" x 2" Switch Box is
3 1⁄2" deep with 18 cu.
in. capacity

Brass finish with duplex receptacle.

•	 Box includes integral
non-metallic sheathed
cable clamps

.................................... Specifications....................................
•	 Material: Box — Galvanized Steel
Cover — Brass or Nickel plated
	 Aluminum Flange — Die-cast Zinc
with Brass or Nickel finish

A-168

•	 Listing: UL® and CSA Listed

std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

71W-DS
71W-DS-N
71W-GFCI
71W-GFCI-N

1-Gang Residential Floor Box — Duplex Recp., Brass Finish
1-Gang Residential Floor Box — Duplex Recp., Nickel Finish
1-Gang Residential Floor Box — GFCI Recp., Brass Finish
1-Gang Residential Floor Box — GFCI Recp., Nickel Finish

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

4
4
4
4

Nickel finish with GFCI receptacle.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

62W

61W

Steel City® 60W Series Floor Boxes provide single- and multi-gang
solutions for wood subfloor applications.

•	 NEW! Three-gang configuration for high-capacity,
multi-service installations
•	 NEW! Larger KOs (3⁄4" and 1") have been added
to each gang for application flexibility
•	 Adjustable mounting brackets allow for various
finished floor-material heights (hardwoods,
tile or carpet)
•	 Ideal for open-layout residential applications,
school auditoriums or commercial office space
•	 Voltage dividers are included with multi-gang boxes
to accommodate power, voice and data services
in the same floor box

63W

•	 Full range of metallic and non-metallic cover
and flange options

Retrofit Construction (Old Work) Application

New Construction (New Work) Applications
Telephone Cable
and Plug

Power Cord
and Plug

P-64
Series
Covers

Carpeted Floor

61-W Floor Box

62-W Floor Box

Mounting Brackets

Mounting Bracket
Subfloor

61W
62W
63W

Power Cord and Plug
Carpet Plate
Cover Plate

Hardwood
Finished
Floor

P-64
Series
Carpet
Plate

Cat. No.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Flush Service Floor Boxes
For Wood Subfloors!
60W Series Floor Boxes

Subfloor

a
std.
(in.) capacity Ctn.

Dimension

1-Gang Floor Box for Wood Subfloors 311⁄16" 311⁄16 31 cu. in.
Ends: (2) 1⁄2", (2) 3⁄4" Bottom: (1) 1⁄2", (1) 1"
2-Gang Floor Box for Wood Subfloors 71⁄16" 71⁄16 60 cu. in.
Ends: (4) 1/2", (4) 3⁄4" Bottom: (2) 1⁄2", (2) 1"
NEW! 3-Gang Floor Box for Wood Subfloors 101⁄4" 101⁄4 90 cu in.
Ends: (6) 1⁄2", (6) 3⁄4" Bottom: (3) 1⁄2", (3) 1"

1

5 5⁄16"

1
1

A

2 13⁄16"

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-169

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Above-Floor Service Fittings
Steel City Service Fittings Provide Above-Floor Service
for Power, Com­muni­cations and Data.
®

Service Fittings for Power
SFH-40 Series

SFH-50 Series

•	 Brushed-aluminum finish

•	 Brushed-aluminum finish

•	 Low-profile design

•	 Interchangeable face plates

•	 Furnished with 1"
conduit nipple

•	Furnished with 1" conduit
nipple for direct screwthreading into a floor box
plate with 1" cover opening

SFH-40-Series

Dimensions (In.)
W

D

H

Std.
Ctn.

Brushed 43⁄8
Aluminum

3

25⁄8

4

Brushed 43⁄8
Aluminum
Brushed 5
Aluminum

3

25⁄8

4

33⁄8

3

4

5

33⁄8

3

4

5

33⁄8

3

4

Description

SFH-40-RG Furnished with One 15-Amp,
125-Volt, 3-Wire NEMA
Duplex Receptacle
SFH-40
Same as SFH-40-RG
Above, Less Duplex Receptacle
SFH-50-2RG Furnished with Two Back-to-Back
15-Amp, 125-Volt, 3-Wire NEMA
Duplex Receptacles
SFH-50
Same as SFH-50-2RG, Less
Duplex Receptacles
SFH-51
Furnished with Cover Plate
to Accommodate One 30or 50-Amp, 240-Volt, 3-Wire
Receptacle and Blank Cover

Nipple

Floor Box

P-90-1 Cover Plate

SFH-50-Base

SFH-51-COVER
Single Receptacle Plate, 2.16" Hole

SFH-50-DUPCOV
Duplex Receptacle Plate

SFH-50-BLCOV
Blank Plate

SFH-50-TELECOV
Telephone Plate, 1" Hole

SFH-50-CVW11332
Single Receptacle Plate, 1.39" Hole

SFH-50-CVW11932
Single Receptacle Plate, 1.60" Hole

SFH-50-2RG

SFH-40-RG

Cat. No.

Duplex
Receptacle

Finish

Brushed
Aluminum
Brushed
Aluminum

Service Fittings for
Communications and Data

Sample Application
SFL-10 Series

•	 Brushed-aluminum finish

P-90-1
Floor Plate

•	 Low-profile design

Nipple

•	 Furnished with 1" conduit nipple
Dimensions (IN.)

A-170

Cat. No.

Description

SFL-10

3

⁄4" x 1 ⁄8" Bushed Opening
for Telephone or Computer
1

Finish

W

Brushed 4 ⁄8
Aluminum
3

D

H

Std.
Ctn.

3 ⁄8

2 ⁄8

4

1

5

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

SFL-10
Communications
Connector

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

88 Series
Floor Box

www.tnb.com

Floor Plate Plug Inserts

692

Tile Trims

695

Cat. No.

Size or
Description

690-SC
691-SC
692-SC
693-SC
694
695
696-SC
697
698

⁄2"–14" NPS Thread
⁄4"–14" NPS Thread
1"–111⁄2" NPS Thread
11⁄4"–111⁄2" NPS Thread
2"–20" UN Thread
1
⁄2"–2"
3
⁄4"–2"
25⁄8"–20" UN 2A Thread
17⁄16" for Duplex P-60-DU

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

1
3

For standard plug inserts 1⁄2" through 2", see page A-155.
Catalog numbers are for brass.
For aluminum, add AL after catalog number.
2 5⁄8"–20" UN 2A thread.

DESCRIPTION For use With:

630-SC
631

P-60 Series Floor Plate Assemblies
(except duplex) P-60-DR, P-60-DU,
P-60-DC-AL Floor Plate Assemblies
P-60-DS Floor Plate Assembly

SP-60-DS-P3

DESCRIPTION For use With:

SP-620-MA

P-60-2, P-60-1/2-2, P-60-3/4-2
Floor Plate Assemblies
P-60-DR, P-60-DU, P-60-DC-AL and P-60-DS
Floor Plate Assemblies

SP-621

www.tnb.com

600-4-FL-AL
600-4-FL

Aluminum
Brass

Cat. No.

Description For use With:

SP650
SP651
SPP-64-DS-P2

P-64 Series Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-DU Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-DS Floor Plate Assemblies

Std.
Ctn.

4
4

Std.
Ctn.

4
10
4

Seating Plates for Receptacles — Steel

Std.
Ctn.

4
4
1

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION For use With:

640

P-64-2, P-64-1/2-2, P-64-3/4-2
Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-2-5/8 Floor Plate Assemblies
P-64-DS and P-64-DU Floor Plate Assemblies

639
638

Seating Plates for Receptacles — Steel

Cat. No.

Description

Gaskets for Floor Plate Assemblies

Gaskets for Floor Plate Assemblies

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Replacement Parts and Accessories
68, 600, 640, 740 and 840 Series — 1-, 2-, 3-Gang

Std.
Ctn.

4
1
25⁄8–20
UN 2A Thread

Floor Plate Plug Inserts

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION For use With:

1

697
698

25⁄8"
17⁄16" for Duplex P-64-DU

1

For standard plug inserts 1⁄2" through 2", see page A-155. Catalog numbers are for brass.
For aluminum, add AL after catalog number.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

4
4

A-171

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Replacement Parts and Accessories
For 78, 88 and 98, 671 or 672 Series
Floor Box Body Parts

8803

8805

Metal Cap

8818

Plug Insert

694

Floor Plate

P90-2

Gasket

8811

Receptacle
and Plate

478-G-12

Adjusting Ring

8805

Threaded
Steel Cover

8803

9803

8818

std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

8805
8803
8818
9803

Brass Adjusting Ring
Threaded Steel Body Cover of 78 and 88 Series
Metal Protective Cap
Threaded Steel Body Cover for 98 Series

4
4
4
4

2 5⁄8 "–20" UN 2A Thread.

Gasket for Floor Plate Assembly

Cat. No.

For Use With:

8811

P-90 Series Floor Plates

Galvanized Steel
or Cast Iron
Body
Rough-Level
Adjusting
Screws

std.
Ctn.

4

⁄4-20 x 2 1⁄2

1

Floor Box Assembly with Floor Plate

Plate for Short Strap Receptacle
std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

For Use With:

889

Series 78, 88, 98, 671, 672 Boxes

4

Extension Collar
std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

For Use With:

8805-E

Provides an Extension of Floor Box Throat Upwards 11⁄8";	
for Extreme Depths (7 cu. in.) 2 5⁄ 8–20 UN 2A Thread

4

Microphone Adapter for Floor Boxes

A-172

std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

For Use With:

489-ma

27-ga. Galvanized Steel with 11⁄4" Dia. Opening for Standard
Microphone Jacks: for Steel City® Floor Box Series 78, 88,
98 and 671

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

2 21⁄32"
⁄16"

4

11

Opening

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

489-MA
11⁄4" dia.

Flush Power & Communications
FPT4 Series

•	 Maximum capacity and flexibility for flush-mounted power and
communications devices, including the popular "4 x 4" configuration	
(4 power outlets, ­4 communications devices)
•	 Core Drill Size: 4"
FPT3 Series

•	 Accommodates 1 duplex receptacle and 2 data jacks

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
Capacity, Durability, Flexibility — Everything
You’ve Been Looking for in a Poke Through.
Fire-Rated Poke Through Systems

•	 Cord Drill Size: 3"
FPT Flush Series

•	 Accepts 1 duplex receptacle
•	 Core Drill Size: 3"

Furniture Feed
FFPT4 Series

•	 2 Conduit Hubs: 3⁄4" for power and 1 1⁄4" for communications
•	 Core Drill Size: 4­"
FFPT3 Series

•	 Concentric 2" and 11⁄4" Hub for power or communications
•	 Core Drill Size: 3"
FPT Furniture Feed Series

•	 3 Conduit Hubs: (2) 1⁄2" and (1) 3⁄4" for power and communications
•	 Core Drill Size: 3"

Above Floor Pedestals
FPT Above-Floor Pedestals

•	 Available in 2 compartment and 4 compartment 	
for power and communications
•	 Core Drill Size: 3"

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-173

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FPT4 Series
The FPT4 Series provides everything you look for in a flush Poke Through —
capacity, durability, flexibility, accessibility and aesthetics.

Capacity:

Flexibility:

•	Four standard configurations:
	 – 4 power receptacles + 4
communications devices (4 x 4)

•	 Configurable design to meet any
project requirements:
	 – 4 standard configurations for power
and communications devices

	 – 2 power receptacles + 6
communications devices

	 – 20A receptacles can be wired as
isolated ground (orange labels provided)

	 – 8 communications devices

	 – Communications plates available
to accommodate data jacks from
many manufacturers

	 – 1 locking receptacle + 2
communications devices
•	Core Drill Size: 4"

	 – Accepts Extron MAAP plates for
A/V components

Durability:
•	Solid brass or aluminum covers protect
devices from damage and debris
when not in use — no exposed plastic
components
•	 Unique latching lid eliminates easily
damaged, hard-to-use locking screws
Accessibility:
•	Full access to communications
compartment through the cover
without exposing power compartments
— even after it’s installed in the floor
•	“Straight-through” wiring of
communications cabling for
easy installation and changes

•	 Threaded conduit hubs enable
all communications cabling to be
enclosed in a single conduit
	 – Integral 1" hub on the 4 x 4 —
no extra parts needed
	 – Optional hubs available for
other configurations
•	 Junction box features (5) 1⁄2" and (5) 3⁄4"
knockouts (27 cubic inch capacity)
Aesthetics:
•	 The only 4" core poke through for power
and communications with the entire
cover made of solid brass — features an
aesthetic brushed finish
•	 Solid aluminum covers also available with
brushed finish or powder-coated finishes in
black, gray, brown and beige to match any
décor — the most colors in the industry

4 Power +
4 Communications, page A-175.

A-174

2 Power +
6 Communications, page A-175.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

8 Communications,
page A-176.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1 Locking Receptacle
+ 2 Communications, page A-176.

www.tnb.com

Poke Through Systems

Device Layout

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through: 4 Power
and 4 Communications

7 1⁄2"

•	Four 20A Receptacles, two circuits, six 12 AWG wires, prewired, pigtail
ends in junction box (can be wired as isolated ground, labels provided)
•	Keystone Communications Device Plate with four Keystone Category 5e
Data Jacks — see page A-177 for optional Communications Device
Plates for Compartment A
•	Integral 1" threaded conduit hub for communication wiring (cast iron)

Compartment A

Cable Entry
19"

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-4P-4C-TBRS
FPT4-4P-4C-TALM
FPT4-4P-4C-TBLK
FPT4-4P-4C

Poke-Through Assembly: Base with Brass Cover
Poke-Through Assembly: Base with Aluminum Cover
Poke-Through Assembly: Base with Black Cover
Poke-Through Base (Cover Purchased Separately)

1
1
1
1

1
⁄2" Threaded
Hub for Power
1" Threaded
Hub for Communications

Poke Through Covers
7 1⁄ 2"

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-CVR-TBRS
FPT4-CVR-TALM
FPT4-CVR-TBLK

Cover, FPT4 Series Poke Through — Brushed Brass
Cover, FPT4 Series Poke Through — Brushed Aluminum
Cover, FPT4 Series Poke Through — Aluminum
with Black Powder Coat Finish
Cover, FPT4 Series Poke Through — Aluminum
with Beige Powder Coat Finish
Cover, FPT4 Series Poke Through — Aluminum
with Brown Powder Coat Finish

FPT4-CVR-TBGE
FPT4-CVR-TBRN

4
4
4

Brass

4
4

Forged solid brass and aluminum covers.
Latching lid closes easily without the need for locking screws.
Black

Aluminum

Poke Through: 2 Power
and 6 Communications

FPT4-CCH-6C
Communications Conduit Hub
(optional)

Device Layout
Compartment B

1" Threaded Hub

Cable Entry
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-2P-6C
FPT4-CCH-6C

Poke-Through Base Unit only (cover purchased separately)
Optional 1" Threaded Conduit Hub for Communications
Wiring (cast iron)

1
1

Two 20A Receptacles, one circuit, three 12 AWG wires, prewired, pigtail ends in junction box
(can be wired as isolated ground, labels provided).
Includes Keystone Communications Device Plates with six Keystone Category 5e Data Jacks
— see page A-177 for optional Communications Device Plates for Compartment A and
Compartment B.

www.tnb.com

7 1⁄2"

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Compartment A
1
⁄2" Threaded
Hub for Power

19"

Two 3⁄4"
Thru-Holes for
Communications
(Cover purchased separately)

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-175

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FPT4 Series (continued)

Cable Entry

Device Layout

Poke Through: 8 Communications
Three 3⁄­4"
Thru-Holes for
Communications
Compartment B
(Left)

Compartment B
(Right)

•	Keystone Communications Device Plates with eight
Keystone Category 5e Data Jacks — see page A-177 for
optional Communications Device Plates for Compartment
A and Compartment B
•	No junction box
(Cover purchased
separately)

Compartment A
(Center)
FPT4-CCH-8C
Communications Conduit Hub
(optional)
7 1⁄2"

3 1⁄4"

1 ⁄4" Threaded Hub
1

Device Layout

7 1⁄2"

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-8C
FPT4-CCH-8C

Poke-Through Base (Cover Purchased Separately)
Optional 11⁄4" Threaded Conduit Hub for Communications
Wiring (Cast Iron)

Std.
CTN.

1
4

Poke Through: 1 Locking Receptacle
& 2 Communications
•	20A Receptacle: pre-wired, three 12 AWG wires,
pigtail ends in junction box

Compartment B

•	30A Receptacle: pre-wired, three 10 AWG wires,
pigtail ends in junction box
Cable Entry

19 3⁄4"

⁄2" Threaded Hub
for Power

1

⁄4" Thru-Hole for
Communications

3

•	Cover purchased separately
•	Includes Keystone Communications Device Plates
with two Keystone Category 5e Data Jacks — see
page A-177 for optional Communications Device
Plates for Compartment B

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-1TL21-2C

Poke-Through Base, NEMA L5-20R, 20A/125V Locking
Receptacle, 2 Communications Receptacles
Poke-Through Base, NEMA L6-20R, 20A/250V Locking
Receptacle, 2 Communications Receptacles
Poke-Through Base, NEMA L5-30R, 30A/125V Locking
Receptacle, 2 Communications Receptacles
Poke-Through Base, NEMA L6-30R, 30A/250V Locking
Receptacle, 2 Communications Receptacles
Optional 1⁄2" Threaded Conduit Hub
for Communications Wiring (Cast Iron)

FPT4-1TL22-2C
FPT4-CCH-2P
Communications Conduit Hub
(optional)

FPT4-1TL31-2C
FPT4-1TL32-2C
FPT4-CCH-2P

⁄2" Threaded Hub

1

(Cover purchased separately)

A-176

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
CTN.

1
1
1
1
4

Poke Through Systems
Compartment A
Plates

Compartment B
Plates

FPT4-CPA-4SYS

FPT4-CPB-2SYS

FPT4-CPA-3PAN**

FPT4-CPB-2PAN**

FPT4-CPA-4KEY

FPT4-CPB-2KEY

FPT4-CPA-1MAAP

FPT4-CPB-1MAAP

FPT4-CPA-4ORT

FPT4-CPB-2ORT

FPT4-CPA-BLANK

FPT4-CPB-BLANK

•	Device Plate only — no jacks included

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-CPA-4KEY
FPT4-CPA-4SYS
FPT4-CPA-3PAN
FPT4-CPA-1MAAP

For 4 Keystone Jacks — Compartment A*
For 4 Systemax® Jacks — Compartment A
For 3 Panduit Jacks — Compartment A**
For Extron® MAAP Plate, Single Space —
Compartment A
For 4 Ortronics® Jacks — Compartment A
Blank — Compartment A
For 4 Keystone Jacks — Compartment B*
For 4 Systemax® Jacks — Compartment B
For 2 Panduit Jacks — Compartment B**
For Extron® MAAP Plate, Single Space —
Compartment B
For 4 Ortronics® Jacks — Compartment B
Blank — Compartment B
For Extron® MAAP Plate, Double Space —
Compartment A-B

FPT4-CPA-4ORT
FPT4-CPA-BLANK
FPT4-CPB-2KEY
FPT4-CPB-2SYS
FPT4-CPB-2PAN
FPT4-CPB-1MAAP
FPT4-CPB-2ORT
FPT4-CPB-BLANK
FPT4-CPAB-2MAAP

Std.
CTN.

4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Optional Communications
Device Plates

4
4
4

Compartment
A–B Plate ***

* Keystone plates also accept Leviton ® and Hubbell ® devices.
** Requires CMNZABL-X adapter from Panduit ® to mount Panduit ® MiniCom jacks.
*** F or use with FTP4-2P-6C and FPT4-8C Series only; replaces one Compartment A plate
and one Compartment B plate.

FPT4-CPAB-2MAAP

Replacement Power Insert —
2 Receptacles
•	 For use with FPT4-4P-4C and FPT4-2P-6C
Series Poke-Through Systems

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT4-2P-RPL

Replacement Power Insert with 18" Wire Whip —
Two 20A Receptacles

www.tnb.com

4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-177

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
Cable Entry

Slide latch to release
1 or 2 flip lids

⁄2" Conduit
for Power

1

Two ⁄16"
Thru-Holes for
Communications*
7

16 1⁄4"
7 1⁄2"

Device Layout

Slide latch to release
1 or 2 flip lids

FPT3 Series

* If 1⁄2" EMT conduit stubs are required for communications cabling, use
“City of Chicago” base unit, catalog # FPT3-2P-2C-C (see page A-184).

Poke Through: 2 Power
and 2 Communications
This aesthetic, easy-to-use poke through provides an ideal power
and data solution — great for new construction or upgrading existing
3" core installations.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT3-2P-2C-BRS

•	Capacity: 1 duplex receptacle and 2 data jacks (included)

FPT3-2P-2C-ALM

•	Core drill Size: 3"

FPT3-2P-2C-BLK

FPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Brass Cover
FPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Aluminum Cover
FPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Black Powder-Coat Cover
FPT3 Series Poke-Through Base Unit Only:
Cover Purchased Separately (see below)

•	Durable solid brass or aluminum covers protect devices
from damage and debris when not in use — no exposed
plastic components
•	Powder-coated aluminum covers are available in black,
gray, brown and beige to match any décor — the most
colors in the industry
•	Brushed brass and aluminum finishes provide
superior aesthetics
•	Slide latches enable tool-less access to individual
receptacles — eliminates the need for hard-to-use
locking screws
•	Accepts Keystone, Leviton or Hubbell data jacks
®

®

•	Junction box features (3) ⁄2" and (4) ⁄4" knockouts
(13 cubic inch capacity)
1

3

•	 Includes (1) 20A duplex receptacle, pre-wired,
pigtail ends in junction box
•	 Includes (2) Leviton® CAT5e data jacks

A-178

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

FPT3-2P-2C

Std.
CTN.

1
1
1
1

Poke Through Covers
Cat. No.

Description

FPT3-CVR-BRS

Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Solid Brass, Brushed Finish
FPT3-CVR-ALM
Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Solid Aluminum, Brushed Finish
FPT3-CVR-BLK
Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Aluminum with Black Powder-Coat Finish
FPT3-CVR-GRY
Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Aluminum with Gray Powder-Coat Finish
FPT3-CVR-BGE
Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Aluminum with Beige Powder-Coat Finish
FPT3-CVR-BRN
Cover, FPT3 Series Poke Through —
Aluminum with Brown Powder-Coat Finish
See page A-179 to view typical brushed metal and powder coat finishes.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
CTN.

4
4
4
4
4
4

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FPT Flush Series
The Steel City® FPT Poke Through Series provides an economical solution for
installing a duplex receptacle in an existing floor — right where you need it.

•	 Capacity: 1 duplex
receptacle

•	 Non-metallic covers
include openings for 3
communications cables

•	 Core drill size: 3"
•	 Brushed brass and
aluminum covers provide
superior aesthetics
and durability
•	 Non-metallic covers are
available in black, gray,
beige and brown

•	Integral junction box
features (5) 1⁄2" and
(5) 3⁄4" knockouts
(27 cubic inch capacity)
•	 Assembled units include
(1) 20A duplex receptacle,
pre-wired with pigtail ends
in junction box

Poke Through: 2 Power
Cat. No.
FPT-449
FPT-450
FPT-445-SW-BLK
FPT-445-SW-GRY
FPT-445-SW-BGE
FPT-445-SW-BRN
FPT-400B

Device Layout
Std.
CTN.

Description

FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Solid-Brass Cover
FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Solid-Aluminum Cover
FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Black Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Gray Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Beige Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Flush Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brown Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Poke-Through Base Unit Only (no duplex):
Cover Purchased Separately

1

Metallic
5 3⁄4"

7"

Non-Metallic
16"

1
1
Removable KO for
Communications Cable
(Qty. = 3)

1

Cable Entry

1
1

Opening for
Communication
(Equivalent to Two
3
⁄4" Conduits)

Poke-Through Covers

Brushed Metal
Finishes

Opening for Power
(Equivalent to
One 1⁄2" Conduit)

Non-Metallic Colors
and Finishes

•	 Non-metallic covers feature 3 openings
for communications cables

Cat. No.

Description

Std.
CTN.

FPT-CACP
FPT-CACP-AL
FPT-441-SW-BLK
FPT-441-SW-GRY
FPT-441-SW-BGE
FPT-441-SW-BRN

Solid Brass, Brushed Finish, 5 3⁄4" Diameter
Solid Aluminum, Brushed Finish, 5 3⁄4" Diameter
Black, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Gray, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Beige, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Brown, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter

10
10
10
10
10
10

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

FPT-CACP

FPT-441-SW-BLK

FPT-441-SW-GRY

FPT-CACP-AL

FPT-441-SW-BGE

FPT-441-SW-BRN

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-179

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FFPT4 Series
Poke Through
With limitations on the number of holes that can be drilled in a floor,
it is important to maximize the capacity of each location. The FFPT4 Series
provides high capacity for both power wiring and communications cabling
when feeding modular furniture — in a single-core drill location!

•	Capacity: 3⁄4" hub for power wiring and 11⁄4" hub
for communications cabling (plugs included)
•	Core drill size: 4"
•	Solid brass and aluminum finishes provide superior
aesthetics and durability
•	Powder-coated aluminum covers are available in black,
gray, brown and beige to match any décor — the most
colors in the industry

18"

•	Integral junction box features (5) 1⁄2" and (5) 3⁄4" knockouts
(27 cubic inch capacity)
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FFPT4-BRS

FFPT4 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Brass Cover
FFPT4 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Aluminum Cover
FFPT4 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Black Powder-Coat Cover
FFPT4 Series Poke-Through Base Unit Only:
Cover Purchased Separately (see page A-179)

FFPT4-ALM
FFPT4-BLK
FFPT4

1

Hub Layout — Cover

1

7 1⁄4"

1

Cable Entry

⁄4" Threaded Hub
for power

3

11⁄4" Conduit for
Communications
1 1⁄4" Threaded Hub
for Communications

Poke-Through Covers
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FFPT4-CVR-BRS
FFPT4-CVR-ALM
FFPT4-CVR-BLK
FFPT4-CVR-GRY
FFPT4-CVR-BGE
FFPT4-CVR-BRN

Solid Brass, Brushed Finish
Solid Aluminum, Brushed Finish
Aluminum with Black Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Gray Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Beige Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Brown Powder-Coat Finish

4
4
4
4
4
4

See page A-179 to view typical brushed metal and powder coat colors and finishes.

A-180

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄4" Conduit
for power

3

1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FFPT3 Series
Poke Through
When feeding large bundles of communications cables through a fire-rated
floor, the FFPT3 Series provides a high-capacity, straight-through wiring
solution. It can also be used for power wiring.

•	Capacity: Concentric 11⁄4" and 2" hub for power
or communications wiring (plugs included)
•	Core Drill Size: 3"
•	Solid brass and aluminum finishes provide
superior aesthetics and durability
•	Powder-coated aluminum covers are available in black,
gray, brown and beige to match any décor — the most
colors in the industry
•	Junction box not included
7 3⁄4"

Cat. No.

Description

FFPT3-BRS

FFPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Brass Cover
FFPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brushed-Aluminum Cover
FFPT3 Series Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Black Powder-Coat Cover
FFPT3 Series Poke-Through Base Unit Only:
Cover Purchased Separately (see Below)

FFPT3-ALM
FFPT3-BLK
FFPT3

Std.
CTN.

1
1

Hub Layout — Cover

Cable Entry

7"

1
1

2" & 11⁄4"
Concentric
Threaded Hub

2" Conduit

Poke-Through Covers
Cat. No.

Description

FFPT3-CVR-BRS
FFPT3-CVR-ALM
FFPT3-CVR-BLK
FFPT3-CVR-GRY
FFPT3-CVR-BGE
FFPT3-CVR-BRN

Solid Brass, Brushed Finish
Solid Aluminum, Brushed Finish
Aluminum with Black Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Gray Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Beige Powder-Coat Finish
Aluminum with Brown Po­­wder-Coat Finish

Std.
CTN.

4
4
4
4
4
4

See page A-179 to view typical brushed metal and powder coat colors and finishes.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-181

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FPT Furniture Feed Series
With three conduit hubs for power and communications and an integral
junction box, the FPT Series provides a flexible, cost-effective furniture
feed solution.

•	 Capacity: (2) 1⁄2" hubs and (1) 3⁄4" hub
for power and data (plugs included)
•	 Core drill size: 3"
16"

•	 Non-metallic covers are available
in black, gray, beige and brown
•	 Provided with Steel City® die cast fittings
for flexible metal conduit: (2) 1⁄2" and (1) 3⁄4"
•	 Integral junction box features (5) 1⁄2" and
(5) 3⁄4"­­knockouts (27 cubic inch capacity)

Poke Through
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT-448-SW-BLK

FPT Furniture Feed Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Black Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Furniture Feed Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Gray Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Furniture Feed Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Beige Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Furniture Feed Poke-Through Assembly:
Base Unit with Brown Non-Metallic Cover
FPT Poke-Through Base Unit Only:
Cover Purchased Separately (see Below)

FPT-448-SW-GRY
FPT-448-SW-BGE
FPT-448-SW-BRN
FPT-400B

Cable Entry

1
1
1

Opening for
Communication
(Equivalent to
two 3⁄4" Conduits)

1

Opening for Power
(Equivalent to one 1⁄2"
Conduit)

1

Poke-Through Covers

Cat. No.

Description

Std.
CTN.

FPT-442-SW-BLK
FPT-442-SW-GRY
FPT-442-SW-BGE
FPT-442-SW-BRN

Black, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Gray, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Beige, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter
Brown, Non-Metallic, 7" Diameter

10
10
10
10

Hub Layout — Cover

See page A-179 to view typical non-metallic cover colors and finishes.

⁄4" Threaded Hub

3

⁄2" Threaded Hub

1

7" diameter

A-182

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
FPT Pedestal Series
By mounting all outlets above floor level and at a 90° angle to the floor,
the FPT Pedestal Series protects power receptacles and communications
devices from dirt and debris. An overhanging housing provides additional
protection for the outlets.

•	 Pedestals available in 2 compartment and 4 compartment
for power and communications applications
•	 Core drill size: 3"
•	 Housings and device plates feature a brushed-aluminum finish
•	 Integral junction box features (5) 1⁄2" and
(5) 3⁄4" knockouts (27 cubic inch capacity)

16"

FPT-401A

Cable Entry
Opening for Communication
(Equivalent to Two 3⁄4" Conduits)

FPT-421

Opening for Power
(Equivalent to one 1⁄2" Conduit)

Poke Through
Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT-401A

FPT Pedestal, Accepts 2 Device Plates, Poke-Through Base
Unit Purchased Separately (25⁄8" high x 4" wide x 47⁄8" deep)
FPT Pedestal, Accepts 4 Device Plates, Poke-Through Base
Unit Purchased Separately, (25⁄8" high x 4" wide x 47⁄8" deep)
FPT Poke-Through Base Unit Only

FPT-421
FPT-400B

10
5
1

Device Plates & Accessories
Cat. No.

Description

FPT-424
FPT-425
OPOD4-WH

Duplex Device Plate, Aluminum with Anodized Finish
Blank Device Plate, Aluminum with Anodized Finish
4-Port “106” Duplex Adapter for Keystone Jacks
(for use with FPT-424 plate)
Voltage Divider for FPT-401A Pedestal
Voltage Divider for FPT-421 Pedestal
Adapter for Conduit Stub Ups

FPT-408A
FPT-422A
FPT-416

www.tnb.com

Std.
CTN.

50
50
100
10
10
50

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

OPOD4-WH

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-183

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
City of Chicago Approved Base Units
FPT4 Poke Through

FPT3 Poke Through

•	 Covers purchased separately, see page A-179

•	 Covers purchased separately,
see page A-179

•	 All base units include appropriate communications
conduit hub

•	 Includes (1) 20A duplex
receptacle, pre-wired

•	 All base units include appropriate Keystone Communications
Device Plate and Category 5e Keystone Data Jacks, see
page A-140 for additional device plates

(Cover
purchased
separately)

•	 Includes (2) CAT5e data jacks
•	 Power junction box not included —
use City of Chicago approved box

•	 Power junction box not included — use City of Chicago
approved box

•	See page A-178 for additional
details on FPT3 Series

•	See page A-174 for additional
details on FPT4 Series

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

FPT3-2P-2C-C

FPT3 Poke-Through Base Unit Only, (1) 20A Duplex
Receptacle, (2) Communications Devices

1

FFPT4 Poke Through
•	 Covers purchased separately,
see page A-180
•	 Power junction box not included —
use City of Chicago approved box
•	See page A-180 for additional
details on FFPT4 Series

(Cover
purchased
separately)

(Cover purchased separately)

Description

FPT4-4P-4C-C

FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only,
(4) 20A Power Receptacles,
(4) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only,
(2) 20A Power Receptacles,
(6) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only,
(8) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only, 20A/125V
Twist Lock Receptacle, NEMA L5-20R
(2) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only, 20A/250V
Twist Lock Receptacle, NEMA L6-20R
(2) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only, 30A/125V
Twist Lock Receptacle, NEMA L5-30R
(2) Communications Devices
FPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only, 30A/250V
Twist Lock Receptacle, NEMA L6-30R
(2) Communications Devices

FPT4-2P-6C-C

FPT4-8C-C
FPT4-1TL21-2C-C

FPT4-1TL22-2C-C

FPT4-1TL31-2C-C

FPT4-1TL32-2C-C

A-184

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1

1

Description

FFPT4-C

FFPT4 Poke-Through Base Unit Only

1

FFPT3 Poke Through

1

•	 Covers purchased separately,
see page A-181

1

•	 Power junction box not included —
use City of Chicago approved box

1

Std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

•	See page A-181 for additional
details on FFPT3 Series

(Cover
purchased
separately)

1

1

Cat. No.

Description

FFPT3

FFPT3 Poke-Through Base Unit Only

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Std.
CTN.

1

Fire Rating and Concrete Thickness Min./Max. (All Series)

•	For use in 1-, 11⁄2- and 2-hour rated floors
•	 1-hour rated floor

Maximum Allowable Copper Cross-Sectional Area for
Communications Cabling — Furniture Feed PokeThrough Systems.

•	 FFPT4 Series:

	 – 2 1⁄4" minimum concrete over steel decking
	 – 3" minimum concrete for reinforced slab

	– 3⁄4" Hub for Power: .08192 sq. in.
	 – 11⁄4" Hub for Communications: .07168 sq. in.
•	 FFPT3 Series:
	 – 2" Hub for Power or Communications: .1024 sq. in.

	 – 7 1⁄2" maximum concrete thickness
•	 2-hour rated floor
	 – 3 1⁄4" minimum concrete over steel decking
	 – 4" minimum concrete for reinforced slab

Materials:

•	 FPT4 Series:

	 – 7 1⁄2" maximum concrete thickness

	– Covers: Solid brass or aluminum

FPT4 Series

	– Conduit Hubs: Cast iron

FPT3 Series

	– Base: Die-cast zinc, galvanized steel & intumescent
fire-stop material

Compartment B
(Left)

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Poke Through Systems
Flush Power and Communications Poke Through Systems­

	– Junction box: Galvanized steel
•	 FPT3 Series:

Compartment
B (Left) Compartment A
(Center)

Compartment B
(Right)

Compartment A
(Center)

Compartment B
(Right)

	– Base: Die-cast zinc, galvanized steel & intumescent
fire-stop material

Maximum Allowable Copper Cross-Sectional Area
for Communications Cabling
Poke-Through
Series

Compartment B
(Left)

Compartment A
(Center)

Compartment B
(Right)

Power
Power
.01536 sq. in.
Power
.00321 sq. in.

.01630 sq. in
.01630 sq. in.
.01630 sq. in.
Power
Power

Power
.01536 sq. in.
.01536 sq. in.
.01536 sq. in.
.00321 sq. in.

FPT4-4P-4C
FPT4-2P-6C
FPT4-8C
FPT4-1TL-2C
FPT3-2P-2C

	– Covers: Solid brass or aluminum

	– Junction box: Galvanized steel
•	 FPT Flush/Furniture Feed/Pedestal Series:
	– Covers: Solid brass or aluminum,
non-metallic — polycarbonate
	– Base: Phenolic, galvanized steel & intumescent
fire-stop material
	– Junction box: Galvanized steel
•	 FFPT4 Series:
	– Covers: Solid brass or aluminum

Cross-Sectional Area for Common Copper Conductors

24 AWG
22 AWG
14 AWG
12 AWG
10 AWG
8 AWG

.00032 sq.in.
.00050 sq. in.
.00323 sq. in.
.00512 sq. in.
.00615 sq. in.
.01296 sq. in.

	– Base: Die-cast zinc, galvanized steel & intumescent
fire-stop material
	– Junction box: Galvanized steel
•	 FFPT3 Series:
	– Covers: Solid brass or aluminum

Solid or stranded wires.

	– Base: Die-cast zinc, galvanized steel & intumescent
fire-stop material

RPT Series
The RPT Series has been superceded by the FPT4 Series:

Installation Spacing:

RPT Series

FPT4 Series

•	 Minimum of 2-ft. on center

RPT-4P-2RJ
RPT-2P-4RJ
RPT-6RJ

FPT4-4P-4C
FPT4-2P-6C
FPT4-8C

•	 Not more than one poke through per
65 sq. ft. of floor area in each span

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-185

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules

Durable, Solid Steel Covers Support Heavy
Loads to Protect Important Connections.

Steel City ® Access Floor Modules from Thomas & Betts eliminate the
clutter of power, voice and data lines by keeping everything out of sight
but conveniently close at hand. Our easy-to-install Access Floor Modules
are designed to blend with any decor, while providing the durability
and versatility you need to meet the growing demands of today’s
high-tech offices.
You can use our Access Floor Modules with virtually any type of raised floor.
Our ­system is designed to provide a s­ imple, strong and ­adaptable solution
to even the most demanding wire-management needs.

We’ve reinforced the resilient nylon covers of our modules with a 5⁄32" steel
plate to prevent buckling under heavy furniture and equipment. The beveled
sides enable quick and unobstructed installation in the raised floor.

Range of Box Sizes Designed to Meet the
Needs of any Appli­cation. Now and Later.
With five sizes to choose from, our Access Floor Modules handle a broad
range of wiring needs, from single power lines to complex data and voice
systems. In fact, our largest unit offers 325 cu. in. of space, making it the
roomiest in the industry. And, because our modules are easy to install and
relocate, you can easily change box sizes or reposition modules as office
­configurations change.

New, Low-Profile Box Fits Right In
with Shallower Raised Floors.
For installations where shallower raised floors are ­needed, Thomas & Betts
has ­developed a low-profile Access Floor Module to provide the same
accessibility and convenience where space is at a premium. Just
21⁄2-inches deep, it can still accommodate ­a variety of power, voice
and data connections.

Wide Variety of Interchangeable Power and
Data Panels Adapt to Changing Demands.
Our extensive line of panels and connection devices maximizes the
versatility of our Access Floor Modules. All our panels are designed to
be easy to connect, disconnect and rearrange to reduce on-site installation
time. And Thomas & Betts is continually developing new configurations
to meet the requirements of virtually any installation, especially for the
fast-growing needs of voice and data communication.

A-186

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

In addition, our retractable exit not only helps prevent tripping, but protects
cable connections by ­sealing out dust and debris. And, as with all Thomas &
Betts products, our Access Floor Modules are c­ onstructed to meet your high
­standards for durability, safety and reliability.

Steel City Access Floor Modules
Provide Outstanding Performance
Without Standing Out.
®

The hinged service top on our modules sits flush with the floor and provides
complete access to the connections within. The nylon frame comes in gray,
brown, beige and black.
Our Access Floor Modules keep wire connections close at hand but not
under foot. The widest variety of box sizes, panels and devices in the industry
provides exceptional versatility for changing office needs.
Look below the surface and see how Steel City® Access Floor Modules can
manage all your power, voice and data connections — today and tomorrow.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Access Floor Modules

AFM Panels

Power

AFM-2-BLK
GRY
BRN
BGE

AFP-2A*
Single Duplex

Data Panel

AFP-2B
Blank

Accessories

AFT-2
Power Tunnel
AFR-2**
Mounting Flange

AFD-2 3RJ
3 T&B Omnijacks
or Keystone-Style Jacks
* (1) supplied with box.

** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

AFM-2 Series Access Floor Module — Non-Metallic Covers

Polycarbonate Carpet Flange & Cover w/ 5⁄32" Steel Plate
Retractable Exit with Dust Seal

Access Floor Module Size

AFM-2

AFM depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device compartment volume — 45° Power
Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

4"
71⁄8" x 41⁄8"
63⁄4" x 37⁄8"
17 sq. in.
75 cu in.
16.2 cu in.
—
AFP-2A
—
Polycarbonate
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
2

AFP-2 Series
Device Panel

4"
*1.46"

4-Gauge Galvanized Steel Box
7 1⁄8"

8 1⁄8"

* Special panels available — consult factory.

5 1⁄8"

** Devices not included.
Available with black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.
Replacement covers: see 664 series covers on page A-131.

AFM-2
Shown with supplied power panel
and optional panel (sold separately).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-187

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-2 Series Access Floor Module — Metallic Covers

4"

AFM-2 Access Floor Module
Access Floor Module Size

AFM depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device
compartment
volume
Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

AFM-2

4"
71⁄8" x 41⁄8"
63⁄4" x 37⁄8"
17 sq. in.
75 cu in.

71⁄8"

16.2 cu in.
—
AFP-2A
—
Brass, Aluminum
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
2

* Special panels available — consult factory.
** See previous page for device plates and accessories.

41⁄8"

Replacement covers: see 664 Series covers on page A-131.

AFM-2 Series Raised Floor Boxes
Std.
Ctn.

CAT. NO.

Description

AFM-2-BRS
AFM-2-ALM

AFM-2 Raised Floor Box, 2 Compartment, Solid Brass Cover
AFM-2 Raised Floor Box, 2 Compartment, Solid Aluminum Cover

1
1

For additional device plate options see previous page.

A-188

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Power Panels
AFM-4-BLK
GRY
BRN
BGE
AFP-4A*
Single Duplex–45°

AFP-4B
Blank–45°
* (1) supplied with box.

AFP-4A60
Single Duplex–60°

AFP-4GFCI
Single GFCI–60°

AFP-4B60
Blank–60°

AFP-4-GFCI-45
Single GFCI–45°

** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.

Accessories

Data Panels

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-4 Series Access Floor Module — Non-Metallic Covers

Retractable Exit with Dust Seal
Polycarbonate Carpet Flange and Cover with 5⁄32" Steel Plate

4"

45˚ AFP4/6 Series
Device Panel

AFD-4/6 Series Device Panel

AFD-4A
Single Duplex Data

60˚ AFP4/6 Series
Device
Panel

*1.50"
1.47"

AFD-4B
Blank

AFT-46
Power Tunnel

AFT-4
Mounting Flange

AFD-4 4RJ
Keystone
Style Jacks

AFC-N
Grommeted
Closure Panel

AFM-4EX
Extension Collar

* (1) supplied with box.
** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.

14-Gauge Galvanized Steel Box
7 ⁄16"
15

Access Floor Module Size

AFM Depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device
compartment
volume
Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

AFM-4

4"
7 ⁄16" x 715⁄16"
75⁄8" x 75⁄8"
39 sq. in.
150 cu in.
27.3 cu in.
25.2 cu in.
20.6 cu in.
2" x 27⁄8"
AFP-4A
AFC-C
Polycarbonate
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
3
15

45° power
60° power
Center data

Shown with Supplied
Power Panel and 0ptional
Data Panel and 45°
Power Panel
(sold separately).

45° Angle Plates

Shown with Optional
60° Panels (sold
separately).

* Special panels available — consult factory.
** Devices not included.
Available with black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.

60° Angle Plates

Replacement covers: see 665 Series covers on page A-135.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-189

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-4 Series Access Floor Module —
Metallic Covers

Access Floor Module Size

AFM-4

AFM Depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device compartment volume

4"
715⁄16" x 715⁄16"
75⁄8" x 75⁄8"
39 sq. in.
150 cu in.
27.3 cu in.
25.2 cu in.
20.6 cu in.
2" x 27⁄8"
AFP-4A
AFC-C
Brass, Aluminum
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
3

Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

41⁄4"

7 15⁄16"

* Special panels available — consult factory.
** Devices not included.
See previous page for device plates and accessories.
Replacement covers: see 665 Series covers on page A-135.

AFM-4 Series Raised Floor Boxes
Description

AFM-4-BRS

AFM-4 Raised Floor Box, 3 Compartment,
Solid Brass Cover
AFM-4 Raised Floor Box, 3 Compartment,
Solid Brass Cover with Recess
AFM-4 Raised Floor Box, 3 Compartment,
Solid Aluminum Cover
AFM-4 Raised Floor Box, 3 Compartment,
Solid Aluminum Cover with Recess

AFM-4-BRS-R
AFM-4-ALM
AFM-4-ALM-R

A-190

std.
Ctn.

CAT. NO.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1
1
7 15⁄16"

1
1

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Power Panels

AFM
AFM-6-BLK
GRY
BRN
BGE

AFP-6Q*
Double Duplex–45°

AFP-6B
Single Duplex–60°

AFP-6A
Single Duplex–45°

AFP-6B60
Blank–45°

AFP-6R60
Double Duplex–60°

AFP-6-GFCI-45
Single GFCI–60°

AFP-6A60
Single Duplex–60°

AFP-6-GFCI-45
Double GFCI–60°

Accessories

Data Panels

Access Floor Module Size

AFM Depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device compartment volume

AFM-6

45° power
60° power
Center data

Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

4
715⁄16" x 10"
75⁄8" x 93⁄4"
60 sq. in.
225 cu. in.
41.5 cu. in.
38.3 cu. in.
31.3 cu. in.
2" x 27⁄8"
AFP-6Q
AFC-C
Polycarbonate
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
3

AFD-4A
Double Duplex Data

AFD-6 4RJ
T&B Omni jacks or
Keystone style jacks
* (1) supplied with box.

AFT-46
Power Tunnel

AFR-6
Mounting Flange

AFD-6A
Single Duplex

AFC-N
Grommeted
Closure Panel

AFM-6EX
Extension Collar

** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.

Retractable Exit with Dust Seal
Polycarbonate Carpet Flange and Cover with 5⁄32" Steel Plate

4"

* Special panels available — consult factory.
* Devices not included.

AFD-6B
Blank

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-6 Series Access
Floor Module

AFD-4/6 Series Device Panel
45° AFP4/6 Series
Device Panel

60° AFP4/6 Series
Device
Panel

*1.50"

Available with black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.
Replacement cover: AFM-6-CST-SW black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE)
or gray (-GRY) cover flange.
File No. E2969

1.47"
14-Gauge Galvanized Steel Box
7 15⁄16"

File No. L12798

45° Angle Plates
Shown with Supplied
Power Panel and Optional
Data Panel and 45° Power
Panel (sold separately).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

60° Angle Plates
Shown with Optional
60° Panels
(sold separately).

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-191

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-6S2 Series Access
Floor Module
AFM
AFM-6S-BLK
GRY
BRN
BGE

Power Panels

AFP-6S2-R (-L)
Single Duplex
(R-right side; L-Left Side)

AFP-6S2-GR (-GL)
Single GFCI

AFP-6S2-BR (-BL)
Blank

Accessories

Data Panels

Retractable Exit
with Dust Seal

Polycarbonate Carpet Flange and Cover w/ ⁄32" Steel Plate

2 1⁄2"

AFP-6S2/AFD-6S2 Series
Device Panels

AFD-6S2-2RJ
T&B Omni jacks or Keystone style jacks

5

AFR-6**
Mounting Flange

AFD-6S2-B
Blank
* (1) AFP-6S2-R & (1) AFP-6S2-L supplied with box.

*1.75"

** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.
14-Gauge Galvanized Steel Box

Replacement cover: AFM-6-CST-SW black (-BLK), brown (-BRN),
beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.

11"

Access Floor Module Size

AFM depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device compartment volume
Base opening
Power panel included**
Wire tunnel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

11"

AFM-6S

21⁄2"
715⁄16" x 10"
75⁄8" x 93⁄4"
60 sq. in.
172 cu. in.
Power
13.1 cu. in.
Data
6.6 cu. in.
––
AFP-6S2-L, AFP-6S2-R
––
Polycarbonate
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
4

9"

* Special panels available — consult factory.
** Devices not included.
Available with black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.

AFM-6S2
Shown with supplied power panels and optional data panels (sold separately).

Replacement cover: AFM-6-CST-SW black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE)
or gray (-GRY) cover flange.
File No. E2969

A-192

File No. L12798

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Power Panels

AFM
AFM-8-BLK
GRY
BRN
BGE

AFP-8G*
Single GFCI

AFP-8A
Single Duplex

AFP-8B
Blank

Accessories

Data Panels

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
AFM-8 Series Access
Floor Module

AFD-8-3RJ
AFR-8**
Keystone
Mounting Flange
* Power panels include a voltage partition for use between power and data panels.
** Used to correct opening in floor. Not required for all installations.

Access Floor Module Size
AFM Depth
Access floor cut-out
AFM cover size
AFM cover access area
Box volume (less panels)
Device compartment volume

AFM-6

55⁄8"
95⁄8" x 95⁄8"
93⁄8" x 93⁄8"
74 sq. in.
325 cu in.

Retractable Exit
with Dust Seal
Polycarbonate Carpet Flange & Cover w/ 5/32" Steel Plate

AFP/AFD-8 Series
Device Panels

5 5⁄8"

*+2"

45° power
60° power
Power or Data

15.75 cu in.
—
—
—
Polycarbonate
14-ga. galvanized steel
Yes*
10

Base opening
Power panel included**
Closure panel included
Cover/carpet flange material
Body material
Prewiring available
Max. no. of device panels

14-Gauge Galvanized Steel Box
9 5⁄8"

3
⁄4"
Concentric
KO’s

10 5⁄8"

* Special panels available — consult factory.
Available with black (-BLK), brown (-BRN), beige (-BGE) or gray (-GRY) cover flange.
Replacement covers: see 667 Series covers on page A-139.
File No. E2969

10 5⁄8"

File No. L12798

AFM-8
Shown with Optional Power Panels (sold separately).
Accepts 10 device panels.
Each compartment can accept voltage dividers for any combination of power and data
(included with device panels).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-193

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
Because a Square Peg Doesn’t Fit in a Round Hole!
AFM-4R Series
Access Floor Module
In response to industry demand for a more symmetrical
approach to raised-floor power and data access,
Thomas & Betts introduces the latest addition to
the Steel City ® Access Floor Module (AFM) line.
The AFM-4R features a round construction that
matches the aesthetics of air diffusers commonly
used in raised-floor applications.

AFM-4R-BLK

Air Diffuser

10 1⁄2"

•	 Round design enables the box to be installed in the same
size hole as standard air diffusers — eliminates the need
for multiple raised-floor tiles with custom-sized cutouts
(and round holes are faster and easier to cut than square/
rectangular ones)
•	 Three-compartment stamped-steel box with voltage
dividers accommodates both power and data outlets
⁄16"

7

•	 Durable black polycarbonate cover features two cable-entry
lids that lock in the open position to prevent cable damage
•	 Optional power tunnel links outside power compartments
to feed both compartments with a single conduit — while
still allowing for communications wiring in the center

6"

2 3⁄4"

•	 Two thumbscrews secure AFM-4R firmly in place,
but remove easily for reconfiguration
•	 Fits into holes ranging from 81⁄4" to 83⁄4" in diameter

8"

2.44"

•	 Outside compartments: 21 cu. in. capacity, 3⁄4" KO on side,
1
⁄2" KO on each end, 1⁄2" KO and 3⁄4" KO on bottom
•	 Center compartment: 40 cu. in. capacity, 11⁄4" KO on each
end, two removable access plates with 3⁄4" KO on bottom

Cat. No.

std.
Ctn.

Description

Access Floor Module
AFM-4R-BLK
Three Compartment Round Access Floor Module
with Black Cover, (1) AFP-4R-A Duplex Panel
Panels for Outside Compartments­
AFP-4R-A
Duplex Panel for Outside Compartment
AFP-4R-GFCI
GFCI Panel for Outside Compartment
AFP-4R-B
Blank Panel for Outside Compartment
Panels for Center Compartment
AFD-4R-A
Duplex Panel for Center Compartment
AFD-4R-GFCI
GFCI Panel for Center Compartment
AFD-4R-6RJ
Data Panel for 6 Keystone Jacks for Center Compartment
AFD-4R-B
Blank Panel for Center Compartment
Accessories/Replacement Parts
AFT-2
Optional Power Tunnel to Link Outside Compartments
AFM-4R-CST-BLK Replacement Cover and Mounting Ring, Black

A-194

4.75"

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1

AFP-4R-A

AFP-4R-GFCI

1.97"

.78"

1
1
1

.59"
6.88"

1
1
1
1
1
1

AFP-4R-B

AFD-4R-A

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

AFD-4R-GFCI

AFD-4R-6RJ

www.tnb.com

AFD-4R-B

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
Concrete Inserts
C

B

A
GAB-4 with AFM-4

GAB-4

9.8
9.8
5.9
GAB-8-S

GAB-8-S with AFM-8

14.8
16.4

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

maximum capacity standard conduit
(CU. IN.)
Tapping

a

b

c

GAB-4

41⁄4

9

16

150

GAB-6

41⁄4

9

16

225

GAB-8-S

57⁄8

93⁄4

163⁄8

325

2–3⁄4"
2–11⁄4"
2–3⁄4"
2–11⁄4"
2–3⁄4"
2–11⁄4"

maximum conduit
Tapping

afm
Insert

std.
Ctn.

11⁄2"

AFM-4

1

11⁄2"

AFM-6

1

—

AFM-8

1

*Required for installation in concrete pours only.
For use with the AFM insert. The GAB cast Pre-Set includes center collar and styrene insert to prevent concrete ingress. Standard conduit hubs are 3⁄ 4" and 1 1⁄ 4".
Specify either -4 or -6.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-195

Boxes & Covers — Steel City® Floor Boxes

Access Floor Modules
Standard Specification — GAB Series Access
Floor Box Pre-Set Insert
Considerations when writing specification:
The installation of access floor box pre-set inserts must be in compliance with the National Electrical
Code®. These specifications may be used in three sections of the Construction Specification
Institute (C.S.I.) format: 16132 Floor Boxes; 16141 Wiring Devices; and 16741 Telephone Raceway
Systems. For accuracy, 16132 is preferred.
Part 2: Products

2.03.2 Activation Unit

2.01 Pre-Set Insert

A.	 Following sizes shall match pre-set insert opening as shown on drawings:

A.	Shall be GAB Multiple Service Floor Outlet Assembly as manufactured by
Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN, (trade name, Steel City) consisting of:

	

1. 8 " x 8" nominal size steel box (Ref.: Steel City AFM-4).
Provides a minimum interior capacity of 150 cubic inches.

	

1. Pre-set insert, Series GAB.

	

	

2. Activating unit, Series AFM-4 and AFM-6.

2. 8 " x 10" nominal size steel box (Ref.: Steel City AFM-6).
Provides a minimum interior capacity of 225 cubic inches.

B.	Call for approved suppliers of power and cable systems.

B.	 Device panels may be data or telephone as shown on drawings.

2.02 Materials

C.	If two duplex power receptacles are required on a single panel, the pre-set
insert and activation unit shall be Steel City GAB-6 and AFM-6 respectively.

A.	Cast-iron components to be gray iron per ASTM Specification A48,
Class 20A.

D.	Data panels shall be designed to mount the data connectors and telephone
connectors as shown on the drawings.

B.	Cast-iron components shall be protected with a painted coating
as specified in UL 514A.

E.	 Cover shall be (gray, brown, black or beige) as specified on the drawings.

C.	Steel components to be fabricated from cold rolled steel, .070 inch minimum
thickness, conforming to ASTM A366.

	

1. Shall accept floor covering material as required.

	

2. Shall be self-leveling when installed.

D.	Steel components to have an electrogalvanized zinc finish conforming to
ASTM A386. Sheet metal steel fabrications shall be made of UL approved
component G-90-U material.

F.	Cover, when closed, shall protect exiting cables and cords from abuse
and abrasion by retractable cable exits. Cover shall install flush with floor
and be 180° reversible.

E.	Non-metallic components shall be glass-filled polymide nylon, UL recognized
component QMFZ2.

G.	Carpet edge shall be protected from fraying by a carpet trim ring
of a matching color.

2.03 General Design Gab Series

Part 3: Execution

A.	The GAB series shall consist of pre-set insert, activation unit and cover for
the distribution of electrical power and data/communication signal systems.

3.01 General

2.03.1 Pre-Set Insert

A.	All pre-set inserts shown on the drawings shall be installed
with the specified runs of conduit.

A.	 Following sizes as shown on the drawings:

B.	Wire-pulling cords shall be in place in the conduit prior to pouring concrete.

	

1. 8" x 8" nominal concrete opening (Ref.: Steel City GAB-4).

	

2. 8" x 10" nominal concrete opening (Ref.: Steel City GAB-6).

C.	Activate only the pre-set inserts as directed by the supervising engineer
or owner.

B.	 Overall size: 8" x 14" x 43⁄16" high.
C.	 Shall be installed with conduit sizes as shown on the drawings.
(Note: Standard 3⁄4" conduit thread on power side, in and out. Standard 11⁄4"
conduit thread on data side, in and out. Special drilling and tapping up to 11⁄2"
conduit size. Reducing bushings may be used to downsize conduit.)

D.	Install and activate the assembly as directed by the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

D.	Conduits for power shall enter and leave in-line and on same side
so as to maintain separation of services.
E.	 Foam blocks shall exclude concrete from the interior.

A-196

	

1. F oam blocks shall permit a minimum of 11⁄4" of concrete over
opening prior to activation.

	

2. Foam blocks shall be manufactured for the intended purpose.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Carlon
Floor Boxes
®

Carlon® Floor Boxes
Residential Floor Boxes — Adjust-A-Box®.................. A-198–A-199
Residential Floor Boxes — Drop In............................. A-200–A-202
Rectangular Floor Boxes............................................. A-203–A-205
Round Floor Boxes...................................................... A-206–A-208
Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle................................................ A-209
Retractable Work Surface Receptacle.................................... A-210

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Residential Floor Boxes — Adjust-A-Box
Adjust-A-Box 1- and 2-Gang
Adjustable Residential Floor Boxes

®

®

Carlon® Adjust-A-Box ® Floor Boxes make installing floor outlets fast and
easy by providing maximum installation flexibility. The box features an
adjustment screw designed to adjust the box from 0" to 13⁄4" by simply
turning the screw clockwise or counterclockwise, providing a flushmount
every time.
Covers are available in three types: non-metallic, brass and stainless steel.
They feature two hinged doors to protect unused devices and to keep out
dust and scrubwater. Because the doors are attached, they won’t get lost or
misplaced while the outlet is in use.
The Adjust-A-Box ® is available in two sizes, single-gang and double-gang.
The single-gang box has a 20 cubic inch capacity and includes a duplex
receptacle, and the double-gang box has a 34 cubic inch capacity, and
comes with a divider for dual-voltage capabilities.
Carlon Adjust-A-Box Residential Floor Boxes are ideal for residential and
home office applications and provide a clean, aesthetically pleasing floor
outlet anywhere you need it.
®

®

Double-Gang
*Devices not included

Features:
•	Listed floor boxes in accordance to section
314.27(B) of the NEC®
•	Adjustment screw adjusts depth (from 0" to 13⁄4")
•	Cover options include: non-metallic,
brass and stainless-steel covers
•	 Covers have two (non-removable) hinged doors
•	Solid brushed-brass and stainless-steel covers with
a light lacquer finish for extra protection
•	Non-metallic covers are available in white and ivory
(single-gang box only)

Single-Gang

•	Two-gang version features dual-service capabilities
(requires use of dual-service divider)
•	Integral cable clamps
•	Ideal for new work and retrofit applications
•	UL® Listed
•	UL® scrubwater tested
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-198

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Residential Floor Boxes — Adjust-A-Box

®

®

1

Kits include:

2

Install
clip over
subfloor.

3

Screw in
to adjust
to height
of flooring
or carpet.

Beautiful
flush fit
every
time!

Single-Gang

Double-Gang

Ivory/White Cover:
•	 Two (2) 6-32 x 1 flat head machine screws

•	 One (1) New Work Bracket

•	 Four (4) #6 11⁄4 self-tapping flat head screws
•	 Two (2) #6 15⁄8 drywall screws

•	 One (1) 34 cubic in. UL Listed
Floor Box

•	 One (1) cover plug

•	 One (1) Dual-Voltage Divider

•	 One (1) New Work Bracket

•	 One (1) UL Listed Floor Cover

•	 One (1) Old Work Bracket

•	 Four (4) #6-32 x 1" flat head
machine screws

•	 One (1) Old Work Bracket

•	 One (1) 20 cubic in. UL Listed Floor Box

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Adjust-A-Box Installation
1- and 2-Gang

•	 Four (4) #6 x 11⁄4" flat head
self-tapping screws

•	 One (1) UL Listed Floor Cover

•	 Two (2) #6 x 15⁄8" square drive
trim head screws

•	 One (1) short shank receptacle (tamper proof)
•	 One (1) tube Dow Corning #4 sealant

•	 Green ground wire

•	 Installation instructions

•	 Installation instructions

Brass & Stainless Steel Covers:
•	 Two (2) 6-32 x 1 plated flat head machine screws
•	 Four (4) #6 11⁄4 self-tapping flat head screws
•	 Two (2) #6 15⁄8 drywall screws
•	 One (1) New Work Bracket
*Devices not included

•	 One (1) Old Work Bracket
•	 One (1) 20 cubic in. UL Listed Floor Box
•	 One (1) UL Listed Floor Cover
•	 One (1) short shank receptacle
•	 Green ground wire
•	 Installation instructions
CAT. No.
Non-Metallic
B121BFRW
B121BFBR
Brass
B121BFBB
B234BFBB
Stainless Steel
B121Bfss
B234BFSS

E11461

Size

cover

cubic in.

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

One-Gang
One-Gang

White
Ivory

20
20

8
8

7.1
6.9

One-Gang
Two-Gang

Brass
Brass

20
34

8
4

15.0
10.7

One-Gang
Two-Gang

Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel

20
34

8
4

13.7
9.8

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-199

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Residential Floor Boxes — Drop In
Carlon Structured Cable Management
Systems… Your Total Systems Solution!
Low-Voltage Adjustable Floor
Bracket with Cover
®

The Carlon® Low-Voltage Adjustable Floor Bracket is specifically designed for the low-voltage, structured
cabling market…the floor bracket is industry-standard orange to identify low-voltage applications, the
open design provides the space needed for low-voltage bend-radius requirements and the Leviton
QuickPort ® Quad 106® Insert provides up to four low-voltage outlet ports. The Carlon® Low-Voltage
Adjustable Floor Bracket is ideal for any residential or commercial low-voltage application.
The floor bracket also features a unique screw design, enabling it to be adjusted to most finished floor
heights by simply turning the screw clockwise or counterclockwise and adjusting flush to the floor.
The floor bracket kit comes complete with a non-metallic (white or ivory) or brass cover, a Leviton
QuickPort ® Quad 106 ® Insert, new work and old work metal mounting brackets and mounting screws.

•	 White, ivory or brass cover
•	 Orange — identifies low-voltage installations
•	 Open design floor bracket — accommodates low-voltage bend-radius requirements
•	 Adjustable screw — bracket adjusts to most finished floor depths
•	 Leviton QuickPort ® Quad 106® insert — install up to 4 low-voltage inserts
•	 Two-door design
•	 cUL–US Listed

Installation

Install clip over subfloor.

Beautiful flush fit every time!

Screw in to adjust to height of flooring or carpet.

E216492

CAT. No.
sc100fbwc
sc100fbvc
sc100fbbc

A-200

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cover

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Non-Metallic — White
Non-Metallic — Ivory
Brass

8
8
8

5.62
5.62
13.78

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Residential Floor Boxes — Drop In
Drop-In Floor Box
The Carlon® Drop-In Floor Box with Brass Cover combines many of the
same features of our existing Floor Box line with the strength, durability
and style necessary to accommodate today’s residential electrical/
telecommunication needs.
The Carlon® Drop-In Floor Box is the fastest, easiest way for
contractors to put a floor socket anywhere they need it! It’s designed
to accommodate high- and low-voltage applications and comes
complete with everything needed for installation — floor box,
brass cover, hole saw, wired receptacle, two-hole low-voltage
plate, blank plate, mounting screws and wire nuts.
Note: The Drop-In Floor Box is available with or without a hole saw.

Features:
•	Single hole installation

•	For wood floor installations

•	Fast, easy installation

•	Ideal for residential and home offices

•	Cover options include: Brass and Aluminum

•	Eliminates the need for extension cords

•	Accommodates high- and low-voltage applications

•	Superior aesthetics — ideal for home offices
and entertainment rooms

•	Includes single-gang grounded receptacle, low-voltage
telephone/cable plate (data jacks not included) and
blank plate for custom installations
•	 Tamper-resistant receptacle

•	cUL–US Listed floor box in accordance with section
314.27(B) of the NEC®
•	2.25" installation hole diameter

•	Available with or without a hole saw

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

•	11.8 inch cubic capacity

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-201

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Residential Floor Boxes — Drop In
Drop-In Floor Box Installation:
NOTE: TURN POWER OFF BEFORE INSTALLATION.

1

Cut 23⁄8" hole through carpeting before
using hole saw.

2

Drill hole in floor using hole saw.

3

Pull romex through floor.

4

Connect receptacle wires to romex.
Be sure to match wire color(s).

5

Secure wire clamp on bottom of tube.

6

Brass cover snaps into place. Use a small
screwdriver to pry open brass cover to
plug in appliance.

8

 emove receptacle by pressing three
R
tabs located on side of tube. Remove
receptacle by pressing three tabs
located on side of tube.

One of the three
latch holes on
floor box tube.

7

Align the three latches on the low-voltage
plate with the three latch holes in the
round floor box tube.

Installed:

E11461

CAT. No.
E971FBDI-2
E971FBDIB-2
E971FADI-2
E971FADIB-2

A-202

Cover

description

Brass
Brass
Aluminum
Aluminum

Drop-In Floor Box with Hole Saw
Drop-In Floor Box without Hole Saw
Drop-In Floor Box with Hole Saw
Drop-In Floor Box without Hole Saw

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

5
20
5
20

6.5
17.6
5.1
12.0

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Rectangular Floor Boxes
1-, 2- and 3-Gang
Rectangular Floor Box
Carlon® Rectangular Floor Box Systems — three-way power, data
and communications plus easy double- or triple-ganging, too.
Compared to metal boxes, Carlon® rectangular floor boxes cost less
and install faster to save you money on every job. Three-in-one power,
data and communications capability cuts installation time and cost
even more, while simple two- and three-gang modularity gives you the
flexibility, installation ease and cost-savings no other non-metallic boxes
can match. The covers attach without the use of fasteners, providing a
professional, clean installation as well as preserving the aesthetic life
of the product. Take a closer look at all that our rectangular floor box
systems offer you.

Features:
•	 Covers require no adjusting collar — two screws ensure
a flush, secure installation

•	 Convenient cubic inch capacity markings on inside
enable easy inspection

•	 Non-metallic PVC construction, watertight gasket and
corrosion-resistant hardware ensure long life and reliable
performance, even in harsh and/or corrosive environments

•	 PVC-molded ports and reducer plugs included

•	 One consistent box depth simplifies ordering time
and reduces inventory

•	 Rectangular sides are drillable

•	 Saves time and money on installations with
simple saw cut to floor level

•	 Cover options include solid brass, stainless steel
and non-metallic (brown, slate and caramel)

•	 Concrete tight and suitable for any on-grade/
below-grade application; concrete or wood
subfloor construction approved

•	UL® scrubwater tested, approved for all types
of finish flooring

www.tnb.com

•	Accepts 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" conduit, tubing or raceway
•	 For tile and carpet applications

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-203

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Rectangular Floor Boxes
Gangable Rectangular Floor Box
Installation:
With our rectangular boxes, one SKU is all you ever need. Simply remove
appropriate sides and slide boxes together to create two- or three-gang
boxes for on-the-job flexibility no competitor offers.

E11461

Cat. no.

material

size

E976RFB

PVC

1-Gang

Internal
Volume
(cu. in.)

min.
concrete
depth

hubs
(In.)

97.4
(16.8 per inch
of depth)

31⁄2

(2) 1

reducer
plugs
(In.)

(2) 1 x 3⁄4
(2) 3⁄4 x 1⁄2

std.
ctn.

std.
wt. (lbs.)

3

6.92

6.00" 6.00"

5.50"
7.46"

Activation Kit
Activation kit provides components to accommodate all standard power, data and communications devices,
plus a divider to separate power from data and communications — all in a single SKU. Device yokes can be
adjusted to store excess cord in the box.

A-204

Cat. no.

material

std.
ctn.

std.
wt. (lbs.)

E976ak2

PVC

3

2.47

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

3.25"

Rectangular Floor Boxes
On-the-job flexibility extends to our rectangular box covers. Each one-, two- or three-gang
cover is suitable for any wiring application and can be used with any floor surface. Nonmetallic covers are even field-reversible for tile or carpet. Double-door feature enables
easy access to the device and helps keep stray cords organized.
Carlon ® Rectangular Floor Box Covers do not require a separate
carpet flange. The carpet flange is part of the cover and may
be removed for tile application.

Features:
•	 Double-door design

•	 High-impact resistant
thermoplastic

•	 For tile and carpet applications

•	 Field reversible for tile or carpet

•	 UL scrubwater tested

•	 Gasketed for a watertight seal

E11461

cat. no.
E9761B
E9762B
E9763B
E9761C
E9762C
E9763C
E9761S
E9762S
E9763S

size

color

carpet flange

dimensions (w x L) (In.)

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

One-Gang
Two-Gang
Three-Gang
One-Gang
Two-Gang
Three-Gang
One-Gang
Two-Gang
Three-Gang

Brown
Brown
Brown
Caramel
Caramel
Caramel
Slate
Slate
Slate

Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included

7.13 x 5.00
7.13 x 8.25
7.13 x 11.50
7.13 x 5.00
7.13 x 8.25
7.13 x 11.50
7.13 x 5.00
7.13 x 8.25
7.13 x 11.50

3
9
6
3
9
6
3
9
6

1.7
8.5
7.5
1.7
8.5
7.5
1.7
8.5
7.5

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

1-, 2- and 3-Gang Non-Metallic
Floor Box Covers

1-, 2- and 3-Gang Solid Brass and
Stainless Steel Floor Box Covers
Carlon® Brass and Stainless Steel Rectangular Floor Box Covers add
a classic touch to all floor box installations, and are particularly suited
for use in high-traffic areas because of the resistance to wear. The
gasket gives a watertight seal, and the light lacquer finish provides
extra protection.
Features:
•	 Rugged construction
•	 Coated with a light lacquer
finish for extra protection
•	 Covers include a cord door
•	 Gasketed for watertight
applications

One-Gang

•	 Accepts single, duplex, GFCI
and low-voltage receptacles

Two-Gang

•	 For tile and carpet
applications
•	 UL scrubwater tested
Three-Gang

cat. no.
E9761Br
E9762Br
E9763Br
E9761ss
E9762ss
E9763ss
Rectangular Floor Box Activation Kit
E976Ak2

E11461

size

color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

One-Gang
Two-Gang
Three-Gang
One-Gang
Two-Gang
Three-Gang

Brass
Brass
Brass
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel

3
3
3
3
3
3

6.8
9.9
12.1
7.4
11.6
17.2

—

—

3

1.3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-205

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Round Floor Boxes
Three-way versatility for power,
data and communications.
Carlon Round Floor
Box Systems
®

Carlon® round floor boxes give you the same cost-saving advantages
over metal boxes as our rectangular boxes. By combining power, data
and communications in the same box, you can dramatically reduce
your installation time and cost compared to other non-metallic boxes.
In addition, multi-use covers mean fewer SKUs to deal with and greater
jobsite flexibility to increase your savings further. Take a closer look
at all their advantages.

Features:
•	 Non-metallic PVC construction, watertight gasket and
corrosion-resistant hardware ensure long life and reliable
performance, even in harsh and/or corrosive environments

•	 Concrete tight and suitable for any on-grade/below-grade
application; concrete or wood floor construction approved
•	 Y-connector (E972Y) enables you to feed parallel runs
of 3⁄4" conduit or to feed in/out from the same side for
increased wiring flexibility and faster installation

•	 Covers are available for a variety of applications
•	 The same box depth simplifies ordering and
reduces inventory

•	 PVC-molded ports and reducer plugs included

•	 For tile and carpet applications

•	Accepts 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" conduit, tubing or raceway

•	 Cover options include: Brass, Stainless Steel and
Non-Metallic (Ivory, Caramel, Taupe, Slate and Brown)

•	 UL scrubwater tested, approved for all types
of finish flooring

Round Floor Box
Carlon® Round Floor Boxes enable various thicknesses of concrete pours. Trim
out is easy — just use a handsaw to cut off box at desired height to accommodate
carpet, tile or other flooring. Carlon® leveling ring guarantees a level top every time,
even if the box is tipped slightly during the pouring process.
E11461

Cat. no.
E971FB

Internal Volume
(cu. in.)

90.0
(15.5 per inch of depth)

min.
Concrete
depth (In.)

Hubs
(In.)

31⁄2

(2) 1 and (2) 3⁄4

reducer
plugs
(In.)

(2) 1 x 3⁄4 and
(2) 3⁄4 x 1⁄2

6.11"

std.
ctn.

std. wt.
(lbs.)

10

15.6

5.03"

Ø.25"
4.00"
6.44"

6.00"

4.00"

A-206

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Non-Metallic Covers
for Round Floor Boxes

Multi-Service Divider Kit

E11461

Features:

The Multi-Service Divider Kit for separate
power, data and communications
compartments provides unbeatable
flexibility and money-saving installation
speed.

•	 High impact-resistant thermoplastic
•	 Compatible with standard NEMA Duplex and 11⁄4" NPS receptacles
•	 Drill points ( 3⁄8") provided for low-voltage cable pass throughs

For use with non-metallic boxes only.

•	11⁄4" NPS plugs may be modified to accept smaller fittings
( 3⁄8", 1⁄2" and 3⁄4")
•	 For tile and carpet applications
•	 UL scrubwater tested, approved for all types of finish flooring
E11461

CAT. No.

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

10

3

E973K

Caramel

Slate

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Round Floor Boxes
Accessories

Ivory

⁄4" Y Fitting

3

The 3⁄4" Y Fitting provides for in-andout service from a single 1" port,
and provides two 3⁄4" parallel conduit
runs to adapt into a single-conduit
body port.

Taupe

Brown

E11461

CAT. No.
E972Y

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

10

2.1

Reducer Plugs

Duplex Covers

E11461

CAT. No.
E971C
E971D

size (In.)

⁄4 x ⁄2
1 x 3⁄4

3

1

std. ctn.

100
100

Std. wt. (lbs.)

2.1
3.2

cat. no.

color

description

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

E97DSI
E97DSC
E97DST
E97DSS
E97DSB

Ivory
Caramel
Taupe
Slate
Brown

Duplex Cover
Dulpex Cover
Duplex Cover
Duplex Cover
Duplex Cover

10
10
10
10
10

5.2
5.7
5.7
5.6
5.8

11⁄4" NPS Covers
cat. no.

color

description

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

E97SSRB
E97SSRC
E97SSRS

Brown
Caramel
Slate

NPS Cover
NPS Cover
NPS Cover

10
10
10

3.8
3.8
3.8

Clear Cover Carpet Ring

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

CAT. No.

color

std. ctn.

Std. wt. (lbs.)

E97Ccr

Clear

10

1.2

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-207

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Round Floor Boxes
Brass and Stainless Steel
Covers for Round Floor Boxes

E11461

Features:

•	 Screws concealed under doors

•	 Available in four styles —
Single Door, Two Door,
NPS Opening and Two-Door
Dual Service

•	 Rugged construction
•	 Coated with a light lacquer
finish for extra protection

•	 For tile and carpet applications

•	Resistance to wear — suited
for high-traffic areas

•	 UL scrubwater tested

•	 Gasketed for watertight
applications

Two-Door Dual Service (Divider Kit included)
Cat. NO.

Cover

E97BR2D
E97SS2D

Devices

Brass
Duplex and Two Data Ports
Stainless Steel Duplex and Two Data Ports

std.
ctn.

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

5
5

9.2
9.1

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

Two Door
Cat. NO.

Cover

Devices

std.
ctn.

E97BR2
E97SS2

Brass
Stainless Steel

Duplex
Duplex

5
5

7
7.7

Cover

Devices

std.
ctn.

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

Brass
Stainless Steel

GFCI and Duplex
GFCI and Duplex

5
5

7
7.9

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

Single Door
Cat. NO.
E97BR
E97SS

NPS Opening
Cat. NO.

Cover

Devices

std.
ctn.

E97BRg
E97SSg

Brass
Stainless Steel

11⁄4" Outlet and Single Receptacle
11⁄4" Outlet and Single Receptacle

5
5

7.5
8.1

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

9.2

Metal Cover Adapter Ring
Cat. NO.

Devices

std.
ctn.

E97aBR2

One-Piece Metal Cover Adapter

5

Note: Carlon ® metal cover adapter ring (E97ABR2) is required with these covers (sold seperately).

A-208

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle
Concealed receptacle provides a safe
and aesthetic solution for countertop power.

NEW!

Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle
Now you can provide power for small appliances on kitchen island counter
tops safely and conveniently with the new Carlon® Recessed Pop-Up
Receptacle. When not in use, the receptacle remains concealed beneath the
counter, showing only a stylish nickel, bronze or brass cover. Simply press
down slightly on the cover to release the latch, and the Recessed Pop-Up
Receptacle rises, revealing a duplex GFCI outlet. The Pop-Up Receptacle
can also be mounted in bath counters or other work surfaces.
In addition to promoting safety by eliminating hanging power cords
and providing a tamper-resistant GFCI receptacle, the Recessed Pop-Up
Receptacle also includes gaskets under the flange and around the main body
to prevent spilled liquids from entering the electrical enclosure, regardless of
whether the receptacle is open or closed. The Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle
is the first device to pass the new UL® Spill Test developed specifically for
receptacles of this type.

Features
•	 Provides a duplex GFCI outlet in a kitchen island
or peninsula counter for easy access to power
for small appliances

4 3⁄4"

TopSurface
Surface
Top
of
ofCounter
Counter

1
66½"
⁄2"

•	 Eliminates the potential safety hazard of power
cords hanging over the edge of counters to reach
side-mounted outlets
•	 Meets new UL® and NEC® requirements for receptacles
mounted in kitchen counters
•	 Receptacle remains recessed below counter when
not in use

15"
15"

5 ft. MC cable
whip with 6"
leads

•	 To access outlet, simply press down on cover
and the receptacle pops up
•	 Cover available in three finishes to match any kitchen
décor — nickel, oil-rubbed bronze or brass
•	 Ideal countertop power solution for kitchens, baths
and other work surfaces

3 11⁄16"

.................................... Specifications....................................
Cover Size: 43⁄4" diameter
Mounting Hole: 33⁄4" Diameter
Outlet: (1) duplex tamper-resistant
GFCI receptacle — 15A, 125VAC,
60Hz, 20A Feed-Through

MC Cable Whip: 12/2 with ground
wire, 5' long with 6" leads
Listings/Compliances:
– UL® 943
– CSA C22.2 No. 144.1
– NEC® Article 210.52(C)(5)
– NEC® Article 406.5(E)

description

KPR-15G-NKL
KPR-15G-BRZ
KPR-15G-BRS

NEC is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

cat. no.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle with
Duplex GFCI and Nickel Finish Cover
Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle with
Duplex GFCI and Oil-Rubbed Bronze Finish Cover
Recessed Pop-Up Receptacle with
Duplex GFCI and Brass Finish Cover

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

std. pkg.
qty.

1
1
1

A-209

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Floor Boxes

Retractable Work Surface Receptacle
Concealed receptacle provides safe
and convenient desktop power.
Retractable Work Surface Receptacle

NEW!
Integral grip makes
it easy to pull up the
receptacle

With the variety of electronics and powered devices today, convenient power
outlets in the home and office are critical. While phone chargers, laptops,
appliances and other devices are typically located on work surfaces, outlets
are often located underneath the work surface, along the wall or on the
floor. Repeatedly accessing these outlets is an inconvenience and poses
safety hazards.

Black non-metallic
cover complements
most home or office
décor

The new Carlon® Retractable Work Surface Receptacle provides a
convenient outlet right where you need it. A hole saw is included that
attaches to your power drill to quickly mount the receptacle in a counter,
desk or similar work surface. A 6-ft. cord connects to an existing wall or
floor outlet, so no wiring is required. Simply pull up the receptacle’s cover
to raise the unit above the work surface and plug in a device. When not
in use, push the cover down to store the receptacle below the work surface.
The non-metallic cover is black to complement most home or office decor.

Unique rotated
receptacle orientation
accommodates
oversized power
adapters

•	 Provides easy access to a power outlet —
simply pull up the receptacle to plug in a device
•	 6-ft. cord plugs into an existing floor or wall outlet

Locking
collar secures
assembly to the
surface

•	 Receptacle remains hidden below work
surface when not in use
•	 Compact design occupies minimal space
both when recessed and while in use
•	 Rotated receptacle orientation accommodates
oversized power adapters
•	 Hole saw included
•	 cULus Listed, File Number E340129
(per UL® 962A, Furniture Power Distribution Units)

6-ft. standard corded plug
connects to existing floor
or wall outlet

Cat. No.
RWSR

A-210

Description

Std. Pkg. Qty.

Recessed Pull-Up Receptacle, Black, 6 ft. cord with three-prong plug

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Red•Dot
Weatherproof
Boxes & Covers
®

Red•Dot ® Weatherproof Boxes & Covers
Overview................................................................................ A-212
Weatherproof Metallic Covers......................................A-213–A-220
Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers...............................A-221–A-229
Weatherproof Metallic Boxes ......................................A-230–A-235
Weatherproof Non-Metallic Fixtures and Boxes............A-235–A-237
Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders.............................A-238–A-242
Weatherproof Non-Metallic Lampholders.....................A-243–A-244
Outdoor Lighting..........................................................A-245–A-258
Vaportight Lighting......................................................A-259–A-263
Swimming Pool and Spa Products........................................... A-264

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Overview
Weatherproof Boxes, Covers
and Lighting Products
The industry’s preferred choice for more than 50 years — Red•Dot ®
Weatherproof Boxes and Covers withstand the harshest elements
and ensure trouble-free installation and performance.

Boxes

Lighting

Red•Dot ® boxes are made from durable
die-cast aluminum and available in singleand double-gang rectangular as well as
round configurations — with a variety
of hub sizes to meet all needs.

Red•Dot ® has a complete lighting package
for both general purpose outdoor lighting as
well as decorative garden lights. All lighting
products run off line voltage, providing
more flexibility and brighter lighting than
low-voltage or solar-powered sets, plus no
additional transformers are required.

While-in-Use

D-PAK®

Red•Dot ® offers a wide variety of both
metallic and non-metallic while-in-use
covers. All of these covers help ensure
that you meet the requirements of the
National Electrical Code®.

With a descriptive, easy-to-read label and
display-ready packaging, the display packs
make it quick and easy to put Red•Dot ®
out for customers to see.

Covers

Merchandisers

Red•Dot ® die-cast flip-lid weatherproof
covers protect any outdoor receptacle from
the elements. Constructed from rugged
die-cast zinc, these covers will last a
lifetime. A full line of non-metallic covers
is also available.

With your choice of various stock displays
or a customized display to fit your needs,
Red•Dot ® makes it easy to increase your
counter sales.

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-212

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

Code Keeper
Weatherproof Covers
®

Code Keeper ® While-In-Use Applications
Weatherproof Covers are required by the National Electrical Code®
anyplace where water may come in contact with electrical outlets
when a plug is in use. Code Keeper ® covers are also ideal anywhere
to prevent accidental disconnects, reduce tampering and to provide
a lockable cover that meets OSHA requirements.

Suggested Applications:
Residential — holiday and
landscape lighting, wells and
sump pumps, sprinkler systems,
plug-in timers, garages, patios.

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Wet or Dry, All Outlets Can Go Undercover with Code Keeper

Commercial — vending machines,
car washes, outdoor signs, restaurant
kitchens, greenhouses and nurseries,
marinas, garages, lumberyards.

Industrial — manufacturing areas,
food processing, water treatment
plants, security cameras, laboratories,
washdown areas, loading docks.

The electrical code is the reason you need a wet-location cover, but the
reasons to buy Code Keeper ® covers are simple: aluminum construction,
easy installation with instructions in English, Spanish and French and
a lifetime warranty from a manufacturer that has defined reliability
in electrical construction materials for more than half of a century.
Cover the code with protection that lasts a lifetime with Code Keeper ® covers.
The National Electrical Code® requires you to cover outdoor or other wetlocation receptacles any time they are in use to ensure the safety of anyone
who may come in contact with them.

Recreational — pools and spas,
parks, playgrounds, zoos, RV
connections, athletic fields, ball
parks, stadiums, outdoor stages,
amphitheaters, golf courses.

Code Keeper ® covers are corrosion-resistant, aluminum wet-location covers
that meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code® and are backed
by a lifetime warranty.
Red•Dot ® Code Keeper ® wet-location cover is NEMA 3R Rated, UL Listed
and CSA Certified and meets all the requirements of NEC® Section 406.9(B).
Code Keeper ® covers are rugged, corrosion-resistant metal construction that
provide long-lasting durability and are not subject to cracking or breaking.
Made with the same Red•Dot ® quality that contractors know and trust,
Code Keeper ® covers offer a lifetime of use and safety.

National Electrical Code® Section 406.9(B):
(1) 15- and 20-Ampere, 125- and 250-Volt receptacles installed
outdoors in a wet location shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof
whether or not the attachment plug cap is inserted.

www.tnb.com

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-213

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Code Keeper Metallic While-In-Use Covers

Cover

Plate

Applications:
•	Protects receptacles, switches and plugs for single-gang
and two-gang configurations in dry and wet locations

FS Mount

•	Provides a lockable cover that complies with OSHA lockout/
tagout requirements
•	Prevents accidental equipment disconnects, reduces
tampering and deters theft and equipment removal
Device Mount

Features/Benefits:
•	Alloy A360 copper-free* aluminum provides increased
corrosion resistance

Padlock Eye
for 1⁄4" Shackle

•	 Die-cast, metal construction provides long-lasting durability
•	NEMA 3R Rating ensures protection against falling rain,
sleet and external ice formation when used with appropriate
device boxes
•	 Clear UL® and CSA markings speed approval by inspectors
•	Wide range of cover depths and receptacle configurations
accommodate almost every common plug and cord size
when combined with included adapter plates

Sample Specifications:
•	Code Keeper ® covers shall comply with NEC® Section
406.9(B) and be die-cast copper-free* aluminum alloy
A360. Covers shall be finished powder-coated paint.
	 Red•Dot ® Catalog No. _______________
*Less than .004 copper content.

All 15- and 20-Ampere, 125- and 250-Volt receptacles installed outdoors
in a wet location must have an enclosure that is weatherproof whether or
not the attachment plug is inserted.

•	Combination box or device mounting design provides
flexibility in installation
•	Trilingual instructions help to make installation easy
for everyone

Code-Keeper ® is required by the National Electrical Code® Section 406.9(B)
for unattended in-use plugs in wet locations.

Standard Materials:
•	Covers and Plates: Die-cast aluminum alloy A360
with less than .004 copper content (copper-free)

	 •	 Die-cast A360 aluminum alloy
	 (less than .004% copper content)
	 •	 NEMA 3R Rating

•	 Gaskets: Closed-cell foam

	 •	 Clear UL® and CSA markings

Standard Finish:
•	 Powder-coated finish

	 •	 Wide range of cover depths and
	 receptacle configurations

Compliances:
•	NEC® Section 406.9(B)

	 •	 Sturdy lockable cover tab complies
	 with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements

•	UL® Listed

	 •	 Combination box- or device-mount
	 design (for most styles)

•	 CSA Certified
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

Single-Gang
Medium Horizontal

A-214

Hinge

®

Single-Gang
Small Vertical

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

	 •	 Powder-coated finish
	 •	 “Extra-Duty” per NEC® Section 406.9(B)(1)

Single-Gang
Medium Vertical

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Single-Gang
Large Vertical

www.tnb.com

Two-Gang

“Extra-Duty” per NEC ®
Section 406.9(B)(1)

®

CKSUV — Small Vertical Cover, 21⁄4" Internal Depth

Use for any of these configurations:

2 1⁄4"

2 1⁄4"

Duplex

GFCI

Single Receptacle
up to 19⁄16"

Note: Covers packed with gasket and screws.

Switch

CKMU — Medium Horizontal Cover, 31⁄4" Internal Depth
Use for any of these configurations:

3 1⁄2"

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Code Keeper Metallic WhileIn-Use Covers — Single-Gang

3 1⁄4"

Duplex

GFCI

Single Receptacle
up to 19⁄16"

Switch

Note: Covers packed with gasket and screws.

CKMUV — Medium Vertical Cover, 31⁄4" Internal Depth

Use for any of these configurations:

3 1⁄2"

3 1⁄4"

Duplex

GFCI

Single Receptacle
up to 19⁄16"

Switch

Note: Covers packed with gasket and screws.

CKLSVU — Large Vertical Cover, 43⁄4" Internal Depth
5"

4 3⁄4"

Single Receptacle
up to 2.125"

Note: Covers packed with gasket and screws.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks
of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-215

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Code Keeper
Metallic WhileIn-Use Covers —
Two-Gang
®

41⁄2"

41⁄4"

2CKU — Regular
Cover, 41⁄4"
Internal Depth

Note: Dry-tite ® covers packed with gasket and screws.
* Can be used to cover one receptacle with an oversized wall opening.

Use for any of these configurations:

Two-duplex receptacle cover

Single up to 13⁄8"
and GFCI receptacle cover

Two-GFCI receptacle cover

Toggle and GFCI
receptacle cover

Duplex and GFCI
receptacle cover

Toggle and duplex
receptacle cover

Two-single up to 13⁄8"
receptacle cover

Toggle and single up to 13⁄8"
receptacle cover

“Extra-Duty” per NEC ®
Section 406.9(B)(1)
Single up to 13⁄8"
and duplex receptacle cover

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-216

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

NEW!

New Red•Dot ® Universal Flip-Lid Weatherproof Covers save you time and
money by reducing the number of items you have to inventory to complete a
job. Capable of mounting either vertically or horizontally, the covers provide
added versatility with innovative adapter plates to support all of the most
common installation configurations — 12 with the single-gang cover and 25
with the 2-gang cover. Choose from silver, bronze or white covers.

Features:
•	 Included adapter plates offer 12 installation options
with single-gang cover and 25 installation options
with 2-gang cover
•	 Keyhole openings on back enable easy installation
on an existing outlet
•	 Durable, die-cast zinc-alloy construction

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Universal Design Installs in Both Horizontal
and Vertical Applications.
Universal Flip-Lid Weatherproof Cover

•	 Suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed
•	 Available in silver, bronze and white
•	 Lockable for security when not in use
•	 Easy access to outlet with 130° opening
•	 Preconfigured for GFCI — the industry’s most common
outdoor application

Accommodates Multiple Outlet Configurations
(receptacles not included)

GFCI

Duplex

Single Receptacle

Switch

std.
CTN.

Cat. No.

Description

CCU
DCCU
DCCU-BR
DCCU-WH
2CCU
2CCU-BR
2CCU-WH

Single-Gang Cover (installs vertically or horizontally) — Silver
D-PAK® — Single-Gang Cover, Silver
D-PAK® — Single-Gang Cover, Bronze
D-PAK® — Single-Gang Cover, White
2-Gang Cover — Silver
2-Gang Cover — Bronze
2-Gang Cover — White

www.tnb.com

Includes Two Adapter Plates,
Single Receptacle up to 19/16"

50
25
25
25
10
10
10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-217

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Single-Gang Device Covers
Cat. No.

CCD

CCDV

CCG

CCGV

Color

Cat. No.

Description

Duplex Receptacle Cover, Horizontal
CCD
Silver
Device Mount
CCD-L
Silver
Device Mount with Lock Option
CCD-FS
Silver
Box Mount
WR81-CN
Natural
Cover, Stay-Open Lid
WRH80-C
Gray
Cover, Self-Closing Lids
D-PAK ®
DCCD-P
Silver
Non-Metallic Device Mount
DCCD
Silver
Device Mount
DCCD-BR
Bronze
Device Mount
DCCD-WH
White
Device Mount
DCCDSO
Silver
Device Mount, Stay Open
DCCDSO-BR Bronze
Device Mount, Stay Open
DCCDSO-WH White
Device Mount, Stay Open
Duplex Receptacle Cover, Vertical
CCDV
Silver
Device Mount
CCDV-L
Silver
Device Mount with Lock Option
D-PAK ®
DCCDV
Silver
Device Mount
DCCDV-BR
Bronze
Device Mount
DCCDV-WH
White
Device Mount
GFCI Receptacle Cover, Horizontal
CCG
Silver
Device Mount
CCG-FS
Silver
Box Mount
D-PAK ®
DCCG
Silver
Device Mount
DCCG-BR
Bronze
Device Mount
DCCG-WH
White
Device Mount
GFCI Receptacle Cover, Vertical
CCGV
Silver
Device Mount
CCGV-L
Silver
Device Mount with Lock Option
D-PAK ®
DCCGV
Silver
Device Mount
DCCGV-BR
Bronze
Device Mount
DCCGV-WH
White
Device Mount

CCS

CCSV

CCSV-TL

CCMB

Color

Note: Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.

SW1

Silver

SW2

Silver

SW20-1/710 Silver

SW20-2
CCT-1

Description

Single Receptacle Cover, Horizontal —
1.485" Diameter Opening
CCS
Silver
Device Mount
Single Receptacle Cover, Vertical —
1.59"/2.156" Diameter Opening
CCSV
Silver
Device Mount
CCSV-L
Silver
Device Mount with Lock Option
CCPO
Silver
Power Outlet Cover with 2.156"
Diameter Opening, Box Mount
CCPO-L
Silver
Box Mount with Lock Option
Single Receptacle Cover, Vertical — 1.59" Opening
CCSV-TL
Silver
Device Mount Integral Locking Hasp
Motor Base Plug and Cover, Horizontal
CCMB
Silver
Device Mount 15A, 125V
Motor Base Plug
Switch Cover Only
CCT
Silver
Device Mount Switch Cover Only,
Packed with Spacers and Screws
Switch Cover with Switch
CCT-1
Silver
Single-Pole 15A, 125V
CCT-1-20
Silver
Single-Pole 20A, 120-277V
CCT-3
Silver
3-Way Switch 15A, 125V

Silver

SW20-2/710 Silver

One-Gang Cover with 10A, 125V
Single-Pole Switch
One-Gang Cover with 10A, 125V
Double-Pole Switch
One-Gang Cover with 20A,
102/277V Single-Pole Switch
(special oil- and gas-resistant
gasket)
One-Gang Cover with 20A,
102/277V Double-Pole Switch
One-Gang Cover with 20A,
102/277V Double-Pole Switch
(special oil- and gas-resistant
gasket)

UL Listed E-18407.
Note: All covers packed with gasket and screws.

CSA Certified LR-18685.

Single-Gang Gaskets
Cat. No.
CCK
CCSK

A-218

Color

Description

Black
Black

Neoprene
Neoprene

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Metallic Covers
Cat. No.
Two-Duplex Receptacle Cover
2CCD
2CCD-L
WR281-CBR
WR281-C-WH
Two-GFCI Receptacle Cover
2CCG

One Duplex and One GFCI Receptacle Cover
2CCDG

Cat. No.

Description

Device Mount
Device Mount with
Lock Option
Cover, Self-Closing Lids
Cover, Self-Closing Lids
Device Mount

Switch and One Duplex Receptacle Cover
2CCTD
2CCTD-1

Description

Cover Only, Packed
with Spacers
Cover with One Switch
Single-Pole 15A, 125V
and One Duplex
Receptacle and Spacers

Switch and One GFCI Receptacle Cover
2CCTG

Device Mount

Device Mount Cover
Only with Spacers

Note: Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.
All covers packed with gasket and screws.

Two-Single Receptacle Cover — 1.485" Diameter Opening
2CCS
Device Mount
2CCS-L
Device Mount with Lock
Option
One Single Receptacle and One Duplex Receptacle Cover —
1.485" Diameter Opening
2CCSD
Device Mount

Double Switch Cover

2CCT-1

www.tnb.com

Blank Covers
Cat. No.

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

CCB
CCB-FS

Silver
Silver

Device Mount
Box Mount

D-PAK ®
DCCB
DCCB-BR
DCCB-WH

Silver
Bronze
White

Device Mount
Device Mount
Device Mount

2CCB
2CCB-FS
D-PAK ®
D2CCB

Silver
Silver

Device Mount
Box Mount

Silver

Device Mount

3CCB

Silver

Box Mount

Single-Gang

Single Receptacle and One GFCI Receptacle Cover —
1.485" Diameter Opening
2CCSG
Device Mount
2CCSG-L
Device Mount
with Lock Option
WR74-81-C
Cover, Self-Closing Lids,
Opening Diameter

2CCT

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Two-Gang Device Covers

Cover Only, Packed
with Spacers
Cover with Two
Single-Pole 15A, 125V
Switches and Spacers

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Two-Gang

Three-Gang

Note: Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.
All covers packed with gasket and screws.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-219

Single-Gang Covers

2 13⁄16"

2 27⁄32"

4 9⁄16"

2 3⁄8"
CCD

CCDV & CCGV

1.485 dia.

CCS

CCT

2 13⁄16"

2 13⁄16"

17⁄8"

3 9⁄32"

1.555
dia.

1.485 dia.
CCSV

CCB

3 1⁄4"

2 3⁄8"

4 9⁄16"

2 3⁄8"

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"

3 9⁄32"

CCG

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"

2 13⁄16"

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"
313⁄16"

3 9⁄32"
2 3⁄8"

2 13⁄16"

2 27⁄32"

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Covers

CCMB

Typical FS Mount
Hole Pattern

Two- and Three-Gang Covers
4 5⁄8"

2CCB

4 5⁄8"

3 9⁄32"
2 3⁄8"

3 3⁄4"

2CCTG-FS

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

3 11⁄16"

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

2CCS

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"

2CCT

4 5⁄8"

3CCB

4 5⁄8"

3 11⁄16"
2CCD & 2CCG

4 9⁄16"
2 3⁄8"

3 9⁄32"

3 9⁄32"
2 3⁄8"

2CCTD

3 3⁄4"

A-220

5 5⁄8"

113⁄16"

2CCSD & 2CCSG

4 9⁄16"

4 5⁄8"

1.485 dia.

6 3⁄8"

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"

4 9⁄16"
2 3⁄8"

4 5⁄8"

3 1⁄4"

1.485 dia.

Typical FS Mount
Hole Pattern

www.tnb.com

®

The Code Keeper® Universal Recessed Box and Cover finally solves the
problem of needing a while-in-use cover, but not wanting to have a bulky
cover on the outside of your home or building. The universal design means
that the cover will accommodate a GFCI, duplex, switch or single receptacle
up to 9⁄16", making it the perfect choice for all outdoor outlets.

NEW!

•	 Horizontal or vertical orientation
•	 Easily install in new work and old work applications
•	 Meets NEC® 406.9(B) code requirements
•	 Lockable cover design for added security using
external locking device*
•	 Accommodates GFCI, duplex, toggle switch and
single receptacles up to 9⁄16" when combined with
included inserts**

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Code Keeper Universal Non-Metallic
Recessed Box and Cover

•	 High-impact UV-resistant polycarbonate cover
•	 All installation screws included

Cat. No.

Description

CKRU-G8
CKRU-WH8
CKRU-8

Gray Box with a Gray Cover, Bulk Packaging
White Box with a White Cover, Bulk Packaging
Gray Box with a Clear Cover, Bulk Packing

Std.
Ctn.

8
8
8

UL Listed, File No. E11461.
CSA Certified.
* External locking device (such as a padlock) not supplied.
** Cover fits GFCI, the industry’s most commonly used receptacle, without the use of inserts.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-221

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Red•Dot Non-Metallic Weatherproof Covers
®

•	 UV resistant — suitable for outdoor use
•	 Fits all standard receptacles
•	Non-metallic/noncorrosive
•	UL® Marine Listed
•	 CSA Certified

Snap-off lids for
easy access to top
screw holes

Paintable surface with textured
finish to hide scratches

Polycarbonate material
for extra strength
and durability
Box or device mount

Installation

E42728

•	 Includes base, cover, gasket and mounting screws
Box Mounting:
1. TURN OFF POWER.
2. Place gasket on top of outlet box.
3. Attach the device to the box.
4. Fasten cover to outlet box.
Note: These covers must be mounted in accordance with all local and NEC ®/CEC requirements.

Device Mounting:
1. TURN OFF POWER.
2. Place gasket on top of outlet box.
3. Fasten cover to outlet box.
4. To ensure a weatherproof seal, use a 1⁄4" minimum bead
of RTV-type silicone, neoprene, urethane or polyurethane
caulking between gasket and mounting surface.
Note: These covers must be mounted in accordance with all local and NEC ®/CEC requirements.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-222

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
30-Amp Receptacle

•	 For use in wet/damp locations

•	 For 30-Amp or other single receptacles under 1.750" diameter

•	 Mounts to a box or device

LR31146

•	 Non-metallic – won’t rust or fade

E42728

•	Paintable

Cat. No.

•	 Easy to install

E98G30N-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2.1

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2.1

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

5

1.1

•	 Made in the U.S.A.

Duplex Receptacle

Cat. No.
E98GDRN-CAR

Single Switch

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2

GFCI Receptacle

Cat. No.
E98SSCN-CAR

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Single-Gang — Vertical Mount

Toggle Switch

•	 Device opening dimensions: 2.63" H x 1.31" W
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
E98GFCN-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2

E98TSCN-CAR

Blank

15-Amp Receptacle

•	 Supplied with stainless steel mounting screws and gasket

•	 For 15-Amp or other single receptacles under 1.375" diameter

Cat. No.
E98SRCN-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2.1

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E980CN-CAR
E980CM-CAR

Gray
White

12
12

1.60
1.60

20-Amp Receptacle

50-Amp Receptacle

•	 For 20-Amp or other single receptacles under 1.625" diameter

•	 For 50-Amp or other single receptacles under 2.250" diameter

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E98G20N

Gray

20

4.1

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
E98G5FN-CAR

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2

A-223

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Single-Gang — Horizontal Mount
Duplex Receptacle

Cat. No.
E98DHGN-CAR

GFCI Receptacle

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

3.9

Cat. No.
E98GHGN-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

1.9

Device opening dimensions: 2.63" W x 1.31" H. 

Double-Gang
•	 For use in wet/damp locations

Two-Gang Blank

•	 Mounts to a box or device

•	 Supplied with stainless steel mounting screws and gasket

•	 Non-metallic — won’t rust or fade
•	Paintable
Cat. No.

•	Easy to install

E9802CN-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2.17

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

5

1.3

•	 Made in the U.S.A.

Double Duplex

Combination Toggle/GFI

Cat. No.
E9G2DDN-CAR

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

2.3

E9G2GTN-CAR

Combination Toggle/Duplex Receptacle

Double Toggle

A-224

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E9G2SSN

Gray

6

3.2

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
E9G2DSN-CAR

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Gray

10

1.3

®

•	NEMA Type 3R Rated
•	Meets NEC® Section 406.9(B)
and CEC Subrule 26-702

Paintable surface
with textured
finish to hide
scratches

Polycarbonate/
PVC material for
extra strength
and durability

•	 UV resistant — suitable
for outdoor use
•	 Fits all standard
receptacles
•	Non-metallic/noncorrosive
•	UL® Listed
•	CSA Certified
Raised Rib

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Red•Dot Non-Metallic Weatherproof
While-In-Use Covers

Lockable: drill
a 7⁄32" hole

Installation
•	 Includes base, cover, device plates, gasket and mounting hardware

Box Mounting:
1. TURN  OFF  POWER.

Insert Plate

2. Mount electrical device to outlet box.
3. Place gasket on top of outlet box.

Raised Rib

4. Fasten cover to outlet box.
5. Secure insert plate to cover.

Cover Assembly

6. Lockable feature — drill a 7⁄32" hole in cover
— starting point provided.

Cover Gasket

Note: These covers must be mounted in accordance with all local and NEC ®/CEC requirements.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

Device Mounts
to FS Box

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-225

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Single-Gang While-In-Use Covers

Inserts:

•	For use in wet/damp locations
•	 Weatherproof while in use
•	 Mounts to a box or device
•	 Non-metallic — won’t rust or fade

Horizontal Mount

•	Paintable

Standard Covers — 2.53" Depth

•	Easy to install

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E9UHGRN2
E9UHWRN2
E9UHCRN2

Gray
White
Clear

4
4
4

2.3
2.3
2.3

•	 Made in the U.S.A.

Inserts:

Inserts:

Vertical Mount

Vertical Mount

Standard Covers — 2.64" Depth

Deep Covers — 4.14" Depth

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

E9UVGRN2
E9UVWRN2
E9UVCRN2

Gray
White
Clear

12
12
12

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

7.2
7.2
7.2

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E9UDVGRN2
E9UDVWRN2
E9UDVCRN2

Gray
White
Clear

8
8
8

5.9
5.9
5.9

Double-Gang While-In-Use Covers

Inserts:

•	 For use in wet/damp locations
•	 Weatherproof while in use
•	 Mounts to a box or device
•	 Non-metallic — won’t rust or fade
•	Paintable
•	 Easy to install
Standard Covers — 2.64" Depth

•	 Made in the U.S.A.

A-226

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

E9U2GRN2
E9U2WRN2
E9U2CRN2

Gray
White
Clear

6
6
6

5.7
5.7
5.7

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Reinforced Design
Withstands Abuse!
NEW!
Code Keeper Universal
Non-Metallic Weatherproof
While-In-Use Covers
®

Weatherproof covers are subjected to bumps and impacts through everyday
use, but the Red•Dot ® Code Keeper ® Universal Non-Metallic While-In-Use
Cover can handle it. Its reinforced design withstands abuse. The robust new
hinge provides a sturdy cover attachment that is great for high-traffic areas.
Available in single- or two-gang configurations and standard or deep
styles, the Code Keeper ® Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover easily adapts
to different outlet configurations. Keyhole mounts make it fast and easy to
install since there is no need to remove and replace the receptacle screws
— just loosen the existing device screws and slide the cover over. Hinge
pin design allows for vertical or horizontal mounting on the single gang.

•	 Robust new hinge provides a sturdy cover attachment that
is great for high-traffic areas
•	 Available in single- or two-gang configurations and
standard or deep styles
•	 Keyhole mounts make it fast and easy to install — just
loosen the existing device screws and slide the cover over
•	 Covers come with adapter plates and pre-adhered gaskets
•	 Unique wasp guard included to keep out unwanted pests
•	 Lockable for security when not in use
Std. Pkg.
Qty.

Cat. No.

Description

CKNM-NG*
CKNMG-NG*
CKNMW-NG*
CKNM-NGD**
2CKNM-NG*
2CKNM-NGD**

Single-Gang Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, Clear
Single-Gang Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, Grey
Single-Gang Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, White
Single-Gang Deep Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, Clear
Two-Gang Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, Clear
Two-Gang Deep Non-Metallic While-In-Use Cover, Clear

12
12
12
4
4
4

* Standard covers: 2 7⁄8" overall depth.

®

** Deep covers: 4 3⁄4" overall depth.

www.tnb.com

The Next
Generation
Code Keeper !

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-227

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers
Fast and Easy Installation.
Code Keeper Universal
Non-Metallic Weatherproof
While-In-Use Covers
®

The Code Keeper® Universal While-In-Use covers keep out moisture
and take the hassle and cost out of installation. Single- or two-gang kits
accommodate up to eight configurations each, and every cover is designed
with a method to secure using an external locking device.* Perfect for all
outdoor outlets including landscape lighting, lawn equipment, pool/hot tub
pumps and holiday lighting.

•	 Saves you time — no inserts to slow you down,
no labor-intensive cutouts
•	 Horizontal or vertical orientation
•	 Meets NEC® Section 406.9(B) code requirements
•	 Lockable cover design for added security using
external locking device
•	 High-impact UV-resistant polycarbonate base construction
•	 Weatherproof, thermoplastic cover with transparent finish
•	 Accommodates GFCI, single and duplex receptacles, toggle
switches and single receptacles up to 1.59" diameter

Universal Non-Metallic While-In-Use Covers*

•	 Mounts to a box or the device — all installation
screws included

Cat. No.

Description

CKNM

Single-Gang Duplex/GFCI/Switch/Single 1.59 —
Horizontal or Vertical — Pad Lockable, 27⁄8" Deep
Two-Gang Duplex/GFCI/Switch/Single 1.59 —
Horizontal or Vertical — Pad Lockable, 27⁄8" Deep
Deep Single-Gang Duplex/GFCI/Switch/Single 1.59 —
Horizontal or Vertical — Pad Lockable, 43⁄4" Deep
Deep Two-Gang Duplex/GFCI/Switch/Single 1.59 —
Horizontal or Vertical — Pad Lockable, 43⁄4" Deep

•	 Choose your base plate and secure to the device,
then, snap on the lid and you’re done!
•	 Great for retrofit applications: Device holes are keyed,
so just back out the existing device screws and slip
the cover over previously installed screws

2CKNM
CKNMD
2CKNMD

Std.
Ctn.

6
4
4
4

UL Listed.
CSA Certified.
Cover ships as a vertical GFCI, the industry’s most commonly used version.
* External locking device (such as a padlock) not supplied.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-228

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Covers

Two-Gang (2CKNM) — Dimensions

5"

5"

5 1⁄2"

5 1⁄2"

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Single-Gang (CKNM) — Dimensions

Wet Locations

2 3⁄4"

2 3⁄8"

4"

4"

Single-Gang Base Options

1

5

2

6

5"

5"

Two-Gang Base Options

3

4*

7

8*

* 1.59" diameter fits up to 30-Amp twist-lock receptacle.

www.tnb.com

1

2*

3

4

5**

6**

7

8

* 2.125" Diameter
** 1.59" Diameter

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-229

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes
Universal Boxes and Covers
Applications:
•	 Dry-tite™ boxes and covers protect wiring devices,
switches, electronic components and terminal
blocks in dry, damp and wet locations
•	 Accessible wiring chamber provides a convenient
location to maintain or change a system,
pull conductors and make splices
•	 Junction box for branch conduits
Features/Benefits:
•	 Alloy A380 aluminum, certified zinc alloy and stainless
steel springs provide increased corrosion resistance
•	 Die-cast construction and industrial design combine
to produce a rugged protective enclosure for devices
on many applications
•	 Clean cover edges provide good gasket sealing
•	 Precision-cast and machined surfaces permit safer
wire pulling
•	 Clear UL and cubic content markings speed approval
by inspectors

Standard Finish:
•	 Powder-coated finish
Compliances:
•	UL® Listed (UL File No. E-2969)
•	 Boxes: CSA Certified with factory installed ground screw**
•	 Covers: CSA Certified
•	 Covers suitable for use in wet locations with covers closed
•	 CCB and CCT series covers suitable for use in wet locations
•	 Federal Spec. W-C-586
•	 NEMA 3R Rated
Sample Specifications:
•	 Universal device boxes and covers shall be of aluminum
alloy A380 and certified zinc alloy. All conduit stops shall
be free of rough edges. Covers shall have stainless steel
springs. Covers shall be finished with powder-coated paint.
Universal device boxes and covers shall be Red•Dot ®
Catalog No. ____________
** Consult factory for lead time and minimum quantity.

•	 Convenient mounting lugs for a variety
of mounting methods
•	 Securely fastened mounting plates reduce costly call backs

2CCTS

Standard Materials:
•	 Boxes: Die-cast aluminum alloy A380
•	 Cover Plates: Stamped aluminum alloy
or certified die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3
•	 Cover Lids: Certified die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3
2IH5-1
Securely fastened
mounting plates

Corrosionresistant metal

Stainless steel springs

Accessible wiring chamber provides a convenient
location to pull conductors and make splices in
dry, damp or wet locations.

CCD

•	 Maximum cubic capacity
•	 Securely fastened mounting
plates
•	 Corrosion-resistant materials
•	 Powder-coated finish
•	 Ground screw included
PrecisionClear marking machined threads

Clean cover edges

Ground screw

A-230

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

•	 Precision-machined threads
•	 Clear UL and cubic volume marking
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

IH3-1-LM

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes
Two-Gang

Cat. No.

Hub Size (in.)

Color

Cat. No.

Outlets

Three Outlets

Hub Size (in.)

Outlets

Three Outlets
IH3-1
IH3-2
IH3-1-LM•
IH3-2-LM•

⁄2
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

3

Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

2IH3-1•
2IH3-2•

1
1
1
3

D-PAK ®

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

1
1
1
3

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

2
1
1
4

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

2
2
1
5

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Side
Side
Back
Total

1
1
1
1
1
5

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

3
3
1
7

⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Side
Side
Back
Total

2
2
1
1
1
7

1

3

D-PAK ®

DIH3-1-LM•
DIH3-1-LM-BR•
DIH3-1-LM-WH•
DIH3-2-LM•
DIH3-3-LM

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
1
1

Silver
Bronze
White
Silver
Silver

D2IH3-1

1

2IH4-1•
2IH4-2•

1

2IH5-1•
2IH5-2•

1

⁄2

Four Outlets
3

Four Outlets
IH4-1
IH4-2
IH4-1-LM•
IH4-2-LM•

⁄2
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4

Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver

⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4

Silver
Bronze
White
Silver

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4

Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver

⁄2
⁄4

Silver
Silver

⁄2
3
⁄4

Silver
Silver

1

3

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

2
1
1
4

Five Outlets

D-PAK ®
DIH4-1-LM•
DIH4-1-LM-BR•
DIH4-1-LM-WH•
DIH4-2-LM•

1

IIH5-1
IH5-2
IH5-1-LM•
IH5-2-LM•

1

Five Outlets

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Single-Gang

3

Five Outlets (2-Side)
Top
Bottom
Back
Total

2
2
1
5

Top
Bottom
Side
Side
Back
Total

1
1
1
1
1
5

2IH5S2-1•
2IH5S2-2•

1

2IH7-1•
2IH7-2•

1

3

D-PAK ®
DIH5-1-LM•
DIH5-2-LM•

1

3

Five Outlets (2-Side)

Seven Outlets

IH5S2-1•
IH5S2-2•

1

3

Seven Outlets (2-Side)

Six Outlets (3-Side)
IH6S2-1•
IH6S2-2•

⁄2
⁄4

1

3

Silver
Silver

Top
Bottom
Side
Side
Back
Total

Note: Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® covers. Boxes supplied
with 2 closure plugs and ground screw.
• With mounting lugs

www.tnb.com

2IH7S2-1•
2IH7S2-2•

1
1
2
1
1
6

1

3

Note: Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® covers. Boxes supplied
with 2 closure plugs and ground screw.
• With mounting lugs

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-231

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes
Extensions — Single-Gang

Deep Boxes — Single- and Multi-Gang
Cat. No.

Hub Size (in.)

Cat. No.

Outlets

Hub Size (in.)

outlets

N/A

0

description

No Outlets — 1" Deep

Three Outlets
IHD3-1•
IHD3-2•
IHD3-3•

1

IHD4-1•
IHD4-2•

1

⁄2
⁄4
1

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

3

IHE

1
1
1
3

Four Outlets

Extension Ring for
One-Gang Box with
Gasket and Screws

Four Outlets — 13⁄8" Deep
⁄2
⁄4

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

3

Two-Gang Five Outlets
2IHD5-1•
2IHD5-2•
2IHD5-3•

⁄2
3
⁄4
1

IHE4-1

2
1
1
4

2
2
1
5

Top
Bottom
Back
TotaL

3
3
1
7

Three-Gang Seven Outlets

Top
Bottom
Total

Two Outlets, Flanged — 17⁄8" Deep

Add-On

IHEF2-1
IHEF2-2

Top
Bottom
Total

1

Top
Bottom
Back
Total

1/2

⁄2
3
⁄4

1

Six Outlets, Flanged — 17⁄8" Deep

3IHD7-2•
3IHD7-3•

⁄4
1

3

Color

PLG-1-RD
PLG-2-RD
PLG-3-RD

Silver
Silver
Silver

⁄2
3
⁄4

1

4-Hole Extension
Ring for One-Gang
Box with 4 Plugs,
Gasket and Screws

1
1
2

2-Hole Flanged Box
Extension Adapter
with 1 Plug Gasket
and Screws

Add-On
Top
Bottom
Side
Side
Total

2
2
1
1
6

6-Hole Flanged Box
Extension Adapter
with 4 Plugs,
Gasket and Screws

Extensions — Two-Gang

Close-Up Plugs — Zinc
Cat. No.

IHEF6S2-1
IHEF6S2-2

2
2
4

Cat. No.

Hub Size (in.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1

1

D-PAK®

Hub Size (in.)

outlets description

Deep
2IHE

N/A

0

Extension Ring for
Two-Gang Boxes with
Gasket and Screws

Extensions — Round

Cat. No.

Color

DPLG-1
DPLG-1-BR
DPLG-1-WH
DPLG-2

Silver
Bronze
White
Silver

Cat. No.

Hub Size (in.)

⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

Hub Size (in.)

Outlets Description

Four Outlets — 1 ⁄8" Deep
5

SE-47
SE-48

⁄2
⁄4

1

3

4
4

Round Extension with
Gasket and Screws

Mounting Lugs

A-232

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Cat. No.

Description

LM

2 Mounting Lugs with
Self-Tapping Screws,
for LM Boxes Only

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes
Single-Gang
Extension Rings

2 13⁄16"

2 13/16"

Single-Gang Boxes
F
3 9⁄32"
E

H B

4 9⁄16"

C

D
13⁄8"

IH
Two-Hole Flanged Box
Extension Adapter

IHE4-1

4 1⁄2"

3 1⁄2"

31⁄2"

17⁄8"

17⁄8"

⁄8"

7

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"
IHEF2 (Add-On)

Cat. No. Size
IH-1
IH-2
IH-LM-1
IH-LM-2
IH-S-1
IH-S-2
IHD-1
IHD-2
IHD-3

⁄2
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
1

3

IHE
dimensions (in.)

Hub

3 9⁄32"

1"

11⁄2"

Six-Hole Flanged Box
Extension Adapter

4 1⁄2"

4 9⁄16"

J

G
A

3 9⁄32"

3 9⁄32"

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

CI

4 ⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16

2 ⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16
213⁄16

2
2
2
2
2
2
25⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8

⁄8
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

—
—
313⁄16
313⁄16
313⁄16
313⁄16
313⁄16
313⁄16
313⁄16

—
—
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

3 ⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4

1 ⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8

1 ⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2

17.3
17.0
17.3
17.0
17.0
17.0
24.8
24.8
23.5

9

13

5
5

1

7

1

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Single-Gang Boxes

IHEF6S2 (Add-On)

Two- and Three-­Gang Boxes
Two- and Three-Gang Boxes
A
G
K
E M

J

K

L
F
2IH & 3IH

C

Two-Gang Extension Ring
4 5⁄8"
3 5⁄8"

Cat. No. A
2IH3
2IH4
2IH5
2IH5S2
2IH7
2IH7S2
2IHD5
3IHD7

49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16
49⁄16

B

45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
67⁄16

C

D

E

21⁄16 5⁄8 5
21⁄16 5⁄8 5
21⁄16 5⁄8 5
21⁄16 5⁄8 5
21⁄16 5⁄8 5
21⁄16 5⁄8 5
217⁄32 3⁄4 5
217⁄32 13⁄16 613⁄16

F

G

H

31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

317⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32
31⁄4

33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
55⁄8

J

K

— —
11⁄2 —
11⁄2 —
— —
— 11⁄2
11⁄2 —
13
⁄16 —
— 13⁄16

L

M

CI

31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4
31⁄4

39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16
39⁄16

31.8
31.8
31.8
31.8
30.3
32.0
40.3
54.8

4 5⁄8"
3 3⁄4"

D

H B

dimensions (in.)

1"

2IHE

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-233

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes
Round Boxes, Extensions and Covers
Applications:
•	 Junction for branch conduits
•	 Spacious, accessible wiring chamber provides
a convenient location to maintain or change
a system, pull conductors and make splices
Features/Benefits:
•	 Copper-free* aluminum provides increased
corrosion resistance
•	 Precision-cast and machined surfaces permit
safer wire pulling

Boxes

•	 Clean cover edges provide good gasket sealing

Five Outlets, 4 1⁄8" Diameter
S-47
Silver
S-47-CFB
Silver

•	Precision NPT threads enable trouble-free field
installation for rigid, IMC or EMT conduit
•	 Deep-slotted stainless steel cover screws
for faster installation
•	 Clear UL® and cubic content markings speed
approval by inspectors
Standard Materials:
•	 S Boxes: Die-cast aluminum alloy A380
•	 SS-B Cover: Stamped aluminum
•	 Gaskets: Composition
Standard Finish:
•	 Powder-coated finish

Cat. No.

Color

Hub Size (in.)

Description

⁄2
⁄2

5 Outlets, Cast
Ceiling Fan Box and Cover Rated
for 50 lb. Fixture or 35 lb. Fan
Mounting Lugs, 4 Closure Plugs
Ceiling Fan Box and Cover Rated
for 50 lb. Fixture or 35 lb. Fan

1
1

S-48
S-48-CFB

Silver
Silver

3

D-PAK ®
DS-47
DS-47-BR
DS-47-WH
DS-48
DS-48-BR
DS-48-WH
DS-47-B
DS-48-B

Silver
Bronze
White
Silver
Bronze
White
Silver
Silver

1

⁄4
⁄4

3

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

5 Outlets
5 Outlets
5 Outlets
5 Outlets
5 Outlets
5 Outlets
With Blank Cover
With Blank Cover

Compliances:
•	UL® Listed
•	 Federal Spec. W-C-586B
Sample Specifications:
•	 Outlet boxes and covers shall be die-cast copper-free*
aluminum alloy A380 (“S”). Outlet boxes and covers
shall be finished with powder-coated paint.
Outlet boxes and covers shall be Red•Dot ®.

41⁄2" Round Extensions

Catalog No. _______________
* Less than .004% copper content.
** S Boxes — Die-cast aluminum alloy A380.

Cat. No.

Color

Hub Size
(in.)

Description

Four Outlets, 4 1⁄8" Diameter, 1 5⁄8" Deep
1
SE-47
Silver
⁄2
4 Outlets
3
⁄4
4 Closure Plugs, Gasket and Screws
SE-48
Silver
Note: Boxes are Raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.
All covers packed with gasket and screws.

A-234

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Metallic Boxes

D

E

A

F

A

A
A

G
G

S-47
S-48

F

SE-47
SE-48

S-1
S-12

SS-B

A

A

SS-B

S-3
B

H

C

B

C

B

SJ-11

SJ-21

SJ-31
B

B

B

Dimensions (in.)
Cat. No.

Hub Size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

CI

⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
—
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
—
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄2
41⁄2
41⁄2
41⁄2

15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
3
⁄64
13⁄3
3
⁄8
11⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
1

⁄4
13⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
13⁄16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

59⁄16
—
59⁄16
59⁄16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

415⁄16
—
415⁄16
415⁄16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

31⁄8
31⁄16
31⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

11⁄4
—
11⁄4
11⁄4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

17.0
18.3
16.3
17.0
18.3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

S-47
SE-47
S-71
S-48
SE-48
SS-B
S-1
S-12
S-3
SS-B
SJ-11
SJ-21
SJ-31

1

Round Lampholder Covers

3

41⁄8"

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outlet Boxes, Extensions

Round Blank Covers

•	 Heavy-duty die-cast construction
•	 Powder-coat finish in silver gray,
bronze or white
•	 Three-hole cover is supplied
with a 1⁄2" closure plug
•	 Supplied with sealing gasket
and cover screw

Cat. No.
S-1-RD
DSS-1-BR
DSS-1-WH
Y2-PL
S-3-RD
DSS-3-BR
DSS-3-WH

SS-B

No. OF
Outlet
Holes

Finish

STD.
Ctn.

1
1
1
2
3
3
3

Silver Gray
Bronze
White
Silver Gray
Silver Gray
Bronze
White

25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Cat. No.

Y2

41⁄8" Diameter
SS-B
5" Diameter
CCRSB
CCRB
D-PAK ®
DCCRB

CCRSB

DCCRB

Color

Description

Silver

Weatherproof Cover with Gasket and Screws

White
White

Mounting Holes 23⁄4" on Center (not raintight)
Mounting Holes 31⁄2" on Center (not raintight)

White

—

Note: Boxes are raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.
All covers packed with gasket and screws.

UL Listed E-51763.
CSA Certified LR-18685.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-235

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Fixtures and Boxes
Red•Dot Non-Metallic Weatherproof Fixtures
®

•	Designed for indoor or outdoor use

⁄4" threaded
hubs

Universal
mounting
base

3

•	One-piece design with
20.25 cu. in. capacity
•	 Approved for dwelling
•	Acceptable for barn applications

Polyester material.
High-heat and
impact resistance

•	 Junction box approved
•	 Rated for 60° C field wiring with 150W
bulb and tempered glass globe

Twist-on/lock-on
socket assembly

•	 Approved for through branch wiring —
accommodates eight #12 AWG through
branch circuit conductors
•	UL® and cUL Listed
Ceramic
screw shell

•	UL® Marine Listed

Installation
•	 Includes gasket, four lug nuts and two mounting screws
Installation Instructions
1. T­ urn off electricity before starting.
2. D
­ isassemble fixture from base.
3. M
 ake wire terminations according to the NEC® or local electrical codes.
4. Fold fixture wire into fixture base.
5. Twist on socket assembly.
6. Fixture assembly is ready for lamp and globe installation.
Note: 
•	 Plastic globes mounted in a VERTICAL POSITION (globe pointing down)
can only use a maximum lamp size of 60 watts
•	 Glass globes mounted in a VERTICAL POSITION can only use a maximum
lamp size of 100 watts
•	 HORIZONTAL mountings have a maximum lamp size of 60 watts
•	 It is NOT RECOMMENDED to mount plastic globes horizontally
for incandescent applications
•	 Weatherproof Fixture Bases and Globes are SOLD SEPARATELY
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-236

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Fixtures and Boxes
•	 Suitable for use in wet/damp locations
•	 Designed for indoor or outdoor use
•	 20.25 cu. in. capacity
•	Easy to install
•	Non-metallic — won’t rust or fade

Base

•	One-piece design
•	Approved for through-branch wiring

Cat. No.

HUB SIZE
(in.)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

⁄4

6

4.5

E962E

3

Weatherproof Lighting Globes
Clear Polycarbonate

Clear Glass
Cat. No.
E960GLB (Clear Glass)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

6

6.6

Cat. No.
E960PGL (Clear Plastic)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

6

6.6

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Fixture

Weatherproof T Boxes
•	 Red•Dot ® Weatherproof T Boxes are for use with non-metallic wiring systems only
•	 Can be used with Red•Dot ® Lampholder

Single-Gang T Box

Double-Gang T Box

•	 With three ⁄2" threaded holes

•	 With three 1⁄2" and four
3
⁄4" threaded holes

1

•	 Mounting feet included

Cat. No.

COLOR

E381D-car
E381dw-car

Gray
White

•	 Mounting feet included

SIZE
(in.)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

Cat. No.

COLOR

⁄2
⁄2

10
6

2.3
3.6

E382De
E382dew

Gray
White

SIZE
(in.)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

⁄2
⁄2

10
10

1.2
1.2

1
1

SIZE
(in.)

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

⁄2
⁄2

6
6

3.6
3.6

1
1

Round T Box
•	 With five 1⁄2" threaded holes
•	 Mounting feet included

Cat. No.

COLOR

E365D-CAR
E365D-CAR

Gray
White

1
1

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-237

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders
Lampholders, Garden Lights
and Accessories
Heat-resistant
gasket

Applications:
•	Security and general outdoor lighting fixture
for residential and commercial applications

Porcelain
socket
Corrosion-resistant
metal

•	Accent lighting fixture for highlighting outdoor
signs and architectural details
•	Compact outdoor lighting fixture which can be mounted
easily in most places and can be aimed in any direction

Locking
arm

Features/Benefits:
•	Clean lines and precision manufacturing result
in a fixture which will enhance any application
•	High-quality replaceable porcelain socket with hightemperature leads enables easy field maintenance
Ground
screw

•	Positive-locking mounting arm keeps fixture
in aimed position to reduce costly call-backs
•	Ground screw boss in arm
Standard Materials:
•	Fixture: Certified die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3
•	Gasket: Heat-resistant composition
or high-temperature silicone
•	Socket: Center contact, porcelain, medium base

L-80-D

Standard Finish:
•	Powder-coated finish
•	Chrome-plated zinc
Compliances:
•	UL® Listed

L-800

•	Suitable for use in wet locations
Sample Specifications:
	Lampholders shall be certified die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3. Lampholder
will have positive-locking mounting arm and replaceable socket. Fixture
shall be Red•Dot ® Dry-Tite®.
Catalog No. _______________for use with _______________ Watt
incandescent lamp.

L-80

2L80D2

A-238

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders
Lampholders and Assemblies
Hooded Lampholders

•	 Heavy-duty die-cast zinc lampholder
•	 Corrosion-resistant aluminum hood
•	 Factory provided with a 3-wire, 8" pre-stripped lead
5 9⁄16"

WH90

7 3⁄16"

31⁄2"

Cat. No.

Description

WH90

Silver Gray, 51⁄2" Diameter Hood

•	 Current-carrying components are copper or copper-alloy
materials and sockets are porcelain

Cat. No.

Description

•	 Factory provided with a 2-wire, 8" prestripped lead

WHG-1

Weathershed Series with
Heat-Resistant Sealing Gasket
Inside Gasket and Ground Screw

⁄2" Thread

1

WH90

Std.
Ctn.

6

Universal Lampholders
•	 Heavy-duty die-cast zinc construction

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Use with Medium-Base PAR Lamps to 150 Watts.

•	 Supplied with captive lamp sealing gasket

•	 Swivel arm has grounding boss

WHUP-1

•	 Ground screw supplied

Color

Std.
Ctn.

Silver gray

36

“Natural” color

36

UL Listed E-42680.

Lampholder Assemblies
•	 Heavy-duty die-cast zinc construction
•	 Powder-coat finish in silver gray
•	 Completely factory assembled and factory prewired
•	 Surface mount to any 3" or 4" round outdoor
box or flush mount to existing box

Cat. No.

Description

WHY2

Two Silver Lamps, Silver-Gray Cover

Std.
Ctn.

5

UL Listed E-42680.

WHY2

Gasket

Adapters
•	 Heavy-duty die cast construction
•	 Natural cast finish

Cat. No.

Description

G1

Heat-Resistant Sealing Gasket

Std. Ctn.

100

Cat. No.

Description

AD11-2

“Y” Adapter — Converts One Outlet to Two — 1⁄2" Threads

Std.
Ctn.

10

UL Listed E-51763.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-239

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders
Round Lampholder Covers

Single-Gang Lampholder Covers

Standard Covers

S-1

Cat. No.

S-12
Color

Hub Size (in.)

Gasket and Screws, 4 1⁄8" Diameter
S-1-RD
Silver
S-12
Silver
S-3-RD
Silver
D-PAK ®
DSS-1
Silver
DSS-1-BR
Bronze
DSS-1-WH
White
DSS-3
Silver
DSS-3-BR
Bronze
DSS-3-WH
White
S621E
—

LC-11

S-3
Description

⁄2
⁄4
1
⁄2

One Tapped Hole
One Tapped Hole
Three Tapped Holes

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
—

One Tapped Hole
One Tapped Hole
One Tapped Hole
Three Tapped Holes
Three Tapped Holes
Three Tapped Holes
Universal Gasket

1

3

1
1

LC-21

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Standard
(213⁄16" x 41⁄2")
LC-11
LC-21
LC-31
D-PAK®
DLC-31
DLC-31-BR
DLC-31-WH

Jumbo
(31⁄8" x 51⁄8")
LF11
—
LF31
—
—
—

Color

LC-31

Size (in.)

Description

1

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2

One-Hole Device Mount
Two-Hole Device Mount
Three-Hole Device Mount

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2

Three-Hole Device Mount
Three-Hole Device Mount
Three-Hole Device Mount

—
—
—

1

Silver
Bronze
White

1
1

Jumbo Covers

SJ-11

Cat. No.

SJ-21
Color

Gasket and Screws, 4 1⁄ 2" Diameter
SJ-11
Silver
SJ-21
Silver
SJ-31
Silver

SJ-31
Hub Size (in.)

Description

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2

One Tapped Hole
Two Tapped Holes
Three Tapped Holes

1
1

Note: Boxes are raintight when used with appropriate Red•Dot ® boxes.
All covers packed with gasket and screws.

A-240

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders
Portable Mount
For use with 150-Watt Lamp
•	 Lampholders are heavy-duty die-cast construction
•	 Lampholders have powder-coat green finish
•	 Current-carrying components are copper or copper
alloy and sockets are porcelain
L-80

L-80-D

•	 Factory wired

Cat. No.

Description

B660GR

Spike Light with 6' Cord

Std.
Ctn.

16

UL Listed E-42680.

L-800

Cat. No.
Standard
L-80
WHUP-1
D-PAK ®
DL-80
DL-80-BR
DL-80-WH
Gasketed
L-80-D

Color

Silver
Natural
Silver
Bronze
White
Silver

Deep-Shielded
L-800
—
Wireguard
LG-80
—

LG-80

Lamp Max.

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Spike Lights

Lampholders, Die-Cast Zinc Zamak 3

Portable Spotlights

Description

150W• PAR 38 or R40 Inside Gasket and Ground Screw
150W• PAR 38 or R40 Inside Gasket and Ground Screw
—
—
—

—
—
—

150W• PAR 38 or R40 Heavy-Duty Slip-On Gasket
and Ground Screw
150W • PAR 38 or R40 Inside Gasket and Ground Screw
—

Mounts to L-80 Series Lampholder
Cat. No.

Decorative Floodlight

Cat. No.

Color

Lamp Max.

2L80D2

White

150W• PAR 38

D-PAK ®
D2L80S3

Silver

—

Color

K702

Silver

K780

Silver

K780BR

Bronze

Lamp Max.

Description

150W• PAR 38 or R40 Standard Lampholder, Ground Spike,
Wall Bracket, Gasket and Screws
150W• PAR 38 or R40 Deep-Shielded Lampholder, Ground
Spike, Wall Bracket, Gasket and Screws
150W• PAR 38 or R40 Standard Lampholder, Ground Spike,
Wall Bracket, Gasket and Screws

Description

Two Lampholders Round Cover,
or R40 Inside Ground Screws
—

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-241

Dimensions in Inches
D
3 1⁄8"

5 1⁄8"
4 1⁄2"
3 9⁄32"

15⁄32"

4 9⁄16"

2 13⁄16"

3 9⁄32"

E

F

G

15⁄32"
G

S-47
S-48
1"

LC-11
A

LC-31

LF-11

11⁄16"

LF-31

A

F
SE-47
SE-48

A

A

H

A

C

B

A
Dimensions (in.)
SS-B

S-3

S-1
S-12

SJ-B SJ-11
B

B

⁄32"

2 3⁄4"

31⁄2"

Cat. No.

SJ-21 SJ-31

⁄32"

5

5"

CCRB

Hub Size

A

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
—
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
—
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄2
41⁄2
41⁄2
41⁄2

S-47
SE-47
S-48
SE-48
SS-B
S-1
S-12
S-3
SJ-B
SJ-11
SJ-21
SJ-31

B

B

5

CCRSB

Photometrics

1

B

C

15⁄8 3⁄4
15⁄8 1
15⁄8 7⁄8
15⁄8 13⁄16
3
⁄64 —
3
⁄8 —
3
⁄8 —
1 —
3
⁄8 —
3
⁄8 —
1 —
1 —

D

E

59⁄16 415⁄16
— —
59⁄16 415⁄16
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —

F

Candle Power (Candelas, Thousands)

6 5⁄16"

6 1⁄2"
43⁄4"

5 5⁄32"

150 PAR 38/SP

6
4

150 PAR/FL

2

0

10

20
30
40
50
Degree from Beam Axis

60

15
12

2"
L-80

1 ⁄8"
5

L-800

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

9

150 PAR/SP

6
3
0

10

20
30
40
50
Degree from Beam Axis

www.tnb.com

G

31⁄2 31⁄8
31⁄2 31⁄16
31⁄2 31⁄8
31⁄2 31⁄16
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —

150 PAR 38/FL

Photometrics are strictly a function of the lamp used.

A-242

B

C

Candle Power (Candelas, Thousands)

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Metallic Lampholders

60

H

CI

11⁄4
—
11⁄4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

16.0
18.3
16.0
18.3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

®

•	UV resistant — suitable
for outdoor use

Available with round
or rectangular cover

•	Accepts 150-watt bulb
max (incandescent only)
•	Non-metallic/
noncorrosive

Tool and
no-tool
adjustment

•	UL® and cUL Listed

PVC material
will not rust
or corrode

•	 Approved for upward
use in wet locations
Paintable surface
Secure, stay-in-place
lighting arms

Silicone gaskets
to keep moisture out,
even in upright position

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Lampholders
Red•Dot Non-Metallic Weatherproof Lampholders

Porcelain sockets

Installation
•	 Includes gasket, four lug nuts and two mounting screws
Installation Instructions:
1. ­Turn off electricity before starting.
2. Bring power leads into the outlet box and connect
using proper wire nuts or insulation materials.
3. Use drill or nail to knock out holes on lampholder
cover that align with outlet box. When completed,
be sure visual perimeter of weatherproof gasket
is even to ensure proper seal.
4. Floodlight lampholders can be positioned using
two different adjustments. Loosen locknut to
turn lampholder assembly to desired position.
Tighten locknut. Then depress pushbutton to
adjust lampholder to final position.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-243

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Weatherproof Non-Metallic Lampholders
Lampholders
E70380
E183934
Except where noted by

•	 For use in wet/damp locations
•	 Ideal for residential or commercial applications —
security/landscape
•	 Mounts to a device box
•	 Non-metallic — won’t rust or fade
•	Paintable
•	 Easy to install

No-Tool Lampholder with Round Cover

•	 Stay-in-place lighting arms

Lampholder with Round Cover

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

P8060W-CAR

White

6

5.8

Lampholder with Rectangular Cover

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

P8010W-CAR

White

6

3.9

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

P7901W-CAR

White

12

.9

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

5.5

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

P8005W-CAR

White

6

3.8

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

P7801W-CAR

White

16

1.6

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

STD. WT.
(LBS.)

White

30

1.3

Covers

Rectangular

Round

Accessories

No-Tool Lampholder with Gasket

A-244

Closure Plugs

Cat. No.

COLOR

STD.
CTN.

P8001W-CAR

White

24

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
P7701W-CAR

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

Sample Specifications:
•	Fixture shall be certified die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3;
socket shall be porcelain, center contact and replaceable;
socket shall have extended leads for easy wiring;
fixture shall be Red•Dot® Dry-Tite®

Corrosion-Resistant Metal
Powder-Coated Finish

Catalog No. _______________
5 1⁄4"
5 ⁄4"
1

8 1⁄2"

7"
Glass Globe
Porcelain
Socket

Three Tier

K440

K330

Applications:
•	 Lighting for walkways, paths or driveways
•	 Accent lighting for garden and terrace areas
•	 Ground-level security lighting
Features/Benefits:
•	 Certified zinc alloy provides increased corrosion resistance
•	High-quality replaceable porcelain socket with hightemperature leads enables easy field maintenance
Standard Materials:
•	 Fixture: Die-cast zinc alloy ZAMAK 3
•	 Globe: Lime crystal glass
•	 Socket: Center contact, porcelain, medium base
Standard Finish:
•	 Green powder-coated finish
•	 Bronze powder-coated finish
Compliances:
•	UL® Listed
•	 Suitable for use in wet locations

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
SiteLight Landscape Lights

Photometrics:
Based on lamp center
24" above ground

Based on 100-Watt A-19
inside-frosted 1750-lumen
lamp. For other wattage
see table below.
Wattage

Multiplier

100
75
60
50
40
25

1.0
.68
.44
.27
.26
.13

.25

.55

.2

.08

.045

.035

.02

.015

Iso Foot Candles

Four Tier
Cat. No.

Color

K330
K330BR
VGL-075

Green
Bronze

Lamp
Max. Description

75W• 12" Extended
Leads, Gasket
and Ground
Screw Globe

K330

Cat. No.

Color

K440
K440BR
VGL-01

Green
Bronze

Note: Lamp not included

Lamp
Max. Description

100W• 12" Extended
Leads, Gasket
and Ground
Screw Globe

K440

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-245

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
Step Up to SiteLight
Line Voltage Outdoor Lighting.
®

Planning your Outdoor Lighting
On graph paper, outline your home and grounds. Indicate key features
you wish to highlight such as stairways, statuary, shrubbery or flowering
plants. SiteLight Spot Lights and Swivel Lights provide focused
illumination to showcase these areas.
The diagrams below show how you can achieve three special lighting
effects with SiteLight® Spot Lights and Swivel Lights.

Grazing
from side or bottom
to show texture

Uplighting
from below makes
details stand out

Compare SiteLight® to Low-Voltage Sets
•	SiteLight® is up to five times brighter than low-voltage —
more light with fewer fixtures than with low-voltage sets

Silhouetting
from behind
provides drama

For decks, Post Sconce Lights mounted on deck posts provide glare-free
perimeter lighting and mid-stair lighting. Post Top Lights are ideal for
lighting stairs and rails.

•	SiteLight® gives you flexibility in spacing, the number of
fixtures and the length-of-run. Light where you need it
— low-voltage sets have a fixed limit on length-of-run
and the number of fixtures

Use SiteLight® Path Lights and Swivel Lights for pathways, driveways
and general garden lighting. The chart below will help you determine
fixture spacing.
Bright & Even

Medium Dappled

Soft Mood

12'–18'

Over 20'

•	SiteLight® uses regular household current — no expensive
low-voltage transformer to purchase or replace

SiteLights ® are permanent, all-metal fixtures guaranteed for a lifetime.

•	SiteLight® uses readily available, standard bulbs — lowvoltage bulbs are often found only where sets are sold

SiteLight® Line Voltage Outdoor Lighting

•	SiteLight® lets you add on fixtures by tapping into
run — low-voltage sets will generate even less light
if transformers are at capacity

8'–10'

For outdoor lighting, nothing compares to the full power (120V) and beauty
of SiteLight®. SiteLight® uses regular household voltage and standard bulbs
that are readily available. There are no expensive transformers to purchase
or replace. With SiteLight®, you can add fixtures when and where you
want them and still enjoy lighting that is up to five times brighter
than low-voltage.
Use SiteLight® to highlight gardens, statuary, shrubbery and to effectively
light decks, stairs, pathways, pools and driveways. SiteLight® meets every
outdoor lighting need… from soft, indirect deck lighting, to brilliant, focused
spot lighting. Use SiteLight® to beautify your property while enhancing
safety and security.
Step up to SiteLight® line voltage outdoor lighting and add permanent
value to your home.

SiteLight® Meets Every Outdoor Lighting Need
•	 From soft, indirect deck lighting to brilliant,
focused spot lighting, use SiteLight® to beautify
any property while enhancing safety and security
•	 Lighting for walkways, pathways and driveways
•	 Stairway, perimeter and task lighting for decks
•	 Accent and ambient lighting for pool/patio
and garden areas
•	 Highlighting to emphasize landscape details
or specific objects
•	 Ground-level safety/security lighting
to illuminate dark areas

A-246

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Everything you need is included in the SiteLight ® Kit, except a bulb, supply cable and tools
(screw­driver, wire strippers, etc.). Only three connections are required to wire each fixture to
the supply cable. With the SiteLight® PVC in-ground mounting tube, there is no need to pour
concrete to secure the fixtures. Just position the tube and pack dirt around it. Attach your
SiteLight ® to the mounting tube and your installation is complete.
SiteLight® is designed for a lifetime of trouble-free use. SiteLight ® is high-quality, permanent
lighting built to add value and beauty to your home.

Applications:
•	 Lighting for walkways, pathways
and driveways
•	 Stairway, perimeter and task lighting
for decks
•	 Accent and ambient lighting for pool/patio
and garden areas
•	 Highlighting to emphasize landscape
details or specific objects
•	 Ground-level safety/security lighting
to illuminate dark areas
Features/Benefits:
•	 Copper-free* aluminum construction
provides increased corrosion resistance
•	 Sturdy die-cast aluminum construction
provides durability
•	 Architectural bronze color blends into
landscape and deck areas
•	 High-quality, replaceable porcelain
socket with brass screw shell
(except K851BR, K852BR)

Standard Materials:
•	 Fixture: Die-cast aluminum alloy A360
with less than .004% copper content
(copper free*)
•	 Lens: Tempered glass
(K831BR, CS841BR, K861BR)
•	 Lens: Polycarbonate (K811BR, K812BR,
K821BR, K822BR, K851BR)
•	 Socket: Porcelain, center contact, brass
screw shell, medium base (K811BR,
K812BR, K821BR, K822BR, K831BR,
CS841BR, K861BR), molded plastic
socket with candelabra base
(K851BR and K852BR)
•	 Mounting Tube: Gray PVC, schedule 40
(ground-installed fixtures)
Standard Finish:
•	 Bronze powder-coated finish
Compliances:
•	UL® Listed
•	 Suitable for use in wet locations

•	 Aluminum mounting tube cap houses
and protects wire connection
(ground-installed fixtures)

•	 Ground mounting (suitable for use 4' or
less above grade level) except K852BR
and K861BR

•	 PVC ground tube provides an innovative
installation method saving costly labor
and traditional installation materials
(ground-installed fixtures)

Sample Specifications:
•	 Fixture shall be die-cast copper-free*
aluminum alloy A360, with bronze powdercoated finish. Sockets shall be porcelain,
center contact, brass screw shell-medium
base for K811BR, K812BR, K821BR,
K822BR, K831BR, K841BR and K861BR
fixtures. Sockets shall be molded plastic
with candelabra screw base for K851BR
and K852BR fixtures. All sockets shall
have extended leads for easy wiring.

•	 Wire connectors and ground wire enable
safe, easy power connections
•	 Tempered glass lens and silicon
gaskets keep socket dry
(K831BR, CS841BR, K861BR)
•	 Positive locking arm can be adjusted
to the desired position
(K831BR, CS841BR, K861BR)
•	 Fixtures use regular household
voltage (120V)

Quality Construction

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
We’ve Made Installation Easy.

Rustproof castaluminum top
removes easily for
bulb replacement
Shatterproof Lens
Porcelain Socket
with brass
screw shell
Architectural
Bronze color
blends into
landscape
Aluminum Base
for durability
Stainless
Steel Screws
Aluminum Mounting
Tube Cap houses
wire connections
Wire Connectors
and Ground Wire
for safe, easy
power connections
13" PVC Mounting Tube
provides a permanent
base for fixture and large
opening to feed wires

Easy to Install:
•	 Only three wire connections per fixture
are required
•	 No need to pour concrete
•	 All connections are made above ground
* Less than .004% copper content

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-247

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
ISO Foot Candles Values based on
.45-ft. mounting height and a 40watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

K812BR,
7.5" Height Option

7.5"/10" Path Light

See pages A-250–A-251 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

Lamp Required

Spacing

K812BR

7.5"/10" Path Light
with 13" x 2" Schedule
40 PVC Mounting Tube

A15 40W (max.)/
120V medium base

8'–10' apart: bright and
even, 12'–18' apart:
medium dappled, 20'
or more: soft mood

Fixture can be configured for either height­– extension sleeve included.

ISO Foot Candles Values based on
.67-ft. mounting height and a 40watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

K812BR,
10" Height Option
ISO Foot Candles Values based on
.45-ft. mounting height and a 40watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

K822BR,
7.5" Height Option

7.5"/10" Path Light

See pages A-252–A-253 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

K822BR

7.5"/10" Path Light with A15 40W (max.)/
13" x 2" Schedule 40
120V medium base
PVC Mounting Tube

Lamp Required

Spacing

8'–10' apart: bright and
even, 12'–18' apart:
medium dappled,
20' or more: soft mood

Fixture can be configured for either height­– extension sleeve included.
ISO Foot Candles Values based on
.67-ft. mounting height and a 40watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

K822BR,
10" Height Option
ISO Foot Candles Values based on
3-ft. setback from a vertical wall
and a 100-watt incandescent
1321-lumen lamp.

Ground Spot Light

See page A-254 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

Lamp Required

Spacing

CS841BR

Ground Spot Light with
13" x 2" Schedule
40 PVC Mounting Tube

R20 100W (max.)/
120V medium base

One to two for each
object to be highlighted
or as required for
special lighting effects

CS841BR

A-248

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Outdoor Lighting
See page A-255 for specifications
ISO Foot Candles Values
based on 1-ft. mounting
height and a 60-watt A15
incandescent 740-lumen
lamp tilted 45˚ degrees.

Cat. No.

Description

Lamp Required

Spacing

K831BR

17.5" Swivel Light with
13" x 2" Schedule
40 PVC Mounting Tube

General lighting:
A15 60W (max.)/
120V medium base
spot lighting: R16
60W (max.)/ 120V
medium base

General lighting: 8'–10'
apart: bright and even,
12'–18'apart: medium
dappled, 20' or more:
soft mood, spot lighting:
one to two for each
object to be highlighted

Spacing

K831BR

ISO Foot Candles Values based
on 1-ft. mounting height from
light opening of luminaire to
ground stair and a 10-watt
G12 1⁄2 80-lumen lamp on lens
1-ft. above ground or stair.

Post Sconce Light

See page A-256 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

Lamp Required

K851BR

Post Sconce Light
with Metal Back Plate
and Mounting Hardware

G121⁄2 10W (max.)/ On each post or every
120V candelabra
other post depending
base
on desired brightness,
mounts to standard
4 x 4 post

K851BR

ISO Foot Candles Values based
on 4-ft. mounting height from
center of light opening to base
of deck and a 15-watt G12 1⁄2
100-lumen lamp.

Post Top Light

See page A-257 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

K852BR

Post Top Light with Metal G12 ⁄2 10W (max.)/ On each post or every
Back Plate and Mounting 120V candelabra
other post depending
Hardware
base
on desired brightness,
mounts to standard
4 x 4 post

K852BR

ISO Foot Candles Values based
on 8-ft. mounting height and
a 100-watt 1321-lumen lamp
tilted 45˚ degrees.

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

17.5" Swivel Light

Lamp Required

Spacing

1

Wall Spot

See page A-258 for specifications
Cat. No.

Description

Lamp Required

K861BR

Wall Spot with Cover
(box not included)

R20 100W (max.)/ One to two on most
120V medium base average size decks
or exterior walls

Spacing

K861BR

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-249

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on .45 (5.4") foot mounting height
and a 40-watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

•	 7.5" height option

(10.8")
5 1⁄4"

(5.4")

5 1⁄4"
3 1⁄8"
11⁄4"

2 ⁄16"
5

7 ⁄2"
1

7 1⁄2"

11⁄16"

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K812BR Specifications

5

10

2

10
10
20

0

1

(5.4")
(10.8")
(16.2")

(21.6")
(5.4")	

(10.8")	 (16.2")	 (21.6")	

(27")	

(32.4")	 (37.8")

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

13 1⁄8" (±1⁄4)

90°
75°
Candle Power

15°
60°

30°
45°

See following page for 10" height.
45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–120
90–130
90–150
90–180
0–180

5
9
26
121
26
27
29
29
150

1.4
2.3
6.4
30.2
6.5
6.8
7.2
7.2
37.4

% of total
output

3.6
6.2
17.1
80.7
17.4
18.3
19.3
19.3
100.0

Deg

Candela

Lumens

Deg

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85

4
4
6
7
6
7
11
30
31
32

—
0
2
3
4
5
11
28
33
34

90
95
105
115
125
135
145
155
165
175
180

30
24
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0

—
21
3
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
—

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 37.4%

A-250

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K812BR Specifications

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on .67 (8.04") foot mounting height
and a 40-watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

•	 10" height option

(16.08")
5 1⁄4"
3 1⁄8"

(8.04")
11⁄4"

2 5⁄16"
10"
11⁄16"

10"

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

5 ⁄4"
1

2

5

1

5
5
10

0

.5

(8.04")

(16.08")

(24.12")

(36.16")
(8.04")	 (16.08")	(24.12")	 (36.16")	 (40.2")	 (48.24")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

13 1⁄8" (±1/4)

90°
75°
Candle Power

15°
60°

30°
45°

See previous page for 7.5" height.

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–120
90–130
90–150
90–180
0–180

5
9
26
121
26
27
29
29
150

1.4
2.3
6.4
30.2
6.5
6.8
7.2
7.2
37.4

% of total
output

3.6
6.2
17.1
80.7
17.4
18.3
19.3
19.3
100.0

Deg

Candela

Lumens

Deg

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85

4
4
6
7
6
7
11
30
31
32

—
0
2
3
4
5
11
28
33
34

90
95
105
115
125
135
145
155
165
175
180

30
24
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0

—
21
3
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
—

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 37.4%

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-251

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on .45 (5.4") foot mounting height
and a 40-watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

•	 7.5" height option

(10.8")
41⁄4"

5

10

2

10

4 9⁄16"
3 1⁄8"

7 ⁄2"
1

1"

2 5⁄16"
11⁄16"

7 1⁄2"

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K822BR Specifications

(5.4")

10

0

1

.5

(5.4")
(10.8")
(16.2")
(21.6")
(5.4")	 (10.8")	(16.2")	(21.6")	 (27")	 (32.4")	(37.8")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

90°
131⁄8" (±1/4)
75°
Candle Power

15°
60°

30°
45°

See following page for 10" height.

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–120
90–130
90–150
90–180
0–180

3
5
19
111
6
6
6
6
118

0.7
1.3
4.8
27.8
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
29.4

% of total
output

2.4
4.5
16.3
94.6
5.2
5.4
5.4
5.4
100.0

Deg

Candela

Lumens

Deg

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85

2
2
3
4
4
6
10
29
31
31

—
0
1
2
2
4
10
27
32
33

90
95
105
115
125
135
145
155
165
175
180

22
3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

—
4
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 29.4%

A-252

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K822BR Specifications

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on .67 (8.04") foot mounting height
and a 40-watt A15 clear 400-lumen lamp.

•	 10" height option

1

2 ⁄16"
5

1

5

1 ⁄16"
1

10"

10"

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

4 1⁄4"

2

5

(16.08")
4 9⁄16"
3 1⁄8"

(8.04")

5
5

0

.5

(8.04")
(16.08")
(24.12")
(36.16")
(8.04")	 (16.08")	(24.12")	(32.16")	 (40.2")	 (48.24")	(56.28")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

90°

75°
15°
Candle Power

13 1⁄8" (±1/4)

60°

30°
45°

See previous page for 7.5" height.

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–120
90–130
90–150
90–180
0–180

3
5
19
111
6
6
6
6
118

0.7
1.3
4.8
27.8
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
29.4

% of total
output

2.4
4.5
16.3
94.6
5.2
5.4
5.4
5.4
100.0

Deg

Candela

Lumens

Deg

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85

2
2
3
4
4
6
10
29
31
31

—
0
1
2
2
4
10
27
32
33

90
95
105
115
125
135
145
155
165
175
180

22
3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

—
4
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 29.4%

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-253

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on 3 (36") foot setback from a vertical
wall and a 100-watt incandescent 1321-lumen lamp.

3 1⁄8" Dia.
5 5⁄8"

Note: This ISO Foot Candle
diagram was produced by tilting
the photometric data for this
luminaire 45° above horizontal.

(216")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
CS841BR Specifications

3 ⁄4"
3

3 1/16" Dia.

.05

(180")

.02

.1

(144")

.2

(108") .5
1

(72")

2
5

(36")

10

0

.01

.005 .002

(36") (72")
(108") (144") (180") (216")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

131⁄8" (±1⁄4)

90°

3 1⁄8"

75°
Candle Power

15°
6 5⁄8"
⁄16"

9

60°

30°
45°

⁄4"

1

⁄16"

13

45°

2 15⁄16"
0°

0°
Legend
0–Deg:
90–Deg:
180–Deg:

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–120
90–130
90–150
90–180
0–180

Lumens

104
165
214
219
0
0
0
0
219

7.9
12.5
16.2
16.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
16.6

47.7
75.3
97.7
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
100.0

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 16.6%

A-254

Candela Distribution Horizontal Degrees

% of total
output

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Vertical Degrees

Zone Deg.

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
90

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

0.0

45.0

90.0

135.0

180.0

FLUX

136
132
127
124
58
9
5
0
0
0
0

136
132
124
121
77
12
6
1
0
0
0

136
133
125
117
106
35
9
4
0
0
0

136
136
128
126
125
93
14
6
2
0
0

136
138
131
122
122
109
31
8
3
1
1

—
13
36
56
61
37
11
4
1
0
—

www.tnb.com

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K831BR Specifications
ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on 1 (12") foot mounting height and
a 60-watt A15 incandescent 740 lumen lamp tilted 45°.
General Lighting
2 1⁄2"

(24")

3 ⁄8" Dia.
1

3 ⁄8"
1

5"

14 5⁄8"

1 1⁄2"
⁄4"

1

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

5"

21 ⁄16"

2

.2 .5
1

(12")

20

0
50
(12")

10

(24")
(36")

5

.5

1
.01

15

(48")

.2
.02

.05

(12")

(24")

.1
(36")
(48")
(60")
(72")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

(84")

3 1⁄16" Dia.

90°
13 1⁄8"(±1⁄4)
75°
Candle Power

15°
60°

30°
45°

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–180
0–180

65
105
134
137
0
137

8.7
14.2
18.1
18.5
0.0
18.5

% of total
output

47.2
77.0
97.7
100.0
0.0
100.0

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 18.5%

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Deg

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
90

79
81
82
73
67
33
4
3
0
0
0

—
8
23
34
41
25
3
3
0
0
—

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-255

K851BR Specifications

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on 1 (12") foot mounting height from light opening of luminaire
to ground stair and a 10-watt G121⁄2 80-lumen lamp on lens 1-ft. above
ground or stair.
(24")

3 1⁄8"
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting

3 3⁄8"

.002
.005

(12")
.2
.5

0
5

(12")
(24")

1
.1

2

.05

.001

.02
.01

(36")
(48")

.005
..002

.001

(12")

(24")

(48")

(60")

(72")

(84")

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

37°

3 1⁄4"

(36")

90°

1 3⁄8"
3 3⁄8"

75°
Candle Power

15°

1 ⁄16"
9

60°

30°

0°

45°

45°
0°
Legend
0–Deg:
90–Deg:
180–Deg:

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–180
0–180

4
6
9
9
0
9

4.5
7.7
11.0
11.6
0.0
11.6

% of total
output

38.7
66.3
94.3
100.0
0.0
100.0

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 11.6%.

A-256

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Candela Distribution Horizontal Degrees

Vertical Degrees

Zone Deg.

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
90

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

0.0

45.0

90.0

135.0

180.0

FLUX

5
6
6
7
7
6
0
0
0
0
0

5
6
6
7
7
5
1
0
0
0
0

5
6
6
6
6
3
1
0
0
0
0

5
5
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

5
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

—
0
1
2
3
2
1
0
0
0
—

www.tnb.com

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on 4 (48") foot mounting height from center of light
opening to base of deck and a 15-watt G161/2 100-lumen lamp.

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K852BR Specifications

(96")
.05

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

(48")
5 1⁄8" Dia.

4 3/8"

3 /8" SQ­­.
3

0
.05

(48")
(96")

(144")
(192")

.05

.02
.02
.05

.05

.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.0005

.0

.0002
.0001

(48")

(96")

(144")

(192")

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

5"

/8"

5

4 3/8"

90°

1 /4"
1

75°
15°
Candle Power

60°

30°

Legend
0–Deg:
45–Deg:
90–Deg:

45°

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–180
0–180

Lumens

1
1
5
10
0
10

0.9
1.3
5.5
10.4
0.0
10.4

www.tnb.com

Candela Distribution Horizontal Degrees

% of total
output

8.7
12.8
52.7
100.0
0.0
100.0

Vertical Degrees

Zone Deg.

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
90

0.0

45.0

90.0

135.0

180.0

FLUX

1
2
1
1
1
1
5
6
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
4
5
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
6
7
0
0
0

—
0
0
0
0
1
4
5
0
0
—

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-257

ISO Foot Candles

Dimensions

Values based on 8 (96") foot mounting height
and a 100-watt 1321-lumen lamp tilted 45°.
(192")

.05

.02

.2

(96")
Distance in Units of Mounting Height

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Outdoor Lighting
K861BR Specifications

2 1/2"

5 /16"
7

3 1/2" Dia.

3 /8" Dia.
1

1

0

(96")

.5
.005

.1

(192")

.05
.02

(288")
(384")

.01

.001
.0005

3 1/8"

.005

.002

(96")

(192")

(288")

(384")

(480")

(576")

Distance in Units of Mounting Height

5 7/16"
90º
/16"
Candle Power

9

/4"

1

2 15/16"

75°
15°
60°

30°
45°

45°
0°

15°

30°

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Deg.

Lumens

% of lamp output
based on 400
lumens

0–30
0–40
0–60
0–90
90–180
0–180

103
177
301
317
0
317

7.8
13.4
22.8
24.0
0.0
24.0

% of total
output

32.4
56.0
94.9
100.0
0.0
100.0

Total Luminaire Efficiency = 24.0%.

A-258

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Deg.

Candela

Lumens

0
5
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
90

128
128
123
120
119
109
44
11
5
0
0

—
12
35
56
75
83
41
11
5
0
—

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

(672")

Applications:
•	 Low-maintenance indoor/outdoor lighting where moisture,
dirt, dust, corrosion and rough service are problems
•	 Low-profile fixture design for where low ceiling height
presents a lighting problem

Extra-long, high-temperature
— 105° C (221° F) leads
Clean, contemporary design

Replaceable porcelain socket

•	 To light cold storage facilities, walkways, bridges,
tunnels and security locations
•	 Used with colored globes as warning, caution or directional
lights; for 100- or 200-watt medium-base incandescent lamps
Features/Benefits:
•	Copper-free* aluminum and stainless steel screws provide
increased corrosion resistance

Heavy-duty
die-cast guard

Smooth
conduit stops

Fully threaded
globe

•	 Precision-cast and machined surfaces permit safer wire pulling
•	Fully threaded glass globes prevent cross threading, ensuring
a tight seal

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Vaportight Lighting
Industrial Vaportight Lighting

•	High-quality replaceable porcelain socket with high-temperature
leads result in a long-lasting fixture
•	Five mounting configurations packaged three different ways
to suit all customer requirements
•	Colored, heat-resistant and shatterproof LEXAN® globes
available
Standard Materials:
•	Fixture and guards: Die-cast aluminum alloy A360 with less than
.004% copper content (copper-free), and stainless steel screw
•	Globe: Lime crystal glass
•	Socket: Center contact, porcelain, medium base
Standard Finish:
•	 Powder-coated finish
Compliances:
•	UL® Listed

VAG-C

VKG-C

•	 Suitable for use in wet locations only when oriented as shown
(mounted with lamp base up and guard/globe down)
Sample Specifications
•	 Fixture shall be die-cast copper-free* aluminum alloy A360.
All conduit stops shall be coined and free of rough edges.
LEXAN® globes shall have full threads. Sockets shall be
porcelain. Fixtures shall be finished with powder-coated paint.
Fixtures shall be Red•Dot® Catalog No.__________
VWG-C

* Less than .004% copper content.

VXG-C

VXWG-C

LEXAN ® is a registered trademark of SABIC Innovative Plastics Company.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-259

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Vaportight Lighting
Low-Maintenance Indoor/Outdoor Lighting where Moisture,
Dirt, Dust, Corrosion and Rough Service are a Problem.
•	 Compatible with incandescent and most
self-ballasted compact fluorescent bulbs

•	 Low-silhouette incandescent vaportight
•	 Variety of mounting configurations

•	 For indoor or outdoor use

•	UL® Listed

•	 Fixture and guard die-cast copper-free
aluminum, less than .004% copper content
•	 Available in components or complete fixture

Pendant Mount

Cat. No.

VK-11

VK-22

VKG-11-C

VK-11
VK-21
VK-12
VK-22
VKG-11
VKG-21
VKG-12
VKG-22
VKG-11-C
VKG-21-C
VKG-12-C
VKG-22-C

Hub Size (in.) Max. Watt

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200

Description

Pendant Cap with Socket Screw
Terminals, Gasket and Screws

Pendant Cap with Socket Screw
Terminals, Gasket Screws and Globe

Pendant Cap with Socket Screw
Terminals, Gasket Screws, Globe
and Cast Guard

Ceiling Mount with Adapter Plate
Cat. No.
VA-01
VA-02
VAG-01
VAG-02
VAG-01-C
VAG-02-C

VA-01

VAG-01

Cat. No.

VX-11

A-260

—
—
—
—
—
—

100
200
100
200
100
200

Description

Ceiling Outlet Box Cap with Socket with
Leads, Gasket and Screws
Ceiling Outlet Box Cap with Socket with
Leads, Gasket, Screws and Globe
Ceiling Outlet Box Cap with Socket
with Leads, Gasket, Screws, Globe and
Cast Guard

VAG-01-C

Ceiling Mount Cross Feed
(5 Tapped Holes)

VXG-11

Hub Size (in.) Max. Watt

VXG-11-C

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

VX-11
VX-21
VX-12
VX-22
VXG-11
VXG-21
VXG-12
VXG-22
VXG-11-C
VXG-21-C
VXG-12-C
VXG-22-C

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Hub Size (in.) Max. Watt

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200

Description

Ceiling-Cross Feed Box with Gaskets,
Socket with Leads, Screws, 4 Closure
Plugs and Cast Mounting Lugs
Ceiling-Cross Feed Box with Gaskets,
Socket with Leads, Screws, 4 Closure
Plugs and Cast Mounting Lugs and
Globe
Ceiling-Cross Feed Box with Gaskets,
Socket with Leads, Screws, 4 Closure
Plugs, Cast Mounting Lugs, Globe and
Cast Guard

www.tnb.com

Vaportight Lighting
Globes
Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Max. Watt

VW-01
VW-02
VWG-01
VWG-02
VWG-01-C
VWG-02-C

Description

100
200
100
200
100
200

Wall Mount Unit with Socket with Leads,
Gaskets and Screws
Wall Mount Unit with Socket with Leads,
Gaskets and Screws and Globe
Wall Mount Unit with Socket with Leads,
Gaskets, Globe, Screws and Cast Guard

Wall Mount Cross Feed
(5 Tapped Holes)

Max. Watt Description

Glass
VGL-01
VGLA-01
VGLB-01
VGLG-01
VGLR-01
VGLH-01
VGL-02
VGLR-02
VGLH-02
LEXAN ®
VGLL-01
VGLL-02
VGLA-A1
VGLA-R1

100
100
100
100
100
150
200
200
300

75
150
75
75
Not for use with guards.

VXW-11
VXW-21
VXW-12
VXW-22
VXWG-11
VXWG-21
VXWG-12
VXWG-22
VXWG-11-C
VXWG-21-C
VXWG-12-C
VXWG-22-C

Hub Size (in.) Max. Watt

⁄2
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
1

3

100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200
100
100
200
200

Clear Prismatic
Clear Prismatic
Amber
Red

Note: For upright mounting only. Caution: In ordering LEXAN ® Globe,
wattage is rated 75% of standard globe size (i.e. VGLL-02 is for
use on 200-watt fixtures, but only rated for 150-watt lamps.)

Guards

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Clear
Amber
Blue
Green
Red
Clear, Heat Resistant
Clear
Red
Clear, Heat Resistant

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Wall Mount with Adapter Plate

Max. Watt

Wire
VGW-01
VGW-02
Die Cast
VGD-01
VGD-02

Description

Wall Mount Cross Feed with Socket
with Leads, Gaskets, Screws, 4
Closure Plugs and Cast
Mounting Lugs

Description

100
200

Clamp-On Plated Steel Guards

100
200

Die-Cast Aluminum Guards with Positive
Locking Screws

Vaportight Boxes and Covers

Wall Mount Cross Feed with Socket
with Leads, Gaskets, Screws, 4
Closure Lugs and Globe
Wall Mount Cross Feed with Socket
with Leads, Gaskets, Screws, 4
Closure Plugs, Cast Mounting Lugs,
Globe and Cast Guard

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
Boxes
LVX-1
LVX-2
Cover
V-B

Max. Watt

⁄2
3
⁄4

1

None

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Description

Box, 31⁄2" Diameter, 15⁄8" Deep, 5 Tapped
Holes, 12.08 Cu. In. 4 Closure Plugs with
Cast Mounting Lugs
Blank Cover 31/2" Diameter

A-261

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Vaportight Lighting
VKG

VXG

Cat. No.

A (in.)

B (in.)

VKG-11
VKG-21
VKG-12
VKG-22

33⁄8
33⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄8

83⁄16
83⁄16
10 1⁄8
101⁄8

Cat. No.

C (in.)

D (in.)

VKG-11-C
VKG-21-C
VKG-12-C
VKG-22-C

41⁄16
4 1⁄16
51⁄4
51⁄4

8 3⁄4
83⁄4
10 5⁄8
105⁄8

D

B

A
C
Pendant Mount (VKG)

E

Cat. No.

A (in.)

B (in.)

E (in.)

F (in.)

VXG-11
VXG-21
VXG-12
VXG-22

3 3⁄8
33⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄8

8 13⁄16
813⁄16
10 3⁄4
103⁄4

3 1⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

1 5⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8

Cat. No.

C (in.)

D (in.)

VXG-11-C
VXG-21-C
VXG-12-C
VXG-22-C

41⁄16
4 1⁄16
51⁄4
5 1⁄4

9 5⁄16
95⁄16
113⁄16
113⁄16

F

D

B

A
C
Ceiling Mount Cross Feed (VXG)

VAG

VWG

E

Cat. No.

A (in.)

B (in.)

Cat. No.

A (in.)

B (in.)

E (in.)

F (in.)

VAG-01
VAG-02

33⁄8
43⁄8

7 7⁄16
9 3⁄8

VWG-01
VWG-02

33⁄8
43⁄8

8 7⁄16
103⁄8

43⁄4
53⁄4

31⁄2
31⁄2

Cat. No.

C (in.)

D (in.)

Cat. No.

C (in.)

D (in.)

VAG-01-C
VAG-02-C

4 ⁄16
51⁄4

7 ⁄16
9 13⁄16

4 1⁄16
51⁄4

8 15⁄16
10 13⁄16

1

B

D

VWG-01-C
VWG-02-C

15

F

D

B

A
C
Ceiling Mount (VAG)

A
C
Wall Mount (VWG)

VXWG
E
Dimensions (In.)

Cat. No.
VXWG-11
VXWG-21
VXWG-12
VXWG-22
VXWG-11-C
VXWG-21-C
VXWG-12-C
VXWG-22-C
LVX-1
LVX-2

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

33⁄8
33⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄8
33⁄8
33⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄8
—
—

87⁄16
87⁄16
103⁄8
103⁄8
87⁄16
87⁄16
103⁄8
103⁄8
—
—

—
—
—
—
41⁄16
4 1⁄16
5 3⁄16
53⁄16
—
—

—
—
—
—
8 15⁄16
815⁄16
1013⁄16
1013⁄16
—
—

15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
1 5⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8

31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
⁄8
5
⁄8

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
5

I

J

— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
47⁄16 213⁄16
4 7⁄16 213⁄16

CI

F

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10.3
10.3

D

B

G

A
C
Wall Mount Cross Feed (VXWG)

A-262

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Vaportight Lighting
⁄2" Hub Size

1

⁄2" Hub Size

1

3 27⁄64"

4 3⁄32"
9 3⁄4"

8 1⁄2"

9 3⁄4"

8 3⁄8"

8 11⁄64"

3 7⁄8"
4 1⁄2"

3 3⁄8"
4 1⁄2"

PVP-100C

PVPG-100B
PVPG-100R
Packaging

Cat. No.

Description

PVP-100C
PVPG-100B
PVPG-100R

Fixture and Clear LEXAN Globe
Fixture, Blue LEXAN® Globe, Guard
Fixture, Red LEXAN® Globe, Guard

Max. Watts

Box

Std. Ctn.

100
100
100

1
1
1

12
12
12

®

BL-100

Cat. No.

Description

BL-100

Fixture and Glass Globe

Max. Watts

Std. Ctn.

75

10

Replacement Parts
Packaging

Cat. No.

Description

Sockets
R122

Socket for All Vapor-Proof Fixtures

Box

Std. Ctn.

—

250

UL Listed. CSA Certified LR-95792.

C

VGL

VGD, VGW

C

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Universal Economy Fixture

Pendant Fixtures

E

E

B
B

B

A
Guards (VGD, VGW)
A
Threaded Glass Globe (VGL)

Cat. No.

A
Threaded Glass Plastic Globe (VGL, VGLL)

A (in.)

B (in.)

C (in.)

D (in.)

E (in.)

I.D (in.)

33⁄8
43⁄8
317⁄32
417⁄32
317⁄32
317⁄32

617⁄32
83⁄8
515⁄16
81⁄4
515⁄16
515⁄16

35⁄16
45⁄16
33⁄8
43⁄8
33⁄8
33⁄8

1
1
—
—
—
—

—
—
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8

211⁄16
313⁄16
27⁄8
37⁄8
27⁄8
27⁄8

VGL-01 series
VGL-02 series
VGLL-01
VGLL-02
VGLA-A1
VGLA-R1

Cat. No.

A (in.)

B (in.)

VGD-01
VGD-02
VGW-01
VGW-02

41⁄16
55⁄16
41⁄16
55⁄16

7
85⁄8
641⁄64
837⁄64

Vaporproof Fixture Globes
and Guards Replacements

3 5⁄16"
Dia.
4TPI

Surface Fixtures

6 1⁄4"
6 1⁄2"

9 1⁄2"

8"

8"

PVG-1A
3 7⁄8"
4 1⁄2"

3 7⁄8"
4 1⁄2"

PVC-100C

PBVC-100C
Packaging

Cat. No.

Description

Max. Watts Box

Fits all 3" and 4" Round or Octagon Boxes
PVC-100C
Fixture and Clear LEXAN® Globe
PBVC-100C Fixture, Box and Clear LEXAN® Globe

100
100

1
1

Std. Ctn.

12
12

UL Listed E-77360. CSA Certified LR-95792.

3 7⁄8"
Dia.
Packaging

Cat. No.

Description

PVG-1A*
PVG-1C*
PVG-1R*
PVG-1W*
VG-3
VG-4

Amber LEXAN® Globe for 100-Watt Fixtures
Clear LEXAN® Globe for 100-Watt Fixtures
Red LEXAN® Globe for 100-Watt Fixtures
White LEXAN® Globe for 100-Watt Fixtures
Guard for 100-Watt Fixtures
Guard for 200-Watt Fixtures

Box

Std. Ctn.

1
1
1
1
1
1

12
12
12
12
12
6

* UL Listed E-77360.

LEXAN ® is a registered trademark of SABIC Innovative Plastics Company.

www.tnb.com

VG-3 &VG-4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-263

Boxes & Covers — Red•Dot ® Weatherproof

Swimming Pool and Spa Products
Used for Making Wiring Connections
to Underwater Pool Lighting, Line or Low-Voltage.
Swimming Pool Junction Boxes
•	 Black LEXAN® cover, die-cast solid brass base

4 15⁄16"

•	 Supplied with brass closure plugs, four ground
screws, sealing gasket and mounting hardware
•	31⁄16" x 43⁄16" x 31⁄4" deep

3 1⁄4"

3 1⁄16"

•	 Listed in accordance to NEC® Section 680.24

Grounding Posts for
flexible cord ground wire
Strain-Relief Clamp
(Adjustable for use on
Hub “A” or “B”)

B

A

Use Hub “A” or “B” for
entry of flexible cord
from pool light

Grounding Post
for attaching grounding
conductor from feed wire

C

Use Hub “C” for entry
of feed wiring
Compression Grounding
Post for bonding wire
(if required)

Inside View

SPJ-3

SB11PL
SB14
SB100

SPJ-5

SPJ Series

SB Series

Cat. No.

No. of
Plugs

Hub Size

Std.
Ctn.

SPJ-3
SPJ-5
SPJ-MB
SPJ-SR

3
5
—
—

(2) 1⁄2" and (1) 1"
(1) 1⁄2", (2) 3⁄4" and (2) 1"
Mounting Brackets
Rod

24
24
24
24

Cat. No.

Cubic
In.

No. of
Plugs

SB11PL
SB14
SB100

22.0
22.0
22.0

1
1
1

Description
Conduit Hub Size (in.)

Packaging

A

B

C

Box

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4

1

⁄2
3
⁄4
1

1

⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4

1
1
1

10
10
10

1

UL Listed E-63648.
Weatherproof.
LEXAN ® is a registered trademark of SABIC Innovative Plastics Company.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-264

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Carlon Enclosures
& Junction Boxes
®

Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes
Carlon® Non-Metallic Junction Boxes...........................A-266–A-274
Circuit Safe® NEMA Enclosures....................................A-275–A-283
Circuit Safe® JIC Enclosures........................................A-284–A-288
Circuit Safe® Pushbutton Enclosures............................A-289–A-292
Circuit Safe® Enclosure Accessories.............................A-293–A-298
Himeline® Enclosures...................................................A-299–A-315
Slack and Splice Enclosures........................................A-316–A-317
Technical Information..................................................A-318–A-326

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
To give you a better way to install
parking lot lights, we started
at the bottom.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Curved Lid J-Box
Anyone who’s worked with parking lot light poles knows the problem.
Those tiny, integral hand holes for electrical wiring can really slow a
project down. But now, there’s a better answer for shopping centers,
car dealerships, sports arenas, office complexes or anywhere you
need pole lighting for large parking lot areas — the Carlon®
non-metallic curved lid J-Boxes.
Carlon® curved lid J-Boxes are listed in accordance with UL 50 specifications
for Electrical Enclosures as well as NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
ratings. They are available in sizes 8" x 8" or 12" x 12". Both the base and
lid are made from PVC to eliminate rust and corrosion, and both are supplied
with tamper-resistant screws.
Designed specifically for use with 24" diameter concrete piers, J-Boxes
are installed, along with all necessary conduit and fittings, when piers
are poured. This gives installers a giant junction box at the base of every
pole to ease wiring, facilitate circuit management and provide easy
post-installation maintenance. Just take a closer look, and you’ll see
why our non-metallic J-Boxes are a better choice for you.

Install Carlon Weatherproof Covers
®

Features
•	 NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
•	UL® Listed and CSA Certified
•	 Paintable lid
•	 Dividers available to separate high and low voltage,
and can be retrofitted into existing applications
•	 Lids provide locations to mount weatherproof covers:
		

8" x 8" — One location

		

12" x 12" — Three locations

•	 Nonconductive and noncorrosive
•	 Designed for a 24" diameter concrete pier
	
Note: The J-Box can also be installed in concrete piers from 18" to 36" in diameter.
Contact your Thomas & Betts representative for installation details.

A-266

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
®

Easy to Install

1

J -Box, with all conduit and fittings placed as desired,
is temporarily attached to the concrete form — base
and lid inside.

2

 emove form after concrete has been poured
R
and allowed to cure.

3

Pop off the J-Box lid, leaving an 8" x 8" x 4"
or 12" x 12" x 4" access area, depending
on the J-Box selected.

4

After wiring is completed, the lid is replaced
to complete the installation.

Once your J-Boxes are installed, you can speed projects along by pre-wiring
before poles arrive. Or, you can install poles first and use them to mount
cable-pulling equipment — a particular advantage for long, difficult wire
pulls. Of course, all the extra hand room our J-Boxes offer makes splicing
much easier and faster than working through cramped pole-access holes.

More flexibility, fewer home runs
and easier maintenance, too.
Extra room also gives you splicing space for options like zone lighting or to
reduce the number of home runs, which can lower trenching and associated
materials costs by up to 30%. In addition, the box lids provide locations
to mount receptacles and weatherproof covers for even more flexibility.
For easy maintenance, fixture protection can be placed at the base,
and if need be, poles can even be removed and replaced in the middle
of the circuit without affecting overall lighting.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Faster, easier wiring
for greater productivity.

Site Lighting Plan with J-BOX

Site Lighting Plan without J-BOX

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-267

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

J-Box Assemblies
E108856

cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

E88C24
E1212C24

8x8x4
12 x 12 x 4

6
2

28.3
9.7

LR31146
Except where
noted by

Accessories
Replacement Lids

Dividers
The National Electrical Code® (NEC®) allows electrical conductors to
share an outlet box when the conductors and communication cables are
separated by a barrier within the box.

J-Box Dividers are used to separate high- and low-voltage
devices and solvent cement into place.

cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

E88L24
E1212L24

8x8
12 x 12

1
1

2.1
2.3

CAT. No.
E88DIV
(For use with CAT. NO. E88C24)
E1212DIV
(For use with CAT. NO. E1212C24)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

6

2.1

2

2.3

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

A-268

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Molded Non-Metallic Junction
Boxes — 6P Rated
®

Type 6P enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to provide a
degree of protection against contact with enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hosedirected water, entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth and
external ice formation.

•	 All Carlon® Junction Boxes are UL® Listed/CSA Certified
and maintain a minimum of a NEMA Type 4/4x Rating
•	 Part numbers with an asterisk (*) are UL® Listed and maintain
a NEMA Type 6P Rating and Type 4/4X Rating
Except
where
noted
by †

TC

E11461

W

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Non-metallic junction boxes are UL® Listed with a NEMA 6P rating per Section
314.28 of the National Electrical Code® and CSA Certified per Section 12 of the
Canadian Electrical Code. Manufactured from PVC or PPO thermoplastic molding
compound and featuring foam-in-place gasketed lids attached with stainless steel
screws, these rugged enclosures offer all the corrosion resistance and physical
properties you need for direct burial applications.

AT

B

H

D

C

TB

AB

dimensions (in.)

material

Cat. No.

Size (in.)
HxWxD

std.
Ctn.

min
At

min
Ab

min
B

min
C

Tb

Tc

PVC

E989NNJ*
E987N*
E989NNR* †

4x4x2
4x4x4
4x4x6

10
10
10

311⁄16
311⁄16
311⁄16

35⁄8
31⁄2
33⁄8

N/A
N/A
N/A

2
4
6

.160
.160
.160

.155
.155
.200

X
X
X

5x5x2
6x6x4
6x6x6
8x8x4
8x8x7
12 x 12 x 4
12 x 12 x 6

10
2
8
1
2
3
2

411⁄16
6
55⁄8
8
721⁄32
115⁄8
1115⁄16

41⁄2
55⁄8
53⁄8
8
75⁄16
111⁄2
117⁄8

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
111⁄8
117⁄16

2
4
6
4
7
4
6

.110
.190
.160
.185
.160
.160
.265

.150
.190
.150
.190
.150
.150
.185

E989PPJ*
E987R-CAR*
E989RRR-UPC*
E989N-CAR
E989SSX-UPC
E989UUN
E989R-UPC

thermoplastic

std. wt.
(Lbs.)

3
4
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

3
3
14
2
6
12
10

* UL Listed
†

Not CSA Certified

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-269

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Large PVC Junction Boxes — NEMA 4X

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Large PVC Junction Boxes are fabricated from Type II PVC sheet.
Reduce the use of steel boxes and keep your wiring connections clean,
safe and dry using these high-quality, fully gasketed junction boxes.

Features and Benefits:
•	 PVC Type II material with “Uni-Body” construction 	
and penetration welding providing a very strong, 	
durable enclosure
•	 UL94V-0 flame rating
•	 Suitable for exposure of up to 90° C
•	 PVC material enables the use of standard solvent 	
cements for fitting attachment
•	 Junction boxes are available with or without 	
mounting flanges
•	 Individual mounting feet are available and provided 	
in kits of four
•	 Custom features such as windows or panel mounts 	
are available
•	 Custom sizes are also available upon request
•	 Made in the USA

H
dimensions (in.)

cat. no.

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

std.
wt.
(lbs.)

EP12128
EP181812
EP201808
EP202008
EP241808
EP242008
EP242408
EP302408
EP362408

12
18
20
20
24
24
24
30
36

12
18
18
20
18
20
24
24
24

8
12
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

8.25
12.25
8.25
8.25
8.25
8.25
8.25
8.25
8.25

1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00

10.5
16
18
18
22
21.5
21.5
27.5
33.5

10.5
16
16
18
16
17.5
21.5
21.5
21.5

12.75
18.75
18.75
20.75
18.75
20.75
24.75
24.75
24.75

11
21
20
22
24
25
29
34
39

E

D

A

G

Accessories

B

F
std. wt.
(lbs.)

Cat. No. Description
ESMFK-1 “CleverMount” Mounting Feet (4 Feet and Fasteners)

5
C

A-270

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Single-Gang FS Device Boxes
®

Type FSS

3.281
(83, 34)
.938
(23, 83)

2.27
(57, 5)

Ø.20
(5, 1)

5.24
(133, 1)
4.54
(115, 3)

3.281
83.3

0.938
23.8 TYP
3.37
85.7

2.8
71.1

2.80
(71, 1)

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE

2.87
73

.43
(11)

3.87
98.4

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE
0.43
10.9

Ø 0.2
5.1
4.54
115.3

2.30
61.5

2.42
61.5

“B”

•	 For dead-end terminations

•	 Integral mounting feet provide
easy mounting

•	 All sizes take standard covers
and accessories or devices
Cat. No.

•	 For multiple dead-end
circuit terminations or where
additional support is required 	
in stub-up applications

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1
1

19
18
19
18
19
18
19

10
12
10
12
18
8
10

E980DFN
C980DFN-CTN
E980EFN
C980EFN-CTN
E980FFN
C980FFN-CTN
E980FFN-CAR

1

E11461

Cat. No.

•	 All sizes take standard covers
and accessories or devices
•	 Detachable mounting feet
provide easy mounting

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

19
18
19
18
19
18

10
12
10
12
10
8

E982DFN
C982DFN-CTN
E982EFN
C982EFN-CTN
E982FFN
C982FFN-CTN

1

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

5.70
(144, 78)

Type FSE

LR31146
Where 	
noted 	
by

Canada Only

Canada Only
5.70
(144, 78)
3.281
(83, 34)

Type FSC

.938
(23, 83)

2.27
(57, 5)

0.938 TYP
23.8
3.37
85.7

2.8
71.1

2.87
73

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE

5.24
(133, 1)
.43
(11)

3.281
83.3

Type FSCC

.43
(11)

4.54
(115, 3)

0.43
11

Ø 0.2
5.1

4.54
115.3

2.30
61.5

•	 All sizes take standard covers
and accessories or devices
Cat. No.
E981DFN
C981DFN-CTN
E981EFN
C981EFN-CTN
E981FFN
E981FFN-CAR
C981FFN-CTN

•	 Detachable mounting feet
provide easy mounting

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1
1

19
18
19
18
19
19
18

15
12
15
12
18
10
8

1

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE
0.43
10.9

2.42
61.5

“B”

•	 For through terminations

3.87
98.4

•	 For multiple through-circuit
terminations or where
additional support is required 	
in stub-up applications
Cat. No.
E979DFN-CAR
C979DFN
E979EFN-CAR
C979EFN
E979FFN
C979FFN

•	 All sizes take standard covers
and accessories or devices
•	 Detachable mounting feet
provide easy mounting

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

19
18
19
18
19
18

10
15
10
15
15
15

1

Canada Only

Canada Only

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-271

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Single-Gang FD Deep Device Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

2 7⁄8"

Type FD
•	 For terminations where hub requirements vary
according to application — hubs easily made
with flared wood bit or hole saw

2 7⁄8"
2 ⁄32"

3 7⁄8"

3 3⁄8"
CL

2 7⁄8"

17

•	 All sizes take standard covers and accessories
or devices
4 5⁄8"

•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting
Cat. No.
E9801
CE9801-CTN
C9801-347

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

N/A
N/A
N/A

25
25
25

10
10
10

2 3⁄4"

Canada Only

3.281
83.3

Type FDC
•	 For through terminations where large devices
or additional wiring capacityis required

0.938 TYP
23.8

2.8
71.1

•	 All sizes take standard covers
and accessories or devices
•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting

2.87
73
0.43
11

Cat. No.
E9811DN
C9811DN
E9811EN
C9811EN
E9811FN
C9811FN

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

25
25
25
25
25
25

10
10
10
10
10
10

1

3.37
85.7

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE

Ø 0.2
5.1

4.54
115.3

3.87
98.4

0.43
11

2.99
75.9

Canada Only

Type FDE

3.281
83.3

•	 For dead-end terminations where large devices or additional
wiring capacity is required

0.938 TYP
23.8

2.8
71.1

•	 All sizes take standard covers and accessories or devices

3.37
85.7

•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting
Cat. No.
E9801DN
C9801DN
E9801EN
C9801EN
E9801FN
C9801FN

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

25
25
25
25
25
25

10
10
10
10
10
10

1

2.87
73
4.54
115.3

3.87
98.4

DIA. TO FIT
DESIGNATED
CONDUIT SIZE

Ø 0.2
5.1
0.43
11

2.99
75.9

Canada Only

A-272

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

LR31146
Where
noted
by

E11461

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Two-Gang FS Device Boxes
®

Type 2FSC

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

4.62 SQ.

2.31

•	 For through terminations where two devices or additional
wiring capacity is required

5.10
2.55

•	 All sizes take standard covers and accessories or devices
•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting
1.63

Cat. No.
E9812D
CE9812D-CTN
E9812E
CE9812E-CTN
E9812F
C9812F

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

32
32
32
32
32
32

10
10
10
10
10
10

1

3.25

R .25 X .14 THICK
Ø .20

1.98

Canada Only

Type FS

4.620
(117.25)

•	 For terminations where hub requirements vary according
to application — hubs easily made with flared wood bit
or hole saw

4.620
(117.35)

•	 All sizes take standard covers and accessories or devices
3.282
(83.35)

•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

E9802
CE9802

N/A
N/A

32
32

10
10

5.100
(129.54)

3.250
(82.55)

1.980
(50.29)

Canada Only

Type 2FSE

4.620
(117.35)

•	 For dead-end terminations where two devices or additional
wiring capacity is required
•	 Integral mounting feet provide easy mounting

Cat. No.
E9802D
CE9802D-CTN
E9802E
CE9802E-CTN
E9802F
C9802F

3.282
(83.35)

Size (in.)

Vol. Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

⁄2
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1

32
32
32
32
32
32

10
10
10
10
10
1

1
1

4.620
(117.35)

5.600
(142.24)

•	 All sizes take standard covers and accessories or devices

5.100
(129.54)

3.250
(82.55)

1.980
(50.29)

Canada Only

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-273

Carlon Non-Metallic Junction Boxes
Blank Covers for Device Boxes

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Single-Gang
•	 Fits Carlon® single-gang FS boxes
•	 Supplied with stainless steel mounting screws and gasket

Cat. No.

Color

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

E980CN-CAR
E980CM-CAR

Gray
White

12
12

1.60
1.60

Two-Gang
•	 Fits Carlon® two-gang FS boxes, other non-metallic
and metallic FS boxes
•	 Supplied with stainless steel mounting screws and gasket

Cat. No.
E9802CN-CAR

A-274

Color

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Gray

10

2.17

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
®

Circuit Safe® NEMA Enclosures are the flagship product of the Carlon® Enclosure offering. Molded in tough,
durable polycarbonate resin, these enclosures lead the market in terms of design, durability, aesthetics and
economy of use.
Ranging in size from 6" x 4" x 4" to 16" x 14" x 6", all Circuit Safe® NEMA products are UL 50 Listed and
meet Types 4X, 12 and 13. These enclosures utilize recognized materials that carry an ultraviolet rating of
F1, ensuring a very long, stable service life when installed outdoors. In addition, the use of polycarbonate
material means that these enclosures enjoy an extremely high impact-resistance rating…almost three
times more impact resistant than traditional fiberglass enclosures.
Installation of components is made easy, too, with the Panel Adjuster Kits and Swing-Out Panel Kits.
Subpanels can be stacked or suspended at any depth within the enclosure, maximizing the space available
for component mounting. Machining polycarbonate is also safe and easy. There are no splintering problems
or airborne fibers as is typical when machining traditional fiberglass products.
Lighter, stronger, easier, safer to use and better looking. Check out Carlon’s Circuit Safe® NEMA line today.
Features and Benefits:
•	 100% non-metallic construction, including hinges
•	 Sturdy SS latches install without penetration of the enclosure base
•	 Clear covers are available, which eliminate the need for window kits
•	 All cover screws are captive
•	 Panel suspension system enables the installation of panels at any
depth, including stacking of multiple panels
•	 Swing panels are also available
•	 Available in junction boxes, external hinge
and hidden hinge versions
•	 Subpanels are available in steel or PVC
•	 Non-metallic mounting rails for easy installation
•	 Less than half the weight of metal enclosures, 25% lighter
than fiberglass, easier to handle and less expensive to ship
•	 Full modification services are available
Applications:
•	 Any outdoor applications, especially where
sunlight resistance is an issue
•	 Applications where water is present
•	 Applications where damage during shipment,
installation or use is an issue

•	 Any applications where it is necessary to view
internal components through a clear cover
•	 Applications where weight is an issue
•	 Applications where the ability to pass wireless signals
is needed
•	 Applications where rust and corrosion are an issue
Examples:
•	 Septic and pump controls
•	 Wireless system component protection
•	 Marina and sea-side installations
•	 Controls that require though-cover viewing
of readouts and dials
•	 Machine controls/process controls
•	 Food and beverage process controls
•	 Security system controls
Standards:
•	 Meets or exceeds NEMA Types 4X, 12 and 13
•	 Listed per UL 50 as Types 4X, 12 and 13

E88685

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

NEMA Enclosure Styles
Circuit Safe® NEMA Enclosures are available in three different cover options and a wide range of sizes. From
our screw-cover style enclosures to our hidden-hinge cover style enclosures to our external-hinge cover style
enclosures, Carlon® has a Circuit Safe® NEMA enclosure to meet your application-specific needs.
Styles
•	 Screw Cover
•	 External Hinge
•	 Hidden Hinge
Cover Color Options
•	Opaque
•	Clear
Material
•	Polycarbonate
(Bases and Lids)

External-Hinge Cover

Screw Cover

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Hidden-Hinge Cover

A-275

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Meets NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12.
Screw-On Covers

E88685

Enclosure Kits
Opaque
Cover*

Clear
Cover*

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Size (IN.)

Steel

PVC

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)
Opaque/Clear

NS644
NS664
NS864
NS884
NS1084
NS1086
NS10106
NS12106
NS12126
NS14126
NS16146

NV644
NV664
NV864
NV884
NV1084
NV1086
NV10106
NV12106
NV12126
NV14126
NV16146

6x4x4
6x6x4
8x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 8 x 6
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
14 x 12 x 6
16 x 14 x 6

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Opa 1.8/Clr 1.9
Opa 2.4/Clr 2.4
Opa 2.9/Clr 2.8
Opa 3.2/Clr 3.3
Opa 4.0/Clr 3.9
Opa 4.6/Clr 4.5
Opa 5.3/Clr 4.9
Opa 6.1/Clr 5.2
Opa 6.8/Clr 6.1
Opa 7.4/Clr 7.0
Opa 9.2/Clr 8.1

Back Panels**

Opaque Cover

* Include body, lid and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately.
Clear Cover

Individual Components
Enclosure Base*

Enclosure Lids

Back Panels**
Steel

PVC

CAT. No.

Enclosure
Size (IN.)

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

Opaque
Lids

Clear
Lids

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

CAT. NO.

CAT. NO.

Std.
Ctn.

NP644B
NP664B
NP864B
NP884B
NP1084B
NP1086B
NP1010B
NP1210B
NP1212B
NP1412B
NP1614B

6x4x4
6x6x4
8x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 8 x 6
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
14 x 12 x 6
16 x 14 x 6

18
12
12
14
12
8
6
6
5
5
4

21
17
18
28
26
23
20
23
22
24
31

NS64L
NS66L
NS86L
NS88L
NS108L
NS108L
NS1010L
NS1210L
NS1212L
NS1412L
NS1614L

NV64L
NV66L
NV86L
NV88L
NV108L
NV108L
NV1010L
NV1210L
NV1212L
NV1412L
NV1614L

16
12
9
18
12
12
11
12
10
5
5

Opa 6.4/Clr 5.7
Opa 6.2/Clr 5.7
Opa 6/Clr 4.4
Opa 14/Clr 11.2
Opa 13/Clr 11
Opa 13/Clr 11
Opa 14/Clr 12
Opa 15/Clr 15
Opa 15/Clr 14
Opa 9/Clr 9
Opa 11/Clr 11

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

* Mounting rails are not included. See “Mounting Rails” on page A-307.
** Order back panels separately.

A-276

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

.63" TYP
ø .31" TYP
.49"

.15" TYP
#10-32
Screw Thread

.16" TYP

H
G
A
C

E

D
14 GA.

1.00" TYP

.51"

F

.34"
(To Bottom
of Installed
Mounting Rail)

B

Mounting Rail
J
B
L
G

A

K

I

I F
D

C

.34"

J
.45"

H

E

.31" dia.

.44"
.44

Mounting Rail

Back Panel
(order separately)

.19"
.19

Individual Components (continued)
Enclosure
Mounting Hole
Spacing

Enclosure With
Enclosure Size (In.)

Panel
Mounting Hole
Spacing

Back Panel
Size

Back Panel**

CAT. NO.

Clear Lid

Opaque Lid

CAT. NO.*

CAT. NO.*

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

Steel

PVC

NV644
NV664
NV864
NV884
NV1084
NV1086
NV10106
NV12106
NV12126
NV14126
NV16146

NS644
NS664
NS864
NS884
NS1084
NS1086
NS10106
NS12106
NS12126
NS14126
NS16146

6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40
16.40

4.40
6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40

4.49
4.49
4.49
4.49
4.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49

3.98
3.98
3.98
3.98
3.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98

5.13
5.13
5.13
5.13
5.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13

7.69
7.69
9.69
9.69
11.69
11.69
11.69
13.69
13.69
15.69
17.69

6.75
6.75
8.75
8.75
10.75
10.75
10.75
12.75
12.75
14.75
16.75

2.00
4.00
4.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
10.00
10.00
12.00

4.29
4.28
6.27
6.30
8.34
8.34
8.29
10.30
10.24
12.26
14.26

2.28
4.28
4.26
6.30
6.30
6.30
8.29
8.28
10.24
10.24
12.26

4.88
4.88
6.75
6.75
8.75
8.75
8.75
10.75
10.75
12.75
14.75

2.88
4.88
4.88
6.88
6.88
6.88
8.88
8.88
10.88
10.88
12.88

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1612P

* Include body, lid and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately (10/32 – 3⁄8 Back Panel screws not supplied).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-277

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Meets NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12.
E88685

Hidden-Hinge Covers
Enclosure Kits
Opaque
Cover*

Clear
Cover*

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Size (In.)

Steel

NH644
NH664
NH864
NH884
NH1084
NH1086
NH10106
NH12106
NH12126
NH14126
NH16146

NI644
NI664
NI864
NI884
NI1084
NI1086
NI10106
NI12106
NI12126
NI14126
NI16146

6x4x5†
6x6x5
8x6x5
8x8x5
10 x 8 x 5
10 x 8 x 7
10 x 10 x 7
12 x 10 x 7
12 x 12 x 7
14 x 12 x 7
16 x 14 x 7

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

PVC

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)
Opaque/Clear

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Opa 2.2/Clr 2.8
Opa 2.7/Clr 3.2
Opa 3.3/Clr 3.8
Opa 3.8/Clr 3.8
Opa 4.0/Clr 4.5
Opa 5.2/Clr 5.1
Opa 5.7/Clr 5.8
Opa 6.9/Clr 6.1
Opa 7.7/Clr 7.2
Opa 8.3/Clr 7.9
Opa 10.1/Clr 9.6

Back Panels**

Opaque Cover

* Include body, cover assembly and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately.
†

6 x 4 x 5 size not available with quick-release latches.

Clear Cover

Individual Components
Enclosure Base*

Enclosure Lids
Opaque
Lids

Clear
Lids

CAT. No.

Std.
Enclosure Std. Wt.
Size (in.) Ctn. (lbs.)

CAT. No. CAT. No. Ctn.

NP644B
NP664B
NP864B
NP884B
NP1084B
NP1086B
NP1010B
NP1210B
NP1212B
NP1412B
NP1614B

6x4x5†
6x4x5
8x6x5
8x8x5
10 x 8 x 5
10 x 8 x 7
10 x 10 x 7
12 x 10 x 7 ‡
12 x 12 x 7 ‡
14 x 12 x 7 ‡
16 x 14 x 7 ‡

NH64L
NH66L
NH86L
NH88L
NH108L
NH108L
NH1010L
NH1210L
NH1212L
NH1412L
NH1614L

18
12
12
14
12
8
6
6
5
5
4

21
17
18
28
26
23
20
23
22
24
31

NI64L
NI66L
NI86L
NI88L
NI108L
NI108L
NI1010L
NI1210L
NI1212L
NI1412L
NI1614L

Std.

Collars

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

CAT. No.

16 Opa 6.8/Clr 6.3 NH64C
12 Opa 6.8/Clr 6.3 NH66C
9 Opa 6.3/Clr 5.7 NH86C
18 Opa 16/Clr 15 NH88C
12 Opa 13/Clr 12 NH108C
12 Opa 13/Clr 12 NH108C
11 Opa 14/Clr 13 NH1010C
12 Opa 17/Clr 6 NH1210C
10 Opa 17/Clr 16 NH1212C
5 Opa 10/Clr 10 NH1412C
5 Opa 13/Clr 12 NH1614C

Std.
Ctn.

16
12
9
9
12
12
11
12
12
5
5

Back Panels**

Std.
PVC
Steel
Wt.
(lbs.) CAT. No. CAT. No.

6
5
4
3.6
7.8
7.8
7.5
8
7.7
4.7
5.6

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

Latches
Steel
Latch

Std.
Ctn. CAT. No.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

* Mounting rails are not included. See “Mounting Rails” listed on page A-307.
** Order back panels separately.

A-278

†

6 x 4 x 5 enclosures are not available with quick-release latches.

‡

Sizes 12 x 10 and larger require two (2) latches per enclosure.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS

Nonmetallic
Latch

CAT. No.

Std.
Ctn.

NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Mounting Rail
1.97 TYP
1.82 TYP

J
G

B

L
I

I F

A

K

D

C

.34"

.45"

H

.31" dia.

E

J

Mounting Rail
.44"
.44

Back Panel
.19"
(order separately) .19

Individual Components (continued)
Enclosure
Mounting
Hole Spacing

Enclosure With
Enclosure Size (In.)

Opaque Lid

Clear Lid

CAT. NO.*

CAT. NO.*

A

B

C

D

E

F

NH644
NH664
NH864
NH884
NH1084
NH1086
NH10106
NH12106
NH12126
NH14126
NH16146

NI644
NI664
NI864
NI884
NI1084
NI1086
NI10106
NI12106
NI12126
NI14126
NI16146

6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40
16.40

4.40
6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40

5.30
5.30
5.30
5.30
5.30
7.30
7.30
7.30
7.30
7.30
7.30

4.79
4.79
4.79
4.79
4.79
6.79
6.79
6.79
6.79
6.79
6.79

5.94
5.94
5.94
5.94
5.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94
7.94

7.69
7.69
9.69
9.69
11.69
11.69
11.59
13.69
13.69
15.69
17.69

G

H

6.75 2.00
6.75 4.00
8.75 4.00
8.75 6.00
10.75 6.00
10.75 6.00
10.75 8.00
12.75 8.00
12.75 10.00
14.75 10.00
16.75 12.00

Panel
Mounting
Hole Spacing

Back Panel**
Back Panel Size

CAT. No.

I

J

K

L

Steel

PVC

4.29
4.28
6.27
6.30
8.34
8.34
8.29
10.30
10.24
12.26
14.26

2.28
4.28
4.26
6.30
6.30
6.30
8.29
8.28
10.24
10.24
12.26

4.88
4.88
6.75
6.75
8.75
8.75
8.75
10.75
10.75
12.75
14.75

2.88
4.88
4.88
6.88
6.88
6.88
8.88
8.88
10.88
10.88
12.88

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1612P

* Include body, lid and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately (10/32 – 3⁄8 Back Panel screws not supplied).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-279

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
Meets NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

E88685

External-Hinge Covers

Enclosure Kits
Opaque
Cover*

Clear
Cover*

Cat. NO.

Cat. NO.

NJ664
NJ864
NJ884
NJ1084
NJ1086
NJ10106
NJ12106
NJ12126
NJ14126
NJ16146

NC664
NC864
NC884
NC1084
NC1086
NC10106
NC12106
NC12126
NC14126
NC16146

Back
Back
Panels** Panels**
Steel
PVC

JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

Size (In.)

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)
Opaque/Clear

6x6x4
8x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 8 x 6
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 10 x 6
12 x 12 x 6
14 x 12 x 6
16 x 14 x 6

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Opa 2.4/Clr 2.4
Opa 2.9/Clr 2.9
Opa 3.3/Clr 3.3
Opa 4/Clr 4
Opa 4.6/Clr 4.7
Opa 5.6/Clr 5.3
Opa 6.3/Clr 5.8
Opa 6.9/Clr 6.6
Opa 7.7/Clr 7
Opa 8.2/Clr 8

Opaque Cover

* Include body, lid and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately.

Clear Cover

Individual Components
Enclosure Base*

Enclosure Lids
Opaque
Lids

Clear
Lids

CAT. NO.

Enclosure
Size (IN.)

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

CAT. NO.

NL664B
NL864B
NL884B
NL1084B
NL1086B
NL1010B
NL1210B
NL1212B
NL1412B
NL1614B

6x6x4
8x6x4
8x8x4
10 x 8 x 4
10 x 8 x 6
10 x 10 x 6
12 x 10 x 6 ‡
12 x 12 x 6 ‡
14 x 12 x 6 ‡
16 x 14 x 6 ‡

12
8
14
12
8
6
6
5
4
4

18
14
28
32
15
20
24
21.8
19
31

NJ66L
NJ86L
NJ88L
NJ108L
NJ108L
NJ1010L
NJ1210L
NJ1212L
NJ1412L
NJ1614L

Back Panels**

CAT. NO.

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

NC66L
NC86L
NC88L
NC108L
NC108L
NC1010L
NC1210L
NC1212L
NC1412L
NC1614L

12
9
18
12
12
11
12
10
5
5

Opa 5.0/Clr 5.9
Opa 6/Clr 5.3
Opa 15/Clr 13.5
Opa 13/Clr 11.7
Opa 13/Clr 11.7
Opa 14/Clr 13
Opa 14/Clr 15
Opa 16/Clr 14
Opa 10/Clr 9
Opa 13.5/Clr 12

Steel

PVC

Latches
Std.

CAT. NO. CAT. NO. Ctn.
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Steel
Latch

Non-metallic
Latch

CAT. No.

CAT. NO.

Std.
Ctn.

SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS
SSLS

NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS
NPLIS

25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25

* Mounting rails are not included. See Mounting Rails on page A-307.
** Order back panels separately.
‡

A-280

Sizes 12 x 10 and larger require two (2) latches per enclosure.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
®

235°

H

#10-32
Screw Thread

.15" TYP

.91"

2.13"
Swing
Dim.

.87"

G

(Order
Separately)

14 GA.

D
1.00" TYP

.87"

Swing Out Dim.

Metal
Latch E

A
C

3.83"

.49"

.16" TYP

Plastic
Latch

.51"

F

.34"
(To Bottom
of Installed
Mounting Rail)

B

(Order
Separately)

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

.63" TYP
ø .31" TYP

Individual Components (continued)
Enclosure
Mounting
Hole Spacing

Enclosure With
Enclosure Size (IN.)

Panel
Mounting
Hole Spacing

Back Panel
Size

Back Panel**

CAT. No.

Clear Lid

Opaque Lid

CAT. NO.*

CAT. NO.*

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

Steel

PVC

NC644
NC664
NC864
NC884
NC1084
NC1086
NC10106
NC12106
NC12126
NC14126
NC16146

NJ644
NJ664
NJ864
NJ884
NJ1084
NJ1086
NJ10106
NJ12106
NJ12126
NJ14126
NJ16146

6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40
16.40

4.40
6.40
6.40
8.40
8.40
8.40
10.40
10.40
12.40
12.40
14.40

4.49
4.49
4.49
4.49
4.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49
6.49

3.98
3.98
3.98
3.98
3.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98
5.98

5.13
5.13
5.13
5.13
5.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13
7.13

7.69
7.69
9.69
9.69
11.69
11.69
11.69
13.69
13.69
15.69
17.69

6.75
6.75
8.75
8.75
10.75
10.75
10.75
12.75
12.75
14.75
16.75

2.00
4.00
4.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
10.00
10.00
12.00

4.29
4.28
6.27
6.30
8.34
8.34
8.29
10.30
10.24
12.26
14.26

2.28
4.28
4.26
6.30
6.30
6.30
8.29
8.28
10.24
10.24
12.26

4.88
4.88
6.75
6.75
8.75
8.75
8.75
10.75
10.75
12.75
14.75

2.88
4.88
4.88
6.88
6.88
6.88
8.88
8.88
10.88
10.88
12.88

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

* Include body, lid and mounting rail kit.
** Order back panels separately (10/32 – 3⁄8 Back Panel screws not supplied).

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-281

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
Quick Reference

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Screw-On Cover Styles
Enclosure Kits
(no Panel or Latches)

Individual Components
Back Panels

Opaque Lid

Clear Lid

NS644
NV644

NS664

NV664

NS864

NV864

NS884

NV884

NS1084

NV1084

NS1086

NV1086

NS10106

NV10106

NS12106

NV12106

NS12126

NV12126

NS14126

NV14126

NS16146

NV16146

Body

Lid

Collar

Mtg. Rails

Steel

PVC

NP644B
NP644B
NP664B
NP664B
NP864B
NP864B
NP884B
NP884B
NP1084B
NP1084B
NP1086B
NP1086B
NP1010B
NP1010B
NP1210B
NP1210B
NP1212B
NP1212B
NP1412B
NP1412B
NP1614B
NP1614B

NS64L
NV64L
NS66L
NV66L
NS86L
NV86L
NS88L
NV88L
NS108L
NV108L
NS108L
NV108L
NS1010L
NV1010L
NS1210L
NV1210L
NS1212L
NV1212L
NS1412L
NV1412L
NS1614L
NV1614L

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

NMK4V
NMK4V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK14V
NMK14V

JP64
JP64
JP66
JP66
JP86
JP86
JP88
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1010
JP1210
JP1210
JP1212
JP1212
JP1412
JP1412
JP1614
JP1614

JP64P
JP64P
JP66P
JP66P
JP86P
JP86P
JP88P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1412P
JP1614P
JP1614P

External-Hinge Cover Styles
Individual Components

Enclosure Kits
(no Panel or Latches)
Opaque Lid

NJ644
NJ664
NJ864
NJ884
NJ1084
NJ1086
NJ10106
NJ12106
NJ12126
NJ14126
NJ16146

A-282

Clear Lid

NC644
NC664
NC864
NC884
NC1084
NC1086
NC10106
NC12106
NC12126
NC14126
NC16146

Back Panels

Latches (Qty. needed)

Body

Lid

Collar

Mtg. Rails

Steel

PVC

Steel

Non-metallic

NL644B
NL644B
NL664B
NL664B
NL864B
NL864B
NL884B
NL884B
NL1084B
NL1084B
NL1086B
NL1086B
NL1010B
NL1010B
NL1210B
NL1210B
NL1212B
NL1212B
NL1412B
NL1412B
NL1614B
NL1614B

NJ64L
NC64L
NJ66L
NC66L
NJ86L
NC86L
NJ88L
NC88L
NJ108L
NC108L
NJ108L
NC108L
NJ1010L
NC1010L
NJ1210L
NC1210L
NJ1212L
NC1212L
NJ1412L
NC1412L
NJ1614L
NC1614L

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

NMK4V
NMK4V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK14V
NMK14V

JP64
JP64
JP66
JP66
JP86
JP86
JP88
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1010
JP1210
JP1210
JP1212
JP1212
JP1412
JP1412
JP1614
JP1614

JP64P
JP64P
JP66P
JP66P
JP86P
JP86P
JP88P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1412P
JP1614P
JP1614P

SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (1)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)
SSLS (2)

NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (1)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)
NPL1S (2)

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe NEMA Enclosures
®

Individual Components

Enclosure Kits
(no Panel or Latches)
Opaque
Lid

Back Panels

Clear
Lid

NH644
NI644
NH664
NI664
NH864
NI864
NH884
NI884
NH1084
NI1084
NH1086
NI1086
NH10106
NI10106
NH12106
NI12106
NH12126
NI12126
NH14126
NI14126
NH16146
NI16146

Latches (Qty. needed)

Body

Lid

Collar

Mtg. Rails

Steel

PVC

Steel

Nonmetallic

NP644B
NP644B
NP664B
NP664B
NP864B
NP864B
NP884B
NP884B
NP1084B
NP1084B
NP1086B
NP1086B
NP1010B
NP1010B
NP1210B
NP1210B
NP1212B
NP1212B
NP1412B
NP1412B
NP1614B
NP1614B

NH64L
NI64L
NH66L
NI66L
NH86L
NI86L
NH88L
NI88L
NH108L
NI108L
NH108L
NI108L
NH1010L
NI1010L
NH1210L
NI1210L
NH1212L
NI1212L
NH1412L
NI1412L
NH1614L
NI1614L

NH64C
NH64C
NH66C
NH66C
NH86C
NH86C
NH88C
NH88C
NH108C
NH108C
NH108C
NH108C
NH1010C
NH1010C
NH1210C
NH1210C
NH1212C
NH1212C
NH1412C
NH1412C
NH1614C
NH1614C

NMK4V
NMK4V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK6V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK8V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK10V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK12V
NMK14V
NMK14V

JP64
JP64
JP66
JP66
JP86
JP86
JP88
JP88
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP108
JP1010
JP1010
JP1210
JP1210
JP1212
JP1212
JP1412
JP1412
JP1614
JP1614

JP64P
JP64P
JP66P
JP66P
JP86P
JP86P
JP88P
JP88P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1412P
JP1614P
JP1614P

SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (1)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)
SSLL (2)

NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (1)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)
NPL1L (2)

.63" TYP

ø .31" TYP

150°
.15" TYP

.90"

2.68"
Swing
Dim.

.16" TYP

#10-32
Screw Thread

1.39"

H
G
C

Metal
Latch E

A

D

14 GA.
1.00" TYP

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

.87"

3.82"
Swing Out
Dim.

(Order
Separately)

.51"

F

.34"
(To Bottom
of Installed
Mounting Rail)

B

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Hidden-Hinge Cover Styles

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Plastic
Latch

(Order
Separately)

A-283

Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures
Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

®

Manufactured from structural foam thermoplastic, Carlon® Circuit Safe®
JIC enclosures provide high-impact strength to eliminate dents and
deformations along with high dielectric strength, excellent weathering
capabilities and excellent resistance to a wide range of corrosive agents,
acids, alkalines and salts. These UL Approved and CSA Recognized
enclosures also withstand wet and dirty environments, while their
thick-wall construction make them a particularly good choice wherever
condensation is a concern. Rated for use in Type 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX,
4, 4X, 12 and 13 environments, Carlon® Circuit Safe® JIC enclosures
are suited for virtually all indoor/outdoor industrial, MRO and OEM
applications. They are available in 10 sizes from 6 x 6 x 5 through
30 x 24 x 12 with a choice of screw or hinged design, opaque covers
or clear polycarbonate covers that protect devices from hostile
environments while enabling monitoring of instrumentation
and/or electrical functions.

Features:
•	 Hinge caps make covers captive
•	 Non-metallic molded-in hinges on hinged models
•	 No rough corners, sharp edges or burrs
•	 Non-conductive — eliminates danger of electrical shock
•	 Lid design provides greater usable internal volume

Standards:
•	 Meets NEMA Types 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13
as indicated
•	UL® Listed per UL 50, enclosures for electrical equipment
•	 CSA Certified
•	 JIC compliance

•	 Ample interior space for ease of wiring
•	 Fully gasketed
•	 Ultraviolet stabilized for outdoor use
Applications:
•	 Instrument case
•	 Junction and terminal boxes
•	 Control and switching enclosures
•	 Splice and pull boxes
•	 Starter, pushbutton and transformer housings
•	 Meter and transformer cabinets

A-284

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures
Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13.
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Hinged Covers
Features:
•	 Non-metallic mounting feet and all mounting
hardware included
•	 White-painted 14-gauge steel or 1⁄4" PVC back panel
(order separately)
•	 304 (18-8) stainless steel screws (10-32/11⁄8")
•	 Lid design provides greater usable internal volume
•	 Completely non-metallic hinges
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Temperature range: -30° to 230° F
•	 Material: polycarbonate molded base and cover

D

0.312
0.312"
TYP
TYP
HH

EE

A

GG

F

C

B

E108856

Factory Assembled
Dimensions (IN.)
Opaque
Cover

Clear
Cover

CAT. No.

CAT. No.

A

B

C

CJ665
CJ863
CJ1085
CJ12106
CJ14126
CJ16147

CC665
CC863
CC1085
CC12106
CC14126
CC16147

6.50
8.50
10.50
12.50
14.50
16.50

6.50
6.50
8.50
10.50
12.50
14.50

6.69
4.49
6.69
7.69
7.72
8.46

External

Back Panel*

Internal
D

E

LR31146

Mounting
F

6.00 6.00 5.45
8.00 6.00 3.25
10.00 8.00 5.45
12.00 10.00 6.45
14.00 12.00 6.48
16.00 14.00 7.22

G

H

Std. WT.
(lbs.)
Opaque/Clear

9.00 4.00
1 (Opa 3.5)/1 (Clr 3.1)
11.00 4.00
1 (Opa 2.8)/1 (Clr 3.1)
13.00 6.00
1 (Opa 5.2)/1 (Clr 5.2)
15.00 8.00
1 (Opa 7.1)/1 (Clr 8.4)
17.00 10.00 1 (Opa 9.0)/1 (Clr 8.6)
19.00 12.00 1 (Opa 10.6)/1 (Clr 11.9)

cat. No.
Steel

PVC

Panel
Size (IN.)

JP66
JP86
JP108
JP1210
JP1412
JP1614

JP66P
JP86P
JP108P
JP1210P
JP1412P
JP1614P

4.88 x 4.88
6.75 x 4.88
8.75 x 6.88
10.75 x 8.88
12.75 x 10.88
14.75 x 12.88

Std. WT.
(lbs.)
Steel/PVC

1 (1.0)/1 (0.3)
1 (1.0)/1 (0.78)
1 (1.5)/1 (0.7)
1 (2.0)/1 (1.2)
1 (3.2)/1 (1.7)
1 (4.7)/1 (2.3)

*Order back panels separately.
Enclosures shipped with mounting feet, hinge caps and screws.
For factory-installed pad-lockable latch (part no. CJTL), consult Customer Service for price and delivery.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-285

Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures
Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

E108856

Screw-On Covers

LR31146

Features:
•	 Non-metallic mounting feet and all mounting
hardware included
•	 304 (18-8) stainless steel screws (10-32/11⁄8")
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Clear polycarbonate cover available
•	 White-painted 14-gauge steel or 1⁄4" PVC back panel
(order separately)
•	 Lid design provides greater usable internal volume
•	 Temperature range: -30° to 230° F
•	 Material: polycarbonate molded base and cover

DD

0.312
0.312"
TYP
TYP
H

EE

A

G

FF
BB

CC

Factory Assembled
Dimensions (IN.)

Back Panel*

Opaque
Cover

Clear
Cover

CAT. No.

CAT. No.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

CS665
CS863
CS1085
CS12106
CS14126
CS16147

CV665
CV863
CV1085
CV12106
CV14126
CV16147

6.50
8.50
10.50
12.50
14.50
16.50

6.50
6.50
8.50
10.50
12.50
14.50

6.69
4.49
6.69
7.69
7.72
8.46

6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00
16.00

6.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00

5.45
3.25
5.45
6.45
6.48
7.22

9.00
11.00
13.00
15.00
17.00
19.00

External

Internal

Mounting
H

cat. No.
Std. WT. (lbs.)
Opaque/Clear

4.00 1 (Opa 2.7)/1 (Clr 2.9)
4.00 1 (Opa 2.9)/1 (Clr 2.9)
6.00 1 (Opa 5.0)/1 (Clr 5.0)
8.00 1 (Opa 6.5)/1 (Clr 7.2)
10.00 1 (Opa 8.0)/1 (Clr 8.8)
12.00 1 (Opa 11.5)/1 (Clr 10.8)

Steel

PVC

Panel
Size (IN.)

Std. WT. (lbs.)
Steel/PVC

JP66
JP86
JP108
JP1210
JP1412
JP1614

JP66P
JP86P
JP108P
JP1210P
JP1412P
JP1614P

4.88 x 4.88
6.75 x 4.88
8.75 x 6.88
10.75 x 8.88
12.75 x 10.88
14.75 x 12.88

1 (1.0)/1 (0.3)
1 (1.0)/1 (0.4)
1 (1.5)/1 (0.7)
1 (2.0)/1 (1.2)
1 (3.2)/1 (1.7)
1 (4.7)/1 (2.3)

*Order back panels separately.
Enclosures shipped with mounting feet and panel mounting hardware.

A-286

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures
Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13.
®

E108856

LR31146

Features:
•	 Non-metallic mounting feet and all mounting
hardware included
•	 White-painted 14-gauge steel or 1⁄4" PVC back panel
(order separately)
•	 304 (18-8) stainless steel screws (10-32/11⁄8")
•	 Completely non-metallic hinges
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Temperature range: -40° to 185° F
•	 Material: NORYL base and cover

0.312"
0.312 TYP
TYP

D

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Medium Hinged Covers

A
G

F CC

HH

EE

BB

Factory Assembled
Dimensions (IN.)
External

Back Panel*

Internal

cat. No.

Mounting

CAT. No.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Std. WT. (lbs.)

Steel

PVC

Panel
Size (IN.)

Std. WT. (lbs.)
Steel/PVC

C2016A4
C2016B4
C2016C4
C2420A4
C2420B4
C2420C4
C3024A4
C3024B4
C3024C4

20.50
20.50
20.50
24.50
24.50
24.50
30.50
30.50
30.50

16.50
16.50
16.50
20.50
20.50
20.50
24.50
24.50
24.50

8.36
10.36
12.36
8.36
10.36
12.36
8.36
10.36
12.36

17.25
17.25
17.25
21.25
21.25
21.25
27.25
27.25
27.25

13.25
13.25
13.25
17.25
17.25
17.25
21.25
21.25
21.25

6.28
8.28
10.28
6.28
8.28
10.28
6.28
8.28
10.28

21.26
21.26
21.26
25.26
25.26
25.26
31.26
31.26
31.26

10.00
10.00
10.00
14.00
14.00
14.00
18.00
18.00
18.00

1 (15.1)
1 (17.2)
1 (19.7)
1 (21.5)
1 (24)
1 (24.9)
1 (28.4)
1 (31.4)
1 (33.8)

NP2016
NP2016
NP2016
NP2420
NP2420
NP2420
NP3024
NP3024
NP3024

NP2016P
NP2016P
NP2016P
NP2420P
NP2420P
NP2420P
NP3024P
NP3024P
NP3024P

17 x 13.25
17 x 13.25
17 x 13.25
21 x 17
21 x 17
21 x 17
27 x 21
27 x 21
27 x 21

1 (7.0)/1 (6.1)
1 (7.0)/1 (6.1)
1 (7.0)/1 (6.1)
1 (10.4)/1 (4.7)
1 (10.4)/1 (4.7)
1 (10.4)/1 (4.7)
1 (18.0)/1 (9.8)
1 (18.0)/1 (9.8)
1 (18.0)/1 (9.8)

*Order back panels separately.
*Enclosure only available with opaque hinged cover.
Enclosures shipped with mounting feet, hinge caps and screws.
For factory-installed pad-lockable latch (part no. CJTL), consult Customer Service for price and delivery.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-287

Circuit Safe JIC Enclosures
Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

E108856

Hinged Window Cover

LR31146

Features:
•	 Non-metallic mounting feet and all mounting
hardware included
•	 304 (18-8) stainless steel screws (10-32/11⁄8")
•	 White-painted 14-gauge steel or 1⁄4" PVC back panel
(order separately)
•	 Completely non-metallic hinges
•	 Lid design provides greater usable internal volume
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Material: polycarbonate molded base and cover
Note: W
 indow material 1⁄8" thick, clear polycarbonate is permanently bonded to the cover.

D

A

J

A

G

0.312"
TYP
H

F
E

C

B

K

B

Factory Assembled
Dimensions (IN.)
External

CAT. No.
J665W
J863W
J1085W
J12106W

A

B

6.50 6.50
8.50 6.50
10.50 8.50
12.50 10.50

Back Panel*

Internal

Mounting

C

D

E

F

G

H

j

k

Std. WT.
(lbs.)

6.69
4.49
6.69
7.69

6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00

6.00
6.00
8.00
10.00

5.45
3.25
5.45
6.45

9.00
11.00
13.00
15.00

4.00
4.00
6.00
8.00

3.75
3.75
7.75
9.75

3.75
3.75
5.75
7.75

1 (3.1)
1 (3.2)
1 (5.6)
1 (7.4)

PVC

Panel Size
(IN.)

Std. WT.
(lbs.)Steel/
PVC

JP66P
JP86P
JP108P
JP1210P

4.88 x 4.88
6.75 x 4.88
8.75 x 6.88
10.75 x 8.88

1 (1.0)/1 (0.3)
1 (1.0)/1 (0.78)
1 (1.5)/1 (0.7)
1 (2.0)/1 (1.2)

cat. No.
Steel

JP66
JP86
JP108
JP1210

Enclosures shipped with mounting feet, hinge caps and screws.
*Order back panels separately.
For factory-installed pad-lockable quick-release latch (part no. CJTL), consult Customer Service for price and delivery.

A-288

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe Pushbutton Enclosures
Circuit Safe
Pushbutton Enclosures
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Circuit Safe® Non-Metallic Pushbutton Enclosures are molded from engineered
thermoplastic material that is resistant to most corrosive agents. Whether
predrilled 1-2-3 hole enclosures, blank cover enclosures or enclosures with
multiple hole openings, Carlon’s pushbutton enclosure series offers high-impact
strength, chemical resistance, high dielectric strength and excellent durability
for the correct application.

Features:
•	 Engineered thermoplastic base and cover
•	 304 stainless steel screws
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 High-impact strength
•	 Temperature range: -40° to 185° F
•	UL94-V2
Applications:
•	 Standard oil-tight pushbuttons, switches
and pilot lights
•	 Conduit entries
•	 Junction boxes
•	 MRO and OEM applications
Standards:
•	 Standards vary by product
•	 Screw cover pushbutton enclosures with 1-2-3 hole
openings are listed per UL 50 for industrial controls
•	 Narrow-profile blank-screw cover enclosures are listed
per UL 50 for industrial controls and meet NEMA Type
1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
•	 Non-metallic hinged cover enclosures with
multiple hole openings are UL Listed

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-289

Circuit Safe Pushbutton Enclosures
UL Listed per UL 50 for Industrial Controls.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

®

E108856

Screw Cover Enclosures
with 1-2-3 Hole Openings

LR31146

Wallmount pushbutton enclosures are molded from gray, engineered
thermoplastic material that is resistant to most corrosive agents. Universal
pushbutton holes are designed to accommodate all standard oil-tight
pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights. A grounding plate is included on the
cover. Auxiliary devices must be rated for appropriate NEMA applications.

Features:
•	 30.5mm keyed pushbutton holes*
•	 Material: nylon base and cover
•	 Integrally molded mounting flange
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 304 (18-8) stainless screws (8-32/ 3⁄8")
•	 Temperature range: -40° to 185°F
•	UL94-V2

J
⁄4" Dia. Mtg. Hole

G

1

R
L
F

D

1.210" Dia.

A

C

S

B

W

30.5mm Pushbutton Enclosures

†

Mounting
LxJ

Overall Outside
Including Mounting
Bracket H x W x D

F

G

R

3.38
5.63
7.88

3.25
3.25
3.25

.63
.63
.63

S

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

2.5
2.5
2.5

12
8
6

9
8
7.60

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

8.26
1.31
9.43
1.60

CAT. No.

Style

Inside Box Size
AxBxC

CP100N
CP200N
CP300N

One Opening
Two Openings
Three Openings

3.13 x 2.81 x 3
5.38 x 2.81 x 3
7.38 x 2.81 x 3

4 x 2.38
6.25 x 2.38
8.50 x 2.38

4.88 x 3.50 x 3.38
7.13 x 3.50 x 3.38
9.38 x 3.50 x 3.38

Mounting
LxJ

Overall Outside
Including Mounting
Bracket H x W x D

F

G

R

S

Std.
Ctn.

4 x 2.38
6.25 x 2.38
8.50 x 2.38
8.50 x 2.38

4.88 x 3.50 x 3.38
7.13 x 3.50 x 3.38
9.38 x 3.50 x 3.38
9.38 x 3.50 x 3.38

3.38
5.63
7.88
7.88

3.25
3.25
3.25
3.25

.63
.63
.63
.63

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

10
1
6
1

22mm Pushbutton Enclosures *†
CAT. No.

Style

Inside Box Size
AxBxC

PX0010
PX0007
PX0011
PX0008

One Opening
Two Openings
Three Openings
Four Openings

3.13 x 2.81 x 3
5.38 x 2.81 x 3
7.38 x 2.81 x 3
7.38 x 2.81 x 3

* All Circuit Safe pushbutton enclosures are furnished with standard hole dimensions: 17⁄32" diameter with keyways at 12 o’clock and 3 o’clock
†

A-290

Dimensions are in inches unless marked otherwise. Operators not included.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe Pushbutton Enclosures
®

®

E108856

LR31146

Narrow-Profile Blank Screw Cover
Enclosures for Small Instrumentation
and Control Applications
Blank cover enclosures can be easily drilled with a standard hole saw
for conduit entries and pushbuttons. Wallmount enclosures are molded
from gray, engineered thermoplastic material and are resistant to most
corrosive agents.

Features:
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Material: nylon base and cover
•	 Integrally molded mounting flange
•	 304 (18-8) stainless screws (10-32/ 3⁄8")
•	 Temperature range: -40° to 185° F

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

UL Listed per UL 50 for Industrial Controls.
Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 3X, 3SX, 4, 4X, 12, 13.

J

G

R
F

L

A

D

C

S

B

W

Blank Screw Cover Enclosures *†
CAT. No.

Style

Inside Box Size
AxBxC

CP100NB
CP200NB
CP300NB

Blank Cover
Blank Cover
Blank Cover

3.13 x 2.81 x 3
5.38 x 2.81 x 3
7.38 x 2.81 x 3

Mounting
LxJ

Overall Outside
Including Mounting
Bracket H x W x D

F

G

R

4 x 2.38
6.25 x 2.38
8.50 x 2.38

4.88 x 3.50 x 3.38
7.13 x 3.50 x 3.38
9.38 x 3.50 x 3.38

3.38
5.63
7.88

3.25
3.25
3.25

.63
.63
.63

S

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

2.5
2.5
2.5

12
8
6

9.60
8.8
8.20

* All Circuit Safe pushbutton enclosures are furnished with standard hole dimensions: 1 7⁄32" diameter with keyways at 12 o’clock and 3 o’clock
†

Dimensions are in inches unless marked otherwise.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-291

Circuit Safe Pushbutton Enclosures
Hinged Cover Enclosures
with Multiple Hole Openings

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

E108856

LR31146

Made from engineered thermoplastic material, these enclosures are ideal
for applications that require high-impact strength, chemical resistance,
high dielectric strength and excellent weathering capabilities, including
indoor/outdoor industrial, MRO and OEM applications. Non-metallic
hinges are an integral part of the mold. Removable cover enables
easy field adjustment. Auxiliary devices must be rated for appropriate
NEMA applications.

Features:
•	 Non-metallic mounting feet and all mounting
hardware included
•	 White-painted 14-gauge steel or 11⁄8" PVC back panel
(order separately)
•	 Material: engineered thermoplastic base and cover
•	 304 stainless steel screws
•	 Brass screw inserts
•	 Lid design provides greater usable volume
•	 Completely non-metallic hinges
•	 Temperature range: -40° to 185° F

Screw Cover Pushbutton Enclosures with Multiple 30.5mm Openings*
Panel

Cat. No.

Openings

Inside Box
size (IN.)

Weight
(LBS.)

Std.
Ctn.

CAT. No.

Size (IN.)
Steel/PVC

J665P
J863P
J1085P
J12106P
J14126P
J16147P

4
6
9
12
20
25

6 x 6 x 5.88
8 x 6 x 3.63
10 x 8 x 5.88
12 x 10 x 6.88
14 x 12 x 6.88
16 x 14 x 7.63

2.42
1.86
3.59
4.29
7.19
11.20

1
1
1
1
1
1

JP66 / JP66P
JP86 / JP86P
JP108 / JP108P
JP1210 / JP1210P
JP1412 / JP1412P
JP1614 / JP1614P

4.88 x 4.88
6.75 x 4.88
8.75 x 6.88
10.75 x 8.88
12.75 x 10.88
14.75 x 12.88

For enclosures larger than 25 position, please call Customer Service.
* All Circuit Safe pushbutton enclosures are furnished with standard hole dimensions:
17⁄32" diameter with keyways at 12 o’clock and 3 o’clock.
Special openings or positionings available on request.

A-292

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
Circuit Safe NEMA Accessories
®

Gasketed Pushbutton Hole Plug

Cat. No.
CP900

Mounting Rail Kits

Size

STD.
Ctn.

std. Wt.
(lbs.)

Standard PB Hole

100

2.0

cat. no.

Size
(in.)

STD.
Ctn.

std.
wt. (lbs.)

NMK4V
NMK6V
NMK8V
NMK10V
NMK12V
NMK14V

4
6
8
10
12
14

25
24
24
20
20
25

5
7.7
10.25
13.26
11.4
17.76

*Mounting Rails include two rails and four stainless steel screws.
Mounting Rails can be mounted on long or short side of enclosure.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Size mounting flange to side of the enclosure to which the flange will be attached.

Panel Adjuster Kits

Panel Adjuster Kit (NBPADJ2)

180˚ Swing-Out Panel Kit (NBPSWG)

Cat. No.

Product

NBPADJ2

Panel
Adjuster Kit
180° Swing-Out
Panel Kit

NBPSWG

NBPSWG2

Swing-Out Panel
Adjuster Kit

www.tnb.com

Swing-Out Panel Adjuster Kit (NBPSWG2)

Description

(4) Panel Adjusters
(4) #10-32 Screws to Mount Panel
(4) Panel Adjusters
(2) Hinges
(2) #10-32 Screws to Mount Panel
(2) Hinged Adjusters
(2) Panel Adjusters
(4) #10-32 Screws

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

10 Kits

2.07

10 Kits

2.68

10 Kits

1.80

A-293

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
Circuit Safe NEMA Accessories

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

A-294

®

•	 For NEMA hinged enclosures.

Latch Kits
Cat. NO.

Product

Description

NPL1L

Non-Metallic Quick-Release Latch Kit

NPL1S

Non-Metallic Quick-Release Latch Kit

SSLL

304 Stainless Steel Quick-Release Latch Kit

SSLS

304 Stainless Steel Quick-Release Latch Kit

Quick-Release Latch Kit for Use with Hidden
Hinge Enclosure for NH & NI Series
Quick-Release Latch Kit for Use with External
Hinge Enclosure for NJ & NC Series
Quick-Release Latch Kit for Use with Hidden
Hinge Enclosure for NH & NI Series
Quick-Release Latch Kit for Use with External
Hinge Enclosure for NJ & NC Series

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std. Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

25

2.00

25

2.00

25

4.27

25

3.41

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
®

®

JIC Latch Kit

•	 For Circuit Safe® Enclosures —
Type CC, CJ, CS, CV, J

Mounting Feet
.313 Dia. mounting hole

Cat. No.

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

CJB159*

As required

.04

*CJB159 non-metallic mounting feet provide 1⁄4" standoff and may be used to mount
enclosures in horizontal or vertical mode. They are shipped with all Circuit Safe® JIC
enclosures. No screws are provided when mounting feet are ordered separately.

Cat. No.

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

CJTL*

As required

.04

Stainless steel. Kit includes latch and keeper.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Circuit Safe JIC Accessories

* Factory installed. Consult Customer Service for price and delivery. Not UL Listed.

JIC Installation Kit

Cat. No.

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

CH208*

1 Kit

.25

*Installation kit is included as standard equipment with all JIC enclosures. Information listed
here for purposes of additional purchase only. Kit includes four mounting feet, eight hinge
caps and eight screws.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-295

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
Circuit Safe JIC Accessories

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

®

Steel back panels are white-painted
14-gauge steel.
Steel Back Panels*
CAT. No.

Thickness

Size
(in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

JP64
JP66
JP86
JP88
JP108
JP1010
JP1210
JP1212
JP1412
JP1614

14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge
14 gauge

4.88 x 2.88
4.88 x 4.88
6.75 x 4.88
6.75 x 6.88
8.75 x 6.88
8.75 x 8.88
10.75 x 8.88
10.75 x 10.88
12.75 x 10.88
14.75 x 12.88

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

.6
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.5
2.3
2.7
3.5
3.8
4.7

PVC back panels are made from 1⁄4" PVC
and meet UL94V-O.
PVC Back Panels*
CAT. No.

Size
(in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

JP64P
JP66P
JP86P
JP88P
JP108P
JP1010P
JP1210P
JP1212P
JP1412P
JP1614P

4 7⁄8 x 2 7⁄8
4 7⁄8 x 4 7⁄8
6 3⁄4 x 4 7⁄8
6 3⁄4 x 6 7⁄8
8 3⁄4 x 6 7⁄8
8 3⁄4 x 8 7⁄8
10 3⁄4 x 8 7⁄8
10 3⁄4 x 10 7⁄8
12 3⁄4 x 10 7⁄8
14 3⁄4 x 12 7⁄8

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

.3
.3
.4
.5
.7
.9
1.2
1.5
1.7
2.3

Size
(in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

17 x 13
21 x 17
27 x 21

1
1
1

7.0/6.125
10.4/4.71
18.0/9.781

Medium NEMA Back Panels*
CAT. No.
NP2016 / NP2016P
NP2420 / NP2420P
NP3024 / NP3024P

*Circuit Safe NEMA enclosures are not shipped with back panels, which must be
ordered separately.
All accessories can be factory installed. Consult Customer Service for price and delivery.

A-296

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
Circuit Safe NEMA and JIC Accessories
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

For 3R Rating and condensation buildup.
Draining Device*
Cat. No.

STD. Ctn.

HPVEA9

30

*Factory installation available.

NEMA 1 Rated only.
Air Vents*
Cat. No.

style

HPVM25
HPVM35

For Fitting Outside of All Enclosures
For Fitting Inside of All Enclosures

STD. Ctn.

30
30

*Factory installation available.

Enables any size enclosure to breathe,
yet remain watertight.
Enclosure Ventilator*
Cat. No.

STD. Ctn.

HVM27

15

*Factory installation available.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-297

Circuit Safe Enclosure Accessories
Window Kits

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

E88685

Carlon® hinged window kits are used to create a NEMA 4X environment
on electronic control panels. Polycarbonate construction and double
gaskets ensure environmental integrity.

Features:
•	 High-impact strength

Remove installed
screws and replace
with 10/32 x 11⁄8" screws
(Qty of 4 provided)

Corner section
of the collar

Corner section
of the cover

B

•	 High dielectric strength

D
Cover not shown in plan view

•	 Suitable for indoor and outdoor use
•	 Fully gasketed
Standards:
•	 UL Listed and meets NEMA Type 4X with the exception
of NI1614W; all sizes are NEMA Type 1 and 12 rated

C
A

Applications:
•	 Instrument case
•	 Junction and terminal boxes

x

•	 Control and switching enclosures

x

•	 Meter and transformer cabinets

E
1.97" TYP

•	 Small device enclosures
•	 Surface-mounted instruments

F

Cat. No.*

SIZE (IN.)

STD. CTN.

STD.
WT. (LBS.)

NI64W
NI66W
NI86W
NI88W
NI108W
NI1010W
NI1210W
NI1212W
NI1412W
NI1614W

6x4
6x6
8x6
8x8
10 x 8
10 x 10
12 x 10
12 x 12
14 x 12
16 x 14

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

.8
.9
1.17
1.4
1.5
1.82
2.12
2.65
2.67
3.10

All window kits can be factory installed to Carlon ® enclosures.
Consult factory for price and delivery.
* Non-stock factory order only — consult Customer Service.
NI1614W is not NEMA Type 4X Rated

Dimensions (IN.)

SIZE
NI64W
NI66W
NI86W
NI88W
NI108W
NI1010W
NI1210W
NI1212W
NI1412W
NI1614W

A

B

C

D

E

F

6.42
(163.1)
6.42
(163.1)
8.44
(214.4)
8.44
(214.4)
10.46
(265.7)
10.45
(265.4)
12.46
(316.5)
12.50
(317.5)
14.50
(368.3)
16.52
(419.6)

4.41
(112.0)
6.42
(163.1)
6.42
(163.1)
8.43
(214.1)
8.45
(214.6)
10.45
(265.4)
10.45
(265.4)
12.50
(317.5)
12.50
(317.5)
14.48
(367.8)

5.92
(150.4)
5.94
(150.9)
7.92
(201.2)
7.95
(201.9)
9.95
(253.5)
9.97
(253.2)
11.99
(304.5)
12.00
(304.8)
14.01
(355.9)
16.03
(407.2)

3.94
(100.0)
5.94
(150.9)
5.94
(150.9)
7.95
(201.9)
7.96
(202.2)
9.97
(253.2)
9.97
(253.2)
12.00
(304.8)
12.00
(304.8)
14.02
(356.1)

2.72
(69.1)
4.72
(119.9)
4.72
(119.9)
6.72
(170.7)
6.72
(170.7)
8.72
(221.5)
8.72
(221.5)
10.72
(272.3)
10.72
(272.3)
12.72
(323.1)

3.80
(96.5)
5.80
(147.3)
5.80
(147.3)
7.80
(198.1)
7.80
(198.1)
9.80
(248.9)
9.80
(248.9)
11.80
(299.7)
11.80
(299.7)
13.80
(350.5)

Note: Chart dimensions read in (mm)

A-298

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
Himeline Enclosures
HS, HP, HLA/HLS Series
®

Carlon® Himeline® enclosures are the ideal alternative to expensive
stainless steel enclosures. They have excellent corrosion-resistant
properties and are impervious to sunlight, dirt and moisture.
Available in four series (HS, HP and HLA/HLS), with sizes ranging
from 11 x 7 x 7 through 50 x 40 x 17, these enclosures offer choices
that include double doors, clear or opaque covers, hinged and screw
versions, single- or three-point closure mechanisms, 4X windows,
DIN rail mounting and an adjustable depth door-in-door option that
enables you to customize your enclosures by separating power
from communications.

Features:
•	 High-impact strength

Applications:
•	 Instrument case

•	 High dielectric strength

•	 Junction and terminal boxes

•	 Suitable for indoor and outdoor use

•	 Control and switching enclosures

•	 Fully gasketed

•	 Meter and transformer cabinets

•	 Lightweight

•	 Small device enclosures

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Standards:
•	 Meets NEMA and IP standards as indicated
in appropriate section
•	UL® Listed as indicated

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-299

Himeline Enclosures
HS Series Screw-On Fastened
and Hinged Cover Enclosures

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

•	 Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
•	 Meets IP 65
Himeline® HS Series enclosures are designed for use as junction
boxes, terminal wiring boxes, instrument and control housings and
small device enclosure applications. Molded under high pressure,
Himeline® HS Series enclosures provide high-impact strength,
chemical resistance, high dielectric strength and excellent
weathering capabilities.

Features:
•	 Standard slotted locking screw

Material:
•	 Opaque/Clear Lid — Polycarbonate

•	 High-impact strength

•	 Base — Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester

•	 Chemical resistance
Standards:
•	 Meets NEMA Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ratings

•	 High dielectric strength
•	 Excellent weathering capabilities

•	 UL Listed per UL 50, enclosures for electrical equipment

•	 Sealing gasket on all models

•	 Meets IP 65

•	 Sunlight resistant

•	UL® Listed (E108856)

Applications:
•	 Junction boxes
•	 Terminal wiring boxes
•	 Instrument and control housings
•	 Small device enclosure applications
•	 Indoor or outdoor use

A-300

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
HS Series Screw-On Fastened
and Hinged Cover Enclosures
®

•	 High dielectric strength
•	 Excellent weathering
capabilities

•	 High-impact strength

•	 Clear cover available

•	 Chemical resistance

B
C

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Features:
•	 Molded under high
pressure

E108856

F
.08"

.09"
A

.08"

E
D

2.00"

.47"

Opaque
Clear
Opaque
Screw-On Screw-On Hinged
Cover
Cover
Cover

CAT. No.

CAT. No. CAT. No. CAT. No.

HS7A7
HS11A7
HS11B7
HS11C7
HS15C7
HS21C7
HS11A9
HS11B9
HS11C9
HS15C9
HS21C9
HS15D9
HS21D9

HS7A7C
HS11A7C
HS11B7C
HS11C7C
HS15C7C
HS21C7C
HS11A9C
HS11B9C
HS11C9C
HS15C9C
HS21C9C
HS15D9C
HS21D9C

HH7A7
HH11A7
HH11B7
HH11C7
HH15C7
HH21C7
HH11A9
HH11B9
HH11C9
HH15C9
HH21C9
HH15D9
HH21D9

Dimensions (IN.)

Clear
Hinged
Cover

HH7A7C
HH11A7C
HH11B7C
HH11C7C
HH15C7C
HH21C7C
HH11A9C
HH11B9C
HH11C9C
HH15C9C
HH21C9C
HH15D9C
HH21D9C

External

Internal

Opaque Wt.
(lbs.) each

Clear Wt.
(lbs.) each
Screw/
hinged

Std.
CTN.

CAT. no.

Dimensions
(IN.) h x w

10.9/6.2
14/8
18/4
12.5/13
18/11
12/13
16.6/5
19/6
14/9
19/11
14/14
13/13
17/18

4
4
4
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
1
1
1

HS7ABP
HS11ABP
HS11BBP
HS11CBP
HS15CBP
HS21CBP
HS11ABP
HS11BBP
HS11CBP
HS15CBP
HS21CBP
HS15DBP
HS21DBP

5.51 x 9.05
9.05 x 9.05
9.05 x 12.60
9.05 x 19.68
12.60 x 19.68
19.68 x 19.68
9.05 x 9.05
9.05 x 12.60
9.05 x 19.68
12.60 x 19.68
19.68 x 19.68
12.60 x 26.77
19.68 x 26.77

A

B

C

D

E

F

Screw/
hinged

10.63
10.63
14.17
21.26
21.26
21.26
10.63
14.17
21.26
21.26
21.26
28.35
28.35

7.09
10.63
10.63
10.63
14.17
21.26
10.63
10.63
10.63
14.17
21.26
14.17
21.26

7.09
7.09
7.09
7.09
7.09
7.09
9.06
9.06
9.06
9.06
9.06
9.06
9.06

6.26
9.80
9.80
9.80
13.35
20.43
9.80
9.80
9.80
13.35
20.43
13.35
20.43

9.80
9.80
13.35
20.43
20.43
20.43
9.80
13.35
20.43
20.43
20.43
27.52
27.52

6.54
6.54
6.54
6.54
6.54
6.54
8.47
8.47
8.47
8.47
8.47
8.47
8.47

10.7/7
15.2/8.5
17/4
13/13
17.7/11
12.5/13
15/4
20/6
14/9
18.5/11
13/14
13/13
18/18

Back
Panel

Thick- std.
ness Wt. Std.
(IN.) (lbs.) Ctn.

.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.08
.10
.10

1.1
1.7
2.4
3.9
6.6
8.8
1.7
2.5
3.9
6.6
8.8
9.5
15.5

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Back panels and mounting feet must be ordered separately.
Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-301

Himeline Enclosures
HS Series Accessories

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

For Himeline HS Enclosures.
®

Thumb Screws
Cat. No.

STD. CTN.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

25
25

0.1
0.15

STD. CTN.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

25
25

0.2
0.2

HSTS4
HSTS6

For Himeline HS Enclosures.
®

Mounting Feet
Cat. No.

Description

HSMFZ
HSMFSS

Zinc Dichromated Steel
304 Stainless Steel

For Himeline HS Enclosures, metal back
panels are white-painted 14-gauge steel.
®

Back Panels*
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

HS7ABP
HS11ABP
HS11BBP
HS11CBP
HS15CBP
HS21CBP
HS15DBP
HS21DBP

5.51 x 9.05
9.05 x 9.05
9.05 x 12.06
9.05 x 19.68
12.60 x 19.68
19.68 x 19.68
12.60 x 26.77
19.68 x 26.77

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1.2
2.0
2.7
4.3
7.1
9.6
10.2
16.6

*Himeline HS enclosures are not shipped with back panels. Order separately.
PVC back panels available upon request. Consult Customer Service.

Converts enclosures to portable units
for meters and portable power.
Non-Metallic Carrying Handle
Cat. No.
HSCH

A-302

Std. Ctn.

std.
Wt. (lbs.)

10

0.2

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
HS Series Accessories
®

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

For 3R Rating and condensation buildup.
Draining Device*
Cat. No.

std. ctn.

HPVEA9

30

*Factory installation available.

NEMA 1 Rated only.
Air Vents*
Cat. No.

Style

HPVM25
HPVM35

For Fitting Outside of All Enclosures
For Fitting Inside of All Enclosures

STD. CTN.

25
30

*Factory installation available.

Enables any size enclosure to breathe,
yet remain watertight.
Enclosure Ventilator*
Cat. No.

STD. CTN.

HVM27

15

*Factory installation available.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-303

Himeline Enclosures
HP Series Enclosures with
Hinged Quick-Release Cover

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

•	 Meets NEMA 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
•	 Meets IP 66
Himeline® HP Series enclosures for medium-sized devices and equipment
provide superior performance as junction and terminal wiring boxes and
instrument and control housing applications.
For indoor/outdoor industrial, MRO and OEM applications. HP Series
enclosures are resistant to corrosion, sunlight, chemicals, dirt and
moisture. Temperature range from -58° F to 320° F.

Features:
•	Projections for affixing cover mounted panel

Applications:
•	Junction boxes

•	Door-locking mechanism convertible to key lock

•	Terminal wiring boxes

•	M8x18 studs for back panel mounting (included)

•	Instrument and control housing

•	Hidden hinges open 185° for easy access

•	Indoor or outdoor use

•	Multi-positional DIN rail fixing components

Standards:
•	NEMA Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13

•	Removable stainless steel hinge pins
•	Single-piece construction
•	Opaque or tempered glass window option
•	Steel, non-metallic and slotted back panels available
•	External and internal venting available

•	UL® Listed per UL 50, enclosures
for electrical equipment
•	Meets IP 66
Material:
•	Lids/Bases — Fiberglass-reinforced polyester

•	Hinged, variable-height inner panel option
•	Quick-locking 1⁄4-turn entry
•	Underside grid pattern on inner door panel
•	Self-positioning panel depth adjusters
•	Pole mounting kit
•	Pedestal mounting capability
•	Sunlight resistant

A-304

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
®

B

C

E108856

E
J

D

G

A
K

F

H

Depth with back
panel installed
Enclosure
With Opaque
Cover

Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

Enclosure
With Clear
Window*

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

Window
Dimensions
(H x W) (in.)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

J

K

Std.
Ctn.

HP1612B
HP2016B
HP2416C
HP3020D
HP3325D

11.04
16.80
21.13
32.28
39.00

HC1612B
HC2016B
HC2416C
HC3020**
HC3325D**

12.5
17.2
24.12
36.02
43.12

11 x 7.87
14.96 x 11.81
18.89 x 11.81
22.83 x 15.74
26.77 x 19.68

16.93
20.87
25.47
29.41
33.35

12.99
16.93
17.17
21.10
25.04

7.87
7.87
9.84
11.81
11.81

14.96
18.90
22.83
26.77
30.71

10.24
14.17
14.17
18.11
22.05

6.61
6.61
8.35
10.28
10.28

14.76
18.70
22.64
26.57
30.51

5.91
9.84
9.84
13.78
17.72

11.02
14.96
18.90
22.83
26.77

7.87
11.81
11.81
15.75
19.69

1
1
1
1
1

External

Internal

Mounting

Window

* HC Enclosures are IP 65 Rated. Clear window is glass.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

HP Series Enclosures with
Hinged Quick-Release Cover

** This series of enclosures comes standard with body, lid and mounting rail kit.
Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

Hinged Internal Door
•	 Internal fiberglass-reinforced polyester
door assembly

B

•	 Grid pattern on the inside for quicker
positioning of equipment

C

•	Quick-locking 1⁄4-turn entry
D

A

A

B

C

D

Cat. No.

in.

(mm)

in.

(mm)

in.

(mm)

in.

(mm)

PID1612
pid2016B
pid2416C
pid3020D
pid3325D

12.40
16.34
20.28
24.21
28.15

(315)
(415)
(515)
(615)
(715)

18.07
12.00
12.00
15.94
19.88

(205)
(305)
(305)
(405)
(505)

5.98
5.98
7.64
9.61
9.61

(152)
(152)
(194)
(244)
(244)

1.02
1.02
1.26
1.26
1.26

(26)
(26)
(32)
(32)
(32)

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Std.
Std. Ctn. Wt. (lbs.)

1
1
1
1
1

2.05
3.15
4.50
6.50
8.45

A-305

Himeline Enclosures
A complete range of plates — directly fix to the enclosure
supports or to the adjustable depth supports.
HP Series Back Panels

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Refer to the Enclosure Accessories
section for back panel accessories.

Steel back panels are white-painted 14-gauge steel.
Steel Back Panels

S

Thickness

Weight

cat. no.

To Fit
Enclosures

in.

(mm)

lbs.

(kg)

P
(in.)

S
(in.)

PMM1612
PMM2016
PMM2416
PMM3020
PMM3325

HP1612B
HP2016B
HP2416C
HP3020D
HP3325D

.079
.079
.079
.079
.118

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)

3.10
6.15
8.0
12.04
20.0

(1.6)
(2.5)
(3.1)
(4.6)
(9.9)

14.37
18.30
22.24
26.18
30.11

9.84
13.78
13.78
17.72
21.65

P

12.5

12.5

PVC back panels are made from 1⁄4" PVC
and meet UL94V-O.
PVC Insulating Back Panels

S

Weight

P

S

cat. no.

To Fit
Enclosures

lbs.

(kg)

in.

(mm)

in.

(mm)

PMB1612
PMB2016
PMB2416
PMB3020
PMB3325

HP1612B
HP2016B
HP2416C
HP3020D
HP3325D

1.10
2.65
3.09
4.63
6.62

(0.5)
(1.2)
(1.4)
(2.1)
(3.0)

14.37
18.30
22.24
26.18
30.11

(365)
(465)
(565)
(665)
(765)

9.84
13.78
13.78
17.72
21.65

(250)
(350)
(350)
(450)
(550)

P

Zinc, dichromated, coated-steel plates perforated
for addition of electrical circuitry.
E

PVC Insulating Back Panels

A-306

Weight

D

E

cat. no.

To Fit
Enclosures

lbs.

(kg)

in.

(mm)

in.

(mm)

PMR1612
PMR2016
PMR2416
PMR3020
PMR3325

HP1612B
HP2016B
HP2416C
HP3020D
HP3325D

1.54
2.87
3.53
5.07
7.06

(0.7)
(1.3)
(1.6)
(2.3)
(3.2)

13.74
17.72
21.85
25.39
29.53

(349)
(450)
(555)
(645)
(750)

9.8
13.82
13.82
17.76
21.69

(251)
(351)
(351)
(451)
(551)

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

D

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
HP Series Accessories
®

To close off openings on enclosure backs.

cat. no.
HPBNGB
HPBNGC

Fits
Enclosure Sizes

Description

16 x 12 and 20 x 16
Blanking Grommet
24 x 16, 30 x 20 and 33 x 25 Blanking Grommet

35mm Symmetrical DIN Rail

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

10
20

1.00
1.00

Pole Mounting Set

cat. no.

To Fit
Enclosures

Width
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

HPCO300
HPCO400
HPCO500

HP1612B
HP2016B, HP2416C
HP3020D

11.02
14.96
18.90

25
2
50

Wall Mounting Set

cat. no.

To Fit
Enclosures

Std.
ctn.

HPPF300
HPPF400
HPPF500
HPPF600

HP1612B
HP2016B, HP2416C
HP3020D
HP3325D

1
1
1
1

cat. no.

Std.
Ctn.

Std. wt.
(lbs.)

HPWMF

10

.1

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Blanking Grommet

Includes brass inserts and installation tools.

Rail Mounting Insert

Std.
Ctn.

cat. no.

Features

HPRFK

Fits All Enclosures

www.tnb.com

10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-307

Himeline Enclosures
HP Series Accessories

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Fixing Accessories
for Slotted Plates

Back Panel Depth
Adjustable Supports
Supports designed to fit 7.87" (200mm), 9.84" (250mm), 11.81" (300mm)
and 13.78" (350mm) deep enclosures. Self-positioning slots enable
adjustment every .49" (12.5mm). Made of zinc dichromated coated steel.

Fixing Nut

Cat. no.
HPFA4
HPFA4
HPFA5
HPFA5
HPFA6
HPFA6

fixing bolt with washer

Type Of
Thread

Std.
Ctn.

M4
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6

8
8
8
8
8
8

cat. no.

Length
(in.)

Std.
Ctn.

HPFB104
HPFB164
HPFB125
HPFB185
HPFB126
HPFB186

.39
.63
.47
.71
.47
.71

1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000

cat. no.
HPLM200
HPLM250
HPLM300

To Fit
Enclosures

HP1612B &
HP2016B
HP2416C
HP3020D &
HP3325D

A
in./mm

B
in./mm

Std.
Ctn.

5.98/152

3.90/99

8

8.07/205
10.04/255

4.13/105
8.07/205

15
10

For 3R Rating and condensation buildup.

Pedestal Mount

Draining Device*

Cat. No.
HPSFS1

A-308

To Fit
Enclosures
HP2016B
HP2416C

Std.
CTN.

cat. no.

Std.
Ctn.

1

HPVEA9

30

*Factory installation available.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
HP Series Accessories
®

Enables any size enclosure to breathe,
yet remain watertight.

Air Vents*

Enclosure Ventilator*

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

Style

HPVM25
HPVM35

For Fitting Outside of All Enclosures
For Fitting Inside of All Enclosures

Std.
Ctn.

cat. no.
HVM27

30
30

15

*Factory installation available.

*Factory installation available.

F or Himeline HP Enclosures HP3020D
and HP3325D.

Replacement Standard Handle

Coupling Frame

Cat. No.
HPRSH

Std.
Ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

1

.05

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

NEMA 1 Rated only.

Std.
Ctn.

cat. no.
HPBU

1

For Himeline HP Enclosures.
®

Locks
Padlocking Service

Replacement Door Lock
Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.
HPRLA

Std.
Ctn.

Cat. No.

15

HPPLH

20

For replacement handle, order HPRSH.

Cylinder Key Lock (Keyed Alike)
Cat. No.

Std.
Ctn.

HPTPLM

15

For replacement key, order HPRKO.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-309

Himeline Enclosures
HLA/HLS Series Enclosures

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Carlon® Himeline® HLA/HLS Series Enclosures are large fiber-reinforced
polyester cabinets ranging in sizes 20 x 20 x 17 to 50 x 40 x 17 and
20 x 20 x 12 to 50 x 40 x 12, respectively. They have operating
temperatures of -50° to 150° C and can accommodate large devices
and equipment for a wide range of applications, including junction and
terminal wiring boxes, instruments and control housings. They are
ideal for indoor/outdoor industrial, MRO and OEM applications, and
offer superior strength and high resistance to corrosion, moisture,
dust, oil and UV light, enabling them to withstand the harshest
of environments.
The HLA/HLS Series Enclosures are fitted with a watertight gasket and
are available in one- and two-door configurations. These cabinets have
a closed top and bottom and the two-door version includes a central
upright to maintain rigidity.
To maintain the watertight seal, the locking mechanism is positioned
outside the gasketed area. A wide variety of accessories are available
such as steel and non-metallic back panels, self-positioning panel
depth adjusters and ventilator kits.
Carlon® Enclosures…the ideal alternative to expensive
stainless steel enclosures.

Features:
•	Fiber-reinforced polyester

Applications:
•	 Contain large devices and equipment

•	Temperature range of -58° to 302° F (-50° to 150° C)

•	 Junction and terminal wiring boxes

•	Indoor/outdoor applications

•	Instrument and control housings

•	Superior strength
•	High resistance to harsh environments

Standards:
•	 IP 65 Rating (single-door versions only)

•	Watertight gasket seal

•	4/4X Rated (single-door versions only)

•	One- and two-door configurations

•	UL® Listed

•	Locking mechanism and hinge are outside gasketed area
•	Floor or wall mounted

A-310

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
HLA/HLS Series Single- and Double-Hinged Cover
Enclosures with Latches*
®

HLA One Door (17" Deep)
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.

H

W

D

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

HLA2020
HLA2030
HLA3020
HLA3030

20
20
30
30

20
30
20
30

17
17
17
17

1
1
1
1

38.3
53.9
53.9
60.7

HLA4020
HLA4030
HLA5020
HLA5030

40
40
50
50

20
30
20
30

17
17
17
17

1
1
1
1

63.1
81.0
78.7
96.7

* Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

HLS One Door (12" Deep)
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.

H

W

D

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

HLS2020
HLS2030
HLS3020
HLS3030
HLS4020
HLS4030
HLS5020
HLS5030

20
20
30
30
40
40
50
50

20
30
20
30
20
30
20
30

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

29.8
40.59
49.5
55.1
56.81
61.7
67.56
76.83

LR31146

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

One-Door NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12, 13

E108856

* Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

Two-Door NEMA Types 1, 2, 12, 13
HLA Two Door (17" Deep)
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.

H

W

D

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

HLA30402
HLA40402
HLA40502
HLA50402

30
40
40
50

40
40
50
40

17
17
17
17

1
1
1
1

81.0
114.7
135.0
135.0

HLS Two Door (12" Deep)
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.

H

W

D

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

HLS30402
HLS40402
HLS40502
HLS50402

30
40
40
50

40
40
50
40

12
12
12
12

1
1
1
1

62.57
87.59
104.28
104.28

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-311

Himeline Enclosures
HLA/HLS Series Accessories

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Non-Metallic Thermosetting Plastic
(Bakelite)
One Door
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.
LP2020BP
LP3020BP*
LP3030BP
LP4020BP
LP4030BP
LP5020BP
LP5030BP

H

W

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

15.4
25.2
25.2
35.0
35.0
44.3
44.3

14.8
14.8
24.6
14.8
24.6
14.8
24.6

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2.1
3.0
6.3
5.2
8.8
6.7
11.2

* U se Back Panel LP3020BP for Enclosures HLA2030, HLA3020, HLS2030 and HLS3020

Two Door
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.
P30402BP
LP40402BP
LP40502BP
LP50402BP

H

W

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

25.2
35.0
35.0
44.3

34.4
34.4
44.3
34.4

1
1
1
1

8.8
12.3
16.1
16.1

Metal — Galvanized Steel
One Door
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.
LA2020BP
LA3020BP*
LA3030BP
LA4020BP
LA4030BP
LA5020BP
LA5030BP

H

W

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

15.4
25.2
25.2
35.0
35.0
44.3
44.3

14.8
14.8
24.6
14.8
24.6
14.8
24.6

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

5.6
8.6
17.6
14.6
24.3
19.4
31.9

* Use Back Panel LA3020BP for Enclosures HLA2030, HLA3020, HLS2030 and HLS3020

Two Door
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.
LA30402BP
LA40402BP
LA40502BP
LA50402BP

A-312

H

W

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

25.2
35.0
35.0
44.3

34.4
34.4
44.3
34.4

1
1
1
1

24.1
33.8
43.4
43.7

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
®

Replacement Handle with Cylinder Key Lock

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

HLAMFSS

1 each (set of 4)

.6

HLATEL

8

.41

Panel Adjuster Kit

Standard Replacement Bar Lock with Key

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

HLABPA4

1 each (set of 4)

.31

Padlock Device

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

30

.21

HLATD

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Mounting Feet

Replacement Handle with Pushbutton

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

HLAPAD

8

.61

Cat. No.

STD. ctn.

Std.
Wt. (lbs.)

HLAHAN

8

.40

Air Vents*
Cat. No.

style

HPVM25

For Fitting Outside
of All Enclosures
For Fitting Inside
of All Enclosures

HPVM35

Draining Device*

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

1
1

NEMA 1 Rated only.
*Factory installation available.

Enclosure Ventilator*

Cat. No.

STD.
ctn.

HPVEA9

30

For 3R Rating and condensation buildup.

HVM27

15

Enables any size enclosure to breathe,
yet remain watertight.
*Factory installation available.

*Factory installation available.

www.tnb.com

STD.
ctn.

Cat. No.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-313

Himeline Enclosures
HLP Series Enclosure
and Pedestal

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

®

Himeline® HLP Enclosures and Pedestals are designed to accommodate
all types of electrical equipment for electrical distribution applications.
The enclosure may be directly installed on the ground or on top of a
pedestal, and the pedestal is approved for direct-burial applications.
Both are manufactured using fiber-reinforced polyester to provide highimpact resistance and enable effortless modifications. And, each has an
IP43 Self-Ventilated and IP54 Watertight rating and a temperature range
of -58° F to 302° F.

Enclosure Features:
•	 High impact resistance

Pedestal Features:
•	 Can be direct buried

•	 Non-conductive and
non-corrosive

•	 Non-conductive and
non-corrosive

•	 Fits all type of electrical
equipment

•	 Detachable upper front
for easy access

•	 IP43 self-ventilated

•	 High impact resistance

•	 IP54 watertight

•	 Auxiliary outlet on the side

•	 One- and two-door
configurations

•	 IP43 self-ventilated

•	 Install directly on the
ground or on a pedestal

•	 Floor- or wall-mountable

•	 Removable inner hinges
for great access
•	 Doors open 180°

Pedestal

A-314

•	 IP54 watertight

Applications:

Material:
•	Fiberglass-reinforced
polyester

Enclosure

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Himeline Enclosures
®

A

A

A

B

C

B

Enclosures

Pedestals
Dimensions (IN.)

CAT. No.
HLP3318
HLP3323
HLP3331
HLP33442
HLP33442L

C

B

No. of No. of
Doors Locks

1
1
1
2
2

1
1
1
1
2

Dimensions (IN.)

A
Height

B
Width

C
Depth

33.46
33.46
33.46
33.46
33.46

18.31
23.23
30.91
43.90
43.90

12.60
12.60
12.60
12.60
12.60

1
1
1
1
1

H

W

D

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

35.43
35.43
35.43
35.43
35.43

18.31
23.23
30.91
43.90
43.90

12.20
12.20
12.20
12.20
12.20

1
1
1
1
1

33.10
37.48
44.10
55.12
55.12

CAT. No.

std. std. Wt.
ctn. (lbs.)

HLPED3318
HLPED3323
HLPED3331
HLPED33442
HLPED33442L

40.79
48.50
55.12
77.16
77.16

Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

A

Mounting Plates
CAT. No.

Enclosure
CAT. No.

Pedestal
CAT. No.

LA1412BP
LA1816BP
LA1916BP
LA2725BP

HLP3318
HLP33442L
HLP3323
HLP3331

HLPED3318
HLPED33442L
HLPED3323
HLPED3331

# of Plates
per Encl.

1
2
1
1

Dimensions (IN.)
D

E

Thickness
(IN.)

std.
ctn.

std. Wt.
(lbs.)

14.02
17.64
18.94
26.61

11.97
15.59
16.89
24.57

.20
.20
.20
.20

1
1
1
1

4.41
11.02
6.00
8.38
E

Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

D

HLP Series Accessories
Gasket
Cat. No.

Size (in.)
HxWxD

std.
ctn.

std. Wt.
(lbs.)

HLP3318G
HLP3323G
HLP3331G
HLP3344G

33 x 18 x 12
33 x 23 x 12
33 x 31 x 12
33 x 44 x 12

1
1
1
1

2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2

Consult Customer Service for availability and delivery.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-315

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Slack and Splice Enclosures

A-316

Slack and Splice Enclosures
Carlon’s® state-of-the-art modification capabilities enable design of
Slack and Splice Enclosures to meet specific application requirements.

Features:
•	 Slack and Splice Enclosures provide maximum
protection of slack fiber and splice unit assemblies
•	 Eliminates need for difficult aerial and vault splicing
•	 Stores adequate slack fiber to facilitate splicing
at ground level work station
•	 Enclosure sized to maintain minimum required radius
of fiber optic cable
•	 Splice tube to accommodate industry-standard splice
and tray assemblies (splice enclosure only)

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Slack and Splice Enclosures
E108856
Structural Foam
Thermoplastic
Enclosure

Cable
Retainer
Clips

LR31146

B

F
Slack
Fiber
Optic
Cable

Hinged
Cover
for Easy
Access

E

A

C

K

1
⁄4" Thick
UL Approved Gasket

⁄8"

M

7

⁄8"

7

N
Inside Box
Size (IN.)

Weatherproof
Split Cable
Grommets

CAT. No.

Aluminum
Channel for
Pole or Vault
Wall Mounting

SLK11
SLK12
SLK21
SLK22
SLK31
SLK32

box
Opening (in.)

Dimensions (IN.)

AxBxC

ExF

K

M

N

30 x 24 x 111⁄2
30 x 24 x 91⁄2
24 x 20 x 111⁄2
24 x 20 x 91⁄2
20 x 16 x 111⁄2
20 x 16 x 91⁄2

271⁄4 x 211⁄4
271⁄4 x 211⁄4
211⁄4 x 171⁄4
211⁄4 x 171⁄4
171⁄4 x 131⁄4
171⁄4 x 131⁄4

101⁄4
81⁄4
101⁄4
81⁄4
101⁄4
101⁄4

101⁄2
81⁄2
101⁄2
81⁄2
101⁄2
101⁄2

1
1
1
1
1
1

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Slack Enclosures

Splice Enclosures
Structural Foam
Thermoplastic
Enclosure

Cable
Retainer
Clips

B

Hinged
Cover
for Easy
Access

F

Slack
Fiber
Optic
Cable

C
Weatherproof
Split Cable
Grommets

E

A

K

1
⁄4" Thick1⁄4” Thick
UL ApprovedGasket
Gasket
UL Approved

M

⁄8"

7

⁄8"

7

N
Splice Closure
(not included)

Weatherproof
Splice Tube

Aluminum
Channel for
Pole or Vault
Wall Mounting

www.tnb.com

Inside Box
Size (IN.)

CAT. No.

AxBxC

Tube
Size

SPL111
SPL122
SPL211
SPL222

30 x 24 x 111⁄2
30 x 24 x 91⁄2
24 x 20 x 111⁄2
24 x 20 x 91⁄2

10
8
10
8

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

box
Opening (in.)

Dimensions (IN.)

ExF

K

M

N

271⁄4 x 211⁄4
271⁄4 x 211⁄4
211⁄4 x 171⁄4
211⁄4 x 171⁄4

101⁄4
81⁄4
101⁄4
81⁄4

101⁄2
81⁄2
101⁄2
81⁄2

1
1
1
1

A-317

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information
Factory Modifications
for All Enclosures.
Color-Molded Enclosures
All Circuit Safe® enclosures can be molded in a variety of colors.
Minimum quantities for single shipment or releases against blanket
orders are required.

Painted JIC enclosure with painted back panel.
Installed clear cover with handle and quick-release latch.

Painted/Silkscreened Enclosures
All enclosures can be painted, interior and exterior, or by special
request. Enclosure covers can also be silkscreened on request.

EMI/RFI Protection
For applications where Radio Frequency Interference is a factor,
the interior can be coated with an acrylic base paint with a
nickel filler. Windows can be covered with fine copper mesh.
Color-molded JIC unit with addition
of window and pushbuttons.

Other Modifications Available
Our factory is capable of modifying any of our enclosures
to a customer’s specifications. Factory’s capabilities include:

•	 Precision milling of button holes, windows
and pockets for keypad installations
•	 Hole tapping
•	Ventilators
•	 Mounting bosses
•	 Access windows

Molded junction box painted with
addition of mounted weatherproof cover.

•	 Hinged windows
•	 Mounted in-use weatherproof covers
•	 Handles for portable units
•	Latches
•	 Enclosure coolers
•	 Cylinder locking systems
•	 And more…

Painted JIC enclosure with pocket
installed in cover for control pad.

A-318

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
An enclosure is a surrounding case constructed to provide protection from accidental contact with the enclosed equipment and to provide protection
to the enclosed equipment from specified environmental conditions. A brief description of the more common types of enclosures used by the
electrical industry follows. For more information, see Table 110.28 of the National Electrical Code®.

Type 1 Enclosure:

Type 4 Enclosure:

Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide protection against contact
with enclosed equipment and a degree of protection against falling dirt.

Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against wind-blown dust and rain, splashing water and hose-directed water.

Type 2 Enclosure:

Type 4X Enclosure:

Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against limited amounts of falling water and dirt.

Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against corrosion, wind-blown dust and rain, splashing water and
hose-directed water.

Type 3 Enclosure:
Intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against wind-blown dust, rain, sleet and external ice formation.

Type 3R Enclosure:
Intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against falling rain, sleet and external ice formation.

Type 3S Enclosure:
Intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against
wind-blown dust, rain and sleet, and to provide for operation of external
mechanism when ice laden.

Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to avoid a degree of protection
against contact with enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hose-directed water,
entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at a limited depth
and external ice formation.

Type 6P Enclosure:
Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against contact with enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hose-directed water,
entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth and
external ice formation.

Type 12 Enclosure:

Type 3X Enclosure:
Intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against
wind-blown dust, rain, sleet, external ice formation and corrosion.

Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.

Type 13 Enclosure:

Type 3SX Enclosure:
Intended for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection against
wind-blown dust, rain, sleet and corrosion, and to provide for operation of
external mechanism when ice laden.

www.tnb.com

Type 6 Enclosure:

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information
NEMA Types — Definitions Pertaining to Non-Hazardous Locations.

Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection
against dust, spraying of water, oil and non-corrosive coolant.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-319

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information
International Standards IP Protection Classification Data.
The letters IP, followed by three characteristic numbers, symbolize the degree of protection.

First Digit

First Digit

First DigitSecond Digit

Bodies Against Liquids
Protection Against Solid BodiesProtection Against Solid
Protection

Protection Against Solid
Test Bodies
IP
IP

IP

Test
0

00

No
Noprotection
protection

11

Protection
against
Protected
against
solid
larger
solidbodies
bodies
larger
than 50 mm (for
than 50mm (for
example accidenexample,
tally
touchingaccidentally
with
the
hand) with the
touching

1

Protection Against Liquids

Liquids
IPProtection Against Test

IP

Test

Test

0

No protection

No protection

1

Protected against
solid bodies larger
than 50 mm (for
example accidentally touching with
the hand)

Test

IP

0
0

No protection
No
protection

1
1

Protection
against
Protected against
vertical water
drops
vertical
water
drops
(condensation)
condensation

2
2

Protection
against
Protected against
water drops
at up
water
drops
at to
up to
15ϒ from the vertical
15° from the vertical

Protected against
vertical water drops
(condensation)

hand)

22

Protection against

2

Protected against
solidbodies
bodies
larger
solid
larger
than
mm (for(for
than1212mm
example a finger)

2

Protected against
solid bodies larger
than 12 mm (for
example a finger)

3

Protected against
solid bodies larger
than 2.5 mm (tools,
wires)

example, a finger)

33

Protection against

Protected against
solidbodies
bodies
larger
solid
larger
than
mm (tools,
than2.52.5mm
(tools,
wires)

3

wires)

44

Protection
against
Protected
against
solid
larger
solidbodies
bodies
larger
than 1 mm (fine
than small
1mmwires)
(tools,
tools,

4

55

5

Protected
against
Protection
against
dust (no harmful
dust (no harmful
deposits)

5

6

Complete
Completeprotection
protection
against dust

against dust

15 cm mini

7

Protected against
water splashing from
all directions

Protected against
Protection
against
water splashing from
water
splashing
all directions
from all directions

Protected against
water sprayed from
a hose from all
directions

Protected against
Protection
against
water sprayed from
water
sprayed
a hose from
all from
adirections
hose from all
directions

Protection against
Protected against
water
projections
water projections
similar
sea
similar toto
sea
wave
splashes
wave
splashes

Protected against
water projections
similar to sea wave
splashes

6
6

1
Protected 1against
m
the effect m
of
immersion

1
m

15 cm mini

Protection against

Protected
the effectagainst
of
the effect of
immersion
immersion

7

m

...m

Protected against
effects of prolonged
immersion under
pressure

8
8

8

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

rain at up to 60ϒ
Protection
against
from the
vertical
rain
at up
to 60°
from the vertical

3
3

5
5

Complete protection
against dust

6

Protected against

Protected against
rain at up to 60ϒ
from the vertical

4
4

Protected against
dust (no harmful
deposits)

deposits)

66

Protected against
water drops at up to
15ϒ from the vertical

Protected against
solid bodies larger
than 1 mm (fine
tools, small wires)

4

small wires)

A-320

Second Digit

Second Digit

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

m

Protection
against
...m
Protectedofagainst
effects
prolonged
effects of prolonged
immersion
under
immersion under
pressure
pressure

www.tnb.com

Technical Information
Property

Thermal And Mechanical
Temperature Range (°F)
Specific Gravity (oz.in3)
Thermal Conductivity (BTU•in/hr•ft2•°F)
Heat Deflection Temperature @ 264 PSI (°F)
Tensile Strength (PSI)
Flexural Strength (PSI)
Compressive Strength @ 10% Deformation (PSI)
Impact Strength IZOD Notched (ft.lbs./in.)
Water Absorption – 24 hrs. @ 73° F (%)
UV Rating
Electrical
Dielectric Strength (VOLTS/MIL.)
Dielectric Constant
60 Hz
100 Hz
106 Hz
Volume Resistivity @ 73° F (OHM-CM)
Arc Resistance (SEC)

Test
Method

Opaque
Polycarbonate
Covers & Boxes

Clear
Polycarbonate
Cover

FRP

NORYL

—
ASTM D792
ASTM D177
ASTM D648
ASTM D638
ASTM D790
ASTM D695
ASTM D256
ASTM D570
UL 746C

-30° to 230°
1.20
1.35
265
8,800
13,500
12,500
12
.15
F1

-30° to 230°
1.20
1.35
260
9,000
14,000
12,500
12
.15
F1

-58° to 320°
1.79
1.68
392
13,000
19,000
24,000
12
.17
F2

-40° to 185°
.85
.86
180
3,400
6,800
5,200
—
.06
—

ASTM D149
ASTM D150

380

380

467

192

>1016
120

3.0
—
2.96
>1016
120

3.0
—
2.96
2.0 x 1015
200+

—
—
—
1.0 x 1016
67

ASTM D257
ASTM D495

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Engineering Properties of Enclosures

Clearance Holes for Carflex ® Fittings or PVC Male Terminal Adapters
Carflex Fittings & PVC
Male Terminal
Adapters
Trade Sizes

Nominal
Size
(in.)

Actual
Size
(in.)

Actual
Size
(mm)

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5

.875
1.093
1.344
1.813
1.938
2.375
2.875
3.5
4
4.5
5.625

.879
1.107
1.357
1.699
1.949
2.413
2.914
3.539
4.044
4.544
5.675

22.4
28.2
34.6
43.2
49.6
61.5
74.0
89.8
102.7
115.4
143.7

1

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-321

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information

A-322

Environmental Resistance Table: E–Excellent, G–Good, L–Limited, U–Unsatisfactory
IMPORTANT: These environmental resistance ratings are based upon tests where the specimens were placed in complete submergence in the reagent listed. Ratings listed in this chart
apply to a 48-hour exposure period. (The information in this chart is to be used ONLY as a guide in selecting equipment for appropriate chemical compatibility. Before permanent installation,
test the equipment with the chemicals and under the specific conditions of your application.)

Chemical
Acetaldehyde
Acetamide
Acetate Solvent
Acetic Acid
Acetic Acid 20%
Acetic Acid 80%
Acetic Acid, Glacial
Acetic Anhydride
Acetone
Acetyl Bromide
Acetyl Chloride (dry)
Acetylene
Acrylonitrile
Adipic Acid
Alcohols:Amyl
Alcohols:Benzyl
Alcohols:Butyl
Alcohols:Diacetone
Alcohols:Ethyl
Alcohols:Hexyl
Alcohols:Isobutyl
Alcohols:Isopropyl
Alcohols:Methyl
Alcohols:Octyl
Alcohols:Propyl
Aluminum Chloride
Aluminum Chloride 20%
Aluminum Fluoride
Aluminum Hydroxide
Aluminum Nitrate
Aluminum Potassium Sulfate 10%
Aluminum Potassium Sulfate 100%
Aluminum Sulfate
Amines
Ammonia 10%
Ammonia Nitrate
Ammonia, anhydrous
Ammonia, liquid
Ammonium Acetate
Ammonium Bifluoride
Ammonium Carbonate
Ammonium Caseinate
Ammonium Chloride
Ammonium Hydroxide
Ammonium Nitrate
Ammonium Oxalate
Ammonium Persulfate
Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic

PVC

Polycarbonate

U
U
U
U
U
L
U
U
U
U
L
E
G
E
E
U
E
G
L
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
G
E
E
E
U
G
G
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E

L
U
—
G
E
G
G
U
U
—
U
U
U
—
G
—
E
—
G
—
—
E
G
—
—
E
E
—
G
E
E
E
E
U
U
—
U
U
—
—
—
—
E
U
—
E
—
E

FRP
(Fiberglass
Polycarbonate Reinforced
Circuit Safe NEMA
PVC
Polyester)
Himeline
Circuit Safe JIC
Himeline HS — Noryl
HE
Himeline HE Clear Bases Himeline Circuit
Safe
Opaque
Cover w/Base
HP Himeline
Medium
Cover Himeline HS Opaque
HLA/HLS
JIC
w/Base
w/Clear Lids
Himeline HLP

FRP

(Fiberglass
Himeline
Circuit Safe NEMA
Reinforced Polyester) Noryl
Circuit
HE
Circuit Safe JIC Himeline Himeline HS —
Safe
Opaque HE Clear Cover w/Base Bases Himeline HP
Cover w/ Himeline HS Opaque w/ Himeline HLA/HLS Medium
JIC
Base
Clear Lids
Himeline HLP

—
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
L
—
E
L
L
—
—
—
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

—
—
U
E
E
E
E
U
U
—
U
—
—
—
L
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
U
E
E
G
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E

Chemical

Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic
Ammonium Phosphate, Tribasic
Ammonium Sulfate
Ammonium Sulfite
Amyl Acetate
Amyl Alcohol
Amyl Chloride
Aniline
Aniline Hydrochloride
Antifreeze
Antimony Trichloride
Aqua Regia (80% HCl, 20% HNO3)
Aromatic Hydrocarbons
Arsenic Acid
Arsenic Salts
Asphalt
Barium Carbonate
Barium Chloride
Barium Cyanide
Barium Hydroxide
Barium Nitrate
Barium Sulfate
Barium Sulfide
Beer
Beet Sugar Liquids
Benzaldehyde
Benzene
Benzene Sulfonic Acid
Benzoic Acid
Benzol
Benzonitrile
Benzyl Chloride
Bleaching Liquors
Borax (Sodium Borate)
Boric Acid
Bromine
Butadiene
Butane
Butanol (Butyl Alcohol)
Butyl Amine
Butyl Ether
Butyl Phthalate
Butylacetate
Butylene
Butyric Acid
Calcium Bisulfate
Calcium Bisulfide
Calcium Bisulfite
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

E
E
E
E
U
E
U
L
G
E
E
L
U
E
E
E
E
E
U
E
E
G
E
E
E
U
L
E
E
—
—
—
E
E
E
L
L
L
L
U
E
—
U
E
G
—
E
G

—
—
E
—
U
G
—
U
U
—
E
U
—
E
—
U
E
E
—
U
U
U
—
E
—
U
U
U
G
U
E
—
—
—
—
L
U
U
G
U
—
U
U
U
U
U
—
U

www.tnb.com

—
—
E
E
L
L
U
U
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
—
U
—
E
E
—
—
U
L
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—
—

E
E
E
E
U
L
U
U
—
E
E
U
U
E
—
—
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
G
U
E
G
G
—
U
—
E
E
E
U
U
E
U
U
E
G
—
U
—
E
E

Technical Information
IMPORTANT: These environmental resistance ratings are based upon tests where the specimens were placed in complete submergence in the reagent listed. Ratings listed in this chart
apply to a 48-hour exposure period. (The information in this chart is to be used ONLY as a guide in selecting equipment for appropriate chemical compatibility. Before permanent installation,
test the equipment with the chemicals and under the specific conditions of your application.)

Chemical

Calcium Carbonate
Calcium Chlorate
Calcium Chloride
Calcium Hydroxide
Calcium Hypochlorite
Calcium Nitrate
Calcium Oxide
Calcium Sulfate
Calgon
Cane Juice
Carbolic Acid (Phenol)
Carbon Bisulfide
Carbon Dioxide (dry)
Carbon Dioxide (wet)
Carbon Disulfide
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon Tetrachloride
Carbon Tetrachloride (dry)
Carbon Tetrachloride (wet)
Carbon Disulfide
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon Tetrachloride
Carbon Tetrachloride (dry)
Carbon Tetrachloride (wet)
Carbonated Water
Carbonic Acid
Catsup
Chloric Acid
Chlorine (dry)
Chlorine Water
Chlorine, Anhydrous
Liquid
Chloroacetic Acid
Chlorobenzene (Mono)
Chlorobromomethane
Chloroform
Chlorosulfonic Acid
Chocolate Syrup
Chromic Acid 10%
Chromic Acid 30%
Chromic Acid 5%
Chromic Acid 50%
Chromium Salts
Citric Acid
Citric Oils
Clorox® (Bleach)
Copper Chloride
Copper Cyanide
Copper Fluoborate

Polycarbonate
PVC
Circuit Safe NEMA
FRP
Himeline
(Fiberglass Reinforced Noryl
Circuit Safe JIC
Circuit
HE
Polyester) Himeline
Himeline HE Clear
Opaque Cover w/Base Himeline HS — Bases Himeline Safe
Cover w/ HS Opaque w/Clear HP Himeline HLA/HLS Medium
Base
JIC
Himeline HLP
Lids

E
G
L
G
G
E
G
G
—
E
U
U
E
E
U
E
U
—
—
U
E
U
—
—
E
E
E
E
U
E
U

L
—
—
U
U
E
—
E
—
—
U
—
—
—
U
—
U
—
—
U
—
U
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
L

E
E
E
U
L
E
—
E
—
—
—
L
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—

E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
U
—
E
E
U
E
U
U
U
U
E
U
U
U
E
E
E
U
G
L
G

G
U
U
U
U
—
E
E
E
U
E
G
—
E
E
E
E

U
U
—
U
L
E
G
L
G
U
—
E
—
—
—
U
—

—
U
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—

—
U
—
U
U
E
E
U
E
U
—
E
E
E
E
E
—

www.tnb.com

Chemical

Copper Nitrate
Copper Sulfate >5%
Copper Sulfate 5%
Cresols
Cresylic Acid
Cupric Acid
Cyclohexane
Cyclohexanone
Detergents
Diacetone Alcohol
Dichlorobenzene
Dichloroethane
Diesel Fuel
Diethyl Ether
Diethylamine
Diethylene Glycol
Dimethyl Aniline
Dimethyl Formamide
Diphenyl Oxide
Dyes
Epsom Salts (Magnesium
Sulfate)
Ethane
Ethanol
Ethanolamine
Ether
Ethyl Acetate
Ethyl Benzoate
Ethyl Chloride
Ethyl Ether
Ethylene Bromide
Ethylene Chloride
Ethylene Chlorohydrin
Ethylene Diamine
Ethylene Dichloride
Ethylene Glycol
Ethylene Oxide
Fatty Acids
Ferric Chloride
Ferric Nitrate
Ferric Sulfate
Ferrous Chloride
Ferrous Sulfate
Fluoboric Acid
Fluorine
Fluosilicic Acid
Formaldehyde 100%
Formaldehyde 40%
Formic Acid

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Polycarbonate
Circuit Safe NEMA
FRP
PVC
Himeline
(Fiberglass Reinforced Noryl
Circuit Safe JIC
Circuit
HE
Polyester) Himeline
Himeline HE Clear
Safe
Opaque Cover w/Base Himeline HS — Bases Himeline
Cover
HS Opaque w/Clear HP Himeline HLA/HLS Medium
JIC
w/Base
Himeline HLP
Lids

E
E
E
U
U
E
U
U
E
U
U
U
E
U
U
L
U
U
U
G
E

U
E
E
U
U
E
G
U
E
U
U
U
E
U
U
G
U
U
—
—
E

—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—

E
E
E
U
—
E
U
U
E
—
—
E
U
—
—
E
U
U
—
E
E

E
L
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
E
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
U
U
E
E
E

—
G
—
—
U
U
U
—
U
U
U
E
U
G
L
G
E
E
E
U
E
—
L
E
E
E
E

—
—
—
L
L
—
L
U
—
—
E
—
U
E
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
E
L

—
E
E
U
E
E
U
U
—
U
—
U
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Environmental Resistance Table: E–Excellent, G–Good, L–Limited, U–Unsatisfactory

A-323

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information

A-324

Environmental Resistance Table: E–Excellent, G–Good, L–Limited, U–Unsatisfactory
IMPORTANT: These environmental resistance ratings are based upon tests where the specimens were placed in complete submergence in the reagent listed. Ratings listed in this chart
apply to a 48-hour exposure period. (The information in this chart is to be used ONLY as a guide in selecting equipment for appropriate chemical compatibility. Before permanent installation,
test the equipment with the chemicals and under the specific conditions of your application.)

FRP

Polycarbonate

Chemical
Freon 113
Freon 12
Freon 22
Freon TF
Freon® 11
Fuel Oils
Furan Resin
Furfural
Gallic Acid
Gasoline (high-aromatic)
Gasoline, leaded, ref.
Gasoline, unleaded
Gelatin
Glucose
Glue, P.V.A.
Glycerin
Glycolic Acid
Grease
Heptane
Hexane
Hydraulic Oil (Petro)
Hydraulic Oil (Synthetic)
Hydrazine
Hydrobromic Acid 100%
Hydrobromic Acid 20%
Hydrochloric Acid 100%
Hydrochloric Acid 20%
Hydrochloric Acid 37%
Hydrochloric Acid, Dry Gas
Hydrocyanic Acid
Hydrocyanic Acid (Gas 10%)
Hydrofluoric Acid 100%
Hydrofluoric Acid 20%
Hydrofluoric Acid 50%
Hydrofluoric Acid 75%
Hydrofluosilicic Acid 100%
Hydrofluosilicic Acid 20%
Hydrogen Gas
Hydrogen Peroxide 10%
Hydrogen Peroxide 100%
Hydrogen Peroxide 30%
Hydrogen Peroxide 50%
Hydrogen Sulfide (aqua)
Hydrogen Sulfide (dry)
Hydroquinone
Hydroxyacetic Acid 70%
Ink
Iodine

Circuit Safe NEMA
PVC
Circuit Safe JIC
Himeline
Himeline HE
HE Opaque Clear Cover w/Base
Cover w/
Himeline HS
Base
Opaque w/Clear Lids

G
E
E
G
E
E
E
U
G
E
G
L
G
E
L
E
G
E
L
G
E
E
—
E
G
U
E
G
E
G
E
L
G
G
L
G
E
E
E
E
E
E
G
E
G
U
L
E

G
—
—
—
—
G
—
U
—
E
E
E
—
E
—
E
—
—
G
U
—
—
U
—
—
U
G
U
—
—
G
U
U
U
U
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
—

FRP

(Fiberglass
Reinforced
Polyester)
Himeline HS —
Bases
Himeline HP
Himeline HLA/HLS
Himeline HLP

Circuit
Safe
Medium
JIC

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
E
—
—
E
—
E
—
—
E
U
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
—
—
—
—
—
—

U
U
G
—
G
G
—
U
E
G
G
U
E
E
—
E
—
—
G
G
—
—
—
G
G
E
E
E
E
E
L
U
L
U
U
G
G
E
E
E
E
—
E
—
—
—
—
L

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

PVC

Noryl

Chemical
Iodine (in alcohol)
Iodoform
Isooctane
Isopropyl Acetate
Isopropyl Ether
Isotane
Jet Fuel (JP3, JP4, JP5)
Kerosene
Ketones
Lacquer Thinners
Lacquers
Lactic Acid
Lard
Lead Acetate
Lead Nitrate
Lead Sulfamate
Lime
Linoleic Acid
Lithium Chloride
Lithium Hydroxide
Lubricants
Lye: Ca(OH)2 Calcium Hydroxide
Lye: KOH Potassium Hydroxide
Lye: NaOH Sodium Hydroxide
Epsom Salts (Magnesium Sulfate)
Magnesium Bisulfate
Magnesium Carbonate
Magnesium Chloride
Magnesium Hydroxide
Magnesium Nitrate
Magnesium Oxide
Magnesium Sulfate (Epsom Salts)
Maleic Acid
Malic Acid
Manganese Sulfate
Mayonnaise
Melamine
Mercuric Chloride (dilute)
Mercuric Cyanide
Mercurous Nitrate
Mercury
Methane
Methanol (Methyl Alcohol)
Methyl Acetate
Methyl Acetone
Methyl Alcohol 10%
Methyl Bromide
Methyl Butyl Ketone
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Polycarbonate

Circuit Safe NEMA
Himeline
Circuit Safe JIC
HE
Himeline HE
Opaque Clear Cover w/Base
Cover
Himeline HS
w/Base Opaque w/Clear Lids

E
E
E
U
G
E
L
E
U
U
U
G
E
G
E
G
G
E
U
—
G
G
G
E
E
E
G
G
E
E
—
E
E
E
L
U
U
E
E
E
E
G
E
U
U
E
U
E

—
—
G
U
U
—
E
U
U
G
U
G
E
—
—
E
—
—
G
U
E
U
U
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
—
—
E
—
—
E
—
E
U
—
G
U
—
G
—
U

www.tnb.com

(Fiberglass
Reinforced
Polyester)
Himeline HS — Noryl
Circuit
Bases
Safe
Himeline HP
Himeline HLA/HLS Medium
JIC
Himeline HLP

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
G
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
U
—
—
—
U
U
U
U
U
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
—
L
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
—
E
—
—
E
—
E
E
—
E
—
—
E
—
—

Technical Information
IMPORTANT: These environmental resistance ratings are based upon tests where the specimens were placed in complete submergence in the reagent listed. Ratings listed in this chart
apply to a 48-hour exposure period. (The information in this chart is to be used ONLY as a guide in selecting equipment for appropriate chemical compatibility. Before permanent installation,
test the equipment with the chemicals and under the specific conditions of your application.)

FRP

Himeline
HE
Opaque
Cover
w/Base

Circuit Safe NEMA
Circuit Safe JIC
Himeline HE
Clear Cover w/Base
Himeline HS
Opaque w/Clear Lids

(Fiberglass
Reinforced
Polyester)
Himeline HS —
Bases
Himeline HP
Himeline HLA/HLS
Himeline HLP

U
U
E
U
U
U
E
U
U
E
—
U
—
G
E
U
E
E
E
E
U
U
U
U
E
G
G
E
G
U
G
E
E
U
G
L
G
G
E
E
G
L
L
U
L
E
G
E

U
U
—
U
U
U
—
—
U
L
U
—
U
E
G
—
—
E
U
E
—
—
—
—
G
G
G
E
L
U
U
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
G
E
L
E
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
G
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

PVC

Chemical
Methyl Cellosolve
Methyl Chloride
Methyl Dichloride
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
Methyl Isobutyl Ketone
Methyl Isopropyl Ketone
Methyl Methacrylate
Methylamine
Methylene Chloride
Mineral Spirits
Monochloroacetic acid
Monoethanolamine
Morpholine
Motor oil
Naphtha
Naphthalene
Natural Gas
Nickel Chloride
Nickel Nitrate
Nickel Sulfate
Nitrating Acid (<15% HNO3)
Nitrating Acid (>15% H2SO4)
Nitrating Acid (_1% Acid)
Nitrating Acid (_15% H2SO4)
Nitric Acid (20%)
Nitric Acid (50%)
Nitric Acid (50%)
Nitric Acid (5–10%)
Nitric Acid (Concentrated)
Nitrobenzene
Nitromethane
Nitrous Acid
Nitrous Oxide
Oil: Aniline
Oil: Citric
Oil: Creosote
Oil: Diesel Fuel (20, 30, 40, 50)
Oil: Diesel Fuel (20, 30, 40, 50)
Oil: Hydraulic Oil (Petro)
Oil: Hydraulic Oil (Synthetic)
Oil: Mineral
Oil: Olive
Oil: Orange
Oil: Pine
Oil: Rosin
Oil: Silicone
Oil: Transformer
Oil: Turbine

Polycarbonate

www.tnb.com

Polycarbonate

PVC

Noryl

Circuit
Safe
Medium
JIC

—
U
—
U
U
U
—
—
U
E
—
E
U
E
U
U
—
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
G
G
G
E
G
U
U
—
—
U
E
U
U
U
—
—
E
E
—
—
—
E
—
—

Chemical
Oleic Acid
Oleum 100%
Oleum 25%
Oxalic Acid (cold)
Ozone
Palmitic Acid
Paraffin
Pentane
Perchloric Acid
Perchloroethylene
Petrolatum
Petroleum
Phenol (10%)
Phenol (Carbolic Acid)
Phosphoric Acid (>40%)
Phosphoric Acid (crude)
Phosphoric Acid (molten)
Phosphoric Acid (_40%)
Phosphoric Acid Anhydride
Phosphorus
Phosphorus Trichloride
Photographic Developer
Photographic Solutions
Phthalic Anhydride
Picric Acid
Potash (Potassium Carbonate)
Potassium Bicarbonate
Potassium Bromide
Potassium Chlorate
Potassium Chloride
Potassium Chromate
Potassium Cyanide Solutions
Potassium Dichromate
Potassium Ferricyanide
Potassium Ferrocyanide
Potassium Hydroxide (Caustic Potash)
Potassium Hypochlorite
Potassium Iodide
Potassium Nitrate
Potassium Oxalate
Potassium Permanganate
Potassium Sulfate
Potassium Sulfide
Propane (liquefied)
Propylene
Propylene Glycol
Pyridine
Pyrogallic Acid

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Himeline
HE
Opaque
Cover
w/Base

L
U
U
G
G
G
G
E
L
L
G
—
L
U
G
G
U
G
—
E
U
E
E
U
U
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
G
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
G
L
U
E

FRP

(Fiberglass
Circuit Safe NEMA
Reinforced
Circuit Safe JIC
Polyester)
Himeline HE
Himeline HS — Noryl
Circuit
Clear Cover
Bases
Safe
w/Base
Himeline HP
Himeline HS
Himeline HLA/HLS Medium
JIC
Opaque w/Clear Lids Himeline HLP

—
—
—
—
E
—
E
E
—
U
—
—
G
U
E
E
—
E
U
—
L
E
E
E
U
—
—
E
E
E
—
—
E
—
—
U
—
—
E
—
E
E
—
L
—
G
U
—

E
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
—
—
—
E
E
—
—
E
E
L
—
—
E
—
E
E
—
—
—
—
—
—

E
E
—
E
—
—
E
—
—
U
—
U
U
U
E
E
—
E
—
—
—
E
E
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
—
—
G
—

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Environmental Resistance Table: E–Excellent, G–Good, L–Limited, U–Unsatisfactory

A-325

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Enclosures & Junction Boxes

Technical Information

A-326

Environmental Resistance Table: E–Excellent, G–Good, L–Limited, U–Unsatisfactory
IMPORTANT: These environmental resistance ratings are based upon tests where the specimens were placed in complete submergence in the reagent listed. Ratings listed in this chart
apply to a 48-hour exposure period. (The information in this chart is to be used ONLY as a guide in selecting equipment for appropriate chemical compatibility. Before permanent installation,
test the equipment with the chemicals and under the specific conditions of your application.)

PVC

Chemical
Resorcinal
Rosins
Salicylic Acid
Salt Brine (NaCl saturated)
Sea Water
Silicone
Silver Bromide
Silver Nitrate
Soap Solutions
Soda Ash (see Sodium Carbonate)
Sodium Acetate
Sodium Aluminate
Sodium Benzoate
Sodium Bicarbonate
Sodium Bisulfate
Sodium Bisulfite
Sodium Borate (Borax)
Sodium Bromide
Sodium Carbonate
Sodium Chlorate
Sodium Chloride
Sodium Chromate
Sodium Cyanide
Sodium Ferrocyanide
Sodium Fluoride
Sodium Hydrosulfite
Sodium Hydroxide (20%)
Sodium Hydroxide (50%)
Sodium Hydroxide (80%)
Sodium Hypochlorite (<20%)
Sodium Hypochlorite (100%)
Sodium Metaphosphate
Sodium Metasilicate
Sodium Nitrate
Sodium Perborate
Sodium Peroxide
Sodium Polyphosphate
Sodium Silicate
Sodium Sulfate
Sodium Sulfide
Sodium Sulfite
Sodium Tetraborate
Sodium Thiosulfate (hypo)
Stannic Chloride
Stannic Fluoborate
Stannous Chloride
Stearic Acid
Stoddard Solvent
Styrene

FRP
Polycarbonate (Fiberglass Reinforced

FRP
Polycarbonate (Fiberglass Reinforced

Himeline
HE
Opaque
Cover
w/Base

Circuit Safe NEMA
Circuit Safe JIC
Himeline HE
Clear Cover w/Base
Himeline HS
Opaque w/Clear Lids

Polyester)
Himeline HS —
Bases
Himeline HP
Himeline HLA/HLS
Himeline HLP

Circuit
Safe
Medium
JIC

L
L
G
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
G
—
G
E
E
E
E
G
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
L
E
E
E
E
G
E
E
E
E
G
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
G
L
U

G
—
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
E
U
U
L
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
E
U
—
—
U
E
—
—
E
E
U

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
E
—
—
—
E
—
E
E
—
—
E
—
—
U
U
U
L
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—
E
U
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
U
E

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Noryl

Chemical

Sulfate (Liquors)
Sulfur Chloride
Sulfur Dioxide
Sulfur Dioxide (dry)
Sulfur Hexafluoride
Sulfur Trioxide
Sulfur Trioxide (dry)
Sulfuric Acid (<10%)
Sulfuric Acid (10–75%)
Sulfuric Acid (75–100%)
Sulfuric Acid (cold concentrated)
Sulfuric Acid (hot concentrated)
Sulfurous Acid
Tallow
Tannic Acid
Tanning Liquors
Tartaric Acid
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Tetrahydrofuran
Tin Salts
Toluene (Toluol)
Trichloroacetic Acid
Trichloroethane
Trichloroethylene
Trichloropropane
Tricresylphosphate
Triethylamine
Trisodium Phosphate
Turpentine
Urea
Uric Acid
Varnish
Vinegar
Vinyl Acetate
Vinyl Chloride
Water, Acid, Mine
Water, Deionized
Water, Distilled
Beet Sugar Liquids
Water, Fresh
Water, Salt
Whiskey & Wines
White Liquor (Pulp Mill)
White Water (Paper Mill)
Xylene
Zinc Chloride
Zinc Hydrosulfite
Zinc Sulfate

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

PVC Circuit Safe NEMA
Himeline
Circuit Safe JIC
HE
Himeline HE
Opaque Clear Cover w/Base
Cover
Himeline HS
w/Base Opaque w/Clear Lids
G
L
E
E
G
E
E
E
E
U
U
U
E
—
E
E
E
L
U
U
E
U
G
L
U
—
U
G
E
U
U
E
U
G
U
U
G
E
E
E
G
G
E
E
E
U
G
—
E

—
—
—
E
—
—
—
E
G
U
—
U
—
—
L
—
—
—
U
U
—
U
U
U
—
—
—
—
—
U
U
—
—
E
—
—
G
—
E
—
E
E
E
—
—
U
E
—
E

www.tnb.com

Polyester)
Himeline HS —
Bases
Himeline HP
Himeline HLA/HLS
Himeline HLP

Circuit
Safe
Medium
JIC

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
U
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
L
—
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
—
E
L
—
—
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
—
E

—
E
E
E
—
U
U
E
E
E
E
U
E
E
E
E
E
U
U
U
—
U
—
U
U
U
E
G
E
U
E
—
U
E
—
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
U
G
E
E
E

Noryl

In this section...

Carlon Electrical
Non-Metallic
Tubing (ENT)
System
®

Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic
Tubing (ENT) System
Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing............................................... A-328
Boxes and Accessories................................................A-329–A-338
Flexible Raceway Systems...........................................A-339–A-347
Flexible Raceway System Accessories.........................A-348–A-352
Technical Information................................................. A-353–A-354

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing
Options:
Flex-Plus ENT
•	 Sizes ⁄ " through 2"
®

1

Flex-Plus® ENT is a non-metallic flexible
raceway for use in walls, floors and
non-plenum ceilings. It’s lightweight,
hand-bendable and free from sharp edges,
which reduces installation time and saves
money.

E73317

LR83580
FT-4 Rated
where
noted by

•	 Packaging: coils or reels

Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. NO.
12005AK-001
1205AKY-001
1205AKR-001
12005AKC-001
12007AA-001
1207AAY-001
1207AAR-001
1207AAC-001
12008-750
12008Y-750
12008R-750
12008C-750
12009-750
12010-750
12010Y-750
12011-500
12011R-500
12011Y-500

2

•	 Colors can designate different voltages. 	
Examples:	
– Yellow color for communication circuits 	
and signaling cable
	 – Red color for fire alarm circuits
	 – Blue color for power circuits

SIZE
(in.)

⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1
1
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
2
2
2
1

COLOR

NOM.
I.D. (in.)

NOM.
O.D. (in.)

PILL
TAPE

MIN. BEND
RADIUS (in.)

Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Blue
Red
Yellow

.56
.56
.56
.56
.76
.76
.76
.76
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.402
1.554
1.554
2.030
2.030
2.030

.84
.84
.84
.84
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.315
1.315
1.315
1.315
1.66
1.90
1.90
2.375
2.375
2.375

Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
81⁄4
81⁄4
91⁄2
91⁄2
91⁄2

REEL SIZE (in.) REEL TYPE
(F x W)
(W=WOOD)

36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
48
48
48
48
48
48

x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 24
x 32
x 32
x 32
x 32
x 32
x 32

W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W

REEL
LENGTH

REEL WT.
(LBS.)

WT. PER
100 FT.
(LBS.)

1500
1500
1500
1500
1000
1000
1000
1000
750
750
750
750
750
750
750
500
500
500

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
90
90
90
90
90
90

10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
20
20
20
20
19
39
39
32
32
32

* 11⁄4"–2" available in yellow & red, made to order; consult factory.
Canada Only

Standard Stock — Coils
CAT. NO.
12005-200
12005Y-200
12005R-200
12005C-370
12007-100
12007Y-100
12007R-100
12007C-240
12008-100
12008Y-100
12008R-100
12008C-160

SIZE
(in.)

COLOR

NOM.
I.D. (in.)

NOM.
O.D. (in.)

PILL
TAPE

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1
1
1

Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Red
Blue

.56
.56
.56
.56
.76
.76
.76
.76
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00

.84
.84
.84
.84
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.05
1.315
1.315
1.315
1.315

Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty

1
1

MIN. BEND
Coil
WT. PER
RADIUS (in.) Length (Ft.) 100 FT. (LBS.)

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
22
22
22
22

Canada Only

10-ft. Lengths
CAT. NO.
12005-UPC
12007-UPC
12008-010

A-328

SIZE
(in.)

COLOR

NOM.
I.D. (in.)

NOM.
O.D. (in.)

STD.
CTN.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2
⁄4
1

Blue
Blue
Blue

.56
.76
1.00

.84
1.05
1.315

10 ft.
10 ft.
10 ft.

1.02
1.46
2.93

1

3

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Note: The solid blue color of ENT conduit is a registered trademark of
Carlon ®. ENT may show color deterioration in direct sunlight when
stored outdoors over an extended period of time. It is suggested
that all ENT products not be stored outside. Section 362.12(8) of the
NEC ® prohibits ENT to be used in areas exposed to direct sunlight.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

www.tnb.com

Vertical Stub Down

45° Stub Down

Carlon Vertical Stub Downs are designed to
provide a quick, easy connection to a wood
deck or transition from slab-to-slab using
Carlon’s® “Quick Connect” snap-in design…
simply snap the ENT in place. The integral
snaps provide a secure mount — preventing
the ENT from pulling out while enabling
easy removal of the fitting once the deck is
removed. All in a concrete-tight application.
The underside of this fitting provides ample
room to attach a Carlon® coupling to the
ENT to continue the run. Carlon® Vertical
Stub Downs are manufactured out of a
highly engineered thermoplastic material to
provide extra strength and durability and are
available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

Carlon® 45° Stub Downs are designed to
provide a smooth transition from crossdeck ENT runs to vertical applications.
The integral snaps provide a secure mount
— preventing the ENT from slipping or
pulling out — but also enable the stub to
easily be removed. The underside of this
fitting provides ample room to attach a
Carlon® coupling to the ENT to continue
the run. Carlon® 45° Stub Downs are
manufactured out of a highly engineered
thermoplastic material to provide extra
strength and durability. They’re concrete
tight and available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

®

CAT. No.
A210D
A210E
A210F

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2
⁄4
1

50
50
50

3.8
3.7
4.8

1

3

CAT. No.

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

A220D
A220E
A220F
A220G
A220H
A220J

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

25
25
25
25
25
25

1.8
2.0
2.6
2.8
3.3
4.1

1

3

Vertical Stub Down Transition Adapter

90° Stub Down Transition Adapter

Carlon Non-Metallic Exclusive…Carlon
Vertical Stub Down Transition Adapters,
like our Vertical Stub Downs, provide a
means to transition from ENT to another
wire-management product where code
requires other wire-management means.
The integral snaps provide a secure mount
— preventing the ENT from slipping or
pulling out, while the deck-mount flange
has a threaded port, enabling connection
to other conduit system using a terminal
adapter. Carlon® Vertical Stub Down
Transition Adapters are manufactured out
of polycarbonate material to provide extra
strength and durability. They’re concrete
tight and available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

Carlon® Non-Metallic Exclusive…Carlon®
90° Stub Downs are designed to provide
a smooth transition from cross-deck ENT
runs to vertical applications where code
requires other wire-management means.
The integral snaps provide a secure mount
— preventing the ENT from slipping or
pulling out, while the deck-mount flange
has a threaded port, enabling connection
to any conduit system using a terminal
adapter. Carlon® 90° Stub Downs are
manufactured out of polycarbonate
material to provide extra strength and
durability. They’re concrete tight and
available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

®

®

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)
⁄4" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)
1" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)

50
50
50

2.3
2.8
3.9

CAT. No.
A200D
A200E
A200F

E86720

1

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

A230D
A230E
A230F

E86720

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)
⁄4" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)
1" Female ENT to NPSC (Female)

25
25
25

2.0
2.4
3.3

CAT. No.
1

3

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
Stub Downs

A-329

Cement Caps
Included

Mud Box Base with Blank Cover
Cat. No.

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863BC

Mud Box with Blank Cover

24

12.3

Mud Box with Ceiling Ring
•	 Threaded brass inserts for fan (#1032 screws) and fixture (#8-32 screws)
mountings

•	 Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
•	 Listed for ceiling fans up to 35 lbs.
Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863CF
A863CFG

Mud Box with Blank Cover
Mud Box with Ceiling Ring & Ground Lug

24
24

15.5
16.1

▲

Cat. No.

Mud Box with One-Gang Ring
Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863S
A863SG

Mud Box with One-Gang Ring
Mud Box with One-Gang
Ring & Ground Lug

24
24

16.8
16.2

▲

Cat. No.

Mud Box with Two-Gang Ring
Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863D
A863DG

Mud Box with Two-Gang Ring
Mud Box with Two-Gang Ring
& Ground Lug

24
24

15.8
16.6

▲

Cat. No.

Mud Box with 4" Square Ring
•	 4" Square Ring not for luminaire
Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863-4SQ

Mud Box with 4-Inch Square Ring

24

15.2

▲

Cat. No.

Mud Box Assemblies with Mounting Feet
Carlon® Mud Box Assemblies with Mounting Feet are specifically engineered and designed for use
in Tunnel Form applications. The mounting feet are located on all four corners and enable the box to
attach directly to the wall of the form using pop rivets. The pop rivets help keep the box in position
during the pour and provide a safe, secure and rust-resistant mount.
Cat. No.
A863-4SQF
A863CFF
A863CFGF
A863DF
A863DGF
A863SF
A863SGF

A-330

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

4-Square Ring
Ceiling Ring
Ceiling Ring and Ground Lug
Double-Gang
Double-Gang and Ground Lug
Single-Gang
Single-Gang and Ground Lug

24
24
24
24
24
24
24

17.15
16.61
17.46
17.42
17.99
17.15
17.44

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Except where
noted by

s

Carlon® Mud Box Assemblies are available in five unique styles…blank, ceiling ring, one-gang, twogang and 4-inch square. All Mud Box Assemblies are manufactured out of polycarbonate material to
provide extra strength and durability, are concrete tight and have twelve integral connectors…two 1",
six 3⁄4" and four 1⁄2". Using our new ENT Reducers, this product will meet ANY jobsite application.

▲

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
Mud Box Assemblies

Boxes and Accessories
CARLON® EXCLUSIVE…The Carlon® ENT Mounting Bracket is specifically designed for use with Carlon®
ENT Mud Box Assemblies in vertical concrete walls where one- or two-gang boxes are needed. The
stainless steel spring-loaded mechanism provides a secure outlet box between concrete forms while
the soft-steel strap enables the outlet box to be secured to rebar. The bracket combination ensures a
straight box opening and a concrete-tight fit. Mud Box not included.
Cat. No.

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A863MB

Mud Box Mounting Kit

1

.98

Front View

Back View

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Mounting Brackets

ENT Bridge
CARLON® EXCLUSIVE…The Carlon® ENT Bridge is designed to support long ENT runs in concrete pour
applications. This makes pulling wire/cable a snap. Installation is easy…simply mount the ENT bridge,
using nails or screws, to the wood deck mounting and snap the ENT into place. The bridge is designed
to hold the conduit in place while minimizing dips in the conduit over long runs. The Carlon® ENT Bridge
is manufactured out of a highly engineered thermoplastic material to provide extra strength and
durability and can accommodate ENT sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1". (The Carlon® ENT bridge can be used with
rigid non-metallic conduit too.)

Cat. No.

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A293DEF

ENT Bridge

50

9.0

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-331

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
Transition Adapters
Male ENT to Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit
CARLON® EXCLUSIVE…Carlon® Male ENT to Schedule 40 & 80 PVC Conduit Transition Adapters are
designed to connect Schedule 40 conduit to Carlon® Flex-Plus® Blue™ ENT boxes and fittings. Simply
solvent cement the PVC adapter to the Schedule 40 conduit and snap the adapter into Carlon’s® “Quick
Connect” snap-in connector on the box or fitting. Carlon® Male ENT to Schedule 40 & 80 Adapters are
concrete tight and available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2" ENT to 1⁄2" Sch. 40 or Sch. 80
⁄4" ENT to 3⁄4" Sch. 40 or Sch. 80
1" ENT to 1" Sch. 40 or Sch. 80

100
100
100

2.4
3.2
4.5

Cat. No.
A263D
A263E
A263F

1

3

E32447

ENT to EMT
Carlon® ENT to EMT Transition Adapters are designed to easily transition from Carlon® Flex-Plus® Blue™
ENT to EMT using Carlon’s® “Quick Connect” snap-in design. The EMT is held securely in place using
the small screw (provided). This helps prevent the EMT from slipping/shifting out of the adapter. All
ENT to EMT adapters are manufactured out of polycarbonate material to provide extra strength and
durability. They’re concrete tight and available in sizes 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1".

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2" ENT to 1/2" EMT
⁄4" ENT to 3/4" EMT
1" ENT to 1" EMT

100
100
100

3.4
4.1
5.4

Cat. No.
A245D
A245E
A245F

1

3

E86720

Reducers
CARLON® EXCLUSIVE…Carlon® ENT Reducers are designed to provide an easy transition from 1"
Carlon® ENT to 3/4" ENT or from 3⁄4" Carlon® ENT to 1⁄2" ENT. They’re concrete tight and manufactured
out of polycarbonate material to provide extra strength and durability. Carlon® ENT Reducers provide
flexibility while on the jobsite by minimizing the need to carry size-specific boxes and fittings. Carlon®
ENT Reducers provide the versatility to convert Carlon® fittings and boxes to many different sizes and
configurations.

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄4"–1⁄2"
1"–3⁄4"

100
100

3.2
2.4

Cat. No.
A273DE
A273EF

A-332

3

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

E86720

www.tnb.com

Boxes and Accessories
CARLON® EXCLUSIVE…Carlon® ENT Outlet and Switch Boxes with Eccentric Knockouts are designed
to enable selective ENT openings — 1⁄2", 3⁄4" and 1" — based on application needs. They provide the
largest capacity available on the market today — 22 cu. in. Single-Gang, and 38 cu. in. Double-Gang
— and can be mounted to wood or steel studs. Carlon® ENT Outlet and Switch Boxes with Eccentric
Knockouts are manufactured out of a highly engineered thermoplastic material to provide extra strength
and durability and are available in single-gang and double-gang styles.
Note: The double-gang version is also a 4-in. square box.

Single-Gang — 22 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
A122

Size

Capacity
Cu. in.

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Single-Gang

22

25

6.8

UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant fire wall assemblies

Combination Two-Gang/Four-Inch Square Box — 38 Cu. In.
Cat. No.
A238

Size

Capacity
Cu. in.

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Two-Gang

38

25

8.9

UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant fire wall assemblies

E42728

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Outlet and Switch Boxes — Eccentric Knockouts

Outlet Box Divider
Carlon® ENT Outlet Box Divider is specifically designed for applications where a combined high- and
low-voltage closed-back box is needed, such as for placement in a fire-rated wall. Just slip the divider
into place to get the split box you need. The Carlon® ENT Outlet Box Divider is UL® Recognized for use
with the Carlon® A238 Box only.

Cat. No.

Size

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

A238DIV

—

50

1.87

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-333

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
Quick-Connect Adapters and Couplings
•	 Rigid non-metallic conduit fittings are
recommended for use with Carlon® 11/4"
–2" Flex-Plus® Blue™ ENT

•	Carlon® one-piece ENT Quick-Connect
Couplings, Threaded Adapters and Snap-In
Terminator Adapters are suitable for damp
locations

•	 When One-Piece Quick-Connect SnapIn Terminator Adapters are installed
in a concrete application, Carlon® flat
sealing washers must be used on the box
connection ends

•	Use of ENT Blue™ Quick-Set Cement is
required. See page A-338 for details

•	 Quick-Connect Couplings and Threaded
Adapters are concrete-tight when used with
Carlon® ENT
•	 All sizes of rigid non-metallic conduit
fittings are compatible with ENT when
using ENT cement

Couplings

E86720

Cat. No.

LR92248

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

1

⁄2
3
⁄4
1

150
100
50

2.90
3.00
2.30

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1

150
100
50

2.55
2.30
2.00

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

⁄2
3
⁄4

150
100
50

2.70
2.90
2.30

A240D
A240E
A240F

Threaded Adapters
Cat. No.
A243D
A243E
A243F

1

Snap-In Adapters
Cat. No.
A253D
A253E
A253F

1

1

Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit Adapters and Couplings
Male Terminal Adapters

Standard Couplings

D

For adapting non-metallic conduits to boxes, threaded
fittings, metallic systems. Male threads on one end,
socket end on other.

All socket fittings should be attached using ENT Blue
Quick-Set Cement (page A-338). Using Carlon® fittings with
Carlon® non-metallic conduit ensures system integrity.

S
C

Socket type
for joining
non-metallic
conduit.

B
A
OD

Std.

E943D
E943E
E943F
E943G
E943H
E943J

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
1

3

150
125
50
50
25
50

Typical
A

B

.852
1.064
1.330
1.677
1.918
2.393

.836
1.046
1.310
1.655
1.894
2.369

Min.
D

Max.
OD

.597 11⁄8
.800 111⁄32
1.018 15⁄8
1.332 21⁄32
1.566 25⁄32
2.000 221⁄32

Typical
C

S

L

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄8
⁄4
1
1
13
⁄16
13
⁄16

⁄16
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4

15⁄16
13⁄8
125⁄32
115⁄16
21⁄16
21⁄8

2.8
3.5
3
4
2.5
7

5

3

9

9

*All measurements in inches, unless otherwise noted.

A-334

LR31146

O.D.
A

L

Cat. No. Size Ctn.

E32447
™

C

Typical

Cat. No. Size

Std.
Ctn.

A

B

E940D
E940E
E940F
E940G
E940H
E940J

150
100
50
30
25
30

.852
1.064
1.330
1.677
1.918
2.393

.836
1.046
1.310
1.655
1.894
2.369

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
1

3

Min.
D

Max.
OD

.728 17⁄64
.840 15⁄16
1.210 15⁄8
1.535 163⁄64
1.755 215⁄64
2.190 247⁄64

*All measurements in inches, unless otherwise noted.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B

L

www.tnb.com

I.D.

Typical
C

L

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄16
⁄4
15
⁄16
1
11⁄8
13⁄16

11⁄2
15⁄8
2
21⁄8
23⁄8
21⁄2

2.8
3.5
3
4
2.5
7

11

3

Boxes and Accessories
•	 UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant floor/ceiling assemblies

Base Rings

E42728

Listed for use with ceiling fans up to 35 lbs. and for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
Cat. No.
A861
C861G

LR31146

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Without Ground Lug
With Ground Lug

10
10

2.5
2.0

Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

21⁄2 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)
21⁄2 Deep (3⁄4" KOs)
4 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)
4 Deep (3⁄4" KOs)
4 Deep (1" KOs)

10
10
10
10
10

2.5
2.1
2.9
2.9
3.0

Covers
Cat. No.
A862D
A862E
A864D
A864E
A864F

Quick-Connect Outlet and Switch Boxes
•	 Suitable for masonry walls
•	 Meets NEMA OS-2
•	UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant wall assemblies

E42728

Single-Gang — 16 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A58381D
A58381E

3 x 21⁄4 x 3 (1⁄2" KOs)
3 x 21⁄4 x 3 (3⁄4" KOs)

25
25

4.6
4.6

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

21/2" and 4" Mud Boxes and Covers

4" Square — 20 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A52151D
A52151E
A521DE

4 x 4 x 11⁄2 (1⁄2" KOs)
4 x 4 x 11⁄2 (3⁄4" KOs)
4 x 4 x 11⁄2 (1⁄2" & 3⁄4" KOs)

100
100
100

22.6
22.6
22.6

4" Square — 30.3 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A52171D
A52171E
A5217DE

4 x 4 x 2 3⁄8 (1⁄2" KOs)
4 x 4 x 2 3⁄8 (3⁄4" KOs)
4 x 4 x 2 3⁄8 (1⁄2" & 3⁄4" KOs)

25
25
25

7.6
7.6
7.6

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-335

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
ENT Box with Adapters
•	UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant wall assemblies

4" Square — 24.75 Cu. In. ENT Box with Adapters
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A5329DE

4 x 4 x 13⁄4 (1⁄2" & 3⁄4" KOs)

50

14.8

UL Listed E42728

Box Back Wall Support
Cat. No.

Size

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A540DS

For use with 1⁄2" Knockout

100

2.1

ENT Box Extenders
•	UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant wall assemblies

Single-Gang
Cat. No.
A410
A411
A412
A413
A414

E42728
Rise (in.)

Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4

3.5
4.2
5.0
6.6
8.1

100
50
50
40
30

7.7
4.6
5.1
5
4.4

Rise (in.)

Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Blank
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

—
6.1
7.4
8.8

100
75
50
50

7.7
5.0
4.2
4.8

1

5

Two-Gang
Cat. No.
A400
A420
A421
A422

A-336

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Boxes and Accessories
Round Plaster Rings
•	 Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
•	 UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire-resistant assemblies
Cat. No.

E42728

Rise (in.)

Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

⁄2
3
⁄4

3.2
4.0

100
100

3.3
3.7

Rise

Cu. In.

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

Blank
Blank with 1⁄2" KO

—
—

35
100

2.2
4.7

A471
A472

1

Round Blank Covers
Cat. No.
E460R-CAR
A470D

Quick Connect 4" Octagon Ceiling Boxes
•	Carlon® ceiling boxes and round plaster rings are produced from a special high heat-resistant
engineered plastic material developed specifically for fixture support
•	 Listed for fixture support up to 50 lbs.
•	 UL Classified for 2-hour-or-less fire resistant floor/ceiling assemblies
E42728

Ceiling Box — 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A615D
A615E
A615DE

(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)
(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (3⁄4" KOs)
(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (1⁄2" & 3⁄4" KOs)

50
50
50

6.4
6.4
6.4

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Round Covers for Octagon Ceiling Boxes

Ceiling Box with J Mount — 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A615DJ

(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)

50

18.7

Ceiling Box with L Bracket — 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A615DL

(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)

50

6.4

Ceiling Box with Adjustable Hanger Bar — 20.5 Cu. In.
Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

Std. Wt. (lbs.)

A615DH

(4) 2 1⁄8 Deep (1⁄2" KOs)

25

13.6

Adjust from 14 1⁄4" to 23 1⁄4"

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-337

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Boxes and Accessories
PVC Conduit Cutters

Concrete Sleeves

Small Cutter

Non-metallic concrete sleeve forms are
the easy way to form holes in concrete.
They install in seconds with nails,
screws or staples and are easily
removed. Concrete will not adhere
to them. Concrete sleeves are
adjustable to any slab thickness.

For fast, smooth field cuts of ⁄2" through
1" Flex-Plus® Blue™ ENT.
1

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

CC120B

8

10

Medium Cutter
Handheld cutter makes fast, square, smooth
field cuts on conduit from 1⁄2" through 11⁄4".
Produces burr-free cut with no shavings.
Fits into pocket or pouch.

Cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

9

12

CC125

B

Cat. No.

Min. O.D.
A (in.)

B (in.)

Std.
Ctn.

Std. Wt.
(lbs.)

E92CSH
E92CSJ
E92CSL
E92CSN
E92CSP
E92CSR

11⁄2
2
3
4
5
6

13⁄4
213⁄32
313⁄32
413⁄32
513⁄32
613⁄32

20
25
25
18
15
12

3
6
8
8
8
8

Prelubricated, woven polyester tape made
from low-friction, high abrasion-resistant
yarns, providing a low coefficient of friction.
Tape is printed with sequential footage
markings for accurate measurements.

For clean cuts of conduit 1⁄2" through 2".

CC122

8 3⁄4"

Tape

Large Cutter

Cat. No.

A

cat. No.

Size (in.)

Std. Ctn.

171⁄2

1

size (in.)

tensile
strength (Lbs.)

reel
lengths (ft.)

⁄2
⁄2
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8

1250
1250
1800
1800
1800

5000
10000
3000
6500
10000

TL14505
TL14510
TL38203
TL38265
TL38210

1
1

Other tapes are available. Consult your sales service location for additional information.

Carlon Low VOC Cement
®

(MSDS sheets available at www.carlon.com)

All Weather — ENT Blue
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Required for use with Flex-Plus® ENT
(Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing),
Riser-Gard®, P&C Flex™ and Carlon®
PVC fittings.
Up through 6" diameter.

-5°–10° F
10°–30° F
30°–50° F
50°–70° F
70°–90° F

6–8 Minutes
4–5 Minutes
3–4 Minutes
1–2 Minutes
1
⁄2–11⁄2 Minutes

cat. No.

Size

Applicator

VC9992

Quart

Dauber

Recommended
installation temp.

-5° to 100° F

Lap Shear
@ 73° F

2 Hrs.
16 Hrs.
72 Hrs.

Viscosity at 75° F
as manufactured

350 PSI
800 PSI
1500 PSI

400–700 CPS

ENT cement required for use
with ENT and Rigid Non-Metallic
Conduit Fittings.

Description

All-Weather “Quick-Set” Blue

STD. Ctn.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

12

29.0

Meets ASTM D-2564.

A-338

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

®

Plenum-Gard® is a UL® Listed non-metallic corrugated flexible conduit for
use in plenum, riser and general purpose applications. Plenum-Gard® is
manufactured from PVDF resin, which is extremely durable and resistant
to abrasion and mechanical damage before/after cable installation.
Plenum-Gard® is listed to UL® 2024 in accordance with the National
Electrical Code ® for plenum, riser, general purpose and other cabling/
optical fiber/telecommunication applications as defined in Articles 725,
770, 800 and 820.
Important: Installed cables must be plenum rated and the UL® Listing
must be printed on the product. Abandoned cables MUST be removed
(reference NEC®).

Technical Info
UL Standard 2024

Value

Maximum Flame Propagation
Max. Peak Optical Smoke Density
Max. Average Optical Smoke Density

5 ft.
0.5
0.15
Applications: Plenum, Riser and General Purpose

•	 Storage: -4° to 158° F

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks
of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

•	 Handling: -4° to 104° F
•	 No UV protection (not suitable for outdoor use)
•	 Do not store outside

E13938
FT-6 Rated

Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.

CD4X1C-1500
CE4X1-1000
CE4X1-1000S
CE4X1C-1000
CF4X1C-500
CF4X1C-1000
CF4X1C-1500
CF4X1C-5200
CF4X1C-6500
CF4X1C-8000
CG4X1C-500
CG4X1-500S
CG4X1C-900
CG4X1C-1600
CG4X1C-3200
CG4X1C-6500
CG4X1-900S
CH4X1C-350
CH4X1C-1200
CH4X1C-4000
CJ4X1-200S
CJ4X1C-225
CJ4X1C-700
CJ4X1C-1400
CJ4X1C-2000
CJ4X1C-2800
CL4X1C-150

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull Tape

Reel Size
(F x W) (IN.)

Reel type

Reel
Length (ft.)

⁄2

Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

200 lb.
Empty
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

34 x 23
34 x 23
34 x 23
34 x 23
34 x 23
48 x 28
48 x 28
66 x 41
72 x 41
82 x 41
48 x 28
48 x 28
48 x 45
48 x 45
66 x 41
96 x 41
48 x 28
48 x 28
48 x 45
82 x 41
48 x 28
48 x 28
48 x 45
82 x 41
82 x 41
82 x 41
48 x 45

Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood
Wood

1,500
1,000
1,000
1,000
500
1,000
1,500
5,200
6,500
8,000
500
500
900
1,600
3,200
6,500
900
350
1,200
4,000
200
225
700
1,400
2,000
2,800
150

1

⁄4

3

1

11⁄4

11⁄2

2

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Reel WT.
Reel WT.(LBs.) Per 100 Ft. (LBs.)

30
30
30
30
30
79
79
250
310
365
79
79
96
96
250
700
79
79
96
365
79
79
96
365
365
365
96

7
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
14
10
14
14
14
14
14
16
16
16
21
21
21
21
21
21
41

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Plenum-Gard Raceway

A-339

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Plenum-Gard Raceway (continued)
®

®

Features:
•	 For use in plenum areas per NEC® Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820

•	 Outside diameters meet IPS dimensions

•	 Sizes 1⁄2” through 3”

•	 UL® Listed raceway meeting UL 2024
1

•	 Pre-installed pull tape available in sizes ⁄2” through 3”

•	 Footage sequentially marked
•	 Single-peak design

Standard Stock — Coils
CAT. No.
CD4X1C-500
CE4X1-350*
CE4X1-350S
CF4X1C-100*
CF4X1-100S*
CF4X1C-250*
CF4X1-250
CF4X1-250S*
CG4X1C-200*
CG4X1-200S
CH4X1C-150*
CH4X1-150S
CJ4X1C-100*
CJ4X1-100S

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull Tape

Coil Length (ft.)

Product WT.
per 100 ft.(LBs.)

⁄2
⁄4

Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

900 lb.
Empty
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty/Split

500
350
350
100
100
250
250
250
200
200
150
150
100
100

7
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
14
14
16
16
21
21

1

3

1

11⁄4
11⁄2
2

* Overnight Shippable

Specifications
size (IN.)

I.D. Min. Ref. (IN.)

Min. O.D. (IN.)

Max. O.D. (IN.)

Min. Bend Radius (IN.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
3

.60
.74
1.00
1.35
1.50
2.00
3.00

.815
1.025
1.292
1.630
1.868
2.329
3.422

.835
1.045
1.312
1.650
1.888
2.439
3.452

2
2
3
3
4
4
4

1

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:

A-340

Position 1
Product

Position 2
Size (IN.)

Position 3
Type

Position 4
Wall

Position 5
Color

C = Plenum-Gard

D = 1⁄2
E = 3⁄4
F=1
G = 11⁄4
H = 11⁄2
J=2
L=3

4 = Corrugated

X = Standard

1 = Orange
2 = Black
3 = Gray
4 = White
5 = Blue
7 = Yellow
8 = Red

Position 6
Pull Line

C =  900 LB. Tape

Position 7
Length

Example
-1000 = Feet
-1000S = 1000 Feet Split

• Custom orders are not returnable

Options:	 • Color: Black, Blue, Gray, Red, White and Yellow

• Custom lengths are available in minimum order quantities of 1,000 ft.

	 	

• Two-, three- or four-way parallel

• Custom color runs are available in minimum order quantities 	
of 10,000 ft.

	 	

• Split duct

	 	

• Custom print line

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

®

Riser-Gard® is a non-metallic flexible raceway for use in riser and
general purpose applications. Riser-Gard® is UL® Listed and is available
with tape pre-installed. Riser-Gard is listed to UL® 2024 Standard for
riser applications or optical fiber/communications raceways.
Riser-Gard® is listed to UL® 2024 in accordance with the National
Electrical Code® per Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820 for riser, general
purpose and other cabling/optical fiber/telecommunication applications.
Riser-Gard® is suitable for use in vertical runs in a shaft or between
floors, as well as areas other than the plenum.
Important: Installed cables must be of suitable rating for the application.

Technical Info
UL listed to 2024

Maximum Flame Propagation
Maximum Air Temperature at 12 ft.

test method

maximum value

UL 2024
UL 2024

6.0 ft.
372° F

•	 Storage: -4° to 158° F

Applications: Riser and General Purpose

•	 Handling: -4° to 104° F

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks
of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

•	 No UV protection (not suitable for outdoor use)
•	 Do not store outside

E13938
FT-6 Rated

Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.

DE4X1-1000
DF4X1C-500R
DF4X1C-1000
DF4X1C-1500
DF4X1C-2700
DF4X1C-5200
DF4X1C-6500
DF4X1C-7000
DF4X1C-9400
DG4X1C-900
DG4X1C-500R
DG4X1C-1500
DG4X1C-1600
DG4X1C-3200
DG4X1C-4500
DG4X1C-5600
DG4X1C-6500
DH4X1C-1200
DH4X1C-4000
DH4X1C-4500
DJ4X1C-700
DJ4X1C-2000
DJ4X1C-2800
DL4X1C-750
W = Wood

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull Tape

Reel Size
(F x W) (IN.)

Reel type

Reel
Length (ft.)

Reel
WT.(LBs.)

Reel WT.
Per 100 Ft. (LBs.)

⁄4

Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

Empty
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

34 x 23
43 x 23
48 x 28
48 x 28
48 x 45
66 x 41
72 x 41
72 x 45
84 x 45
48 x 28
48 x 23
48 x 45
48 x 45
66 x 41
72 x 45
82 x 41
96 x 41
48 x 45
82 x 45
84 x 45
48 x 45
82 x 41
84 x 45
72 x 41

W
W
W
W
W
W
W
S
S
W
W
W
W
W
S
W
S
W
S
S
W
W
S
W

1,000
500
1,000
1,500
2,700
5,200
6,500
7,000
9,400
900
500
1,500
1,600
3,200
4,500
5,600
6,500
1,200
400
4,500
700
200
2,800
750

30
56
79
79
96
250
310
148
199
79
56
96
96
250
148
365
700
96
193
199
96
265
199
310

12
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
22
22
22
27
27
27
27

3

1

11⁄4

11⁄2

2
3

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Riser-Gard Raceway

S = Steel

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-341

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Riser-Gard Raceway (continued)
®

®

Features:
•	 For use in riser and general purpose areas per NEC® Articles 	
725, 770, 800 and 820

•	 UL® Listed raceway meeting UL 2024

•	 Riser-Gard® is also suitable for direct burial, not approved 	
for exposed applications

•	 Pull tape can be factory pre-installed in 1" through 3"

Note: UL has not evaluated Riser-Gard® for this application.

•	 Outside diameters meet IPS dimensions

•	 Available in sizes 3⁄4" through 3"

•	 Footage sequentially marked

Standard Stock — Coils
CAT. No.
DE4X1-350*
DF4X1C-125
DF4X1C-250*
DF4X1-250
DF4X1C-500
DF4X1-250S*
DG4X1-200
DG4X1-200S*
DG4X1C-200*
DG4X1C-500
DH4X1-150S
DH4X1C-150*
DJ4X1-100S
DJ4X1C-100*
DL4X1C-250

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull Tape

Coil Length (ft.)

Product WT.
per 100 ft.(LBs.)

⁄4

Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

Empty
900 lb.
900 lb.
Empty
900 lb.
Empty/Split
Empty
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
Empty/Split
900 lb.
900 lb.

350
125
250
250
500
250
200
200
200
500
150
150
100
100
250

12
15
15
15
15
15
17
17
17
17
22
22
27
27
27

3

1

11⁄4

11⁄2
2
3

* Overnight Shippable

Specifications
size (IN.)

I.D. Min. Ref. (IN.)

Min. O.D. (IN.)

Max. O.D. (IN.)

Min. Bend Radius (IN.)

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
3

.74
.98
1.31
1.54
2.00
3.00

1.025
1.290
1.640
1.880
2.350
3.422

1.075
1.340
1.690
1.930
2.400
3.452

5
6
8
10
12
18

3

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:
Position 1
Product

D = Riser-Gard

A-342

Position 2
Size (IN.)

E = 3⁄4
F=1
G = 11⁄4
H = 11⁄2
J=2
L=3

Position 3
Type

Position 4
Wall

4 = Corrugated

X = Standard

Position 5
Color

1 = Orange
2 = Black
3 = Gray
4 = White
5 = Blue
7 = Yellow
8 = Red

Position 6
Pull Line

Position 7
Length

C = 900 lb. Tape

Example
-1000 = Feet
-1000S = 1000 Feet Split

• Custom orders are not returnable

Options:	 • Color: Black, Blue, Gray, Red, White and Yellow

• Custom lengths are available in minimum order quantities of 1,000 ft.

	 	

• Two-, three- or four-way parallel

• Custom color runs are available in minimum order quantities 	
of 10,000 ft.

	 	

• Split duct

	 	

• Custom print line

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

®

Hal-Free Riser-Gard® is a halogen-free non-metallic flexible raceway for use in riser
and general purpose applications. In the event of a fire, this product will not release
halogen elements into the air, which makes it ideal for applications in tunnels,
laboratories and high-tech environments. Hal-Free Riser-Gard® is listed to UL® 2024
in accordance with NEC® Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820. Custom lengths and split
ducts are available upon request. Hal-Free Riser-Gard® is available in white only.

Features:
•	 Free from halogen elements
•	 Compliant with NEC® Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820
•	 Available in sizes 1" through 2"
•	 Available in white only
•	 Sequentially marked footage
Applications: Riser and General Purpose

Technical Info
UL listed to 2024

test method

maximum value

UL 2024
UL 2024

3' 6" ft.
387° F

Maximum Flame Propagation
Maximum Air Temperature

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks
of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

•	 Storage and Handling: -4° to 150° F
•	 No UV protection (not suitable for outdoor use)
•	 Do not store outside
E143102
FT-4 Rated

Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.
HF4X4C-5000
HG4X4C-4000
HH4X4C-2000
HJ4X4C-2000

Size (IN.)

Color

Nom. i.d (IN.)

nom. o.d.
(IN.)

Pull Tape

Reel Size
(F x W) (IN.)

Reel type

Reel length
(ft.)

Reel Wt.
(lbs.)

Product Wt.
per 100 ft. (lbs.)

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

White
White
White
White

1.049
1.250
1.500
2.000

1.365
1.550
1.850
2.425

900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

72" x 41"
72" x 41"
66" x 41"
82" x 41"

W
W
W
W

5,000
4,000
2,000
2,000

310
310
250
365

7.5
7.5
12
21

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Hal-Free Riser-Gard Raceway

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:
Position 1
Product

Position 2
Size (IN.)

H = Hal-Free

F=1
G = 11⁄4
H = 11⁄2
J=2

Position 3
Type

Position 4
Wall

Position 5
Color

Position 6
Pull Line

Position 7
Length

4 = Corrugated

X = Standard

4 = White

C = 900 lb. Tape

Example
-1000 = Feet
-1000S = 1000 Feet Split

•	 Custom orders are not returnable
•	 Custom lengths are available in minimum order quantities of 1,000 ft.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-343

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Carlon Plenum Duct
®

Technical Info:
•	 Maximum flame propagation distance is less than 5.0 ft.
•	 Peak optical density of smoke is less than 0.50
•	 Average optical density of smoke is less than 0.15

Applications: Plenum, Riser and	
General Purpose Applications per	
NEC ® Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820

•	 UL Listed to UL 2024 Standard
®

•	 FT-6 Rated
Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.

Color

Pull Tape

Reel Size
(IN.)

Reel length (ft.)

Reel Wt. (lbs.)

Product Wt.
per 100 ft. (lbs.)

White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White

900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

34 x 23
48 x 28
72 x 41
82 x 41
34 x 23
48 x 30
72 x 41
82 x 41
66 x 41
82 x 41
82 x 41

500
1,800
5,000
8,000
500
1,000
5,000
6,000
2,000
4,000
2,000

30
79
310
365
30
83
310
365
250
365
365

10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
14
21

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull Tape

box size (IN.)

coil length (ft.)

Product Wt. per 100 ft. (lbs.)

1
11⁄4

White
White

900 lb.
900 lb.

34 x 14 x 34
39 x 15 x 39

250
250

10
14

Size (IN.)

PLM100T-500
PLM100T-1800
PLM100T-5000
PLM100T-8000
PLM125T-500
PLM125T-1000
PLM125T-5000
PLM125T-6000
PLM150T-2000
PLM150T-4000
PLM200T-2000

1

11⁄4

11⁄2
2

Standard Stock — Coils/Box
CAT. No.
PLM100T-250B2
PLM125T-250B4

Specifications

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:

size

I.D. Min. Ref.

Min. O.D.

Max. O.D.

Min. Bend Radius

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

.60
.74
1.00
1.35
1.50
2.00

.815
1.025
1.292
1.630
1.868
2.329

.835
1.045
1.312
1.650
1.888
2.439

2
2
3
3
4
4

1

Position 1
Product

PLM = PLENUM

Position 2
Size (IN.)

100 = 1
125 = 11⁄4
150 = 11⁄2
200 = 2

Position 3
Pull Line

Position 4
Length

T = 900 lb. Tape

Example
-1000 = Feet

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

A-344

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Flexible Raceway Systems
Applications: Riser and General Purpose
Applications per NEC® Articles 725,
770, 800 and 820. Suitable for vertical
runs in a shaft or between floors.

®

Technical Info:
•	 Maximum flame propagation: 6.0 ft. max. value
•	 Do not store outside
•	 No UV protection
•	 UL® Listed to UL 2024
•	 FT-4 Rated
Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull
Tape

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

RIS100T-5000
RIS125T-4000
RIS150T-2000
RIS200T-2000

Reel
length
(ft.)

Reel
Wt.
(lbs.)

Product Wt.
per 100 ft.
(lbs.)

66 x 41
72 x 41
66 x 41
66 x 41

5,000
4,000
2,000
2,000

250
310
250
250

15
17
22
27

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:

Specifications
size (IN.)

I.D. Min. Ref.
(IN.)

Min. O.D. (IN.)

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

.74
.98
1.31
1.54
2.00

1.025
1.290
1.640
1.880
2.350

3

Reel
Size (IN.)

Max. O.D. (IN.)

Min. Bend
Radius (IN.)

Position 1
Product

Position 2
Size (IN.)

Position 3
pull line

Position 4
length

1.075
1.340
1.690
1.930
2.400

6
6
7
81⁄4
91⁄2

RIS = Riser

100 = 1
125 = 11⁄4
150 = 11⁄2
200 = 2

T = 900 lb. Tape

Example
-1000 = Feet

Carlon Hal-Free Riser Duct
®

Applications: Riser and General Purpose
Applications per NEC Articles 725, 770,
800 and 820.

Technical Info:
•	 Maximum flame propagation: 6.0 ft. max. value

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Carlon Riser Duct

•	 Do not store outside
•	 No UV protection
•	 UL® Listed to UL 2024 Standard
•	 FT-4 Rated
Standard Stock — Reels
CAT. No.
RHF100T-5000
RHF125T-4000
RHF150T-2000
RHF200T-2000

Size (IN.)

Color

Pull
Tape

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

White
White
White
White

900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.
900 lb.

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
3

Reel
length
(ft.)

Reel
Wt.
(lbs.)

Product Wt.
per 100 ft.
(lbs.)

66 x 41
72 x 41
66 x 41
82 x 41

5,000
4,000
2,000
2,000

250
310
250
365

15
17
22
27

Custom Orders — How to Build a Part Number:

Specifications
size (IN.)

Reel
Size (IN.)

I.D. Min. Ref.
(IN.)
Min. O.D. (IN.) Max. O.D. (IN.)

.74
.98
1.31
1.54
2.00

1.025
1.290
1.640
1.880
2.350

1.075
1.340
1.690
1.930
2.400

www.tnb.com

Min. Bend
Radius (IN.)

Position 1
Product

Position 2
Size (IN.)

Position 3
pull line

Position 4
length

6
6
7
81⁄4
91⁄2

RHF = Hal-Free Riser

100 = 1
125 = 11⁄4
150 = 11⁄2
200 = 2

T = 900 lb. Tape

Example
-1000 = Feet

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-345

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway Systems
Small. Slick. Speedy. Ideal for Telecom Installs!
Carlon Micro-Gard Plenum and Micro-Gard Riser Duct
®

®

®

Carlon® Micro-Gard® Plenum and Micro-Gard® Riser is specifically
designed to provide fiber pathways in plenum and riser applications
in Multi-Dwelling Units (MDUs) and other premise structures.
The 8/6 and 12/10 mm size conduits can be installed individually or used
to optimize space in existing duct structures. And the small size significantly
reduces the structural damage caused during pass-throughs.
Micro-Gard® Plenum and Riser is UL® Listed for plenum and riser
applications. It’s easy to handle, easy to install and easy to conceal,
making it the ideal MDU cable management system.

Features:
•	UL® and cUL Listed to UL 2024 for plenum and
riser applications
•	 Compliant with NEC® Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820
•	 Two sizes: 8/6mm and 12/10mm. The smaller sizes
accommodate the size constraints of multi-dwelling
units and make installations faster and easier

Micro-Gard ® Plenum

•	 Smooth interior wall eliminates snag points and provides
low coefficient of friction, regardless of whether jetting or
pull-tape is used
•	 Superior burn-through resistance for longer cable pulls
•	 Pre-lubricated, factory installed pull-tape makes installing
cable faster and easier (option available for empty duct)
•	 Sequentially marked footage to easily identify lengths
and reduce waste
•	 Reel sizes from 1,000 to 5,000 feet for easy handling
on the jobsite
•	 Future-proofing raceway system for fast, easy wire/cable
upgrades, changes and moves
•	 Used in cable bundles
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

Micro-Gard ® Riser

E13938

A-346

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Flexible Raceway Systems
®

®

Size

Type

Color

Factory Installed

Pre-Lubricated
Radius (in.)*

Min. Bend
Feet/Reel

Reel
Size (in.)

8/6 mm
8/6 mm
8/6 mm
12/10 mm
12/10 mm
12/10 mm
8/6 mm
8/6 mm
8/6 mm
12/10 mm
12/10 mm
12/10 mm

Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Plenum
Riser
Riser
Riser
Riser
Riser
Riser

White
White
White
White
White
White
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange
Orange

50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord
50 lb. Cord

2
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4

1,000
2,500
5,000
1,000
2,500
5,000
1,000
2,500
5,000
1,000
2,500
5,000

24
24
36
24
24
36
24
24
36
24
24
36

cat No.
MGP08MT-1000
MGP08MT-2500
MGP08MT-5000
MGP12MT-1000
MGP12MT-2500
MGP12MT-5000
MGR08JT-1000
MGR08JT-2500
MGR08JT-5000
MGR12JT-1000
MGR12JT-2500
MGR12JT-5000

®

*NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum bend radius during installation of the product.

Micro-Gard® Plenum Dimensions — Smooth O.D./Ribbed I.D.
outside diameter

inside dia. (min.)

inch

mm

inch

mm

inch

mm

# Ribs

std. wt.
(lb./100 ft.)

.472 +/- .004
.315 +/- .004

12 +/- .1
8 +/- .1

.047 +0/-.004
.040 +0/-.004

1 +0/-.1
1 +0/-.1

.354
.212

8.9
5.4

26
16

4.92
2.68

CAT. no.
MGP12RMT
MGP08RMT

wall

Micro-Gard® Riser Dimensions — Smooth O.D./Ribbed I.D.
outside diameter

MGR12RJT
MGR08RJT

wall

inside dia. (min.)

inch

mm

inch

mm

inch

mm

# Ribs

std. wt.
(lb./100 ft.)

.472 +/- .004
.315 +/- .004

12 +/- .1
8 +/- .1

.047 +0/-.004
.040 +0/-.004

1 +0/-.1
1 +0/-.1

.354
.212

8.9
5.4

26
16

2.86
1.55

CAT. no.

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Carlon Micro-Gard Plenum and Micro-Gard Riser

How to Interpret a Catalog Number
Position 1
Product

Position 2
Type

Position 3
Size

Position 4
Color

Position 5
Pull Line

Position 6
Length

MG = Micro-Gard

P = Plenum
R = Riser

08 = 8/6mm
12 = 12/10mm

J = Orange
M = White

T = 50 lb. Cord

Example
-1000 = Feet

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-347

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway System Accessories
For use with Riser-Gard and General Purpose
®

Non-Metallic Adapters and Couplings

LR31146

Couplings
cat. No.

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

⁄4
1

Orange
Orange

25
20

.783
.972

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

⁄4
1

Orange
Orange

100
50

2.30
2.00

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

⁄4
1

Orange
Orange

100
50

2.90
2.30

SCA240E
SCA240F

3

Threaded Adapters
cat. No.
SCA243E
SCA243F

3

Snap-In Adapters
cat. No.
SCA253E
SCA253F

3

For use with Plenum-Gard

®

Non-Metallic Adapters and Couplings
Couplings
cat. No.

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

1

Orange

50

2.50

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

1

Orange

50

1.55

Size (IN.)

Color

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

1

Orange

50

3.00

A340F

Threaded Adapters
cat. No.
A343F

Snap-In Adapters
cat. No.
A353F

A-348

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

E32447
Except where
noted by

Non-Metallic Male Terminal Adapters

Non-Metallic Standard Couplings

For adapting non-metallic conduits to boxes, threaded fittings,
metallic systems. Male threads on one end, socket end on other.

All socket fittings should be attached Using Carlon® solvent cement. Using
Carlon® fittings with Carlon® non-metallic conduit ensures system integrity.

D

O.D.
A

S
L

C

Socket type for joining
non-metallic conduit.

B

C

B

L

I.D.

A
O.D.
Dimensions (IN.)
Size Std.
cat. No. (IN.) Ctn. Color

E943E
E943F
E943G
E943H
E943J
SCE943G
SCE943H
SCE943J

Typical
A

B

⁄4 125 Gray 1.064 1.046
1 50 Gray 1.330 1.310
11⁄4 50 Gray 1.677 1.655
11⁄2 25 Gray 1.918 1.894
2 50 Gray 2.393 2.369
11⁄4 50 Orange 1.677 1.655
11⁄2 25 Orange 1.918 1.894
2 50 Orange 2.393 2.369
3

Min. Max.
D
O.D.

.800
1.018
1.332
1.566
2.000
1.332
1.566
2.000

1 ⁄32
15⁄8
21⁄32
25⁄32
221⁄32
21⁄32
25⁄32
221⁄32
11

Dimensions (IN.)
Typical

C

T

⁄4
1
1
13⁄16
13⁄16
1
13⁄16
13⁄16

L

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄16 1 ⁄8 3.5
⁄16 125⁄32 3
3
⁄4 115⁄16 4
3
⁄4 21⁄16 2.5
3
⁄4 21⁄8
7
3
⁄4 115⁄16 4
3
⁄4 21⁄16 2.5
3
⁄4 21⁄8
7

3

9

3

11

cat. No.

Size Std.
(IN.) Ctn. Color

E940E
E940F
E940G
E940H
E940J
SCE940G
SCE940H
SCE940J

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
3

Typical
A

B

Max.
Min. D O.D.

100 Gray 1.064 1.046
50 Gray 1.330 1.310
30 Gray 1.677 1.655
25 Gray 1.918 1.894
30 Gray 2.393 2.369
30 Orange 1.677 1.655
25 Orange 1.918 1.894
30 Orange 2.393 2.369

.840
1.210
1.535
1.755
2.190
1.535
1.755
2.190

1 ⁄16
15⁄8
163⁄64
215⁄64
247⁄64
163⁄64
215⁄64
247⁄64
5

Typical
C

⁄4
15⁄16
1
11⁄8
13⁄16
1
11⁄8
13⁄16
3

l

Std.
Wt.
(lbs.)

15⁄8 4.4
2
3.5
21⁄8 3.5
23⁄8 3.9
21⁄2 5.25
21⁄8 3.5
23⁄8 3.9
21⁄2 5.25

For use with Plenum-Gard

®

Metallic Terminal Adapter

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway System Accessories
For use with Riser-Gard and General Purpose

Flat Sealing Washer
Where a waterproof termination is required
into any enclosure (metallic or non-metallic),
install the neoprene washer over the threads
of a terminal adapter before inserting into
the enclosure. Use a standard locknut or
threaded bushing to secure the assembly.

cat. No.
255
256
257
258
259

Size (IN.)

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

cat. No.

Size (IN.)

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

10
100
100
100
50

12
25
28
35
19

E943EW
E943FW
E943GW
E943HW
E943JW

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

125
100
50
50
25

.45
.46
.44
.45
.42

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

3

A-349

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway System Accessories
Low-Voltage Boxes and Brackets

Dual-Voltage Box/Bracket*

E11461

cat. No.

cover

volume

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

SC200DV

1-Gang

20.5 cu. in

16

6.4

*U.S. Patent D463,376.
SC200DV

Low-Voltage Add-On Bracket*

SC100SC

E137781

cat. No.

Size

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

SC100SC

1-Gang

24

2.3

*U.S. Patent D459,312.
U.S. Patent 6,710,245.
U.S. Patent 6,872,884.

Low-Voltage Adjustable Brackets*
cat. No.
SC100ADJC
SC200ADJC

E137781

Size

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

1-Gang
2-Gang

24
20

7.5
6.9

SC100ADJC

*U.S. Patent 5,289,934.

Low-Voltage Brackets*
cat. No.

size

SC100A
SC200A
SC300A

1-Gang
2-Gang
3-Gang

E137781
resi-rings

std. ctn.

std. wt. (lbs.)

⁄4, 1, 11⁄4
⁄4, 1, 11⁄4
—

24
24
5

5.3
7.7
1.6

3
3

SC100A

*U.S. Patent D457,140.
U.S. Patent D462,664.
U.S. Patent 6,812,405.

For other Carlon® Flexible Raceway System
Accessories, refer to the following pages:
•	 Mud Box Assemblies — p. A-330

SC200A

•	 Mud Boxes and Covers — p. A-335
•	 Quick-Connect Outlet and Switch Boxes — p. A-335
•	 ENT Box and Extenders — p. A-336
•	 Octagon Ceiling Boxes and Covers — p. A-337
•	 Cutting Tools — p. A-338
SC300A

A-350

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

*Meets ASTM D2564

Medium — Clear
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Recommended for all grades
and types of Carlon® wireway
and fittings, except Flex-Plus®
Blue™ ENT (Electrical NonMetallic Tubing.)

10°–30° F
30°–50° F
50°–70° F
70°–90° F

Recommended
installation temp.

Lap Shear
@ 73° F

Viscosity at 75° as
manufactured

40° to 100° F

2 hrs. 350 psi
16 hrs. 800 psi
72 hrs. 1,500 psi

500–900 cps

Not recommended
5–6 minutes
3–4 minutes
1–2 minutes

Up through 6" diameter.

cat. No.

Size

Applicator

Description

STD.
Ctn.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

VC9963
VC9962
VC9961P

Pint
Quart
Gallon

Dauber
Dauber
—

PVC Medium Clear
PVC Medium Clear
PVC Medium Clear

24
12
6

29.0
27.5
53.5

Meets ASTM D-2564.

Regular — Clear
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Recommended for all grades
and types of Carlon® wireway
and fittings, except Flex-Plus®
Blue™ ENT (Electrical NonMetallic Tubing.)

10°–30° F
30°–50° F
50°–70° F
70°–90° F

Recommended
installation temp.

Not recommended
5–6 minutes
3–4 minutes
1–2 minutes

40° to 100° F

Lap Shear @ 73° F

2 hrs. 350 psi
16 hrs. 800 psi
72 hrs. 1,500 psi

Viscosity at 75° as
manufactured

500–900 cps

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway System Accessories
Carlon Low-VOC Cements

Up through 6" diameter.

Size

Applicator

Description

STD.
Ctn.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2 Pint

Dauber

PVC Regular Clear

10

6.5

cat. No.
VC9964

1

Meets ASTM D-2564.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-351

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Flexible Raceway System Accessories
Carlon Low-VOC Cements (continued)
®

All Weather — Clear
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Recommended for all grades and
types of Carlon® wireway and fittings,
except Flex-Plus® Blue™ ENT
(Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing.)
Up through 6" diameter.

cat. No.

-5°–10° F
10°–30° F
30°–50° F
50°–70° F
70°–90° F

Recommended
installation temp.

6–8 Minutes
4–5 Minutes
3–4 Minutes
1–2 Minutes
1
⁄2–11⁄2 Minutes

-5° to 100° F

Size

Applicator

Description

⁄2 Pint

Dauber

VC9983

Pint

Dauber

VC9982

Quart

Dauber

VC9981P

Gallon

—

All Weather
“Quick-Set” Cement
All Weather
“Quick-Set” Cement
All Weather
“Quick-Set” Cement
All Weather
“Quick-Set” Cement

VC9984

1

Lap Shear @ 73° F

2 Hrs.
16 Hrs.
72 Hrs.

350 PSI
800 PSI
1,500 PSI

STD.
Ctn.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

10

7.0

24

30.0

12

29.0

6

54.0

400–700 CPS

Meets ASTM D-2564.

Gray
Recommended pipe
application and sizes

Set-up time
(Evaporation Rate)

Recommended for all grades and
types of Carlon® wireway and fittings,
except Flex-Plus® Blue™ ENT
(Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing.)

10°–30°F
30°–50°F
50°–70°F
70°–90°F

Not recommended
5–6 minutes
3–4 minutes
1–2 minutes

Recommended
installation temp.

Lap Shear
@ 73°F

Viscosity at 75° as
manufactured

40° to 100°F

2 hrs. 350 psi
16 hrs. 800 psi
72 hrs. 1,500 psi

500–900 cps

Up through 6" diameter.

VOC emission of 490 grams/liter per
the Bay and South Coast test method.

Size

Applicator

Description

STD.
Ctn.

STD. Wt.
(lbs.)

⁄2 Pint
Pint
Quart

Dauber
Dauber
Dauber

Low VOC Gray
Low VOC Gray
Low VOC Gray

24
24
12

15.5
27.0
26.0

cat. No.
VC9LV4-24
VC9LV3
VC9LV2

1

Meets ASTM D-2564.

A-352

Viscosity at 75°
as manufactured

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

1.	 Cut ENT square and clean.

Specifications:

2.	 Insert end into fitting, making sure two (2) full corrugations

1.1 E lectrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) is designed to replace EMT,
flexible metal conduit or other raceway or cable systems, for
installation in accordance with Article 362 of the National Electrical
Code® Section 12-1500 of the CEC, other applicable sections
of the Code and local codes.

	

are snapped into fitting beyond flexible tabs (2 clicks).

3.	ENT should be tied to rebar at 2–3 foot intervals to prevent flotation.

Keep ENT straight. Small deflections over a long run may accumulate
significant degrees of bend that will affect conductor installation.
Suitable materials include wire, tie wraps and tape.

4.	 When using rigid non-metallic conduit fittings for concrete

	

tight performance:

1.2 A ny ENT used shall be listed to the requirements of UL Standard
UL 1653 in accordance with Article 362 of the NEC® and Section
12-1500 of the CEC.
1.3 A ny ENT used shall meet the requirements of BI National Standard
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.1-UL1653 and shall be Listed/Certified
in accordance to the Electrical Codes.
1.4 C
 arlon’s® ENT shall be installed per the technical assessment
prepared by fire cause analysis for use in 1-hour and 2-hour
rated construction.
1.5 P enetration of fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings shall use Classified
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems described in the current
Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory.
1.6 F ittings and outlet boxes designed for use with ENT shall be listed.
All fittings, boxes and accessories shall be from one manufacturer.
1.7 O
 nly Carlon® ENT Blue™ cement recommended specifically
for use with ENT and rigid non-metallic fittings shall be used.
1.8 Unless

indicated differently on drawings, ENT systems shall be
color coded: BLUE for branch and feeder circuit wiring, YELLOW
for communications and RED for fire alarm and emergency systems,
or colors can designate different voltages.
1.9 E NT, fittings and accessories shall be manufactured by Carlon®.
Features:

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Technical Information
Concrete Encasement Guidelines for Carlon ENT

•	 Recognized for use with PVC rigid non-metallic conduit fittings
	 with all sizes of ENT
•	 ENT rated for 90° C conductors U.S., and 75° C Canada
•	 One-piece ENT Coupling, Threaded Terminator and RNC Transition
	 Fitting are rated concrete tight without tape
•	 Recognized for use in 2-hour fire-resistive nonload-bearing
	 and load-bearing wall assemblies
A.	 Do not use chemical primer or cleaner.
B.	 Use a brush to apply a light, uniform coat of cement labeled

•	Recognized for use in 1-hour fire-resistive nonload-bearing
wall assemblies

C.	 Do not use a dauber.

•	Recognized for use in a fire-resistive ceiling assembly
(up to three hours)

	

for use with ENT on the coupling and ENT.

D.	 Brush excess cement out of ENT grooves.
E.	Promptly insert ENT into fitting while cement is wet,

until the stop is reached, and give a quarter turn.

F.	 Do not disturb until joint is set.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association, Inc.

•	 Recognized for Through-Penetration Firestop systems
	 as classified by UL to meet ICC building codes.
•	Conductors easily push through the raceway
(up to approximately 50 feet)*
•	For use in buildings in accordance with NEC® Article 362/
CEC Section 12-1500
•	 Outside Diameters meet IPS Dimensions
•	 Storage		

-4° F to 158° F

•	 Handling	

-4° F to 104° F
Continued on next page

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A-353

Boxes & Covers — Carlon® Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) System

Technical Information
Continued from previous page

Approved Uses:
•	 Concrete slab — NEC® Article 362/CEC Section 12-1500

•	 For use in residential attics up to three feet above the
bottom of the ceiling joist

•	 Walls — wood stud, masonry and metal stud —
NEC® Article 362/CEC Section 12-1500

•	 Maximum ambient temperature 140° F (60° C)
Typical Applications:
•	 Residential: low or high rise — multi or single family

•	 Ceilings — permanent or dropped (free air only) —
NEC® Article 362/CEC Section 12-1500

•	 Commercial: low or high rise — office, retail, hotel/motel,
restaurant, etc.

•	Exposed — NEC® Article 362/CEC Section 12-1500
•	 Public assembly — NEC® Section 518.4, in non-fire rated
and certain fire rated structures
•	 Prewired — NEC® Article 362/CEC Section 12-1500

•	Nursing homes/hospitals in non-patient care areas only
•	 Schools, classrooms, dormitories, offices
•	 Fire alarm systems

•	 Classified by UL 1479 for Through Penetration Firestop
Systems in UL Guide Category XHEZ and current UL Fire
Resistance Directory

•	 Recreational vehicles and parks
•	 Solar photovoltaic systems

•	Three-hour rated floor/ceiling assembly

•	Marinas and boatyards

•	 Raised floors — NEC® Section 645.5(E)(2)

•	Other uses per the current NEC® and CEC

•	Exposed or concealed in building above three floors when
a fire sprinkler system is installed in accordance with
NFPA 13 — NEC® Section 362.10(2)

NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Inc.

Carlon Innerduct Guide
When Innerduct is being used inside the building…
®

Plenum

General Purpose and Riser

•	 Must be UL® Listed

•	 Must be UL® Listed

•	 Plenum cable must be installed

•	 Riser rated cable must be used in riser applications

•	 Color: Industry standard orange

•	 Color: Industry-standard orange

•	 Pull tape pre-installed in sizes 1⁄2" through 3"

carlon®

pyramid®

carlon®

pyramid®

CAt. NO.

size (IN.)

CAt. NO.

size (IN.)

CAt. NO.

size (IN.)

CAt. NO.

size (IN.)

CD4X1C
CE4X1C
CF4X1C
CG4X1C
CH4X1C
CJ4X1C
CL4X1C

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
3

PLM100T
PLM125T
PLM150T
PLM200T

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

DE4X1C
DF4X1C
DG4X1C
DH4X1C
DJ4X1C
DL4X1C

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄4
2
3

RIS100T
RIS125T
RIS150T
RIS200T

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

1

3

Note: HDPE innerduct will not meet code
Specifying and installing UL Listed innerducts with the anticipation of future upgrades provides the building owner with a low-cost solution for the removal of abandoned cables.

A-354

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Kindorf Modular
Metal Framing
System
®

Kindorf® Modular Metal
Framing System
Overview............................................................................ B-2–B-7
Channels, Nuts and Fittings.............................................. B-8–B-30
Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports................................... B-31–B-41
Concrete Inserts............................................................. B-42–B-43
Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports......................... B-44–B-54
Wall and Support Brackets.............................................. B-55–B-56
Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems............. B-57–B-72
Hardware and Threaded Components............................. B-73–B-77
Cable and Mounting Systems.......................................... B-78–B-84
Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems................................. B-85–B-90
Non-Metallic Channel and Accessories........................... B-91–B-94
Technical Information................................................... B-95–B-104

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Overview
Why Kindorf 11⁄2" Channel
Saves You Labor Dollars
®

Kindorf Channel’s 11⁄2" is Much More
than a Cross-Section Dimension
®

The 11⁄2" with Kindorf® channel is truly a modular dimension. The channel
height, width and prepunched hole spacings are all engineered around
11⁄2" increments. The angle fittings and the bolt holes in the angle fittings
are all engineered around 11⁄2" increments as well. Scribe marks are
located at 11⁄2" intervals to mark the midpoint between holes and every 6"
on the side for easy measurement.
Jobsite adaptability and structural integrity are the key factors in making
strut channel an economical solution to metal framing needs. Kindorf®
channel, with its 11⁄2" modular dimensions, enables the installer to do
more work with fewer pieces and less labor dollars.

Kindorf Channel
®

13 1⁄2"

The Kindorf® Channel System is designed so that
the maximum number of support and framing
applications can be constructed with a minimum
amount of labor and pieces.

13 1⁄2"

Uniqueness in Design
9

11⁄2" wide x 11⁄2" deep
⁄8" continuous open slot
10 ft. and 20 ft. lengths

7

The 11⁄2" dimension in the channel, hole spacing
and fittings means all parts fit together, no
matter where they’re used, or at what angle.
This modular dimension provides maximum
flexibility in field applications, and results in
saving inventory and labor dollars. The Kindorf®
channel exclusive Galv-Krom® finish provides
superior corrosion protection for all threaded
components, channel and fittings. Through a twopart process, the coating is applied on all finished
parts after fabrication — there is no exposed
surface where corrosion can start.

Strength
Even though the Kindorf® channel is slightly
smaller in dimensions, it supports the same
weight as 15⁄8" channel.

B-2

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Compatibility
with 15⁄8" Strut
The Kindorf® System is designed so that most
accessories are compatible with 15⁄8" strut.
Conduit and pipe straps will work equally
well with 15⁄8" and 11⁄2" strut. In addition,
most 15⁄8" accessories are interchangeable
with Kindorf® channel. Angle fittings can adapt
easily to the open side of any 15⁄8" strut and
the unique parallelogram nuts provide secure
attachment to both types of strut.

Full Line of
Support Products
The Kindorf® channel system’s many advantages
are extended into a broad product offering
including beam clamps, concrete inserts,
lighting supports, cable cleats and a variety of
threaded components. This system is available
in the largest selection of finishes and materials,
including green coated, aluminum, stainless
steel and non-metallic. This, combined with a
nationwide network of distributors and service
centers, makes the Kindorf® system a single
source for supported metal-framing needs.

www.tnb.com

Overview
Kindorf® channels make it easy to cut:
3
3"
ll

Kindorf
Channel
®

11⁄2"
1 1⁄2

Using a 1 ⁄8" channel with hole spacings on 1 ⁄8" centers requires numerous
fittings and, in many cases, limits the joint fastening to the open side of the
channel. Field drilling and welding, plus the need for extra fittings, become
the rule rather than the exception. With constant 11⁄2" dimensions throughout
the system, many structural joints can be made with a minimum of fittings.
Consider the following:
5

6
6"
ll

9
9"
ll

12
12"
ll

1'

Kindorf

111⁄⁄2"

7

1

2

1 1⁄2

11⁄2"

Standard
Channel

11⁄2"
1 1⁄2

158 Strut

115⁄⁄8"
5

8

117⁄⁄8"
7

1. The Entire Section Can be Used.

8

6"

You are not limited to using only the open-slot side because holes
line up on channel and fittings. Using the scribe marks ensures the
fittings will work and a straight cut is made.

12"

18"

11⁄2"
11⁄2"
11⁄2"

2. Considerable Field Drilling
and Welding Eliminated.

1
11⁄2" 1 ⁄2"

Channel with bolt holes 9⁄16" dia. holes
on 11⁄2" centers for 11⁄2" bolts.

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

The holes are already there and they are usable. Back-to-back,
side-to-back, side-to-side — all combinations that can be made
using B-995 Kindorf® channel.

11⁄2"

3. Field Cutting and Layout Made Simple.

Kindorf ® 11⁄2"
All holes line up — all the time.

8 scribe marks = 1 ft. Simply count the marks and cut. Position of holes
ensures balanced support for trapezes on every piece, thus keeping waste
to an absolute minimum.

Holes in fittings also line up.

Fastening on bolt-hole side.
11⁄2"

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Here’s What the Modular Dimension
Can Do for You

4. Modular Fittings Fasten to Bolt Side
or Slot Side — Unique Stud Nut.
Kindorf® framing fittings are engineered for versatile use — to meet
the greatest number of framing combinations with maximum rigidity
and security. Fittings may be fastened to the channel on either the bolt-hole
side or the slot side.
The matching 11⁄2" dimensions of channel bolt holes and fitting bolt holes
provide a fast alignment and quick bolting. Fastening on the slot side
provides infinite placement of the nut to match bolting requirements.
Either way results in simple “building block” erection and permits multiple
application of fittings. With the B-911SN Stud Nut, blind fastening of angles
and fixtures is eliminated.

11⁄2"
15⁄8" Strut
⁄8" holes cause misalignment.

7

Clamping nut or hex head nut may be
used for attachment and security of
fittings to either side of channel.

Fastening on slot side.
11⁄2"

11⁄2
Stud nut saves time, reduces labor —
like having an extra pair of hands.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Spring nut holds in position without
support. Inserts easily in channel and
sets automatically — cannot rotate.

B-3

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Overview
Let the Modular 11⁄2" Dimension Work for You
by Saving Labor and Inventory Dollars!
Why Kindorf 11⁄2" Channel Saves You Inventory Dollars
®

Fewer Pieces Do More Work.
By making equal use of the back of the channel, the sides of the channel (B-995 see page B-13)
and the open slot, your options are increased. Combine this with three simple fittings that
are 11⁄2" wide and have 11⁄2" hole layout, and you have the simplest and most versatile
channel system on the market today.
By stocking a single-channel system and only three angle fittings,
a multitude of jobs can be done.
With fewer pieces doing more work, ordering efficiency is increased
and investment dollars are decreased.
Any way you look at it — Kindorf ® strut can save you money.

By simply stocking B-995 prepunched channel and three angle
fittings, a great number of joints can be made.

One Kindorf® B-915
Two-Hole Connector Will Do:

One Kindorf® B-916
Three-Hole Connector Will Do:

One Kindorf® B-917
Five-Hole Connector Will Do:

B-4

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

®

Trivalent Galv-Krom is OSHA Compliant.
®

Over the past several years, there have been many questions about hexavalent
chromium in the metal framing industry. Many of these questions relate to
the changes made by OSHA. In 2006, the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) published a revised standard which includes changes
related to occupational exposure to hexavalent chromium (Cr VI). The revised
standard was promulgated on February 28, 2006 with the compliance provisions
taking effect on November 27, 2006 for most businesses. There is no Cr VI in
our unique Kindorf® Trivalent Galv-Krom® finish.

New Trivalent Galv-Krom
Finish is RoHS Compliant

®

In 2007, Thomas & Betts introduced the new and improved
trivalent Galv-Krom® finish. Galv-Krom® finish is a combination
of .5 mils electro-plated zinc and a gold trivalent chromium finish.
• 	 Gold Trivalent Chromium Finish — The new Galv-Krom® finish
features a trivalent chromium formulation that provides all the
features and protection of hexavalent chromium (CR VI) without
the use of this chemical. Hexavalent chromium is a substance that is
restricted by some standards such as the European Union directive
on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS).

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Overview
Galv-Krom
Electro-Galvanized Finish

• 	 RoHS Compliant — One great feature for the new Trivalent
Chromium formulation is RoHS compliance. Because hexavalent
chromium is a substance that is restricted by RoHS, moving away
from a hexavalent formulation to the new trivalent formulation will
make the performance of Galv-Krom® coating available to customers
affected by RoHS and other standards like RoHS around the world.
• 	Trivalent Galv-Krom® Finish Is OSHA Safe — As mentioned
previously, the hexavalent formulation of the Galv-Krom® finish
was safe with regard to the revised 2006 OSHA standard. This new
trivalent formulation of the Galv-Krom® finish does not contain any
hexavalent chromium and therefore does not fall under the scope of
the OSHA standard. As a result, the new Trivalent Galv-Krom® finish,
just like the Hexavalent Galv-Krom® finish, is OSHA compliant.
• 	 ASTM B633 Specification — The improved Galv-Krom® finish is
applied in compliance with ASTM B633 coating, the same standard
as used previously. This standard outlines electro-deposited coatings
of zinc on steel.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-5

Kindorf Galv-Krom Finish
Outperforms the Competition
®

®

The new and improved Galv-Krom® finish provides many benefits.
First, it provides continued safety within OSHA guidelines. Second,
the trivalent formulation provides RoHs compliance. But most important
of all, the new Kindorf® Galv-Krom® finish provides a level of performance
unmatched by the competition.
• 	 Superior Corrosion Protection — One hallmark of the Galv-Krom®
finish is the superior corrosion protection it provides. In the ASTM
B117 salt spray test, the new Galv-Krom® finish provided improved
protection to the previous Hexavalent formulation, and substantially
more protection than painted finishes or G-90 Pre-Galvanized
(see chart at right). This outstanding corrosion protection means
more versatile installations and more service life for Galv-Krom®
finished products.
• 	Strong Abrasion Resistance — The Galv-Krom® finish won’t chip or
peel like a green-painted strut product. It stands up to rough handling.
• 	 Clean Finish — For pre-galvanized finishes, the zinc finish is applied
before the strut is manufactured. That means all the oil and grime
collected while the steel is formed into strut remains on the strut for
the customer. Because Galv-Krom® finish is applied after fabrication,
the oils and grime collected during the manufacturing process are
thoroughly cleaned off during plating. This creates a finished product
that leaves no residue on your hands when handling.

Metal Framing Channel Finish
Corrosion-Resistant Testing, ASTM B117

• 	 Paintable Surface — The new Galv-Krom® finish uses nano
technology to provide a nonporous and non-crystalline surface.
Not only does this feature provide enhanced corrosion protection,
it also provides an excellent bond for the paint of your choice.
Salt Spray Hours

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Overview

• 	 No More White Rust — With pre-galvanized strut, a common quality
concern is the formation of white rust on the zinc finish. With GalvKrom® finish, the trivalent chromium finish is applied over the zinc,
to seal in the zinc beneath and stop the formation of white rust.
• 	 Great Electrical Conductivity — Unlike paint or enamel,
the Galv-Krom® surface offers a minimum of electrical resistance
so that electrical applications are easily grounded when grounding
is needed.

Soak
Degreasing
Chemical
Solution
removes
bulk of
oil and
grease
buildup.

B-6

Electro
Cleaner

Rinse

Metal is Live, clear
negatively
water
charged to
rinse.
remove
minute
surface
particles.

Sulfuric
Acid Bath

Rinse

Zinc Tank

Industry
Enamel
Green

Rinse

Rinse

Prepares Live, clear Electrically Chemically
the metal
water
applies the treated
by etching
rinse.
zinc metal rinse water.
the surface
coating.
for the zinc
application.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0

Live, clear
water rinse.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Epoxy
Green

Industry
Pre-Galvanized
G90

EGSilverGalv®

Trivalent
Trivalent
Chromium Prep Chromium Dip
Polishing agent A gold trivalent
to prepare part
chromium
for chromium. conversion coat
is applied to
the zinc.

Trivalent
Galv-Krom®

Rinse

Dryer

Live, clear
water rinse.

Forced hot air
is circulated
around the strut
until dry.

www.tnb.com

Overview
Materials

1. Galv-Krom®

1. Standard Steel

Commonly referred to as “gold,” the Galv-Krom® finish is a combination
of .5 mils electro-plated zinc and a gold trivalent chromium finish, offering
superior rust protection and excellent electrical conductivity.

The standard Kindorf® Channel is made from high-quality ASTM A570
Grade 40 carbon steel sheet. These sections are cold formed into a unique
and modular profile by an efficient roll forming process. Additionally, the
process “cold works” the steel is to give it greater mechanical properties.

2. SilverGalv® (Suffix EG)
Often referred to as “zinc plated” or “electroplated zinc,” the SilverGalv®
finish applies .5 mils of zinc and a clear conversion coat. Electro-galvanizing
is available for channel as well as small fittings, hardware
and threaded products.

3. Pre-galvanized Steel (Suffix PG)
In addition to the standard Galv-Krom® finish, all Kindorf® channels
are available in pre-galvanized steel. This material is identical to the
standard steel except for its ASTM G-90 zinc coating. This coating
is applied at the steel mill prior to the channel fabrication.

4. Green Coated (Suffix GR)
Green urethane powder resins are applied electrostatically to the steel after
fabrication. Once the material is completely covered with the powderedform urethane, it proceeds through a 400° baking process for ten minutes,
creating a chemical bond. This results in a minimum of 1.5 mil thickness
of urethane coating providing excellent resistance to chipping or peeling.

5. Hot-Dipped Galvanized (Suffix HD)
The material is zinc coated after fabrication providing total product
protection on all surfaces. The fabricated channel or fitting is suspended
and then dipped into tanks of hot zinc for a prolonged period, creating
a coherent bond. The result is superior corrosion resistance as compared
to pre-galvanized material. Hot-dipped galvanizing is not recommended
for threaded products, considering the zinc coating thickness will often
disrupt the threads.
Kindorf® hot-dipped galvanized channel is in conformance with ASTM
Specifications A-123 (formerly A-386) and A-153.
Kindorf® channels maintain a minimum 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot
of steel or 2.5 mils (ASTM A-123, Thickness Grade 65). This finish is also
referred to as “Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.”

2. Extruded Aluminum (Suffix AL)
For more corrosive environments, T&B also offers extruded aluminum
channel sections. These section are nearly identical to their steel
counterparts. Aluminum channel is made from 6063 Aluminum
and heat treated to a T-6 specification.

3. Non-Metallic (Suffix N)
Kindorf® channels are also available in fiberglass-reinforced polyester
and vinylester. These products are pultruded into shapes similar to
steel channels. They offer a high degree of corrosion protection and
are very lightweight.

4. Stainless Steel (Suffix SS)
For the most corrosive environments, T&B offers Type 304 Stainless Steel
channel sections and accessories. Type 316 stainless available upon
request. Contact your local sales rep. These products are identical to their
carbon steel counterparts except for a much greater corrosion resistance.

Warning
Load tables, charts and design criteria provided in this catalog
are intended as guides only. Selection of proper product, installation
intervals, erection and placement are the responsibility of the user.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Finishes

Kindorf® products are intended to be used for the support and bracing
of fixtures, cable, pipe and conduit. Improper use or installation may
result in injury to persons or damage to property.
Material and finish specifications are subject to change without notice.

6. PVC Coated (Prefix P)
A polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic coating is fused to the channel, fitting
or accessory after fabrication by immersing the part in fluidized PVC tanks.
The fused-melt mixed powder PVC coating thickness is 15 mils (.015") plus
or minus five mils. PVC material is a thermoplastic and will soften in high
temperatures. An inherent weakness with PVC coatings occurs when field
alterations are applied, such as cutting or drilling. These acts disrupt the
sealed PVC product and warrant field touch-up. Thomas & Betts cannot be
held responsible for field-altered PVC coated products.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-7

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
Channels
Kindorf® channel is a rugged, heavy-gage structural-quality steel channel
preformed in a “U” shape with a continuous open slot the entire length.
The turned-in edges serve as retaining points for the nut and bolt assembly
of fittings to the channel. The shape of the channel permits infinite
adjustability of the clamping nut simply by gliding it along the channel
to the desired position. Spring-tensioned nuts are generally used for

Channel Nuts are specially shaped as parallelograms with biting edges so
that when tightened with normal pressure on the bolt, the nut clamps the
sides of the channel together in a secure connection, which reinforces the
rigidity of the channel itself. The nut rests on the “lips” of the channel slot.

Steel Channels
•	 Galv-Krom® finish	

•	10 ft. and 20 ft. lengths

Solid Base

Half-Slot Base
•	 9⁄16" x 7⁄8" slots on 11⁄2" centers 3⁄4" from end
B-906
11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x 14 ga.

B-901
11⁄2" x 17⁄8" x 12 ga.

B-900 (12 ga.)
B-900-M (14 ga.)
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

B-902
11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga.

Bolt Hole Base
•	 9⁄16" diameter
bolt holes on
11⁄2" centers
3
⁄4" from end

B-907
11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x 14 ga.

B-909
11⁄2" x 17⁄8" x 12 ga.

B-907HS
11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x 14 ga.

B-905HS (12 ga.)
B-905HS-M (14 ga.)

B-903HS
11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga.

Bolt Hole Base
•	 Bolt holes on 3 sides,
9
⁄16" diameter
on 11⁄2" centers
3
⁄4" from end

B-995 (12 ga.)
B-995-M (14 ga.)
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

T-Slot Base
B-905 (12 ga.)
B-905-M (14 ga.)
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

B-903
11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga.

B-904
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 12 ga.

Kindorf Channels —
Combination Channels

How To Order

All Kindorf® channels are available in a variety of combinations —
some are shown below.

(Example: Two B-900 channels back to back are ordered as B-900-2A.)

®

2A	

	

2B	

2C	

10- and 20-ft. lengths — steel

B-8

positioning overhead or in vertical channel installations. A stud nut
(with spring) is provided for easy mounting of cabinets and equipment.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Add the suffix designation of the desired combination to the regular
channel catalog number.

2D	

3A

3C

Special lengths
may be ordered.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

3D

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-901 Channel — 11⁄2" x 17⁄8"

Connection by means of continuous slot.

For heavier load requirements.
Connection by means of continuous slot.

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

Properties of Section

Properties of Section

sectional material
area
thickness

Cat. No.
B-900
B-900-M

.345
.217

.104
.074

1.206
.74

sectional material
area
thickness

Cat. No.

lbs/ft.

B-901

.595

2.028

y-y-axis

i

s

r

.101
.018

.123
.163

.535
.272

i

s

11⁄2"

r

⁄8"

7

⁄8"

7

x-x axis
x-x axis

lbs/ft.

.104

y-y-axis

i

s

r

.263

.251

.665

i

s

r

.238 .309 .632

17⁄8"

.129 .175 .603
.077 .105 .559

Cat. No.

Description

B 900 10
B-900-20
B-900-M-10
B-900-M-20
B-900-10-EG
B-900-20-EG
B-900-M-10-EG
B-900-M-20-EG

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

Material

12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
B-900, 162 lbs./C ft. B-900-M, 107 lbs./C ft.

Cat. No.

Description

B-901-10
B-901-20
B-901-10-EG
B-901-20-EG

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

Material

12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-911-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings. 196 lbs./C ft.

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

End
Caps

B-901
B-901HD

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
Hot-dipped galvanized

G978C
—

G-966
—

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

B-900 Channel — 11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-911-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings. 196 lbs./C ft.

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

End
Caps

B-900
B-900-M
B-900-10GR
B-900-20GR
B-900-10PG
B-900-20PG
B-900-10HD
B-900-20HD

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
14 ga. Galv-Krom®
Green powder coated
Green powder coated
Pre-galvanized
Pre-galvanized
Hot-dipped galvanized
Hot-dipped galvanized

—
—
—
G978
G978A
G1503S
—
—

—
—
—
—
G967
—
—
—

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
B-900, 162 lbs./C ft. B-900-M, 107 lbs./C ft.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-9

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-902 Channel — 11⁄2" x 3"

B-903 Channel — 11⁄2" x 3"
Connection by means of continuous slot
or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers.

Connection by means of continuous slot.
11⁄2"

⁄16"

11⁄2"

9

⁄8"

7

⁄8"

7

3"

3"
11⁄2"

Properties of Section
Cat. No.
B-902

i

.909

sectional material
area
thickness

.837
x-x axis
s
r

.552 1.042

Cat. No.
B 902 10
B-902-20
B-902-10-EG
B-902-20-EG

.104

Cat. No.

lbs/ft.

B-903-10
B-903-20
B-903-10-EG
B-903-20-EG

2.825

i

y-y-axis
s
r

B-902-20HD

12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

277 lbs./C ft.

Description

Material

Galv-Krom
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

®

285 lbs./C ft.

B-902-10
B-902-20
B-902-10HD

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.

.363 .471 .658

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.

Cat. No.

Description

Description

Joiner

End Cap

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
12 ga. Galv-Krom®
Hot-dipped
galvanized
Hot-dipped
galvanized

—
G978-D
G-3003S

—
G957
—

—

—

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

End Cap

B-903
B-903HD

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

G978-D
G3003S

—
—

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
277 lbs./C ft.

B-903HS Channel — 11⁄2" x 3"

⁄8"

7

3"

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.

11⁄2"

285 lbs./C ft.

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B 903HS 10
B-903HS-20
B-903HS-10-EG
B-903HS-20-EG

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
277 lbs./C ft.

B-10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-905 Channel —
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"
11⁄2"

⁄4"
1"

3

11⁄2"

⁄16"

9

Connection by means of continuous
slot or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers that
match holes in B-900 series fittings.

Connection by means of continuous slot or T-slots
on 11⁄2" centers in base side of channel.

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

Cat. No.

Description

B-904 10
B-904HD

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

Cat. No.
B 905 10
B-905-20
B-905-M-10
B-905-M-20
B-905-10-EG
B-905-20-EG
B-905-M-10-EG
B-905-M-20-EG

For attachment to continuous slot use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 steel nuts.
For attachment to T-slots use F-739 brackets 155 lbs./C ft.

B-905HS Channel  —
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
Scribe marks designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.

1 ⁄2"
1

⁄8"

7

⁄16"

9

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"
11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B 905HS 10
B-905HS-20
B-905HS-M-10
B-905HS-M-20
B-905HS-10-EG
B-905HS-20-EG
B-905HS-M-10-EG
B-905HS-M-20-EG

Description

Material

Galv-Krom
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

®

B-905, 158 lbs./C ft. B-905-M, 102 lbs./C ft.

Cat. No.
B-905
B-905-M
B-905-10GR
B-905-20GR
B-905-10PG
B-905-20PG
B-905-10HD
B-905-20HD

Description

Joiner

End Cap

12 ga. Galv-Krom®
14 ga. Galv-Krom®
Green Coated
Green Coated
Pre-Galvanized
Pre-Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

B-904 Channel  —
11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
Scribe marks designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.
B-905, 158 lbs./C ft. B-905-M, 102 lbs./C ft.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts for mounting fittings.
Scribe marks designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.
B-905, 158 lbs./C ft. B-905-M, 102 lbs./C ft.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-11

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-906 Channel — 11⁄2" x 3⁄4"

B-907 Channel — 11⁄2" x 3⁄4"

Connection by means of continuous slot.

Connection by means of continuous slot
or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers.

Properties of Section

⁄16"

9

⁄8"

7

sectional
area

material
thickness

lbs/ft.

.521

.104

1.776

11⁄2"

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"
⁄4"

3

i

.155

x-x axis
s
r

.088

y-y-axis
i
s
r

.545

.2

Cat. No.
B 906 10
B-906-20
B-906-10-EG
B-906-20-EG

11⁄2"

.259 .619

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Cat. No.
B-907-10
B-907-20
B-907-10-EG
B-907-20-EG

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Use H-113-A bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-912-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.

Use H-113-A bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-912-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.

Steel 75 lbs./C ft.

Holes on B-900 series fittings match channel holes.
Scribe marks on steel channel designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.
Steel 71 lbs./C ft.

B-907HS Channel — 1 ⁄2" x ⁄4"
1

3

⁄16"

9

Cat. No.

⁄8"

7

⁄8"

7

11⁄2"
⁄4"

3

B-907
B-907-10GR
B-907-20GR
B-907-10PG
B-907-20PG
B-907-10HD
B-907-20HD

Description

Joiner

14 ga. Galv-Krom
Green Coated
Green Coated
Pre-Galvanized
Pre-Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

B948
B948
B948
B948
B948
B948
B948

Use H-113-A bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-912-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.
Holes on B-900 series fittings match channel holes.

11⁄2"

Scribe marks on steel channel designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.

Cat. No.
B 907HS 10
B-907HS-20
B-907HS-10-EG
B-907HS-20-EG

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Steel 71 lbs./C ft.

Use H-113-A bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-912-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.
Holes on B-900 series fittings match channel holes.
Scribe marks on steel channel designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.
Steel 71 lbs./C ft.

B-12

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-995 Channel — 11⁄2" x 11⁄2"

For heavier load requirements. Connection by means
of continuous slot or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers.

Connection by means of continuous slot
or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers on three sides
which match holes in B-900 series fittings.

⁄16"

9

11⁄2"

⁄15"

9

⁄8"

11⁄2"

7

⁄8"

7

17⁄8"

11⁄2"

11⁄2"

Cat. No.

B 909 10
B-909-20
B-909-10-EG
B-909-20-EG

11⁄2"

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-911-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.
118 lbs./C ft.

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

B-909
B-909HD

12 ga. Galv-Krom
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

G978-C
G978-C

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910- ⁄2" or B-911- ⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.
1

1

Cat. No.
B 995 10
B-995-20
B-995-M-10
B-995-M-20
B-995-10-EG
B-995-20-EG
B-995-M-10-EG
B-995-M-20-EG

Description

Material

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®
SilverGalv®

12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1⁄2" or B-911-1⁄2" steel nuts for mounting fittings.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf ® Modular Metal Framing System

B-909 Channel — 11⁄2" x 17⁄8"

150 lbs./C ft. Scribe marks designate midpoint between holes for accurate field cutting.
Standard 10 ft. lengths

118 lbs./C ft.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-13

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
Channel Nuts

Trapnut® Strut Fastener

Kindorf® Channel Nuts are manufactured from mild steel and
are case hardened.

Design Data
Kindorf® self-aligning channel nuts are designed to provide resistance to pull
out and resistance to side slip in excess of the full strength of the channels
with which they are used. The extreme resistance to side slip results from
the unique design of the alternate teeth, spaced and designed to develop
a wedging action that increases with pressure or load.

H 122 3/8 EG
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener SilverGalv ®

H 122 3/8
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener Galv-Krom ®

Cat. No.

Description

H 122 1/4
H 122 3/8
H 122 1/2
H 122 1/4 EG
H 122 3/8 EG
H 122 1/2 EG
H 122 1/4 SS6
H 122 3/8 SS6
H 122 1/2 SS6

1

size (In.)

⁄4" Galv-Krom®
⁄8" Galv-Krom®
1
⁄2" Galv-Krom®
1
⁄4" SilverGalv®
3
⁄8" SilverGalv®
1
⁄2" SilverGalv®
1
⁄4" Type 316 Stainless Steel
3
⁄8" Type 316 Stainless Steel
1
⁄2" Type 316 Stainless Steel
3

design std.
Load Lbs. Ctn.

⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2

150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080

1
3

Channel Nuts — Standard Finish: Galv-Krom®
B-910 Series

Load Ratings of Steel Channel and Insert Nuts
(B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2) when used in slot of 12 ga. Kindorf® channel
and tightened to a torque of 50 ft. Pounds are as follows:
Withdrawal resistance to pull out safe-load rating = 1,600 lbs.
Slip resistance safe-load rating = 400 lbs.
(B-910-1/2 or B-912-1/2) when used in slot of 14 ga. Kindorf channel
and tightened to a torque of 50 ft. Pounds are as follows:

For use with all Kindorf ® channels

Withdrawal resistance to pull out safe-load rating = 1,300 lbs.
Slip resistance safe-load rating = 400 lbs.
Load ratings are based on safety factor of 3.

Cat. No.

BC-910 Universal Cone Nut
Eliminates the inventory and installation hassles of conventional spring nuts.
Fits all 15⁄8" channel, regardless of depth, with a simple twist of your thumb.
Pliable nylon cone secures the nut in place through the entire range of
construction site temperatures.

Screw Threads

Size (IN.)

B 910 1/4
B-910-5/16
B-910-3/8
B-910-1/2

⁄4–20
⁄16–18
3
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13

Thickness (IN.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄16
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8

7.5
7.3
9.15
9.9

1

3

5

5

Load Ratings for B-910 Strut Nuts

Thread Size

b

j

c

d

Channel Nut Sizes

Slip Test Rating

Pull Test Rating (In.)

Threads per inch
Design Torque (ft.-lbs.)

20
6

18
11

16
19

13
50

⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2

300
750
1,200

500
1000
2000

All threaded products are American Standard thread, free fit class 2.

B-14

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

1

Galv-Krom ® hardware finish is standard for all Superstrut products. This is a
multi-process finish of electro-plated zinc, followed by gold-colored trivalent
chromium finish to give excellent corrosion resistance and a superior paint base.

If connections will be subjected to dynamic or seismic loading conditions,
contact the factory for design assistance.

Standard Finish – Galv-Krom ®, unless otherwise stated.

2. Load ratings are for Static Applications.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

1. All ratings have safety factor of 3 applied.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-914 Series

Self-holding clamping nut with spring attached.
For use with 11⁄2" deep channels.

Square nuts for use with channel
and spot-type concrete inserts.
11⁄4" Sq.

Cat. No.

Size (In.)

B 911 1/4
B-911-5/16
B-911-3/8
B-911-D-3/8*
B-911-1/2
B-911-D-1/2*

Thickness (IN.)

Wt. lbs./C

⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄8

8
8.25
10
12
10
13

⁄4–20
5
⁄16–18
3
⁄8–16
3
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
1
⁄2–13
1

3

* For clamping nuts with spring for 3" deep channels add suffix D to catalog number.

B-911-SN Series

Located Square
Washers

Thickness (IN.)

Wt. lbs./C

⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8

12.5
13.0
16.0
17.0

⁄8 –16
3
⁄8 –16
1
⁄2 –13
1
⁄2 –13

3

3

B-911-3/8-SN1, Stud: 3⁄8 Dia., 1" Long and B-911-3/8-SN2, Stud: 3⁄8 Dia., 1 1⁄4" Long.

†

Accepts Kindorf ® Nuts H-114C (hex), H-116-C (square).
B-911-1/2-SN1, Stud: 1⁄2 Dia., 1" Long. and B-911-1/2-SN2, Stud: 1⁄2 Dia., 1 1⁄4" Long.
Accepts Kindorf ® Nuts H-114D (hex), H-116-D (square).

Size (IN.)

Thickness (IN.)

Wt. lbs./C

⁄16
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16

8.0
7.5
9.5
9.8

⁄4 –20
⁄16 –18
3
⁄8 –16
1
⁄2 –13
1

3

5

5

•	 Universal nylon cone nut

BC910 1/4
BC910 3/8
BC910 1/2

Cat. No.
AB-241L-1/4
AB-241L-5/16
AB-241L-3/8
AB-241L-1/2
AB-241L-5/8

19⁄16" Sq.

Bolt Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

⁄4
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

100
100
100
100
100

1

For all 15⁄8" & 11⁄2" channels. May
be used with ALL strut depths
Finish

⁄4 –20
⁄8 –16
1
⁄2 –13

Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®
Galv-Krom®

3

www.tnb.com

Cat. No.

Bolt Size (In.)

Std. Ctn.

⁄4
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

100
100
100
100
50

1

GoldGalv ® is standard finish.

Size (IN.)
1

19⁄16" Sq.

AB-241-1/4
AB-241-5/16
AB-241-3/8
AB-241-1/2
AB-241-5/8

BC-910 Series

Cat. No.

10.50
13.25
14.00
14.00
12.00
10.50
12.00
11.00

Square Washers

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®

•	Sizes: 1⁄4", 3⁄8" & 1⁄2"

Wt. lbs./C

⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3

Add “EG” suffix for SilverGalv ®.

Self-holding clamping nut with spring attached.
For use with 3⁄4" deep channels.

B 912 1/4
B-912-5/16
B-912-3/8
B-912-1/2

Thickness (IN.)

GoldGalv ® is standard finish.

B-912 Series

Cat. No.

⁄4–20
3
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
5
⁄8–11
3
⁄4–10
7
⁄8–9
3
⁄8–18**
1
⁄2–14**
1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

Size (IN.)

B 911 3/8 SN1†
B-911-3/8-SN2†
B-911-1/2-SN1†
B-911-1/2-SN2†

Size (IN.)

B 914 1/4
B-914-3/8
B-914-1/2
B-914-5/8
B-914-3/4
B-914-7/8
B-914-3/8P
B-914-1/2P
** Standard Pipe Threads.

Stud nut self-holding clamping nut with spring attached.

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-911 Series

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Add “EG” suffix for SilverGalv ®.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-15

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-915 Two-Hole Angle Connector

B-917 Five-Hole Angle Connector

11⁄2

11⁄2

11⁄2"

3"

⁄4"

3

9

4 1⁄2" 11⁄2"

2 1⁄4
3

⁄ 16"

1 ⁄2
1

⁄4

1

⁄4"

11⁄2"
9

⁄4

1

3

⁄16

⁄4"

3

Can also be used as side-beam connector to suspend 1⁄2" hanger rod.

Cat. No.

Finish

Cat. No.

Finish

B 915
B-915EG
B-915HD

Galv-Krom®
Electro-Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Galvanized

B 917
B-917EG
B-917HD

Galv-Krom®
Electro-Galvanized
Hot-Dipped Ga­­lvanized

⁄4" steel. 39 lbs./C.

⁄4" steel. 68 lbs./C.

1

1

B-916 Three-Hole Angle Connector

B-918 Left-Hand Gusset Connector

⁄44""

33

⁄4"

11⁄2"

3

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

⁄4"

3

Can also
be used
as side beam
connector to
suspend 11⁄2"
hanger rod.

11⁄2"

2 ⁄4
1

411⁄22""

4 1⁄2

⁄2""

1

41⁄2"

11⁄2"
⁄4

1

11⁄2

⁄16

11⁄2"

⁄4"

1

9

⁄4"

3

⁄4

3

Cat. No.

Finish

Cat. No.

Finish

B 916
B-916HD

Galv-Krom®
Hot-dipped galvanized

B 918
B-918EG

Galv-Krom®
Electro-Galvanized

⁄4" steel. 46 lbs./C.

12 Ga. and 1⁄4" steel. 102 lbs./C.

1

B-16

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-921 Two-Side
Corner Connector

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-919 Right-Hand Gusset Connector

11⁄2" 11⁄2"
⁄4"

3

⁄16"

41⁄2"
11⁄2"

9

⁄4"

3

⁄4"

11⁄2"

3

⁄4

11⁄2

⁄4

11⁄2

3

41⁄2"

3

11⁄2"
11⁄2"

⁄16"

3

⁄4

3

41⁄2"

11⁄2

⁄2

1

⁄16

9

1 ⁄2
1

Cat. No.

41⁄2

Finish

B 921
⁄4

12 ga.

11⁄2

1

⁄4

3

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 101 lbs./C.

3

B-922 Opposite-Side
Angle Connector

⁄ 4"

3

9

Cat. No.

Finish

B 918
B-918EG

Galv-Krom
Electro-Galvanized

2"

®

3

3"

⁄ 4"

⁄ 16"
9

⁄ 16"

4 ⁄ 2"
1

11⁄ 2"

12 Ga. and 1⁄4" steel. 102 lbs./C.
3

⁄ 4"

B-920 End Connector

3
⁄ 16"
11⁄ 2"

11⁄ 2"
⁄ 4"

11⁄ 2"

3

11⁄ 2"

Cat. No.

3

3

⁄ 4"

3

⁄ 4"

⁄ 4"

Finish

B 922

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 124 lbs./C.

3

⁄4

3

⁄4

3

⁄16

3

⁄4

3

B-923 Three-Side Angle Connector

11⁄2

3

11⁄2

4 1⁄ 2

41⁄2
⁄16

⁄4

⁄ 16

9

4 1⁄ 2
⁄ 16

3

9

11⁄2
3

⁄4

⁄4

3

19⁄ 16
3

11⁄ 2
⁄4

3

Cat. No.

Finish

B 920

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 80 lbs./C.

Cat. No.

⁄4

3

Finish

B 923

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 137 lbs./C.

3

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-17

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-924 Post Base Connector

B-925 Post Base Connector
3 3⁄16"
⁄4"

1

13⁄4"

19⁄16"

⁄4"

3

11⁄2"

3"

3"

6" 41⁄7"

(4) 3⁄4"
Dia.
Holes

6" 41⁄4"

⁄4"

1

41⁄4"
6"

Cat. No.

Finish

B 924
B-924-EG

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®

(4) 3⁄4"
Dia.
Holes

41⁄4"
6"

Cat. No.

Finish

B-925
B-925-EG

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®

B-925FL Post Base Connector

⁄4" steel 250 lbs./C.

1

3
⁄4"
Dia.
Holes

For use with 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" channels.

3 3⁄16"

3"

B-924FL Post Base Connector
15⁄8"

6"

41⁄2"

3"
4 1⁄2"

6"

3"
(3) 3⁄4"
Dia.
Holes

3"

Cat. No.

Finish

B-925FL
B-925FLEG

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®

B-925SQ Post Base Connector

Finish

B 924FL
B-924-FLEG

Cat. No.

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
4 Holes
3
⁄4" Dia.

B-924SQ Post Base Connector
(4) ⁄4"
Dia.
Holes

31⁄2"

3

19⁄ 16"
3 1⁄ 2"

4 1⁄ 7"

41⁄ 4"

Cat. No.
B 924SQ
B-924SQEG

B-18

41⁄4"

6"

6"

6"

6"

Finish

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Finish

B-925SQ
B-925SQEG
Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Galv-Krom®
SilverGalv®

www.tnb.com

41⁄4"

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-929 Wide U Support

3
⁄16

⁄4

9

3

11⁄2

1 ⁄2
1

⁄4

3

115⁄32
⁄4

3

⁄2

1

1

⁄4

3

6 1⁄4
3 1⁄2

⁄16

19⁄16

9

1 ⁄2
1

19⁄16

11⁄2

11⁄2
⁄4

115⁄32
11⁄4

1

⁄16

3

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Finish

B 926

Finish

B 929

Galv-Krom®

⁄4" steel. 42 lbs./C.
For use with 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" channels.

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 63 lbs./C.

1

3

⁄16

11

B-927 U Support

⁄16

5

B-930 Angle Support

⁄4

3

3

⁄4

3

⁄16

3

⁄16

25

1 ⁄4
3

3 11⁄2
⁄4

⁄4

3

1 ⁄16
9

⁄4

3

3

⁄4

3

⁄4

3

⁄16

9

11⁄2

⁄4

1

11⁄2

⁄4

3

⁄16

9

⁄4

3

Cat. No.

Finish

B 927
B-927EG

Galv-Krom®
Electro-Galvanized

3

Cat. No.

3
⁄16" steel. 57 lbs./C.
For use with 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" channels.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-926 Z Support

Finish

B 930

Galv-Krom®

⁄4" steel. 70 lbs./C.

1

B-928 Deep
U Support

11

⁄ 16 5⁄ 16

3

1

⁄4

B-932 Heavy Angle Connector

1 ⁄2
1

⁄2

1

9

11⁄2

⁄ 16

⁄16

9

4 7⁄16
⁄16

⁄2

3
3

3

⁄4

⁄ 16

1

⁄4

3

⁄4

3

3 ⁄ 16
1

1 ⁄ 16
9

1 ⁄ 16
9

11⁄2

11⁄2

⁄4

⁄4

3

3

17⁄16

⁄4

3

41⁄2

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Finish

B 928

Finish

B 932

Galv-Krom®

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 136 lbs./C.

⁄16" steel. 77 lbs./C.

3

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-19

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-933 Five-Hole
Joint Connector

3

⁄4
1

9

11⁄ 2

⁄ 16

3

B-936 Angle Plate
Connector

11⁄ 2

⁄4
9

3

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

⁄4

4 1⁄ 2

3
3

3

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

3

11⁄ 2

⁄4

3

11⁄ 2
11⁄ 2

⁄4

Cat. No.

Finish

Cat. No.

Finish

B 933

Galv-Krom®

B 936
B-936GR
B-936EG

Galv-Krom®
Green Coated
Electro-Galvanized

⁄4" steel. 96 lbs./C.

1

B-934 Outside
Corner Connector

⁄16" steel. 42 lbs./C.

3

1 ⁄4

1 ⁄2

3

1

3

1

B-937 T-Plate
Connector

⁄4

4
3

13⁄ 4
9

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

3

4 ⁄2
1

1

11⁄ 2

3

⁄4

9

⁄4

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

⁄4

3
3

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

4 3⁄ 4

11⁄ 2

⁄4

⁄4

⁄4
11 ⁄ 2

3

11⁄ 2

Cat. No.

Finish

B 934

Cat. No.

Galv-Krom®

⁄4" steel. 57 lbs./C.

⁄ 16

Finish

B 937

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 53 lbs./C.

1

3

B-935 Three-Hole Plate Connector

B-938 Open Angle
Connector
9

45°

⁄ 16

3

⁄4
9

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

9

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2 3

41⁄ 2
3

3

Cat. No.

Finish

B 935
B-935-GR
B-935-EG

Galv-Krom®
Green Coated
Electro-Galvanized

3

B-20

⁄ 16

⁄16" steel. 32 lbs./C.

1

⁄4

Cat. No.

Finish

B 938

Galv-Krom®

⁄4" steel. 42 lbs./C.

1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

11⁄ 2

www.tnb.com

⁄4

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
3

B-942 Swivel Plate

⁄4
11⁄ 2
3

2 3⁄ 8

9

⁄ 16

⁄4

3

⁄4

5 7⁄8

45°
9
1

1 ⁄2

3

1

⁄4

⁄4

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

3

11⁄ 2
11⁄ 2

Cat. No.

Cat. No.

Finish

B 939

Finish

B 942

Galv-Krom®

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 40 lbs./C.

⁄4" steel. 50 lbs./C.

3

1

B-943 Brace
Connectors

B-940 Corner Braces
⁄16

9

11⁄2

All sizes match hole
structure of the B-905
channel at 90°.

⁄32

27

⁄4

3

⁄4

1

45°

11⁄2

⁄32

25

⁄32

27

C
11⁄2

2 5⁄16

⁄4

3

dimensions (in.)
Cat. No.

A

B

C

wt. in.
lbs./C

B 940 1
B-940-2
B-940-3

71⁄2
131⁄2
191⁄2

63⁄4
123⁄4
183⁄4

81⁄8
165⁄8
251⁄8

115
212
305

⁄4" steel, Galv-Krom ®.

1

9
1

19⁄ 16

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

13⁄ 4

3

Cat. No.

Finish

B 943

Galv-Krom®

⁄4" steel. 66 lbs./C.

1

B-944 Double
Brace Connector

B-941 Joiner for B-905 Channel

⁄ 16

⁄4

⁄ 16

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-939 Closed Angle Connector

3

⁄4

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

⁄ 16
Hole

11⁄ 2

3

⁄4
11⁄ 2

9

15⁄ 8
11⁄ 2

3

11⁄ 2 6

Cat. No.

Finish

B 941

Galv-Krom

3

11⁄ 2
⁄4

1 ⁄2

3

1

®

Order four B-910-1/2 nuts and four H-113-A cap
screws separately.
12 ga. steel. 80 lbs./C.

⁄ 16

⁄ 16 1 ⁄ 2

9

1

3

⁄4

Cat. No.

Finish

B 944

Galv-Krom®

⁄16" steel. 75 lbs./C.

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-21

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-945 Rod Connector

B-948 Joiner for
B-907 Channel

19⁄ 16

11⁄ 2
9

⁄ 16

11⁄ 2 3 5⁄ 8

1

⁄4

11⁄ 2 6
⁄ 16 11⁄ 2

9

11⁄ 2

11⁄ 2

Cat. No.

Galv-Krom®

12 ga. steel. 51 lbs./C.

Galv-Krom®

B-951 Wing Connector

⁄4" steel. 61 lbs./C.

1

B-946 Z-Support

Finish

B 948

Order four B-910-1/2 nuts and four H-113-A cap
screws separately.

Finish

B 945

Cat. No.

1

1

17⁄ 16"
⁄4

3

⁄ 16
3
Hole 11⁄ 2
9

1

B-951

4 1⁄ 2"
Finish

Galv-Krom®

⁄2
⁄4

3

For use with B-906
or B-907 channel only.

Cat. No.

1

⁄4

B-952
Wing
Connector

7 1⁄ 2"
13⁄8"
3 1⁄4"

Cat. No.

Finish

B 946

Galv-Krom®

Cat. No.

⁄4" steel. 34 lbs./C.

1

B-952

B-947 Cross-Plate
Connector

15⁄8"
Finish
2 1⁄8"

Galv-Krom®

B-953 Wing Connector
9

419⁄32"

17⁄32"

⁄ 16 Holes
11⁄2"

3

3

⁄4

3

11⁄ 2

Cat. No.

⁄4

B-953

B 947

419⁄32"
17⁄32"

11⁄2"

Finish

Galv-Krom®

Cat. No.
B-954

⁄4" steel. 55 lbs./C.

1

B-22

119⁄32"

11⁄ 2

4 1⁄ 2

Cat. No.

117⁄32"

B-954 Wing Connector

⁄4

11⁄ 2

Finish

Galv-Krom®

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Finish

Galv-Krom®

www.tnb.com

117⁄32"

119⁄32"

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-962 Plate Connector
Cat. No.
B-962

17⁄32"

Cat. No.
B-957

Finish

3"

Galv-Krom®

4 1⁄2"

1 ⁄2"
1

Finish

Galv-Krom®

B-964 Plate Connector

B-958L Wing Connector
3"
17⁄32"

11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B-958L

4 1⁄2"

Cat. No.

Finish

B-964

Galv-Krom®

Finish

Galv-Krom®

B-965 Plate Connector

B-958R Wing Connector

4 1⁄2"

4 1⁄2"

17⁄32"

Cat. No.

Finish

B-958R

Galv-Krom®

11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B-965

B-960 Plate Connector

Finish

Galv-Krom®

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-957 Wing Connector

B-966 Plate Connector

6"
11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B-960

3"

Cat. No.

Finish

B-966

Galv-Krom®

Finish

Galv-Krom®

B-967 Plate Connector

B-961 Plate Connector

11⁄2"

7 1⁄2"

3"
11⁄2"

Cat. No.
B-961

Cat. No.

Finish

Galv-Krom®

3"

www.tnb.com

B-967

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Finish

Galv-Krom®

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-23

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
Solar Panel Hold-Down Clamps

NEW!

Rugged, Corrosion-Resistant Materials
•	 Body and channel nut made from high-strength extruded
aluminum alloy 6061-T6 with clear anodized finish
•	 1⁄4–20 x 3" bolt, lock washer and flat washer made from
Type 304 stainless steel
Labor-Saving Features
•	 Hardware is pre-assembled to clamp to save time and labor
for the installer

SHC-T-SSH

•	 Self-oriented channel nut is staked to bolt to ensure fast,
easy installation
Versatile Design
•	 Can be used with both 11⁄2" Kindorf® channel and 15⁄8" strut systems
1.246
31,65

.985
25,02

SHC-L-SSH

1.5
38,1

.752
19,1
1.184
30,09

BOLT-1/4-20X3
HEX HD, SS
Lock
Washer, SS

.375
9,53
.750
19,05

Flat Washer,
SS

1.5
38,1

SHC-T-SSH

Cat. No.
SHC-T-SSH
Applied Load Direction
Sliding
Tension
Transverse
Tighten Torque Value (lbs.-in.), Minimum

1.182
30,03

Cat. No.
SHC-L-SSH

Allowable Load (lbs.)
331
99
1535
568
702
58
100
100

.375
9,53

Extruded
Aluminum
Solar-Panel End
Clamp

1.800
45,72

Extruded
Aluminum
Channel Nut
1.500
38,1

.750
19,05

SHC-L-SSH

Solar Panel Grounding Washer

NEW!

•	 Slotted for quicker installation — no need to disassemble
clamp assembly
•	 Bent tab ensures washer stays in place during installation
•	 Can be used with both 11⁄2" Kindorf® channel and 15⁄8" strut systems
•	 Made from tin-plated, case-hardened steel

1.65

•	 Can be used on carbon steel or aluminum strut channel
•	 Complies with UL 467 (UL® Listed E9809)
•	 Designed for use with 1⁄4" bolt installed with minimum torque
value of 100 lbs.-in.

B-24

Cat. No.

Description

DTSW14

Solar Panel Grounding Washer

1.63

.85
Accepts
1
⁄4" Bolt

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
•	 Connection by means of continuous slot

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Size (In.)

B-911-3/8-SS†
B-911-1/2-SS†

Description

B-900-10SS
B-900-10316-SS

Type 304
Type 316

⁄16
⁄16

12.5
16.0

3

5

Self-holding clamping nut with spring attached. For use with 11⁄2"
deep channels.

†

⁄8

7

Cat. No.

Thickness (In.) lbs./C

⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
3

11⁄2

Kindorf Straps for Rigid Conduit
and Pipe — Type 304 Stainless Steel

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 stainless steel
nuts for mounting fittings.
Available 20 Ft. lengths.

B-905 Channel — Stainless
Steel — 1 1/2" x 1 1/2"

C-105

•	 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers punched
in channel base. Connection also
by means of continuous slot

⁄16

9

11⁄2

cat. no.
⁄8

7

11⁄2

rigid conduit
or pipe size
(in.)

C-105-1/2SS
C-105-3/4SS
C-105-1SS
C-105-1-1/4SS
C-105-1-1/2SS

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
1

rigid conduit
or pipe size
(in.)

cat. no.
C-105-2SS
C-105-2-1/2SS
C-105-3SS
C-105-3-1/2SS
C-105-4SS

2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

Add 316 suffix for Type 316 Stainless Steel.

Cat. No.

Description

B-905-10SS
B-905-10-316SS

Type 304
Type 316

Cobra® Cable
and Pipe Clamp —
Type 316 Stainless Steel

11⁄2

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 stainless steel
nuts for mounting fittings.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

B-911 Spring Nut —
Stainless Steel

B-900 Channel — Stainless
Steel — 1 1/2" x 1 1/2"

Scribe marks designate mid-point between holes for accurate
field cutting.
Available 20 Ft. lengths.

B-907 Channel — Stainless Steel
•	 Connection by means of continuous slot
or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers

Cat. No.
⁄32

17

1 ⁄2
1

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Description

B-907-10SS
B-907-10316SS

Type 304
Type 316

⁄8

7

Available 20 Ft. lengths.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄4

3

for emt
and rigid
conduit
Trade Size
(in.)

⁄4
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

CPC025SS6
CPC050SS6
CPC075SS6
CPC100SS6
CPC125SS6
CPC150SS6
CPC200SS6
CPC250SS6
CPC300SS6
CPC350SS6
CPC400SS6

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1

1

cable o.d.
Range (in.)

static load
limit (lb)
Safety
Factor = 4

std
CTN.

.312–.600
.650–.890
.860–1.110
1.100–1.400
1.400–1.725
1.690–1.980
1.980–2.576
2.576–3.060
3.060–3.626
3.626–4.126
4.126–4.626

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
350
350
350
350

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
25

B-25

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
B-900-AL Aluminum Channel

Kindorf Straps for Rigid Conduit
and Pipe — Aluminum

11⁄2

•	 Connection by means of continuous slot

⁄8

7

Aluminum (Extruded 6063-T6)
Cat. No.

Description

B-900-AL

11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x .1046; 58 lbs./C. ft.

11⁄2

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2, B-911-1/2
or B-911-1/2-TL steel nuts for mounting fittings.
10 ft. lengths only.

B-905-AL Aluminum Channel
•	 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers punched
in channel base. Connection also
by means of continuous slot.

⁄16

9

11⁄2

⁄8

7

11⁄2

Aluminum (Extruded 6063-T6)
Cat. No.

Description

B-905-AL

11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x .1046; 56 lbs./C. ft.

11⁄2

Use H-113-B bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-911-1/2 steel nuts
for mounting fittings.
10 ft. lengths only.

B-907-AL Aluminum Channel
•	 Connection by means of continuous
slot or 9⁄16" holes on 11⁄2" centers

Steel beam mounting application. Aluminum straps with stainless steel
hardware. Frame assembly carries multiple conduit runs.

⁄32

17

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Aluminum (Extruded 6063-T6)
Cat. No.

Description

B-907-AL

11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x .1046; .37 lbs. /C. ft.

11⁄2
⁄8

7

Use H-113-A bolts and B-910-1/2 or B-912-1/2 steel nuts
for mounting fittings.

⁄4

3

Holes on B-900 series fittings match channel holes.

B-26

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

C-105AL-1/2
C-105AL-3/4
C-105AL-1
C-105AL-1-1/4
C-105AL-1-1/2
C-105AL-2
C-105AL-2-1/2
C-105AL-3
C-105AL-3-1/2
C-105AL-4

Rigid Conduit
Aluminum Strap
or Pipe Size (In.) Material Thickness

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
1

3

www.tnb.com

14
14
14
14
12
12
12
12
1
⁄8"
1
⁄8"

Wt.
lbs./C

7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
22
24

Channels, Nuts and Fittings

The complete and lasting corrosion protection of conduit with polyvinyl
chloride coating is now extended to the supporting system. No longer
will installers be faced with the problem of installing PVC-coated conduit
or other corrosion-resistant material only to have the support system require
constant maintenance or replacement.
PVC-coated Kindorf® channel and fittings complement other corrosionresistant services installed in chemical plants, foundries, meat
packing plants, oil refineries, paper mills, sewage treatment plants
and other locations.

PVC Plastic-Coated Kindorf Channel Support System
for Installations in Severely Corrosive Atmospheres
®

PVC Coating
The coating is a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic coating that is permanently
fused to the Kindorf® Galv-Krom® galvanized steel channels, fittings and
accessories. The fused-melt mixed powder (PVC) coating is 15 mils.
(.015") ±5 mils thickness.

.................................... Specifications....................................
•	 Hardness: 90+ Shore A Durometer
•	 Dielectric Strength
(volts/mil @ 60 cycles): 1100
•	 Flammability: Self-extinguishing

•	 Tensile strength: 2000 p.s.i.
•	 Percent elongation: 180%
•	 Aging: 14,000 hours Atlas
Weatherometer

The material is a thermoplastic and will soften in high temperatures.
Service life will be decreased if the normal operating temperature
of the support system is in excess of 225° F.
The service life expectancy is 20 years in normal weathering,
with no indication of hardening, softening or other physical change.
The Kindorf® plastic-coated support system has excellent resistance to
the corrosive atmospheres created in modern processing industries which
materially reduce the life of standard products and cause high maintenance
costs. The fused-on coating of PVC plastic to a pre-galvanized steel
effectively bars corrosive action by eliminating “undercreep” or “corrosion
travel”. There is practically no maintenance. No special tools are required
for installation of the Kindorf® PVC system.
The Kindorf® PVC-coated support system, combining the strength of steel
and the corrosion resistance of plastic, is designed for mechanical support
of plastic and plastic-coated conduits and pipes. Kindorf® PVC meets the
requirements for corrosion resistance in those environments generally found
in chemical processing plants, oil refineries, steel mills, foundries, meat
packing and other food processing plants, fertilizer plants, textile and paper
processing industries.

PB-900-10

PVC-Coated Steel Channel
Cat. No.

Description

PB-900-10

11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 12 ga.
Solid Base
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 12 ga.
9
⁄16" Holes on 11⁄2" Centers
11⁄2" x 3⁄4” x 14 ga.
9
⁄16" Holes on 11⁄2" Centers

PB-905-10
PB-905-10

PB-907-10

Wt. lbs./C

168

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

PVC-Coated Steel Channel and Fittings
for Highly Corrosive Atmospheres

160
82

Standard 10 ft. lengths.

PB-907-10

PVC-Coated Steel Hanger Rod
Cat. No.

PBH-193

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

& Size

Description

PBH-193-3/8-6
PBH-193-3/8-10
PBH-193-1/2-6
PBH-193-1/2-10

3

⁄8" x 6'
3
⁄4" x 10'
1
⁄2" x 6'
1
⁄2" x 10'

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Wt. lbs./C

174
290
324
540

B-27

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit Straps
Cat. No. & Size

Description (In.)

PBC-105-3/4
PBC-105-1
PBC-105-1-1/4
PBC-105-1-1/2
PBC-105-2

3

Wt. lbs./C

Cat. No. & Size

Description (in.)

16
18
20
29
33

PBC-105-2-1/2
PBC-105-3
PBC-105-3-1/2
PBC-105-4

21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

Wt. lbs./C

38
45
58
64

PBC-105

PVC-Coated Hardware
11⁄2

Cat. No. & Size

Description

PB-910-3/8
PB-910-1/2
PBH-119C-3/8
PBH-119D-1/2
PBH-120

⁄8 –16 Steel Nut
1
⁄2 –13 Steel Nut
11⁄2" Square Washer with 7⁄16" Hole
11⁄2" Square Washer with 27⁄32" Hole
Saddle Washer for 3⁄8" or 1⁄2" Rod

Wt. lbs./C

9
10
12
14
7

3

PBH-119

PB-910

­PBH-120

PVC-Coated Beam Clamps
Cat. No. & Size

Description

PB-502
PB-508
PBE-760-2
PBE-763

2"– 7⁄8" Jaw Tapped 3⁄8-16
21⁄2"–2" Jaw Tapped 1⁄2-13
For Use with PB-900, PB-905, PB-906 or PB-907
For Use with All Channels

Wt. lbs./C

95
182
80
25

PBE-763
PB-500 Series

PBE-760

PVC-Coated Framing Fittings

PB-915

B-28

Cat. No. & Size

Description

PB-915
PB-923
PB-927
PB-943
PBF-720-18
PBF-721-18

2-Hole Angle Connector
3-Side Angle Connector
U Support
Double-Brace Connector
Single-Channel Wall Bracket — 18"
Double-Channel Wall Bracket — 18"

PB-923

PBF-720

PB-943

PBF-721

PB-927

Wt. lbs./C

40
137
53
66
275
568

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Bantam Channels simplify the support of overhead fixtures, conduits, pipes
and boxes in suspended ceiling instal­lations where they can be supported
on runs of lathers channel or directly from bar joists or ceiling beams.
Ribbed channels may also be mounted on concrete forms and used
as low-cost continuous-slot concrete inserts.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
For the support of light- and medium-weight equipment
in electrical and mechanical applications.
Bantam Channels
Installed slot down the open slot accommodates and enables easy
positioning of accessory fittings or 1⁄4" hanger rod to support lightor medium-weight equipment.
The use of Kindorf® Channel Bars provides a ready made system
of bars and accessories designed to eliminate costly and timeconsuming on-the-job improvising.

Lathers
Channel
Lathers
Channel
Bantam
Channel
Bantam
Channel

Adapting conduit runs
through flush mounted
device boxes

Conduit
Conduit

Box mounted on
Bantam Channel to
feed fixtures

Bantam
Channel
Bantam Channel

Box mounted on Bantam Channel to feed fixtures.

Lathers
Channel
Lathers
Channel
Bantam
Channel
Bantam
Channel
HangerRods
Rods
Hanger
6025
Fastener
6025
Fastener
Conduit
Hanger
Conduit
Hanger

Bantam
Channel
Bantam
Channel

Suspended Fixture

Typical mounting on bar joists

Typical mounting on bar joists

Suspended Fixture

.750"
.500"

.750"
.750"

.750"
.500"

.281"
.500"
.500"

.281"

.281"
.281"

Ribbed Channels (extra strength)

.266"
Dia
holes
.266
Dia
holes
clearance for
for 1"41⁄4"
threaded
rod.
threaded rod.
.266 Dia holes
1"
clearance for 4
threaded rod.

.177"
Dia
holes
.177
Dia
holes
for
.266
Dia holes
#12
Metal
forSheet
#12 Sheet
1"
clearance for 4
Screw.
Metal Screw.
threaded rod.

⁄"
.177 Dia holes for
1"
#12 1
Sheet
121⁄2" Metal
3"
3
44

33"
88

⁄"

.177 Dia holes for
#12 Sheet Metal
Screw.

3"
4

1 1"2

3"
4

.576
.576

3"
8

.388
.388

30
45

.388

Lightweight Channels

.281

.263
.263

Wt.
lbs./C ft.

.388

.576

.451

www.tnb.com

16 gauge (.060") Ribbed Channel with Holes
16 gauge (.060") Ribbed Channel

.576

.451

.281
.281

6029 H
6029
3"
8

.281

.281
.281

.451
.451

Description

Channels are produced in 10-ft. lengths. Pre-galvanized steel.

1 1"2

Screw.

Cat. No.

.281
.281

Cat. No.

Description

6013
6014

20 gauge (.034") Lightweight Channel
18 gauge (.044") Lightweight Channel

.263
.263

Wt.
lbs./C ft.

17
16

Channels are produced in 10-ft. lengths. Pre-galvanized steel.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-29

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels, Nuts and Fittings
Low-Cost Techniques for Bantam Channel —
Fast, Easy Hanging with Standard Fittings
Groove Holds Nut Squarely —
Nut Won’t Rotate.

Cat. No. H-116-A-1/4
square nut tips in anywhere.

Insert Rod Full Height of Channel
for Rigidity.

Cat. No. 6075
Mounts electrical fixtures to exposed grid
acoustical ceilings. Fits 15⁄16" or 1" bar face.
Load Rating: 100 lbs. Safety factor of 4.
Furnished complete with cupped washer and wing nut.

Fastener and Carrier,
(Complete Assembly) 6 lbs./C

Cat. No. H-193-1/4
hanger rod.

Channel Carrier 2 lbs./C

Bantam Channel for
Low-Cost, Continuous-Slot
Concrete Inserts.

T-Bar Clip

Cat. No. 6029
Maximum recommended loads 200 lbs.

Beam Flange Clip

Cat. No. 6016

Cat. No. 6024
Secures channel to I-beams, angle iron or bar joists
with flanges not exceeding 1⁄4" thickness.

Hung Ceiling Carrying Channel

Fixture Stud and Carrier,
(Complete Assembly) 7 lbs./C

6029
Channel
bar
6025
Bar fastener

Cat. No. 6026

Fits over ends of ribbed
channels for continuous runs.

Cat. No. 6015

Cat. No. 6017
Cat. No. 6025
Secures channel to lathers channel
or other ceiling-carrying channels.

B-30

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

C-18 N.P.S.

www.tnb.com

Kindorf® Pipe Straps are designed to be twist inserted anywhere along
the slot side of the channel. Pipes can be placed as closely as pipe
couplings permit.
Single or multiple runs of pipe and cable are secured easily and
economically by Kindorf® supports. In the racking of multiple runs
of pipe, for example, C-105 Straps are quickly twist inserted into
a channel slot and the pipe is installed by the tightening of a single
screw. There are no holes to drill and position adjustment is made
simple by sliding the strap along the channel slot. Runs of pipe or
conduit can be spaced with complete freedom, as close as conduit
couplings permit.

5'

36"
Trapeze application supporting
multiple conduit runs.

For single runs, the C-149 Pipe Hanger saves installation time by
allowing the conduit or pipe to be laid in place after the hanger is
mounted. The versatile C-149 can be suspended from hanger rod
or bolted directly to the wall, and pipe insulation, when needed,
can be installed without removing the pipe from the hanger.
These are but two examples of how Kindorf® products deliver lower
installed costs. Whether it be a problem of tight spacing, adjustment
or alignment of adequate spacing between hangers, there’s a Kindorf®
support to solve it.
Kindorf® pipe and cable supports are engineered to provide safe
and secure installations. The majority of Kindorf® supports are
protected by the exclusive Galv-Krom® finish, including threaded
components.

C-247 Beam clamp
supports pipe.
Pipe supported by C-149
lay-in hanger.

There’s a wide range of Kindorf® pipe and cable supports to meet
almost every job condition, installed either in combination with
channel or individually secured to the structure surface.

111⁄414"

1 41

111⁄212"

1 21

Some unique features of the straps include:
•	 Bolt head is combination slot and hexhead for
flexibility of attachment

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
C105 and C106 Series Pipe Straps

Design Loads
1 21

•	 Square nut is captivated on the shoulder for easy
one-handed tightening

1 21

•	 Straps are interchangeable with 15⁄8" strut for
broader application
•	 Straps are shipped assembled so counting and sorting
are easier

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1 41

www.tnb.com

All Kindorf ® Straps are pre-assembled
for easy handling and sorting.

1 41

•	 Pipe or conduit sizes are shown on the strap for
easy identification

Design Load

B-31

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
The new standard
for heavy-duty applications.
LOC-KING Cobra One-Piece
Cable and Pipe Clamp
™

NEW!

®

The LOC-KING™ Cobra® heavy-duty pipe and cable clamp adds
two new design innovations to the heavy-duty features of the original
King Cobra® clamp.

Pre-set, power-tool
friendly, torque
mechanism for fast,
efficient installation

First, a pre-set torque mechanism takes the guesswork out of installation,
ensuring optimum torque and eliminating excess pressure on cables. Since
the torque is pre-set, LOC-KING™ Cobra® clamps are ideally suited for use
with power tools, making installation faster and more efficient than ever.
Second, the incorporation of an anti-vibration nut means that once
installed, LOC-KING™ Cobra® clamps remain securely installed,
even in high-vibration environments.
•	Designed to be used on tray cable, Teck cable, metal-clad cable
and armored cable

Anti-vibration nut
ensures permanent
clamp installation

Wide saddle with antirotation tabs for even
load distribution
One-piece,
heavy-duty steel
construction with
Galv-Krom ® finish
for increased corrosion
protection

•	 Power-tool compatible for fast and efficient installation
•	 Pre-set torque mechanism takes the guesswork out of installation,
delivering optimum torque even when using power tools
•	 Pre-set torque prevents over-tightening and excess pressure
•	 Anti-vibration nut ensures permanent installation,
even in high-vibration environments

2

3

Using a power tool fitted with a 5⁄8"
(16mm) socket, tighten lock nut...

Position LOC-KING™
Cobra® clamp.

Parallel hook
design keeps
conduit and cable
square with strut

Rugged stirrup
minimizes deflection

•	Superior design load capabilities for heavy-duty applications:
350 lbs. for 1⁄2"–21⁄2" trade sizes; 450 lbs. for 3"–4" trade sizes

1

Embossed shoulder
and hook provide
increased loading
capability and prevent
clamp deformation

...until it ‘blocks’ and will no longer turn.
Installation is complete.

See Ratings in the Table Below

Note: When pre-set torque engages, lock-nut separates
from bolt head and stops firmly against clamp body.

Cat. NO.
LKCPC050
LKCPC075
LKCPC100
LKCPC125
LKCPC150
LKCPC200
LKCPC250
LKCPC300
LKCPC350
LKCPC400
* Safety Factor of 4

B-32

For EMT and Rigid Conduit Trade Sizes

Cable O.D. Range (in.)

Arrow #1
Load Rating*

Arrow #2
Slip Rating**

Arrow #3
Pull Rating**

Quantity per Box

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

.650–.890
.860–1.110
1.100–1.400
1.400–1.725
1.690–1.980
1.980–2.576
2.576–3.060
3.060–3.626
3.626–4.126
4.126–4.626

350 lbs.
350 lbs.
350 lbs.
350 lbs.
350 lbs.
350 lbs.
350 lbs.
450 lbs.
450 lbs.
450 lbs.

50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.

50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.
50 lbs.

100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
25

1

** Safety Factor of 1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

NEW!

King Cobra Cable and Pipe Clamp
with Galv-Krom Finish

Cobra One-Piece Cable
and Pipe Clamp

•	 Superior design load capabilities for
industrial applications: 350 lbs. for 1⁄2"
to 2 1⁄2" trade sizes; 450 lbs. for
3" to 4" trade sizes

Takes a bite out of your installation time!

®

®

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
The new specification standard
for heavy-duty industrial applications.
®

•	 One-piece heavy-duty construction
ready to install right out of the box,
no need to break apart and reassemble,
no screws or bolts to drop

•	 Durable one-piece heavy-duty steel
construction — designed specifically
for use in industrial applications

•	 Installs quickly and securely
using one hand

•	 Embossed shoulder and hooks increase
loading capability and durability,
preventing deformation of clamps

•	 Universal bolt head accepts
a range of tools

•	 Rugged stirrup provides increased strength
for heavier loads, minimizing deflection

•	 Eliminates the guesswork from clamp
selection — one catalog number attaches
equal trade sizes of EMT and rigid conduit

•	 Wider saddle design with anti-rotation tabs
distributes load evenly over a larger surface area,
preventing jacket damage

•	 Parallel hook design keeps conduits
and cable square with strut

•	 Increased corrosion protection* — Galv-Krom® (yellow zinc
trivalent) finish stands up to harsh industrial applications

•	 Reconfigure wiring without complete
disassembly. Remove cables easily
without disturbing neighboring clamps

•	 Parallel hook design keeps conduit and cable square
with strut
•	Heavy-duty 5⁄16" hex bolt
•	 One clamp size works on equal trade sizes for both EMT
and rigid conduit, simplifying clamp specification
* Compared to conventional electrogalvanization.

Cat. No.

For EMT
and Rigid
Conduit
Trade Size (In.)

Galv-Krom ® Finish
KCPC050
KCPC075
KCPC100
KCPC125
KCPC150
KCPC200
KCPC250
KCPC300
KCPC350
KCPC400

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
1

3

Cable O.D.
Range (in.)

Static Load
Limit (lb)
Safety
Factor = 4

.650–.890
.860–1.110
1.100–1.400
1.400–1.725
1.690–1.980
1.980–2.576
2.576–3.060
3.060–3.626
3.626–4.126
4.126–4.626

Standard Finish — Galv -Krom ®

350
350
350
350
350
350
350
450
450
450

STD. CTN.

100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
25

Cat. No.

For EMT
and Rigid
Conduit
Trade Size (in.)

EG Silver Finish
CPC025
CPC050
CPC075
CPC100
CPC125
CPC150
CPC200
CPC250
CPC300
CPC350
CPC400

⁄4
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
1

1

Cable O.D.
Range (in.)

Static Load
Limit (lb)
Safety
Factor = 4

STD. CTN.

.312–.600
.650–.890
.860–1.110
1.100–1.400
1.400–1.725
1.690–1.980
1.980–2.576
2.576–3.060
3.060–3.626
3.626–4.126
4.126–4.626

200
200
200
200
200
200
200
350
350
350
350

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
25
25
25
25

Stainless Steel: add suffix SS6.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-33

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
Angler Pipe and Conduit Clamp
®

For EMT, IMC, Rigid and Standard Pipe.

Rigid Series

Universal Series
Cat. NO.
Galv-Krom ® Finish
C 109 1/2
C 109 3/4
C 109 1
C 109 1 1/4
C 109 1 1/2
C 109 2
C 109 2 1/2
C 109 3
C 109 3 1/2
C 109 4
SilverGalv ® Finish
C 109 1/2 EG
C 109 3/4 EG
C 109 1 EG
C 109 1 1/4 EG
C 109 1 1/2 EG
C 109 2 EG
C 109 2 1/2 EG
C 109 3 EG
C 109 3 1/2 EG
C 109 4 EG

Size
(In.)

Strap
Thickness

Design
Load (lbs.)

Install
Torque
(in. lbs.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.

400
500
500
500
800
800
800
800
1,200
1,200

40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
25
25

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.

400
500
500
500
800
800
800
800
1,200
1,200

40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
25
25

1

1

3

Std.
CTN.

Cat. NO.
Galv-Krom® Finish
C 109R 1/2
C 109R 3/4
C 109R 1
C 109R 1 1/4
C 109R 1 1/2
C 109R 2
C 109 2 1/2
C 109 3
C 109 3 1/2
C 109 4
SilverGalv ® Finish
C 109R 1/2 EG
C 109R 3/4 EG
C 109R 1 EG
C 109R 1 1/4 EG
C 109R 1 1/2 EG
C 109R 2 EG
C 109 2 1/2 EG
C 109 3 EG
C 109 3 1/2 EG
C 109 4 EG

Size
(In.)

Strap
Thickness

Design
Load (lbs.)

Install
Torque
(in. lbs.)

Std.
CTN.

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.

600
600
600
600
800
800
800
800
1,200
1,200

40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
25
25

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.

600
600
600
600
800
800
800
800
1,200
1,200

40
40
40
40
60
60
60
60
60
60

100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
25
25

1

3

1

3

Hex head size 3/8" for 1/2" to 11/4" sizes, 1/2" for 11/2" to 4" sizes.
Material: Stamped Steel.
Pipe sizes 2 1/ 2" to 4" utilize the same clamps for the Rigid Series and the Universal Series.
Available in SilverGalv® Finish by adding “EG” suffix to catalog number.

C-200 Universal Pipe Straps

Cat. No.
C-200-1/2
C-200-3/4
C-200-1
C-200-1-1/4
C-200-1-1/2
C-200-2

EMT, IMC, Rigid
Pipe Size (In.)

Pipe O.D.
Range (In.)

Strap
Thickness

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

 .706–.804
 .922–1.060
1.163–1.315
1.508–1.660
1.738–1.900
2.196–2.375

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

12
13
14
16
27
31

1

3

Design load equal to C-105 straps.

B-34

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Kindorf® Pipe Straps are designed to be twist inserted anywhere along the slot side
of the channel. Pipes can be placed as closely as pipe couplings permit.

Some unique features of the straps include:
•	Bolt head is combination slot and hex head for flexibility
of attachment
•	Square nut is captivated on the shoulder for easy
one-handed tightening
•	Straps are interchangeable with 15⁄8" strut for broader application
•	Straps are shipped assembled so counting and sorting are easier

All Kindorf ® Straps are pre-assembled
for easy handling and sorting.

•	Pipe or conduit sizes are shown on the strap for easy identification

1 21

1 21

Kindorf® Straps for Rigid Conduit, IMC and Pipe
Steel Straps — Galv-Krom® Finish

1 41

Design Load

111⁄441"

1 41

111⁄221"

1 21

Cat. No.
C-105-3/8
C-105-1/2
C-105-3/4
C-105-1
C-105-1-1/4
C-105-1-1/2
C-105-2
C-105-2-1/2
C-105-3
C-105-3-1/2
C-105-4
C-105-4-1/2
C-105-5
C-105-6
C-105-8
C-105-10
C-105-12

Rigid
Conduit or
Pipe Size (In.)

O.D.
Size (In.)

Steel
Strap Thickness

Design
Load
(lbs.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄8
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
41⁄2
5
6
8
10
12

.675
.840
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.000
5.563
6.625
8.625
10.750
12.750

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.

750
750
750
750
800
800
800
1000
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650

12
13
15
17
19
28
31
36
42
56
64
72
76
89
114
160
165

3
1

1 41

Kindorf® Straps for EMT

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
C-105 and C-106 Pipe Straps

1 41

Steel — Galv-Krom® Finish

Cat. No.
C-106-3/8
C-106-1/2
C-106-3/4
C-106-1 1
C-106-1-1/4
C-106-1-1/2
C-106-2
1
2

Interchangeable strap
fits both 11⁄2" and 15⁄8" channels.

www.tnb.com

EMT
Size (In.)

O.D.
Size (In.)

Steel Strap
Thickness

Design Load
(lbs.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄8
⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2

.577
.706
.922
1.163
1.510
1.740
2.197

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.

750
750
750
750
750
800
800

13
14
13
16
19
20
22

3
1

1 21

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-35

1 41

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
Kindorf Straps for O.D. Tubing
®

Cat. No.

Tubing
O.D. (In.)

Steel Strap
Thickness

Galv-Krom ® Finish
1
701 1/4
⁄4
3
⁄8
701-3/8
1
⁄2
701-1/2-STR
5
⁄8
701-5/8
3
⁄4
701-3/4
7
⁄8
701-7/8
701-1-STR
1
701-1-1/8
11⁄8
701-1-1/4
11⁄4
701-1-3/8
13⁄8
701-1-1/2
11⁄2
701-1-5/8
15⁄8
701-1-3/4
13⁄4
701-1-7/8
17⁄8
701-2
2
701-2-1/8
21⁄8
701-2-1/4
21⁄4
701-2-3/8
23⁄8
701-2-1/2
21⁄2
701-2-5/8
25⁄8
701-2-3/4
23⁄4
701-2-7/8
27⁄8
701-3
3
701-3-1/8
31⁄8
701-3-1/4
31⁄4
701-3-3/8
33⁄8
701-3-1/2
31⁄2
701-3-5/8
35⁄8
701-3-3/4
33⁄4
701-3-7/8
37⁄8

701-3/4

Design
Load
(lbs.)

14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
12 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.

Tubing
O.D. (In.)

Cat. No.

Steel Strap
Thickness

Design
Load
(lbs.)

11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
11 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.
10 ga.

1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650
1,650

Galv-Krom ® Finish
701-4
4
701-4-1/8
41⁄8
701-4-1/4
41⁄4
701-4-3/8
43⁄8
701-4-1/2
41⁄2
701-4-5/8
45⁄8
701-4-3/4
43⁄4
701-4-7/8
47⁄8
701-5
5
701-5-1/8
51⁄8
701-5-1/4
51⁄4
701-5-3/8
53⁄8
701-5-1/2
51⁄2
701-5-5/8
55⁄8
701-5-3/4
53⁄4
701-5-7/8
57⁄8
701-6
6
701-6-1/8
61⁄8
701-6-1/4
61⁄4
701-6-3/8
63⁄8
701-6-1/2
61⁄2
701-6-5/8
65⁄8
701-6-3/4
63⁄4
701-6-7/8
67⁄8
701-8
8

750
750
750
750
750
750
750
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,300
1,650
1,650
1,650

For SilverGalv ® Finish, add suffix EG.

For SilverGalv ® Finish, add suffix EG.

C-708-U Short Strap for
Channel or Wall Mounting

B
A

B-36

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
C708U 1/2
C-708-U-3/4
C-708-U-1
C-708-U-1-1/4
C-708-U-1-1/2
C-708-U-2
C-708-U-2-1/2
C-708-U-3
C-708-U-3-1/2
C-708-U-4
C-708-U-5
C-708-U-6

Pipe
Size (in.)

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
6
1

3

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

dimensions (in.)
A

B

Hole
Size (in.)

27⁄8
31⁄16
33⁄8
311⁄16
315⁄16
53⁄4
63⁄16
63⁄16
75⁄16
713⁄16
87⁄8
915⁄16

2
23⁄16
21⁄2
23⁄16
31⁄16
41⁄8
49⁄16
53⁄16
511⁄16
63⁄16
71⁄4
85⁄16

⁄32
⁄32
9
⁄32
9
⁄32
9
⁄32
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16

Stock Size
(in.)

Design Load
(lbs.)

⁄8 x 15⁄8
⁄8 x 15⁄8
1
⁄8 x 15⁄8
1
⁄8 x 15⁄8
1
⁄8 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8
1
⁄4 x 15⁄8

650
650
650
650
650
650
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,200
1,200
1,200

9

1

9

1

www.tnb.com

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
®

When fastening wire bundles, cables or hoses to framing channels,
you can cut costs considerably by using the Ty-Rap® Cable Clamp. It is
made of smooth, weather-resistant nylon and designed to protect cable
insulation and hoses from wear or damage as can occur with metal
clamps. The clamp may be used for both indoor or outdoor applications.
It installs in the framing channel with a simple push and twist. It requires
no screws, nuts or tools. The clamp fits all 11⁄2" and 15⁄8" channels
regardless of channel depth.

•	 Installs with a push and twist
•	 Designed for indoor or outdoor use
•	 Smooth design protects cable insulation
•	 Takes range of cable diameters

Cat. No.

Channel Size

maximum tie
Width Accom.

unit Qty.

std. CTN.

TC5363X

1.5 & 1.625

.301

50

250

Mounting bases for heavy-duty applications are made from high-impact weather-resistant nylon.

C-144 Two-Hole Pipe Straps

⁄32"

11

E
C
Holds pipe tight against
mounting surface.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Ty-Rap Cable Clamp
for Framing Channel

D

A

dimensions (in.)

B

Cat. No.

A&B

C

D

E

Wood screw
Size Req’d.

thickness Steel

wt. lbs./C

C-144-1/2
C-144-3/4
C-144-1
C-144-1-1/4
C-144-1-1/2
C-144-2
C-144-2-1/2
C-144-3
C-144-3-1/2
C-144-4

.840
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500

2
21⁄4
21⁄2
31⁄4
31⁄2
41⁄4
5
53⁄4
61⁄2
7

3
31⁄4
31⁄2
41⁄4
41⁄2
51⁄4
6
63⁄4
71⁄2
8

⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

No. 12 x 1
No. 12 x 1
No. 12 x 1
No. 12 x 1
No. 12 x 1
No. 16 x 11/2
No. 16 x 11/2
No. 16 x 2
No. 16 x 21/2
No. 16 x 3

⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16

10
11
13
20
23
30
35
42
69
78

3

1

Standard finish Galv-Krom ®.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-37

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
C-711 Lay-in-Pipe Hanger (J-Hanger)
Rest pipe in body of
hanger. Fasten side bolt
when convenient.

Saves installation time by allowing the conduit or pipe to be laid in place after the hanger is mounted. Fastening
of side bolt can be delayed until most convenient for job conditions. Insulation can be installed without removing
pipe from hanger. The C-149 hanger can be suspended from hanger rod or can be bolted directly to a wall.
When used with hanger rod, assembly requires two H-114 hex nuts.
Vertical adjustment of at least 11⁄2" after pipe is laid in place. The lower nut adjusts pipe lines to the proper pitch
and the top nut, when locked into position, prevents loosening due to vibration. The square nut on the side bolt
is kept from loosening by the arrangement of hole and up-turned lip.

Cat. No.
C-711-1/2
C-711-3/4
C-711-1
C-711-1-1/4
C-711-1-1/2
C-711-2
C-711-2-1/2
C-711-3
C-711-3-1/2
C-711-4
C-711-5
C-711-6
C-711-8

pipe size a rod
(IN.)
(IN.)

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
6*
8*
1

3

⁄8
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
3

3

dimensions (in.)
B

C

D

E

F

G

bolt size
(In.)

stock
Size

max. rec
loads lbs.

25⁄8
27⁄8
215⁄16
31⁄4
39⁄16
311⁄16
77⁄16
413⁄16
51⁄8
61⁄8
63⁄4
73⁄4
93⁄16

13⁄4
17⁄8
115⁄16
2
23⁄16
21⁄8
27⁄16
29⁄16
25⁄8
33⁄16
31⁄4
39⁄16
315⁄16

⁄16
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16

11⁄2
111⁄16
113⁄16
21⁄16
27⁄16
29⁄16
33⁄16
31⁄2
33⁄4
45⁄8
51⁄16
513⁄16
615⁄16

115⁄16
21⁄8
25⁄16
25⁄8
27⁄8
31⁄16
35⁄8
41⁄16
43⁄8
53⁄16
53⁄8
65⁄8
8

35⁄32
31⁄2
311⁄16
41⁄8
45⁄8
5
6
621⁄32
75⁄16
89⁄16
923⁄32
111⁄4
1311⁄16

⁄4
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8

12 ga, x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 3⁄4
12 ga. x 11⁄4
12 ga. x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 13⁄4
3
⁄16 x 13⁄4

400
400
400
400
400
400
500
500
500
550
550
600
760

7

7

1

1

A

B
F

E

G

* Hangers 6" and over have hole instead of slot.

C-710 Clevis Hanger
Cat. No.
A
D
F
B

E

C
C of Pipe

Pipe Size
(In.)

C710 1/2
C-710-3/4
C-710-1
C-710-1-1/4
C710-1-1/2
C-710-2
C-710-2-1/2
C-710-3
C-710-3-1/2
C-710-4
C-710-5
C-710-6
C-710-7
C-710-8
C-710-10
C-710-12
C-710-14
C-710-16
C-710-18
C-710-20
C-710-24
C-710-30

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
6
7
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
1

3

Size of Steel (In.)

Dimensions (In.)

Upper

Lower

A

B

C

D

E

F

Max. Rec.
Loads lbs.

⁄8 x 1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
3
⁄8 x 11⁄4
3
⁄8 x 11⁄4
3
⁄8 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4 x 11⁄2
1
⁄4 x 13⁄4
1
⁄4 x 13⁄4
3
⁄8 x 13⁄4
3
⁄8 x 2
1
⁄2 x 21⁄2
1
⁄2 x 21⁄2
1
⁄2 x 21⁄2
5
⁄8 x 3
5
⁄8 x 3
3
⁄4 x 3

⁄8 x 1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
1
⁄8 x 1
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄4
3
⁄16 x 11⁄2
3
⁄16 x 13⁄4
3
⁄16 x 13⁄4
1
⁄4 x 13⁄4
1
⁄4 x 2
1
⁄4 x 21⁄2
1
⁄4 x 21⁄2
1
⁄4 x 21⁄2
3
⁄8 x 3
3
⁄8 x 3
3
⁄8 x 3

⁄8
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄4
11⁄4

111⁄16
17⁄8
21⁄8
29⁄16
3
311⁄16
411⁄16
43⁄4
415⁄16
59⁄16
63⁄16
63⁄16
81⁄2
85⁄16
97⁄8
1113⁄16
127⁄16
15
151⁄4
163⁄4
19
241⁄8

21⁄8
27⁄16
213⁄16
37⁄16
4
47⁄8
61⁄8
69⁄16
615⁄16
713⁄16
9
101⁄8
121⁄8
125⁄8
151⁄4
179⁄16
197⁄16
23
241⁄4
263⁄4
31
391⁄8

21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
3
3
3
31⁄2
31⁄2
4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄2
43⁄4
51⁄4
6
61⁄2
7
71⁄2
81⁄4

⁄8
1
11⁄4
13⁄4
21⁄8
215⁄16
313⁄16
37⁄8
41⁄16
41⁄2
51⁄8
55⁄8
61⁄2
7
83⁄8
93⁄4
1013⁄16
127⁄16
1315⁄16
1315⁄16
171⁄2
217⁄8

⁄16
⁄2
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
11⁄16
15⁄8
2
13⁄4
13⁄4
115⁄16
13⁄4
17⁄8
21⁄4
21⁄8
21⁄4
25⁄8
215⁄16
25⁄8
33⁄4
4
41⁄4
5

610
610
610
610
610
610
1,130
1,130
1,130
1,130
1,430
1,430
1,940
1,940
1,940
3,600
3,800
4,200
4,600
4,800
4,800
6,000

1

1

1
1

3
3

7

Order by Cat. No., finish and pipe size.

B-38

C

D
Dia.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

7

1

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
C-708 Messenger Cable Support

Firmly grips vertically mounted pipe or conduit
and distributes the load over a larger area.

Designed for use as intermediate supports for 3⁄8"
messenger cable. Grips cable when 5⁄16" screw
is tightened. Provides easy vertical adjustment.
Design load 1,000 lbs. Safety factor of 3.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

C-720 Riser Clamps

A

Cat. No.
C720 1/2
C-720-3/4
C-720-1
C-720-1-1/4
C-720-1-1/2
C-720-2
C-720-2-1/2
C-720-3
C-720-3-1/2
C-720-4
C-720-5
C-720-6
C-720-8

Pipe
Size (In.)

A (In.)

Size
Stock (In.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
6
8

91⁄8
91⁄4
95⁄8
97⁄8
10
101⁄2
111⁄16
1113⁄16
13
131⁄2
14
153⁄16
19

⁄16 x 1
⁄16 x 1
3
⁄16 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 11⁄2
1
⁄4 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2

1

Size
Bolt (In.)

Max. Rec.
Load lbs.

⁄8 x 11⁄2
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8 x 11⁄2
1
⁄2 x 11⁄2
1
⁄2 x 11⁄2
1
⁄2 x 13⁄4
1
⁄2 x 13⁄4
5
⁄8 x 21⁄2

220
220
220
250
250
300
400
500
600
750
1,500
1,600
2,500

3

3

3

3

7
⁄32
Hole

3

⁄8

1

11⁄4

⁄16 x 1

5

Cat. No.

Description

C-708

1

⁄8" Steel, 27 lbs./C

Galv-Krom ® finish.

C-247, C-248 & C-249 Steel Conduit Clamps

C-750 Maple Cable Clamp

A versatile clamp for attaching conduit to any type of beam, channel,
angle or column. Designed to hold the conduit snug against the support
with conduit either parallel or at right angle to it. The case-hardened set
screw bites into the structural member for maximum security. 1⁄8" steel.

Maple blocks, impregnated with paraffin.
3
⁄8" bolts with special nuts facilitate
installation on B-900 channel.
15⁄8

B
⁄8

1

C
B

A
Conduit
Size

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
Dim A
Dim B
Dim C
Dim D
Per Carton
Wt. in lbs./C
1
3

B
a

⁄8

5

D

Maximum Beam Flange Thickness (in.)
C-247

C-248

C-249

⁄8
⁄16
—
—
—
21⁄4
13⁄8
23⁄4
9
⁄16
100
33

1
⁄4
1
⁄2
1
—
29⁄16
13⁄4
3
9
⁄16
50
36

—
11⁄2
11⁄4
—
5
⁄8
31⁄4
21⁄2
4
5
⁄8
50
59

5

7

3

Galv-Krom ® Finish.

www.tnb.com

Cat. No.

O.D. of Cable
(In.)

Dimensions (in.)
A

Wt. in.
B

lbs./C

C-750-1
C750 2
C-750-3
C-750-4
C-750-5
C750 6
C-750-7
C-750-8
C-750-9

0–.99
1.0–1.49
1.5–1.99
2–2.49
2.5–2.99
3–3.49
3.5–3.99
4–4.49
4.5–5.00

4
4 1⁄2
5
5 1⁄2
6
7
8
—
—

3 7⁄8
4 3⁄8
4 7⁄8
5 3⁄8
5 7⁄8
6 7⁄8
7 7⁄8
—
—

90
100
120
140
160
200
240
—
—

& Size

Size refers to overall dimensions of Maple Cable Clamp only.
Hole will be bored to fit O.D. of cable.
Orders MUST specify exact O.D. of cable.
Special order.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-39

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
Lightweight, non-breakable and inexpensive!
Kindorf TPE Cable Insulator Clamps
®

Offer a less expensive, lighter weight and non-breakable alternative
to porcelain for cable support, and they won’t rot like maple clamps.
The one-piece thermoplastic elastomer (TPE) insulator is flame-retardant,
UV-resistant and chemical-resistant. A tapered flange isolates and protects
cable. Available sizes accommodate cables from 3⁄8" to 41⁄2" O.D. and fit
all Kindorf® channels as well as all 15⁄8" channel systems.

Cat. No.
C755 1ATP
C-755-1B-TP
C-755-1C-TP
C-755-2 TP
C-755-2A-TP
C-755-2B-TP
C-755-2C-TP
C-755-3 TP
C-755-3A-TP
C-755-3B-TP
C-755-3C-TP
C-755-4 TP
C-755-4A-TP
C-755-4B-TP
C-755-4C-TP
C-755-5 TP
C-755-5A-TP
C-755-5B-TP
C-755-5C-TP
C-755-6 TP
C-755-6A-TP
C-755-6B-TP
C-755-6C-TP
C-755-7 TP
C-755-7A-TP
C-755-7B-TP
C-755-7C-TP
C-755-8 TP
C-755-8A-TP
C-755-8B-TP
C-755-8C-TP
C-755-8D-TP
C-755-8E-TP
C-755-8F-TP

•	 Tapered flange isolates and protects cable
•	 Flame retardant
•	 UV resistant
•	 Exceptional chemical resistance

Hole
Dia. (In.)

Clamp
Size (In.)

Dim.
A (In.)

Dim.
B&R (In.)

Total
Height (In.)

⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
2
21⁄8
21⁄4
23⁄8
21⁄2
25⁄8
23⁄4
27⁄8
3
31⁄8
31⁄4
33⁄8
31⁄2
35⁄8
33⁄4
37⁄8
4
41⁄8
41⁄4
43⁄8
41⁄2

11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
35⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
45⁄8
5
5
5

1.12
1.12
1.12
1.62
1.62
1.62
1.62
2.12
2.12
2.12
2.12
2.62
2.62
2.62
2.62
3.12
3.12
3.12
3.12
3.62
3.62
3.62
3.62
4.12
4.12
4.12
4.12
4.62
4.62
4.62
4.62
5
5
5

.56
.56
.56
.81
.81
.81
.81
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.06
1.31
1.31
1.31
1.31
1.56
1.56
1.56
1.56
1.81
1.81
1.81
1.81
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.31
2.31
2.31
2.31
2.5
2.5
2.5

1.82
1.82
1.82
2.34
2.34
2.34
2.34
2.86
2.86
2.86
2.86
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
4.05
4.05
4.05
4.05
4.75
4.75
4.75
4.75
5.125
5.125
5.125
5.125
5.54
5.54
5.54
5.54
5.92
5.92
5.92

3

•	 Ideal for commercial and industrial applications
•	 Thermoplastic elastomer (TPE) insulator
•	 Electro-galvanized finish steel clamp with
Everdur nut and bolt
•	 Dielectric strength of 640V per mil
•	 Sizes to hold cables 3⁄8" to 41⁄2" O.D.
•	 Fits all channel sizes
•	UL® Listed

­
R

B

.12
.12

B-40

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

A

www.tnb.com

.12

Conduit, Cable and Pipe Supports
C-756-1 Porcelain Saddle,
C-756-2 Porcelain Saddle

Dry-process white-glaze porcelain
insulators assembled in pairs to accept
cables from 3⁄8" through 41⁄2" O.D.
C-105 clamp with bronze slotted hex
head screw and nut furnished. Fits all
Kindorf® channels.

•	 White-glaze dry-process porcelain cable rack insulator
•	 Fits all sizes of B-900 series channel including B-906

2 1⁄8

C

­B

A

21⁄4

Dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
C-755-1A
C-755-1B
C-755-1C
C-755-2
C-755-2A
C-755-2B
C-755-2C
C-755-3
C-755-3A
C-755-3B
C-755-3C
C-755-4
C-755-4A
C-755-4B
C-755-4C
C-755-5
C-755-5A
C-755-5B
C-755-5C
C-755-6
C-755-6A
C-755-6B
C-755-6C
C-755-7
C-755-7A
C-755-7B
C-755-7C
C-755-8
C-755-8A
C-755-8B
C-755-8C
C-755-8D
C-755-8E
C-755-8F

A

B

C

Strap
C-105 (In.)

Wt. in
lbs./C

⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
2
21⁄8
21⁄4
23⁄8
21⁄2
25⁄8
23⁄4
27⁄8
3
31⁄8
31⁄4
33⁄8
31⁄2
35⁄8
33⁄4
37⁄8
4
41⁄8
41⁄4
43⁄8
41⁄2

21⁄16
21⁄16
21⁄16
221⁄32
221⁄32
221⁄32
221⁄32
31⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
51⁄4
51⁄4
51⁄4
51⁄4
65⁄16
65⁄16
65⁄16
65⁄16
73⁄8
73⁄8
73⁄8
73⁄8
73⁄8
73⁄8
73⁄8

19⁄16
19⁄16
19⁄16
25⁄32
25⁄32
25⁄32
25⁄32
25⁄8
23⁄8
25⁄8
25⁄8
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
33⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
43⁄4
513⁄16
513⁄16
513⁄16
513⁄16
67⁄8
67⁄8
67⁄8
67⁄8
67⁄8
67⁄8
67⁄8

1
1
1
11⁄2
11⁄2
1
⁄2
11⁄2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

50
50
50
91
90
85
82
114
110
105
102
220
214
205
200
260
250
243
240
250
240
230
220
340
330
318
387
565
550
535
520
490
475
460

3

B

⁄32

21

⁄32

21

⁄16

5

A

17⁄32

Dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

A

C-756-1
C-756-2

3
4

B

⁄16
⁄32

13

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

C-755 Porcelain Insulator Clamp

17

C-756-1 is for cables up to 3" O.D. Weight 72 lbs/C.
C-756-2 for cables up to 5" O.D. Weight 102 lbs/C.

* Also available in thermoplastic, order as C775-TP.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-41

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Concrete Inserts
Buildings designed with concrete inserts as an integral part of the ceiling
or wall construction realize many economies, both in initial construction
and when updating of the mechanical and electrical system is required.
The initial economies of construction stem from the ease with which
pipe, air conditioning, lighting and other fixtures can be attached
to ceilings or walls.
Inserted by casting into the structure, Kindorf® continuous-slot channels
will accept all the assembly parts and fittings of the Kindorf® system. This
provides virtually limitless structural arrangements — present and future.
Hanger attachments are made by the standard Kindorf® procedure of simply
inserting a standard channel nut which can be pre-started on the hanger
rod or bolt. Placement or adjustment of attachments can be made in infinite
increments at any time along the length of the concrete insert. Future
flexibility means economies in terms of future changes in equipment
or its placement.

Pipe section hangs from
D-990 concrete insert.

D-990 concrete insert supports
conduit installation.

D-990

D-996

Initial Installation of Continuous-Slot Channel Inserts Offers:

•	An immediate savings in time and labor by eliminating
the need for precise calculation and measurement,
both in layout planning and actual installation
of attachment devices

Type Anchor

Cross-Section

Load Rating lbs.
per Ft.*

Punched
Punched

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 12 ga.
11⁄2 x 3⁄4 x 14 ga.

2,000
1,500

•	Additional savings in time and labor because changes
or additions can be made readily to the existing channel
at any time; the need for costly drilling in concrete
and other costly procedures can be eliminated

Cat. No.

Companion to the channel inserts is the spot-type insert for use where
a single hanger is required at a specific location.

* Standard lengths 10 and 20 feet.

D-255 Concrete Inserts

D-256-2 and D-256-5 Concrete Insert

An insert with a knockout saves covering
the slot or covering the opening. Load rating
at 1,300 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
Accommodates hanger rod sizes from 1⁄4"
through 7⁄8" by means of a B-914 insert nut.
1
⁄8" steel. 52 lbs./C.

This unique product reduces the “spot” concrete insert to its simplest
possible components with all the adjustability of the most expensive.
Its features include: two sizes — 2" and 5" adjustability, takes standard
insert nuts, uses hanger rod sizes 1⁄4" through 5⁄8" and has a load rating
up to 1,000 lbs. and a safety factor of 3 (hanger rod permitting).

D-990
D-996

* Safety factor of 3. Based on uniformly distributed load.
* Special lengths available on request.

135⁄64

119⁄32

D-256-2

T

⁄8

1

15⁄8
2 ⁄4

1 ⁄8

3 ⁄4

3

3

2

1

135⁄64

3 11⁄32
2

N

D-256-5

Cat. No.

Description

Cat. No.

N (In.)

T (In.)

Wt. in lbs./C

D-255

For 1⁄4" through 7⁄8" Hanger Rod — 1⁄4"–1⁄2" Pipe

D-256-2
D-256-5

2
5

3
6

34
76

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

B-42

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Concrete Inserts
D-996 Continuous-Slot Concrete Insert

Insert is made of B-900 channel (12-ga.) with anchors punched
out of insert on 6" centers. Polystyrene filled.

Insert is made of B-900 channel (14-ga.) with anchors punched
out of insert on 6" centers. Polystyrene filled.

3

3

3

3

6

6

111⁄32

111⁄32
11⁄2

Cat. No.

⁄4

3

Cat. No.

Description

D-990

Description

D-996

Continuous Slot and Concrete Insert

Continuous Slot and Concrete Insert

Use B-910 or B-914 steel nuts for assembly. Load rating 2,000 lbs. per foot with a safety
factor of 3. Available in 10- and 20-foot lengths.

Use B-910 or B-914 steel nuts for assembly. Load rating 1,500 lbs. per foot with a safety
factor of 3. Available in 10- and 20-foot lengths.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

D-982 Anchor End Cap

D-988 Anchor End Cap

For capping the ends of D-990 continuous-slot concrete inserts.
May be used on the job to make up inserts of less than 1-foot
lengths of B-900 channel.

For capping the ends of D-996 continuous-slot concrete inserts.
May be used on the job to make up inserts of less than 1-foot
lengths of B-906 channel.

⁄6

2

5

2

⁄2

1

⁄6

5

⁄8

2 ⁄8
17⁄16

2 ⁄8

1

17⁄16

D-982

15⁄16
2

15⁄16
2

15⁄16

15⁄16

Description

Anchor End Cap

Cat. No.

Description

D-988

Anchor End Cap

Load rating of such an insert less than 1-foot long is 1,000 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
1
⁄8" steel. 19 lbs./C.

Load rating of each insert less than 1-foot long is 600 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
1
⁄8" steel. 13 lbs./C.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

www.tnb.com

⁄2

1

⁄8

1

1

Cat. No.

1

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

D-990 Continuous-Slot Concrete Insert

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-43

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports

NEW!
Kindorf Fast Set Beam Clamps
®

It can’t get much easier than the new Kindorf® Fast Set Beam Clamp. Simply
slide the clamp onto the I-beam flange, and it will remain firmly fixed while you
install the threaded rod. When tightened, the threaded rod locks the tongue of
the clamp against the I-beam for a fast installation and a superior hold.

OLD WAY!
Standard Beam Clamp
•	 The clamp must be held
in place while tightening
the set screw
•	 The set screw is difficult
to access within the
I-beam web

NEW WAY!
Kindorf ® Fast Set Beam Clamp
•	 Tool-less attachment
to the I-beam
•	 Threaded rod secures
the clamp, eliminating
an entire step in the
process

Cat. NO.
FBC-1
FBC-2
FBC-3

B-44

Description

Load Rating

Rod Size

Std. Pkg. Qty.

Fast Set Beam Clamp
Fast Set Beam Clamp
Fast Set Beam Clamp

250 lbs.
600 lbs.
1,000 lbs.

⁄4"–20
3
⁄8"–16
1
⁄2"–13

25
25
10

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1

www.tnb.com

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
From the Simple Job to the Complex Job with Special Needs,
the Kindorf Line of Beam Clamps Can Fit the Bill.
®

Kindorf® devices for hanging the load can deliver lower installation costs. Hanger rod and conduit pipe
supports are attached to ceilings or to other structural members such as beams, columns or purlins,
without drilling, welding or fastening by means of power-actuated tools. A full selection of beam clamps
and hanger rod supports are offered to meet a wide variety of needs.
The flexibility of the Kindorf® Series of clamps affords a range of applications, from simple attachment
of channel to the suspending of supports from sloping, as well as horizontal, beams.
Where high vibrations are expected, additional support can be attained by gripping the beam on both sides.

500 Series Beam Clamp

H-550 Swivel Beam Clamp

E-231 Beam Clamp

Supports pipe with C-710 clevis hanger.

Supports pipe with C-711 hanger.

Supports channel raceway with G-1012
lay-in-hanger.

E-761 Channel to Beam Clamp
3 1⁄2

3 1⁄2

Cat. No.

design load lbs./ea.

channel Series

wt. lbs./C

800

B-900, B-905, B-995

108

E-761

111⁄16

111⁄16

⁄4

1

⁄2" x 11⁄2" set screw included.

1

Galv-Krom ® finish.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-45

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
E-763 Channel to Beam Clamp

11⁄8

•	 Secures all sizes of Kindorf® channel to beams where flange edge
does not exceed .8" thickness

⁄8

5

⁄4

3

⁄16

9

⁄4

3

Cat. No.

design load lbs./ea.

wt. lbs./C

500

25

E-763

⁄8

5

Load rating each clamp 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
⁄2

1

Assembly requires one H-113-E bolt and one B-910-1/2 steel nut per clamp —
order separately.

⁄4

1

⁄4" steel.

1

Galv-Krom ® finish.

E-767 Channel Support
•	 Supports any size Kindorf® channel. Clamps to I-beam where flange
edge does not exceed .8" thickness

⁄8 Set screw

3

11⁄4

Cat. No.

design load lbs./ea.

wt. lbs./C

800

44

E-767

Load rating each clamp 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

11⁄4

⁄4

1

⁄4" steel.

1

1

11⁄4

Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-962 and G-962-D
Channel Hangers
•	 G-962 fits around 11⁄2" or 17⁄8" deep channel
•	 G-962-D series hangers for 3" deep channel

11⁄4

A

Cat. No.
G-962-D-1
G-962-D-2
G-962-D-3
G-962-D-4**

Wt.
lbs./C

47
47
47
47

Hanger Size (in.)
1
⁄4 and 3⁄8 rod
⁄2 rod and 1⁄4 pipe
3
⁄8 pipe and 5⁄8 rod
1
⁄2 pipe

1

Dim. A
(in.)
13

16 Ga

9

C

⁄32
⁄16
11
⁄16
7
⁄8

B

⁄16

5

** Load rating of 700 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
“B” dimension for G-962: 2 1⁄2"; for G-962-D: 4". UL® Listed for raceway. “C” dimension
for G-962, 137⁄64", for G-962-D, 3 7⁄64".

11⁄2

Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-46

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

E-160 Adjustable
Beam Clamp (1⁄2" Rod)
•	 Clamps to I-beams where edge of beam flange does not exceed
.8" thickness
•	 Hook rod is furnished in three lengths to fit beam flanges up
to 6, 9 or 12" widths
8, 11, or 14
⁄2

1

Cat. No.

for 1⁄2" Hanger Rods

E-160-1/2-6
E-160-1/2-9
E-160-1/2-12

For Beam Flange
width (in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

21⁄2 to  6
51⁄2 to  9
81⁄2 to 12

115
125
154

3
Min.
3 5⁄ 8
Max.

2 1⁄8

Load rating 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

⁄16 x 11⁄2

3

Assembly requires hanger rod of the proper length and size plus two H-114-D nuts.
⁄16" steel, 1⁄2" hook rod.

3

Galv-Krom® finish.

U577 Adjustable Swinging Hanger
Flange (3⁄8" or 1⁄2" Rod)
•	 Flange has 13⁄32" holes for connection
to ceiling
5

3

⁄8

7

⁄16 x 2

2 3⁄4

Cat. No.
U577

⁄16

15

⁄16 x 11⁄4

3

Wt. lbs./C

100

⁄32

17

Assembly requires 3⁄8" or 1⁄2" hanger rod of proper length
plus two H-114-C or H-114-D nuts.
⁄16" steel.

3

Flange has 13⁄32" diameter holes for connection to ceiling.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

E-177 Adjustable
Channel Clamp (1⁄2" Rod)
•	 Adjustable to fit all structural channels up to a maximum flange
width of 31⁄4", and all structural angles with leg up to 3" long and
not more than 3⁄8" thick

4
11⁄2

Cat. No.

Wt. lbs./C

E-177

⁄8

3

2

183

⁄8

3

Load rating is 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
Assembly requires 1⁄2" hanger rod of the proper length plus two H-114-D nuts.
⁄8" steel.

3

Galv-Krom ® finish.

6 3⁄8

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-47

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
E-231 Structural Steel Clamp (3⁄8" or 1⁄2" Rod)
•	 Clamps to I-beams, channels, angles and columns
•	 Two sizes are available, one for 3⁄8" and the other for 1⁄2" hanger rod

B

•	 Each takes flanges up to .8"

A

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
E-231-3/8*
E-231-1/2**

A

B

C

wt.
lbs./C

21⁄2
3

1
19⁄32

⁄8
15
⁄16

31
53

7

design loads
lbs.

25
15

C

Assembly requires two H-116-C ( 3⁄8") or two H-116-D ( 1⁄2") square nuts
to attach hanger rod. 1⁄8" steel.
* Load rating of 500 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
** Load rating of 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

­E-232 Clamp with Swing Connector (3⁄8" or 1⁄2" Rod)

A

B

Cat. No.

dimensions (in.)

diameter
for rod (in.)

E-232-3/8*
E-232-1/2**

⁄8
1
⁄2

A

B

C

wt.
lbs./C

⁄16
7
⁄8

⁄16
29
⁄64

1
15⁄8

48
76

9

3

7

design loads
lbs.

25
15

C

* Load rating of 400 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
** Load rating of 550 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

­­E-232 clamp with swing connector
affords a convenient method of
attaching to angled beams.

E-233 Anchor Clip
•	 Anchor clips should be used when clamps are subject to excessive vibration
•	 To obtain the correct size clips, add 1" to the flange width
•	 If length required is not standard, order next largest standard length

Cat. No.
E-233-3/8-6
E-233-3/8-10
E-233-1/2-6
E-233-1/2-10

rod Size (In.)

max beam
width “A”

for use
With

wt. lbs./C

⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

6
10
6
10

E-231-3/8 or
E-232-3/8
E-231-1/2 or
E-232-1/2

20
33
26
37

3
3

For use with E-231 and E-232 clamps when
hanger rod is not in straight through position.

I

A

Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-48

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports

Cat. No.

beam flange
Width (In.)

dimension a
(in.)

std.
Ctn.

U-568-6
U-568-8

6
12

9
15

25
25

A

16 ga. material.

E-235 Heavy-Duty Beam Clamp
Set screw C included

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

A

B

C

wt.
lbs./C

design loads
lbs.

E-235-3/8-HD
E-235-1/2-HD

3

⁄8
1
⁄2

1

⁄8
1
⁄4

⁄8 x 23⁄4
1
⁄2 x 23⁄4

109
201

1,300
3,150

3

121⁄32"
B

Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized.

A
Tapped Hole Size

U-564 Heavy-Duty Beam Clamp

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

A

B

U-564-3/8
U-564-1/2

3

⁄8
1
⁄2

1

⁄4
1
⁄4

Set Screw C
Included

C

wt.
lbs./C

design loads
lbs.

⁄8 x 23⁄4
1
⁄2 x 23⁄4

1,300
3,150

25
15

3

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

U-568 Beam Clamps

121⁄32"
B

Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized.

Tapped
Hole Size

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

A

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-49

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
M-775L Clamp with Lock Nut

Cat. No.

rod size
A (In.)

B (In.)

C (In.)

design
Load lbs.

std
Ctn.

⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4

2
2
2

440
440
500

50
50
50

M-775L-1/2
M-775L-5/8
M-775L-3/4

3

1

B

Standard Finishes - GoldGalv ® brand or Black (B) Malleable Iron.

A

M-775L

EG=Electro-Galv
B=Black

U-579 Beam Clamp for Hanging Rod

Cat. No.

A (In.)

std. Ctn.

U579-3/8
U-579-1/2

31⁄2
41⁄4

25
25

A

Nuts and wood screws not included.
Mounting holes 13⁄32".
Finishes - GoldGalv® brand Malleable Iron.

U-579 Ceiling Flange

540 Beam Clamp for Hanging Rod
A
2"
dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.

A

B

C

D

std. Ctn.

540 3/8
540-5/8

⁄8
11
⁄16

17⁄8
21⁄2

⁄4
3
⁄8

7

⁄8
2

25
25

1

1

C

Finishes – GoldGalv ® brand or Black (B).
B

D

540 Side Beam Hanger Clip

B-50

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

C

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
⁄4

3

⁄8

1

Used to secure a 3⁄ 8" hanger rod to the side or bottom of beam or ceiling.

Cat. No.

wt. lbs./C

S5413/8

28

⁄32 Hole

13

11⁄8

Assembly requires two ( 3⁄8") square nuts. Also screw or bolt for fastening to beam or ceiling.
⁄8" steel.

1 1⁄8

1

⁄16

13

Load rating of 700 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

⁄32 Hole

13

Galv-Krom ® finish.

U501 Channel to Beam Clamp
Hardened points bite into beam flange. Fits all I-beams where edge
of beam flange does not exceed .8" thickness

for structure
Channel

Cat. No.
U501

dimension a (in.)

wt. lbs./C

31⁄4

76

31⁄4
43⁄4

76
88

43⁄4

88

B-900, B-905,
B-906, B-907
Stainless Steel
B-901, B-900-2A,
B-902, B-903
Stainless Steel

U501SS
U502
U502SS

11⁄2

3

⁄8

7

⁄4

1

A

⁄8

3

* Load rating of 2,200 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
⁄4" steel, 3⁄8-inch U-bolt.

1

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

S5413/8 Swing Connector (3⁄8" Rod)

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

A597 Channel to Beam Clamp

Cat. No.
a597

design load
lbs./ea.

channel
series

wt.
lbs./c

800

B-900, B-905, B-995

108

31⁄2

⁄2" x 1 1⁄2" set screw included.

1

Galv-Krom ® finish.
31⁄2

111⁄16

111⁄16

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

⁄4

1

B-51

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
512-U Channel to Beam Clamp
11⁄8

Secures all sizes of Kindorf® channel to beams where flange edge does
not exceed .8" thickness.

⁄8

5

⁄4

3

Cat. No.

design
Load (lbs.)

wt.
lbs./C

500

25

512-U

⁄16

9

⁄4

3

⁄8

5

Load rating each clamp 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

⁄2

1

Assembly requires one H-113-E bolt and one B-910-1/2 steel nut per clamp —
order separately.

⁄4

1

⁄4" steel.

1

Galv-Krom ® finish.

E-764 Channel Clip
Complete with set screw for clipping a length of channel slot-side down
and across the runner bars of a dropped ceiling installation.
Channel

wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
E-764

Set
Screw

4

11⁄4

At least two required per each such application.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

Runner Bar for Dropped Ceiling

E-765 Center Beam Clamp
Clamps 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" Kindorf® channel to beams where beam flange does not
exceed 3⁄4" thickness and 4" to 63⁄4" wide.

Cat. No.
E-765

load Rating (lbs.)

wt. lbs./C

800

112

Load rating is 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

.08

Furnished assembled.

11⁄2

⁄16

3

⁄8" steel clamps, 3⁄16" steel strap.

1

Galv-Krom finish.
®

61⁄4

⁄16

9

11⁄8
1" x .5"

B-52

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
E-781 Single-Beam Clamp

Supports any size Kindorf® channel. Clamps to I-beam where flange
edge does not exceed .8" thickness.

For use in attaching channel on top of beam flange with slot side down.
Members are shipped assembled for easy installation.
⁄4

1

⁄8 set screw

3

⁄16

3

3

11⁄4

2

11⁄16

1

11⁄2

21⁄2

⁄16 x 9⁄16 Slot total (3)

7°

7

⁄4

1

11⁄4

11⁄4

8

Cat. No.

load Rating (lbs.)

wt. lbs./C

800

44

U514

Cat. No.

wt. lbs./C

E-781

Load rating is 800 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

133

Galv-Krom ® finish.

⁄4" steel.

1

Galv-Krom ® finish .

E-768 Column Mount Support

E-782 Double-Beam Clamp

For use with 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" channel. Provides a rigid support between ‘H’ beam
flanges for mounting pipe, conduit, outlet boxes and panel boards.

For use in attaching channel on both sides of a beam flange with slot side
down. Members are shipped assembled for easy installation.

3

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

U514 Channel Support

2

31⁄2
7
⁄16 x 9⁄16
Slot Total (3)

11⁄16

1 ⁄4
1

⁄4

1

11⁄4

⁄4

1

⁄16

3

11⁄2

21⁄2
Use 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" size
Kindorf ® Channel.

11⁄2

⁄16 x 11⁄4 bolts

5

Cat. No.
E-768

load Rating (lbs.)

wt. lbs./C

800

50

Two E-768’s required for installation.

7°

Cat. No.

wt. lbs./C

E-782

235

Galv-Krom ® finish.

Use C-105, C-106 or C-107 straps for mounting 1⁄2" to 8" pipe on channel section.
Load rating of 800# with a safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-53

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Clamps and Hanger Rod Supports
U-504 Single Beam Clamp

U-505 Double Beam Clamp

For use in attaching channel on top of beam flange with slot side down.
Members are shipped assembled for easy installation.

For use in attaching channel on both sides of a beam flange with
slot side down. Members are shipped assembled for easy installation.

7

3

⁄4

2

1

11⁄16

⁄16

3

3

2

⁄4

11⁄2

21⁄2

⁄16 x 9⁄16 Slot Total (3)

7

1

⁄16

3

11⁄16

⁄16 x ⁄16 Slot Total (3)

7

9

11⁄2

21⁄2

7°

7°
Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
U504

133

Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-54

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
U505

235

Galv-Krom ® finish.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Wall and Support Brackets­
Utilizing the built-in advantages of the Kindorf® Channel, the support
bracket members allow a great deal of flexibility in meeting the structural
framing needs.
Axle supports and a variety of wall brackets all adapt to the standard
Kindorf® channel and allow additional flexibility in the support of cables,
conduit, pipe and other equipment.
The application of axle supports and bracket members can be made
on either the continuous slot of the channel or the pre-punched hole
side. Utilizing the 11⁄2" hole spacing, greater adaptability is attained
with a minimum of fittings.

Mounts on Kindorf® channel or directly to wall. F-715 bracket supports
11⁄2" or 15⁄8" channels. Brackets allow for a variety of support channel
lengths. The continuous tray on brackets prevent lateral movement
of supported channels. Support channels can be fastened from top,
bottom or both.

F-715

B

C
⁄16 Dia.
Holes

9

A

Dimensions (in.)
A

B

C

Wt.
lbs./C.

527⁄32

45⁄8

11⁄2

163

Cat. No.

Conduit installations supported above
and below by F-721 wall bracket.

F-721 Wall bracket hangs
and supports pipe runs.

F-715 Wall Bracket

Galv-Krom ® finish.

F-716-3 Wall Bracket
Mounts on Kindorf® channel or directly to wall. F-716-3 bracket supports
3" deep or back-to-back channels. Brackets allow for a variety of support
channel lengths. The continuous tray on brackets prevent lateral movement
of supported channels. Support channels can be fastened from top, bottom
or both.

⁄16 Dia.
Holes

9

A
Dimensions (in.)
A

B

C

Wt.
lbs./C.

711⁄32

45⁄8

11⁄2

179

Cat. No.
F-716-3

C

B

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Kindorf® wall brackets provide a ready-made shelving arrangement
that can be attached quickly to the supporting channels.

A

Galv-Krom finish.
®

F-720 Wall Bracket
Mounts on Kindorf® channel, concrete inserts or directly to wall.
Continuous-slot accepts C-105, C-106 and C-107 series pipe straps.
Bracket is 12-gauge steel, 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" channel welded to a 1⁄4" back plate.
May be attached to either the continuous slot side or pre-punched holes in
back or side of Kindorf® channel.
Cat. No.
F720 6**
F-720-9**
F-720-12**
F-720-18
F-720-24**

Dim. A
(in.)

End Load
Rating lbs.*

Wt.
lbs./C

6
9
12
18
24

600
450
300
200
150

132
155
200
275
350

A

11⁄2
11⁄2

3

41⁄2

⁄4

3

⁄16 Hole

9

⁄4

11⁄2

1

* Safety factor of 3.
** This product available in green & hot-dipped galvanized.
Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-55

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Wall and Support Brackets­
F-721 Wall Bracket
Double channel to provide continuous slot for both top and bottom mounting.
12-ga. steel, 1⁄4-inch back plate. May be attached to either the continuous
slot side or pre-punched holes in back or side of Kindorf® channel.
Cat. No.

Dim. A
(in.)

End Load
Rating lbs.*

Wt.
lbs./C

F721 18
F-721-24
F-721-30
F-721-36

18
24
30
36

300
225
180
150

568
736
904
1072

A
41⁄2"
⁄16"
Holes

3"

9

6"

⁄4"

1

* Safety factor of 3.

11⁄2"

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

F-735 and F-736 Axle Supports
For use on storage racks constructed on Kindorf® channel. Supports reels
of electrical cables, wire rope, chain and other materials. Left-hand axle
support illustrated. F-736 identical except right hand. May be attached
to either the continuous slot side or pre-punched holes in back or side
of Kindorf® channel.
Cat No.

Description

F-735
F-736

Left Hand
Right Hand

⁄4

3

⁄16

9

113⁄16

⁄4

1

41⁄2

3

Wt.
lbs./C

6

⁄4

1

165
165

⁄16

9

2 3⁄4

Assembly requires two B-910-1/2 steel nuts and two H-113-B bolts.

⁄4

3

Accepts up to 11⁄4" steel bar or pipe for axle.

F-735 Left-Hand
Axle Support Shown.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

1 ⁄2
1

⁄4

1

F-737 Double Axle Support

⁄4

3

Typical Kindorf® Space-Saver reel rack. Kindorf® reel racks are easy
to build, exceptionally strong and economical. Racks adjust easily to
accommodate a variety of reel sizes. No special tools needed.

⁄16

9

113⁄16

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
F-737

⁄4

1

⁄4

1

335

9
⁄4

3

To be used with F-735 and F-736. 1⁄4" steel.
To be used as center support
for tandem reel assembly.

⁄4

3

3

F-739 Telephone Cable Hook

Dimension A
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

41⁄2
71⁄2
101⁄2
131⁄2
18

81
122
162
198
278

A

11⁄2

Has 9⁄16" diameter holes on 11⁄2" centers to allow for easy tie banding of cables.
Galv-Krom ® 12-ga. steel.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄4

1

11⁄2

Cantilever-type cable hooks fit into ‘T’ slot on B-904 channel for rigid,
non-slip support. Fast mounting, no hardware to tighten.

B-56

3

11⁄2

Galv-Krom ® finish.

F-739-4-1/2
F-739-7-1/2
F-739-10-1/2
F-739-13-1/2
F-739-18

⁄4

3

2 3⁄4

Assembly requires four B-910-1/2 steel nuts and four H-113-B bolts.

Cat. No.

11⁄2

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-969A or G-969AP Closure Strip
G-975

G-972-1/2
Nipple

The Kindorf® Lighting Support System consists of high-quality construction materials
that afford definite installation advantages to those most concerned with lighting
installations. When used as a surface metal raceway, it is UL Listed and complies
with National Electrical Code® Article 386.

G-972-HB-1/2 & 3/4
Fixture Hanger
Adapter

To the Owner

Fixture Hanger

A flexible installation requiring fewer attachments to the building structure with built-in
provisions for easy maintenance and future modifications when lighting fixtures must
be added, deleted or relocated. Kindorf® channel and fittings form a strong, economical
and attractive support and wiring system for fixtures and other equipment.

To the Architect and Engineer

Fixture Box
and Fixture

A system of construction least demanding on general design conditions and readily
adaptable to all spacing of pillars, purlins and other structural components. Supply will
not delay a job because Kindorf® channel is stocked at many locations throughout the
country. The Kindorf® System saves planning time because it is designed for fast and
easy installation by the contractor with little or no detailing.

To the Contractor
The Kindorf® System consists of time-saving materials that will simultaneously provide
for the electrical feed and the mechanical support of lighting and other equipment.
Kindorf® affords a means of making fewer attachments to the structure at wider
spacing. It ensures true and rigid alignment and lends itself to systematic preassembly
methods which economize on labor. No special tools for installation and no painting
is required. Kindorf® speeds all jobs because a complete line of fittings assures
easy solution of many installation problems as they arise in the field.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

For Mounting or Suspending High-Intensity
Lighting Fixtures in High-Bay Installations.
Surface Raceway and Lighting
Support Systems

Other Mechanical Details.
G-969A

G-1012

G-1038

G-1020
G-962
B-900

G-1032
Channel raceway system supports and feeds
fluorescent lighting fixtures.

www.tnb.com

G-967

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

G-969A

G-1012

G-975

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-57

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Surface Raceway Channel Systems

Channel Support Lighting Systems

•	 Knock-out type by means
of 1⁄2" channel knockouts
on 6" centers

•	 Shoulder-bolt type by means
of special shoulder bolt 13⁄32"
x 3" slots on 4" centers

•	 Plug-in type by means
of sliding fixture hanger

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 14 ga.

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 14 ga.
B-900-M

G-975-M
1 ⁄2 x 1 ⁄2 x 12 ga.
1

•	 Spring-nut type by means
of spring-nut and bolt
combination

1

B-906

G-953

1 ⁄2 x 1 ⁄2 x 12 ga.
1

11⁄2 x 3⁄4 x 14 ga.

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 12 ga.

1

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 14 ga.

G-975

B-900

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 12 ga.

B-900-M

G-956
11⁄2 x 7⁄8 x 12 ga.

11⁄2 x 7⁄8 x 12 ga.

11⁄2 x 11⁄2 x 12 ga.
B-900

B-901

G-965

11⁄2 x 17⁄8 x 12 ga.

11⁄2 x 3⁄4 x 14 ga.

1 ⁄2 x 3 x 12 ga.
1

B-901
B-906

G-973-2-1/4

G-955

11⁄2 x 3 x 12 ga.
B-902
B-911-1/4

G-972-1/2	

G-974-1-1/4
Nipple
Lock nut
and bushing

G-1012
Hanger with H-115-A bolt
and square nut plus
G-1016 and H-118-C washers

H-111-B

Electrical Conductors “Lay-in” the Channel
Kindorf® Surface Raceway channels provide a central wiring distribution
system with conductor capacity that exceeds requirements of any lighting
layout and with “power to spare” for other uses. Channel adapts to any
interval of structural support — may be dropped to any level where it
becomes a rigid platform for fixture attachment. Lighting fixtures may be
spaced and fastened anywhere along the channel system with “plug-in”
or direct-feed electrical connection.
Branch lighting circuit conductors are completely enclosed in channel
from panel to fixture, eliminating the ordinary “clutter” of external
conductors and protecting the wires from physical damage.
Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

B-58

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Kindorf® channels, installed slot-side down, are designed to provide fixture
support only. A range of accessory fittings permit fixture attachment to the
channel safely and securely in an approved manner. Channels with solid
base or with slots are generally used for simple channel support systems.
Channel support systems combine economy of investment with maximum
strength and rigidity. The continuous-slot channel provides complete
flexibility of lighting layout with fixture spacing continuous or intermittent.
Fixtures may be added or relocated to meet changing requirements without
disturbing the basic support system. The rigid channels maintain fixture
alignment and adapt to any interval of structural support.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-950 Fixture Hanging Channel
17⁄8

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

G 950

1 1⁄ 2" x 1 7⁄ 8" x 12 ga.

G-978C

11⁄8

⁄16" x 2 ⁄4" slots on 4 foot centers.

11

1

4 ft.

20 ft. lengths only 194 lbs./C ft.
Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

2 1⁄4
4 ft.
11⁄8

G-953 Fixture Hanging Channel
11⁄2

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

G-953

1 1⁄ 2" x 1 1⁄ 2" x 12 ga.

G-958

11⁄2
⁄2

1

Fixtures attached to channel of G-973-2-1/4 shoulder bolts. 154 lbs./C ft.
⁄32" x 3" slots on 4" centers.

13

3

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.
⁄32

13

1

G-955 Fixture Hanging Channel
11⁄2

To be used in place of G-975 channel when heavy fixtures
are used or supports are on wider spacing.

3

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

End Cap

G-955

11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga.

G-978-D

G-957
G-959

⁄2 KO

1

3

6

270 lbs./C ft. UL Listed for raceway.
⁄2" KOs on 6" centers.

1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

G-956 Fixture Hanging Channel

⁄4

3

Similar to G-953 channel except lighter gauge and only ⁄4" deep.
3

1 ⁄2
1

⁄2

1

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

G-956

11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x 14 ga.

G-960

3

Fixtures attached to channel by means of G-973-1-1/2 shoulder bolts
or G-973-2-1/4 fixture bolts. 80 lbs./C ft.

⁄32

13

⁄32" x 3" slots on 4" centers.

13

1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-59

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-957 End Cap
Blank end cap for use with G-955 and B-902 channel.

Cat. No.

3 1⁄8

Wt. lbs./C

G 957

14

14 ga. steel.
11⁄8
15⁄16

UL Listed for raceway.
Galv-Krom finish.
®

G-958 Channel Joiner
For 11⁄2" deep-slotted channel G-953.

17⁄16
19⁄16

Cat. No.

⁄2

1

Wt. lbs./C

G 958

92

3

Four 3⁄8" x 3⁄4" bolts and nuts are furnished with the joiner.
14 ga. steel.

⁄32

13

Galv-Krom ® finish.

1 8
3
⁄2

1

G-959 End Cap
For use with G-955 and B-902 channel.
⁄8 Stud Nut
G-974-1/2

3

Cat. No.

DESCRIPTION

G 959

With two 1⁄ 2" Knockouts

Wt. lbs./C

1 ⁄8
3

⁄

31

11
11
16
16

12 ga. steel.
UL Listed for raceway.
Galv-Krom ® finish.
⁄2 KO

1

G-960 Channel Joiner
⁄4

3

For 3⁄4" deep-slotted channel G-956.
1 ⁄16
9

⁄2

1

Cat. No.

Wt. lbs./C

G 960

3

70

Four ⁄8" x ⁄4" bolts and nuts are furnished with the joiner.
3

3

⁄32

13

14 ga. steel.

1 8

Galv-Krom finish.
®

3
⁄2

1

B-60

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-962 and G-962-D Channel Hangers
G-962 fits around 11⁄2" or 17⁄8" deep channel.
G-962-D series hangers for 3" deep channel.
wt.
lbs./C Cat. No.

Cat. No.
G 962 1
G-962-2
G-962-3
G-962-4*

40
42
39
47

wt.
lbs./C

G-962-D-1
G-962-D-2
G-962-D-3
G-962-D-4**

47
47
47
47

Hanger Size (in.)
1
⁄4 and 3⁄8 rod
⁄2 rod and 1⁄4 pipe
3
⁄8 pipe and 5⁄8 rod
1
⁄2 pipe

1

11⁄4

A

dim a.
(in.)

⁄32
⁄16
11
⁄16
7
⁄8

13

16 Ga.
C

9

B

⁄16

5

* Load rating of 600 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
** Load rating of 700 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

11⁄2

“B” dimension for G-962: 2 ⁄2"; for G-962-D: 4".
UL Listed for raceway.
1

“C” dimension for G-962, 137⁄64", for G-962-D, 3 7⁄64".
Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-963 Channel Hanger
For use with G-953 or G-956 channel.
Does not interfere with fluorescent fixtures.

Cat. No.

Hanger Size (in.)

G-963-1
G-963-2

⁄4 and 3⁄8 rod
1
⁄2 rod and 1⁄4 pipe
1

13⁄16

A
137⁄64

12 Ga.

Dim. A (in.)

13⁄32

⁄8

1

⁄32
9
⁄16

13

⁄32

13

Load rating of 900 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

11⁄2

1 x 3⁄8 - 16

48 lbs./C.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-965 Fixture Hanging Channel
Provides a combination fixture support
and surface raceway.
Cat. No.
1 ⁄ 2" x 1 ⁄ 8"
G-965
1

Description

Joiner

End
Cap

12 ga., 190#/C ft.

G-978-C

6959

⁄2 KO

1

3

17⁄8

11⁄2

7

6

UL Listed for raceway.
⁄2" knockouts on 6" centers.

1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

G-966 Blank End Cap
For 17⁄8" deep channel.
157⁄64

Cat. No.

Wt. lbs./C

G 966

8

UL Listed for raceway.

11⁄8

Galv-Krom ® finish.

15⁄16

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-61

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-967 Blank End Cap

G-969A Closure Strip for Kindorf® Channel

•	 For use with 11⁄2" deep channel

•	 For use with all channel series to complete enclosure
⁄16

17

⁄16

1

1.325

G-967

+.010
-.000

⁄16

1

⁄32

5

⁄16

3

⁄32

17

⁄8

3

1.548
G-967

⁄8

1

#14 GA.

11⁄8
1.312

113⁄32
G-969A

+.000
-.015

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
G 967

6

UL Listed for raceway.

G-969AP

Cat. No.

Description

G 969A
G-969AP

Steel Closure Strip — Galv-Krom® finish
Plastic Closure Strip — Gold

19 ga. steel. 35 lbs./C.

Galv-Krom ® finish.

UL Listed for raceway.

G-968 Blank End Cap

G-972 Nipple Malleable Iron

•	For 3⁄4" deep channel

The 1⁄2" size can nipple fixtures through channel knockouts. All sizes
can be fastened to the open slot of all Kindorf® channels. Locknut
supplied with nipple.

⁄64

17

⁄16

1

.620

±.005

A
⁄16

1

⁄16

3

.091

⁄8

3

B
.704
G-968
11⁄8
1.312

.054

C

#14 GA.

+.000
-.015

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
G 968

3

UL Listed for raceway.
Galv-Krom finish.
®

Dimensions (In.)

Cat. No.
G 972 1/2
G-972-3/4
G 972 L 1/2

A

⁄2 pipe size
⁄4 pipe size
1
⁄2 pipe size

B

C

Wt. in
lbs./C

⁄8
⁄8
2

11⁄4
11⁄4
11⁄4

7
11
9

1

7

3

7

The extra length of the G-972-L-1/2 permits its use as a spacing nipple
when locked into knockout or continuous slot.
Load rating of 750 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-62

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-969 or G-969P Closure strip
G-975

The Fixture Hanger Adapter extends the flexibility of the Kindorf®
System by easily adapting the 3⁄4" hanger size of high-intensity
fixtures to channel mounting.
G-972-1/2
Nipple

The hanger adapter securely mounts the fixture hanger or box
to the channel through the 1⁄2" KO in the base. No special tools
are needed for installation of fittings and fixtures.

G-972-HB-1/2 & 3/4
Fixture hanger
adapter

Kindorf® channel, with 1⁄2" KOs every 6",
hangs and feeds the fixtures — thus
simplifying installation.

Cat. No.

Description

G 972 HB 1/2

Galv-Krom® finish

Fixture hanger

Wt.
lbs./C

Fixture box
and fixture

17

G-973 Shoulder Type Fixture Bolt and Nut
For use in fastening fixtures to slotted channels. Permits the preassembly
of hardware to the fixture. The head of the G-973 is simply inserted into
the channel slot and twisted 90° to seat. The fixture is secured tightly
when the nut is run home.

Cat. No.
G 973 1 1/2
G 973 2 1/4

Used with
Channel

G-956
G-953

Size (In.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄2 x 11⁄2
⁄8 x 21⁄4

7
10

1

3

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-972-HB-1/2 Steel Fixture Hanger Adapter

Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-974 Fastener
Will fasten fluorescent fixtures to G-975 through knockouts or to
the open slot of all Kindorf® channels when installed slot down.

Cat. No.
G-974-1/2
G-974-3/4
G-974-1
G 974 1 1/4
G-974-1-1/2

Size (In.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4 x 1⁄2
⁄4 x 3⁄4
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4 x 11⁄2

8
81⁄2
9
10
11

1

1

Galv-Krom ® finish.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-63

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-975 Fixture Hanging Channel
Designed to provide a combination fixture support and surface
raceway. Fixture attaches to KOs by G-972-1/2 nipple for
wiring, or a G-974 stud nut where wiring is not required.

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Description

Joiner

End Cap

11⁄2" x 11⁄2"
G 975 10
G 975 20
G 975 M 10
G 975 M 20

12 ga.
12 ga.
14 ga.
14 ga.

G978A
G978A
G1503-S
G1503-S

G967
G967
G979
G979

3
11⁄2
⁄2 KO

1

6

G-975: 160 lbs./C ft. G-975-M: 107 lbs./C ft. UL Listed for raceway.
⁄2" knockouts on 6" centers.

1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ®.

G-976 Connector
Accepts either 1⁄2" or 3⁄4" conduit to feed control channel when
used as a combination raceway and lighting fixture support.
Includes two stud nuts. Malleable iron.

11⁄2
4

Cat. No.

Description

G 976

Galv-Krom finish

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄16

11

54

®

Load rating of 1,000 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

⁄4 Conduit Thd. in
Main Unit

3

UL Listed for raceway.

G-977 Swing Connector
(Channel Feed Hanger)
Provides a 15° swing in either direction to the channel run.
Accepts 1⁄2" or 3⁄4" conduit, or may be adapted for use with
3
⁄8" fixture stem when specified.
Cat. No.

Description

G 977

Galv-Krom finish

11⁄2
5
Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4 Conduit Thd. in
Main Unit

3

2 5⁄32

130

®

Includes two stud nuts.
Malleable iron.
UL Listed for raceway.
Load rating of 1,300 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

G-978 Joiners
To splice lengths of raceway channel. Installed by tightening
nuts on 1⁄4" studs which are permanently attached to a smooth
inner plate.
Cat. No.

Type of Channel Applicable

G 978

Use with G-975, G-975-M and
B-900, B-900-M
Use with B-906
Use with G-955 and B-902
Use with B-901, G-950 and G-965

G-978-L
G-978-D
G-978-C

11⁄2

Dim. A
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

11⁄2

107

⁄4
3
17⁄8

87
137
122

3

3 7 1⁄2

11⁄2
11⁄4
A

Nuts included. 14 ga. steel.
UL Listed for raceway.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-64

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
For installations where fixtures are mounted flush to slot-down channels.
Fastening is accomplished by tightening flat head machine screws.

Cat. No.

Type of Channel Applicable

G 978A

Use with G-975, G-975-M
and B-900, B-900-M
Use with B-906

G-978-AL

Dim. A
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

11⁄2

103

⁄4

83

3

11⁄2

3 7 1⁄2

11⁄2
11⁄4

14 ga. steel.

A

Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-979 End Cap
Use with G-975 or B-900 channel to provide conduit entrance.
Cat. No.

Description

G 979 1/2
G-979-3/4

For 7⁄8" Hole, 1⁄2" Conduit
For 13⁄32" Hole, 3⁄4" Conduit

Wt.
lbs./C

15⁄8

25
25

Furnished with stud nut.

17⁄8

11⁄2

12 ga. steel.
UL Listed for raceway.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

G-1007 Panel Adapter
Mounts 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" raceway channel to panel board.
17⁄8

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
G 1007

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-978-A Joiners

211⁄16
4

36

17⁄8

Complete with stud nuts.
UL Listed for raceway.

11⁄16

13⁄8

Galv-Krom finish.
®

19⁄16

11⁄4

G-1012 “Lay-In” Channel Hanger
119⁄32

Cat. No.

Description

G 1012

Galv-Krom® Finish

⁄16 Dia. Hole Total -1

13

⁄4

11⁄2

Wt.
lbs./C

3

⁄64

51

33

⁄32 Long x 1⁄8 Wide Slot
13
⁄32 Dia. Hole Total -1
9

135⁄64

14 ga. steel.
UL Listed for raceway.

Hinged channel hanger
for raceway channel.

Load rating of 500 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

31⁄8
15⁄8

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-65

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-1012-D “Lay-In” Channel Hanger
119⁄32
⁄16 Dia. Hole Total -1

13

Hinged channel hanger for 3" deep raceway channel.

⁄4

1 ⁄2

3

1

Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.

Description

G 1012 D

Galv-Krom® Finish

⁄32 Long x 1⁄8 Wide Slot
⁄32 Dia. Hole Total -1
9

⁄64

51

135⁄64

40

13

14 ga. steel.
UL Listed for raceway.
Load rating of 450 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.
43⁄16
15⁄8

G-1013 Hex Swivel Nuts
Two required for each G-1012 channel hanger to provide swivel action.
Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.

Description

G 1013 3/8
G-1013-1/2

For 3⁄8" Hanger Rod
For 1⁄2" Hanger Rod

7
7

G-1016 Rubber Washer
Washers are 1" diameter, 1⁄4" thick with 5⁄16" hole.
Use with G-1012 fixture hanger as cushion between fixture and hanger.
Wt.
lbs./C

Cat. No.
G 1016

1

G-1017 Mercury Vapor Hanger
To support high- or low-bay mercury vapor or heavy incandescent
fixtures from raceway channels. Permits plug-in connections with
G-1038 raceway outlets.

121⁄32
41⁄4

3 3⁄16
1

Cat No.
G 1017

Used with
Channel

Depth
Size (In.)

Wt.
lbs./C

B-900, B-901
G-975, G-965

41⁄4

76

11⁄8 Dia. Hole

Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-66

C

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

2

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
⁄4 – 14 N P S Thread
with 3⁄4 to 1⁄2 Reducer

3

Mounts to 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" raceway channel. Threaded for 3⁄4" conduit
or fitting. Swivel action adapter for 1⁄2" conduit furnished.

Cat. No.

Description

G 1020

Galv-Krom® Finish

15°

2 13⁄16

Wt. lbs./C

40

13⁄8

UL Listed for raceway.

G-1021 Threaded End Fitting

17⁄8

Mounts to 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" raceway channel. Threaded for 1" conduit
or fitting. No swivel action.

13⁄8

2 13⁄16

1" Pipe Thread

11⁄2

Cat. No.

Description

G 1021

Galv-Krom® Finish

Wt. lbs./C

32

17⁄8

UL Listed for raceway.
1" I.D.

⁄32 Dia Holes
Total 2

9

G-1032 Channel Swivel Joint

2 11⁄16

Provides a 15° swivel action (to offset possible movement) for connection
of 1⁄2" or 3⁄4" conduit to raceway channels. May be accepted for use with
3
⁄8" fixture stem when specified. Order two G-974 3⁄4" fasteners for
channel mounting.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-1020 End Swivel Joint

11⁄2
4
⁄4 Pipe Thread
with 3⁄4 to 1⁄2
reducer

3

Cat. No.

Description

G 1032

Galv-Krom® Finish

Wt. lbs./C

25

15°

13⁄8

Load rating of 500 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

⁄16

3

UL Listed for raceway.

G-1033 4" Diameter Swivel Cover
Cover for G-2000 through G-2004 junction boxes.
Use with 3⁄4" or 1⁄2" conduit. Swivel action.

Cat. No.

Description

G 1033

Galv-Krom Finish
®

4

Wt. lbs./C

15"

35

Load rating 400 lbs. with a safety factor of 3. UL Listed for raceway.

3
⁄4 Pipe Thread
with 3⁄4 to 1⁄2
Reducer

3

⁄32

13

⁄6

3

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-67

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Raceway Outlets

G-1038-B Housing Only
Cat. No.

Description

G 1038 B

Gold Finish

Wt. lbs./C

25

G-1038-C Duplex Cover Plate

Complete unit including housing,
standard duplex 3-wire, 15-amp,
125-volt NEMA ground receptacle
and cover plate.

Cat. No.

Description

G 1038 C

Gold Finish

Wt. lbs./C

12

Complete unit including housing,
standard single 3-wire, 15-amp,
125-volt NEMA ground receptacle
and cover plate.

G-1038-CA Single Cover Plate
Cat. No.

Description

G 1038 CA

Gold Finish

Wt. lbs./C

14

Size of opening: 1.391 diameter
Complete unit including housing,
single, 3-wire, 15-amp,
277-volt-twistlock receptacle
and cover plate.

G-1038-CX Blank Cover Plate
Complete unit including housing,
duplex, 3-wire, 15-amp,
277-volt-twistlock receptacle
and cover plate.

Cat. No.

Description

G 1038
G 1038 A
G-1038-D
G 1038 E

Gold Finish
Gold Finish
Gold Finish
Gold Finish

Wt. lbs./C

55
50
60
50

UL Listed for raceway.

B-68

Cat. No.

Description

G 1038 CX

Gold Finish

Wt. lbs./C

15

G-1060 Nylon Bushing
Cat. No.
G-1060

Wt. lbs./C

2

Strain relief bushing to protect lead from fluorescent fixture.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Channel should be supported
a minimum of 12" from joiner.

The direction-change joiner fittings for Kindorf® Channels expand to
three, the number of channel depths available for complete raceway
wiring systems.
Joiner fittings are made for 11⁄2", 17⁄8" and 3" depths of 11⁄2" wide channels.
These three systems provide raceway conductor fill capacities for any lighting
layout and with erected strength to spare for lighting fixture support.
The joiner fitting rests inside the channel without obstructing the channel,
or the lay-in of electrical conductors. No time-consuming “fishing”
of conductors at the elbows, tee and crosses.
Installation is fast. Simply insert the fitting into the end of the channel and
turn the captive set-screw. This “jack-screws” the fitting sidewalls beneath
the channel lips for snug, strong joints. Standard Kindorf® Channel
Closure Strip is used for a completely enclosed raceway.
Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

G-1500, G-1870 and G-3000 Series Direction
Change Joiner Assemblies
Direction change joiners for 11⁄2", 17⁄8" and 3" deep raceway channels
complete with screws and washers. Joiners fit into end of channel.
Elbow (L)
When screws are tightened, joiner is forced up against channel lips for
secure installation. Conductors can be laid in, no pulling required. No need
for junction boxes. Available in X, T, L and S configurations. Support required
within 12" of each joiner.

Cross (X)

Straight (S)

Tee (T)

1

4 9⁄32

X-Style — G-1500X, G-1870X and G-3000X
Cat. No.

For Use with Channel No.

Cast Aluminum
G 1500 X
G-1870X
G-3000X

B-900 & G-975
B-901 & G-965
B-902 & G-955

Wt. lbs./C

44
51
79

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Channel Joiners for Lay-In Wiring

4 9⁄32

Galv-Krom ® finish.

1

T-Style — G-1501T, G-1871T and G-3001T
Cat. No.

For Use with Channel No.

Cast Aluminum
G 1501 T
G-1871T
G-3001T

B-900 & G-975
B-901 & G-965
B-902 & G-955

4 9⁄32

Wt. lbs./C

34
45
66

2 49⁄64

Galv-Krom ® finish.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-69

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Kindorf Raceway System
Fittings for 11⁄2" x 11⁄2"
Channel Systems
®

The Kindorf® Channel system serves both as a raceway for electrical
conductors and a support system for the electrical outlets or tap-offs.
Kindorf® is a complete wiring and support system with fittings and
accessories for the design and installation of your electrical system.
A full line of direction change junction boxes are provided for use
with the Kindorf® raceway system. These are made up of a standard
Steel City® octagon box, box cover and attachment fittings. Assemblies
as shown are available complete, or members can be purchased
separately to make up a junction.

Item

Quantity

The assembly consists of the following components:
Octagon Box
1
Box Cover
1
Locknuts
1, 2, 3, or 4 (as required)
Nipples
1, 2, 3, or 4 (as required)
End Caps
1, 2, 3, or 4 (as required)

Junction Boxes for 11⁄2" x 11⁄2" Raceway Channels —
Galv-Krom® Finish
When purchased as an assembly, the octagon box and cover are
Galv-Krom® finish to match the channel and end cap and all parts
are factory fabricated.

L-Style — G-1502L, G-1872L and G-3002L
Cat. No.
Cast Aluminum
G 1502 L
G-1872L
G-3002L

For Use with Channel No.

Wt. lbs./C

B-900 & G-975
B-901 & G-965
B-902 & G-955

25
32
51

2 49⁄64

1

2 49⁄64

Galv-Krom ® finish.

S-Style — G-1503S, G-1873S and G-3003S
Cat. No.

For Use with Channel No.

Wt. lbs./C

Steel
G 1503 S
G-1873S
G-3003S

B-900 & G-975
B-901 & G-965
B-902 & G-955

21
25
36

11⁄8

Galv-Krom ® finish.
5

B-70

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
Complete with cover, locknuts, nipples and end caps. Type “E” deadend junction box for raceway channel. Accepts standard devices and
covers for 4" octagon outlet boxes.

41⁄8

6 5⁄8
113⁄16

G 2000
Type “E” 100 lbs./C

G 2001
Type “C” 121 lbs./C

13⁄4
2 ⁄16
119⁄32
3

Cat. No.
G 2000

Description

Wt. lbs./C

Galv-Krom® Finish

123

G-2001 Junction Box

G 2003
Type “T” 140 lbs./C

G 2002
Type “L” 90°

Complete with cover, locknuts, nipples and end caps. Type “C” straightthrough junction box for two raceway channels. Accepts standard devices
and covers for 4" octagon outlet boxes.
113⁄16

119⁄32

Cat. No.
G 2001
G 2004
Type “X” 150 lbs./C

G-2001
Junction Box with 5402-LR
outlet box cover and field
mounted duplex receptacle.

13⁄4

17⁄8

2 3⁄16

Description

Wt. lbs./C

Galv-Krom® Finish

147

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

G-2000 Junction Box

Raceway Junction Boxes

G-2002 Junction Box
Complete with cover, locknuts, nipples and end caps. Type “L” 90° junction
box for two raceway channels. Accepts standard devices and covers for
4" octagon outlet boxes.
6 5⁄8
113⁄16
13⁄4
2 3⁄16
119⁄32

G-1007
36 lbs./C

G-1033
For 1⁄ 2" or 3⁄ 4" conduit feed
from outlet box 35 lbs./C

Cat. No.
G 2002

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Description

Wt. lbs./C

Galv-Krom® Finish

120

B-71

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Surface Raceway and Lighting Support Systems
G-2003 Junction Box

G-2006 Junction Box

Complete with cover, locknuts, nipples and end caps. Type “T” junction
box for three raceway channels. Accepts standard devices and covers
for 4" octagon outlet boxes.

113⁄16

2 3⁄16
119⁄32

Cat. No.

Description

G 2003

Galv-Krom® Finish

13⁄4

7 1⁄8

13⁄4

3 5⁄8

Wt. lbs./C

140

G-2004 Junction Box

Cat. No.

Description

G2006

Galv-Krom® Finish

Wt. lbs./C

225

G-2007 Junction Box

Complete with cover, locknuts, nipples and end caps. Type “X” junction
box for four raceway channels. Accepts standard devices and covers
for 4" octagon outlet boxes.

113⁄16

119⁄32

Cat. No.

Description

G 2004

Galv-Krom® Finish

2 3⁄16

13⁄4

7 1⁄8

13⁄4

3 5⁄8

Wt. lbs./C

150

G-2005 Junction Box

Cat. No.

Description

G2007

Galv-Krom® Finish

Wt. lbs./C

261

G-2008 Junction Box

19⁄16
411⁄16
21⁄8
411⁄16

B-72

Cat. No.

Description

G2005

Galv-Krom® Finish

Wt. lbs./C

189
United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.

Description

G2008

Galv-Krom® Finish

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Wt. lbs./C

290

“Threads” are an integral part of erector systems because nearly
everything hangs by or is secured by threaded fasteners. Kindorf®
threaded hardware includes continuous rolled-thread hanger rod,
and special and standard screws and nuts designed with the
necessary holding power to serve the requirements of framing
and hanging installations.

Continuous Thread — Galv-Krom

®

Cat. No.
H104 1/4X6
H104 1/4X10
H104 1/4X12
H104 3/8X6
H104 3/8X10
H104 3/8X12
H104 1/2X6
H104 1/2X10
H104 1/2X12
H104 5/8X6
H104 5/8X10
H104 5/8X12

It is vital that each thread be fully protected against rust and corrosion
because they are usually exposed to corrosive atmospheres. Kindorf®
threaded hardware and accessories are completely protected by the
same Galv-Krom® finish that protects Kindorf® channel and fittings.
Kindorf® extra-quality threads are always:

•	 Free-running — clean, uniform
•	 Corrosion resistant — no paint required
•	 Burr-free — smooth finish

Wt./lbs.
per 100 pcs.

Size

⁄4"–20

1

⁄8"–16

3

⁄2"–13

1

⁄8"–11

5

73
124
148
172
293
348
313
530
648
510
850
1,020

Suffix indicates rod size and length.

Trouble-free threaded hardware is an investment in fast installation and low
maintenance. Free-running threads are a time saving asset on every job —
saving fingers and tempers, and eliminating delays that result when threads
must be specially treated before use. Threaded rod is packed in tubes to
prevent damage during shipment. Kindorf® threaded hardware is produced
from high-tensile strength carbon steel with Unified National Coarse
(U.N.C.) threads. Galv-Krom® finish is standard.

H104-EG Hanger Rod,
Continuous Thread — SilverGalv

®

Cat. No.

Wt./lbs.
per 100 pcs.

Size

H104 1/4X6-EG
H104 1/4X10-EG
H104 1/4X12-EG
H104 3/8X6-EG
H104 3/8X10-EG
H104 3/8X12-EG
H104 1/2X6-EG
H104 1/2X10-EG
H104 1/2X12-EG
H104 5/8X6-EG
H104 5/8X10-EG
H104 5/8X12-EG

⁄4"–20

1

⁄8"–16

3

⁄2"–13

1

⁄8"–11

5

73
124
148
172
293
348
313
530
648
510
850
1,020

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Hardware and Threaded Components
Fast Installation
and Low Maintenance
H104 Hanger Rod,

Suffix indicates rod size and length.

National Coarse Thread
Size
(In.)

Threads
per inch

Lbs./
100 ft.

Design Load
lbs.

⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1

20
16
13
11
10
9
8

12.5
29.0
53.5
85.0
123.0
130.0
214.0

150
610
1,130
1,810
2,710
3,770
4,960

1

H-193 Hanger Rod supports conduit from G-962-D hanger.
ASTM Class 2.

3

Grade ASTM A-510.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-73

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Hardware and Threaded Components
H115 U-Bolts

H119 Steel Rod Coupling
For coupling lengths of H-193 hanger rod. Right-hand threaded.
Threads tapered to lock rods in place.

“U” bolt to support,
anchor or guide pipe
lines. Sizes through
4" are furnished with
one hex nut per leg
in Galv-Krom®. H-286
sizes 5" and above are
furnished with two hex
nuts per leg in black.

B

A

C
B
A

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
cat. no.

and Pipe Size

dimensions (in.)

rec. max.
Load (lbs.)

a

b

1,500
2,000
2,500
2,500
2,500
3,300
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000
4,000

23⁄4
31⁄16
35⁄16
31⁄2
33⁄4
411⁄16
51⁄8
511⁄16
63⁄16
615⁄16
85⁄32
93⁄4
113⁄4

13⁄4
13⁄4
17⁄8
13⁄4
13⁄4
21⁄16
21⁄16
2
2
21⁄4
21⁄4
25⁄8
25⁄8

H115 1/2
H115 3/4
H115 1
H115 1 1/4
H115 1 1/2
H115 2
H115 2 1/2
H115 3
H115 3 1/2
H115 4
H115 5
H115 6
H115 8

c

wt. in
lbs./C

⁄16
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
5
⁄8

13
15
16
17
18
32
34
38
40
46
128
239
283

5
5

Threads

a

b

⁄4–20
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
5
⁄8–11

7
⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄4
17⁄8

⁄8
⁄2
5
⁄8
13
⁄16

H119 1/4
H119 3/8
H119 1/2
H119 5/8

1

3

load rating wt.
(lbs.)
lbs./C

240
610
1,130
1,810

3

1

2
4
5
10

Galv-Krom ® finish.

E120, E130 Eyelet with 1⁄2" or 3⁄8" Stud
For bolting to a supporting member to furnish
suspension for rope, chain or cable.

A

B

Complies with Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E and MSS SP-69 Type 24.

H-272 Swivel Eye

C

D

•	 H-272 swivel eye has 3⁄8" or 1⁄2" tapped hole 	
for hanger rod applications

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
E120 3/8
E130 1/2
D

a

b

c

⁄8–16
⁄2–13

13⁄8
11⁄2

13⁄4
2

3
1

d

load rating
(LBS.)

wt.
lbs./C

⁄2
⁄4

1,000
1,800

23
28

1

3

Safety factor of 3.

B

Galv-Krom ® finish.

E

H-120 Saddle-Type Washer
A
C

dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
H-272 3/8
H-272 1/2

a

⁄8–16
⁄2–13

3
1

b

c

d

2 ⁄4 1 ⁄2 1 ⁄16
23⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄16
3

1

3

e

⁄8
⁄8

7
7

•	 For rigid attachment of rod to channel
•	 For use with either 3⁄8" or 1⁄2" hanger rod
load rating
(LBS.)

wt.
lbs./C

2,000
2,000

19
19

Cat. No.

wt. lbs./C

H-120

7

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

Safety factor of 3.

B-74

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Hardware and Threaded Components
Handle Retrofit Trapeze
Applications with Ease!

Easily installs above
existing trapeze.

Trap-Eze Connector
™

The innovative Kindorf® Trap-Eze™ Connector changes a time-consuming
retrofit trapeze application into a streamlined process. Using a Kindorf®
Trapnut® Strut Fastener, the new Trap-Eze™ Connector can be easily
installed above or to the side of an existing assembly, eliminating the need
to disassemble and reassemble the trapeze. It is designed for use with
shorter strut lengths that can vary in length by as much as an inch,
so the strut can be rough cut versus labor-intense precision cuts.

•	 Easily installs above or to the side of an existing 	
assembly, eliminating the need to disassemble 	
and reassemble the trapeze
Can be used to extend
existing trapeze.

•	 Connectors can be reused upon disassembly of a trapeze
•	 Designed for either 3⁄8" and 1⁄2" threaded rod
•	 Designed for use with the innovative Kindorf® Trapnut® 	
Strut Fastener, which can take up to 43% less time than
standard nuts and washers on retrofit trapeze applications

Designed for use with
the innovative Kindorf ®
Trapnut ® Strut Fastener.

•	 View window provides safety zone for strut length

cat. no.

Description

View window provides strut
length safety zone for rough
cuts versus precision cuts.

std. Ctn.

For 11⁄2" Kindorf ® Channels
B998
Trap-Eze™ End Connector Gold-Galv
B999
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector Gold-Galv
B998EG
Trap-Eze™ End Connector EG
B999EG
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector EG
For 15⁄8" Strut Channels
AB221
Trap-Eze™ End Connector Gold-Galv
AB222
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector Gold-Galv
AB221EG
Trap-Eze™ End Connector EG
AB222EG
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector EG

20
10
20
10
20
10
20
10

Unique safety slot maintains
bracket position on threaded rod
and prevents disengagement of
the trapeze system.

Trapnut Strut Fastener
®

H 122 3/8
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener Galv-Krom ®

H 122 3/8 EG
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener SilverGalv ®

www.tnb.com

Cat. No.

Description

H 122 1/4
H 122 3/8
H 122 1/2
H 122 1/4 EG
H 122 3/8 EG
H 122 1/2 EG
H 122 1/4 SS6
H 122 3/8 SS6
H 122 1/2 SS6

1

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄4" Galv-Krom®
⁄8" Galv-Krom®
1
⁄2" Galv-Krom®
1
⁄4" SilverGalv®
3
⁄8" SilverGalv®
1
⁄2" SilverGalv®
1
⁄4" Type 316 Stainless Steel
3
⁄8" Type 316 Stainless Steel
1
⁄2" Type 316 Stainless Steel

3

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

size (In.)

⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1

3

design
Load Lbs. std. Ctn.

150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

B-75

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Hardware and Threaded Components
E122 Swivel Joint

H-134-S Spacer Assembly

Permits hanger rod to swing freely in any direction.

Used for attaching fixture to channel with a uniform
1" clearance between fixture and supporting
channel. Assembly includes a 1" spacer, a 5⁄8"–
18 x 11⁄2" bolt and jam nut, all galvanized.

A

B
C
D

Cat. No.

Wt.
lbs./C

H-134-S

21

Approved for G.S.A. installations.
Dimensions (in.)
A

B

C

Load Rating

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄8–16
⁄2–13

13⁄8
11⁄2

23⁄4
3

1,000
1,800

28
48

Cat. No.
E122 3/8
E122 1/2

3
1

E142 Hex Head Cap Screw —
Less Nut

Safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

E131 Swivel Joint with Stud
Same as H-260 but with a 3⁄8" or 1⁄2" stud on one end.

A
1

B
C
B

Dimensions (in.)
A

B

C

Load Rating

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄8–16
⁄2–13

13⁄8
11⁄2

23⁄4
3

1,000
1,800

25
52

Cat. No.
E131 3/8
E131 1/2

3
1

Sizes
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄2–13 x 3⁄4
⁄2–13 x 1
1
⁄2–13 x 1
1
⁄2–13 x 11⁄4
1
⁄2–13 x 11⁄2
1
⁄2–13 x 13⁄4
1
⁄2–13 x 2
1
⁄2–13 x 21⁄4
1
⁄2–13 x 21⁄2
1
⁄2–13 x 3
1
⁄2–13 x 4
3
⁄8–16 x 3⁄4
3
⁄8–16 x 1
3
⁄8–13 x 161⁄64
3
⁄8–16 x 11⁄2
3
⁄8–16 x 13⁄4
3
⁄8–16 x 21⁄4
3
⁄8–16 x 21⁄4
1
⁄4 x 3⁄4
1
⁄4 x 1
1
⁄4 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4 x 11⁄2

7.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
10.0
13.0
14.0
16.0
16.0
20.0
25.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
7.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.0

Cat. No.

Safety factor of 3.
Galv-Krom ® finish.

E142 1/2 15/16
E142 1/2 15/16
E142 1/2 15/16
E142 1/2 1 1/4
E142 1/2 1 1/2
E142 1/2 2
E142 1/2 2
E142 1/2 2 1/4
E142 1/2 2 1/2
E142 1/2 3
E142 1/2 4
E142 3/8 3/4
E142 3/8 1
E142 3/8 1 1/4
E142 3/8 1 1/2
E142 3/8 2 1/4
E142 3/8 2 1/4
E142 3/8 2 1/4
E142 1/4 1
E142 1/4 1
E142 1/4 1 1/4
E142 1/4 1 1/2

1

1

Standard finish: Galv-Krom® unless otherwise specified.

B-76

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Hardware and Threaded Components
AB241 Square Washer

Cat. No.
E145 1/4
E145 5/16
E145 3/8
E145 1/2
E145 3/8

Sizes
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4–20
⁄16–18
3
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
5
⁄8–11

1.2
2.0
3.2
5.0
9.0

1

5

Dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
AB241 1/4
AB241 5/16
AB241 3/8
AB241 1/2
AB241 5/8
AB241 3/4
AB241 7/8

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

E146 Square Nut

Size

Thickness

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8

⁄8
⁄8
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4

8.10
8.00
11.50
14.36
13.50
12.50
13.00

1

1

1

5

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

Cat. No.

Sizes
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

Located Square Washers

E146 1/4
E146 5/16
E146 3/8
E146 1/2
E146 5/8

⁄4–20
⁄16–18
3
⁄8–16
1
⁄2–13
5
⁄8–11

1.00
2.40
2.37
6.00
11.00

Cat. No.

1

5

AB-241L-1/4
AB-241L-5/16
AB-241L-3/8
AB-241L-1/2
AB-241L-5/8

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

54, E149 Round Head Machine
Screw — Less Nut
⁄4–20 x 1⁄2
⁄4–20 x 3⁄4
1
⁄4–20 x 11⁄4
1
⁄4–20 x 2
3
⁄8–16 x 3⁄4

1.00
1.25
1.76
2.54
3.45

1

Std.
Ctn.

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

100
100
100
100
100

1

5

19⁄16

Add “EG” suffix for SilverGalv ®.

Wt.
lbs./C

1

Bolt Size
(In.)

GoldGalv ® is standard finish.

Sizes
(in.)

Cat. No.
54 571P
54-572-P
54-574
54-576
E149 3/8 1 1/4

11⁄2

H-550 Swivel Beam Clamp
One-piece malleable-iron casting. Attaches
to beam flanges up to 3⁄4" thickness.

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

E145 Hex Nut

E147 Flat Steel Washer
Cat. No.
E147 1/4
E147 5/16
E147 3/8
E147 1/2
E147 5/8
E147 3/4

Sizes
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

.67
1.20
2.00
3.85
7.70
9.00

1

5

360

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

E148 Lock Washer
Cat. No.

Sizes
(in.)

Wt.
lbs./C

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

.259
.550
.630
1.436
2.587
4.293

E148 1/4
E148 5/16
E148 3/8
E148 1/2
E148 5/8
E148 3/4

1

5

Cat. No.

Description

H-550

Max. load rating 500 lbs. with a safety factor of 3.

Wt.
lbs./C

33

Galv-Krom ® finish.

Standard finish: Galv-Krom ® unless otherwise specified.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-77

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Cable and Mounting Systems
Fast, Precise Installation Method.
Kindorf J-800 System
®

Designed originally to eliminate costly and time-consuming methods of installing
cables aboard ships, the Kindorf® J-800 series of straps, hangers and brackets has
found ever-widening applications by mechanical and electrical contractors in general
construction. The J-800 system has proven to be a work-saver when used to install
tubing or cable. Tubing and cable of various construction and fabrication can be
racked efficiently with built-in provisions for making additions or changes at a later
date. They can be secured in all combinations and sequences of sizes. A variety of
hangers and brackets secures multiple runs as well as single branch take-offs.

Shipboard Cables

Flexible Tubing

Armored Cable
(Take-off from Cable Tray)

Installation of J-800 straps on Kindorf® supports is simple, requiring only a
screwdriver or small wrench. Each run is gripped individually on a hanger and all
runs are secured by tightening a single locking device. Loosening the locking device
permits fast access to the runs, making it easy to add, remove or adjust them
at any time.
J-800 installations have withstood the severe conditions of service at sea for many
years. In countless installations, they have proven their ability to withstand the effects
of salt air, moisture, shock and vibration.
J-800 racking is well known for its fast, yet precise, installation method. A proven
method that results in labor economy and neat, workman-like installation.

Installation Steps
1

Insert pin of strap in slot of hanger.

4

Apply second cable strap, hooking strap
tongue under pin of first strap.

B-78

Copper Tubing

2

3

Close Kindorf® cable strap down over cable.

5

6

Apply locking device and tighten
screw moderately.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Push strap and cable to end of hanger slot
so tongue of strap hooks below slot.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Drive locking device tight against cable strap.
Tighten locking device screw.

www.tnb.com

11⁄32 Hole

One J-800 strap of the proper diameter is used to secure each
run. All straps have a 11⁄4" pin. In multiple runs the pin is simply
twist inserted into the supporting Kindorf® hanger, bracket or
channel slot then the strap is closed over the cable or tube
to lock the strap tongue under the pin of the adjacent strap.

⁄8

5

The same procedure is used for single runs, except the strap
tongue is secured directly to the hanger. When all multiple
runs have been assembled, they are secured by a single
locking device.

11⁄4

A

J-800 straps can be installed along the continuous slot of any
Kindorf® channel. This increases their versatility and extends
their possible applications.

D
10 ga. steel pin

Straps are steel and have
Galv-Krom ® finish.

Cat. No.

Strap
Size

A
Gauge

Dimensions (in.)
D max.

Wt.
lbs./C

Use In
New Kindorf®
Channel

Use In
Old Kindorf®
Channel

Use In
J Series
Mountings

J 800 8
J-800-10
J-800-12
J-800-14
J-800-16
J-800-18
J-800-20
J-800-22
J-800-24
J-800-26
J-800-28
J-800-30
J-800-32
J-800-34
J-800-36
J-800-38
J-800-40
J-800-42
J-800-44
J-800-46
J-800-48
J-800-50
J-800-52
J-800-54
J-800-56
J-800-58
J-800-60
J-800-62
J-800-64
J-800-68
J-800-72
J-800-76
J-800-80
J-800-84

8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
68
72
76
80
84

18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16

.2500
.3124
.3750
.4375
.5000
.5625
.6250
.6875
.7500
.8125
.8750
.9375
1.0000
1.0625
1.1250
1.1875
1.2500
1.3125
1.3750
1.4375
1.5000
1.5625
1.6250
1.6875
1.7500
1.8125
1.8750
1.9375
2.0000
2.1250
2.2500
2.3750
2.5000
2.6250

2.50
2.60
2.75
2.90
2.75
2.90
3.35
3.50
3.65
3.80
3.95
4.10
4.25
4.40
4.55
4.70
4.85
5.00
5.15
5.30
5.45
6.38
6.55
6.73
6.90
7.08
7.25
7.43
7.6
7.95
8.30
8.65
9.00
9.35

—
—
.250
.313
.375
.438
.500
.563
.625
.688
.750
.813
.875
.938
1.000
1.063
1.125
1.188
1.250
1.313
1.375
1.438
1.500
1.563
1.625
1.688
1.750
1.813
1.875
1.938
2.000
2.125
2.250
2.375

.250
.313
.375
.438
.500
.563
.625
.688
.750
.813
.875
.938
1.000
1.063
1.125
1.188
1.250
1.313
1.375
1.438
1.500
1.563
1.625
1.688
1.750
1.813
1.875
1.938
2.000
2.063
2.250
2.375
2.500
2.625

.250
.313
.375
.438
.500
.563
.625
.688
.750
.813
.875
.938
1.000
1.063
1.125
1.188
1.250
1.313
1.375
1.438
1.500
1.563
1.625
1.688
1.750
1.813
1.875
1.938
2.000
2.063
2.250
2.375
2.500
2.625

& Size

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Cable and Mounting Systems
J-800 Interlocking Straps

Separate strap sizes rack 1⁄4" through 2 5⁄8" dia. rounds in 1⁄16" increments.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-79

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Cable and Mounting Systems
J-850 Locking Device

J-852 Locking Device

Secures single or multiple interlocked assemblies on bar hangers,
mounting brackets and continuous slot channel. For installations
not subject to severe shock.

Secures single or multiple interlocked assemblies on bar hangers,
mounting brackets and continuous slot channels. Designed for use
with B-900 Kindorf channels.

1

⁄4

3

⁄8

1

⁄16

17⁄8

3

12 ga.

Description

J 852

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 11 lbs./C.

J-855 Locking Device — Heavy-Duty

Lock Washer

12 ga.

Cat. No.

11⁄4

For use with channel-type hangers in installations subject to extreme shock.

Cat. No.

Description

J 850

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 11 lbs./C.

Includes 1⁄4" screw, nut and lock washer.

J-851 Locking Device
Secures single or multiple interlocked assemblies on bar hangers,
mounting brackets and continuous slot channels. Similar to J-850
except stud replaces screw for easier assembly.

1
⁄4

3

11⁄4

159⁄64

⁄16 x 1 Bolt, Nut and Washer

5

12 ga.

⁄16

3

⁄16

3

12 ga.

Cat. No.

Description

Cat. No.

Description

J 851

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 11 lbs./C.

J 855

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 11 lbs./C.

Includes ⁄4" screw, nut and lock washer.

Includes ⁄16" bolt, nut and washer.
5

1

B-80

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Cable and Mounting Systems
U-style channel, 12-ga. steel, with Galv-Krom® finish,
3
⁄8" turned edge. Three sizes.
L
L minus I
⁄32 19⁄32

21

⁄4

3

⁄64 Hole

55

13⁄4
⁄8

3

Cat. No.

Dimensions L (in.)

wt. lbs./C

J 860 6
J-860-9
J-860-12

6
9
12

42
48
59

Cat. No.

Dimensions L (in.)

wt. lbs./C

J 861 10
J-861-12
J-861-14
J-861-15
J-861-16
J-861-18

10
12
14
15
16
18

64
73
86
89
96
100

Cat. No.

Dimensions L (in.)

wt. lbs./C

J 863 6
J-863-9
J-863-12
J-863-15
J-863-18

6
9
12
15
18

42
57
73
85
106

J-861 Mounting Brackets
U-style channel, 12-ga. steel, with Galv-Krom® finish,
5
⁄8" turned edge. Six sizes.

L
L minus I
⁄32 19⁄32

21

⁄64 Hole

55

⁄4

3

2
⁄8

5

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

J-860 Mounting Brackets

J-863 Mounting Brackets
Straight, heavy-duty channel. 12-ga. steel, with Galv-Krom®
finish. Five sizes.

L

⁄8

5

⁄8

5

L minus I

⁄32

21

19⁄32

⁄8

5

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-81

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Cable and Mounting Systems
J-865 Bar Hanger
Supports one cable or tube up to 11⁄16" O.D. Only one
stud or screw necessary for mounting.
Dia Hole.

⁄64

3

11⁄4

⁄32

11

21⁄4

⁄2

1

12 ga.

CAT. No.

Description

J 865

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 6.7 lbs./C.

CAT. No.

Description

J 866

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 9 lbs./C.

J-866 Bar Hanger
Supports one large or two small cables or tubes
up to a total of 15⁄16" O.D.

⁄32

11

Dia Hole.

⁄32

21

⁄32 11⁄4

11

⁄32

16

⁄4

3

⁄32

16

31⁄2
⁄2

1

12 ga.

J-867 Bar Hanger
•	 Cable or tube assembly locks in place with one short
1
⁄4" screw and nut
•	 Use two studs, welding pads or bolts to mount
Dia Hole.

⁄8

3

⁄32

⁄64

29

11⁄4

⁄64

11

⁄32

31

⁄64

61

3

Dimensions (in.)

⁄16

Cat. No.

A

B

Wt.
lbs./C

J 867 1
J-867-2
J-867-3

51⁄8
71⁄8
91⁄8

27⁄8
47⁄8
67⁄8

15
20
27

9

A

B
⁄8

⁄8

5

5

Steel, Galv-Krom ® finish.

⁄8

5

B-82

12
ga.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Cable and Mounting Systems
Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

J-868 Bar Hanger
Supports one cable or tube up to 11⁄16" O.D. Strap fastens
to hanger by short machine screw and nut.

1
⁄32 1 ⁄4

⁄64

3

11

⁄16

9

⁄8

3

12 ga.
⁄8

5

CAT. No.

Description

J 868

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 8.3 lbs./C.

Use one stud or weld to mount.

21⁄4

J-869 Bar Hanger
•	 Supports one large or two small cables or tubes
up to a total of 15⁄16" O.D.
•	 Both ends of hanger have nut-engaging slot

1
⁄32 1 ⁄4

⁄64

3

11

⁄4

⁄4

3

3

3 3⁄8
⁄8

3

CAT. No.

Description

J 869

Steel, Galv-Krom® Finish, 11.2 lbs./C.

⁄8

5

12 ga.

J-870 Bar Hanger
•	 Supports cable or tube assembly, locked in place
with one short 1⁄4" screw and nut
•	 Mount by welding

⁄64

29

⁄32

11

11⁄4

Dimensions (in.)

Cat. No.
⁄2

1

1

B

A

www.tnb.com

A

B

Wt.
lbs./C

51⁄8
71⁄8
91⁄8

37⁄16
57⁄16
77⁄16

22.5
28.0
33.3

& Size

⁄16

9

J 870 1
J-870-2
J-870-3
12 ga.

Steel, Galv-Krom ® finish.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-83

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Cable and Mounting Systems
J-864 Slotted Channel

Angle Connector Provides
“On-the-Job” Versatility
for Cable Racking and Mounting.

10' length slotted channel provides “cut to length”
versatility. For use with standard marine steel banding.
Uniformly spaced slot size 13⁄32" x 3⁄4" spaced on 3⁄4"
centers. Cut anywhere along entire length.

J-844 Channel
Angle Connector
Integral pilot, prevent twist

Slotted Channel Installation Applications

⁄64 Dia. Hole

55

H-193-3/8
⁄8" Dia. Kindorf ®
Threaded Steel
Hanger Rod

15⁄16

3

15⁄8
⁄16

3

⁄64 Dia. Hole

55

Standard
Steel Band

J-844
J-844

Kindorf ® J-864 Channel Support field-cut to length required

⁄4

3

J-844

⁄4

3

155⁄64

CAT. No.

Description

Cat. No.

J 844

Galv-Krom® Finish

Mount, Band or Support at any Slot
J 864
10' Length 3⁄4" Deep Kindorf® Slotted Channel

Description

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

11⁄2

⁄4

3

Wt. lbs./C

Galv-Krom ® finish.

B-84

⁄4

3

⁄8

7

www.tnb.com

65

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems

Create the support framing you need.
Right Angle is manufactured from commercial-quality steel in three different sizes. The small
sizes are 14-ga. steel, the larger size is 12-ga. steel. With this offering, an endless variety of
metal framing requirements can be met, from lightweight supporting needs to larger shelving
needs such as inventory storage.
One of the legs on all sizes is 15⁄8" wide, while the other is either 15⁄8", 23⁄8" or 31⁄8" long.
Depending on the frame requirements, a single size can be utilized throughout, or the sizes
can be interchanged to get the most efficient usage from the material.
This book will serve as a guide to plan and build your structure.

Installation time is reduced — inventory space is minimal.
Scribe marks are placed every 3⁄4" which saves planning, layout and cutting time and ensures
accuracy. The exclusive slot and hole pattern, repeated every 3", is scientifically designed for
ease of assembly and rigidity. No welding is necessary, no holes to drill. A 9⁄16" wrench is the
only tool required for assembly. The proper nuts and bolts are included with the material to ensure fast and easy erection.
Right Angle Metal Framing is packaged in 10' and 12' lengths to minimize cut offs and ensure maximum use of material.
120' (10 x 12' lengths) of Right Angle takes up the same amount of space as one 2 x 4. A standard package includes five pieces to a bundle,
therefore handling and storage space are significantly reduced.
The importance of cutting Right Angle easily, quickly and accurately is the key to time saving assembly. The Steel City® Portable Cutter provides
these advantages and makes layout and erection of any structure a “light-work” job.

Kindorf Right Angle comes standard with our Galv-Krom
Finish, which ensures a long-lasting, durable installation.
®

®

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

With Right Angle, you get Flexibility —
Simplicity — Economy!

The Galv-Krom® finish is a two-part finishing process that protects the entire system, including all nuts
and bolts. The first part of the finish is electro-galvanized zinc that covers the bare steel. The second part
is a gold zinc dichromate that is applied over the zinc base.
Three aspects of the Galv-Krom® process are worthy of note:
1. Zinc Coating — In the first
part of the Galv-Krom® process,
a .5 mil coating of zinc is placed
on the bare steel. This ensures
the sacrificial quality of any
galvanizing and becomes a
working finish. The zinc literally
sacrifices itself over bare steel
and protects cut edges or
scratches which may occur
during construction.

2. Electrogalvanizing —
Because the zinc is applied
through a temperature-controlled
electrolytic process, a cohesive
bond with the steel is assured.
This prohibits chipping or peeling.
It also distributes the zinc
evenly so all components —
including threads — can be
equally protected.

Galv-Krom® is in compliance with
ASTM B633-78 Type II coating.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

3. Gold Trivalent Chromium
Barrier — The second part of
the Galv-Krom® finish is a gold
trivalent chromium that is applied
over the zinc base. This second
layer of plating forms a nonporous barrier which protects
the underlying zinc and adds
additional resistance to corrosion.
In addition, the gold trivalent
chromium covering provides
an excellent base if the surface
is to be painted.

B-85

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems
Type RA-160 Slotted Angle
•	15⁄8" x 15⁄8" x .080" (14 gauge)
•	 Designed for light-duty applications where extra
strength is not a requirement
•	 Ideal material for light racking and shelving
•	 Packaged in five 10-ft. or 12-ft. lengths complete
with thirty-six 3⁄8" x 5⁄8" long hex head bolts and nuts

7

15⁄8"

⁄8"

•	 Standard package 10' lengths: 39 lbs., 12' lengths: 48 lbs.
7

Cat. No.
RA-160-10
RA-160-12

Length

Ft. per Pkg.

Wt. per 100 Ft.

10 ft.
12 ft.

50
60

75 lbs.
75 lbs.

15⁄8"

⁄4" 3⁄4"

3

3"
⁄8"

Type RA-225 — For Heavy-Duty
•	23⁄8" x 15⁄8" x .080" (14 gauge)
•	 Wide range versatility for nearly every type of framing
•	 Well suited for electrical applications
•	 Slot-and-hole pattern provides ready-made anchoring points
for panel-board framing and fixtures of all kinds
•	 Packaged in five 10-ft. or 12-ft. lengths complete
with thirty-six 3⁄8" x 5⁄8" long hex head bolts and nuts

⁄4

3

•	 Standard package 10' lengths: 48 lbs., 12' lengths: 56 lbs.

1

2 3⁄8"

⁄8
⁄4

⁄4

3

3

Cat. No.
RA-225-10
RA-225-12

Length

Ft. per Pkg.

Wt. per 100 Ft.

10 ft.
12 ft.

50
60

93 lbs.
93 lbs.

3

15⁄8"

⁄8

7

Type RA-300 — For Extra Heavy-Duty
•	31⁄8" x 15⁄8" x .104" (12 gauge)
•	 Used where heavy loads are involved
•	 Racks and shelving for heavy material and large
structures such as ramps and balconies are typical uses
•	 Packaged in five 10-ft. or 12-ft. lengths complete
with thirty-six 3⁄8" x 3⁄4" long hex head bolts and nuts

3

•	 Standard package 10' lengths: 72 lbs., 12' lengths: 84 lbs.

3

⁄4

3 1⁄8

⁄4

⁄8

7

3

Cat. No.
RA 300 10
RA-300-12

B-86

Length

Ft. per Pkg.

Wt. per 100 Ft.

10 ft.
12 ft.

50
60

135 lbs.
135 lbs.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

⁄4

3

⁄4

3

1 5⁄8

⁄8

7

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems
•	 100 sets per package
•	 No. RA-BN-5/8, 3⁄8"–16 x 5⁄8"
long for RA-160 and RA-225
•	 No. RA-BN-3/4, ⁄8"–16 x ⁄4"
long for RA-300
3

3

Slot and Hole Pattern
⁄8"–16 x 5⁄8"

3

•	A 9⁄16" wrench is only tool
needed for assembly
Cat. No.
RA BN 5/8
RA BN 3/4

A 9⁄16" wrench is
only tool needed
for assembly.

⁄8"–16 x 3⁄4"

3

Std. ctn.

Weight per 100 Sets

100
100

4 lbs., 3⁄8"–16 x 5⁄8"
5 lbs., 3⁄8"–16 x 3⁄4"

The Right Angle hole pattern is simple and flexible. It is repeated every
3" along the entire length of the Right Angle. An extended line marks the
3" increments (vertical slots), while shorter lines mark every 3⁄4" increment.
With this hole pattern, nesting, triangulation, cross beams and many
additional combinations are possible.

Gusset Plate
• 	Three hole connector for
extra rigid angle assembly
• 	For use with all three types
of right angle

Triangulation

Cross Beams

• 	Galvanized steel
For proper assembly, insert plate between the angle flanges
for 3-bolt connection.
Cat. No.

Std. ctn.

Weight per 100 Sets

25

10

RA GP

Portable Cutter

Nesting

Cleat Sections

• 	Designed for use with all three types
of slotted angle

Cut Off Cleats are small sections of Right Angle used to reinforce joints
or used as feet to support vertical columns. These feet prevent damage
to floor surfaces or can be used to bolt a structure to the floor.

• 	Cuts with single stroke of handle

Additional joints can be made using cut off cleats. Simply butt the cleat
against a column and behind a right side beam, as shown in the illustration.

• 	Produces clean, burr-free cuts

Cat. No.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Helpful Hints to Maximize
Right Angle Erection.

Nuts Serrated — For Self-Locking

Std. ctn.

Weight EACH

1

17

RA C

Rigid and Swivel Casters
•	 Hard rubber composition

Cleat

•	31⁄2" diameter with load rating
of 225 lbs. per wheel
•	 Plate has 13⁄32" diameter holes
for mounting on all three types
of slotted angle

Cat. No.
RA RC
RA SC

RA-RC
Rigid Center

RA-SC
Swivel Caster

Std. ctn.

Weight EACH

2
2

2
3

www.tnb.com

Cleat

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-87

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems
When a beam rests on a ledge of other material (such as a wall) the long flange should extend upward. Right Angle
beams are at their strongest when assembled with the long flange downward. Vertical columns may be in either
direction. Place short flange of vertical column in front for shelving to permit wider opening for handling material.

Variety of Combinations to Meet Needs
Greater strength is obtained by joining sections of Right Angle in various com­binations for beams and columns.
See the load charts on page B-90 for the combination that best suits your need.

Procedure for Laying Out Structure
Measure the Space
Right Angle structures may be built
to the size of the space available.
Measure the space and make
a sketch of the area.

Sketch the Planned Structure
Sketch the structure you plan to build
listing all vital dimensions. Include length,
width and height of all sections so that
load limits can be calculated safely.

12'–0"
3'

"

4'–6

3'
3'

3'

4'–10"
9'–4"
24"

4'

12"
15'–0"

3'

Plan Flange Direction

Plan View

Right Angle beams are at their strongest position with the long flange
downward. Vertical uprights may be in either direction for equal strength.
Be sure to measure the material to be shelved to allow space for
handling. Your sketch will also be used as a cutting and assembly plan.

Assembling the Structure
Follow your plan for cutting sections and for layout. Assemble the structure as a series of frames,
or bays and bolt together as units. Use as many bolts as possible and turn nuts up finger-tight.
Square-up and level the entire structure. Proceed to tighten bolts with wrench, starting with
corners to assure permanent squareness. Use diagonal bracing, if necessary. Add shelves.
Your Right Angle structure is ready for a useful lifetime.

Erect vertical frames into bays.
Bolt bays together.

B-88

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems
How to Determine Weight to Be Supported

Figure the load your structure must bear on each level or shelf. This
is necessary to determine the sections required to carry the load safely.
The load tables will enable you to determine the Right Angle gauge and
section combination needed.

Multiple-bay shelving is typical of many Right Angle weight-bearing
structures. Load tables are your guide to the weights supportable by
RA-160, RA-225 and RA-300. Strengths are increased where needed
by combining sections for beams or columns, and by adding braces.

Load Limit Example for Evenly Distributed Loads

Example for Checking Load Safety

Using the sketch shown and the load tables based on a safety factor of 2.1,
calculate the weight supportable by a structure with two or more shelves.
A 6-ft. high single shelf structure AB will support a load of 5,200 lbs. using
RA-225 Right Angle (4 single uprights x 1,100 lbs. each) from table.
When an additional shelf is framed at C, columns become the same as two
3-ft. uprights, AC and CB, and the total safe load is 10,200 lbs. on columns
CB (4 x 2,550 lbs.), based on a safety factor of 2.1. This load can be
divided between the shelves in any convenient way, so long as the total load
on columns CB does not exceed 10,200 lbs. If shelf loads are unequal, the
heavier load should go on the lower shelf to avoid top-heavy instability.
Use the same method of calculating for three or more shelves
with the load tables as reference.
A

A
3'

6'

C

3'
B

B

This structure is erected as 3 separate bays and bolted together,
using RA-225.

Beam Load Bearing
Load E = 400 lbs. evenly distributed on two 4' beams. Refer to beam load
tables for RA-225: Two 4' beams will support 1,090 lbs. — safe load.
Load F = 600 lbs. on solid shelf evenly distributes weight to two 3' beams.
Refer to beam load tables: Two 3' beams will support 1,560 lbs. —
safe load.
Load G = 800 lbs. on shelf supported by two 3' beams and two 4' beams.
Add the 4 sections: 3 + 3 + 4 + 4 = 14 ft. Divide total load G by 14, i.e.,
800 ÷ 14 = 57 lbs. per ft.
Compute wt. on longest beam — two 4' sections, or 8 ft. Multiply 8' x 57
lbs. per ft. load = 456 lbs. supported by the two 4' beam. Refer to load
tables: Two 4' beams support 1,090 lbs. — safe load. Since the 3' beams
are stronger, they are also safe for the load. Load H, any load on shelf
supported by beams at floor level — considered safe.
The example illustrates methods of figuring loads on three different types
of shelf construction. It is not a typical bay.
It should be remembered that a safe beam load does not assure a safe
structure — column load safety must also be computed.

Load E

400 lbs.

A

Column Load Bearing
Four columns support load equally. Column section AB = b load E, or 100 lbs.
Column section BC = b load F, or 150 lbs., PLUS b load E, 100 lbs. or 250 lbs.

3'
Load F

600 lbs.

B
3'
Load G

800 lbs.

C

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Figure Load Limits

Column section CD = b load G, or 200 lbs. PLUS 150 lbs., b load F, PLUS
100 lbs., b load E, for a total load on section CD of 450 lbs. Load H is at
floor level, does not count.
Assuming a 9' high structure, the 9' column is supported at 3' intervals
by ties for shelving, the 3' column section data is used. Refer to column
load tables: 3 column (vertical) supports 2,550 lbs. — safe for the load.
Figures are for a free-standing, unbraced structure. Common uprights
in two or more bay structures carry a double load.

3'
Load H

1000 lbs.

See page B-90 for load tables.

D
3'

4'
Multiple Bay Shelving

Single Section

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

T-Section

B-89

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Right Angle Slotted Angle Systems
Column Loads
RA 160 — 14 ga. x 15⁄8" x 15⁄8"
3'
4'
5'
6'

RA 300 — 12 ga. x 31⁄8" x 15⁄8"

T-Section

Single Section

3,880
3,500
3,000
2,500

1,500
1,200
950
750

T-Section

Single Section

8,000
7,100
6,300
5,550
4,750
4,000
3,200
2,400

3,500
2,900
2,400
1,800
1,300
1,000
—
—

3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
10'

Note: V alues shown are static loads (lbs.) applied vertically to an unbraced column.
Min. safety factor of 2.1. To increase load capacity columns can be reinforced
with side braces cut to size.

KIND

ORF

RA-1

60

Single Section

Broad Channels

RA 225 — 14 ga. x 23⁄8" x 15⁄8"
3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
10'

Beam Loads

T-Section

Single Section

5,550
5,050
4,400
3,850
3,400
3,000
2,650
2,300

2,550
1,900
1,550
1,300
970
—
—
—

KIND

ORF

RA-2

25

Narrow Channel

3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
10'
3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8’
9'
10'
3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
10'

Broad
Channel

Narrow
Channel

Single
Section

2,550
1,780
1,330
1,030
820
590
420
310
4,110
2,870
2,140
1,660
1,330
1,080
890
720
7,570
5,290
3,950
3,060
2,440
1,990
1,650
1,380

1,490
1,040
770
600
470
380
310
230
3,050
2,130
1,580
1,230
980
790
650
540
6,300
4,400
3,280
2,540
2,020
1,650
1,360
1,140

770
530
400
310
240
—
—
—
1,560
1,090
810
630
500
410
330
280
3,220
2,250
1,680
1,300
1,040
840
690
580

Note: V alues shown are for a pair of beams supporting an evenly distributed load (lbs.). For
a concentrated load these values should be halved. Min. safety factor of 1.4. Multiple
angle beams should be bolted every 6 in. with bolts staggered in alternate rows. To
increase load capacity tie angles can be cut to size and bolted between beams.

B-90

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Non-Metallic Channel and Accessories
Channel Simple Beam Loading Table

Kindorf® strut is a complete corrosion-proof system, with a comprehensive
selection of channels and accessories. Cost-efficient, extremely durable,
easy to use, and made of the strongest non-metallic materials available.

Max Uniform
Beam Load

Cat. No.

Kindorf®: Demanding products for demanding environments.

•	 Can’t rust under the
worst of conditions

12 inches
NB 900 10 -P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
18 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
24 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
30 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
36 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
48 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
60 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V
72 inches
NB 900 10 P
NB-900-10-V
NB-900-2A-10-P
NB-900-2A-10-V

•	 Easy to use, cut and drill

•	 Cost effective

•	 Ideal for a wide variety
of applications

•	 Maintenance free

•	 Unsurpassed reliability

NB-900

NB-900-2A

Cat. No.

Description

NB 900 10 P

11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 10'
Single Channel
NB-900-10-V
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 10'
Single Channel
NB-900-2A-10-P 3" x 11⁄2" x 10'
Back-to-Back Channel
NB-900-2A-10-V 3" x 11⁄2" x 10'
Back-to-Back Channel

Material

Color

Lbs.
Wt./100 ft.

Polyester

Gray

55

Vinylester

Beige

55

Polyester

Gray

110

Vinylester

Beige

110

Channel Closure Strip
NG-969-5

lbs.

Def (in.)

lbs.

Def (in.)

Max Column
Load
lbs.

1,430
1,430
4231
4231

.066
.066
.036
.036

723
723
3940
3940

.033
.033
.033
.033

3439
3439
7007
7007

953
953
2,821
2,821

.148
.148
.081
.081

321
321
1751
1751

.050
.050
.050
.050

3136
3136
6501
6501

715
715
2,115
2,115

.264
.264
.143
.143

180
180
985
985

.067
.067
.067
.067

2778
2778
5909
5909

572
572
1,692
1,692

.412
.412
.224
.224

115
115
630
630

.083
.083
.083
.083

2369
2369
5236
5236

476
476
1,410
1,410

.593
.593
.322
.322

80
80
437
437

.100
.100
.100
.100

1,906
1,906
4,482
4,482

357
357
1,057
1,057

1.055
1.055
.573
.573

45
45
246
246

.133
.133
.133
.133

1,091
1,091
2,809
2,809

286
286
846
846

1.648
1.648
.895
.895

28
28
157
157

.167
.167
.167
.167

698
698
1,798
1,798

238
238
705
705

2.373
2.373
1.289
1.289

20
20
109
109

.200
.200
.200
.200

485
485
1,248
1,248

⁄360 Span

1

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channels

Deflection in excess of 3.00 inches; midspan support is recommended.
Table lists the total allowable load for various simple spans based on a minimum
safety factor of 3.

Cat. No.

Description

Material

Color

Lbs.
Wt./100 ft.

NG-969-5

Standard Length 5'

Rigid PVC

Dark Gray

20

www.tnb.com

All beams should be supported in a manner to prevent rotation at supports.
For beams longer than 72 inches, contact manufacturer’s engineering
department. Recommend sealing ends of channel with sealant after cutting.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-91

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Non-Metallic Channel and Accessories
Fittings

Pipe Clamps

4 7⁄8"

•	 Polyester and Vinylester Kindorf®
fittings are suited for use with all
11⁄2" and 15⁄8" channels
•	Kindorf® fittings are manufactured
from 3⁄16" flat material

3 1⁄4"

•	 Consult the Chemical Compatibility
Chart to ensure material will withstand
the specific chemical environment
Conduit/Pipe Style

Cat. No.
NC-105-1/2
NC-105-3/4
NC-105-1
NC-105-1 1/4
NC-105-1 1/2
NC-105-2
NC-105-3
NC-105-4
NC-105-6

pvc
pvc coated recommended
nominal Sch.
Metal
torque
design wt.
in.
80 Rigid
(Typ.)
in lbs.
Load* lbs./100

⁄2
⁄4
1
—
11⁄2
2
3
4
6
1

3

.840 .840
1.050 1.050
1.315 1.315
— —
1.900 1.900
2.375 2.375
3.500 3.500
4.500 4.500
6.625 6.625

.920
1.130
1.395
—
1.980
2.455
3.580
4.580
6.705

5
5
5
—
5
5
20
20
20

100
100
200
—
200
200
300
300
300

4
4
4.8
—
6.4
8
10
10
16.3

* Design load is based on pullout values with a safety factor of 3.
Material: Polyurethane.
Color: Gray.

NB-936-P
NB-936-V

•	 All holes in Kindorf® fittings
are 13⁄32" in diameter

4 7⁄8"

4 7⁄8"

47⁄8"

4 7⁄8"

NB-944
4 ⁄8"
7

3 1⁄4"
NB-947

NB-935-P
NB-935-V

3 1⁄4"

4 7⁄8"

3 1⁄4"

NB-949-P

NB-937-P

Cat. No.
NC-149-1
NC-149-1 1/2
NC-149-2
NC-149-2 1/2
NC-149-3
NC-149-4
NC-149-6
NC-149-8
NC-149-10
NC-149-12
NC-149-14
NC-149-16
NC-149-19

(A)
(B)
(C)
nominal Max Dimension Hanger maximum
wt.
Diameter Pipe OD Height
Rod Size
Load
lbs./100

1
11⁄2
2
2 1⁄2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
19

11⁄2
2
2 5⁄8
3 1⁄4
3 7⁄8
5 1⁄8
7 1⁄8
9 1⁄4
11 3⁄8
13 1⁄2
15 3⁄4
18
21

2 3⁄4
31⁄2
4 3⁄4
5 1⁄2
7
8 1⁄2
10 7⁄8
14
18
21 1⁄2
24 1⁄2
27 3⁄8
34 1⁄4

⁄2
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
1

1

60
60
90
120
160
250
400
450
500
600
700
800
900

20.8
24
38
40
62.5
88
170
250
400
550
700
1,150
1,700

Cat. No.

Material

NB-935-P
NB-935-V
NB-931
NB-947
NB-949-P
NB-936-P
NB-936-V
NB-937-P
NB-924
NB-944
NB-925
NB-918

Polyester
Vinylester
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyester
Polyester
Vinylester
Polyester
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane
Polyurethane

Color

Gray
Beige
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Beige
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray
Gray

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

4"

Wt. lbs./100

13
13
14
24
22
28
28
20
56
34
70
4.6

NB-918

3"
5"

5"
NB-924

3"

Design loads given are in pounds at 70° F with a safety factor of 3.
Insulate hangers from pipe at higher temperatures
Material: Polyester
Color: Yellow and Gray

B-92

NB-931

61⁄2"

Clevis Hangers

6 5/8"

5"
NB-925

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Non-Metallic Channel and Accessories
Cat. No.

maximum
Thread maximum Torque/
wt.
Size (In.) Load/lbs.
lbs.
lbs./100

Cat. No.
NB-910-3/8
NB-910-3/8 HD
NB-910-1/2
NB-910-1/2 HD

⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

450
1,370
450
1,500

3

3

35
100
40
130

1.8
2.6
1.8
5.2

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
Color: Gray.

NH-114C
NH-114-D

size
(In.)

maximum
Load/lbs.

maximum
Torque/lbs.

wt.
lbs./100

⁄8
⁄2

465
830

50
125

.33
.8

1

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
Color: Gray.

Cat. No.

⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

1,300
1,600
1,600

3

wt. lbs./100

⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

.6
.6
.8

3

Material: Rigid PVC.
Color: Gray.

Threaded Rod
Cat. No.

Size (In.)

NH-116C
NH-116-D
NH-116-E

Size (IN.)

NH-117-C
NH-117-D
NH-117-E

Square Nuts
thread
shear/
lbs.

4
3.6
3.6

Flat Washers
Cat. No.

3

wt. lbs./100

⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3

Material: Glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
Color: Gray.

Hex Nuts
Cat. No.

Size (IN.)

NH-119-C
NH-119-D
NH-119-E

125
200
200

1.8
2.8
5.6

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Vinylester.

Size

NH-193-3/8-4
NH-193-1/2-4
NH-193-5/8-4

maximum
Torque/
wt.
lbs.
lbs./100

maximum
thread
Torque/
Shear/lbs.
lbs.

⁄8" x 4'
⁄2" x 4'
5
⁄8" x 4'

300
510
1,600

3
1

Hex Head Bolts

NH-113-P
NH-113-U
NH-113C*
NH-113-H*

⁄8 x 11⁄4
⁄8 x 21⁄2
1
⁄2 x 11⁄4
1
⁄2 x 21⁄2
3

3

maximum
Torque/
wt.
lbs.
lbs./100

360
360
600
600

30
30
90
90

1.4
2
1.4
2

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
Color: Gray.
* With molded washer.

Hole Size (In.)

Wt.
lbs./100

⁄8– ⁄2

1.6

NB-950

3

1

Material: Polyurethane
Color: Gray

www.tnb.com

NH-195-3/8
NH-195-1/2
NH-195-5/8

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

size (In.)

maximum
Load/lbs.

wt.
lbs./100

⁄8
⁄2
5
⁄8

880
1,000
1,700

6.4
6.4
13.2

3
1

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Glass fiber reinforced polyurethane.
Color: Gray.

Channel to Beam Clamp Assembly

Cat. No.

Channel Reinforcement Spacer
Cat. No.

7.0
12
18

Rod Couplers
Cat. No.

Cat. No.

30
80
200

Safety factor of 3.
Material: Vinylester.
Color: Gray.

Color: Gray.

thread
Size (In.) shear/lbs.

wt.
lbs./100

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Channel Washers

Channel Nuts

NE-763-3/8
NE-763-1/2
Kit consists of:
Description

Channel Nuts
Clips (set)
Bolts

std. wt.
(Lbs.)

maximum
Load/lbs.

110
120

200
200

Std. Ctn.

4
2
4

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Material

Polyurethane
Vinylester
Polyurethane

Color

Gray
Beige
Gray

B-93

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Non-Metallic Channel and Accessories
Kindorf Brush-On
Fiberglass End Sealant

Kindorf Spray-On
Fiberglass End Sealant

When fabricating Type “P” or “V” Series materials,
Kindorf® Fiberglass End Sealant should be used.
After cutting or drilling the channel, interior glass
fibers may fray and lose strength due to exposure to
the environment. Kindorf® sealant protects the exposed glass fibers and
prevents deterioration. Kindorf® sealant exceeds Vinylester (V) material in
corrosion resistance.

Kindorf® Spray-On Fiberglass End Sealant provides
a quick and easy corrosion-resistant coating when applied
to fiberglass channel and accessories. Kindorf® Spray-On
Fiberglass End Sealant is a rubberized spray which is
supplied in a 12 oz. pressurized can.

®

®

Cat. No.

Description

Size

Wt.
lbs./100

Cat. No.

Description

Size

Wt.
lbs./100

NH-600

Brush-on sealant

1 qt.

220

NH-601

Spray-on sealant

12 oz.

100

Chemical Resistance
Polyester Vinylester
Chemical

Acetic Acid, <50%
Acetone, <10%
Aluminum Hydroxide
Ammonium Hydroxide, <20%
Ammonium Nitrate
Ammonium Phosphate
Benzene
Benzoic Acid
Bromine, Wet Gas
Butylene Glycol
Butyric Acid, <50%
Chlorine, Dry Gas
Chlorine, Wet Gas
Chlorine, Liquid
Chlorine, Water
Chromic Acid, <5%
Copper Chloride
Copper Cyanide
Copper Nitrate
Copper Sulfate
Esters, Fatty Acids
Ferric Chloride
Ferrous Chloride
Fluoboric Acid
Fluosilicic Acid, <32%
Formic Acid, <50%

•
†
•
†
•
•
•
•
†
•
•
•
†
†
•
†
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
†
†

•
†
•
†
•
•
•
•
†
•
•
•
†
†
•
†
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
120°
†
†

•
†
•
•
•
•
†
•
•
•
•
•
•
†
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
†
•
150°
•
•
†
•
100°
•
•
•
•
†
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
100°
100°

Polyester Vinylester Rigid PVC Polyurethane

Rigid PVC Polyurethane

70°F 160°F 70°F 160°F 70°F 160°F 70°F

†
—
—
•
—
—
—
•
•
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
•
—
•
—
•
—
†

†
—
—
•
—
—
—
•
†
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
•
—
•
—
•
—
†

•
—
—
•
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
•
—
—
—
•
—
•

• Recommended for use

160°F

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Chemical

Gasoline, Aviation
Hydrochloric Acid, <37%
Hydroflouric Acid, <20%
Hydrogen Chloride, Wet Gas
Hydrogen Sulfide, Wet Gas
Lactic Acid
Nickel Sulfate, low pH
Nickel Sulfate, high pH
Nitric Acid, <35%
Perchloric Acid, <10%
Phosphoric Acid
Potassium Chloride
Potassium Nitrate
Potassium Persulfate
Sodium Hydroxide, <50%
Sodium Hypochlorite, <15%
Sodium Nitrate
Sodium Sulfate
Sodium Sulfide
Sulfuric Acid, <70%
Sulfuric Acid >70%
Trisodium Phosphate
Urea
Vegetable Oils
Vinegar
White Liquor

70°F 160°F 70°F 160°F 70°F 160°F

•
•
†
•
•
•
†
†
†
†
•
•
•
†
†
†
•
•
†
†
†
†
•
•
•
—

†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
•
•
•
†
†
†
•
†
†
†
†
†
†
•
•
—

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
100°
•
•
•
•
•
120°
150°
•
•
•
•
180°
150°
•
•
•
•
102°
•
150°
•
•
•

Type operating ranges for:
Polyester	
-30° F–150° F
Vinylester	
-35° F–200° F
Polyurethane	 -40° F–130° F
Nylon	
-20° F–150° F

° Recommended up to temperature indicated
† Not recommended for use
— No information available at this time

Note: The guidelines presented in this table assume the typical application of Kindorf ® products where exposure is limited to fumes, vapors, and
occasional splashes from chemicals. This information is intended as a guideline and does not guarantee product performance for the applications
listed. In special situations where chemical resistance is critical, the factory should be consulted. Some applications may require a screening test
of samples in the chemical environment of interest. The user is advised to determine suitability of the product for its particular use.
Class I fire rated per ASTM E-84 and are UL-94 V-0.

B-94

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

—
•
•
—
•
•
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
†
•
—
—
—
•

—
•
†
—
•
•
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
†
•
—
—
—
•

70°F

160°F

—
•
—
—
—
•
—
—
•
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
—
—
•
•
—
•
—
—
—
•

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Channel Load Data
Y

X

Y

Y

X

X

X

Y

Y

X

X

X

X

X

X

Y
Y

Y
B-901
17⁄8" x 11⁄2" x 12 ga. steel

B-906
11⁄2" x 3⁄4" x 14 ga. steel

B-900
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 12 ga. steel
B-900-M
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x 14 ga. steel
B-900-AL
11⁄2" x 11⁄2" x .1046 aluminum

Y

Y

B-902
11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga. steel

B-900-2A
11⁄2" x 3" x 12 ga. steel

X-X Axis

Y-Y Axis

Channel

Area

lbs./ft.

i

s

r

i

s

r

Steel Section Properties
Material Properties  f=30,000  E=30,000,000
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902

.217
.521
.354
.595
.837

.740
1.776
1.206
2.028
2.852

.018
.155
.101
.263
.909

.041
.179
.123
.251
.552

.272
.545
.535
.665
1.042

.077
.200
.129
.238
.363

.105
.259
.175
.309
.471

.559
.619
.603
.632
.658

Simple Beam Uniformly Distributed Load
Span

12"

18"

24"

30"

36"

Channel

max Load

Deflection

B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902

820
3,580
2,460
5,020
11,040
547
2,387
1,640
3,347
7,360
410
1,790
1,230
2,510
5,520
328
1,432
984
2,008
4,416
273
1,193
820
1,673
3,680

.034
.017
.018
.014
.009
.077
.039
.041
.032
.020
.137
.069
.073
.057
.036
.214
.108
.114
.089
.057
.308
.156
.164
.129
.082

1

⁄240 Span Load design Load

1,200
10,333
6,733
17,533
60,600
533
4,593
2,993
7,793
26,933
300
2,583
1,683
4,383
15,150
192
1,653
1,077
2,805
9,696
133
1,148
748
1,948
6,733

820
3,580
2,460
5,020
11,040
533
2,387
1,640
3,347
7,360
300
1,790
1,230
2,510
5,520
192
1,432
984
2,008
4,416
133
1,148
748
1,673
3,680

Simple Beam Concentrated Center Load
max Load

Deflection

410
1,790
1,230
2,510
5,520
273
1,193
820
­1,673
3,680
205
895
615
1,255
2,760
164
716
492
1,004
2,208
137
597
410
837
1,840

.027
.014
.015
.011
.007
.062
.031
.033
.026
.016
.109
.055
.058
.046
.029
.171
.067
.091
.072
.046
.246
.125
.132
.103
.066

1

⁄240 Span Load design Load

750
6,458
4,208
10,958
37,875
333
2,870
1,870
4,870
16,833
188
1615
1,052
2,740
9,469
120
1,033
673
1,753
6,060
83
718
468
1,218
4,208

410
1,790
1,230
2,510
5,520
273
1,193
820
1,673
3,680
188
895
615
1,255
2,760
120
716
492
1004
2,208
83
597
410
837
1,840

col. load
For K=1

7,337
7,628
7,625
7,660
7,699
6,852
7,507
7,499
7,579
7,665
6,172
7,338
7,324
7,465
7,619
5,299
7,121
7,098
7,319
7,560
4,231
6,855
6,822
7,140
7,487

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information
Metallic Engineering Data and Specifications

For channel with holes in bottom, multiply load by .95.
For channel with holes in bottom and sides, multiply load by .90.
For extruded aluminum channel, multiply load by .33.
Column loads calculated in accordance with ANSI Light Gauge Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, Section 3.6.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-95

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information
Channel Load Data (continued)
Simple Beam Uniformly Distributed Load

Simple Beam Concentrated Center Load

1

Span

42"

48"

54"

60"

72"

84"

96"

108"

120"

Channel

max Load

Deflection

/240 Span
Load

B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902
B-906
B-900
B-900-M
B-901
B-902

234
1,023
703
1,434
3,154
205
895
615
1,255
2,760
182
796
547
1,116
2,453
164
716
492
1,004
2,208
137
597
410
837
1,840
117
511
351
717
1,577
103
448
308
628
1,380
91
398
273
558
1,227
82
358
246
502
1,104

.419
.212
.224
.175
.112
.547
.277
.292
.229
.146
.692
.351
.370
.290
.184
.854
.433
.457
.358
.228
1.230
.624
.658
.515
.328
1.674
.849
.895
.701
.446
2.187
1.109
1.169
.916
.583
2.768
1.403
1.480
1.160
.738
3.417
1.732
1.827
1.432
.911

98
844
550
1,431
4,947
75
646
421
1,096
3,788
59
510
333
866
2,993
48
413
269
701
2,424
33
287
187
487
1,683
24
211
137
358
1,237
19
161
105
274
947
15
128
83
216
748
12
103
67
175
606

design Load

max Load

Deflection

98
844
550
1,431
3,154
75
646
421
1,096
2,760
59
510
333
866
2,453
48
413
269
701
2,208
33
287
187
487
1,683
24
211
137
358
1,237
19
161
105
274
947
15
128
83
216
748
12
103
67
175
606

117
511
351
717
1,577
103
448
308
628
1,380
91
398
273
558
1,227
82
358
246
502
1,104
68
298
205
418
920
59
256
176
359
789
51
224
154
314
690
46
199
137
279
613
41
179
123
251
552

.335
.170
.179
.140
.089
.437
.222
.234
.183
.117
.554
.281
.296
.232
.148
.683
.346
.365
.286
.182
.984
.499
.526
.412
.262
1.339
.679
.716
.561
.357
1.749
.887
.935
.733
.466
2.214
1.123
1.184
.928
.590
2.733
1.386
1.461
1.145
.729

1

/240 Span Load design Load

61
527
344
895
3,092
47
404
263
685
2,367
37
319
208
541
1,870
30
258
168
438
1,515
21
179
117
304
1,052
15
132
86
224
773
12
101
66
171
592
9
80
52
135
468
8
65
42
110
379

For channel with holes in bottom, multiply load by .95.
For channel with holes in bottom and sides, multiply load by .90.
For extruded aluminum channel, multiply load by .33.
Column loads calculated in accordance with ANSI Light Gauge Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, Section 3.6.

B-96

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

61
511
344
717
1,577
47
404
263
628
1,380
37
319
208
541
1,227
30
258
168
438
1,104
21
179
117
304
920
15
132
86
224
773
12
101
66
171
592
9
80
52
135
468
8
65
42
110
379

col. load
For K=1

3,125
6,541
6,496
6,929
7,401
2,392
6,178
6,120
6,686
7,302
1,890
5,767
5,693
6,410
7,189
1,531
5,308
5,216
6,101
7,064
1,063
4,244
4,113
5,387
6,773
781
3,136
3,022
4,543
6,429
598
2,401
2,314
3,575
6,032
473
1,897
1,828
2,825
5,582
383
1,537
1,481
2,288
5,080

Technical Information
Conclusion

For calculating deflection and maximum safe load
(Beams of uniform cross section)

Referring to the load span tables on pages B-95–B-96 for B-905
channel, a 36-inch span has a uniformly distributed load rating of
1,133 lbs., which is greater than the 390 lb. load calculated above,
and is therefore satisfactory.

I = Moment of inertia, in position of load, in inches 4.
S = Section modulus – in position of load l/n, in inches 3.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Beam Formula

On longer spans or spans with greater loads, use B-901, B-900-2A
or B-905-2A channel or provide an intermediate support.

f = Bending stress in extreme fiber, in pounds per square inch.
E = Modulus of elasticity, in pounds per square inch.

Note on Conduit Support

L = Length of section, in inches.

The National Electrical Code® states the rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit, and electrical metallic tubing shall be supported at least
every 10 feet. See Article 344, Section 344.30 for exceptions for rigid
metal conduit.

W = Superimposed loads supported by beam, in pounds.
W Max. = Maximum safe load at point given, in pounds.
M = Maximum bending moment, in inch pounds.
D, D1 = Deflections at points given, in inches.
D Max. = Maximum deflection at point given, in inches.

Steel and Aluminum
Modulus of Elasticity (E)
Steel — 29,500,000 pounds per square inch
Aluminum — 10,000,000 pounds per square inch

5"
M

M
/2

1

/2

1

Problem

D

R
X

36"

L

L

R1

R

W

Beam supported at ends
Concentrated load at center
W max. = 4fS/L
D max. = WL3/48El

W

X

Design trapeze to support 8–2" rigid steel conduits and 2–3" rigid steel
conduits on a No. B-905 channel span with hangers spaced five (5)
feet apart.

R1

Beam supported at ends
Uniformly distributed load
W max. = 8fS/L
D max. = 5WL3/384El

Maximum Fiber Stress (f)

2"

Steel — 30,000 pounds per square inch

117/32

Aluminum — 10,000 pounds per square inch

13/16

M
M

L

L
/2

/2

1

D

D
W
2

R
W
2

Beam supported at ends
Two symmetrical concentrated loads
W max. = 2fS/a
D max. = Wa/12El ( 3⁄4 L2 - a 2)

D1

R1
W
2

Beam continuous over two supports
Two exterior symmetrical loads
W max. = 2fS/a
D, distance a = Wa(3aL-4a 2)/12EI
D1, distance L/2 - a = Wa(2-2a) 2⁄16EI

www.tnb.com

3 1/8

3 1/8

3"

2"

2"
3 1/8

3 3/4

3"

4 5/16

2"
3 3/4

2"

2"
3 1/8

3 1/8

36"

2"
3 1/8

117/32
1 3/16

Weight per Hanger Equals
2" rigid steel conduit with heaviest conductor combination =
6.625 lbs. per foot.

/2

1

/2

1

X
W
2

1

2"

3" rigid steel conduit with heaviest conductor combination =
13.415 lbs. per foot.
	 8	 x	 6.625	 x	 5	 =	 265	lbs.	 =	 weight of 2" conduits per hanger
	 2	 x	 13.415	 x	 5	 =	 134	lbs.	 =	 weight of 3" conduits per hanger
				 Total		 =	 399	lbs.	 =	 weight of conduits per hanger
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks
of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-97

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information
Conduit Spacings
Spacings in inches between centers of conduits.
The light face figures are the minimum dimensions to provide clearance between locknuts.
The more liberal spacings printed in bold face type should be used whenever possible.
Size (IN.)

⁄2

1

⁄4

3

1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
41⁄2
5
6

B-98

1

⁄2

3

⁄4

1

11⁄4

11⁄2

2

21⁄2

3

31⁄2

4

41⁄2

5

6

1 ⁄16
13⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄2
11⁄2
13⁄4
13⁄4
2
115⁄16
21⁄8
23⁄16
23⁄8
27⁄16
25⁄8
213⁄16
3
31⁄8
33⁄8
37⁄16
33⁄4
33⁄4
4
41⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄4
5

–
–
17⁄16
15⁄8
15⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄16
21⁄4
25⁄16
21⁄2
29⁄16
23⁄4
215⁄16
31⁄8
31⁄4
31⁄2
39⁄16
37⁄8
37⁄8
41⁄8
41⁄4
41⁄2
47⁄8
51⁄8

–
–
–
–
13⁄4
2
2
21⁄4
23⁄16
23⁄8
21⁄2
23⁄4
23⁄4
3
31⁄16
33⁄8
33⁄8
35⁄8
311⁄16
4
4
41⁄4
43⁄8
45⁄8
5
51⁄4

–
–
–
–
–
–
21⁄4
21⁄2
27⁄16
25⁄8
23⁄4
3
3
31⁄4
35⁄16
35⁄8
35⁄8
37⁄8
315⁄16
41⁄4
41⁄4
41⁄2
45⁄8
47⁄8
51⁄4
51⁄2

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
29⁄16
23⁄4
27⁄8
31⁄8
31⁄8
33⁄8
37⁄16
33⁄4
33⁄4
4
41⁄16
43⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄4
43⁄4
5
53⁄8
55⁄8

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
31⁄8
33⁄8
33⁄8
35⁄8
33⁄4
4
41⁄16
43⁄8
43⁄8
43⁄4
45⁄8
5
5
53⁄8
55⁄8
6

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
35⁄8
4
4
43⁄8
45⁄16
45⁄8
45⁄8
5
47⁄8
51⁄4
51⁄4
55⁄8
57⁄8
61⁄4

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
45⁄16
43⁄4
45⁄8
5
415⁄16
53⁄8
51⁄4
55⁄8
59⁄16
6
63⁄16
65⁄8

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
415⁄16
53⁄8
51⁄4
55⁄8
59⁄16
6
57⁄8
61⁄4
61⁄2
7

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
59⁄16
6
57⁄8
61⁄4
63⁄16
65⁄8
613⁄16
71⁄4

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
61⁄8
61⁄2
61⁄2
7
71⁄8
75⁄8

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
613⁄16
71⁄4
77⁄16
8

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
81⁄8
85⁄8

3

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Technical Information

Rigid Conduit – Aluminum and Steel
Nominal
Outside
Diameter
(in. per UL-6)

Trade
Size (in.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
6
1

Outside
Diameter
of Coupling
(in. per UL-6)

steel

alum.

steel

alum.

steel

alum.

steel

alum.

.840
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.563
6.625

.840
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.563
6.625

1.010
1.250
1.525
1.869
2.155
2.650
3.250
3.870
4.500
4.875
6.000
7.200

1.078
1.328
1.563
1.953
2.219
2.750
3.281
3.812
4.438
5.000
6.219
7.313

.790
1.050
1.530
2.010
2.490
3.320
5.270
6.830
8.310
9.720
13.140
17.450

.274
.364
.530
.696
.822
1.157
1.825
2.389
2.877
3.400
4.654
6.120

1.040
1.760
2.695
3.975
5.000
6.625
9.460
13.415
16.690
20.410
29.350
41.910

.524
1.074
1.695
2.661
3.332
4.462
6.015
8.974
11.257
14.090
20.864
30.580

Thinwall Conduit (EMT)
Per UL-797

Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

Trade
Size (in.)

⁄2
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
1
3

Max. Weight
of Conduit and Conductor
(lbs. per foot)
Not Lead Covered

Weight of
Conduit
(lbs. per ft.)

Nominal
Outside
Diameter
(in. per UL)

Outside
Diameter
of Coupling
(in. per UL)

Weight of
Conduit
(lbs. per foot)

Max. Weight
of Conduit and
Conductor
(lbs. per ft.)

Nominal
Outside
Diameter
(in.)

Weight of
EMT
(lbs. per ft.)

Max. Weight
of EMT and
Conductor
(lbs. per ft.)

.815
1.029
1.290
1.638
1.883
2.360
2.857
3.476
3.971
4.466

1.010
1.250
1.525
1.869
2.155
2.650
3.250
3.870
4.500
4.875

.6
.8
1.1
1.5
1.8
2.4
4.2
5.2
6.1
6.8

.850
1.530
2.325
3.465
4.330
5.725
8.470
11.845
14.500
17.510

.706
.922
1.163
1.510
1.740
2.197
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500

.285
.435
.640
.950
1.100
1.400
2.050
2.500
3.400
3.700

.538
1.160
1.825
2.950
3.674
4.436
6.400
9.262
12.100
15.355

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Pipe Data

B-99

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information
Column Loading-Structure Channel
Maximum Load in Pounds — Column Loading
column
height
(ft.)

1

2

3

4

5

column
height
(ft.)

6

7

8

9

10

type of max column
channel loading (lbs.)

B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A

1

8,625
17,400
4,170
8,570
7,900
16,500
3,450
7,840
6,960
15,000
2,250
6,680
5,970
13,095
1,270
4,980
5,055
11,490

2,590
4,450
1,280
2,160
2,520
4,400
1,200
2,100
2,420
4,300
1,015
2,020
2,280
4,100
755
1,830
2,140
3,950

3,340

1,550

type of max column
channel loading (lbs.)

B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A
B-900
B-900-2A
B-906
B-906-2A

number of tiers or braces per column
2

3

4

5

2,000
3,650
980
1,720
1,960
3,520
950
1,700
1,910
3,480
895
1,660
1,850
3,420
830
1,610

1,780
2,960
795
1,435
1,640
2,930
775
1,420
1,560
2,900
745
1,400

1,360
2,520
670
1,230
1,340
2,500
650
1,215

1,180
2,210
575
1,075

number of tiers or braces per column
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

9,990

3,750

2,170
3,645
8,715

1,240
1,840
3,550

3,045
7,395

1,670
3,180

2,580
6,190

1,520
3,030

2,100
5,580

1,340
2,900

3,340
700
1,550
1,720
3,240
520
1,450
1,650
3,140
470
1,330
1,570
3,040
130
1,200
1,500
2,940

2,870
710
1,370
1,490
2,820
635
1,330
1,460
2,780
605
1,290
1,430
2,730
535
1,250
1,380
2,665
470
1,190

2,480
635
1,205
1,310
2,470
610
1,180
1,290
2,450
590
1,160
1,260
2,420
555
1,150
1,230
2,380
520
1,120

2,190
565
1,065
1,140
2,170
550
1,050
1,130
2,160
535
1,040
1,120
2,140
525
1,020
1,110
2,135
500
1,010

1,960
505
955
1,025
1,945
495
945
1,015
1,930
490
935
1,000
1,920
485
930
990
1,910
465
915

925
1,760
450
860
920
1,750
445
850
905
1,745
435
840
900
1,730
430
835

835
1,600
410
780
825
1,595
400
775
820
1,580
395
770

760
1,465
370
715
755
1,460
365
710

700
1,350
340
660

1,160

This table recognizes eccentricity on the column caused by usual connections.

B-100

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Technical Information
Use H-193-3/8
or ‘R’ series
hanger rod
for

A total load of 500 lbs. is to be supported in an evenly
distributed manner over a distance of 28 feet with the
maximum deflection being not greater than 1⁄240 of the
span between the supports.
Which Kindorf ® channel should be used and how
many supports are needed? On the chart, find the
point of intersection for a total load of 500 lbs.
and a total run of 28 feet.

2 supports
3 supports
4 supports

1220 lbs. and 2260 lbs.
975 lbs. and 1810 lbs.
1665 lbs. and 3080 lbs.

2 Supports

⁄2

W

w
2

w
2

Total
Wlbs.
lbs.
Totaluniform
uniform load
load --W
w
2

w
2

Total uniform load - W lbs.

Example Number 2

Example – If the total uniformly distributed load W is 1,000 lbs., each hanger must be capable
of supporting half of the load or 500 lbs. Therefore, H-193-3/8 or c ‘R’ series hanger rod would
be sufficient
to support
this load.
Total uniform
load - W lbs.

Four foot fixtures weighing 30 lbs. each are to be
attached to a channel suspended from a ceiling in
a continuous 20-foot run and maintain a deflection
of less than 1⁄240 of the span between the supports.

w
2

w
2

3 Supports

Which Kindorf channel should be used and how many
supports are needed?

Total Load = 5 fixtures x

1220 lbs. or less
975 lbs. or less
1665 lbs. or less

Load Distribution on Hanger Rods

Pick the next graph line vertically above this point.
This B-900 or G-975 with 4 supports (4B) evenly
spaced. By reading horizontally to the left from this
point, it can be seen that up to 565 lbs. can be
supported on B-900, (G-975) under these conditions
and still maintain a deflection of 1⁄240 of the span.

Number of fixtures =

if the total uniform
load is between

2 supports
3 supports
4 supports

Example Number 1

20 ft.
4 ft./fixture
30 lbs.
fixture

if the total
uniform load is

Use H-193-1/2
or ‘R’ series
hanger rod
for

3 W
16

5 W
8

Total uniform

⁄16 W

= 5 fixtures

⁄16

5

3

5 W
8

W

loads - W lbs.

Total Uniform

Load W lbs.

3 W
16

On the chart, find the point of intersection for a total
load of 150 lbs. and a total run of 20 feet.

5 W
8

3
16

Example – If the total uniformly distributed load W is 1,000 lbs., the load is distributed to each
support in the following manner: 187d lbs. to each end support and 625 lbs. to the center
support. In this case, the maximum load to be supported is 625 lbs., which exceeds the
uniform
- W lbs. H-193-1/2,
recommended Total
safe load of 610 lbs. for H-193-3/8
hanger rod.,loads
therefore
or d ‘R’ series supports should be used.

Example Number 3

2 W
15

A 20-foot run of B-901 or G-965 is supported by 3
hangers, one on each end and one in the center. How
much evenly distributed weight can this system support
and maintain a maximum deflection of 1⁄240 of the span
between the supports?
2 W
15

From this point, read horizontally to the left to find the
total uniform load of 690 lbs. on the vertical scale.

W

Total Uniform Load W lbs.
Total
uniform or ‘R’ Series - 610loads
Maximum Safe Load -	
H-193-3/8
lbs. - W lbs.
per hanger rod	
H-193-1/2 or ‘R’ Series - 1130 lbs.

Pick the next graph line vertically above this point. This
is B-900-M (G-975-M) with 3 supports (3A) – one
support on each end and one in the center of the run.

On the chart, find the point of the intersection for
a total run of 20 feet and the graph line for B-901
(G-965) with 3 supports (3C).

3

16
Total

Total uniform

= 150 lbs.

3
16

loads - W lbs.

⁄8 W

3
3 W
16

W

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Selection of Hanger Rods

Examples for Using
the Continuous Run
Load Chart for Channel

11 W
30

11 W
30

uniform

4 Supports

⁄15 W

loads - W lbs.

⁄30 W

2

W 2
15

W 11
30

Total

2 W
15

W 2
15

W 11
30

11
Total

Total

⁄30 W

⁄15 W

11

11 W
30

W 11
30

uniform

Uniform

2

W 2
15

loads - W lbs.

Loads W lbs.

Example – If the total uniformly distributed load W is 1,000 lbs., the load is distributed to
each support in the following manner: 133 lbs. to each end support and 367 lbs. to each
inner support. Therefore, H-193-3/8, or c ‘R’ series hanger rod would be sufficient to support
this load.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-101

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information

B-102

Kindorf Channel Bars — Load Deflection Charts
®

Concentrated Center Loads

Cat. No.
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H

beam span
(in.)

12

24

36

48

60

Uniformly Distributed Loads

load at
25,000 psi
stress (lbs.)

55
34
180
175
27
17
89
87
18
11
59
57
13
8
43
42
11
6
34
33

load at max.
ddeflection deflection
at 25,000 psi
of 1⁄240
stress (lbs.) span (lbs.)

.038
.048
.023
.024
.153
.192
.093
.095
.345
.433
.208
.213
.615
.773
.367
.375
.963
1.216
.550
.581

Loads for lengths greater than 60" spans are available on request.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

55
34
180
175
18
9
89
87
8
4
42
40
4
2
23
22
2
1
14
13

Cat. No.
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H
6013
6014
6029
6029-H

beam span
(in.)

12

24

36

48

60

load at
25,000 psi
stress (lbs.)

ddeflection
at 25,000 psi
stress (lbs.)

load at max.
deflection
of 1⁄240
span (lbs.)

110
68
361
350
55
34
180
174
36
22
119
115
27
16
88
86
21
13
70
68

.049
.060
.029
.030
.194
.238
.117
.119
.437
.536
.263
.268
.776
.953
.467
.477
1.213
1.490
.729
.746

110
57
361
350
28
14
154
146
12
6
67
64
6
3
37
35
4
1
22
21

Loads are rounded off to the nearest pound in all cases.

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Technical Information

End Span

Intermediate Span

Intermediate Span

Intermediate Span

Figure 1 — Long Continuous Run
End Span

Single Span

Figure 2 — Single Span

End Span

Figure 3 — Double Span

The hanger spacing is often determined by the type of building construction.
The deflection then will determine the proper channel since this deflection
should not exceed 1⁄ 240 of the span.
To estimate the deflection at the center of an intermediate span in long
continuous runs (Figure 1), multiply the weight of a single fixture times the

applicable deflection constant (from table). This deflection also applies to the
end span in Figure 1 and the single span in Figure 2 if the dimension “C”
is between 1⁄4 and 1⁄3 of the length of the span. If a cantilever does not exist
as in the double span (Figure 3), the deflection of end spans (Figure 3)
will be doubled.

Deflection Constants for Continuous Run, 4-Foot Fixtures*
span feet

 6
 8
10
12
14
16
18
20

B-906
G-956

B-900-M
G-975-M

G-953

B-900
G-975

B-901
G-950, G-965

B-900-2A

B-902
G-955

.004
.009
—
—
—
—
—
—

.000
.002
.005
.010
—
—
—
—

.000
.001
.004
.007
—
—
—
—

.000
.000
.003
.006
.012
.020
—
—

.000
.000
.001
.004
.007
.011
.018
—

.000
.000
.000
.001
.002
.004
.007
.010

.000
.000
.000
.001
.002
.004
.006
.009

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

To Select Proper Channel

* For 8-foot fixtures reduce the deflection constant by 50%. This table is for normal weight fixtures — the constant “.000” infers negligible deflection.
A long, continuous run of 30 lb. 4-foot fixtures on G-975 channel is supported on 12' centers. The deflection at the center of an intermediate span will be the deflection constant (.006) times
the fixture weight (30 lbs.) or .18 inches.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-103

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Kindorf® Modular Metal Framing System

Technical Information
Suggested Kindorf Specifications
®

I.	For purposes of designating type and quality for work in this section,
drawings and specifications are based upon products of standard
Kindorf® product drawings. Whenever substitute products are to be
considered, supporting technical literature, samples, drawings, and
certified performance data must be submitted in order to make
a valid comparison of products involved.

B.	Channel and Accessories for Surface Raceway Systems.

II.	 Materials

	The supporting channel shall have 1⁄2" diameter knockouts on
6" centers to accommodate 1⁄2" conduit fittings, and be listed by
Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. as complying with Std. UL-5 for use
as surface raceway and support for electric discharge type lighting
fixture. The channel must also provide for ground continuity.

	Fluorescent fixtures, as designated on the drawings and according
to the fixture schedule, shall be supported and supplied through a
combination raceway and support system.
	The cross sectional width dimension of the channel shall be a
minimum of 11⁄2". The depth will be as required to satisfy the load and
wire carrying requirements.

	Steel channel sections shall be rolled from AISI 1008 commercial grade
steel and be in conformance with ASTM A569-72.
	Aluminum channel sections shall be extruded from 6063-T6 aluminum
alloy and be in conformance with ASTM-B221-80.

	The combination raceway and support system shall be complete with
channel joiners, end caps, closure strips, hangers, wiring entrance
and all necessary fittings for electrical and mechanical connections.

III.	Construction
A.	Channel and Accessories for Support Systems.
	The cross sectional width dimension of the channel shall be a
minimum of 11⁄2". The depth will be as required to satisfy the load
requirements. Channel with 11⁄2" depth or greater shall be rolled from
Manufacturing Std. 12 gauge steel. Channel smaller than 11⁄2" may be
Manufacturing Std. 14 gauge.
	Attachment holes, when required, shall be factory punched on hole
centers equal to the channel cross sectional width dimension and
shall be a maximum of 9⁄16" in diameter.

	All nuts, bolts, straps, threaded rod and edges of punched holes
shall be protected with the same finish as the channel as described
in the FINISH section of this specification.

	All channel and fittings, including threaded components, shall be
protected against corrosion as outlined in the finish section of
this specification.
	Installation of the system shall be in accordance with the National
Electrical Code®, NFPA 70 and ANSI C1.

	Channel attachment nuts shall be designed to prelocate in the channel
and provide a bearing surface on the turned down lips while making
positive contact with the side walls of the channel.
	Straps for the support of conduit shall be designed such that the
attachment nut is captivated on the shoulder of the strap when
tightened, and the attachment bolt will allow tightening by either
a slot-head screwdriver or wrench.

	When splicing or joining raceway channel at 90 degree angles, the
joiners shall be designed such that they are concealed and fastened
to the inside surface of the channel. Joiners shall be listed by
Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc. and allow wires to be directly laid in
place.

IV. 	Galv-Krom® Trivalent Finish
	The finish on steel components shall consist of a combination of .0005
inch electrogalvanizing on steel in accordance with ASTM B633-78 Type
LS coating and a gold Trivalent barrier formed on the zinc. This coating
shall be applied after factory fabrication of the material.
	When tested in accordance with ASTM B117-73 procedure, there shall
be no sign of red rust after 1,000 hours of testing. Certified test results
to support this must be submitted upon request.
Warning: Load tables, charts and design criteria provided in this catalog
are intended as guides only. Selection of proper product, installation
intervals, erection and placement are the responsibility of the user.
Kindorf® products are intended to be used for the support and bracing
of fixtures, cable, pipe and conduit. Improper use or installation may
result in injury to persons or damage of property.
Material and finish specifications are subject to change without notice.
NEC and National Electrical Code are registered trademarks of the
National Fire Protection Association, Inc.

B-104

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

In this section...

Superstrut Metal
Framing System
®

Superstrut® Metal Framing System
Overview.................................................................... B-106–B-109
Channels.................................................................... B-110–B-111
Threaded Products and Hardware............................... B-112–B-117
Fittings and Brackets.................................................. B-118–B-125
Concrete Inserts......................................................... B-126–B-127
Beam Clamps............................................................. B-128–B-135
Pipe Straps, Conduit Clamps and Hangers.................. B-136–B-182
Surface Raceway and Lighting Systems...................... B-183–B-187
Slotted Angle Metal Framing....................................... B-188–B-189
Special Metals and Finishes........................................ B-190–B-198
Technical Information................................................. B-199–B-220

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Overview

New Trivalent GoldGalv Finish Is RoHS Compliant
®

Thomas & Betts is proud to introduce the new and improved
Trivalent GoldGalv® finish. GoldGalv® finish is a combination
of .5 mils electro-plated zinc and a gold Trivalent Chromium finish.

•	 Gold Trivalent Chromium Finish — The new GoldGalv® finish features
a Trivalent Chromium formulation that provides all the features and
protection of Hexavalent Chromium (CR VI) without the use of this
chemical compound. Hexavalent Chromium is restricted by some
standards such as the European Union directive on the restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment (RoHS).
•	 RoHS Compliant — One great feature for the new Trivalent
Chromium formulation is RoHS compliance. Because Hexavalent
Chromium is a substance that is restricted by RoHS, moving away
from a Hexavalent formulation to the new Trivalent formulation will
make the performance of GoldGalv® coating available to customers
affected by RoHS and other standards like RoHS around the world.
•	 Trivalent GoldGalv® Finish Is OSHA Safe — The Hexavalent
formulation of the GoldGalv® finish ­­is safe with regard to the revised 2006 OSHA standard. This new Trivalent
formulation of the GoldGalv® finish does not contain any Hexavalent Chromium and therefore does not fall under
the scope of the OSHA standard at all. As a result, the new Trivalent GoldGalv® finish, just like the Hexavalent
GoldGalv® finish, is OSHA compliant.
•	 ASTM B633 Specification — The improved GoldGalv® finish is applied in compliance with ASTM B633 coating,
the same standard as used previously. This standard outlines electro-deposited coatings of zinc on steel.

B-106

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Overview
GoldGalv

®

The standard GoldGalv® finish is made up of a multi-step zinc
electrogalvanizing process. The Trivalent Chromium finish is applied over
the zinc, producing a chemically bonded non-porous barrier for protection
from moisture and air. The .5 mil electro-plated zinc and gold Trivalent
Chromium finish provides all of the features and protection of Hexavalent
Chromium without the use of the chemical.

Tank 1

Tank 2

Tank 3

Tank 4

“Soak Degreasing”
Chemical solution
removes bulk of oil
and grease buildup.

Tank 5

Tank 6

Tank 7

Tank 8

“Electro Cleaner”

“Rinse”

“Sulfuric Acid Bath”

“Rinse”

“Zinc Tank”

“Rinse”

“Rinse”

The metal is
negatively charged
to remove minute
surface particles.

Live, clear
water rinse.

Prepares the metal
by etching the
surface for the
zinc application.

Live, clear
water rinse.

Electrically applies
the zinc metal
coating.

Chemically treated
rinse water.

Live, clear water
rinse.

Formed Hot
Rolled Steel

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Finishes

Electro-Plated
Zinc Coating
Yellow Trivalent
Conversion Coat

Tank 9

Tank 10

Tank 11

Tank 12

Metal Framing Channel Finish

“Rinse”

“Chromium Dip”

“Rinse”

“Dryer”

Live, clear
water rinse.

A yellow trivalent
conversion coat
is applied to
the zinc.

Live, clear
water rinse.

Hot air is forced
around strut
until dry.

Salt Spray Hours

Corrosion-Resistant Testing, ASTM B117
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
Industry
Enamel
Green

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Epoxy
Green

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Industry
Pre-Galvanized
G90

EGSilverGalv®

Trivalent
GoldGalv®

B-107

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Overview
Outperforms the Competition
Superstrut SilverGalv
®

NEW!

®

The Superstrut ® SilverGalv ® finish is a post-fabrication, 12-step
electrogalvanizing process that applies a clear conversion coat over .5
mils of zinc. This process provides a strong, cohesive molecular bond
that locks out moisture and superior corrosion resistance over standard
G90 pre-galvanized channel.

•	 No More White Rust — With pre-galvanized struts,
a common quality issue is the formation of white rust
on the zinc finish. With SilverGalv®, a clear conversion
coat is applied over the zinc to seal it and stop the
formation of white rust.
•	 Strong Abrasion Resistance — The SilverGalv® finish
won’t chip or peel like a green painted strut product.
It stands up to rough handling.
•	 Superior Corrosion Protection — One hallmark of the
SilverGalv® finish is the superior corrosion protection
it provides. In the ASTM B117 salt spray test, the new
SilverGalv® finish provided improved protection as
compared to painted finishes or G90 Pre-Galvanized.
This outstanding corrosion protection means more
versatile installations and more service life for
SilverGalv® finished products.
•	 Punched Holes and Cut Ends Are Protected — Unlike
a pre-galvanized finish where bare steel holes and cuts
have no corrosion protection, SilverGalv® protects every
portion of the strut. Because the SilverGalv® finish is
applied after fabrication, all punched holes and cut ends
share a consistent quality with the rest of the material —
even after cutting or fabricating. SilverGalv® will continue
to protect with it’s sacrificial zinc process.

Complete Offering of SilverGalv ® Fittings and Accessories
Mismatched strut assemblies are a thing of the past with Superstrut
SilverGalv. With a complete line of channel, hardware, fittings, hangers
and pipe straps, all components have the same electrogalvanized finish
for consistent performance and uniform aesthetics.

•	 Paintable Surface — The new SilverGalv® finish
provides a non-porous and non-crystalline surface.
Not only does this feature provide enhanced corrosion
protection, but also provides an excellent bond for the
paint of your choice.

•	 Great Electrical Conductivity — Unlike paint or enamel,
the SilverGalv® surface offers a minimum of electrical
resistance, so electrical applications are easily grounded
when grounding is needed.

600
500

Salt Spray Hours

•	 Clean Finish — SilverGalv® ensures a finished product
that leaves no residue on your hands. In the SilverGalv®
process, a zinc finish is applied after fabrication. As a
result, all of the oil and grime that accumulates during
manufacturing gets thoroughly cleaned off during the
plating process.

Metal Framing Channel Finish
Corrosion-Resistant Testing, ASTM B117

400
300
200
100
0
Industry
Enamel
Green

B-108

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Epoxy
Green

Industry
Pre-Galvanized
G90

www.tnb.com

EGSilverGalv®

Overview
GoldGalv®
The standard GoldGalv® finish is made up of a multi-step electrogalvanizing
and zinc trivalent chromium process. The trivalent chromium finish is
applied over the zinc, producing a chemically bonded non-porous barrier
for protection from moisture and air. The .5 mil electro-plated zinc and
gold trivalent chromium finish provides all of the features and protection of
hexavalent chromium without the use of the chemical.

Copper Plated (“T” inserted as the second digit
of the part number; Example: CTL-710-2)
Plain steel proceeds through a series of rinse tanks to clean the material
surface. Once cleaned, the fabricated part is etched by dipping into an
acid pickle bath to prepare the surface for adhesion. Copper is electrically
applied by submerging in a copper bath. To seal the finish, the product
continues to a sealer tank and is then dried by forced hot air.

SilverGalv® (Suffix EG)

Black (Suffix B)

Often referred to as “zinc plated” or “electroplated zinc,” the steel and
.5 mils of zinc are bonded by an electrolysis process. This is the identical
process used in the Superstrut Goldgalv ® finish without the numerous
benefits of the gold-colored trivalent chromium conversion coat
(see GoldGalv ® finish for more information). Electrogalvanizing is most
commonly applied to small fittings, hardware and threaded products.

A black finish is raw steel with only a light oil finish as supplied
by the steel manufacturer. There is no protection against red rust.

Green or White Urethane Powder Coated (Suffix GR or WH)
Urethane powder resins are applied electrostatically to the steel after
fabrication. Once the material is completely covered with the powder-form
urethane, it proceeds through a 400˚ baking process for ten minutes,
creating a chemical bond. This results in a minimum of 1.5 mil thickness
of urethane coating, providing excellent resistance to chipping or peeling.

Pregalvanized (Suffix PG)
A zinc coating is applied by hot-dipping the steel coil at the mill prior to
fabrication. Once the material is worked by roll-forming, cutting or punching,
minimal protection is provided for raw edges. This weakness is typical with
precoated material and affects the channel section around holes, extreme
ends and the edges of the “U” shape lips. Superstrut pregalvanized
material is in conformance with ASTM A-525/G-90 specification standards,
representing 0.90 ounces of zinc per square foot of steel. This finish
is often referred to as “hot-dipped mill galvanized” or “mill galvanized.”

Stainless Steel (Suffix SS)
Superstrut channel is supplied in type 304 stainless steel when
required. Type 316 stainless steel may be available upon request.

Aluminum (Suffix AL)
Superstrut channel and hardware are available in aluminum.
Warning: Load tables, charts and design criteria provided in this catalog
are intended as guides only. Selection of proper product, installation
intervals, erection and placement are the responsibility of the user.
Superstrut® products are intended to be used for the support and bracing
of fixtures, cable, pipe and conduit. Improper use or installation may result
in injury to persons or damage of property.
Material and finish specifications are subject to change without notice.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Finishes (continued)

Hot-Dipped Galvanized (Suffix HDG)
The material is zinc coated after fabrication, providing total product
protection on all surfaces. The fabricated channel or fitting is suspended
and then dipped into tanks of hot zinc for a prolonged period, creating a
coherent bond. The result is superior corrosion resistance as compared
to pre­galvanized material. Hot-dipped galvanizing is not recommended
for threaded products, because the thickness of the zinc coating will often
disrupt the threads. Superstrut hot-dipped galvanized is in conformance
with ASTM Specifications A-123 (formerly A-386) and A-153. Superstrut
channels maintain a minimum 1.5 ounces of zinc per square foot of steel
or 2.5 mils (ASTM A-123, Thickness Grade 65). This finish is also referred
to as “hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.”

PVC Coated (Suffix PVC)
A polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic coating is fused to the channel, fitting
or accessory after fabrication by immersing the part in fluidized PVC tanks.
The fused-melt mixed powder PVC coating thickness is 15 mils (.015") plus
or minus five mils. PVC material is a thermoplastic and will soften in high
temperature. An inherent weakness with PVC coatings occurs when field
alterations are applied, such as cutting or drilling. These acts disrupt the
sealed PVC product and warrant field touch-up. Thomas & Betts cannot
be held responsible for field-altered PVC coated products.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-109

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Channels
Standard Channels
Material
Channels are cold formed from hot-rolled pickled and oiled strip steel.

Material Thickness
All Series 1200	

12 gauge material

All Series 1400	

14 gauge material

Standard Lengths
Standard lengths for channel are 10 ft. and 20 ft.
Standard length tolerance ± 1⁄8".
Shorter lengths are available at a small cutting charge.
GoldGalv® hardware finish is standard for all Superstrut products.
This is a multi-process finish of electro-plated zinc, followed by gold
colored trivalent chromium to give excellent corrosion resistance
and superior paint base. See pages B-106–B-107 for a complete
description of the GoldGalv® hardware finish. GoldGalv® hardware
will be furnished if no other finish is specified.

15⁄8
7
⁄8
9

3

⁄8

9

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8

⁄32

⁄16

13

⁄32

9

1 5⁄8

9

9

1 3⁄8
12
ga

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8

⁄32

C-1200
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot
and Punched configurations.
Wt./Ft. 1.70 lbs.

3 1⁄4

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8

⁄32

9

12
ga

2 7⁄16

12
ga

⁄32

B-1200
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot,
Punched and Slotted configurations.
Wt./Ft. 1.28 lbs.

A-1200
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot, Punched,
Slotted and Knockout configurations.
Wt./Ft. 1.90 lbs.

⁄32

9

⁄32

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8
⁄16

13

A-1400
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot, Punched,
Slotted and Knockout configurations.
Wt./Ft. 1.40 lbs.

B-1400
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot, Punched
and Slotted configurations.
Wt./Ft. 0.90 lbs.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8

1 5⁄8

H-1200
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot
and Punched configurations.
Wt./Ft. 3.05 lbs.

E-1200
Channel available in Solid, Half Slot
and Punched configurations.
Wt./Ft. 2.47 lbs.

B-110

1 5⁄8
7
⁄8

www.tnb.com

Channels
®

Half-Slot Channel

All Superstrut® Channels are available in a variety of combinations —
some are shown here.
Multiple channels are spot welded on 3" centers.

2"

Cat. No.

Dim. (In.)

Ga.

Std.
Ctn.

A-1200-HS
B-1200-HS
C-1200-HS
E-1200-HS
H-1200-HS
A-1400-HS
B-1400-HS

15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 13⁄16
15⁄8 x 13⁄8
15⁄8 x 27⁄16
15⁄8 x 31⁄4
15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 13⁄16

12
12
12
12
12
14
14

*
*
500
500
*
*
500

⁄16" x 11⁄8" slots on 2" centers. 

9

2-A

2*

2-B

* S tandard lengths 10 ft. and 20 ft. for standard cartons.
Please consult your local T&B representative.

Slotted Channel
4"

3-A

2-C

3-B

Cat. No.

Dim. (In.)

Ga.

Std.
Ctn.

A-1200-S
B-1200-S
A-1400-S
B-1400-S

15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 13⁄16
15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 13⁄16

12
12
14
14

*
*
*
*

⁄16" x 3" slots on 4" centers.

7

* S tandard lengths 10 ft. and 20 ft. for standard carton.
Please consult your local T&B representative.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Hole Configurations

Superstrut Channels —
Welding Combinations

Punched Channel
1 7⁄8"
3-D

3-C

4

How to Order
10 and 20 ft. lengths — steel. Special lengths may be ordered.
Replace the 3 last digits of the regular channel catalog number
with the designation of the desired combination.

Cat. No.

Dim. (In.)

Ga.

Std.
Ctn.

A-1200-P
B-1200-P
H-1200-P
A-1400-P
B-1400-P

15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 13⁄16
15⁄8 x 13⁄16
15⁄8 x 11⁄2
15⁄8 x 13⁄16

12
12
12
14
14

500
500
500
500
500

⁄16" holes on 17⁄8" centers.

9

Available in 10 & 20 ft. lengths.

Examples:

Channel with Knockouts

Two A-1200 channels back to back are ordered as A-1202.
Two A-1200 channels back to side are ordered as A-1202-C.
Specify desired finish or material.
*“A” and “B” Series back-to-back combinations are joined using
Thomas & Betts’ steel rivet joining process. The riveted channel is offered
in standard GoldGalv®, stainless steel, painted, pre-galvanized and hot-dip
galvanized finishes.

6"

Cat. No.

Dim. (In.)

Ga.

Std.
Ctn.

A-1200-KO
A-1400-KO

15⁄8 x 15⁄8
15⁄8 x 15⁄8

12
14

*
*

KO for 1⁄2" conduit.
Please consult your local T&B representative.
Standard Finish – GoldGalv ® brand.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-111

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Threaded Products and Hardware
Trapnut Strut Fastener
®

NEW!

The unique scissor action of the Trapnut® Strut Fastener
closes at any desired position on the threaded rod. Once
closed, precision threads trap the threaded rod for a sturdy hold that
can be adjusted up or down for fine-tune positioning. While the versatile
Trapnut has a locking pin that holds it in the desired position, it can also
be removed and reused.
Unlike a hex nut, there is no need to
thread the Trapnut® from either end
of the rod, saving valuable time on the
job. While the Trapnut® Strut Fastener
is a time-saver for new construction, it
is invaluable for retro-fit applications.
Rather than disassembling an existing
trapeze to run additional conduit above
it, the Trapnut® fastener can be clamped
between the existing trapeze and the
beam clamp for a speedy retro-fit
solution. It’s ideal for applications
where the rod ends are not accessible.
Standard method using nuts
and washers.

The Trapnut® fastener has a sturdy steel
construction that is load bearing, so you
can be confident of a solid installation.
And, the Trapnut® fastener functions as
a hex nut, square washer and flat washer
combined, so there are fewer parts to
keep up with on the job.

Easy to Install

1

Hold in the open position.
•	 No need to thread the Trapnut® fastener
from either end of the rod — saving
valuable time
•	 Perfect for retro-fit applications where
the rod ends are not accessible

New method using Trapnut
Strut Fastener.

®

2

CAT. NO. H 122 3/8 EG
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener SilverGalv ®

CAT. NO. H 122 3/8
Trapnut ® Strut
Fastener GoldGalv®

Insert the bottom plate on the rod and
close the top plate.
•	 Precision threads trap the threaded rod
for a sturdy hold that can be adjusted up
or down for fine-tune positioning
•	 Functions as a hex nut, square washer
and flat washer combined

Cat. No.

Description

H 122 1/4
H 122 3/8
H 122 1/2
H 122 1/4 EG
H 122 3/8 EG
H 122 1/2 EG
H 122 1/4 SS6
H 122 3/8 SS6
H 122 1/2 SS6

1

⁄4" GoldGalv®
3
⁄8" GoldGalv®
1
⁄2" GoldGalv®
1
⁄4" SilverGalv®
3
⁄8" SilverGalv®
1
⁄2" SilverGalv®
1
⁄4" Type 316 Stainless Steel
3
⁄8" Type 316 Stainless Steel
1
⁄2" Type 316 Stainless Steel

Size (In.)

⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1

Design Std.
Load Lbs. Ctn.

150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080
150
590
1,080

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

3

Press the pin with pliers.
•	 Locking pin holds it in the desired position
•	 Can be removed and reused

4

Tighten to the desired position
with pliers.
•	 Can be adjusted up or down for fine-tuned
positioning
•	 Sturdy steel construction that is load
bearing
•	 Sized to provide custom fit for either
15⁄8" or 11⁄2" strut systems

B-112

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Threaded Products and Hardware
Handle Retrofit Trapeze
Applications with Ease!

Easily installs above
existing trapeze.

Trap-Eze Connector
™

The innovative Trap-Eze™ Connector changes a time-consuming retrofit
trapeze application into a streamlined process. Using a Trapnut® Strut
Fastener, the new Trap-Eze™ Connector can be easily installed above or
to the side of an existing assembly, eliminating the need to disassemble
and reassemble the trapeze. It is designed for use with shorter strut
lengths that can vary in length by as much as an inch, so the strut
can be rough cut versus labor-intense precision cuts.
•	 Easily installs above or to the side of an existing
assembly, eliminating the need to disassemble
and reassemble the trapeze

Can be used to extend
existing trapeze.

•	 Connectors can be reused upon disassembly of a trapeze

Designed for use with
the innovative Trapnut ®
Strut Fastener.

•	 Designed for either 3⁄8" and 1⁄2" threaded rod
•	 Designed for use with the innovative Trapnut® Strut Fastener,
which can take up to 43% less time than standard nuts
and washers on retrofit trapeze applications
•	 View window provides safety zone for strut length

cat. no.

Description

std. Ctn.

For Superstrut or other 1 ⁄8" Strut
AB221
Trap-Eze™ End Connector GoldGalv®
AB222
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector GoldGalv®
AB221EG
Trap-Eze™ End Connector SilverGalv®
AB222EG
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector SilverGalv®
For 11⁄2" Kindorf Channels
B998
Trap-Eze™ End Connector Galv-Krom®
B999
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector Galv-Krom®
B998EG
Trap-Eze™ End Connector SilverGalv®
B999EG
Trap-Eze™ Mid Connector SilverGalv®
®

View window provides strut
length safety zone for rough
cuts versus precision cuts.

5

20
10
20
10
Unique safety slot maintains
bracket position on threaded rod
and prevents disengagement
of the trapeze system.

20
10
20
10

Square Washer

Located Square Washer

Cat. No.
AB-241-1/4
AB-241-5/16
AB-241-3/8
AB-241-1/2
AB-241-5/8
AB-241-3/4

bolt
Size (In.)

std.
Ctn.

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4

100
100
100
100
100
50

1

5

AB-241

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Cat. No.
AB-241L-1/4
AB-241L-5/16
AB-241L-3/8
AB-241L-1/2
AB-241L-5/8

bolt
Size (In.)

std.
Ctn.

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8

100
100
100
100
100

1

5

AB-241L

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-113

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Threaded Products and Hardware

B-114

Channel Nuts
UC-100 Universal Cone Nut

Superstrut® channel nuts are manufactured from mild steel
and are case hardened.

Design Data
Superstrut® self-aligning channel nuts are designed to provide resistance
to pull out and resistance to side slip in excess of the full strength of the
channels with which they are used. The extreme resistance to side slip
results from the unique design of the alternate teeth, spaced and designed
to develop a wedging action that increases with pressure or load.

Load Ratings for 1⁄4", 3⁄8" and 1⁄2" Strut Nuts used in Superstrut®
Channel Nut
Sizes (In.)

Slip Test
Rating

Pull Test Rating

⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2

300
750
1,200

500
1,000
2,000

1

3

If connections will be subjected to dynamic or seismic loading conditions,
contact the factory for design assistance.
1. All ratings have safety factor of 3 applied.

Eliminates the inventory and installation hassles of conventional spring nuts.
Fits all 15⁄8" channel, regardless of depth, with a simple twist of your thumb.
Pliable nylon cone secures the nut in place through the entire range of
construction site temperatures.

Screw Threads
Thread Size (In.)
Threads per inch
Design Torque (ft.–lbs.)

⁄4
20
6
1

⁄8
16
19
3

⁄2
13
50
1

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.

All threaded products are American Standard thread, free fit class 2.
GoldGalv® hardware finish is standard for all Superstrut® products.
This is a multi-process finish of electro-plated zinc, followed by goldcolored trivalent chromium to give excellent corrosion resistance and a
superior paint base. See pages B-106–B-107 for a complete description
of the GoldGalv® hardware finish.
Note: Standard Spring and Springless Nuts are supplied with a silver electro-galvanized (EG)
finish. These items are not visible in a gold system and are universal with other systems’
finishes and colorations.

2. Load ratings are for Static Applications.

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Threaded Products and Hardware
E-145 Standard Hex Nut

E-151-D Wood Screw Drive

Sizes: ⁄4", ⁄8", ⁄2", ⁄8", ⁄4",
7
⁄8" & 1"

Size A: 1⁄4"

1

Sizes: 1⁄4", 5⁄16", 3⁄8", 1⁄2",
5
⁄8", 3⁄4" & 7⁄8"

3

1

5

3

Size B: 2"

GoldGalv® Finish.

Nut is square over 1⁄2" size.

Max. Rec. Load: 100 lbs.

For all “A” and “C” series
channel and inserts.

AB-100
Springless Nut

E-146 Standard Square Nut
Sizes: ⁄4", ⁄16", ⁄8", ⁄2" & ⁄8"

ES-142 Seismic
Stiffener Nut

GoldGalv® Finish.

Size: ES-142-1⁄2 x 11⁄2"

1

Sizes: 1⁄4", 5⁄16", 3⁄8", 1⁄2",
5
⁄8" & 3⁄4"

5

3

1

5

Bolt Dia.: 1⁄2"

Nut is square over 1⁄2" size.
For use with all channels.
Silver Electroplated Finish.

AC-100
Springless Nut

E-147 Flat Steel Washer

Sizes: 1⁄4", 3⁄8", 1⁄2", 5⁄8" & 3⁄4"

Sizes: ⁄4", ⁄16", ⁄8", ⁄2",
5
⁄8", 3⁄4" & 7⁄8"

ES-145 Swivel Nut
and Jam Nut
Combinations

Nut is square over 1⁄2" size.

GoldGalv® Finish.

Sizes: 3⁄8" & 1⁄2"

1

5

3

1

GoldGalv® Finish.

For all “A”, “C”, “E” and “H” series
channel and inserts.

B-100 Short
Spring Nut
5

3

Sizes: ⁄4", ⁄8", ⁄2" & ⁄8"
GoldGalv® Finish.

Sizes: 3⁄8", 1⁄2" & 5⁄8"

1

Sizes: ⁄4", ⁄16", ⁄8" & ⁄2"
1

H-100 Long
Spring Nut

E-148 Lock Washer
1

3

1

5

A
B

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

A-100 Regular
Spring Nut

Nut is square over 1⁄2" size.

Nut is square over 1⁄2" size.
For all “B” series channel
and inserts.

For all “E” and “H” series
channel and inserts.

CM-100 Nylon
Cone Nut
Sizes: 1⁄4", 3⁄8" & *1⁄2"
For all 15⁄8" channel.
*Will not fit “B” series channel.

E-149 Slotted Hex
Indented Head
Machine Screw

UC-100 Universal
Nylon Cone Nut

Sizes: 1⁄4" x 3⁄4", 1⁄4" x 1",
5
⁄16" x 11⁄4" & 3⁄8" x 11⁄4"

For all 15⁄8" & 11⁄2" channels.
May be used with ALL strut
depths. Can be used for CM-100,
A-100, B-100 & AB-100 Series.

GoldGalv® Finish

E-142 Hex Head
Cap Screw

E-150-S
Lag Bolt Screw

Sizes: 1⁄4" x 1", 1⁄4" x 11⁄2",
3
⁄8" x 1", 3⁄8" x 11⁄2", 1⁄2" x 15⁄16"
& 1⁄2" x 11⁄2"

Size: 3⁄8" & 1⁄2"

Sizes: 1⁄4", 3⁄8" & 1⁄2"

GoldGalv® Finish.

Drill Size: 1⁄4" & 111⁄32"

See price sheet for additional sizes.

www.tnb.com

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-115

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Threaded Products and Hardware
Regular Spring Stud Nut

Fender Washer

EF-147

Cat. No.

size (In.)

dia. (In.)

⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2

11⁄4
11⁄2
2

EF147 1/4
EF-147-3/8
EF-147-1/2

1

hole Std. (In.)

std. Ctn.

⁄16
7
⁄16
9
⁄16

100
100
100

5

 A-182 to A-185

Cat. No.

Springless Stud Nut

A

A-177 to A-180

Cat. No.

Bolt dia.
(In.)

length a
(In.)

std.
Ctn.

⁄4
⁄4
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

1
11⁄4
1
11⁄4
1
11⁄4

50
250
250
50
250
250

A177 1/4 1
A-177-1/4 x 1-1/4
A-179-3/8 x 1
A-179-3/8 x 1-1/4
A-180-1/2 x 1*
A-180-1/2 x 1-1/4*

1
1

A182 1/4 1
A-182-1/4 x 1-1/4
A-184-3/8 x 1
A-184-3/8 x 1-1/4
A-185-1/2 x 1
A-185-1/2 x 1-1/4

Bolt dia. (In.)

length a (In.)

std. Ctn.

⁄4
1
⁄4
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2

1
11⁄4
1
11⁄4
1
11⁄4

250
250
50
50
50
50

1

For all “A” and “C” series channels.

* Cannot be used with “B” Series channel.

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.

Swivel Eye

Swivel Joint
B

B
A

Cat. No.

a
(In.)

E120 3/8
E120 1/2

13⁄8
11⁄2

b
(In.)

design
Load lbs.

std.
Ctn.

⁄8
⁄2

1,000
1,800

25
25

3
1

A
A

Cat. No.

a
(In.)

E122 3/8
E-122-1/2

13⁄8
11⁄2

b
(In.)

design
Load lbs.

std.
Ctn.

⁄8
⁄2

1,000
1,800

25
10

3
1

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.
E-120

E-122

Swivel Eye with Stud
B
A

Swivel Joint with Stud

Cat. No.

a
(In.)

E130 3/8
E-130-1/2

13⁄8
11⁄2

b
(In.)

design
Load lbs.

std.
Ctn.

⁄8
⁄2

1,000
1,800

25
25

3
1

E-130

B-116

B
A
A
E-131

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

Cat. No.

a
(In.)

E131 3/8
E-131-1/2

13⁄8
11⁄2

b
(In.)

design
Load lbs.

std.
Ctn.

⁄8
⁄2

1,000
1,800

25
10

3
1

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.

www.tnb.com

Threaded Products and Hardware
H104 Hanger Rod,
Continuous Thread —
GoldGalv®

H-104 Series Rod

Cat. No.

•	 Black available upon request

H104 1/4X6
H104 1/4X10
H104 1/4X12
H104 3/8X6
H104 3/8X10
H104 3/8X12
H104 1/2X6
H104 1/2X10
H104 1/2X12
H104 5/8X6
H104 5/8X10
H104 5/8X12

•	 Machine-threaded opposite end, carbon steel
•	 Order by Cat. No., rod size and rod length

Cat. No.

rod Size (In.)

standard
Rod Lengths

std. Ctn.

⁄8
⁄2

4, 6, 8, 10, 12
4, 6, 8, 10

100
100

E-151-3/8
E-151-1/2

3
1

H104-EG Hanger Rod,
Continuous Thread — SilverGalv®

Wt./lbs.
per 100 pcs.

Size

73
124
148
172
293
348
313
530
648
510
850
1,020

⁄4"–20

1

⁄8"–16

3

⁄2"–13

1

⁄8"–11

5

Suffix indicates rod size and length.

Standard Rod
Coupling

Reducing Rod
Coupling
A

Cat. No.

Size

H104 1/4X6-EG
H104 1/4X10-EG
H104 1/4X12-EG
H104 3/8X6-EG
H104 3/8X10-EG
H104 3/8X12-EG
H104 1/2X6-EG
H104 1/2X10-EG
H104 1/2X12-EG
H104 5/8X6-EG
H104 5/8X10-EG
H104 5/8X12-EG

⁄4"–20

1

⁄8"–16

3

⁄2"–13

1

⁄8"–11

5

Wt./lbs.
per 100 pcs.

A

73
124
148
172
293
348
313
530
648
510
850
1,020

rod Size a
(In.)
(In.)

Cat. No.
H119-1/4
H119-5/16
H119-3/8
H119-1/2
H119-5/8
H119-3/4
H119-7/8
H119-1

⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
1

5

⁄8
⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
21⁄8
21⁄4
21⁄2
21⁄4
7

7

std.
Ctn.

50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

rod Size a
(In.)
(In.)

Cat. No.
H119-1/4x3/8
H119-3/8x1/2
H119-1/2x5/8
H119-5/8x3/4
H119-3/4x7/8

⁄4–3⁄8
⁄8–1⁄2
1
⁄2–5⁄8
5
⁄8–3⁄4
3
⁄4–7⁄8

11⁄2
11⁄4
11⁄4
11⁄2
13⁄4

1
3

std.
Ctn.

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

E-151 — Coach Screw Rod

50
50
50
50
50

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®,
unless otherwise stated.

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®,
unless otherwise stated.

Suffix indicates rod size and length.

U-571, U-572 Conduit Clamp
Cat. No.

Conduit Size (In.)

U-571
U-571
U-571
U-572
U-572
U-572
U-572

A

Max. Flange Thickness (In.) Dim. A (In.)

⁄2
3
⁄4
1
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2

1
3
⁄4
1
⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄4
1
5
⁄8

1

13⁄4
13⁄4
13⁄4
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2

Std. Ctn.

25
25
25
25
25
25
25

Standard Finish – GoldGalv® brand.
For attaching 1⁄2" thru 11⁄2" conduit to beam, channel, angle or column.
Secures conduit to the support parallel or at right angles to it.
U-571, U-572

www.tnb.com

⁄16" set screw, 12 ga. material.

5

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-117

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Fittings and Brackets
Fittings and Brackets — Series 200
Material

Design Data

Superstrut® fittings and brackets are manufactured
from hot rolled carbon steel.

Ratings vary when used with 12 or 14 gauge channel
and are shown for each channel material.

Dimensions
The following standard dimensions apply to all fittings
except as indicated on the individual drawings.
•	 Hole spacing: 13⁄16" from end of fittings
•	 Hole spacing: 17⁄8" centers

GoldGalv® hardware finish is standard for all Superstrut®
products. This is a multi-process finish of electro-plated
zinc, followed by gold-colored trivalent chromium to give
excellent corrosion resistance and a superior paint base.
See pages B-106–B-107 for complete description of
the GoldGalv® hardware finish. GoldGalv® hardware will
be furnished if no other finish is specified.

Nuts and Bolts Required

•	 Hole size: 9⁄16" diameter

Unless otherwise noted, nuts and bolts for use with
fittings and brackets should be ordered separately.

•	 Material: 15⁄8" wide

The standard bolt for the 9⁄16" hole is a 1⁄2" hex head
cap screw 15⁄16" long. The 15⁄16" length may be used
with all series channel.

•	 Material: 1⁄4" thickness

Application Instructions
Parts drawings illustrate a typical use for the fitting,
and in many cases other uses for the part are
appropriate.

Standard Finish – GoldGalv®, unless otherwise stated.

15⁄8"
3 1⁄ 2"

⁄ 16"

13

2 ⁄ 4"

1 7⁄ 8"

1

17⁄ 8"
2 1⁄4"
2"

4 1⁄ 8"
1 7⁄16"

4 1⁄ 8"

3 1⁄ 2"
CAT. NO. AB201

CAT. NO. AB203

CAT. NO. AB202

3 1⁄ 2"

3 1⁄ 2"

41⁄ 8"

4 1⁄ 8"

5 3⁄ 8"

3 1⁄2"

...........................Standard Dimensions.........................

3 1⁄2"

•	 Hole Spacing: 13⁄16" From End
•	 Hole Spacing: 17⁄8" Centers
•	 Hole Size	: 9⁄16" Diameter

3 ⁄ 8"
7"

B-118

CAT. NO. AB216

5 3⁄8"

5

CAT. NO. AB219

CAT. NO. AB214

CAT. NO. AB213

CAT. NO. AB207

4 1⁄ 8"

31⁄ 2"

3 1⁄ 2"

CAT. NO. AB206

3 1⁄ 2"

17⁄ 16"

17⁄ 16"

3 1⁄2"

CAT. NO. AB205

CAT. NO. AB204

CAT. NO. AB220

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

CAT. NO. AB240

•	 Material: 15⁄8" Width
•	 Material: 1⁄4" Thick

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.
Add EG suffix for SilverGalv ® Finish

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

www.tnb.com

Fittings and Brackets
4 1⁄ 8"

5 3⁄8"

1 ⁄ 8"
7

4 1⁄ 8"
17⁄ 16"

5 3⁄8"
A

CAT. NO. AB-242
For use with either 3⁄8"
or 1⁄2" hanger rod

CAT. NO. AB252

Cat. No.

A (IN.)

std. Ctn.

AB252 1
AB252 2
AB252 3
AB252 4

3 7⁄8
5 7⁄8
7 7⁄8
9 7⁄8

10
10
10
10

3 1⁄ 2"

3 1 ⁄ 2"

CAT. NO. AB254 L

CAT. NO. AB253

17⁄ 8"

17⁄ 8"
5 3⁄8"

3 1⁄ 2"

3 1⁄ 2"
2"
3 1⁄2"

CAT. NO. AB254 R

2"

3 ⁄2"
1

5 3⁄8"

5 3⁄8"

3 1⁄2"

CAT. NO. AB257

CAT. NO. AB255

5 3⁄ 8"

5 3⁄ 8"

3 1⁄2"

3 1⁄2"

2"
2 1⁄4"

4 1⁄ 8"

4 1⁄ 8"

5 3⁄8"

2"

15⁄8"

5 3⁄8"

5 3⁄ 8"

5 3⁄8"
CAT. NO. AB263

CAT. NO. AB261

CAT. NO. AB260 R

CAT. NO. AB260 L

CAT. NO. AB265

CAT. NO. AB274

3 1⁄ 2"

3 1⁄ 2"

CAT. NO. AB284 L

CAT. NO. AB284 R

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

1 7⁄ 16"

CAT. NO. AB299

3 3⁄ 4"
3 ⁄8"
7

4 7⁄ 8"

17⁄ 8"
11⁄ 2”

2 1⁄ 2"

1"

3 1⁄ 2"

3 3⁄4"

2 1⁄ 2"

11⁄16"

6 3⁄ 8"

7 1⁄4"

4"

5 3⁄ 8"
CAT. NO. N205

CAT. NO. X201

CAT. NO. N-219

13⁄ 8"

3 1⁄ 2"

2 5⁄ 8"

CAT. NO. X204
Slot size is 9⁄16" x 11⁄2"

CAT. NO. X207

15⁄ 8"

...........................Standard Dimensions.............................

9 1⁄8"
4 1⁄ 8"
11⁄ 2"
15⁄ 16"

CAT. NO. X208

17⁄ 8"

CAT. NO. X289

www.tnb.com

CAT. NO. X299

United States
Tel: 901.252.8000
800.816.7809
Fax: 901.252.1354

•	 Hole Spacing: 13⁄16" From End
•	 Hole Spacing: 17⁄8" Centers
•	 Hole Size	: 9⁄16" Diameter

•	 Material: 15⁄8" Width
•	 Material: 1⁄4" Thick

Standard Finish – GoldGalv ®, unless otherwise stated.
Add EG suffix for SilverGalv ® Finish

Technical Services
Tel: 888.862.3289

B-119

Metal Framing & Cable Tray — Superstrut® Metal Framing System

Fittings and Brackets
Z Shape Fittings
15⁄ 8"

13

13⁄ 8"
11⁄ 16"

⁄ 16"

1 ⁄16"
1

11⁄ 16"

2 1⁄ 8"

2 1⁄ 8"

2 1⁄ 8"

CAT. NO. A209
For attaching “A” series channel.

CAT. NO. B209
For attaching “B” series channel.

CAT. NO. C209